JP2018057797A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine enabling a player to recognize positions of game balls received by a reception part.SOLUTION: A lower displacement member 11440 is formed from a light transmissive material at a front side, and is formed while including a transmission part 11451a formed so as to have an external form larger than a displacement area of a ball reception part 467c in front view. A light emitting body 11491a, which is arranged at a rear side of the ball reception part 467c and emits light to a player side, is arranged at height overlapping with the ball reception part 467c in a longitudinal direction. Accordingly, by blocking off the light emitted from the light emitting body 11491a by game balls arranged in the ball reception part 467c, a shadow blocked off by the game balls can be displayed in the transmission part 11451a. As a result, the player is allowed to recognize positions of the game balls received by the reception part (ball reception part 467c).SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 153

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, provided with a decorative member that is decorated on the front surface, a receiving portion that is disposed in a displaceable manner on the back surface of the decorative member, and can receive and hold a game ball A gaming machine that produces an effect of moving a game ball in accordance with the movement of a receiving unit is known (Patent Document 1).

JP 2010-166997 A

  However, the above-described gaming machine has a problem that the position of the gaming ball received (held) by the receiving unit cannot be known.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and provides a gaming machine that allows a player to recognize the position of a game ball received (held) by a receiving unit. With the goal.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is provided with a decorative member formed of a light-transmitting material capable of transmitting light on the back side when viewed from the front, and on the back side of the decorative member. A receiving portion that is disposed in a displaceable manner on a plane parallel to the front surface and that can receive and hold a game ball, and is disposed on the back side of the decorative member, and the displacement of the receiving portion A light emitting means capable of emitting light toward the region, wherein the light emitting means is disposed on the back side of the receiving portion or between the decorative member and the receiving portion, and is disposed on the receiving portion or the receiving portion. The light emitted from the light emitting means is blocked or reflected by the received game ball, and the amount of light emitted from the decorative member is partially varied.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the receiving portion is formed below the center of the game ball held in the receiving portion in the gravity direction, and the light emitting means A light emitting portion is arranged at substantially the same height as the center of the game ball held in the receiving portion, and the light transmitting portion of the decorative member is formed at a position higher than the light emitting portion of the light emitting means. .

  A gaming machine according to a third aspect is the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect, wherein the receiving portion is formed of a light transmissive material.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the player can recognize the position of the game ball received (held) by the receiving unit.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine of the first aspect, the light and darkness of the light can be easily formed on the front side of the transmission part by the game ball.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect, the player can be watched only when the game ball is held in the receiving unit.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a pachinko machine. It is a disassembled perspective front view of an operation unit and a game board. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a game board. (A) is a front view of a general winning opening unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the general winning opening unit along line XIIb-XIIb in FIG. 12 (a). It is sectional drawing of the game board in the XIII-XIII line | wire of FIG. It is a partial expanded sectional view of the game board in the range XIV of FIG. It is a rear view of a general winning opening unit. It is a partial expanded sectional view of the game board in the range XIV of FIG. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a center frame. (A) is a front view of the first unit, (b) is a side view of the first unit, and (c) is a rear view of the first unit. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a 1st unit. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a 1st unit. It is sectional drawing of the 1st unit in the XXI-XXI line | wire of FIG.18 (b). It is a schematic cross section of the 1st unit shown in FIG. It is sectional drawing of the 1st unit in the XXIII-XXIII line | wire of FIG.18 (b). (A) is sectional drawing of the 1st unit in the XXIVa-XXIVa line of FIG. 21, (b) is sectional drawing of the 1st unit in the XXIVb-XXIVb line of FIG. 21, (c) is a figure. It is sectional drawing of the 1st unit in the XXIVc-XXIVc line of 21. (A) is the elements on larger scale of the 1st unit in the range XXVa of FIG. 21, (b) is sectional drawing of the 1st unit in the XXIVb-XXIVb line | wire of FIG. 25 (a). (A) is the elements on larger scale of the 1st unit in the range XXVa of FIG. 21, (b) is sectional drawing of the 1st unit in the XXIVb-XXIVb line | wire of Fig.26 (a). (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit along the line XXVIIa-XXVIIa of FIG. 25 (a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit along the line XXVIIb-XXVIIb of FIG. 25 (a). FIG. 26C is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along line XXVIIc-XXVIIc in FIG. (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit along the line XXVb-XXVb of FIG. 25 (a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit along the line XXVIIIb-XXVIIIb of FIG. 25 (a). is there. (A) is a front view of a 2nd unit, (b) is a rear view of a 2nd unit. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a 2nd unit. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a 2nd unit. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd unit in the XXXII-XXXII line | wire of FIG. (A) is a front view of a center frame, (b) is a side view of a center frame. (A) is a perspective front view of a center frame, (b) is a perspective rear view of a center frame. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a center frame. It is sectional drawing of the center frame in the XXXVI-XXXVI line of FIG. (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the game board, (b) is a schematic exploded cross-sectional view of the game board. (A) is a front view of a back case, (b) is a rear view of a back case. (A) is an exploded perspective front view of a back case, (b) is an exploded perspective rear view of a back case. (A) is a front view of a back case, (b) is a rear view of a back case. (A) is a front view of a back case, (b) is a rear view of a back case. (A) is a perspective rear view of a back case and a board | substrate box, (b) is a rear view of a back case and a board | substrate box. It is a front view of a lower displacement unit. It is a rear view of a lower displacement unit. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a lower displacement unit. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a lower displacement unit. It is a front view of the lower displacement unit in a retracted state. It is a front view of the lower displacement unit in the 1st overhanging state. It is a front view of the lower displacement unit in the 2nd overhanging state. It is a rear view of the lower displacement unit in the retracted state. It is a rear view of the lower displacement unit in the 1st overhanging state. It is a rear view of the lower displacement unit in the 2nd overhanging state. (A) is a back view of the first link member and the cam member in the retracted state, (b) in the first extended state, and (c) in the second extended state. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the lower displacement unit along the LIVa-LIVa line of FIG. 50, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit along the LIVb-LIVb line of FIG. (A) is sectional drawing of the lower displacement unit in the LVa-LVa line of FIG. 50, (b) is sectional drawing of the lower displacement unit in the LVb-LVb line of FIG. 51, (c) is a figure. It is sectional drawing of the lower displacement unit in the LVc-LVc line | wire of 52. (A) is sectional drawing of the lower displacement unit in the LVIa-LVIa line | wire of FIG. 52, (b) is a front view of the 1st link member and cam member of the lower displacement unit in a 2nd overhang | projection state. (A) is a front view of a lower displacement member, (b) is a rear view of a lower displacement member. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a lower displacement member. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a lower displacement member. (A) And (b) is a front view of a lower displacement member. It is a front view of the lower displacement member in the 1st position. It is a front view of the lower displacement member in the 2nd position. It is a front view of the lower displacement member in the 3rd position. (A)-(c) is the elements on larger scale of a lower displacement member. (A) to (c) is a front view of the lower displacement member. (A) to (c) is a front view of the lower displacement member. (A) to (c) is a front view of the lower displacement member. (A) to (c) is a front view of the lower displacement member. (A) is the elements on larger scale of the lower displacement member in the range LXIXa of FIG.68 (b), (b) is the elements on larger scale of the lower displacement member in the range LXIXb of FIG.68 (a). (A) is a top view of a distribution unit, (b) is a rear view of a distribution unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a distribution unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a distribution unit. It is sectional drawing of the distribution unit in the LXXIII-LXXIII line | wire of Fig.70 (a). (A) And (b) is the elements on larger scale of the distribution unit in the range LXXIV of FIG. (A) And (b) is the elements on larger scale of a distribution unit. (A) And (b) is the elements on larger scale of a distribution unit. (A) And (b) is the elements on larger scale of a distribution unit. (A) And (b) is the elements on larger scale of a distribution unit. It is a front view of a distribution unit and a lower displacement unit. It is a top view of a distribution unit and a lower displacement unit. It is a front view of a lower displacement unit. It is sectional drawing of a distribution unit. It is a front view of a lower displacement unit. It is sectional drawing of a distribution unit. It is a front view of a lower displacement unit. It is sectional drawing of a distribution unit. It is a front view of a rotation unit. It is a rear view of a rotation unit. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a rotation unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a rotation unit. It is a front view of a decoration unit. (A) is a side view of the decoration unit in the direction of arrow XCIIa in FIG. 91, and (b) is a side view of the decoration unit in the direction of arrow XCIIb in FIG. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a decoration unit. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a decoration unit. 89 is a rotation unit as viewed in the direction of the arrow XCVa in FIG. 89, and (b) is a rotation unit along the arrow XCVb in FIG. 89 is a rotation unit as viewed in the direction of the arrow XCVa in FIG. 89, and (b) is a rotation unit along the arrow XCVb in FIG. (A) is a closed state, (b) is an intermediate state, (c) is a side view of a decorative unit and a right transmission member in an open state, respectively. (A) is an open state, (b) is an intermediate state, (c) is a side view of a decorative unit and a right transmission member in a closed state, respectively. (A) is a side view of the decoration unit in a closed state, (b) is a side view of the decoration unit in an open state. (A) is a front view of a rotating body, (b) is a side view of the rotating body in the direction of arrow Cb in FIG. 100 (a), and (c) is an arrow Cc in FIG. 100 (a). It is a side view of the rotary body in the direction view. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a rotary body. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a rotary body. (A) is a side view of the rotator when the opening and closing member is closed, and (b) is a side view of the rotator when the opening and closing member is open. (A) And (b) is a side view of a decoration unit. It is a front view of a lower displacement unit and a rotation unit. FIG. 106 is a top view of the lower displacement unit as viewed in the direction of arrow CVI in FIG. 105. It is a front view of a lower displacement unit and a rotation unit. (A) is a top view of the ball holder, (b) is a front view of the ball holder, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the ball holder along the line CVIIIc-CVIIIc of FIG. 108 (a). It is. It is a disassembled perspective view of a ball stand. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of a ball stand. (A) And (b) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the rotation unit in the CXI-CXI line of FIG. It is a front view of an upper displacement unit. It is a disassembled perspective front view of an upper displacement unit. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of an upper displacement unit. It is a front view of the upper displacement unit in the state where the upper displacement member is disposed at the retracted position. It is a front view of the upper displacement unit in a state where the upper displacement member is disposed at an intermediate position. It is a front view of the upper displacement unit in the state where the upper displacement member is arranged at the overhang position. (A) is a front view of a variable part, (b) is a rear view of a variable part. It is a disassembled perspective front view of the lower displacement member in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of a lower displacement member. It is a front view of the lower displacement member in the 3rd position. (A) is a front view of the lower displacement member in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is a rear view of a lower displacement member. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a lower displacement member. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a lower displacement member. (A) And (b) is a front view of a lower displacement member. (A) is a front view of the lower displacement member in a 1st position, (b) is a front view of the lower displacement member in a 2nd position. (A) is a front view of the lower displacement member in a 3rd position, (b) is a front view of the lower displacement member in a 2nd position. It is a front view of the lower displacement unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a front view of a lower displacement unit. It is a front view of a lower displacement unit. (A) is a top view of the distribution unit in 5th Embodiment, (b) is a rear view of a distribution unit. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a distribution unit. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a distribution unit. It is sectional drawing of the distribution unit in the CXXXIV-CXXXIV line | wire of Fig.131 (a). (A) And (b) is the elements on larger scale of the distribution unit in the range CXXXV of FIG. It is a front view of the rotation unit in a 6th embodiment. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a rotation unit. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a distribution unit. (A) to (c) is a side view of the decoration unit as viewed in the direction of arrow CXXXIX in FIG. 138. (A) to (c) is a side view of the decoration unit as viewed in the direction of arrow CXXXIX in FIG. 138. It is a side surface schematic diagram of the displacement unit in 7th Embodiment. It is a side surface schematic diagram of a displacement unit. It is a side surface schematic diagram of a displacement unit in case a game ball is held by a displacement member. It is a side surface schematic diagram of a displacement unit in case a game ball is held by a displacement member. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in an 8th embodiment. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a rotation operation unit. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the pachinko machine in the CXLVII-CXLVII line of FIG. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective front view of the 1st link member in a 9th embodiment, and (b) is a section schematic diagram of a lower displacement unit. It is sectional drawing of the game board in 10th Embodiment. It is a disassembled perspective front view of the lower displacement member in 11th Embodiment. (A) And (b) is a front view of a lower displacement member. (A) is a front view of a lower displacement member, (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member taken along line CLIIIb-CLIIIb in FIG. 153 (a), and (c) is a diagram in FIG. 153 (a). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the lower displacement member in the CLIIIc-CLIIIc line. (A) is a disassembled perspective front view of the ball receiving part in 12th Embodiment, (b) is a front view of a ball receiving part. (A) And (b) is a front view of a lower displacement member, (c) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the lower displacement member in the CLVc-CLVc line | wire of FIG.155 (b). (A) is a front view of the special winning device in the thirteenth embodiment, (b) is a perspective front view of the special winning device, and (c) is a CLVIc-CLVIc line in FIG. 156 (a). It is sectional drawing of a special prize-winning apparatus. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a special winning device. (A) is a top view of the special prize-winning device, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the special prize-winning device along the line CLVIIIb-CLVIIIb in FIG. 158 (a). (A) is a rear view of the back case in 14th Embodiment, (b) is a schematic cross section of the back case in the CLIXb-CLIXb line | wire of Fig.159 (a). (A) is a schematic cross section of the back case in 15th Embodiment, (b) is a schematic cross section of the back case in 16th Embodiment. (A) is a rear view of the back case in 17th Embodiment, (b) is sectional drawing of the back case in the CLXIb-CLXIb line | wire of Fig.161 (a). (A) is a front view of the back case in 18th Embodiment, (b) is a back view of a back case. (A) is a front view of a back case, (b) is a rear view of a back case. (A) is a schematic top view of a game board, (b) is a schematic top view of the pachinko machine 10. It is a disassembled perspective front view of the engaging member in 19th Embodiment. (A) is a front view of a back case, (b) is sectional drawing of the one way in the CLXVIb-CLXVIb line | wire of FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view of the back case and rotation unit in 20th Embodiment. (A) is a front view of an engaging member, (b) is a rear view of a rotation unit and an engaging member. (A) is a rear view of a rotation unit and an engaging member, and (b) is a rear view of the back case 20300. FIG. 170 is an exploded perspective view of the rear case and the rotation unit in the twenty-first embodiment. (A) is a rear view of a rotation unit and an engaging member, (b) is a schematic cross section of the rotation unit in the CLXXIB-CLXXIb line of FIG. 171 (a). (A) is a rear view of a rotation unit and an engaging member, (b) is a schematic cross section of a back case and a rotation unit. (A) is a rear view of a rotation unit and an engaging member, (b) is a schematic cross section of a back case and a rotation unit. It is a perspective front view of an engaging member and a fixing member. (A) And (b) is a front view of a back case. (A) is a schematic cross section of the back case taken along the line CLXXVIa-CLXXVIa of FIG. 175 (b). It is a front view of the back case in 24th Embodiment, FIG. 177 (b) is sectional drawing of the back case in the CLXXVIIb-CLXXVIIb line | wire of FIG. 177 (a). FIG. 187 is a cross-sectional view of the back case taken along the line CLXXVIII-CLXXVIII in FIG. 177 (b). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the game board in 25th Embodiment. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the game board in 26th Embodiment. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the game board in 27th Embodiment. (A) is sectional drawing of the game board in 28th Embodiment, (b) is sectional drawing of the game board in 29th Embodiment. (A) is sectional drawing of the general winning opening unit in 30th Embodiment, (b) is sectional drawing of the general winning opening unit in 31st Embodiment. It is a disassembled perspective front view of the special prize apparatus in 32nd Embodiment. (A) is a front view of the special prize apparatus, (b) is a top view of the special prize apparatus, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the special prize apparatus along the line CLXXXVc-CLXXXVc in FIG. 185 (a). It is. (A) is sectional drawing of a special winning apparatus, (b) is sectional drawing of the special winning apparatus in the CLXXXVIb-CLXXXVIb line of FIG. 186 (a). (A) is a disassembled perspective front view of the 1st path | route member in 33rd Embodiment, (b) is sectional drawing of a special prize-winning apparatus. (A) is a front view of the game board in 34th Embodiment, (b) is sectional drawing of the game board in the CLXXXVIIIb-CLXXXVIIIb line | wire of FIG. 188 (a). It is a disassembled perspective front view of a game board. 188 is a cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line CXC-CXC in FIG. 188. (A) is a front view of the game board in 35th Embodiment, (b) is sectional drawing of the game board in the CXCIb-CXCIb line of (a). It is a disassembled perspective view of a special winning device. (A)-(c) is sectional drawing of the game board 13 in the CXCIII-CXCIII line | wire of FIG. 191 (b). (A) is the disassembled perspective front view which showed typically the game board in 36th Embodiment, (b) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a game board. (A) is the disassembled perspective front view which showed typically the game board in 37th Embodiment, (b) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a game board. It is a disassembled perspective front view of the lower displacement member in 38th Embodiment. (A) is a front view of a lower displacement member, (b) is a sectional view of the lower displacement member along line CXCVIIb-CXCVIIb in FIG. 197 (a), and (c) is a sectional view of FIG. 197 (a). It is sectional drawing of the lower displacement member in the CXCVIIc-CXCVIIc line. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of the lower displacement member in 39th Embodiment. (A) is a front view of a lower displacement member, and FIG. 199 (b) and FIG. 199 (c) are sectional views of the lower displacement member. (A) is a schematic cross section of the 1st unit in a 40th embodiment, and Drawing 200 (b) is a schematic cross section of the 1st unit in the CCb-CCb line of Drawing 200 (a). (A) is a schematic cross section of the 1st unit in 41st Embodiment, (b) is a schematic cross section of the 1st unit in the CCIb-CCIb line of Drawing 201 (a). (A) is a schematic cross section of the 1st unit in the CCIIa-CCIIa line of Drawing 201 (a), and (b) is a schematic cross section of the 1st unit in the CCIIb-CCIIb line of Drawing 201 (a). is there. It is a disassembled perspective front view of the back case in 42nd Embodiment. (A) is a front view of a back case, (b) is a schematic cross section of the back case in the CCIVb-CCIVb line | wire of FIG. 204 (a). (A) is a front view of a back case, (b) is a schematic cross section of the back case in the CCVb-CCVb line | wire of Fig.205 (a). (A) is a back view of a game board, (b) is sectional drawing of the game board in the CCVIb-CCVIb line of FIG. 206 (a).

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG. 111, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  In the following description, the front side of the paper is the front (front) side and the back side of the paper is the rear (back) side of the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. Also, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1, the upper side is the upper (upper) side, the lower side is the lower (lower) side, the right side is the right (right) side, and the left side is left (left) ) Side. Furthermore, arrows UD, LR, and FB in the figure indicate the up-down direction, left-right direction, and front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 4 supported to be openable and closable. To support the inner frame 4, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 4 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 4 from the back side. A ball ball game is played when a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 4 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 4, a front door 5 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front door 5 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two places on the left and right sides of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the front door is provided with the side on which the hinges 19 are provided as an opening / closing axis. 5 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 4 and the locking of the front door 5 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front door 5 is an assembly of decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window portion 5c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses 8 is disposed on the back side of the front door 5, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front door 5, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and has an open upper surface, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the contents of the effect of super reach. The

  The front door 5 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front door (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the periphery of the window portion 5c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front door 5 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light-emitting means such as an LED is incorporated, and a display lamp 34 is provided that can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front door 5 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right-side electric decoration part 32, and an adhering space K1 (see FIG. 2) can be visually recognized from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 5c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of movement (rotation position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. The resistance value of the variable resistor A ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (shooting strength), and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 76 and 77, and a general prize. The opening 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). It is attached to the back side. The base plate 60 is made of wood on which thin plate materials are laminated, and is formed so that various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side cannot be seen by the player. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed from the front side with a tapping screw or the like.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window portion 5c (see FIG. 1) of the front door 5. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 77 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located at an inner position of the outer rail 77 in the same manner as the outer rail 77. The arc-shaped inner rail 76 formed in the above is planted. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed on the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by two rails 76 and 77 and a resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening is provided and fired). Area where the falling sphere flows).

  The two rails 76 and 77 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 76 (the upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated.

  A first symbol display device 37A, 37B including a plurality of LEDs serving as light emitting means and a 7-segment display is disposed in the lower left portion of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37 </ b> A and 37 </ b> B are configured to be selectively used depending on whether the ball has won the first prize opening 64 or the second prize opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate, by means of LEDs, whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of changing the probability, in the short time, or in the normal state by a lighting state, or whether the pachinko machine 10 is changing or not by a lighting state. , Indicating whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a symbol that is out of place by a lighting state, indicating the number of held balls by a lighting state, and a 7-segment display device, Displays numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured to have different emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed in response to a winning in either the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determines the type of the big hit if it is determined to be a big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but if it is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, the “15R probability variation jackpot” is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, and “4R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of four. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds and hits a short time during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

  In addition, the “high probability state” means a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability change is in progress (probability change), in other words, a game that easily shifts to the special game state. It is a state of. The high probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The “low probability state” refers to a time when the probability of jackpot change is not occurring, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that at the time of probability change. The short time state (short time medium) of the “low probability state” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains as it is, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second prize opening 640 is obtained. It means the state of the game where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state is a game state (a state where neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased) which is neither probabilistic nor short in time.

  During probability change and short time, not only does the probability of winning the second symbol increase, but also the time for opening the first electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is changed, which is longer than normal. Time is set. When the first electric combination 640a is in the opened state (open state), the second prize opening 640 is compared with the case where the first electric combination 640a is in the closed state (closed state). The ball is ready to win. Therefore, during the probability change or the short time, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, during the probability change or during the short time, instead of changing the opening time of the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second prize opening 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, Thus, the number of times the first electric accessory 640a is opened may be changed to be larger than normal. In addition, the probability of winning the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or in the short time, and the first electric accessory is determined at the time when the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and once. It is good also as what changes at least one of the frequency | count that 640a opens. In addition, during the probability change and in the short time, the time for opening the first electric combination 640a associated with the second prize opening 640 and the number of times of opening the first electric combination 640a per change are not changed. Only the probability of hitting the second symbol may be changed so as to increase compared to the normal probability.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is synchronized with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, triggered by any one of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 (starting winning) as a trigger. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) for displaying the symbols in a variable manner, and an LED for variably displaying the second symbols with the passage of the first through gate 66 as a trigger. The 2nd symbol display apparatus (not shown) comprised by these is provided.

  The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 is visible through an opening opened in the center of the center frame 86.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4). One symbol row is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol). These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like that. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state display associated with the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. The decorative display according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel.

  Each time the sphere passes through the first through gate 66, the second symbol display device alternately displays a symbol “◯” and a symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time. The variable display to light is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning symbol is a winning symbol, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the second symbol is displayed. Further, if the winning lottery results, the symbol of “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the third symbol is displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is displayed. It is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined time.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the shorter time than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and during the time reduction, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the winning lottery can be performed more than during normal. Therefore, since the chances for winning in the winning lottery increase, the player can be given many opportunities for the first electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640 to be in an open state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the short time.

  In addition, during the probability change or in the short time, the second winning a prize opening during the probability change or in the short time can also be achieved by other methods such as increasing the probability of winning during the time of the change or increasing the number of times the first electric accessory 640a is released per time. When it is in a state where it is easy to win a ball to 640, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during probability change or short time, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, The opening time and the number of opening times of the first electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The first through gate 66 is assembled to the game board in the area on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. The first through gate 66 is configured to allow passage of a part of the ball that flows down the game board out of the balls fired on the game board. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66, the lottery of the second symbol is performed. After winning the lottery, the 2nd symbol display device displays the variation. For example, the symbol “x” is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display.

  The total number of passages of the first through gate 66 of the sphere is reserved up to a total of four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and a second symbol hold lamp (not shown). ) Is also lit. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol. A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of balls held for passing the ball of the first through gate 66 is not limited to 4 times, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). . Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the assembly position of the through gate is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol hold lamp may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 through which a ball can win is disposed. When a ball wins the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the first winning port switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, a second winning port 640 through which a ball can win is disposed on the right side of the first winning port 64 in front view. When a ball wins the second winning port 640, a second winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 ( (See FIG. 4), the jackpot lottery is made, and the display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B.

  In addition, each of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is also one of the winning ports through which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball is won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize slot 640 are configured to be the same. The number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 is different from the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second prize opening 640, for example, the ball to the first prize opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize opening 640 may be five.

  Further, on the left side of the first winning port 64 in front view, a third winning port 82 through which a ball can win is disposed. When the ball wins, the third winning port 82 can send the winning ball to the first opening 511 of the sorting unit 500 described later via the pitching unit 600. That is, the third winning opening 82 is disposed in communication with a first opening 511 described later.

  The third winning combination port 82 is accompanied by a third electric accessory 82a. The third electric accessory 82a is configured to be able to open and close by being rotationally displaced with respect to the game board 13. Normally, the third electric accessory 82a is in a closed state (reduced state) and the ball is in the third prize. It is difficult to win a prize in the mouth 82. On the other hand, if there is a jackpot determination triggered by winning of the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640, the third electric accessory 82a is opened (expanded) before, after, or during the jackpot. State), and the ball is likely to enter the third winning opening 82. In addition, a sensor device SE1 for detecting a passed ball is mounted on the downstream side of the third winning award port 82.

  The opening timing of the third electric accessory 82a does not have to be triggered by the winning of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 5640, and the first through gate 66 passes the sleeping ball. As a result of the change display of the second symbol performed as a trigger, when the symbol “◯” is displayed on the second symbol display device, it may be released.

  The first winning combination 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The first electric combination 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the first electric combination 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and the ball is unlikely to win the second winning opening 640. Yes. On the other hand, when the symbol “◯” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball to the first through gate 66, the first electric accessory 640 a is The open state (enlarged state) is entered, and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that during normal change during the probability change and the short time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. "Is easily displayed, and the number of times that the first electric accessory 640a is opened (enlarged) is increased. Furthermore, during the time of probability change or time reduction, the time during which the first electric accessory 640a is opened also becomes longer than during normal time. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 when the probability is changing or when the time is short.

  Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins the first winning port 64 and when the ball wins the second winning port 640. However, the probability that a 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won is higher when the ball wins the second winning slot 640 than when the ball wins the first winning slot 64. Is set. On the other hand, the first winning port 64 does not have the first electric accessory 640a as in the second winning port 640, and the ball is in a state where the ball can always be won.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric winnings associated with the second winning opening 640 are often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”), and a lot of opportunities for lottery wins are obtained by winning at the first winning opening 64, and the jackpot It is advantageous for the player to aim for this.

  On the other hand, during a certain change or in a short time, passing the ball through the first through gate 66 makes it easy for the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 to be in an open state, and wins the second winning opening 640. Since it is in an easy state, the ball is fired toward the second prize opening 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and the first through gate 66 is allowed to pass. Thus, it is advantageous for the player to open the first electric combination 640a and aim for a 15R probability variation big win by winning the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed between “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed on the right side of the first winning port 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning port (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of either the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 is a jackpot, the jackpot is stopped after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to be a symbol, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of a jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is one form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And. The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins into the specific winning port 65a while the specific winning port 65a is opened. You may make it form as a state. Further, the number of the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or a plurality (for example, three) of two or more may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the right side of the first winning opening 64. The left side of the variable display unit 80 may be used.

  A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate paper, an identification label or the like is provided at the lower right corner of the game board 13, and the certificate paper or the like stuck on the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front door 5. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. Balls that flow down the game area and have not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 82 are guided to the unillustrated ball discharge path through the first outlet 71. The The first out port 71 is disposed below the first winning port 64.

  A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (acts) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. Balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In main controller 110, main processing of pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, setting of display on first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on second symbol display device are performed by MPU 201. Execute.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 includes a switch group (not shown), various switches 208 including a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuating effects (fluctuation). Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other device 228, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors KM1, KM2, and KM3.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the production contents at the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display command received from the display control device 114, The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 has a variation effect of the third symbol, etc. The display is controlled. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, a schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective front view of the operation unit 200 and the game board 13. 7 to 10 are front views of the operation unit 200. FIG.

  In FIG. 7, the upper displacement member 940 is retracted upward and the lower displacement member 440 is retracted downward. In FIG. 8, the upper displacement member 940 rotates downward from the state shown in FIG. In FIG. 9, the displaced state is the state shown in FIG. 7, and the state in which the lower displacement member 440 is projected to a first projecting position to be described later is shown in FIG. 10. The state displaced to the 2nd overhang position which is a position is each illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the operation unit 200 includes a rear case 300 formed in a box shape, and an upper displacement unit 900, a lower displacement unit 400, a rotation unit 700, and an inner space of the rear case 300. The distribution unit 5 00 and the pitching unit 600 attached to the back of the game board 13 are accommodated.

  The back case 300 includes a bottom wall 301 having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and an outer wall 302 standing from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall 301 toward the front. It is formed in a box shape with one side (front side) open. The bottom wall 301 is formed with an opening 301a having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back of the bottom wall 301 is visually recognized through the opening 301a. It is possible.

  The upper displacement unit 900 is disposed in the upper part of the opening 301a in the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 300, and has a rectangular horizontally long base member 910, and is slidably disposed on the base member 910. The upper displacement member 940 is provided, and an effect of rotating and displacing the upper displacement member 940 while sliding is formed on the front side of the opening 301a of the rear case 300 (that is, the third symbol display device 81). A detailed description of the upper displacement unit 900 will be given later.

  The lower displacement unit 400 is disposed in the bottom side of the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 300 at a lower portion of the opening 301 a and has a horizontally long base member 410 in a front view, and is slidably disposed on the base member 410. The lower displacement member 440 is provided, and an effect of rotating and displacing the lower displacement member 440 while sliding is formed on the front side of the rear case opening 301a (ie, the third symbol display device 81). A detailed description of the lower displacement unit 400 will be described later.

  The rotation unit 700 includes a rear base 720 having a substantially rectangular shape in front view disposed on the right side (arrow) in front view of the lower portion of the opening 301a in the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, and a front side of the rear base 720. And the player can visually recognize the effect of rotationally displacing the rotary body 800 through a transparent plate portion formed on the lower right side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front. The detailed description of the rotating unit 700 will be described later.

  The ball sending unit 600 is attached to the back side of the game board 13 and a game ball sent from the third winning port 82 of the game board 13 to the back side of the game board 13 is input to a first opening 511 of the distribution unit 500 described later. A path for pitching is formed.

  The distribution unit 500 includes a path forming member 510 attached to the back side of the game board 13, a base plate 520 disposed in a state where a predetermined gap is formed opposite the path forming member 510, and the base plate There is provided a sorting member 540 that distributes game balls that are attached to 520 and flow down between the path forming member 510 and the base plate 520 to each pitching path (second pitching path KR2 or third pitching path KR3). The game balls distributed to the distribution member 540 are sent to the lower displacement unit 400. A detailed description of the distribution unit 500 will be described later.

<A 1st decoration body and a 2nd decoration body are arrange|positioned in the position adjacent to the front-back direction>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 11 to 16, the general winning a prize opening unit 150 disposed on the game board 13 will be described.

  First, the general winning opening unit 150 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12. 11 is an exploded perspective front view of the game board 13, FIG. 12 (a) is a front view of the general winning opening unit 150, and FIG. 12 (b) is a line XIIb-XIIb in FIG. 12 (a). It is sectional drawing of the general winning opening unit 150 in.

  As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 formed from a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a center frame 86 disposed in an opening formed in the base plate 60. And a general prize opening unit 150.

  The base plate 60 includes a first opening 60a that is opened in the center portion when viewed from the front, and a second opening 60b that is opened on the lower side in the gravity direction of the game area formed by the rail members 76 and 77. . A center frame 86 is disposed in the first opening 60a, and a general prize opening unit 150 is disposed in the second opening 60b. In addition, a sticker with a decoration (pattern, symbol, etc.) formed on the front side (arrow F direction side) is attached to the base plate 60 so that the player can visually recognize the decoration. The decoration on the front side of the base plate 60 is not limited to the seal, and the decoration may be printed (painted) on the front surface of the base plate 60.

  The general winning a prize opening unit 150 is disposed in the game area of the game board 13 (in front of the base plate 60), and the path of the game ball flowing down the game area can be changed. Further, the general winning a prize opening unit 150 has an end on the lower side in the gravitational direction (arrow D direction side) in the front view (viewed in the arrow B direction) with respect to the game area formed by being surrounded by the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77. It is arranged at a position along the part. In FIGS. 13 to 16, the seal disposed on the base plate 60 is illustrated with the reference numeral of the decorative member 60 c. In the present embodiment, a character (person) is drawn on the decorative member 60c.

  The general winning opening unit 150 includes a main body 151 formed in a crescent shape when viewed from the front, a first standing part 152 erected from the end of the main body 151 on the front side (arrow F direction side), A second standing portion 153 that extends from the end of the first standing portion 152 on the upper side in the gravity direction (arrow U direction side) toward the center of the game area, and a rear side of the main body portion 151. And a plurality of (three in this embodiment) general winning openings 63 formed mainly on the front side of the main body 151.

  The main body 151 is set to have an outer shape slightly larger than the opening shape of the second opening 60b opened in the thickness direction of the base plate 60, and is covered with the opening of the second opening 60b. It is arrange | positioned at the front side. Further, the second opening 60b allows the game ball flowing into the general winning opening 63 provided in the main body 151 to be sent to the back side of the game board 13 (base plate 60). Furthermore, the main body 151 includes an inclined surface 151a that inclines toward the base plate 60 as it goes from the inner portion to the outer end in a front view, and a recess that is recessed in the back surface on the base plate 60 side (arrow B direction side). 151 b and a back surface portion 151 d that forms the back surface of the main body portion 151 excluding the concave portion 151 b are mainly provided.

  The inclined surface 151 a is formed to be inclined by approximately 30 degrees with respect to the front surface of the base plate 60. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the game area of the game board 13 can be brought into contact with the inclined surface 151a and flow down along the inclination of the inclined surface 151a, and moved to the front side of the main body 151.

  Here, when the inclined surface 151 a is not formed at the end of the main body 151 and the side surface of the main body 151 is formed perpendicular to the front surface of the base plate 60, the game area of the game board 13 flows down. There is a possibility that the game ball to be abutted (collised) from the direction orthogonal to the side surface of the main body 151 and the abutted game ball rebounds in the direction opposite to the flow-down direction.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the game ball that contacts the side surface of the main body portion 151 can be moved to the front side of the main body portion by the inclined surface 151a, so that the flow of the game ball flowing down the game area is temporarily It is possible to suppress stagnation. As a result, the game ball can flow smoothly from the front side of the base plate 60 to the front surface of the main body 151 of the general prize opening unit 150.

  As described above, the back surface portion 151d is the back surface of the main body portion 151, and is formed with a certain width around the recess portion 151b in the rear view. Further, the back surface portion 151d is disposed in contact with the front surface of the base plate 60 (decorative member 60c) in a state where the general winning a prize opening unit 150 is disposed on the base plate 60.

  The recess 151b is recessed toward the front side (arrow F direction side). The concave portion 151b has a concave bottom surface 151b2 that is a bottom surface in the concave direction, and an inner side surface 151b3 that is erected from the outer edge of the concave bottom surface 151b2 toward the back side (arrow B direction side).

  The concave bottom surface 151b2 is an adhesive surface of a decorative member 154 described later, and is formed as a plane parallel to the front surface of the main body 151. Thereby, when the decoration of the decoration member 154 is visually recognized via the main body 151, the decoration of the decoration member 154 can be visually recognized uniformly.

  Inner side surface 151b3 is extended in the front-back direction (arrow FB direction) in front view. Further, the shape of the inner side surface 151b3 in a front view is formed to be substantially the same as the outer shape of a decorative member 154 described later. Thereby, when the decorative member 154 is disposed in the concave portion 151b, the decorative member 154 can be prevented from protruding outside the concave portion 151b. Therefore, when the general winning a prize opening unit 150 is disposed on the base plate 60, the decoration member 154 is sandwiched between the back surface portion 151 d and the base plate 60, so that the back surface portion 151 d and the base plate 60 of the main body portion 151 are sandwiched. It is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the two. Thereby, it can suppress that the main-body part 151 projects over the front side rather than the normal arrangement | positioning position with respect to the base board 60. FIG. As a result, the game ball can flow smoothly from the front side of the base plate 60 to the front surface of the main body 151 of the general prize opening unit 150.

  The recess 151b is a recess that accommodates a decoration member 154, which will be described later, in the recess space, and the recess installation depth (recessed distance to the front side (arrow F direction side)) is larger than the thickness dimension of the decoration member 154. It is set large. The recess 151b is recessed along the shape of the end of the main body 151 at a position spaced a certain distance from the end of the main body 151 in the front view to the inside of the main body 151.

  Therefore, when the decorative member 154 is disposed inside the recess 151b, it is possible to suppress the back surface of the decorative member 154 from projecting to the back side of the main body portion 151. Therefore, when the general winning a prize opening unit 150 is disposed on the base plate 60, the decoration member 154 is sandwiched between the recessed bottom surface 151 b 2 and the base plate 60, so that the back surface portion 151 d of the main body portion 151 and the base plate 60 It is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the two. Thereby, it can suppress that the main-body part 151 projects over the front side rather than the normal arrangement position with respect to the base board 60. FIG. As a result, the game ball can smoothly flow down from the upper side of the main body 151 in the direction of gravity (in the direction of the arrow U) to the front of the main body 151 of the general prize opening unit 150.

  The first standing portion 152 is erected on the front side (arrow F direction side) from the end portion of the main body portion 151 on the end portion side (inner rail 76 side) of the game area. The first standing portion 152 is set to have the standing dimension substantially the same as the width dimension in the planting direction of the inner rail 76 planted on the front surface of the base plate 60 (decorative member 60c). Further, in the first standing portion 152, the distance between the front door 5 that covers the front side of the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 is set to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the front side of the main body 151 can be made to collide with the first standing portion 152 at the lower end of the game area in the direction of gravity. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game ball flowing down the front side of the main body 151 from colliding with the inner rail 76, and to suppress the inner rail 76 from colliding with the game ball and being bent.

  Here, the space between the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77 is a space for guiding the game ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13, A space for providing reinforcement or the like between the outer rail 77 and the outer rail 77 is limited. Therefore, it is difficult to arrange reinforcement for the purpose of preventing the inner rail 76 from bending, and there is a possibility that the game ball flowing down the game area collides with the inner rail 76 and the inner rail 76 is bent.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is possible to make it difficult for a game ball flowing down the game area to collide with the inner rail 76 by the general prize opening unit 150 (first standing portion 152) disposed in the game area. it can. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a change in the distance between the facing of the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77 due to the bending of the inner rail 76. As a result, the game ball can be stably launched into the game area.

  The second standing portion 153 extends downwardly from the end of the first standing portion 152 in the gravity direction (arrow U direction side) toward the center of the game area (first winning port 64) in front view. (See FIG. 2). Thereby, the game ball flowing down between the inner rail 76 and the center frame 83 (see FIG. 2) is placed on the upper surface (the surface on the arrow U direction side) of the extending portion of the second standing portion 153 that is inclined downward. When the ball is sent, the game ball can roll along the descending slope of the second standing portion 153 and can be sent toward the center of the game area. As a result, the game balls flowing down the game area on the opposite side (arrow L direction side) of the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77 are won (inflow) into the first winning port 64 disposed in the center of the game area. It can be made easy.

  The decorative member 154 is formed in a plate shape and is bonded to the back side of the main body 151. In addition, the decoration member 154 is provided with a decoration that is continuous with the decoration formed on the decoration member 60c of the base plate 60 in front view on the main body 151 side. Thereby, the decoration formed on the base plate 60 can be visually recognized as one decoration together with the decoration of the decoration member 154. In the present embodiment, a part of the character (person) is drawn on the decorative member 154, and the character of the decorative member 60c and the character of the decorative member 154 can be viewed together as one character.

  The decorative member 154 is made of a light transmissive material. Thereby, the light which passed through the 2nd opening part 60b from the back side (arrow B direction side) of the base board 60 enters from the back surface of the decoration member 154, and is radiate | emitted from the front side (arrow F direction side) of the decoration member 154. Can be made. Therefore, the decoration formed on the front surface of the decoration member 154 can be brightened and made visible to the player, and the player can easily make the decoration of the decoration member 154 visible.

  Next, the base plate 60 and the general winning opening unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. 13 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 taken along line XIII-XIII in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 13, the decorative member 154 has an outer shape larger than the opening shape of the second opening 60 b of the base plate 60 in a front view. Thus, when the general winning a prize opening unit 150 is disposed on the base plate 60, the end of the decorative member 154 is located between the concave bottom surface 151b2 of the concave portion 151b of the main body 151 and the base plate 60 (decorative member 60c). Placed in. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the decorative member 154 from dropping from the game board 13 when the adhesion between the main body 151 and the decorative member 154 is peeled off due to deterioration over time.

  Further, the decorative member 154 has a width dimension that overlaps with the base plate 60 in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction), and the circular shape of the base plate 60 into which a protrusion 155 that protrudes from the back surface of the main body 151 described later is inserted. Is set larger than the diameter of the opening 60g (see FIG. 11). Thereby, a gap is formed between the decoration of the decoration member 154 and the decoration member 60c in the front view due to the displacement of the arrangement of the decoration member 154 with respect to the main body 151 or the position of the decoration member 60c. Can be suppressed. As a result, the player can easily recognize the decoration member 60c of the base plate 60 and the decoration of the decoration member 154 as one decoration.

  Further, the three general winning ports 63 arranged in the main body 151 are connected to the openings 514 to 516 of the distribution unit 500 (see FIG. 71) arranged on the back side of the game board 13. The game balls that have won the winning opening 63 are sent to the fourth pitch route KR4 of the sorting unit 500. A detailed description of the distribution unit 500 will be described later.

  Further, in the sorting unit 500, a substrate (not shown) having a light source capable of irradiating light on the front side is disposed on the base plate 520 (see FIG. 71), and the light emitted from the substrate is the base plate. The second opening 60b of 60 is inserted to irradiate the back of the general winning a prize opening unit 150.

  Therefore, the second opening 60 b is used as a space for irradiating light to the path of the game ball to be won from the general winning opening 63 of the general winning opening unit 150 and the back of the general winning opening unit 150. As a result, there is no need to separately form an opening for sending a game ball, an opening for allowing light to pass through, and two openings, so light is applied to the entire back surface of the general winning a prize opening unit 150. The general winning opening 63 can be arranged over the entire area of the main body 151 of the general winning opening unit 150. As a result, the degree of freedom in designing the general winning a prize opening unit 150 can be improved, and light is emitted from the entire area of the general winning a prize opening unit 150 to decorate the general winning a prize opening unit 150 (decorative member 154) to the player. Easy to see.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13, the decorative member 154 that is connected to the decorative member 60 c of the base plate 60 of the game board 13 is disposed along the front surface of the base plate 60. Therefore, the decoration member 60c of the base plate 60 and the decoration of the decoration member 154 can be arranged at positions adjacent (approaching) in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). Accordingly, the decorative member 60c and the decorative member are viewed from an angle inclined with respect to the front view of the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 (for example, a viewpoint having the same height as the upper end portion in the gravity direction of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1)). It is possible to suppress the decoration of the decoration member 60c and the decoration member 154 from being visually recognized when the 154 is visually recognized, as compared with the case where the decoration of the general prize opening unit is disposed in front of the general prize opening unit. As a result, the connecting portion between the decoration member 60c of the base plate 60 and the decoration of the decoration member 154 can be viewed by the player in the same positional relationship regardless of the player's viewpoint, and the design of the game board 13 is improved. it can.

  Next, the connection of the decorative member 154 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board 13 in the range XIV of FIG. In FIG. 14, the light path visually recognized by the player is shown by a two-dot chain line.

  As described above, the decoration member 60c of the base plate 60 and the decoration of the decoration member 154 are visually recognized by the player as one decoration. Therefore, in order for the player to visually recognize the decoration member 60c of the base plate 60 and the decoration of the decoration member 154 as one decoration (pattern), it is necessary to suppress the misalignment between the decorations of the two. However, when the decoration is formed on the base plate 60 or when the decoration member 154 is disposed on the main body 151, it is difficult to arrange the decoration at an accurate position (the same position every time). Accordingly, when the general winning a prize opening unit 150 is disposed on the base plate 60, the decoration position of the decoration member 154 with respect to the decoration member 60c of the base plate 60 is displaced so that the decoration member 60c and the decoration member 154 are disposed. In addition, there is a problem that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decoration as one decoration.

  On the other hand, according to this embodiment, the end of the decorative member 154 is disposed on the back side of the inclined surface 151a. Thereby, the connection part of the decoration of the decoration member 154 and the decoration of the decoration member 60c of the base plate 60 can be made difficult to be accurately recognized by the player (the connection part is blurred to make the player visually recognize). Therefore, the player can recognize the decoration member 60c and the decoration member 154 as one decoration.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 14, the connecting portion (hereinafter referred to as “boundary P1” (see FIG. 14)) of the decoration of the decoration member 154 and the decoration of the decoration member 60c is an inclined surface 151a of the main body 151. Located on the back side. Therefore, the light emitted from the boundary P1 toward the player's viewpoint and the connecting portion between the front surface of the main body 151 and the inclined surface 151a (hereinafter referred to as “boundary P2” (see FIG. 14)) The light emitted toward the viewpoint can be changed to light reflected at different positions of the decoration member 60c or the decoration member 154 (that is, on the path of the light emitted from the boundary P1 toward the player's viewpoint). In addition, the formation of the boundary P2 can be suppressed).

  Accordingly, at the boundary P1, the player can easily recognize the displacement of the decoration member 60c relative to the decoration member 154 as the displacement of the decoration, and at the boundary P2, the displacement of the decoration due to the difference in the light refraction direction is recognized by the player. Since the decoration visually recognized by the player from the respective positions of the boundary P1 and the boundary P2 can be made a decoration at different positions, the positional deviation of the decorations at the boundary P1 and the boundary P2 is the same position. Visible to the player can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the decoration position shift at the boundary P1 and the decoration position shift at the boundary P2 from being combined, and the amount of the decoration position shift is increased and recognized by the player. As a result, the decoration of the decoration member 60c and the decoration member 154 can be easily recognized by the player as one decoration, and the design of the game board 13 can be improved.

  Furthermore, by arranging the boundary P1 on the back side of the inclined surface 151a, from the viewpoint of the player, a connecting portion of the decorative member 60c and the main body 151 (hereinafter referred to as “boundary P3” (see FIG. 14)), The boundary P1 can be arranged between the boundary P2. Therefore, the boundary P1 can be disposed between the position positions (decreases P2 and P3) of the decoration due to the light being refracted when the light is emitted from the main body 151. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the extension of the recognized area by shifting the decoration position. That is, it is possible to limit the area where the position of the decoration is visually recognized with respect to the front of the game board 13. As a result, the misalignment area of the decoration can be reduced with respect to the game area of the game board 13, so that the decoration of the decoration member 60c and the decoration member 154 can be easily recognized as one decoration by the player.

  In this embodiment, the character's face is decorated on the decoration member 60c of the base plate 60, and the character body decorated on the decoration member 60c is decorated on the decoration member 154 of the general winning a prize opening unit 150. In other words, the decoration outline is located at the decoration connecting portion between the decoration member 60 c and the decoration member 154. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the position shift of the connecting portion between the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 is the decorative outline. As a result, the decoration of the decoration member 60c and the decoration member 154 can be easily recognized by the player as one decoration.

  Further, in this embodiment, the decoration member 60c of the base board 60 is decorated up to the neck of the character's face, and the character body decorated to the decoration member 154 and the decoration member 154 of the general prize opening unit 150. The clothes to be worn are decorated, and the character's face (neck) and clothes are different in color (in this embodiment, the face is skin color and the clothes are black). This makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 are divided by changing the position shift of the connecting portion between the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 to a portion having a different color. Can do. As a result, the decoration of the decoration member 60c and the decoration member 154 can be easily recognized by the player as one decoration.

  As described above, the main body 151 is provided with the concave portion 151b on the back surface side, and the decorative member 154 is disposed on the inner side. In addition, the shape of the inner side surface (inner side surface 151b3) of the recess 151b is set to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the decorative member 154 in front view. Thereby, when disposing the decorative member 154 in the main body 151, the inner side surface 151b3 of the recess 151b can be used as a guide (positioning). As a result, when the decorative member 154 is attached to the main body 151, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the arrangement of the decorative member 154 with respect to the main body 151.

  Further, on the back side of the main body 151, protrusions 155 (see FIG. 15) protruding in a columnar shape are formed at a plurality of places (in this embodiment, three places (see FIG. 15)). The protrusion 155 is a positioning protrusion for positioning with the base plate 60 when the general winning a prize opening unit 150 is disposed on the base plate 60, and is inserted into the recess 60 d provided in the base plate 60. Further, at least one protrusion 155 (one in the present embodiment) protrudes from the recessed bottom surface 151b2 of the recessed portion 151b and is inserted into an opening formed in the decorative member 154. Therefore, the protrusion 155 can be used for positioning when the decorative member 154 is disposed on the main body 151.

  Therefore, the protrusion 155 can be positioned when the general prize opening unit 150 is disposed on the base plate 60, and can be positioned when the decorative member 154 is disposed on the main body 151. Therefore, since the part used as the positioning at the time of arrange | positioning the decoration member 154 in the front side of the decoration member 60c can be made into the same part, the decoration of the decoration member 60c and the decoration of the decoration member 154 are displaced. Can be suppressed. As a result, the decoration of the decoration member 60c and the decoration of the decoration member 154 can be combined and easily recognized by the player as one decoration.

  Further, the protrusion 155 protruding from the concave bottom surface 151b2 is formed in a region E1 (see FIG. 15) described later (affixing region of the adhesive tape 154a). As a result, when the decorative member 154 is disposed on the main body 151, the position of one edge of the decorative member 154 is positioned on the inner surface 151b3 of the recess 151b with the protrusion 155 inserted into the opening of the decorative member 154. By arranging them together, two locations of the decorative member 154 can be positioned with respect to the main body 151. Therefore, it is not necessary to arrange the decorative member 154 on the main body 151 by aligning the edge of the decorative member 154 at two locations on the inner surface 151b3 of the recess 151b. As a result, the disposition work of the decorative member 154 on the main body 151 can be simplified.

  Next, adhesion between the main body 151 and the decorative member 154 will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16. FIG. 15 is a rear view of the general winning a prize opening unit 150, and FIG. 16 is a partially enlarged sectional view of the game board 13 in a range XIV in FIG. In FIG. 15, the range of the adhesive tape 154 a attached to the decorative member 154 is indicated by a two-dot chain line with the reference numeral E <b> 1. Moreover, in FIG. 14, the path | route of the light visually recognized by a player is shown with a dashed-two dotted line. In the present embodiment, the adhesive tape 154a is formed from a light-transmitting double-sided tape and is affixed to the range E1.

  As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the adhesive tape 154 a that bonds the decorative member 154 and the main body 151 is attached with a certain width along the end of the decorative member 154. As a result, in the region where the adhesive tape 154a is not affixed (the portion other than the range E1), the main body 151 (the recessed bottom surface 151b2) and the decorative member 154 (the front surface of the decorative member) correspond to the thickness of the adhesive tape 154a. A gap (space) having a predetermined width is formed between them.

  Further, the adhesive tape 154a is bonded to a region exceeding the virtual line PK1 (see FIG. 14) passing through the boundary P3 from the end of the decorative member 154 and orthogonal to the inclined surface 151a. As a result, a range E1 (decoration member) where the portion of the light that passes through the main body 151 and is emitted from the inclined surface 151a is affected by the decoration of the decoration member 154 (the part whose wavelength is changed) is attached to the adhesive tape 154a. 154 end). As a result, even when the player visually recognizes the general prize opening unit 150 from a predetermined angle or more, the decoration of the decoration member 60c and the decoration member 154 can be easily viewed as one decoration by the player.

  Here, when the player visually recognizes the game board 13 from a position higher than usual (for example, a viewpoint having the same height as the upper end of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) in the direction of gravity), FIG. As shown, the light L that escapes from the inclined surface 151a toward the player's line of vision repeatedly reflects the front and back surfaces of the main body 151 and passes through the inside of the main body 151. In this case, if the entire front surface of the decorative member 154 is in contact with the main body 151 via the adhesive tape 154a, the wavelength of light is changed by the decoration of the decorative member 154 every time it is reflected on the decorative member 154 side. The Accordingly, the light that passes through the inside of the main body 151 and is emitted from the inclined surface 151 a cannot be reflected only by a change in wavelength due to decoration at the end of the decorative member 154. Therefore, since the decoration recognized by the player from the inclined surface 151a is different from the wavelength of the decoration visually recognized by the player from the front of the main body 151, the main body 151 and the inclined surface 151a are not connected to each other. There was a problem.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the light L that reflects and passes through the inside of the main body 151 is made to be the decoration of the decorative member 154 by setting the bonding portion of the decorative member 154 to the main body 151 only in the range E1. It can be made unaffected (the light wavelength is not changed). As a result, as shown in FIG. 16, the portion of the light that passes through the main body 151 and is emitted from the inclined surface 151 a is affected by the decoration of the decoration member 154 (the portion whose wavelength is changed) is attached to the adhesive tape 154 a. The attached range E1 (the end of the decorative member 154) can be set, and the player can easily recognize the adjoining decoration on the inclined surface 151a visually recognized by the player. As a result, the designability of the game board 13 can be improved.

  Next, the special winning device 550 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 36. First, with reference to FIG. 17, a method for arranging the special prize-winning device 550 will be described. FIG. 17 is an exploded perspective front view of the center frame 86.

  As shown in FIG. 17, the center frame 86 includes a base frame 86a formed in a substantially circular frame shape surrounding the central opening of the base plate 60, and a projecting portion protruding outward in the radial direction of the base frame 86a. 86b.

  The base frame 86a is shaped along the central opening of the base plate 60, and a part of the base frame 86a is inserted inside the central opening, and a portion excluding a part of the base frame 86a is the base plate 60. It is arrange | positioned by the base board 60 in the state projected over the front side.

  The projecting portion 86 b is projected from the game area of the game board 13 on the right side in the front view (arrow R direction side). Thereby, the special prize-winning device 550 arranged in the projecting portion 86b can be arranged on the right side (arrow R direction side) in front view with respect to the gaming area, and when the player enters the special gaming state, A part of the pitch of the game balls can be constituted by the special prize-winning device 550.

  The projecting portion 86b has an opening 86b1 that opens in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), and is located above the opening 86b1 (arrow U direction) and toward the back side (arrow B direction side). And a recessed portion 86b2 that is recessed.

  A part of the first unit 551 of the special prize device 550 described later is inserted into the opening 86b1. Thus, the first unit 551 can be connected to the second unit 552 of the special prize device 550 disposed on the back side of the protruding portion 86b via the opening 86b1.

  The recess 86b2 can accommodate a part of the first unit 551 of the special prize device 550 described later. In addition, a detection device 86b3 that can detect the passage of the game ball is disposed in the recess 86b2. Thereby, it is possible to detect the game ball passing through the portion accommodated inside the recess 86b2 of the first unit 551.

  The special prize-winning device 550 is disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the projecting portion 86b of the center frame 86, and on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the projecting portion 86b. The second unit 552 is mainly provided.

  The first unit 551 has a space (path) through which the game ball can flow down, and a part thereof is disposed in the game area of the game board 13. The first unit 551 is disposed on the center frame 86 with screws inserted through the second unit 552. A detailed description of the arrangement method of the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 will be described later.

  Next, the configuration of the first unit 551 of the special winning device 550 will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 (a) is a front view of the first unit 551, FIG. 18 (b) is a side view of the first unit 551, and FIG. 18 (c) is a rear view of the first unit 551. . FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective front view of the first unit 551, and FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective rear view of the first unit 551.

  As shown in FIGS. 18 to 20, the first unit 551 includes a first path member 560 disposed on the front side, and a second path member 570 disposed on the back side of the first path member 560. The third path member 580 disposed on the back surface of the second path member 570 is mainly provided.

  The first path member 560 has a front plate 564 formed in a plate shape along the front of the game area of the game board 13 and a substantially U-shaped cross section that opens upward (arrow U direction side). A first receiving portion 561, a second receiving portion 562, and a third receiving portion 563 that protrude from the upper end of the face plate 564 to the back side, and the first receiving portion 561, the second receiving portion 562, and the third receiving portion. A first wall portion 565 formed continuously with the lower side (arrow D direction side) of the portion 563 and extending along a part of the end portion of the front plate 564, and below the first wall portion 565 2 sets of 2nd wall part 566 and 3rd wall part 567 which are formed in 2 and protruded from two places spaced apart by predetermined spacing are mainly provided.

  The front plate 564 is a plate member that serves as a wall portion on the front side of the flow path of a game ball formed between facing a second path member 570 or a third path member 580 described later, and is formed of a light transmitting member. The Thereby, the player can visually recognize the game ball flowing down inside the first unit 551 through (through) the front plate 564.

  Further, the front plate 564 includes a guide portion 564a that protrudes on the second path member 570 side (back side (arrow B direction side)).

  The guide portion 564a is a wall portion that suppresses the entire area of the wall surface of the front plate 564 from being soiled by the game balls flowing down the inside of the first unit 551, and the second route member 570 or the third route member 580 to be described later. It extends along the flow path of the game ball flowing down between the opposite sides. In addition, the guide portion 564a is provided so as to protrude from the rolling surface of the game ball flowing down the first unit 551 at a position separated from the radius of the game ball. In other words, the guide portion 564a protrudes at a position substantially the same as the center position of the game ball flowing down the first path member 560. Thereby, the part which the front board 564 and a game ball contact | abut can be limited to the protrusion front-end | tip part of the guide part 564a. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the generation of scratches due to contact with the game ball over the entire area of the front plate 564 and the transfer of dirt attached to the game ball. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down inside the first path member 560 via the front plate 564.

  The first receiving portion 561, the second receiving portion 562, and the third receiving portion 563 are portions that receive game balls flowing down from the game area above (in the direction of arrow U) the first unit 551 into the first unit 551. The upper opening is set to a size larger than the diameter of the game ball. The first receiving portion 561, the second receiving portion 562, and the third receiving portion 563 are juxtaposed in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) at the upper end (arrow U direction side) of the front plate 564. The

  The first receiving portion 561 is set to have a larger game ball receiving width (width dimension in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction)) than the second receiving portion 562 and the third receiving portion 563. As a result, the game balls flowing into the special winning device 550 are more likely to flow into the first receiving unit 561 than the second receiving unit 562 or the third receiving unit 563.

  Further, the first receiving part 561 is communicated with a flow path formed inside the first unit 551. As a result, the game balls received by the first receiving unit 561 flow down inside the first unit 551. The flow path of the game balls of the first unit 551 will be described later.

  The 2nd receiving part 562 and the 3rd receiving part 563 are connected to the flow-down path formed inside the 2nd unit 552 mentioned below. As a result, the game balls received by the second receiving unit 562 and the third receiving unit 563 flow down inside the second unit 552. The flow path of the second unit 552 will be described later.

  The 1st wall part 565 is an inner wall which forms the space which sends a game ball between facing the 4th wall part 573 formed in the 2nd path | route member 570 mentioned later. One end of the first wall portion 565 is connected to the lower side of the first receiving portion 561 described above, and the other end side extends to the lower side of the second receiving portion 562 and the third receiving portion 563 (arrow LR). Direction wall) and a curved wall portion 565b that is curved in a substantially C shape when viewed from the back and is connected to the upper side wall portion 565a.

  The upper side wall portion 565a is an inner wall that covers the upper surface of the rolling surface when the game ball rolls on the upper surface (the surface on the arrow U direction side) of a fourth wall portion 573, which will be described later, and the fourth wall portion 573. It is formed at a position that is separated upward (arrow U direction side) from the diameter of the game ball in a direction perpendicular to the upper surface of the game ball.

  The curved wall portion 565b is an inner wall that changes the rolling direction of a game ball that rolls on the upper surface of a fourth wall portion 573, which will be described later, and is formed at a position facing the rolling side end of the fourth wall portion 573. The Further, the curved wall portion 565b is formed in a semicircular arc shape centering on the rolling side end portion of the fourth wall portion 573. Thereby, the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573 can be guided to the lower surface side of the fourth wall portion 573 by flowing down along the inner wall of the curved wall portion 565b, and the rolling can be performed. The moving direction can be opposite to the rolling direction of the upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573.

  The second wall portion 566 is an inner wall that forms a space of a path that branches off from the main flow path of the game ball that flows down inside the first unit 551, and a pair of wall sections that protrude from the back surface of the front plate 564. Is set to a size slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the path | route which flows down the 1st unit 551 can be increased.

  The third wall portion 567 is a wall portion that forms the inner surface of a path that branches off from the main pitching path (main path SK3) of the game ball that flows down inside the first unit 551, and projects from the back surface of the front plate 564. The distance between the pair of wall portions facing each other is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the path | route of the game ball which flows down the 1st unit 551 can be increased.

  In addition, the second wall portion 566 and the third wall portion 567 are respectively arranged on the opposite sides of the first unit 551 in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction). Thereby, a game ball can be sent to the both sides of the left-right direction of the 1st unit 551 from the branch passage mentioned later.

  The second path member 570 includes a plate-like base plate 571 that faces the front plate 564 of the first path member 560, and a fourth wall portion 573 that projects from the front surface of the base plate 571 toward the first path member 560. And a fifth wall portion 574 protruding from the fourth wall portion 573 at a predetermined distance downward, and a fifth wall portion 574 protruding at a predetermined distance from the fifth wall portion 574 downward. And a sixth wall portion 575.

  The base plate 571 is disposed at a position that is separated from the front plate 564 of the first path member 560 by a distance slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball can flow down between the front plate 564 and the base plate 571. The base plate 571 includes a first opening 571a, a second opening 571b, and a third opening 571c that open to positions corresponding to the first receiving portion 561, the second receiving portion 562, and the third receiving portion 563, respectively. A fourth opening 571d that opens below the first opening 571a, a fifth opening 571e and a sixth opening 571f that open above the fifth wall 574 and the sixth wall 575, respectively. A recessed portion 571g which is located between the fifth wall portion 574 and the sixth wall portion 575 and is recessed on the back surface side.

  The first opening 571a, the second opening 571b, and the third opening 571c are used to play game balls that flow into the first receiving portion 561, the second receiving portion 562, and the third receiving portion 563 of the first path member 560 described above. This is an opening that passes through the back side of the base plate 571.

  In addition, the base plate 571 includes a first rolling part 576, a second rolling part 577, and a first rolling part 576 that protrude from the lower end of the first opening part 571a, the second opening part 571b, and the third opening part 571c to the back side. Three rolling parts 578 are provided. Thereby, a game ball passing through the first opening 571a is transferred to a third path member 580 described later, and a game ball passing through the second opening 571b or the third opening 571c is transferred to a second unit 552 described later. Each ball is sent.

  The first opening portion 571a and the fourth opening portion 571d are partially covered with a third path member 580 described later on the back side. Thereby, the game ball passing through the first opening 571a is sent to the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base plate 571 from the fourth opening 571d.

  The fourth wall 573 protrudes from the base plate 571 along the lower end of the fourth opening 571d and extends in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction). The fourth wall portion 573 is formed such that the upper surface is inclined downward as it goes from the fourth opening portion 571d opened to the left side of the base plate 571 in the front view to the right side of the front view (arrow R direction side). . Thereby, the game ball that passes through the fourth opening 571d and is sent to the front side of the base plate 571 is placed on the upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573, and the base plate 571 is inclined by the inclination of the upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573. Can be sent to the right side (arrow R direction side).

  The fifth wall portion 574 is a portion serving as a rolling surface of the game ball sent from the curved wall portion 565b of the first wall portion 565 described above, and the game ball is placed in a direction perpendicular to the lower surface of the fourth wall portion 573. The base plate 571 extends in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) and protrudes at a position spaced apart from the diameter. Further, the upper surface (the surface on the arrow U direction side) of the fifth wall portion is inclined downward from the curved wall portion 565b side (the arrow R direction side) toward the recessed portion 574g side (the arrow L direction side) described later. Formed. Thereby, the game ball sent to the upper surface of the 5th wall part 574 from the curved wall part 565b can be rolled to the recessed part 574g side. Furthermore, the fifth wall 574 includes a first receiving recess 574a and a second receiving recess 574b that are recessed downward on the rolling surface of the game ball.

  The first receiving recess 574a and the second receiving recess 574b are juxtaposed in the extending direction of the fifth wall 574. Further, the first receiving recess 574a and the second receiving recess 574b are set such that the recess width and the recess depth are larger than the diameter of the game ball. Furthermore, a fifth opening 571e that opens to the base plate 571 is formed inside the first receiving recess 574a and the second receiving recess 574b. Thereby, the game ball flowing into the first receiving recess 574a or the second receiving recess 574b passes through the fifth opening 571e and is sent to the back side of the base plate 571.

  The recessed portion 574g is formed above the downstream end portion (end portion on the arrow L direction side) of the fifth wall portion 574, and the recessed portion is provided with a game ball that rolls on the upper surface of the fifth wall portion 574. It can be made to flow inside 574g, and can be sent to the upper part of the 6th wall part 575 formed in the downward direction (arrow D direction) of the recessed part 574g.

  The sixth wall portion 575 is a portion that becomes a rolling surface of a game ball that rolls on the fifth wall portion 574 and is sent to the recessed portion 574g, and a game ball is formed downward from the lower surface of the fifth wall portion 574. The base plate 571 protrudes from the base plate 571 at a position separated from the diameter of the base plate 571 and extends in the left-right direction (arrow LR). The sixth wall portion 575 is formed such that the upper surface is inclined downward from the recessed portion 574g side (arrow L direction side) toward the above-described third wall portion 567 side. Thereby, the game ball sent to the upper surface of the sixth wall portion 575 from the recessed portion 574g can be rolled to the pitching path side formed by the third wall portion 567. The sixth wall portion 575 includes a third receiving recess 575a and a fourth receiving recess 575b that are recessed downward on the rolling surface of the game ball.

  The third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b are juxtaposed in the extending direction of the sixth wall portion 575. Further, the third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b are set such that the recess width and the recess depth are larger than the diameter of the game ball. Furthermore, a sixth opening 571f that opens to the base plate 571 is formed inside the third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b. Thereby, the game ball that has flowed into the third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b passes through the sixth opening 571f and is sent to the back side of the base plate 571.

  The third path member 580 includes a first covering member 581 disposed on the rear surface of the second path member 570 on the upper side in the gravity direction (arrow U direction side), and the lower side in the gravity direction of the second path member 570 (arrow). A second covering member 582 disposed on the back surface on the D direction side, a first drive unit 583 disposed between the first covering member 581 and the second covering member 582, and a second covering member. A second drive unit 584 disposed on the back surface of the member 582 is mainly provided.

  The first covering member 581 includes a curved portion 581a disposed on the back side of the first opening portion 571a and the fourth opening portion 571d described above, and a plate-like attachment portion 581b continuous to the lower side of the curved portion 581a. Is mainly provided.

  The curved portion 581a is formed to be curved in a U-shaped cross section in which the first opening portion 571a and the fourth opening portion 571d (second path member 570) side are opened, and the first rolling portion 576 is disposed inside the curved portion 581a. (See FIG. 24A). Further, the separation distance between the inner wall surface of the bending portion 581a and the protruding tip portion of the first rolling portion 576 is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball rolling on the first rolling part 576 can flow down along the inner wall of the curved part 581a and can be sent to the lower side of the first rolling part 581a. Therefore, the rolling time of the game ball can be extended by sending the game ball to the bending portion 581a that curves to the back side. As a result, even when the rolling surface of the game ball cannot be secured on a plane parallel to the game area of the game board 13, the rolling speed of the game ball can be slowed down.

  Further, the curved portion 581a is disposed at a position where the lower end is slightly higher than the lower inner edge of the fourth opening 571d. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the gaming ball that has flowed down from the first rolling portion 576 along the inner wall of the bending portion 581a and sent to the fourth opening portion 571d to flow back into the bending portion 581a.

  The attachment portion 581b is formed with two through holes 581b1 through which screws for fastening the first covering member 581 to the back surface of the second path member 570 are inserted. In addition, the attachment portion 581b includes a columnar body 551a that protrudes in a columnar shape toward the back side. The columnar body 551a has a screw hole at the tip for fastening a second unit 552, which will be described later, to the first unit 551. Accordingly, the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 can be fastened by screwing the screw inserted from the back side of the second unit 552 into the columnar body 551a.

  The second covering member 582 includes a second curved portion 582a disposed on the back side of the sixth opening 571f and a back side wall portion disposed on the back side of the first receiving recess 574a to the fourth receiving recess 575b. 582b.

  The second curved portion 582a is formed to be curved in a U-shaped cross section where the sixth opening 571f (second path member 570) side is opened (see FIG. 24C). Moreover, the 2nd bending part 582a equips the inner side of U character with the standing wall 582a1 standingly arranged toward the back side from the front side. Due to the standing wall 582a1, the internal space of the second bending portion 582a is formed next to the first space 582a2 on the left side in the front view (arrow L direction side) and the first space 582a2 with the standing wall 582a1 interposed therebetween. And the second space 582a3.

  The first space 582a2 and the second space 582a3 are spaces larger than the diameter of the game ball, and are formed from the front side toward the back side. The first space 582a2 and the second space 582a3 are connected on the back side. Further, the inner surface of the first space 582a2 is formed to be inclined downward toward the back side, and the inner surface of the second space 582a3 is formed to be inclined downward as it is directed to the front side. Thereby, the game ball sent from the recessed portion 571g to the second bending portion 582a is rolled to the back side due to the inclination of the first space 582a2, and the second bending portion 582a is bent at the end on the back side. Is sent to the second space 582a3, rolled to the front side by the inclination of the second space 582a3, passed through the opening of the sixth opening 571f, and sent to the front side of the base plate 571.

  The back side wall portion 582b is sent to the first receiving recess 574a to the fourth receiving recess 575b, and the pitching path for guiding the game balls passing through the fifth opening 571e and the sixth opening 571f below the special winning device 550. It is the wall part of the back side. Thereby, the game ball sent to the 1st receiving recessed part 574a-the 4th receiving recessed part 575b can be collect | recovered. Therefore, the game balls that have been sent to the first receiving recess 574a to the fourth receiving recess 575b, passed through the detection devices SE3 to SE6 described later, and have been given game value to the player again flow down the game area, and the game value Can be prevented from being given to the player again.

  The first drive unit 583 includes a first solenoid 583a having a shaft that is displaced in the front-rear direction by electric power, a first variable plate 583b connected to the shaft of the first solenoid 583a, the first solenoid 583a, and the first variable plate. A first protective member 583c surrounding the periphery of 583b.

  The first variable plate 583b is a rectangular plate member that is long in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction), and is displaced in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) in accordance with the displacement of the shaft of the first solenoid 583a. . Further, in a state where the first variable plate 583b is projected to the front side, the tip of the first variable plate 583b is inserted into the above-described fifth opening 571e, and the first receiving recess 574a and the second receiving recess. It is arranged on the upper side of 574b. Thereby, in a state where the first variable plate 583b is projected to the front side, the first variable plate 583b can prevent the inflow of game balls to the first receiving recess 574a and the second receiving recess 574b.

  The first protection member 583c is formed in a box shape that opens on the second path member 570 side, and a mechanism for connecting the shaft of the first solenoid 583a and the first variable plate 583b is disposed therein. The first protective member 583c includes a plurality of through holes 583c1 penetrating in the front-rear direction.

  The through hole 583c1 is a portion through which a screw for fastening the first drive unit 583 to the second path member 570 is inserted. The screw inserted through the through-hole 583c1 is inserted into the through-hole 581b1 of the first covering member 581 or the through-hole 582b1 of the second covering member 582, and is a hole formed in the second path member 570. Screwed together. Therefore, by arranging the first drive unit 583 on the second path member 570, the first covering member 581 and the second covering member 582 can be disposed on the second path member 570. Thereby, the fastening part of the screw of the 1st covering member 581 and the 2nd covering member 582 can be decreased, and manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  Further, since the first covering member 581 or the second covering member 582 can be sandwiched between the second path member 570 and the first drive unit 583, the first drive unit 583 can receive a special prize. When it is forcibly removed from the device 550, the first covering member 581 or the second covering member 582 and the second path member 570 are incompletely fastened, and the game ball is moved to the first covering member 581 or the second covering member 581. It is easy to make it impossible to pass through the covering member 582. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being continued in a state of being cheated.

  Similarly to the first drive unit 583, the second drive unit 584 includes a second solenoid 584a having a shaft that is displaced in the front-rear direction by electric power, a second variable plate 584b coupled to the shaft of the second solenoid 584a, A second protection member 584c covering the periphery of the second solenoid 584a and the second variable plate 584b.

  The second variable plate 584b is formed from a plate-like body that is long in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), and is bent and formed in a crank shape when viewed from the front. Further, in a state where the second variable plate 584b is projected to the front side, the tip of the second variable plate 584b is inserted into the sixth opening 571f described above, and the third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving are received. It arrange | positions above the recessed part 575b. Thereby, in the state where the second variable plate 584b is projected to the front side, the second variable plate 584b can prevent the game ball from flowing into the third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b.

  The second protective member 584c is formed in a box shape that opens on the second path member 570 side, and a mechanism for connecting the shaft of the second solenoid 584a and the second variable plate 584b is disposed therein. In addition, the second protection member 584c includes a back side wall portion 584c1 that covers the back side of the pitching path formed by the second wall portion 566 of the first path member 560. Thereby, not only can the ball path be formed by the back side wall part 584c1 and the second wall part 566, but the second path member 570 can be covered by the back side wall part 584c1 and the second wall part 566. As a result, an unauthorized member is inserted from the side surface of the first unit 551, and it is possible to easily prevent the detection devices SE3 to SE6 disposed on the second path member 570 from being cheated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 21 to FIG. 24, a description will be given of the pitch of a game ball that flows from the first receiving portion 561 into the first unit 551. FIG. 21 is a cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 taken along line XXI-XXI in FIG. FIG. 22 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 shown in FIG. FIG. 23 is a cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 taken along line XXIII-XXIII in FIG. 24A is a cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 along the line XXIVa-XXIVa in FIG. 21, and FIG. 24B is a cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 along the line XXIVb-XXIVb in FIG. FIG. 24C is a cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 taken along line XXIVc-XXIVc in FIG.

  The game balls that flow into the first unit flow down the main paths SK1 to SK6 of the game balls in the order of the main path SK1, the main path SK2, the main path SK3, the main path SK4, the main path SK5, and the main path SK6. Or, it flows into the sub route HK1 communicating with the main route SK3 from the main route SK3 in the middle of flowing down the main routes SK1 to SK6, and flows down the sub route HK1. Or, it flows into either the sub route HK2 or the sub route HK3 communicating with the main route SK5 from the main route SK5 on the way to the main route SK1 to the main route SK6, and flows down either the sub route HK2 or the sub route HK3. To do.

  The sub-paths HK1 to HK3 are provided with detection devices SE3 to SE6 that detect the passage of a game ball. The detection device SE3 to SE6 detects the game ball, and the player has a predetermined game value. Is granted. In this embodiment, a game value is given to the player by a predetermined number of prize balls.

  As shown in FIGS. 21 to 24, the main path SK1 is formed by the curved portion 581a of the first covering member 581 and the first rolling portion 576 of the second path member 570 (see FIG. 24A). It is a space and communicates the first opening 571a and the fourth opening 571d. As described above, the curved portion 581a is formed to be curved in a U-shaped cross section in which the first opening 571a and the fourth opening 571d (second path member 570) side are opened, and passes through the main path SK1. The ball can be detoured to the back side. Thereby, since the space in which the region in front view is limited (when the game ball passes inside the first opening 571a or the fourth opening 571d, the amount of movement of the game ball in the left-right direction can be reduced, It is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball passing through the main route SK1, thereby making it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball passing through the first unit 551, thereby enhancing the interest of the player. it can.

  In addition, as will be described later, the game ball that flows into the main route SK1 is given a predetermined game value to the player, so that it is possible to play the rolling of the game ball that may give the game value to the player. It can be made easy to visually recognize. As a result, it is possible to make it easier to give the player interest. The main route SK1 communicates with a main route SK2 described later, and a game ball passing through the main route SK1 can flow into the main route SK2.

  Further, the curved portion 581a of the main path SK1 is accommodated and disposed in the concave portion 86b2 (see FIG. 17) of the center frame 86 described above. Thereby, when the game ball is clogged in the main route SK1 (the flow is slow), the malfunction can be detected by the detection device 86b3 (see FIG. 17) and an error can be notified.

  Furthermore, the passage width of the main route SK1 is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball and set to be smaller than the opening through which the game ball of the detection devices SE3 to SE7 (see FIG. 23) passes. As a result, when a game ball (illegal game ball) having a diameter larger than the diameter (11 mm) of the reference game ball is manufactured, and the ball is illegal (game), the ball passes through the main path. It can be fastened inside SK1. Therefore, it is possible to suppress illegal game balls from flowing down to the detection devices SE3 to SE7 disposed on the downstream side of the main route SK1 and performing fraud. Further, by stopping the illegal game ball on the main route SK1, it is possible to detect the error (injustice) by detecting it by the detection device 86b3 (see FIG. 17). In this case, fraud means that an illegal game ball is fitted into one of the openings of the detection devices SE3 to SE7, and the detection devices SE3 to SE7 are allowed to continue detection to pay out the illegal game ball (game value). Is to get.

  The main path SK2 is a space formed between the first wall part 565 of the first path member 560 and the fourth wall part 573 of the second path member 570. The game ball flowing into the main path SK2 rolls down on the upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573. As described above, the fourth wall portion 573 extends in the left-right direction (the direction of the arrow LR) and is formed to be inclined downward as it is separated from the fourth opening portion 571d.

  Therefore, the above-described bending portion 581a (curving path toward the back side) is formed at a switching portion (a connecting portion between the main path SK1 and the main path SK2) of the game ball in the direction in which the game ball is sent. Loss of sight of game balls flowing down SK1 can be suppressed. That is, when a path that curves to the back side is formed in the middle of a linear ball-feeding path that extends in the left-right direction (for example, the main path SK2), the gaming ball that rolls at a constant acceleration along the curved path. Since the acceleration is changed (decreased), there is a possibility that the player loses sight of the game ball because the line of sight following the game ball precedes the game ball.

  On the other hand, since the rolling direction of the game ball is switched and a curved path to the back side is formed at a portion where the rolling speed of the game ball is originally slowed down, the player's eyes must precede the game ball. It is possible to suppress the player from losing sight of the game ball.

  Further, the curved portion 581a that is the inner wall of the main path SK1 is the left side (in the direction of the arrow L) of the first unit 551 that is disposed slightly to the right (in the direction of the arrow R) with respect to the central portion in the left-right direction of the game board 13. Side end). Therefore, a curved path (main path SK1) to the back side is formed on the side where the first unit 551 is easily visible from the player located in front of the game board 13, so that the player can move from the main path SK1 to the main path. It is easy to suppress losing sight of the game ball passing through SK2.

  The main route SK2 communicates with the curved route WK1, and communicates with a later-described main route SK3 via the curved route WK1. Thereby, the game ball passing through the main route SK2 flows into the main route SK3 via the curved route WK1. A detailed description of the curved path WK1 will be described later.

  The main path SK3 is a space formed between the fourth wall part 573 and the fifth wall part 574 of the second path member 570. The game balls that flow into the main path SK3 roll down on the upper surface of the fifth wall portion 574. In the main path SK3, the first variable plate 583b of the first drive unit 583 described above protrudes on the main path SK3 when protruding. In a state where the first variable plate 583b protrudes on the main path SK3, the game ball rolling on the upper portion of the fifth wall portion 574 rolls on the upper surface of the first variable plate 583b and is sent to the main path SK4. The

  On the other hand, in a state in which the first variable plate 583b is retracted from the main path SK3, the sub-path HK1 of the space formed inside the first receiving recess 574a and the second receiving recess 574b formed in the fifth wall portion 574. A game ball is introduced. The sub route HK1 is sent to the collection route formed by the back side wall portion 582b through the fifth opening 571e.

  As described above, the first unit 551 includes the first variable plate 583b that protrudes from or retracts from the pitching path of the game ball, and the main unit of the first unit 551 is displaced by the displacement of the first variable plate 583b. Since the game ball flowing down the route SK3 can be changed to the case where the game ball is guided to the sub route HK1 and the case where the game ball is guided to the main route SK4, the game ball flowing down the first unit 551 changes in the flow direction. Can be given.

  In this case, the game ball that flows into the sub route HK1 is given a predetermined game value to the player, so that the player can watch whether the game ball has flowed into the sub route HK1. Further, the first variable plate 583b is disposed in the middle of the pitching path formed in the first unit 551, and is displaced in the player's visual recognition direction (arrow FB direction). The displacement of 583b can be made difficult to visually recognize. As a result, the game balls flowing down by the first unit 551 can be watched, and the player can be easily given interest by the flow of game balls.

  In addition, the sub route HK1 is a main route SK3 for sending a game ball from the right side (arrow R direction side) to the left side (arrow L direction side) when viewed from the front, and a lower side of the main route SK3 and the game ball from the left side. It is formed in the 5th wall part 574 which forms between main path | route SK6 which pitches to the right side. Therefore, since the sub route HK1 is formed using the space between the game balls being sent left and right, it is possible to prevent the outer shape of the first unit 551 from increasing in the vertical direction. As a result, by reducing the outer shape of the first unit 551, the range in which the player can follow the game ball with his eyes can be narrowed, and the player can easily see the game ball flowing down the first unit 551. it can.

  The main path SK4 is a space formed by the recessed portion 571g and the protrusion 568 of the first path member 560. The game ball flowing into the main path SK4 contacts the protrusion 568 and is sent to the inside (rear side) of the recessed portion 571g, and then rolls around the protrusion 568 along the inner surface of the recessed portion. The ball is sent to the outside (front side) of the installation part. That is, the game ball is rolled so as to bypass the protrusion 568. The main route SK4 communicates with the main route SK5, and a game ball passing through the main route SK4 can flow into the main route SK5.

  The main path SK5 is a space formed by the first space 582a2 and the second space 582a3 of the second covering member 582 of the third path member 580 described above. As described above, the game ball flowing into the main path SK5 rolls inside the first space 582a2 to the back side and then rolls inside the second space 582a3 to the front side. In the main path SK5, the second variable plate 584b of the second drive unit 584 described above projects on the main path SK5 when protruding. In a state where the second variable plate 584b protrudes on the main path SK5, a game ball that rolls inside the second bending portion 582a is sent to the main path SK6.

  On the other hand, in a state in which the second variable plate 584b is retracted from the main path SK5, the second receiving plate HK2 is formed in the third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b formed in the sixth wall 575. A game ball flows down. The sub route HK2 is sent to the collection route formed by the back side wall portion 582b through the sixth opening 571f.

  Further, as described above, the second bending portion 582a configuring the main route SK5 is formed to bend toward the back side, and the game ball passing through the main route SK5 can be detoured toward the back side. Thereby, even when the area | region in front view is set to the predetermined limited space, the distance which a game ball can roll can be lengthened.

  Further, the second variable plate 584b is configured to project or retreat with a part of the upstream side of the main path SK5 and a part of the downstream side of the main path SK5, and the main path SK5. Since a curved path toward the back side is formed between the upstream side of the main path SK5 and the downstream side of the main path SK5, the game ball passing through the main path SK5 has a time during which there is a possibility that game value may be given to the player. Can be long. As a result, it is possible to lengthen the time for providing the player with interest.

  The sub route HK3 communicates with the communication portion between the main route SK4 and the main route SK5. The sub route HK3 is a space formed between the second wall portion 566 of the first route member 560 and the back side wall portion 584c1 of the third route member 580.

  The sub route HK3 is in a direction different from the flow direction of the game ball when the game ball flows from the main route SK4 into the main route SK5 (right direction in front view (arrow R direction)) (left direction in front view (arrow L direction)). In addition, the lower inner edge of the inflow port of the sub route HK3 is set below (in the direction of arrow D) below the second variable plate 584b.

  Here, when the game ball normally flows from the main route SK4 to the main route SK5 (in a state where an external force other than gravity does not act), the game ball flows into the main route SK5 or the sub route HK2. The On the other hand, when the game ball flows from the main path SK4 into the sub-path HK2, the second variable plate 584b is extended and the front surface of the second variable plate 584b comes into contact with the game ball, so that an external force other than gravity is applied to the game ball. When the action is applied, the game ball is pushed out to the inlet of the sub route HK3 by the second variable plate 584b and flows into the sub route HK3.

  Therefore, the first unit 551 includes the second variable plate 584b that protrudes or retreats from the pitching path of the game ball, and the main path SK4 of the first unit 551 is displaced by the displacement of the second variable plate 584b. Alternatively, the game ball flowing down the main route SK5 is guided to any one of the main route SK5, the sub route HK2, and the sub route HK3, so that it is possible to change the flow direction of the game ball flowing down the first unit 551.

  In this case, since a predetermined game value is given to the player by the game ball flowing into the sub route HK2 or the sub route HK3, it is noted whether the game ball has flowed into the sub route HK2 or the sub route HK3. Can be made. In addition, since the second variable plate 584b is arranged in the middle of the pitching path formed in the first unit 551, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the displacement of the plate member 584b2. As a result, the game balls flowing down the first unit 551 can be watched, and the player can be easily given interest by the flow of game balls.

  Further, as described above, on the upstream side of the main route SK4, the route through which the game ball flows down is switched by the first variable plate 583b. Therefore, a game ball that does not flow into the upstream side sub route HK1 and is not given game value to the player can flow further downstream and flow into the sub route HK2 or HK3. Therefore, by passing the game ball that may have been given game value to the player once through the switching part of the flow-down path, the player has the desire to flow into the sub-paths HK2 and HK3 again. be able to.

  Further, a main path SK4 that is curved to the back side is disposed between the main path SK3 and the main path SK5 where the path of the game ball is switched. Therefore, the game ball can be rolled within a predetermined range in front view, and the player can easily recognize the position of the game ball. That is, after flowing down the main route SK3, the player recognizes the position of the game ball through the main route SK4, so that the player pays attention to the game ball rolling on the main route SK5 connected downstream of the main route SK4. It can be made easy. As a result, it is easy for the player to visually recognize the game balls in which the game balls flow into the sub-paths HK2 and HK3, and the player's interest can be improved.

  In addition, inclined surfaces 584b1 (see FIG. 24C) that are inclined toward the back side are formed at the left and right end portions on the front side of the second variable 584b toward the ends in the left-right direction. As a result, when the second variable plate 584b is extended at the timing when the game ball flows from the main route SK4 into the sub route HK2, and the tip surface of the second variable plate 584b comes into contact with the game ball, the inclined surface 584b1. Thus, the game ball can be pushed out to the inlet side of the sub route HK3. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being sandwiched between the second variable plate 584b and the first route member 560 by the inclined surface 584b1 and the sub route HK2, and in the flow down direction due to the difference in timing at which the game ball flows down. A plurality of paths (three paths in the present embodiment) can be formed.

  The main path SK6 is a space surrounded by the third wall portion 567 of the first path member 560. The game balls flowing down the main route SK6 are sent to the game area of the game board 13. Therefore, when the game ball that has flowed into the first receiving portion 561 is not flowed into the first receiving recess 574a to the fourth receiving recess 575b, no game value is given to the player, and the game board 13 is connected from the main path SK6. The ball is sent to the game area and collected from the out port 71 formed in the game board 13.

<Guide means for displacing the game ball in the front-rear direction>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 25 to 28, the flow of the game ball from the main route SK2 to the main route SK3 will be described. FIGS. 25A and 26A are partially enlarged views of the first unit 551 in the range XXVa of FIG. 21, and FIGS. 25B and 26B are XXVb of FIG. 25A. It is sectional drawing of the 1st unit 551 in the -XXVb line. 27A is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 along the line XXVIIa-XXVIIa in FIG. 25A, and FIG. 27B is the first unit along the line XXVIIb-XXVIIb in FIG. FIG. 27C is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 along the line XXVIIc-XXVIIc in FIG. FIG. 28A is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 along the line XXVb-XXVb in FIG. 25A, and FIG. 28B is the first unit along the line XXVIIIb-XXVIIIb in FIG. 5 is a schematic cross-sectional view of 551. FIG. In FIG. 26, a game ball flowing down the curved path WK1 is shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 25 to 28, the main path SK2, the main path SK3, and the curved path WK1 are formed in the base plate 571 of the second path member 570 as a first recess recessed in an arc shape in cross section toward the back side. 571h, second recess 571i and third recess 571j, a first step 571k protruding stepwise from the inner wall on the main path SK2 to the front side, and a second step protruding stepwise from the inner wall on the main path SK3 Part 571m.

  The front plate 564 of the first path member 560 has a first convex portion 564b, a second convex portion 564c, and a third convex portion 564d at positions facing the first concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i, and the third concave portion 571j, respectively. Projected.

  The facing dimension L11 (see FIG. 28 (a)) between the second concave portion 571i and the second convex portion 564c is set to a value larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the facing distance between the front plate 564 and the base plate 571. Is set to a value smaller than the distance dimension L12 (see FIG. 28A). Thereby, the first concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i, the third concave portion 571j, and the game ball sent between the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion 564d are opposed to the first concave portion. 571h, the second concave portion 571i and the third concave portion 571j, and the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion 564d are brought into contact with each other to slow down the rolling (downflow) speed of the game ball. it can.

  Further, the dimension between the first concave part 571h and the first convex part 564b and the dimension between the third concave part 571j and the third convex part 564d are the dimension between the second concave part 571i and the second convex part 564c. The distance is set substantially the same as L11.

  Further, the protruding front end surfaces of the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion 564d are opposed to the front surface of the base plate 571 excluding the first concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i, and the third concave portion 571j. The distance dimension L13 (see FIG. 28A) is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the game balls sent between the first concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i and the third concave portion 571j, and the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c and the third convex portion 564d are opposed to the first convex portion. It can be made to collide with the part 564b, the 2nd convex part 564c, and the 3rd convex part 564d. As a result, the rolling (downflow) speed of the game ball can be reduced.

  Further, in this case, the game balls that are in contact with the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion 564d flow down inside the first concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i, and the third concave portion 571j. . Accordingly, it is possible to guide the flowing game ball in the direction in which the first recess 571h, the second recess 571i, and the third recess 571j are provided.

  The step portion 571k protrudes to the front side from the inner wall on the back side of the main path SK2. Further, the step portion 571k is formed on the downstream side in the main route SK2. The stepped portion 571k is set such that the upstream end of the main path SK2 protrudes from the front surface of the base plate 571 to the front side, and the downstream end is located at the same position as the back surface of the curved path WK1. Is set. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the main route SK2 can be brought into contact with the stepped portion 571k and moved to the front side.

  Further, the step portion 571k is formed as an inclined surface in which an upstream end projects from the upstream side toward the downstream side toward the front side. As a result, the game ball that flows down the main path SK2 and comes into contact with the upstream end of the stepped portion 571k can flow down to the downstream side while being guided to the front side.

  Furthermore, the step portion 571k has an upstream end formed on the upstream side of the main path SK2 with respect to the first convex portion 564b formed on the front plate 564. Thereby, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball guided to the front side to come into contact with the step portion 571k to come into contact with the first convex portion 564b.

  The first recess 571h is recessed in the base plate 571 constituting the main path SK2, and is formed in an elliptical shape that is long in the horizontal direction (arrow LR direction) when viewed from the front. The first recess 571h is formed in the base plate 571 at a position protruding to the front side by the step 571k. The depth of the recess on the back side at the center in the vertical direction of the first recess 571h is set to be substantially the same as the height dimension L22 (see FIG. 27B) on the front side of the step 571k. Accordingly, the game ball that is sent through the main path SK2 without being violated is allowed to flow inside the first recess 571h without being displaced in the concave direction of the first recess 571h (back side (arrow B direction side)). be able to.

  On the other hand, the game ball sent on the main route SK2 in a violent state is brought into contact with the upstream end of the step portion 571k, guided to the front side of the main route SK2, and the first protrusion of the front plate 564. It abuts on the part 564b. Thereby, the game ball can be sent to the inside of the first recess 571h while suppressing the rampage of the game ball.

  Further, the first recess 571h is a height dimension Y8 from the rolling surface of the game ball (the surface on the arrow U direction side of the fourth wall portion 573) on the upstream side of the main path SK2 to the recessed bottom surface in the orthogonal direction. FIG. 25 (a)) is set for the radius of the game ball, and the concave in the direction orthogonal to the rolling surface of the game ball (the surface on the arrow U direction side of the fourth wall portion 573) on the downstream side of the main path SK2. A height dimension Y9 (see FIG. 25A) to the installation bottom is set higher than the radius of the game ball. As a result, when the game ball flowing down the main path SK2 is sent along the first recess 571h, a resistance in the direction of lifting upward in the gravitational direction (arrow U direction side) is applied to the game ball so that the game ball is rotated. The moving speed can be reduced. As a result, the rolling speed of the game ball flowing into the curved path WK1 can be made sufficiently small, and the game ball can be made to smoothly flow down.

  The radius X11 (see FIG. 27B) in the cross section of the first recess 571h is set to a value larger than the radius of the game ball, and when the game ball is sent inside the first recess 571h, A game ball can be brought into contact with the inner wall. Thereby, it can suppress that the contact part of the game ball contact | abutted with the 1st recessed part 571h becomes two places, and can suppress that the resistance with respect to rolling of the game ball by the contact part increasing becomes large. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from stopping on the main route SK2.

  The first convex portion 564b formed at a position facing the first concave portion 571h is the direction in which the game ball is sent from the upstream end of the first concave portion 571h (in the direction of arrow R in FIG. 27B). The distance value is set to a size smaller than the radius of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the main path SK2 can be easily brought into contact with the first convex portion 564b and sent inside the first concave portion 571h.

  The second recess 571i is recessed in the base plate 571 of the curved path WK1, and is formed in an elliptical shape whose outer shape in front view is long in the direction of gravity (arrow UD direction). In addition, the second recessed portion 571i is set such that the center position in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) in the front view is an intermediate position of the curved path WK1. Further, the second concave portion 571i is formed at a central position in a direction where the central position in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) in the front view is orthogonal to the pitching direction of the curved path WK1.

  The main path SK1, the curved path WK1, and the main path SK2 are all set to have the same width dimension L18 (see FIG. 25 (a)) perpendicular to the direction in which the game ball is sent in the front view. The width dimension L18 is set to approximately 1.1 times the diameter of the game ball.

  Further, the first width of the first recess 571h, the second recess 571i, and the third recess 571j is set to be approximately ½ of the above-described width dimension L18 in the short side direction when viewed from the front. Thereby, the center of the game ball passing through each path (main path SK1, curved path WK1, and main path SK2) can be passed through the front side of the first recess 571h, the second recess 571i, and the third recess 571j. The game balls can be easily fed into the first recess 571h, the second recess 571i, and the third recess 571j.

  The step portion 571m protrudes from the inner wall on the back side of the main path SK3 to the front side. Further, the step portion 571m is formed on the upstream side in the route of the main route SK3. The step 571m is set such that the downstream end of the main path SK3 protrudes to the front side of the base plate 571, and the upstream end is set to the same position as the back of the curved path WK1. The Thereby, it is possible to suppress the game ball flowing down the main route SK3 from flowing back (bounces back) upstream beyond the step portion 571m after being sent downstream from the step portion 571m.

  The third recess 571j is formed in the base plate 571 constituting the inner wall of the main path SK3, and is formed in an elliptical shape that is long in the horizontal direction (arrow L-R direction) when viewed from the front. Moreover, the 3rd recessed part 571j is formed in the base board 571 in the position protruded to the front side by the step part 571m. The depth of the recess on the back side at the center of the third recess 571j in the vertical direction is set to be substantially the same as the height L23 (see FIG. 27C) to the front side of the step 571m. Thereby, it is possible to easily cause the game balls sent along the main route KR3 to flow out from the inside to the outside of the third recess 571j.

  Furthermore, the end of the third recess 571j on the downstream side of the main path SK3 is the end on the upstream side of the main path SK3 of the first variable plate 583b that switches the path that flows down to the sub-path HK1 (described in the direction of the arrow R). It is arrange | positioned in the gravity direction upper direction (arrow U direction) of an edge part. Thereby, when the stop position of the first variable plate 583b is displaced upward in the gravitational direction due to the displacement (when the variable plate 583b is disposed above the downstream end of the curved wall portion 565b), the main path A game ball passing through SK3 is sent along the inner surface of the third recess 571j, so that it can be sent without being caught by the first variable plate 583b. As a result, it is not necessary to dispose the first variable plate 583b below in the portion where the first wall portion 565 and the first variable plate 583b are adjacent to each other, and it is possible to prevent the vertical dimension of the first unit 551 from increasing. .

  Further, in this case, the third recess 571j is formed in the horizontal direction (arrow LR direction) in the longitudinal direction when viewed from the front, and is separated upward from the game ball flowing down the main path SK3. The resistance in the upward lifting direction can be applied to the game ball sent from the first wall portion 565 to the first variable plate 583b. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game ball sent from the first wall portion 565 to the first variable plate 583b from being caught on the first variable plate 583b.

  Furthermore, the first unit 551 receives a main path SK2 for sending a game ball to one side in the horizontal direction (arrow R direction side) with respect to the game board 13 in a front view, and a game ball sent from the main path SK2. A main path SK3 that sends a ball to the other side in the horizontal direction opposite to the guide direction of the main path SK2, and a curved path WK1 that connects one side of the main path SK2 and the main path SK3, and the curved path WK1 Since guide means (second convex portion 564c and second concave portion 571i) for sending a game ball to at least one of the front side and the back side with respect to the game board are provided on the inner wall on the front side and the back side with respect to the game board, The game ball passing through the curved path WK1 can be moved to the front side or the back side (the front-rear direction of the game board 13 in the front view).

  Accordingly, the flow of the game ball accelerated by rolling on the main route SK2 (first route) is more than when the pitch of the game ball passing through the curved route WK1 is formed in the same plane in the front-rear direction in the front view. You can slow down. Therefore, the game ball that collides with the inner wall of the curved path WK1 returns to the main path SK2 by the amount that the flow velocity of the game ball can be slowed down, or the pitching direction of the main path SK2 inside the curved path WK1 (horizontal direction in front view ( (Swaying in the direction of arrow LR))) can be suppressed. Thereby, the player's line of sight can follow the game ball passing through the curved path WK1 in a certain direction. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball sent to the curved path WK1.

  In addition, since the game ball can be prevented from swinging (blurring) in the horizontal direction (left-right direction in the front view) with respect to the game board 13 in the front view, the curved path WK1 connecting the main path SK2 and the main path SK3 correspondingly. It is not necessary to lengthen the path and suppress the swinging of the game ball, and the path of the curved path WK1 can be shortened. As a result, the first unit 551 can be stored in a predetermined area with respect to the game board 13, and a space for arranging the first unit 551 with respect to the game board 13 can be secured.

  Furthermore, the first recessed portion 571h has a recessed width that increases in the direction (arrow UD direction) orthogonal to the flow-down direction of the main path SK2 toward the upstream side of the main path SK2. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the main route SK2 can be easily received in the first recess 571h. Further, since the first recessed portion 571h is set to have a smaller recessed width toward the downstream side of the main path SK2, the game ball received in the first recessed portion 571h can be easily pulled out from the same position. That is, the first concave portion 571h can easily receive the game ball on the upstream side of the main route SK2, and can easily escape the game ball from the same position on the downstream side of the main route SK2. As a result, it is possible to easily send the game ball to the second recess 571i of the curved path WK1 communicated downstream of the main path SK2.

  In this case, the concave end portion of the first recess 571h in the flow-down direction (arrow R direction) of the main path SK2 is the rolling surface (fourth) of the main path SK2 in the rolling direction of the game ball sent through the main path SK2. It is formed at a position exceeding the upper surface of the wall portion 573. Therefore, it is possible to make the game ball that escapes from the first recess 571h less susceptible to the rolling surface of the main path SK2. As a result, it is possible to easily send the game ball that has escaped from the first recess 571h to the second recess 571i of the curved path WK1.

  Further, the main path SK2 is located inside the path from the fourth opening 571d side toward the curved wall 565b side (that is, from the front side left side (arrow L direction side) to the front side right side (arrow R direction side)). The space is formed to be inclined toward the front plate 564 side (front side (arrow F direction side)). The main path SK2 is formed such that its rolling surface (the surface on the upper side in the gravity direction of the fourth wall portion 573) is inclined downward toward the front side. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the main path SK2 can be easily rolled on the front plate 564 side, and the game ball can be easily brought into contact with the first convex portion 564b formed on the front plate 564. As a result, it is possible to easily slow down the rolling speed of the game ball with the first convex portion 564b, and it is possible to suppress the game ball flowing down the main route SK2 from flowing back through the main route SK2 due to the reaction force colliding with the curved wall portion 565b. . As a result, it is possible to stably flow down the game ball at the change location of the game ball sending direction.

  The second recess 571i has an upper end (end in the arrow U direction) drawn in a straight line along the rolling trajectory at the center of the game ball rolling on the main path SK2 (fourth wall 573). It is formed at a position in contact with the virtual line IL3 (see FIG. 25A). Thereby, it is possible to make it easier for the second concave portion 571i to accept the game ball that is sent through the main route SK2 at a relatively high speed and flows into the curved route WK1.

  A second concave portion 571i and a second convex portion 564c are formed at a change location (curved path WK1) in the game ball sending direction. As described above, the front surface of the base plate 571 excluding the projecting tip surfaces of the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion 564d, and the first concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i, and the third concave portion 571j. Since the distance dimension L13 between the two and the opposite (see FIG. 28A) is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball, the game ball flowing down between the second concave portion 571i and the second convex portion 564c is second. It can be pushed into the second recess 571i by contacting the projection 564c. Therefore, the game ball flowing into the main path SK3 (exiting between the second concave portion 571i and the second convex portion 564c) can flow down along the arc of the inner surface of the second concave portion 571i.

  Here, the game ball sent from the main route SK2 to the curved route WK1 can easily flow down the position of the game ball on the main route SK2 close to the rolling direction. Therefore, the game ball flowing down inside the second recess 571i comes into contact with the inner surface of the second recess 571i on the right side of the front view (arrow R direction side). Therefore, the direction in which the game balls flow into the main path SK3 can be easily directed from the main path SK3 toward the flow-down direction (from the curved wall portion 565b side to the recessed portion 571g (see FIG. 21) side). As a result, it is possible to prevent the flow of the game ball from colliding with the curved wall portion 565b and temporarily stopping the flow down at the place where the game ball is changed in the direction in which the game ball is sent (see FIG. 28).

  Furthermore, since the direction in which the game ball is sent from the curved path WK1 to the main path SK3 can be directed in the direction toward the flow down of the main path SK3, the force with which the game ball collides with the curved wall 565b is reduced. Can do. As a result, damage to the curved wall portion 565b due to repeated collision of the game ball with the curved wall portion 565b can be suppressed.

  The first convex portion 564b is formed in the first path member 560 disposed on the front side, and the first concave portion 571h is formed in the second path member 570 disposed on the back side.

  Here, when a concave portion (a concave portion corresponding to the first concave portion 571h of the second path member 570) is formed in the first path member 560 toward the front side, the first path member 560 is provided by the amount of the concave section. It is necessary to increase the plate thickness. Therefore, as the plate thickness of the first path member 560 increases, the permeability of the first path member 560 deteriorates, and it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the game ball passing through the first unit 551.

  In addition, when the recessed portion is formed on the back surface of the bulging portion that partially bulges in front of the first path member 560, the gaming board 13 is in proportion to the bulging portion bulging on the front side of the first path member 560. It is necessary to increase the gap between the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) disposed on the front side of the glass. Therefore, as the first path member 560 moves away from the glass unit 16, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the game ball passing through the inside of the first path member 560.

  In contrast, the first convex portion 564b is formed on the first path member 560 disposed on the front side, and the first concave portion 571h is formed on the second path member 570 disposed on the back side. The thickness of the first path member 560 disposed on the front side can be reduced. Moreover, since the part which protrudes partially in the front side of the 1st path | route member 560 is not formed, the 1st path | route member 560 can be arrange | positioned close to the glass unit 16. FIG. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball passing through the inside of the first path member 560.

  The second convex part 564c is located below the main path SK2 (upper surface of the fourth wall part 573) in the gravitational direction (arrow D direction) and descends in substantially the same direction as the rolling direction of the main path SK2 in front view. Inclined. Thereby, the game ball flowing down between the opposing portions of the second convex portion 564c and the second concave portion 571i is guided to the region on the right side (arrow R direction side) in front view of the second concave portion 571i by the inclination of the second convex portion 564c. can do. As described above, the second recessed portion 571i is formed with a curved concave surface, so that the game ball flowing down in contact with the inner side of the region on the right side (arrow R direction side) of the second recessed portion 571i is viewed from the front. The ball can be sent in the flow direction of the main path SK3 (from the curved wall portion 565b side toward the recessed portion 571g (see FIG. 21) side). As a result, the inflow of game balls from the curved path WK1 to the main path SK3 can be made smooth.

  Further, the second recessed portion 571i has an imaginary line IL4 (linearly drawn along the rolling trajectory of the center of the game ball whose lower end (arrow D direction side) in the front view rolls on the main path SK3. It is formed at a position in contact with FIG. Thereby, the height of the center of the game ball discharged from the downstream end of the second recess 571i can be set on the virtual line IL4. As described above, in the present embodiment, the game ball discharged from the second recess 571i is sent in the flow direction of the main path SK3 (from the curved wall portion 565b side to the recessed portion 571g (see FIG. 21) side). Therefore, the game ball discharged from the second recess 571i abuts on the inner surface of the main path SK3 or the curved path WK1, and the ball sent to the main path SK3 collides with the inner wall of the curved path WK1. It is possible to suppress stagnation inside these routes.

  The direction in which the game ball flows into the main route SK3 can be directed in the direction of the main route SK3 in a position close to the rolling surface of the main route SK3. Thereby, it can suppress that the game ball which flows in into the main path | route SK3 from the curved path | route WK1 is sent to the direction orthogonal to the pitch direction of the game ball | bowl of the curved path | route WK1. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game ball sent to the main route SK3 from colliding with the inner wall of the curved route WK1 and stagnating.

<Disposing the first member to which a high game value is given on the front side>
Next, the configuration of the second unit 552 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 31. FIG. 29A is a front view of the second unit 552, and FIG. 29B is a rear view of the second unit 552. 30 is an exploded perspective front view of the second unit 552, and FIG. 31 is an exploded perspective rear view of the second unit 552.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 to 31, the second unit 552 includes a fourth path member 610 disposed on the first unit 551 side (front side (arrow F direction side)) and the fourth path member 610. A fifth ball member 620 disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) and a game ball pitching path are formed between the fifth path member 620 and the fifth path member 620 disposed on the back side of the fifth path member 620. And a decoration member 650 disposed on a side surface of the second unit 552.

  The fourth path member 610 is attached to the back side (arrow B direction side) of the first unit 551 via the center frame 86 described above. The fourth path member 610 stands on the first unit 551 side (front side (arrow F direction side)) from the end of the mounting plate 611 formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular plate when viewed from the front. The side wall part 612 is provided, and the first communication path 615 and the second communication path 616 that communicate with the internal space to the second rolling part 577 and the third rolling part 578 of the first unit 551 are provided.

  The attachment plate 611 is recessed in a circular shape on the first unit 551 side (front side (arrow F direction side)), and an insertion portion 617 in which a through hole is formed in the recessed bottom surface, and a fifth path member 620. A path-side fastening portion 618 and a decorative-side fastening portion 619 that are provided in a circular shape on the side (rear side (arrow B direction side)) and in which a hole into which a screw is screwed is formed on the projected tip surface. An opening 613 opened at the center of the plate 611 and a second insertion part 614 opened outside the opening 613 are provided.

  The insertion portion 617 is a portion through which the tip of a screw for fastening the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 is inserted, and is formed at a plurality of locations (three locations in the present embodiment) of the mounting plate 611.

  The path-side fastening portion 618 is a portion into which a screw inserted into an insertion hole 632 of a sixth path member 630 described later is screwed, and is formed at a position facing the insertion hole 632. As a result, the sixth path member 630 can be fastened to the fourth path member 610.

  The decorative side fastening portion 619 is a portion into which a screw inserted into a fastening hole 652 formed in the decorative member 650 described later is screwed, and is formed at a position facing the fastening hole 652. Thereby, the decorative member 650 can be fastened to the fourth path member 610.

  The opening 613 is formed at a position facing the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a disposed in the first unit 551. Thus, when the fourth path member 610 is disposed on the back surface of the first unit 551, the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a can be disposed inside the opening 613. Accordingly, when the fourth path member 610 is disposed on the back surface of the first unit 551, the fourth path member 610 can be prevented from increasing in the front-rear direction, and the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a can be surrounded. It can be surrounded by a fourth path member 610.

  The first communication path 615 and the second communication path 616 are formed in a U shape with the upper side (arrow U direction side) opened in a front view and extended in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). . The first communication path 615 and the second communication path 616 are configured such that the front end is in contact with the back side of the second rolling part 577 and the third rolling part 578 of the first unit 551 and the back side. The end portion on the side is in contact with the front side of the end portions of the first inlet port 625 and the second inlet port 626 of the fifth path member 620 described later. Further, the first communication path 615 and the second communication path 616 are formed to be inclined downward from the first unit 551 side toward the fifth path member 620. Thereby, the game balls sent to the first communication path 615 and the second communication path 616 from the second rolling part 577 and the third rolling part 578 of the first unit 551 are transferred to the first communication path 615 and the second communication path 615. The communication path 616 can be rolled to flow into the first inlet 625 and the second inlet 626 of the fifth path member 620.

  The second insertion portion 614 is a hole through which a screw that is screwed into the screw hole 86b4 of the protruding portion 86b is inserted when the fourth path member 610 is fastened to the protruding portion 86b of the center frame 86. It is formed at a position corresponding to the screw hole 86b4 (see FIG. 35) formed in 86b. Accordingly, the fourth path member 610 can be disposed on the back surface of the protruding portion 86b of the center frame 86.

  When the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are fastened, the side wall 612 includes a side surface of the first solenoid 583a and a second solenoid 584a that are disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the first unit 551. This is a plate member that covers the side surfaces of the mounting plate 611, and is erected from the entire end portion of the mounting plate 611 to the first unit 551 side (front side (arrow F direction side)). Note that the standing dimension of the side wall portion 612 on the front side (the first unit 551 side) is set to a length that makes contact with the protruding portion 86 b of the center frame 86. Thereby, since the side wall part 612 is arrange | positioned between the 1st unit 551 and the 2nd unit 552, it can suppress that a clearance gap is formed between the 1st unit 551 and the 2nd unit 552. As a result, it is possible to suppress unauthorized objects from being inserted between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552.

  The fifth path member 620 includes a plate member 621 formed from a substantially rectangular plate in front view, a first inlet 625 and a second inlet 626 opened in the plate member 621, and the periphery of the second inlet 626. From the periphery of the first inlet 625 and the second standing wall 623 erected on the sixth path member 630 side (back side (arrow B direction side)) from below the second inlet 626. A first standing wall 624 erected on the sixth path member 630 side across the lower part of the inflow port 625 and a fastened part 627 projecting from the plate member 621 to the sixth path member 630 side are mainly used. Prepare for.

  The plate member 621 is formed in an outer shape smaller than the outer shape of the fourth path member 610 when viewed from the front, and is disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the fourth path member 610. Further, the plate member 621 includes a central opening 622 that is opened at the central portion in a front view. The central opening 622 is formed larger than the outer shape of the second solenoid 584a in the rear view, and is formed at a position corresponding to the second solenoid 584a. Accordingly, when the plate member 621 (fifth path member 620) is disposed on the back side of the fourth path member 610, the second solenoid 584a inserted through the inside of the opening 613 of the fourth path member 610 is centered. It can be arranged inside the opening 622.

  As described above, the first inflow port 625 and the second inflow port 626 are connected to the fifth path member 620 and the sixth path member, respectively, with the game balls interlocking with the first communication path 615 and the second communication path 616 of the fourth path member 610. This is a portion (opening opening) that is received between 630 facing each other.

  The fastened portion 627 is a portion for screwing a tip of a screw inserted through a fastening hole 633 formed in a sixth path member 630 described later, and is formed at a position corresponding to the fastening hole 633. As a result, the fifth path member 620 and the sixth path member 630 are fastened. Further, the projecting dimension of the fastened portion 627 to the sixth path member 630 side is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, a gap is formed between the fifth path member 620 and the sixth path member 630 so that the game ball can flow down.

  The first standing wall 624 is a wall that guides a game ball that flows between the first inflow port 625 and the fifth path member 620 and the sixth path member 630, and extends downward and includes a first wall. 2 connected to the standing wall 623. The second standing wall 623 is a wall that guides the game ball that has flowed into the fifth path member 620 from the second inflow port, and extends in the vertical direction of the plate member 621. In addition, the description about the pitching path | route formed by the 1st standing wall 624 and the 2nd standing wall 623 is mentioned later.

  The sixth path member 630 includes a base plate 631 formed from a substantially rectangular plate when viewed from the front, and a second central opening 634 opened to the base plate 631 at a position facing the central opening 622 of the fifth path member 620. And an insertion hole 632 and a fastening hole 633 that are formed to penetrate around the second central opening 634 of the base plate 631.

  The second central opening 634 is formed in substantially the same size as the central opening 622 of the fifth path member 620 in a front view, and when the fifth path member 620 and the sixth path member 630 are combined, The fifth path member 620 communicates with the central opening 622. Thus, when the second unit 552 is disposed on the back side of the first unit 551, the first solenoid 583a of the first unit 551 can be disposed inside the second central opening 634.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the pitching path formed by the fifth path member 620 will be described. 32 is a cross-sectional view of the second unit 552 taken along the line XXXII-XXXII in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 32, the second unit 552 is formed surrounded by the sub-path HK4 formed by being surrounded by the first standing wall 624 of the fifth path member 620 and the second standing wall 623. And a sub route HK5.

  The sub route HK4 extends downward from the first inflow port 625, then bends toward the sub route HK5 described later, and communicates with the sub route HK5. In addition, in the sub route HK4, a detection device SE7 that detects the passage of the game ball is disposed in a portion extending downward. Thereby, it can be detected that the game ball has passed through the sub route HK4. Further, when the detection device SE7 detects the passage of the game ball, a predetermined game value is given to the player (in this embodiment, a game ball prize ball).

  In the present embodiment, the number of game balls (for example, three) awarded to the player as the game ball passes through the detection device SE7 is the detection device SE3 disposed in the first unit 551. The number of game balls (for example, 15) awarded to the player as the game ball passes through .about.SE6 is reduced. That is, the game value given to the player as it passes through the detection device SE7 is given to the player as the game ball passes through the detection devices SE3 to SE6 arranged in the first unit 551. It is set higher than the game value to be played. This makes it easier to focus on the game ball passing through the first unit 551. As a result, it is possible to make it easier to give the player interest.

  The sub route HK5 extends downward from the second inflow port 626 and communicates with the recovery route of the pachinko machine 10 below the second unit 552. Therefore, the game balls flowing down the sub route HK5 are collected without giving a game value to the player. Further, the game balls detected by the detection device SE7 after flowing down the sub route HK4 are sent to the sub route HK5 and collected by the pachinko machine 10.

  The special prize-winning device 550 includes a first unit 551 that is formed of a material that can transmit light and is disposed on the front side of the gaming area, and a second unit that is disposed on the back side of the first unit 551. 552, the first unit 551 includes a first receiving portion 561 capable of entering a game ball, and the second unit 552 includes a second receiving portion 562 and a third receiving portion capable of entering a game ball. The game ball that enters the first receiving unit 561 is higher in game value than the game ball that enters the second receiving unit 562 and the third receiving unit 563 (payout of game balls). Is granted.

  Therefore, the handling of the game ball sending paths of the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 is complicatedly formed (for example, the pitching path of the first unit 551 and the pitching path of the second unit 552 are front-rear direction in front view). Compared to the case where the game balls flow down to the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 at the same timing, it is possible to make it easier for the player to watch the game balls flowing down the first unit 551. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the first unit 551 including the first receiving unit 561 having a high game value. As a result, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the game ball passing through a route where a high game value is given to the player, and thus it is easy to improve the interest of the player.

  In addition, an inflow port (first receiving unit 561) for sending game balls to the first unit 551 and an inflow port (second receiving unit 562 and the third receiving port) for sending game balls to the second unit 552. Since the receiving portion 563) is formed in an adjacent position, it flows into the first unit 551 to which a high game value is given, or flows into the second unit 552 to which a low game value is given, It is possible to make it difficult for the player to make a decision until the inflow. As a result, it is possible to easily give the player an interest until immediately before the game ball flows into the special winning device 550.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 33 to 37, the arrangement state of the special prize-winning device 550 on the center frame 86 will be described. FIG. 33A is a front view of the center frame 86, and FIG. 33B is a side view of the center frame 86. FIG. 34A is a perspective front view of the center frame 86, and FIG. 34B is a perspective rear view of the center frame 86. FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective rear view of the center frame 86. 36 is a cross-sectional view of the center frame 86 taken along the line XXXVI-XXXVI in FIG. FIG. 37A is a schematic cross-sectional view of the game board 13, and FIG. 37B is a schematic exploded cross-sectional view of the game board 13. Note that FIG. 37A and FIG. 37B correspond to the cross section of FIG.

<Fixing means for urging the first member toward the base member>
As shown in FIG. 33 to FIG. 37, the special prize-winning device 550 has a first unit 551 that can be removed on the front side of the center frame 86 and a rear side of the center frame 86 with the center frame 86 interposed therebetween. A possible second unit.

  The first unit 551 has a first solenoid 583a and a second solenoid 584a disposed on the back side of the first unit 551 inserted in the opening 86b1 of the center frame 86, and is on the front side of the protruding portion 86b. It is arranged. The first unit 551 includes a columnar body 551a that protrudes in a cylindrical shape on the second unit 552 side.

  The columnar body 551a is formed at a position opposed to the insertion portion 617 formed in the fourth path member 610 of the second unit 552, and has a hole at the tip where a screw inserted through the insertion portion 617 is screwed.

  The first unit 551 is fixed to the center frame 86 by screws inserted into the insertion portion 617 and the second insertion portion 614 formed in the fourth path member 610 of the second unit 552. More specifically, the first unit 551 is disposed with the projecting portion 86b of the center frame 86 between the first unit 551 and the fourth path member 610 disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side). Further, the first unit 551 is fastened to the second unit 552 by screwing a screw inserted from the insertion portion 617 of the fourth path member 610 into the columnar body 551a.

  Further, in a state where the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are fastened, a screw hole 86b4 (in which a screw inserted into the second insertion portion 614 formed in the second unit 552 is recessed in the protruding portion 86b ( The projecting portion 86b and the fourth path member 610 can be fastened by being screwed to each other (see FIG. 35). As described above, since the fourth path member 610 and the first unit 551 are fastened and fixed, the fourth unit 551 is fastened to the projecting part 86b by fastening the fourth path member 610 to the projecting part 86b. It is concluded against.

  As shown in FIG. 37, the opening dimension Y1 in the vertical direction of the first opening 60a of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 37B) is the vertical dimension of the first unit 551 (second path member 570). It is set slightly smaller than Y2 (see FIG. 37 (b)). The distance Y4 (see FIG. 37B) from the contact surface of the first unit 551 with the front surface of the base plate 60 to the contact surface of the second unit 552 with the base plate 60 is the first unit 551. When the 551 and the second unit 552 are fastened, the thickness is set slightly smaller than the thickness dimension Y3 of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 37B).

  Thereby, when the 1st unit 551, the 2nd unit, and 552 are fastened, the 1st unit 551 can be urged to the base board 60 side (back side). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the front surface of the base plate 60 and the first unit 551. Therefore, it is not necessary to fasten the first unit 551 with a screw from the front side of the base plate 60, and accordingly, a screw fastening cost is not required on the front side of the first unit 551. The area on the front side can be used as a pitching space for game balls. As a result, it is possible to secure a space for sending game balls formed in the first unit 551.

  In addition, since the fastening portion (columnar body 551a) between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 is formed to protrude from the back side of the first unit 551, the fastening portion is formed on the front side of the base plate 60. Compared to the above, it is possible to secure a space for sending game balls formed in the first unit 551.

  Further, since the second unit 552 can be biased toward the base plate 60 (front side), it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the second unit 552 and the base plate 60. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a of the first unit 551 from being tampered with by inserting unauthorized objects such as wires and piano wires from between the opposing sides of the second unit 552 and the base plate 60. it can.

  Furthermore, since the first unit 551 is disposed on the base plate 60 by screws inserted from the back side of the base plate 60, the fastening allowance (screws are inserted through the front side of the first unit 551). There is no need to form an extended portion where an opening is formed. As a result, the entire area can be used as a pitching path with respect to the outer shape of the first unit 551 in a front view, and the pitching path of the first unit 551 can be enlarged.

  Further, since the fastening portion between the base plate 60 and the first unit 551 is on the back side of the base plate 60, the fastening portion between the base plate 60 and the first unit 551 is removed due to fraud from the front side of the game board 13. Can be suppressed. As a result, fraud to the first unit 551 can be suppressed. Furthermore, since the fastening portion between the base plate 60 and the first unit 551 is on the back side of the base plate 60, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the screw head. As a result, it is possible to suppress the player's interest from deteriorating when the player recognizes the configuration for fixing the first unit 551 to the base plate 60.

  Further, the first unit 551 is disposed on the base plate 60 in a state of being biased to the back side with respect to the base plate 60 by fixing means (screws) fastened from the back side of the base plate 60. The first unit 551 and the base plate 60 can be disposed in close contact with each other by the biasing force acting on the back surface side acting on the one unit 551.

  Further, since the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are disposed on the center frame 86 in a state where a ball-sending path capable of delivering game balls is formed in each of the first unit 551 and the second unit 552, the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 It is possible to prevent the ball feeding path of the unit 552 from shifting when the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are assembled. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game balls flowing down inside the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 from stopping on the pitching path of the first unit 551 and the second unit 552.

  The first unit 551 also includes rolling surfaces (second rolling part 577 and third rolling part 578) for allowing the game balls sent to the first unit 551 to flow into the second unit 552. Therefore, if each of the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 is fastened to the projecting portion 86b of the center frame 86, an assembly error of the first unit 551 with respect to the center frame 86 occurs, and the first There is a possibility that the game ball is not smoothly sent from the unit 551 to the second unit 552.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the first unit 551 is fastened to the second unit 552, so that the error when fastening the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 is minimized (when fastened). It is possible to minimize the place where an error can occur. As a result, the game balls can be smoothly sent from the first unit 551 to the second unit 552.

  The fifth and sixth path members 620 and 630 fastened to the fourth path member 610 are arranged at positions that overlap at least a part of the insertion part 617 and the second insertion part 614 of the fourth path member 610 in the rear view. . Accordingly, the first unit 551 can be removed from the center frame 86 only after the fifth and sixth path members 620 and 630 fastened to the fourth path member 610 are removed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first unit 551 forming the main paths SK1 to SK6 from being removed from the center frame 86 and being cheated on the main paths SK1 to SK6.

  Furthermore, the projecting portion 86b includes an erecting portion 86b5 that erects (folds back) toward the second unit 552 at the end (see FIG. 33B). Thus, in a state where the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are disposed on the center frame 86 with the projecting portion 86b of the center frame 86 interposed therebetween, the standing portion 86b5 of the first unit 551 The first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a disposed on the back side are surrounded.

  Therefore, in the state where the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are disposed on the center frame 86, an unauthorized object such as a wire or a piano wire is inserted from between the opposing sides of the first unit 551 and the second unit 552. Can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a of the first unit 551 from being cheated while the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are disposed on the center frame 86.

  In addition, a part of the front side of the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a is disposed between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552, and a standing portion 86b5 is interposed. Therefore, a part of the front side of the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a can be disposed using the space in which the standing portion 86b5 is disposed. Accordingly, a part of the front side of the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a is accommodated between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552, so that the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a are on the back side. Protruding can be suppressed. As a result, the periphery of the back side of the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a can be easily surrounded by the second unit 552, and the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a are illegally operated from the back side. It can be suppressed by two units 552.

  Further, a part of the front side of the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a is disposed between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552, so that the game ball flowing down the second unit 552 is moved to the second unit 552. The first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a can be concealed so that it is difficult to see from the player side. Thereby, even if the flow line of the game ball flowing down the first unit 551 and the flow line of the game ball flowing down the second unit 552 overlap in front view, the game ball flowing down the first unit 551 It can be easily seen by the player. As a result, the player can visually recognize the game ball flowing down the first unit 551 in which the game value higher than the game value given to the player by the game ball flowing down the second unit 552 is given to the player. Because it can, it can be easy to give the player interest.

  Further, in a state where the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are disposed on the center frame 86, the decorative member 650 is disposed so as to cover the inner side surface of the base frame 86 a of the center frame 86. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress an unauthorized object such as a wire or a piano wire from being inserted into the special prize winning device 550 through (through) the opening of the base frame 86a of the center frame 86.

  As shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, the first solenoid 583a disposed in the first unit 551 has a central opening formed in the fourth path member 610 and the fifth path member 620 of the second unit 552 on the back side. 622 and the second central opening 634 are inserted inside. Thereby, it can suppress that the 2nd unit 552 bulges to the back side (arrow B direction side), and can suppress that unauthorized objects, such as a wire and a piano wire, are accessed to the 1st solenoid 583a.

  Moreover, since the load of the 1st solenoid 583a can be supported by the 2nd unit 552, it can suppress that the 2nd path | route member 570 of the 1st unit 551 by which the 1st solenoid 583a is arrange | positioned is bent. As a result, the passage of the game ball of the first unit 551 can be stabilized.

  Further, as described above, since the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a are surrounded by the opening 86b1 of the projecting portion 86b formed on the center frame 86, the load is relatively large (heavy). The first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a can be supported by the opening 86b1 (projecting portion 86b). As a result, it is possible to suppress the protruding portion 86b from being bent by the load of the special winning device 550.

  Therefore, the center frame 86 disposed on the base plate 60 can be prevented from being bent (bent), so that the arrangement of the first unit 551 disposed on the center frame 86 is displaced with respect to the base plate 60. This can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to smoothly flow the game ball from the game area of the game board 13 into the first unit 551 (special winning device 550).

  Further, the second rolling part 577 and the third rolling part 578 for sending a game ball from the first unit 551 to the second unit 552 are formed outside the opening 86b1 of the projecting part 86b. Thereby, the rolling of the game ball sent from the first unit 551 to the second unit 552 is inhibited by the electromagnetic force generated by the driving of the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a disposed inside the opening 86b1. Can be suppressed. In other words, the projecting portion 86b can suppress the electromagnetic force generated by driving the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a from acting on the outside of the projecting portion 86b. As a result, it is possible to stabilize the game balls sent from the first unit 551 to the second unit 552.

  As described above, the first solenoid 583a is disposed such that the back side is inserted into the central opening 622 and the second central opening 634 of the second unit 552. Thereby, the detection devices SE <b> 3 to 6 of the first unit 551 and the wiring of the first solenoid 583 a can be arranged through the central opening 622 and the second central opening 634. Moreover, since those wiring can be arrange | positioned along the 1st solenoid 583a, it can suppress that a wiring gets entangled.

  Furthermore, since the load of the first solenoid 583a can be supported by the central opening 622 and the second central opening 634 of the second unit 552, the protruding portion 86b in which the first unit 551 is disposed bends. Can be suppressed. Therefore, the center frame 86 disposed on the base plate 60 can be prevented from being bent (bent), so that the first unit 551 disposed on the center frame 86 is displaced from the base plate 60. Can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to smoothly flow the game ball from the game area of the game board 13 into the first unit 551 (special winning device 550).

<Displacement member for disposing the fixing member of the substrate unit on the back member>
Next, with reference to FIG. 38 to FIG. 42, the connection structure of the back case 300 and the substrate unit 110 will be described in detail. First, the structure of the back case 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 and 39.

  FIG. 38A is a front view of the back case 300, and FIG. 38B is a back view of the back case 300. FIG. 39A is an exploded perspective front view of the back case 300, and FIG. 39B is an exploded perspective rear view of the back case 300.

  As shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, the rear case 300 includes an engagement member 310 disposed on the front side (open side (arrow F direction side) formed in a box shape) of the bottom wall portion 301, and the rear surface. The fixing member 320 which is arrange | positioned at the back side (arrow B direction side) of case 300 and fixes the board | substrate box 100 (main control apparatus 110) mentioned above is mainly provided.

  The back case 300 includes a protruding portion 301b that protrudes from two locations on the front side of the bottom wall portion 301, a first opening portion 301c that opens at a position facing the fixing member 320, and an engaging member 310. A second opening 301d that opens to a position facing the second opening 301d.

  The projecting portion 301b is a shaft for holding the engaging member 310 in a slidable state, and is inserted into a sliding groove 314 opened in the engaging member 310 described later. The projecting portion 301b projects in an annular shape, and a screw can be screwed into the inner side of the annular shape. Therefore, after inserting the protruding portion 301b into the inside of the sliding groove 314, the engaging member is screwed into the protruding portion 301b with a screw having a head having a diameter larger than the groove width of the sliding groove 314. 310 can be disposed on the back case 300.

  The first opening 301c is an opening for inserting a part of a fixing member 320 (engaged with the engaging member 310) described later, and an engaging part (an engaged portion 332 described later) of the fixing member 320. ). As a result, the fixing member 320 disposed on the back surface side of the back case 300 (bottom wall portion 301) is engaged with the engagement member 310 disposed on the front surface side of the back case 300 (bottom wall portion 301). be able to.

  Further, the first opening 301c is a protruding wall 301c1 that protrudes to the back side at an end (an arrow R direction side) opposite to an engagement side (arrow L direction side) between the fixing member 320 and the engagement member 310. Is provided. The protruding wall 301c1 is formed in a hook shape with the protruding tip on the back side bent approximately 90 degrees, and the bending direction is set in a direction away from the first opening 301c (arrow R direction).

  The tip of the protruding wall 301c1 is inserted into a locking portion 331 of the fixing member 320 described later. Thereby, the opposite side (arrow R direction side) of the engaging part of the fixing member 320 and the engaging member 310 can be locked. As a result, the fixing member 320 disposed on the back case 300 can be supported (engaged) at both the left and right (arrow LR direction) ends, and the engaging portion between the fixing member 320 and the engaging member 310 is supported. It is possible to prevent the force from being concentrated on the fixing member 320 and the engaging member 310 from being damaged. A detailed description of the arrangement of the fixing member 320 in the first opening 301c will be described later.

  The second opening 301d is an opening for inserting a part of the engaging member 310 (operation element 315), which will be described later, into the back side of the back case 300, whereby the engaging member 310 is connected to the back side of the back case. Can be operated from. Therefore, as described above, after the fixing member 320 is arranged on the back surface of the back case 300, the engaging member 310 is operated from the back side of the back case 300, and the fixing member 320 and the engaging member are connected to the back case 300 ( The bottom wall 301) can be engaged on the front side.

  The engaging member 310 has a crank-like outer shape when viewed from the front. The first piece 311 and the second piece 312 extend in directions parallel to each other, and the first piece 311 and the second piece 312. Of the first piece 311 and the second piece 312 are connected to each other in a direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the first piece 311 and the second piece 312.

  The above-described two sliding grooves 314 are formed in each of the first piece 311 and the second piece 312 and are long in the extending direction of the first piece 311 and the second piece 312 (arrow LR direction). Opened in the shape of a slot. Thereby, the engaging member 310 can be slid in the extending direction of the first piece 311 and the second piece 312 (arrow LR direction).

  The first piece 311 has an end portion on one side (arrow R direction side) opposite to the other side (arrow L direction side) to which the third piece 313 is coupled as an engagement portion with a fixing member 320 described later. The engaging portions 316 that are formed and project outward on both sides in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) that is substantially perpendicular to the extending direction of the first piece 311, and the two engaging portions 316. From a substantially intermediate position toward the recess 317 recessed in the extending direction (arrow LR direction) of the first piece 311 and toward the bottom wall portion 301 side (back side (arrow B direction side)) of the back case 300. A projecting operation element 315.

  The engaging part 316 has a substantially triangular outer shape in a front view, and the outer surface on one side (arrow R direction side) is first from the end part on one side toward the other side (arrow L direction side). While formed as an inclined surface protruding outside the piece 311, the outer surface on the other side is a vertical direction (arrow U) that is a direction substantially orthogonal to the extending direction (arrow LR direction) of the first piece 311. -D direction) is extended.

  The recess 317 is formed by cutting out in the thickness direction of the first piece 311 and is recessed from one end (arrow R direction side) end of the first piece 311 toward the other side (arrow L direction side). The Therefore, one side of the first piece 311 is divided into two. Thereby, the rigidity of one side of the 1st piece 311 can be made low compared with the other side. As a result, one side of the first piece 311 can be easily elastically deformed, and the engaging member 310 can be easily engaged with the fixing member 320. A detailed description of the engagement between the engagement member 310 and the fixing member 320 will be described later.

  The operation element 315 is an operation part for operating the engaging member 310, and is formed at the other end of the first piece 311, and its protruding dimension is larger than the plate thickness of the bottom wall part 301 of the back case 300. It is set to a value and protrudes to the back side of the back case 300 at least by a dimension that can be grasped by the operator with a finger. As a result, the operating element 315 can be protruded from the second opening 301d of the bottom wall 301, and the protruding portion (the tip of the operating element 315) can be grasped and operated.

  The second piece 312 includes a fastening hole 318 that is recessed in a circular shape on the front side. The fastening hole 318 is a part into which a screw inserted into a hole (see FIG. 89) that passes through the back base 720 of the rotating unit 700 described later is screwed. Thus, after the rotating unit 700 is disposed inside the back case 300 (the front side of the bottom wall portion 301), the engaging member 310 disposed on the back side of the rotating unit 700 is operated to engage the engaging member. 310 can be operated to a specified position (an engagement position with a fixing member 320 described later), and a screw is screwed into the fastening hole 318 to fasten the engaging member 310 and the rotation unit 700 (rear base 720). can do. Accordingly, the engagement member 310 disposed at the specified position can be made inoperable only by operating the operation element 315 protruding from the back side of the back case 300. As a result, in the state where the pachinko machine 10 is assembled, the operation element 315 is illegally operated, and the fixing member 320 and the board box 100 (main control device 110) are easily replaced with an illegal board box. Can be suppressed.

  In this case, the screw inserted through the hole in the back base 720 of the rotating unit 700 and fastened to the fastening hole 318 can be operated from the hole from which the first winning port 64 provided in the game board 13 is removed. Good. In this case, since it is not necessary to release the fastening between the game board 13 and the back case 300, it is possible to suppress the complicated replacement work for the normal board box 100. As a result, it is possible to simplify the replacement work of the normal substrate box 100.

  The fixing member 320 is composed of a member separate from the back case 300. As a result, the board box 100 can be caulked and fixed to the fixing member 320 having a smaller outer shape than that of the back case 300, so that the board box 100 can be formed in comparison with the case where the fixing member 320 is formed integrally with the back case 300. Easy to arrange. As a result, it is possible to easily dispose the substrate box 100 on the back case 300 in a state where the substrate box 100 is difficult to be removed from the fixing member 320.

  Further, the back case 300 can be used as a part having the same shape in each pachinko machine type. However, since the shape and size of the board box 100 are different in each pachinko machine 10 type, the board box 100 The fixing member 320 on which is disposed cannot be used as a reusable product with another pachinko machine. Therefore, compared to the case where the fixing member 320 is formed integrally with the back case 300, the mold for molding the back case 300 can be the same mold as another pachinko machine. As a result, it is only necessary to form a mold for the fixing member 320 having a smaller outer shape than that of the back case 300, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  The fixing member 320 includes an interposed member 330 that engages with the engaging member 310 described above, and a shaft support member 340 that is fastened to the interposed member 330. Thereby, the shaft support member 340 can be used as a reflow product having the same shape as a fixing member of another gaming machine.

  The interposition member 330 is formed in a box shape whose front side (arrow F direction side) is open, and is provided with a locking portion 331 protruding from the other side (arrow L direction side) and the other side (arrow L direction). Side), the engaged portion 332 formed in a frame shape protruding from the back case 300 side (front side), the insertion hole 333 opening in a circular shape on the box-shaped bottom surface, and the pivot support member 340 from the back side. And a protrusion 334 protruding to the side.

  The locking portion 331 includes an opening for engaging the other side (arrow L direction side) of the fixing member 320 with the bottom wall portion 301, and the opening has an L-shaped cross section from the periphery of the first opening portion 301c described above. The projecting wall 301 c 1 projecting from the projecting wall is inserted into the bottom wall portion 301. Accordingly, when the interposition member 330 (fixing member 320) is disposed on the rear case 300, the protruding wall 301c1 is inserted into the engaging portion 331 of the interposition member 330 so that one side of the interposition member 330 (arrow R). Direction side) can be locked to the back case 300.

  The engaged portion 332 is a portion that engages with the engaging member 310, and the projecting dimension to the back case 300 side (arrow F direction side) exceeds the engaging member 310 disposed on the back case 300. The distance dimension from the inner surface on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the enclosed space to the front surface of the bottom wall portion 301 is larger than the distance from the front surface of the engagement member 310 to the front surface of the bottom wall portion 301. Is set. As a result, the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332 and the engaging member 310 are arranged at positions that overlap in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction).

  The insertion hole 333 is a through hole through which a screw for fastening the interposed member 330 to a shaft support member 340 described later is inserted, and is set coaxially with the fastening hole 343 of the shaft support member 340.

  The protrusion 334 is formed in a substantially L-shaped cross section, and the distance between the distal end portion on the bent side and the bottom surface of the interposed member 330 is set to be larger than the plate thickness of the insertion portion 344 of the shaft support member 340 described later. Is done. Accordingly, the insertion portion 344 can be inserted and disposed between the front end portion on the bent side of the protrusion 334 and the bottom surface of the interposed member 330.

  The shaft support member 340 has a body portion 341 formed in a box shape that opens on the back case 300 side (arrow F direction side), and has a substantially U-shaped cross section from the back side (arrow B direction side) of the body portion 341. And a support portion 342 that bulges.

  The main body portion 341 includes an insertion portion 344 that protrudes upward from the side surface on the upper side (arrow U direction side), and a bottom surface side (arrow D direction side) of the main body portion 341 that is formed in a box shape. And a fastening hole 343 that is recessed toward the B direction side).

  The insertion portion 344 is a plate member that is inserted between the front end portion on the bent side of the protrusion 334 and the bottom surface of the interposed member 330 as described above. Thereby, it can suppress that the upper side of the shaft support member 340 inclines to the back side of the back case 300. FIG.

  The fastening hole 343 is disposed on the lower side (arrow D direction side) that is biased toward the end opposite to the insertion portion 344. Further, as described above, the fastening hole 343 is a hole for fastening a screw that is inserted through the insertion hole 333 (see FIG. 39B) of the interposed member 330. Therefore, in the shaft support member 340, the insertion portion 344 on the upper side (arrow U direction side) is inserted into the protrusion 334 of the interposed member 330, and the lower side is fastened and fixed to the interposed member 330. Therefore, since the shaft support member 340 is fixed to the interposed member 330 only by fastening the screw on the lower side, the fastening portion can be reduced and the manufacturing process can be simplified.

  The support portion 342 is a portion that is caulked and fastened to the bearing portion 117 of the board box 100 (main control device 110) described above, and is formed in a hollow shape in which caulking metal fittings can be disposed. The substrate box 100 is held in a rotatable state with respect to the shaft support member 340 by fastening with caulking metal fittings.

  Next, the engagement between the engagement member 310 and the fixing member 320 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 40A is a front view of the back case 300 in a state before the engagement member 310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged, and FIG. 40B is a state before the engagement member 310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged. It is a rear view of the back case 300 in the state. 41A is a front view of the rear case 300 in a state after the engagement member 310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged, and FIG. 41B is a view after the engagement member 310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged. It is a rear view of the back case 300 in the state. In FIG. 40B and FIG. 41B, a part of the outer shape of the engaging member 310 that overlaps the back case 300 is shown by a chain line.

  As shown in FIGS. 40A and 40B, before the engagement member 310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged, the interposed member 330 and the shaft support member 340 are disposed on the interposed member 330 side (front side (arrow side). Fastened with screws inserted from the F direction side))) and combined. Thereby, it can suppress that the interposed member 330 and the shaft support member 340 are illegally disassembled from the back side of the back case 300 (the fastened screw is removed). As a result, it is possible to suppress the board box 100 that is caulked and fixed to the shaft support member 340 from being replaced with an unauthorized board box.

  The interposed member 330 and the shaft support member 340 (fixing member 320) in the fastened state have the protruding wall 301c1 formed in the first opening 301c inside the locking portion 331 of the interposed member 330 as described above. Inserted. In this case, the interposed member 330 and the shaft support member 340 (fixing member 320) in the fastened state are disposed in the first opening 301c from the bent side (arrow R direction side) of the protruding wall 301c1.

  When the fixing member 320 is disposed on the back case 300, the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332 is disposed at a position facing one end (the engaging portion 316 side) end of the engaging member 310. Thus, by slidingly moving the engaging member 310, one end (arrow R direction side) end of the engaging member 310 can be inserted into the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332.

  Here, the outer dimension in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) of the two engaging portions 316 of the engaging member 310 is the opening in the vertical direction of the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 described above. It is set larger than the dimension. Therefore, there is a problem that the engaging member 310 cannot be disposed in the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332.

  In contrast, the engaging member 310 can easily elastically deform the first piece 311 by the concave portion 317 provided on one side (arrow R direction side) of the first piece 311 as described above. Due to the triangular shape of the joining portion 316, the force when the engaging member 310 is slid and abutted against the inner edge of the engaged portion 332 can be applied to the concave portion 317 side of the engaging member 310. As a result, the first piece 311 formed at the fork can be elastically deformed and inserted into the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332.

  As shown in FIGS. 41A and 41B, the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are configured such that the engaging member 310 is slid and the first piece 311 of the engaging member 310 is an interposed member. When inserted into the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332 of 330, the elastically deformed first piece 311 is returned to the shape before deformation. As described above, the engaging portion 316 has the other side surface extended in a direction substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the first piece 311. Therefore, the force that elastically deforms the first piece 311 toward the concave portion 317 is not applied only by the force that slides the engaging member 310 in the opposite direction. That is, the inclined surface of the engaging portion 316 and the concave portion 317 make it easy to insert the first piece 311 into the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332, and the side surface on the other side (arrow L direction side) of the engaging portion 316. It is possible to make it difficult for the first piece 311 inserted into the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332 to come off. As a result, it is possible to prevent the fixing member 320 from being removed from the back side of the back case 300 due to an illegal act of the player, and the board box 100 (main controller 110) that is caulked and fastened to the fixing member 320 is an illegal board box. Can be suppressed.

  The back case 300 is disposed between the base plate 60 and the back case 300, and is located on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the base plate 60, and the base plate 60 and the back case 300 (bottom wall portion 301). The fixing member 320 includes an engaged portion 332 that protrudes to the front side (arrow F direction side) of the rear case 300, and the engaged portion 332. And the engaging member 310 are engaged with each other and disposed in the back case 300, so that the accessory device (the rotation unit 700 in this example) is disposed between the base plate 60 and the back case 300. The engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 can be engaged by operating the engaging member 310 from the outside between the base plate 60 and the back case 300.

  Therefore, the fixing member 320 can be disposed on the back case 300 without the engaging member 310 being obstructed by the accessory device disposed between the base plate 60 and the back case 300. As a result, the fixing member 320 can be easily disposed on the back case 300.

  Further, since the engaging member 310 is engaged with the engaged portion 332 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the back case 300, the engaging portion between the back case 300 and the fixing member 320 is the base plate. 60 and the rear case 300 may be disposed between the opposing surfaces. Thereby, it is difficult to access the engaging portion between the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 from the back side (arrow B direction side) of the base plate 60. As a result, the engagement between the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 is released from the back side of the base plate 60, and the fixing member 320 is prevented from being illegally used (for example, replaced with an illegal fixing member). it can.

  The back case 300 includes a first opening 301c that is opened at a portion where the fixing member 320 is disposed, and a second opening 301d that is opened at a portion where the engaging member 310 is disposed. The engaging member 310 is disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the back case 300 and from the back side (arrow B direction side) of the back case 300 via (inserts) the second opening 301d. The engaging member 332 that has passed through the first opening 301c is disposed on the front side of the rear case 300, and thus the engaging member 310 and the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 are allowed to operate. It is possible to make it difficult to access the engaging portion from the back side of the back case 300. As a result, the fixing member 320 can be fixed to the back case 300 regardless of the size of the accessory device arranged in the back case 300, and the illegal board box is operated from the back side of the game board 13 Can be prevented.

  Furthermore, since the engaging member 310 includes the operation element 315 that is inserted through the second opening 301d and protrudes to the back side (arrow B direction side) of the back case 300, the front side (arrow F direction side) of the back case 300 is provided. The engaging member 310 can be easily operated in a state where the engaging member 310 is disposed. As a result, the engaging operation between the engaging member 310 and the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 can be facilitated.

  Further, since the engaging member 310 can be slidably displaced on a plane parallel to the front side of the back case 300 (bottom wall portion 301), the engaging member 310 can move forward and backward (arrows) with respect to the back case 300. The front side (arrow F direction side) of the engaging member 310 can be easily used as an arrangement space for the accessory device arranged on the back case 300 by the amount not displaced in the FB direction. As a result, the area on the front side of the back case 300 (bottom wall portion 301) can be easily used as an arrangement space for the accessory device.

  Next, an operation for removing the fixing member 320 from the back case 300 from the state shown in FIG. 41 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 41, the first opening 301c is opened in a substantially L shape when viewed from the front, and the recessed portion 317 of the engaging member 310 in the engaged state with the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 is the first. It can be operated from the back side (the direction of arrow B) of the back case 300 through the one opening 301c.

  Therefore, the outer portion of the concave portion 317 of the engaging member 310 is elastically deformed toward the concave side of the concave portion 317 with a dedicated tool or the like, thereby engaging the engaging portion 316 and the engaged portion 332 of the engaging member 310. The match is released. In a state where the engagement is released, the engagement member 310 is displaced in a direction (arrow L direction) to be pulled out from the internal space engaged by the engaged portion 332, and then the deformation of the engagement member 310 is returned. The engagement between the engaging member 310 and the engaged portion 332 can be released.

  In addition, it is preferable that the clearance gap between the outer side part of the recessed part 317 of the engaging member 310 and the 1st opening part 301c is formed as small as possible. This makes it impossible to insert the finger of the person who removes the fixing member 320 from the back case 300, and allows the insertion of a dedicated tool. As a result, only the operator who has a dedicated tool can exchange the substrate box 100 (main control device 110), and can be prevented from being replaced with an unauthorized substrate box 100.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 42A and FIG. 42B, the board box 100 (main control device 110) that is caulked and fastened to the shaft support member 340 will be described. 42A is a perspective rear view of the back case 300 and the board box 100 (main control device 110), and FIG. 42B is a rear view of the back case 300 and the board box 100 (main control device 110). It is. In FIG. 42B, the outer shape of the engaging member 310 that overlaps the substrate box 100 is illustrated by a chain line.

  As shown in FIGS. 42A and 42B, the board box 100 includes a bearing portion 117 that protrudes from an end portion on one end side (arrow R direction side). A pair of bearing portions 117 are arranged at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction). As described above, the pair of bearing portions 117 is a portion that is caulked and fastened to the support portion 342 of the shaft support member 340, and the vertical dimension (in the direction of the arrow UD) of the support portion 342 and the distance between the facing portions are approximately. Set the same. As a result, the board box 100 is fastened to the shaft support member 340 by disposing the support part 342 between the pair of bearing parts 117 facing each other and inserting the caulking pin from above the bearing part 117 to fix it. Is done.

  According to the substrate box 100 configured as described above, the substrate box 100 is rotatably held with respect to the pivot support member 340 and is disposed on the back side of the engagement member 310. As described above, when the operating element 315 is operated to engage the engaging member 310 with the fixing member 320, the operating element 315 can be easily operated by rotating the board box 100. Further, after the engagement member 310 is engaged with the fixing member 320, it is difficult to operate the operation element 315 from the back side of the back case 300 by arranging the board box 100 on the back side of the engagement member 310. . As a result, after the pachinko machine 10 is assembled, it can be suppressed that the operation element 315 is operated and replaced with an illegal substrate box.

  The other end side (arrow L direction side) of the board box 100 is inserted from the back side (arrow B direction side) of the board box 100 toward the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 300 and fastened to the back case 300. Fixed with screws. As a result, the substrate box 100 is disposed on the back side of the back case 300 in a state in which it cannot rotate (operate).

  Next, a detailed configuration of the lower displacement unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 69. First, a structure for displacing the lower displacement member 440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 46.

  FIG. 43 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400, and FIG. 44 is a rear view of the lower displacement unit 400. 45 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement unit 400, and FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement unit 400. 43 to 14 illustrate a state in which the lower displacement member 440 is disposed at the retracted position (position disposed at the lowest position with respect to the base member 410).

  As shown in FIGS. 43 to 46, the lower displacement unit 400 includes a base member 410 disposed on the bottom wall portion 301 (see FIG. 6) of the back case 300 and a transmission member disposed on the base member 410. 420, a link member 430 coupled to the base member 410 and displaced in accordance with the displacement of the transmission member 420, one end slidably coupled to the base member 410, and the other end coupled to the link member 430. And a lower displacement member 440 that is displaced by being transmitted with a driving force from the link member 430.

  The base member 410 is formed by combining two horizontally long plate members in the front view in the front-rear direction, and includes a front base 411 disposed on the front side and a back base 412 disposed on the back side. A transmission member 420 and a link member 430 are disposed between the front base 411 and the rear base 412.

  The front base 411 includes two sliding grooves 411a and 411b penetrating in the front-rear direction (the depth direction in FIG. 43), two cylindrical shaft support pins 411c and 411d protruding to the back side, and a shaft support pin 411d. And a curved wall portion 411e projecting in an arc shape with the axis as the axis.

  The sliding grooves 411a and 411b are holes through which the two protrusions 472 and 473 protruding from the back side of the lower displacement member 440 are inserted. The sliding grooves 411a and 411b are formed to extend in the left-right direction. Therefore, the lower displacement member 440 can be slid in the left-right direction by displacing the protrusions 472, 473 inserted through the sliding grooves 411a, 411b along the sliding grooves 411a, 411b.

  The sliding grooves 411a and 411b are each curved in an arc shape, and upward (from the top in FIG. 43) from the left end (left side in FIG. 43) to the right end (right side in FIG. 43) of the front base 411. ) Is opened. Furthermore, the sliding grooves 411a and 411b are arranged at positions where the axes of the respective arcs are different, and the gap between the opposing portions in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 43) is narrowed from the left end to the right end.

  Since the distance between the protrusions 472 and 473 of the base member 470 of the lower displacement member 440 described later does not change, when the lower displacement member 440 is slid along the sliding groove, the lower displacement member 440 is rotated. And can be displaced. That is, by changing the distance between the two sliding grooves 411a and 411b, the lower displacement member 440 can be rotated as it slides without applying a rotational driving force to the lower displacement member 440. The detailed displacement mode of the lower displacement member 440 will be described later.

  The shaft support pin 411c is a protrusion that is inserted into a shaft portion 422a of a cam member 422 of the transmission member 420 described later, and is formed in a columnar shape having an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft portion 422a. The pivot pin 411c is formed of a metal rod-like body and is fitted on the front base 411. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the shaft support pin 411c from being broken (damaged) when a force acts on the cam member 422 from the outer peripheral surface thereof in the axial direction.

  The pivot pin 411d is a protrusion that is inserted into a through hole 431a formed at one end of a first link member 431, which will be described later, and is formed in a columnar shape having an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole 431a. Further, the pivot pin 411d is formed of a metallic rod-like body and is fitted on the front base 411. Therefore, when a force acts on the first link member 431 in the direction of the through hole 431a, it is possible to suppress the shaft support pin 411d from being broken (broken).

  The curved wall portion 411e protrudes from the back side of the front base 411 and is curved around the axis of the pivot pin 411d. The protruding distance of the curved wall portion 411e is set to a distance that comes into contact with the protruding tip surface of a plate-like protrusion 431b of the first link member 431 described later. Therefore, it is suppressed that the 1st link member 431 shifts to the front side. Further, since the curved wall portion 411e is formed to be bent around the axis of the shaft support pin 411d, even when the first link member 431 is rotated around the shaft of the shaft support pin 411d, the first link member 431 is formed. The plate-like protrusion 431b can be brought into contact with the protruding front end surface of the curved wall portion 411e.

  The collection port 411f is an opening through which a ball emitted from the emission opening 471 flows into the collection port 411f and is collected by the movement of a ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 described later. The downstream side of the recovery port 411f is connected to the recovery path of the sphere. The recovery port 411f is a hole formed so as to protrude from the right end of the front base 411. The opening surface of the recovery port 411f faces the lower displacement member 440 in the retracted state and the lower displacement member 440 in the first extended state. The surface is located below the exit opening 471 in the direction of gravity.

  In addition, the emission opening 471 of the lower displacement member 440 in the retracted state is disposed above the recovery port 411f. Therefore, the sphere emitted from the emission opening 471 can be received in the collection port 411f and quickly collected.

  The back base 412 includes groove portions 412a and 412b that are recessed from the front side (the front side in FIG. 44) toward the back surface, and a locking portion 412c that is formed to protrude toward the front side in the vicinity of the groove portion 412b. Formed mainly for the purpose.

  The groove portion 412a is a hole for inserting the tip end side of the shaft support pin 411c of the front base 411 described above, is formed in a circular shape having an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft support pin 411c, and faces the shaft support pin 411c. Recessed in position. Therefore, the cam member 422 is held so as not to be detached from the base member 410 by the front base 411 and the rear base 412 being combined after the shaft support pin 411c is inserted through the shaft portion 422a. Further, since the back surface base 412 can hold the tip end portion of the shaft support pin 411c, when a force is applied to the cam member 422 in the axial direction from the outer peripheral surface thereof, the shaft support pin 411c is connected to the front base 411. It can suppress that it bends and bends from a connection part.

  The groove portion 412b is a hole for inserting the tip end side of the shaft support pin 411d of the front base 411 described above, and is formed in a circular shape having an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft support pin 411d and faces the shaft support pin 411d. Recessed in position. Therefore, the first link member 431 is held from the base member 410 so as not to drop off by combining the front base 411 and the rear base 412 after the shaft support pin 411d is inserted through the through hole 431a. Further, since the back surface base 412 can hold the tip end portion of the shaft support pin 411d, when a force acts on the first link member 431 in the direction of the through hole 431a, the shaft support pin 411d is connected to the front base 411. It can suppress that it bends and breaks from the connection part.

  The locking portion 412c is a plate that locks one end of an urging spring SP1, which will be described later, and is formed outside the urging spring SP1. Thereby, the one end side of urging | biasing spring SP1 can be latched. A detailed description of the urging spring SP1 will be described later.

  The transmission member 420 includes a transmission gear 421 coupled to the shaft of the drive motor KM1 attached to the front side of the front base 411, and a cam that meshes with the transmission gear 421 and rotates as the transmission gear 421 is driven. The member 422 is mainly provided.

  The transmission gear 421 is a gear having an engagement surface over the entire outer peripheral surface, and is externally fitted to the shaft portion of the drive motor KM1. Therefore, when electric power is applied to the drive motor KM1 and the shaft portion is rotated, the transmission gear 421 is similarly rotated.

  The cam member 422 is formed from a plate-like body having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction while being formed in a shape in which one end of two semicircles having different outer shapes in front view is combined. In the semicircular portion having a small outer shape of the cam member 422, a tooth surface 422b that meshes with the transmission gear 421 is formed on the outer peripheral surface, and a shaft portion 422a is formed through the center of the semicircle. A sliding groove 422c is formed in the semicircular portion having a large outer shape of the cam member 422. The sliding groove 422c is recessed on the back side facing a link member 430 described later.

  As described above, the shaft portion 422a is a hole through which the shaft support pin 411c is inserted, and the shaft portion 422a is rotatably supported by the shaft support pin 411c, so that the cam member 422 rotates the shaft of the shaft support pin 411c. It is held rotatably at the center.

  Since the cam member 422 is disposed on the base member 410 with the tooth surface 422b engaged with the transmission gear 421, the cam member 422 rotates about the axis of the shaft portion 422a when the transmission gear 421 rotates. it can.

  The sliding groove 422c is recessed along the outer peripheral portion of the semicircular portion having a large radius of the cam member 422. Accordingly, the distance from the shaft portion 422a is increased from the one end side toward the other end side. Further, the sliding groove 422c has a step portion 422c1 that extends in the direction of the through hole 431a from the sliding projection 431d of the first link member 431 when the lower displacement member 440 is in a retracted state, which will be described later, and a lower displacement. When the member 440 is positioned in a second extended state, which will be described later, a step 422c3 extending from the sliding projection 431d in the direction of the through hole 431a, and the lower displacement member 440 between the retracted state and the second extended state And a step portion 422c2 that extends from the sliding projection 431d in the direction of the through-hole 431a when positioned in the first extended state of the intermediate state.

  The link member 430 is formed of two link members, a first link member 431 and a second link member 432. Further, the link member 430 is formed by rotatably connecting the end portions of the first link member 431 and the second link member 432.

  The first link member 431 is formed in a plate shape having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction while being bent into a generally U-shape when viewed from the front. The first link member 431 is a link that is displaced in accordance with the displacement of the cam member 422. The first link member 431 has a through-hole 431a that penetrates in the front-rear direction on one end side, and a columnar connection protrusion 431c that protrudes on the other side. The plate-like protrusion 431b protruding to the position facing the curved wall 411e and the cylindrical sliding protrusion 431d protruding to the front side of the bent portion are mainly provided.

  The through hole 431a is a through hole into which the pivot pin 411d is inserted as described above. The first link member 431 is rotatably held with respect to the base member 410 by combining the front base 411 and the rear base 412 with the pivot pin 411d inserted in the through hole 431a.

  The plate-like protrusion 431b is a protrusion that suppresses the first link member 431 from being displaced in the front-rear direction and suppresses the first link member 431 from colliding with the cam member 422 disposed in the front. It is formed in a plate-like body protruding in a curved shape with the hole 431a as an axis, and the protruding length is set larger than the thickness of the cam member 422 in the front-rear direction. Thereby, it can suppress that the back surface of the cam member 422 and the front surface of the 1st link member 431 collide.

  Further, the projecting dimension of the plate-like protrusion 9431b is set to be larger than the thickness (the dimension in the direction of the arrow FB) of the cam member 422. Furthermore, the base member 410 (curved wall portion 411e) facing the protruding tip surface of the plate-like protrusion 431b is disposed with a slight gap (distance X14 (see FIG. 55 (a))).

  The cam member 422 is disposed in a state in which a region between the front surface of the first link member 9431 excluding the plate-like protrusion 431b and the protruding surface (back surface) of the curved wall portion 411e can be displaced. In addition, the size of the two gaps including the gap between the facing of the cam member 422 and the first link member 431 and the gap between the facing of the cam member 422 and the base member 410 is larger than the distance X14 described above. It is set large.

  Thereby, when the first link member 9431 is bent in the direction in which the distance X14 is reduced (the direction of arrow F), the base member 410 (curved wall portion 411e) faces the protruding tip surface of the plate-like protrusion 431b. It can be made to contact. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the displacement of the cam member 422 from being sandwiched between the front surface of the first link member 9431 excluding the plate-like protrusion 9431b and the protruding surface (back surface) of the curved wall portion 411e, thereby restricting the displacement.

  The connection protrusion 431c is a shaft portion connected to a second link member 432, which will be described later, and is inserted into a through hole 432a of the second link member 432, and the outer diameter of the head from the back side is larger than that of the through hole 432a. A large screw or the like is fastened. Thereby, the 1st link member 431 and the 2nd link member 432 are connected so that rotation is possible.

  A wall portion 431f protruding to the back side is formed at the edge portion of the through hole 431a. The wall portion 431f is a wall surface for fitting and holding an urging spring SP1 described later on the outer peripheral surface thereof.

  The link side engaging portion 431e is a protrusion that locks the other end side of the urging spring SP1 fitted into the wall portion 431f, and is formed to project in a hook shape on the back side of one end side of the first link member 431. . Therefore, the biasing spring SP1 is in a state where one end side is engaged with the engaging portion 412c of the back surface base 412, and the other end side is engaged with the link side engaging portion 431e of the first link member 431. The Therefore, the urging force of the urging spring SP1 can be applied in a direction in which the other end side of the first link member 431 is rotated upward with respect to the base member 410. As a result, since the urging force of the urging spring SP1 acts when the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced, the energy consumption of the drive motor KM1 can be suppressed.

  The sliding protrusion 431d is formed at a position separated from the through hole 431a by substantially the same distance as the distance from the through hole 431a to the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422. Further, the sliding protrusion 431d has a tip portion inserted inside the sliding groove 422c. That is, the sliding protrusion 431d is formed such that its outer diameter is smaller than the width dimension between the opposed facings of the sliding groove 422c.

  Since the sliding protrusion 431d is arranged inside the sliding groove 422c, the sliding protrusion 431d is displaced by sliding inside the sliding groove 422c in accordance with the rotational displacement of the cam member 422. That is, when the cam member 422 is displaced, the first link member 431 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the through hole 431a. A detailed description of the displacement of the first link member 431 will be described later.

  Moreover, since the sliding protrusion 431d and the plate-like protrusion 431b are formed at positions close to each other, the forward displacement of the first link member 431 is suppressed by the plate-like protrusion 431b. Therefore, it can suppress that the sliding protrusion 431d pushes the cam member 422 forward. As a result, it is not necessary to increase the recessed depth of the sliding groove 422c provided in the cam member 422, and the rigidity can be ensured without increasing the thickness of the cam member 422 in the front-rear direction.

  The second link member 432 is formed in a plate shape having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction while being formed in a long rectangular front view. The second link member 432 is mainly provided with a through-hole 432a that is formed through one end in the front-rear direction and a through-hole 432b that is formed through the other end in the front-rear direction.

  As described above, the through hole 432a is a hole for being connected to the first link member 431, and the connection protrusion 431c is inserted therein. Accordingly, the second link member 432 is rotatably connected to the first link member 431.

  The through hole 432b is connected to a lower displacement member 440 described later, and can transmit the displacement of the link member 430 to the lower displacement member 440. The through hole 432b is a hole into which a protrusion 482a of a back case 482 described later is inserted, and has an inner diameter larger than an outer diameter of the protrusion 482a. Therefore, the protrusion 482a is inserted into the through hole 432b, and a screw or the like having a head larger than the inner diameter of the through hole 432b is fastened to the tip of the protrusion 482a, so that the lower displacement member 440 becomes the second link member 432. Is held rotatably. Accordingly, the driving of the lower displacement member 440 is transmitted via the link member 430 when the cam member 422 is rotationally displaced.

  Next, the displacement operation of the lower displacement member 440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 52. 47 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the retracted state, FIG. 48 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the first extended state, and FIG. 49 is a lower displacement unit in the second extended state. FIG. 50 is a rear view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the retracted state, FIG. 51 is a rear view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the first extended state, and FIG. 52 is a lower displacement unit in the second extended state. FIG. 50 to 52 show a state in which the rear base 412 is viewed transparently. 50 to 52, a part of the plate-like protrusion 431b and the curved wall portion 411e of the first link member 431 is illustrated by a chain line.

  The retracted state is a state in which the sliding protrusion 431d disposed inside the sliding groove 422c is disposed between the steps 442c1 and the lower displacement member 440 is disposed on the lower side. The second projecting state is a state in which the sliding protrusion 431d is disposed between the step portions 442c3 and the distal end side of the lower displacement member 440 is disposed at the uppermost position. The first overhanging state is a state in which the sliding protrusion 431d is disposed between the step portions 442c2 and the lower displacement member 440 is disposed in an intermediate state between the retracted state and the second overhanging state.

  As shown in FIGS. 47 and 50, in the lower displacement unit 400 in the retracted state, the cam member 422 in the first position is rotated by the transmission gear 421 so that the other end side (step portion 422c3 side) of the sliding groove 422c is moved. The shaft portion 422a is positioned on the right side (right side in FIG. 50) when viewed from the back. In this case, the sliding protrusion 431d of the first link member 431 is guided along the inner wall of the sliding groove 422c and is in a state of being positioned on the step portion 422c1. Therefore, the first link member 431 has a state in which the other end side (the connecting projection 431c side) is positioned on the right side (right side in FIG. 50) of the through hole 431a on the one end side (rotating around the through hole 431a as the axis) The end side is positioned at the lower end of the rotatable range (first driven position).

  Since the second link member 432 is connected to the first link member 431, one end side (through-hole 432a side) connected to the first link member 431 is positioned on the right side in the rear view (right side in FIG. 50). Accordingly, in the lower displacement member 440 connected to the second link member 432, the protrusions 472 and 473 connected to the front base 411 are positioned on the right side (right side in FIG. 50) in the rear view of the sliding grooves 411a and 411b. State. As described above, the distance between the vertical facing of the sliding grooves 411a and 411b is larger on the right side in the rear view than on the left side, so that the lower displacement member 440 has the longitudinal direction substantially parallel to the left and right direction. Placed in the state. That is, it is in a state of being arranged in front of the front base 411.

  The displacement from the retracted state shown in FIGS. 47 and 50 to the first extended state shown in FIGS. 46 and 51 is performed by the cam member 422 being displaced.

  In the first overhang state, the transmission gear 421 is rotated by the driving force of the drive motor KM1, and the cam member 422 is rotated approximately 90 degrees from the retracted position to be displaced to the third position. As a result, the other end side (step portion 422c3 side) of the cam member 422 is positioned above the shaft portion 422a. Due to this rotational displacement, the sliding projection 431d of the first link member 431 guided by the inner wall of the sliding groove 422c is displaced along with the displacement of the sliding groove 422c, and is arranged at the third driven position. In the first overhanging state, the sliding protrusion 431d is guided between the inner walls of the step portion 422c2 of the sliding groove 422c.

  Therefore, the first link member 431 is rotated approximately 30 degrees around the through-hole 431a due to the displacement of the sliding protrusion 431d, and the other end side (the connecting protrusion 431c side) is in the upper left as viewed from the back (FIG. 51). Displaced to the upper left).

  Due to the rotational displacement of the first link member 431, the second link member 432 connected to the first link member 431 is displaced, and the lower displacement member 440 connected to the second link member 432 is displaced. In this case, since the protrusions 472 and 473 are slidably connected to the sliding grooves 411a and 411b of the front base 411, the lower displacement member 440 is displaced along the shape of the sliding grooves 411a and 411b. As described above, since the distance between the vertical facings of the sliding grooves 411a and 411b is narrowed from the right side to the left side when viewed from the back, the lower displacement member 440 slides to the right side when viewed from the front (right side in FIG. 48). While being displaced, the tip side is rotationally displaced upward.

  In the first overhanging state, the recovery port 411f is positioned on the lower side in the gravitational direction on the tip side. That is, when the lower displacement member 440 is shifted from the retracted state to the first extended state, the lower displacement member 440 is rotated and displaced while being slid, so that the front end side of the lower displacement member 440 protrudes to the right in the front view of the base member 410. It can be displaced without causing it. As a result, it is possible to easily form a displacement region that is different from the variable region of other displacement actors. Collision with other displacement actors can be suppressed.

  Further, since the recovery port 411f is positioned below one end side of the lower displacement member 440 (the side opposite to the protrusions 472 and 473 connected to the front base 411), a ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 described later is provided. When the launch operation is performed and the sphere falls down from the exit opening 471 as it is, the sphere can be sent to the collection port 411f.

  The displacement from the first projecting state shown in FIGS. 48 and 51 to the second projecting state shown in FIGS. 49 and 52 is performed by further displacing the cam member 422 from the first projecting state.

  In the second extended state, the transmission gear 421 is rotated by the driving force of the drive motor KM1 from the first extended state, and the cam member 422 rotates approximately 90 degrees from the position of the first extended state (third position). The second position is arranged. Therefore, the other end side of the cam member 422 (the stepped portion 422c3 side is positioned above the shaft portion 422a. Further, the sliding of the first link member 431 guided to the inner wall of the sliding groove 422c by this rotational displacement. The moving projection 431d is displaced in accordance with the displacement of the sliding groove 422c, and is disposed at the second driven position, In the second overhanging state, the sliding projection 431d is formed on the step 422c1 of the sliding groove 422c. Guided between opposing inner walls.

  Therefore, the first link member 431 is rotated approximately 30 degrees around the through hole 431a due to the displacement of the sliding protrusion 431d, and the other end side (the connecting protrusion 431c side) is substantially in rear view from the position of the first overhanging state. It is displaced to the upper left (upper left in FIG. 52).

  Due to the rotational displacement of the first link member 431, the second link member 432 connected to the first link member 431 is displaced, and the lower displacement member 440 connected to the second link member 432 is displaced. In this case, since the protrusions 472 and 473 are slidably connected to the sliding grooves 411a and 411b of the front base 411, the lower displacement member 440 is displaced along the shape of the sliding grooves 411a and 411b. As described above, since the distance between the vertical facings of the sliding grooves 411a and 411b is narrowed from the right side to the left side as viewed from the back, the lower displacement member 440 slides to the right side (right side in FIG. 49). While being displaced, the tip side is rotationally displaced upward.

  Similarly to the first overhanging state, in the second overhanging state, the recovery port 411f is positioned on the lower side in the gravitational direction on the tip side. In other words, when the lower displacement member 440 is shifted from the retracted state to the second extended state, the lower displacement member 440 is rotated and displaced while being slid, so that the distal end side of the lower displacement member 440 protrudes to the right in the front view of the base member 410. It can be displaced without causing it. As a result, it is possible to easily form a displacement area different from the variable area of other displacement actors, and to suppress collision with other displacement actors.

  Next, the positional relationship between the first link member 431 and the cam member 422 in each state will be described with reference to FIG. 53A is a rear view of the first link member 431 and the cam member 422 in the retracted state, FIG. 53B is in the first extended state, and FIG. 53C is the second extended state. is there. In FIGS. 53 (a) to 53 (c), a portion of the cam member 422 that overlaps the first link member 431 is indicated by a chain line.

  As shown in FIG. 53 (a), in the retracted state, the sliding projection 431d of the first link member 431 is disposed between the inner walls of the step portion 422c1 of the sliding groove 422c. In addition, as described above, the sliding protrusion 431d is formed at a position spaced from the through hole 431a by substantially the same distance as the distance from the through hole 431a to the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422. Therefore, when a force that rotates about the axis of the through hole 431a acts on the first link member 431 located in the retracted state, the force is applied to the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422 from the sliding projection 431d. it can. Therefore, the cam member 422 can be prevented from rotating by the rotational force of the first link member 431. As a result, in the retracted state, the displacement of the lower displacement member 440 connected to the first link member 431 via the second link member 432 can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 53 (b), in the first projecting state, the sliding projection 431d of the first link member 431 and the inner wall of the step portion 422c2 of the sliding groove 422c are disposed opposite to each other. Therefore, as in the retracted state, when a force rotating around the through hole 431a acts on the first link member 431 located in the first overhanging state, the force is applied from the sliding protrusion 431d to the cam member 422. It can be made to act on the shaft portion 422a. Therefore, the cam member 422 can be prevented from rotating by the rotational force of the first link member 431. As a result, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the lower displacement member 440 connected to the first link member 431 via the second link member 432 in the first projecting state.

  Here, in the first overhang position, the drive motor KM1 needs to be maintained in the stopped state in order to maintain the stopped state because the intermediate position of the displacement of the lower displacement member 440 is maintained. Therefore, there is a problem that energy consumption increases when the lower displacement member 440 is stopped at the first overhang position (intermediate position of displacement).

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the first overhanging state, the sliding projection 431d of the first link member 431 is disposed between the inner walls of the step portion 422c2 of the sliding groove 422c. Further, the displacement of the lower displacement member 440 can be suppressed. Therefore, even when the electric power of the drive motor KM1 is stopped when the lower displacement member 440 is stopped at a position in the middle of the displacement, the lower displacement member 440 can be suppressed from being displaced. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in energy consumption of the drive motor KM1 when the lower displacement member 440 is stopped during the displacement.

  As shown in FIG. 53 (c), in the second extended state, the sliding projection 431d of the first link member 431 and the inner wall of the step portion 422c2 of the sliding groove 422c are disposed opposite to each other. Therefore, as in the retracted state and the first overhanging state, when a force rotating around the axis of the through hole 431a acts on the first link member 431 located in the second overhanging state, the force slides. The protrusion 431d can act on the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422. Therefore, the cam member 422 can be prevented from rotating by the rotational force of the first link member 431. As a result, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the lower displacement member 440 connected to the first link member 431 via the second link member 432 in the second projecting state.

  Further, since each step portion 422c1, 422c2, 422c3 extends in a direction connecting the sliding projection 431d and the through hole 431a, the sliding groove 422c in the direction in which the sliding projection 431d of the first link member 431 is displaced. The width dimension can be reduced. Therefore, the clearance between the sliding groove 422c and the sliding protrusion 431d, in which the first link member 431 can be rotationally displaced about the axis of the through hole 431a at the retracted position, the first protruding position, and the second protruding position, is reduced. it can. Therefore, the gap in which the first link member 431 in each state can be rotationally displaced about the axis of the through hole 431a can be reduced. As a result, the width in which the lower displacement member 440 in each state swings due to vibration or inertial force when the displacement is stopped can be reduced, and the player can easily recognize the stopped state.

  Therefore, the transmission member 420 and the link member 430 (drive mechanism) that drive the lower displacement member 440 restrict the displacement of the lower displacement member 440 in the reaction direction when the game ball is emitted from the ball receiving portion 467. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the lower displacement member 440 from being displaced with respect to the base member 410 along with the reaction. As a result, rattling of the lower displacement member 440 can be suppressed.

  Next, the front-rear direction relationship between the link member 430 and the cam member 422 will be described with reference to FIG. 54A is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit 400 taken along line LIVa-LIVa in FIG. 50, and FIG. 54B is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit 400 taken along line LIVb-LIVb in FIG. is there. 51 and 52, the back surface base 412 is shown transparently, but in FIGS. 54A and 54B, a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit 400 in a state where it is not transparently shown is shown. .

  As shown in FIG. 54A, the link member 430 of the lower displacement unit 400 in the retracted state is disposed between the back surface base 412 and the cam member 422. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the lower displacement member 440 from swinging in the front-rear direction. That is, the other end side of the first link member 431 is connected to the lower displacement member 440 configured by combining a plurality of fixtures via the second link member 432, so that it is moved in the front-rear direction by the load of the lower displacement member 440 Since there is a possibility of bending, the cam member 422 is disposed forward, so that the first link member 431 can be prevented from bending forward. As a result, since the first link member 431 can be prevented from moving forward, the lower displacement member 440 can be prevented from swinging in the front-rear direction.

  As shown in FIG. 54B, the link member 430 of the lower displacement unit 400 in the first overhanging state is disposed between the back surface base 412 and the cam member 422 as in the retracted state. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the lower displacement member 440 from swinging in the front-rear direction.

  Further, in the retracted state and the first extended state, the cam member 422 is disposed on the front side of the connection portion between the first link member 431 and the second link member 432 of the link member 430. Therefore, when the link member 430 is formed of two members, it is necessary to make the connecting portion rotatable. Therefore, the link member 430 is less rigid than the other portion and easily bent because of the gap. Since the member 422 is arrange | positioned, it can suppress that the connection part of the link member 430 bends. As a result, it is possible to suppress the lower displacement member 440 from swinging in the front-rear direction.

<The displacement of the displacement member is regulated by the regulation means for regulating the displacement of the driven member>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56, the relationship between the cam member 422 and the curved wall portion 411e will be described. 55A is a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit 400 taken along the line LVa-LVa of FIG. 50, and FIG. 55B is a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit 400 taken along the line LVb-LVb of FIG. FIG. 55C is a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit 400 taken along the line LVc-LVc in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (a), when the lower displacement unit 400 is in the retracted state (first position), the cam member 422 and the curved wall portion 411e are in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction). Arranged at different positions. Therefore, when the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced from the retracted state (first position) to the first extended state (third position), it is possible to suppress an increase in resistance acting on the cam member 422. As a result, the start of displacement of the lower displacement member 440 can be stabilized.

  As shown in FIGS. 55 (b) and 55 (c), when the lower displacement unit 400 is in the first overhanging state (third position), a part of the cam member 422 is curved wall 411e. Is arranged at a position separating a predetermined gap on the front side (arrow F direction side). Accordingly, when the cam member 422 is displaced in the front direction, the cam member 422 can be prevented from being displaced to the front side by bringing the side surface in the axial direction of the cam member 422 into contact with the curved wall portion 411e.

  The surface of the cam member 422 on the front base 411 side (arrow F direction side) is formed as a flat surface parallel to the back surface of the front base 411 (see FIG. 45). Thereby, when the cam member 422 is displaced toward the curved wall portion 411e, the flat surface of the cam member 422 can be brought into contact with the curved wall portion 411e. Therefore, the cam member 422 can be prevented from partially abutting against the curved wall portion 411e, and the force can be prevented from concentrating partially. As a result, the cam member 422 can be prevented from being damaged.

  Here, as described above, when the lower displacement member 440 is displaced from the retracted state (first position) to the first overhang state (third position), the protrusion 473 connected to the front end side (front base 411). And the opposite side in the longitudinal direction) are rotationally displaced upward (in the direction of arrow U). Therefore, as the directional component in the longitudinal direction of the lower displacement member 440 approaches the direction of gravity, the force component that causes the lower displacement member 440 to tilt in the front-rear direction is increased. Therefore, in the first overhanging state (third position), the longitudinal force acting on the link member 430 that supports the lower displacement member 440 is greater than in the retracting state (first position). Increased. As a result, the cam member 422 connected to the link member 430 is easily displaced in the front-rear direction.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced beyond the first extended state (third position) from the retracted state (first position), a part of the cam member 422 is a curved wall. Since it is arrange | positioned at the front side of the part 411e, the displacement of the cam member 422 to a front side can be controlled. As a result, it is possible to suppress the lower displacement member 440 from swinging in the front-rear direction between the first overhang state (third position) and the second overhang state (second position). Can be easily seen.

  The displacement of the link member 430 toward the back side can be regulated by disposing the link member 430 between the back surface base 412 and the cam member 422 as described above. That is, when the link member 430 swings to the back side, the link member 430 can be brought into contact with the back surface base 412 to restrict the displacement of the link member 430. As a result, it is possible to suppress the lower displacement member 440 from swinging in the front-rear direction.

  Further, the front base 411 is provided with a restricting means (curved wall portion 411e) for restricting the swing of the link member 430 in a direction other than the driven direction, and the cam member 422 is displaced between the first position and the second position. The first displacement area for displacing the third position between the first position and the second position from the first position and the second displacement area for displacing the second position from the third position can be displaced, The link member 430 is driven from the first driven position to the second driven position by the cam member 422 being displaced from the first position to the second position, and from the first driven position to the first driven position and the second driven position. The first driven region that displaces the third driven position that is an intermediate position between the first driven region and the second driven region that displaces the second driven position from the third driven position can be displaced, and the second displaced region and the first driven region Are set in the same region, and the cam member 422 When the second displacement region is displaced, the swinging in the direction other than the displacement direction of the cam member 422 is restricted by the restricting means (curved wall portion 411e), and therefore the same portion of the restricting means (curved wall portion 411e). The swing of the link member 430 and the cam member 422 can be regulated using the above.

  Therefore, since the restricting means (curved wall portion 411e) may be formed in one place, the shape of the restricting means is compared with the case where the restricting means for restricting displacement is formed in each of the cam member 422 and the link member 430. The manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  Further, since the swinging of the link member 430 and the cam member 422 can be restricted using the same part of the restricting means (curved wall portion 411e), the link member 430 can be connected to one restricting means (curved wall portion 411e). In addition, since it is not necessary to form the cam member 422 and the restricting portion, the restricting means (curved wall portion 411e) can be reduced accordingly.

  Further, when the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced from the retracted state to the second extended state, the protrusions 472 and 473 of the lower displacement member 440 inserted into the sliding grooves 411a and 411b formed in the front base 411. (The collar C disposed on the protrusions 472 and 473 (see FIG. 14)) is moved in front of the other end side (step 422c3 side) of the cam member 422 (arrow F direction side) as the cam member 422 is displaced. (See FIGS. 50 to 52). Thereby, when the other end side (step part 422c3 side) of the cam member 422 is pushed out to the back side by the projections 472 and 473 (collar C arranged on the projections 472 and 473), the cam member 422 is moved to the shaft portion. There is a risk that the link member 430 may come into contact with the link member 430 by being rotationally displaced in the front-rear direction around the center 422a.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the displacement of the cam member 422 toward the front side can be regulated by contacting the curved wall portion 411e, so the cam member 422 is centered on the shaft portion 422a. It is possible to suppress rotational displacement in the front-rear direction. As a result, the contact between the link member 430 and the cam member 422 can be suppressed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the cam member 422 is displaced beyond the first overhanging state (third position), the displacement is restricted by the curved wall portion 411e, so that the cam member 422 is bent during the initial operation. It can suppress that a frictional resistance becomes large by contacting with the wall part 411e. As a result, the initial operation of the cam member 422 can be stabilized.

  Next, the cam member 422 and the first link member 431 when the lower displacement unit 400 is in the second displacement state will be described with reference to FIG. 56A is a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit 400 taken along the line LVIa-LVIa in FIG. 52, and FIG. 56B is a first view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the second overhanging state (second position). 4 is a front view of a link member 431 and a cam member 422. FIG. In FIG. 56B, the outer shape of the base member 410 is shown by a chain line.

  As shown in FIG. 56, when the lower displacement unit 400 is in the second displacement state, the end portion of the cam member 422 comes into contact with the plate-like protrusion 431b of the first link member 431. Thereby, the rotational displacement of the cam member 422 in the direction in which the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced from the retracted state (first position) to the second displaced state can be restricted. As a result, the operation of stopping the rotational displacement of the cam member 422 can be distributed to the meshing portions of the transmission gear 421 and the tooth surface 422b and the contact portions of the cam member 422 and the first link member 431. Damage to the tooth surfaces of the gear 421 and the tooth surface 422b can be suppressed.

  Further, when the lower displacement unit 400 is in the second displacement state, the contact surface between the plate-like protrusion 431b of the first link member 431 and the cam member 422 is in contact with the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422. It is set in a direction perpendicular to the virtual line KS1 passing through the portion. As a result, when a force is applied around the axis of the first link member 431 in the direction from the second displacement state to the retracted state (first position), the force is applied to the axis of the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422. It can suppress acting in the direction of rotating around. As a result, the rotation of the cam member 422 due to the force acting on the first link member 431 can be suppressed.

  Here, as described above, the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced upward (in the direction of the arrow U) on the distal end side (the side opposite to the projection 473 connected to the front base 411 in the longitudinal direction). Accordingly, the rotational direction force acting around the axis of the through hole 431a of the first link member 431 supporting the lower displacement member 440 is maximized by the amount that the longitudinal direction component of the lower displacement member 440 approaches the gravitational direction. Since the transmission of force from the first link member 431 to the cam member 422 is suppressed, the lower displacement member 440 can be easily maintained at the position of the second displacement state.

  Further, when the cam member 422 is arranged at the position of the second displacement state, a force that rotates around the axis of the through hole 431 a of the first link member 431 is applied by the load of the lower displacement member 440. In this case, the end portion of the cam member 422 is pushed out by the plate-like protrusion 431b, and the force PW1 (see FIG. 56B) in the direction in which the cam member 422 rotates around the axis of the shaft portion 422a, and the sliding of the cam member 422. The inner wall of the moving groove 422c is pushed out from the sliding projection 431d, and the force PW2 (see FIG. 56B) in the direction in which the cam member 422 rotates around the shaft portion 422a acts in a direction that cancels out. As a result, the cam member 422 can be prevented from rotating with the force applied from the first link member 431.

  Next, the configuration of the lower displacement member 440 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 57 to 60. FIG. 57A is a front view of the lower displacement member 440, and FIG. 57B is a rear view of the lower displacement member 440. 58 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member 440, and FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement member 440. 60A and 60B are front views of the lower displacement member 440. FIG.

  60A shows a state in which the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 is seen transparently, and in FIG. 60B, the decorative member 450 and the front case 481 of the lower displacement member 440 are seen transparently. The state is shown.

  57 to 60, the lower displacement member 440 includes a base member 470 connected to the front base 411, a case member 480 covering the front and rear of the base member 470, and the case member 480 and the base member 470. A transmission mechanism 460 that is displaceably disposed therebetween and a decorative member 450 that is formed so as to cover the front and rear of the case member 480 are mainly provided.

  The base member 470 is a plate member formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and includes protrusions 472 and 473 that protrude to the back side on one end side, and a standing wall 471a that stands on the front side from the edge on the other end side. In the left and right direction (FIG. 57 left and right direction), a protruding wall 477 protruding in a U-shape that is upside down from the upper end of the central portion to the front side, and an upper end of the base member 470 is cut from the end portion of the protruding wall 477 to one end side. Rack gear 476 provided, shaft portions 474 and 475 projecting to the front side, rectangular wiring locking portion 478 attached to the back surface on one end side of base member 470, and center portion in the vertical direction of base member 470 And an opening 479 that is recessed from the one end side to the other end side.

  The protrusions 472 and 473 are connecting portions that are inserted into the sliding grooves 411a and 411b of the front base 411 as described above, and connect the lower displacement member 440 and the front base 411. Therefore, the sliding grooves 411a and 411b are formed in a columnar shape having an outer diameter smaller than the dimension between the opposing inner walls.

  The standing wall 471a is a wall portion for forming a gap between the front case 481 and the base member 470 when the front case 481 described later is attached to the base member 470, and has a sphere diameter. Is set to a larger standing dimension.

  The shaft portions 474 and 475 are projections that are inserted into the shafts of transmission gears 462 and 463 of the transmission mechanism 460 described later, and rotatably hold the transmission gears 462 and 463, and are larger than the inner diameters of the shaft holes of the transmission gears 462 and 463. It is formed in a cylindrical shape with a small outer diameter.

  The rack gear 476 has a tooth surface that meshes with a transmission gear 465 described later. As a result, a movable rack 464, which will be described later, slides relative to the base member 470, whereby the transmission gear 465 can be rotated.

  The protruding wall 477 causes the ball to fall to the outside of the lower displacement member 440 when a ball sent from the ball feeding unit 600 described later is received in front of the base member 470 through the opening 451a of the decorative member 450. Between the opposing wall portions formed in a substantially U shape is formed larger than the diameter of the sphere.

  The wiring locking portion 478 is a member for locking flexible wiring (not shown) to a control board disposed on the back side of the base member 470, and one end of the flexible wiring between the base member 470. Is attached to the back side of the base member 470. Thereby, even if the lower displacement member 440 is disposed so as to be displaceable with respect to the base member 410, the entanglement of the flexible wiring can be suppressed.

  Moreover, the wiring latching | locking part 478 is equipped with the processus | protrusion 478a which protrudes in a column shape at the back side. The protruding distance of the protrusion 478a is set to a distance that protrudes to the back side from the link member 430 connected to the back side, and is set to a distance that can contact the front surface of the back surface base 412. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the lower displacement member 440 from swinging backward, and to suppress the link member 430 from colliding with the back base 412.

  The opening 469 is an opening that defines a sliding displacement direction of the movable rack 464 disposed on the front side, and a guide plate 464d of the movable rack 464 described later is inserted therein.

  The transmission mechanism 460 is a member disposed in front of the base member 470, and meshes with the transmission gears 461, 462, 463, the drive motor KM 2 whose shaft portion is coupled to the transmission gear 461, and the transmission gear 463. A movable rack 464 that has a tooth surface and is disposed in front of the base member 470 so as to be slidable, and a transmission gear that is rotatably disposed on the movable rack 464 and meshed with the rack gear 476. 465, a rack 466 having a tooth surface meshed with the transmission gear 465 and disposed so as to be slidable in front of the movable rack 464, and a ball disposed rotatably on one end side of the rack 466 The receiving portion 467 is mainly provided.

  The transmission gear 461 is a gear in which the shaft portion of the drive motor KM2 is fitted in the shaft hole. The drive motor KM2 is attached to the base member 470 in a state where the drive motor KM2 is connected to the base member 470. It is arranged.

  As described above, the transmission gears 462 and 463 are rotatably held by the base member by inserting the shaft portions 474 and 475 of the base member 470 into the shaft hole. The transmission gears 461 to 463 are in meshed gear trains, and the terminal transmission gear 463 is rotated by the transmission gear 461 being rotated by the drive motor KM2.

  The movable rack 464 is formed in a rectangular horizontally long plate shape when viewed from the front, and includes a rack gear 464a engraved on the lower end surface, a shaft portion 464b protruding in a cylindrical shape from the front side, and an upper side protruding from one end side of the upper end surface. The contact plate 464c, a guide plate 464d protruding from one end to the other end at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, a rack guide portion 464e protruding to the front side opposite to the guide plate 464d, and protruding to the other lower end. It is mainly provided with a collision portion 464f.

  The rack gear 464 a is a tooth surface that meshes with the transmission gear 463. Therefore, by disposing the rack gear 464a and the transmission gear 463 in mesh with the base member 470, the movable rack 464 can be displaced by driving the drive motor KM2.

  The shaft portion 464b is a shaft portion in which the transmission gear 465 is rotatably held, and is formed in a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter smaller than that of the shaft hole of the transmission gear 465.

  The abutting plate 464c is an abutting portion that abuts against a sorting member 540 of the sorting unit 500 described later to displace the sorting member 540. That is, the distribution member 540 can be displaced by the displacement of the movable rack 464. A contact mode between the contact plate 464c and the sorting member 540 will be described later.

  As described above, the guide plate 464d is a plate-like body that is inserted into the opening 479 of the base member 470, and can define the displacement direction of the movable rack 464 that is displaced by the drive of the drive motor KM2. That is, the movable rack 464 that is displaced by the drive of the drive motor KM2 can be displaced along the direction in which the opening 479 extends. In the present embodiment, since the opening 479 extends in the left-right direction, the movable rack 464 can be slid in the left-right direction with respect to the base member 470.

  The rack guide portion 464e is a protruding wall for restricting the displacement direction of the rack 466 described later, and protrudes from one end to the other end in the left-right direction.

  The collision portion 464f is a wall portion that contacts a protrusion 492b of a displacement member 492, which will be described later, and displaces the displacement member 492, and is formed to protrude from the lower end of the movable rack 464. Moreover, the collision part 464f is formed in the state which the other end side inclined. Thereby, the protrusion 492b of the displacement member 492 can be displaced by sliding along the inclined surface.

  The rack 466 is formed from a rectangular horizontally long rod-like body when viewed from the front. The rack gear 466a is engraved on the upper end surface, the shaft portion 466b protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the end on the other end side to the back side, and protrudes to the front side. The two sliding plates 466c and the recessed portion 466d that is recessed from one end to the other end on the back side are mainly provided.

  The rack gear 466a is meshed with a transmission gear 465 attached to the movable rack 464. As a result, in a state where the rack 466 is disposed in front of the movable rack 464, the movable rack 464 is slid, so that the transmission gear 465 is rotated along with the slide displacement, and the driving force is transmitted to the rack 466. . Accordingly, the rack 466 can be displaced with respect to the movable rack 464.

  The shaft portion 466b is a protrusion that is inserted into a shaft hole 467b of a ball receiving portion 467, which will be described later, and is formed in a columnar shape having an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 467b. Thereby, the ball receiving portion 467 can be held rotatably.

  The sliding plate 466c is a protrusion that is inserted into an opening 481a of the front case 481 described later, and is formed from a plate-like body having a predetermined thickness. Thus, when the driving force is transmitted from the transmission gear 465 to the rack 466 and the rack 466 is displaced with respect to the movable rack 464, the displacement direction of the rack 466 can be defined as the direction in which the opening 481a extends. it can.

  The recessed portion 466d is in a state in which the rack guide portion 464e is disposed on the inner side when the rack 466 is disposed in front of the movable rack 464. Thus, when the driving force is transmitted from the transmission gear 465 to the rack 466 and the rack 466 is displaced with respect to the movable rack 464, the displacement direction of the rack 466 can be defined as the extending direction of the rack guide portion 464e. it can.

  Here, in order to regulate the displacement direction of the rack 466, if the recessed portion 466d and the rack guide portion 464e are formed, the displacement direction of the rack 466 can be defined as the extending direction of the rack guide portion 464e. However, since the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced while being slid in the left-right direction, depending on the displacement state of the lower displacement member 440, the engagement state of the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466 changes due to its own weight. There is a risk that the driving force may not be transmitted from the gear 465 to the rack 466 well.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the location which defines the displacement direction of the rack 466 is formed at two locations of the sliding plate 466c and the opening 481a, the recessed portion 466d and the rack guide portion 464e, the lower displacement member 440 is formed. It is possible to prevent the meshing state of the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466 from changing when the displacement state is changed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the drive transmission from the transmission gear 465 to the rack 466 from being hindered.

  Further, the sliding plate 466c is formed to project from two places in the left-right direction (FIG. 57 (a) left-right direction) of the rack 466, and the sliding plate 466c on the other end side (the opposite side of the shaft portion 466b) The rack is disposed below the transmission gear 465 (lower side in FIG. 57) at the displacement end position of the rack (the position where the rack 466 protrudes most with respect to the movable rack 464).

  Here, at the displacement end position, since the ball receiving portion 467 disposed on the shaft portion 466b of the rack 466 performs a firing operation (rotational displacement) as described later, the ball receiving portion disposed on one end side of the rack 466 is performed. The other end side of the rack is easily displaced by the inertial force due to the displacement of the portion 467. Therefore, a load is easily applied to the meshing surfaces of the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466, and the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466 may be damaged.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the sliding plate 466c on the other end side (the opposite side of the shaft portion 466b) is the displacement end position of the rack (the position where the rack 466 protrudes most with respect to the movable rack 464). , The rack 466 at a position where the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466 mesh with each other when the ball receiving portion 467 performs a firing operation (rotation operation). Can be prevented from being displaced. As a result, it is possible to prevent the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466 from being damaged.

  The ball receiving portion 467 is a portion that holds a game ball, is formed in a substantially U shape in front view, and is formed so as to be able to receive a ball in an inner portion of the U shape. That is, the inner side of the U-shape of the ball receiving portion 467 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer shape of the sphere. As a result, one ball can be provided in the inner portion of the ball receiving portion 467. The ball receiving portion 467 is mainly formed with a shaft hole 467b penetrating in the front-rear direction at the lower end position of the U-shape, and a leg portion 467a protruding downward from the lower outer peripheral surface.

  As described above, the shaft hole 467b is a shaft hole for holding the ball receiving portion 467 in the rack 466 in a rotatable state, and has an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 466b of the rack 466. Therefore, the ball receiving portion 467 can be rotatably held by inserting the shaft portion 466b of the rack 466 into the shaft hole 467b. Further, after inserting the shaft portion 466b into the shaft hole 467b, the urging spring SP2 is disposed around the shaft portion 466b, and a screw having a head larger than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 467b is fastened to the shaft portion 466b. The Thereby, the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed on the rack 466 in a state of being biased clockwise around the front view. A detailed description of the aspect of the ball receiver 467 will be described later.

  The leg portion 467a is a projection that urges the ball receiving portion 467 to be rotated by the urging spring SP2, and the front end of the ball receiving portion 467 has a front end that will be described later with the U-shaped open portion facing upward. The position is set so as to contact the bottom wall portion 481 b of the case 481. Thereby, it can control that ball receiving part 467 rotates.

  The case member 480 is a member that covers the front and back of the base member 470, and mainly includes a front case 481 disposed on the front side of the base member 470 and a back case 482 disposed on the back side.

  The front case 481 is formed in a rectangular horizontally long plate shape when viewed from the front, has an opening 481a extending in the left-right direction at a substantially intermediate position in the gravitational direction, a bottom wall portion 481b formed to protrude from the lower end surface on the back side, and a lower edge portion. A shaft hole 481c penetrating in the front-rear direction is mainly provided and formed.

  The opening 481a is formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction. As described above, when the front case 481 is disposed on the base member 470, the rack sliding plate 466c is inserted therein.

  The bottom wall portion 481b is formed to protrude from the lower end portion of the front case 481 to the back side and extends in the left-right direction. Further, the bottom wall portion 481b is in a state in which the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 is in contact with the upper surface of the bottom case portion 481b when the front case 481 is disposed on the base member 470.

  The back case 482 is a plate member for disposing the control board 491 on the back side of the base member 470, and is formed in a rectangular horizontally long shape whose front view is smaller than that of the base member 470. In addition, the back case 482 includes a protrusion 482a that protrudes to the back side.

  As described above, the protrusion 482a is a connecting portion connected to the through hole 432b of the second link member 432, and is formed in a columnar shape having an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole 432b. Therefore, after inserting the projection 482a into the through hole 432b, the back case 482 and the second link member 432 can be rotated by fastening a screw having a head larger than the inner diameter of the through hole 432b to the tip of the projection 482a. Can be connected in a stable state.

  The decorative member 450 is formed in an outer shape imitating a pattern or character, and a picture of the pattern or character is drawn on the surface. The decorative member 450 is mainly formed with a front side decorative portion 451 disposed on the front side of the front case 481 and a back side decorative portion 452 disposed on the back side of the back case 482. In the present embodiment, a shark pattern (character) is drawn on the decorative member 450.

  The front side decorative portion 451 is formed to have an outer diameter larger than the outer shape of the front case 481 in a front view, and is attached to the front case 481. Thereby, the members (case member 480, base member 470, etc.) disposed on the back side of the front side decorative portion can be made invisible to the player.

  The back side decorative portion 452 is disposed behind the upper end of the front side decorative portion 451. Thereby, the member arrange | positioned from the upper side of the back side decoration part 452 to the back side of the front side decoration part 451 can be made invisible to a player.

  Further, a displacement member 492 is disposed on the same plane as the front side decorative portion 451 in the front-rear direction. The displacement member 492 is formed mainly including a shaft portion 492a protruding to the back side and a protrusion 492b.

  The shaft portion 492a is formed in a columnar shape having an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 481c of the front case 481. Therefore, by inserting the shaft portion 492a into the shaft hole 481c, the displacement member 492 can be connected to the front case in a rotatable state. Further, an urging spring SP3 is disposed on the distal end side of the shaft portion 492a into which the shaft hole 481c is inserted. Thereby, the displacement member 492 can be disposed in a biased state. A detailed description of the displacement of the displacement member 492 will be described later.

  The shaft portion 492a can transmit a driving force rotating around the shaft of the shaft portion 492a to the displacement member 492 by colliding with the collision portion 464f of the movable rack 464 described above. That is, the movable rack 464 can rotationally displace the displacement member 492 with the displacement.

  Therefore, the lower displacement member 440 includes a displacement member 492 (arrangement member) that is displaceably disposed on the lower displacement member 440 (base member), and the ball receiving portion 467 (displacement member) can hold a game ball. Further, since the displacement member 492 is formed to be able to be ejected and can be displaced when the game ball is emitted from the ball receiving portion 467, the occurrence of rattling of the lower displacement member 440 can be suppressed.

  That is, when a game ball is fired from the ball receiver 467, the center of gravity position of the lower displacement member 440 is changed by the weight of the game ball. In the case of adopting a configuration in which the displacement member 492 is displaced in the direction to move, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of rattling of the lower displacement member 440 accompanying the change in the center of gravity position. Further, when a game ball is fired from the ball receiving portion 467, the lower displacement member 440 is subjected to a reaction as the game ball is fired. For example, the displacement member 492 is moved in a direction to cancel the reaction caused by the game ball being fired. In the case of adopting the displacement configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of rattling of the lower displacement member 440 due to the reaction.

  Further, as described above, when the cam member 422 is arranged at the position of the second displacement state, the force PW1 in the direction in which the cam member 422 rotates around the axis of the shaft portion 422a (see FIG. 56B). Then, the cam member 422 acts in a direction in which the force PW2 (see FIG. 56B) in the direction in which the cam member 422 rotates around the shaft portion 422a cancels, and the cam member 422 acts from the first link member 431. Rotation with force can be suppressed. Therefore, in the second displacement state, the cam member 422 and the link member 430 can be arranged in a stable state. Therefore, when a game ball is launched from the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 at the position of the second displacement state, the first link member 431 or the cam member 422 swings due to the inertial force due to the launch of the game ball. Can be suppressed.

  Further, since the displacement member 492 is displaced by the collision portion 464f colliding with the shaft portion 492a due to the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, it is not necessary to separately provide a driving means for displacing the displacement member 492. . In other words, the drive motor KM2 for displacing the ball receiving portion 467 can also be used as a drive means for displacing the displacement member 492. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the weight of the lower displacement member 440 and easily suppress the rattling.

  Further, since the displacement member 492 can be displaced mechanically in synchronization with the displacement of the ball receiver 467, for example, the position of the ball receiver 467 is detected by the sensor device, and the displacement member 492 is detected according to the detection result. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the product cost and to ensure the reliability of the displacement operation of the displacement member 492 with respect to the ball receiving portion 467.

  Next, transition of the transmission mechanism 460 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 64. 61 is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 in the first position, FIG. 62 is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 in the second position, and FIG. 63 is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 in the third position. FIG. FIGS. 64A to 64C are partial enlarged views of the lower displacement member 440. FIG.

  The first position is a position where the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed at a substantially central position with respect to the base member 470 in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 61). The second position is a position where the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed on the lower side in the gravity direction of the protruding wall 477 (lower side in FIG. 62). The third position is a position where the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed at the right end of the base member 470 in the left-right direction.

  61 to 64, the decorative member 450 and the front case 481 of the lower displacement member 440 are transparently shown, and the outer shape of the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is shown by a chain line. Further, in FIGS. 64A and 64B, the transition state immediately before the displacement to the third position is sequentially illustrated, and in FIG. 64C, the lower displacement member 440 at the third position is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 61, the lower displacement member 440 in the first position is such that the movable rack 464 is located at the left end in the left-right direction with respect to the base member 470. At the first position, the rack 466 is disposed in front of the movable rack 464, and the rack 466 and the movable rack 464 are overlapped in the front-rear direction. That is, the rack 466 is positioned at the left end in the left-right direction with respect to the base member 470, similarly to the movable rack 464. Therefore, the ball receiving portion 467 connected to the rack 466 is disposed at a substantially central position in the left-right direction with respect to the base member 470.

  At the first position, as described above, the movable rack 464 and the rack 466 are collected at the left end of the base member 470 in the left-right direction. Here, since the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced while being slid (displaced from the retracted state to the first and second extended states), the center of gravity of the lower displacement member 440 is disposed in the vicinity of the rotating shaft. It is desirable to be in a state that has been made.

  According to the present embodiment, the transmission mechanism 460 for displacing the ball receiving portion 467 is in a state in which the movable rack 464 and the rack 466 are overlapped in the front-rear direction (two-stage rack). It can be brought closer to the grooves 411a, 411b side (the rotating shaft side of the lower displacement member 440).

  Therefore, when the lower displacement member 440 is displaced from the retracted position to the first and second extended positions as described above, the lower displacement member 440 is set to the first position. The driving force when rotating and displacing can be reduced. Therefore, the energy consumption of the drive motor KM1 that displaces the lower displacement member 440 can be suppressed.

  The displacement from the first position shown in FIG. 61 to the second position shown in FIG. 62 is performed by driving the drive motor KM2.

  When the drive motor KM2 is driven from the first position, the transmission gear 461 connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM2 is rotated. Thereby, the transmission gear 462 and the transmission gear 463 are rotated. When the transmission gear 463 is rotated, the driving force is transmitted to the movable rack 464 from the rack gear 464 a meshed with the transmission gear 463, and the movable rack 464 is slid to the right with respect to the base member 470.

  When the movable rack 464 is slid, the transmission gear 465 disposed on the movable rack 464 is rotated by the rack gear 476 of the base member 470 along with the sliding displacement. Accordingly, the driving force is transmitted to the rack 466 by the rack gear 466a meshed with the transmission gear 465. As a result, the rack 466 is slid to the right in the left-right direction with respect to the movable rack 464, and the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the second position.

  The displacement from the second position shown in FIG. 62 to the third position shown in FIG. 63 is performed by driving the drive motor KM2, similarly to the displacement from the first position to the second position. Note that the drive transmission from the drive motor KM2 to the rack 466 is the same as the displacement from the first position to the second position, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  63 and 64, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position, the ball receiving portion 467 is released from the contact state between the leg portion 467a and the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481. The shaft hole 467b is rotationally displaced about the axis of the shaft hole 467b by the biasing force of the biasing spring SP2 disposed in the shaft portion 466b.

  More specifically, in the first and second positions (a state in which the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed on the left side in front of the ball receiving portion 467 in the third position), the front ends of the leg portions 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 are in front. The case 481 is in contact with the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b, and the clockwise rotation around the shaft hole 467b by the urging force of the urging spring SP2 is restricted.

  On the other hand, when the distal end portion of the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position, it is disposed on the right side in front of the end portion of the bottom wall portion 481b, and the bottom wall portion 481b and the base member 470 stand up. It arrange | positions inside the recessed part 481b1 formed between facing the installation wall 471a. Therefore, the ball receiving portion 467 is rotated around the axis of the shaft hole 467b by the urging force of the urging spring SP2. When the ball receiving portion 467 is rotated at the third position, the tip of the leg portion 467a comes into contact with the end surface of the bottom wall portion 481b, and rotation around the shaft hole 467b of the ball receiving portion 467 is restricted. Thereby, the ball receiving portion 467 is stopped at a position rotated approximately 40 degrees around the shaft hole 467b. Hereinafter, the rotational displacement of the ball receiver 467 at the third position will be referred to as a firing operation.

  The ball receiving portion 467 includes a recess 481b1 that is recessed in the track region when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the first position to the third position direction (first direction), and the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced in the first direction. In addition, a leg portion 467a engaged with the recess 481b1 is provided, and the posture can be changed by engaging the leg portion 467a with the recess 481b1, so that the posture of the ball receiving portion 467 can be changed. The structure can be simplified.

  Further, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the second position to the third position, the collision portion 464f is slid to the right when viewed from the front due to the displacement of the movable rack 464, and collides with the protrusion 492b of the displacement member 492. As a result, the displacement member 492 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the shaft portion 492a.

  That is, when the ball receiver 467 is displaced to the third position, the ball receiver 467 is rotationally displaced and the displacement member 492 is rotationally displaced. Therefore, the ball receiving portion 467 performs a launch operation, the ball is discharged from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467, the lower displacement member 440 becomes lighter, and the lower displacement member 440 swings and the displacement member 492 is rotationally displaced. The inertial force to be applied can be applied in the opposite direction. As a result, it is possible to suppress the lower displacement member 440 from swinging when the ball is discharged from the inside of the lower displacement member 440.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 65, a ball receiving operation to the ball receiving unit 467 will be described. FIGS. 65A to 65C are front views of the lower displacement member 440. FIG. In FIGS. 65A to 65C, transition states in which a receiving operation for receiving a ball into the ball receiving unit 467 is sequentially illustrated.

  In FIGS. 65A to 65C, the decorative member 450 and the front case 481 of the lower displacement member 440 are transparently shown, and the outer shape of the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is shown by a chain line.

  Further, in FIGS. 65 (a) to 65 (c), the horizontal direction in the retracted state of the lower displacement member 440 is indicated by a two-dot chain line with the phantom line H1, and the lower displacement member 440 is in the first tension state. The horizontal direction in the extended state is illustrated with the imaginary line H2. In addition, the angle by which the lower displacement member 440 is rotated from the retracted position to the first extended position is indicated by a sign of an angle θ. Note that the imaginary line H1, the imaginary line H2, and the angle θ are also shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 65A, in the lower displacement unit 400 in the retracted state (the longitudinal direction of the lower displacement member 440 is parallel to the imaginary line H1), the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is moved to the first position. As a result, the game ball T1 is sent from the distribution unit 500, which will be described later, to the opening 451a formed in the front decorative portion 451 of the lower displacement member 440. The game ball T1 sent to the opening 451a is sent to the inside of the projecting wall 477 and sent to the inside of the lower displacement member 440.

  As shown in FIG. 65 (b), when the game ball T1 is sent to the opening 451a, the lower displacement member 440 is displaced to the second position. Therefore, as described above, in the second position, since the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed below the protruding wall 477, the game ball T1 sent to the inside of the protruding wall 477 is placed inside the ball receiving portion 467. You can send a ball. When the game ball T1 is received by the ball receiver 467, the game ball T1 can be displaced in accordance with the operation of the ball receiver 467.

  As shown in FIG. 65 (c), when the game ball T1 is sent to the ball receiving portion, the lower displacement member 440 is displaced to the first position. Thereby, it can be set as the state which has arrange | positioned the ball receiving part 467 in the 1st position in the state which has arrange | positioned the game ball T1 in the ball receiving part 467.

  Here, a gaming machine is known that includes a base member, a base member that is displaceably disposed on one side of the base member, and a displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the base member. According to this gaming machine, in addition to the effect of being displaced between the extended position where the base member is extended to the game area and made visible to the player and the retracted position retracted from the game area, the base member is An effect of displacing the displacement member in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the overhang position can be performed.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since one side of the base member is displaceably disposed on the base member, when the displacement member is displaced, the back of the base member with respect to the base member becomes a dead center. There was a problem that stickiness was likely to occur. In particular, when the displacement member is displaced from the stopped state, the change in acceleration is maximized, so that the base member is likely to rattle due to the influence of inertial force.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the ball receiver 467 is displaced from the second position and from the first position closer to one side of the lower displacement member 440 (base member) than the first position. In a state where at least the lower displacement member 440 is disposed at a predetermined position with respect to the base member 410 (for example, the lower displacement member 440 protrudes into the game area and is visible to the player). In the first overhanging state), since the displacement is started from the first position, rattling of the lower displacement member 440 of the base member can be suppressed. That is, since the first position is closer to one side of the lower displacement member than the second position, by setting the first position as the displacement start position of the ball receiving portion 467, The weight can be kept close to the dead point when the lower displacement member 440 rattles with respect to the base member 410, and accordingly, the influence of the inertial force when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the stopped state is reduced. It can be made difficult to act on the displacement member 440. As a result, rattling of the lower displacement member 440 can be easily suppressed.

  Further, as described above, the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced (displaced from the retracted state to the first and second extended states) while sliding. Therefore, when the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced in a state where the game ball T1 is disposed far from the rotation axis, a centrifugal force is easily generated in the game ball T1, and the game ball T1 moves to move the inner wall of the ball receiving portion 467. There is a problem that a collision sound is generated due to a collision between the ball and the game ball T1, or the ball receiving portion 467 is damaged.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the lower displacement member 440 can be displaced to the first position after the game ball T1 is received by the ball receiving portion 467, the game ball T1 is moved to the rotation axis of the lower displacement member 440. It can be arranged in the vicinity (closer). Accordingly, when the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced (displaced from the retracted state to the first and second extended states) with the game ball T1 received by the lower displacement member 440, centrifugal force is applied to the game ball T1. Occurrence can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent a collision sound from being generated when the game ball T1 and the ball receiving unit 467 collide with each other, or the ball receiving unit 467 from being damaged.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the lower displacement member 440 includes a movable rack 464, a transmission gear 465 (pinion gear), and a rack 466 (rack member), which are configured to move the ball receiving portion 467. Since the portion 467 is disposed, when the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 is started from the first position, not only the weight of the rack 466 but also the weight of the movable rack 464 and the rack 466 is one side of the lower displacement member 440. (The fulcrum when the lower displacement member 440 rattles with respect to the base member 410) can be approached. As a result, rattling of the lower displacement member 440 when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the stopped state can be easily suppressed.

  Further, in a state where the game ball T1 is received in the ball receiving portion 467, the load of the lower displacement member 440 is increased by the load of the game ball T1. Therefore, as described above, by setting the lower displacement member 440 in the first position, the position of the center of gravity of the lower displacement member 440 is set to the sliding grooves 411a and 411b side of the front base 411 (the rotation axis of the lower displacement member 440). Side). Therefore, when the lower displacement member 440 is displaced from the retracted position to the first and second extended positions, the lower displacement member 440 is rotated and displaced by setting the lower displacement member 440 to the first position. The driving force at the time can be reduced. Therefore, the energy consumption of the drive motor KM1 that displaces the lower displacement member 440 can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the ball payout operation will be described. 66 (a) to 66 (c) are front views of the lower displacement member 440. FIG. In FIGS. 66A to 66C, the transition state of the lower displacement member 440 in the ball dispensing operation is illustrated in order. 66 (a) to 66 (c), the decorative member 450 and the front case 481 of the lower displacement member 440 are transparently shown, and the outer shape of the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is shown by a chain line. Further, the ball paying-out operation is an operation of paying out the game ball T1 received in the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 from the emission opening 471 to the outside of the lower displacement member 440.

  As shown in FIGS. 66 (a) to 66 (c), in the paying-out operation of paying out the balls received in the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440, the lower displacement member 440 is displaced from the first position to the third position in order. Is done.

  That is, the game ball T1 is received inside the ball receiving portion 467 by the receiving operation, and the lower displacement member 440 disposed at the first position is displaced to the third position, so that the game ball T1 is moved to the ball receiving portion 467. Along with the displacement, it is transported to the exit opening 471 side. The game ball T1 moved to the exit opening 471 side is given an inertial force to the exit opening 471 side by the slide displacement of the ball receiver 467 and the launching operation of the ball receiver 467 at the third position. It jumps out from the inside of the part 467. Thereby, the ball can be paid out from the inside of the lower displacement member 440.

  Here, since the displacement direction when the ball receiving portion 467 (displacement member) starts to be displaced from the first position is a direction away from the position side of the lower displacement member 440, the ball receiving portion 467 is at the first position. In the arranged state, the rack 466 (rack member) can be brought closer to the base member 410 from one side of the lower displacement member 440. That is, in order for the ball receiving portion 467 (rack 466) to be displaced in a direction away from one side of the lower displacement member 440, the rack 466 is configured such that the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 is started and then the transmission gear 465 ( The portion on the rack gear 466a side where the pinion gear) is engaged is directed to one side of the lower displacement member 440. Therefore, the weight of the rack 466 can be made closer to one side of the lower displacement member 440 (the fulcrum when the lower displacement member 440 rattles against the base member 410), and as a result, the ball receiving portion 467 can be moved. It is possible to easily suppress rattling of the lower displacement member 440 when displaced from the stopped state.

  The ball receiving portion 467 is displaced in the third position direction (first direction), and is formed so that its posture can be changed when reaching the third position. Therefore, up to the third position, the ball receiving portion T1 receives one game ball T1. While it is easy to maintain the state held by the portion 467 and the drop of the game ball T1 from the ball receiving portion 467 can be suppressed, the change in the posture of the ball receiving portion 467 is utilized when the second position is reached. Thus, the game ball T1 can be easily paid out from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467.

  66 (a) to 66 (c) when the lower displacement member 440 is retracted (the longitudinal direction of the lower displacement member 440 is disposed horizontally with the virtual line H1). When the operation is performed, the game ball paid out to the outside of the lower displacement member 440 is sent into the collection port 411f.

  On the other hand, when the lower displacement member 440 performs the payout operation of the ball receiving portion 467 at the position where the lower displacement member 440 is in the first overhanging state (the longitudinal direction of the lower displacement member 440 is rotated by the angle θ from the imaginary line H1). The game ball paid out to the outside of 440 is sent to the upper part of the ball receiving base 710 of the rotation unit 700.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68, the discharging operation when two or more balls are sent into the lower displacement member 440 will be described. 67 (a) to 67 (c) and FIGS. 68 (a) to 68 (c) are front views of the lower displacement member 440. FIG.

  In FIGS. 43A to 43C and FIGS. 44A to 44C, the transition state of the discharging operation is illustrated in order. 43 (a) to 43 (c) and 44 (a) to 44 (c), the decorative member 450 and the front case 481 of the lower displacement member 440 are transparent, and the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is transparent. Is shown by a two-dot chain line.

  As shown in FIGS. 67 (a) to (c), when two or more balls are continuously sent from the sorting unit 500 described later, the second ball is moved by receiving the lower displacement member 440. The game ball T2 can be dropped on the displacement path of the ball receiver 467.

  That is, the ball receiving unit 467 is displaced from the first position to the second position, and the first game ball T1 can be sent to the inside of the ball receiving unit 467, and the second game ball T2 can be sent to the first ball. It can be made to contact | abut to the game ball T1, and can be set | placed inside the protruding wall 477 (refer FIG.67 (b)). After receiving the first game ball T1 at the second position, the ball receiver 467 is displaced to the first position, so that the ball receiver 467 receives the first game ball T1 at the ball receiver 467. The second game ball T2 can be dropped onto the displacement path of the ball receiver 467 by displacing 467 to the first position.

  Here, in the gaming machine in which the ball received by the ball receiving portion 467 at the second position is displaced to the third position by the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, when a malfunction occurs in the displacement of the sorting member 540 of the sorting unit 500 described later. There is a possibility that more than the specified number of game balls may be sent to the trajectory region of the ball receiving portion 467. In this case, there is a problem that a problem may occur due to the game balls in excess of the specified number. For example, game balls in excess of the specified number enter the transmission mechanism 460 that drives the ball receiver 467 and are bitten by the movable part, which may cause damage. Alternatively, there is a possibility that game balls exceeding the specified number may flow out of the game area (for example, the back side of the game board 13 or the inside of the back case 300).

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the ball receiving portion 467 is formed to be displaceable from the second position to the first position opposite to the ball sending direction. The orbital area can be expanded. Therefore, for example, even when a malfunction occurs in the sorting member 540 and a game ball of a specified number or more is sent, the number of game balls exceeding the specified number is increased by the amount of the track area of the ball receiving unit 467 being expanded. It can be accepted in the orbital area. As a result, the game balls that exceed the specified number can be moved in accordance with the displacement of the ball receiver 467 to the third position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls exceeding the specified number from entering the transmission mechanism 460 that drives the ball receiver 467 and out of the game area. As a result, the games exceeding the specified number are played. It is possible to make it difficult to cause problems due to the ball.

  In addition, the ball receiving unit 467 can receive and hold one game ball T1 sent from the distribution unit 500, which will be described later, at the second position, and can also move from the second position to the first position (second direction). ) At least by a distance exceeding the diameter of the game ball, the ball receiving portion 467 is moved from the second position to the third direction (first direction) after receiving one game ball at the second position. ), The number of game balls exceeding the specified number can be sent to the trajectory region of the ball receiving portion 467 (the region in the first direction relative to the ball receiving portion 467). Therefore, the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be moved in accordance with the displacement of the ball receiver 467 in the third position direction (first direction).

  In this case, the first game ball T1 is held by the ball receiver 467, and the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be sent to the trajectory region of the ball receiver 467, so that the first game ball T1 and 2 The game balls T2 after the ball can be separated. Therefore, for example, by displacing the ball receiving portion 467 in the third position direction (first direction), the game after the second ball is maintained while maintaining the state where the ball receiving member holds the first game ball T1. Only the ball T2 can be discharged from the orbital region.

  Further, in the case where the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the second position and the first ball is received, then the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position and the game ball T1 is discharged from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467. The second game ball T2 drops onto the top of the rack 466, the second game ball T2 is sent between the ball receiving portion 467 and the transmission gear 465, and the second game ball T2 is moved to the lower displacement member 440. There is a risk that it will be impossible to discharge outside.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the receiving operation for receiving the ball in the ball receiving portion 467 is the first position opposite to the emission opening 471 after the game ball T1 is received inside the ball receiving portion 467 at the second position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second game ball T2 from being discharged out of the lower displacement member 440.

  In other words, in a gaming machine equipped with an accessory that performs a discharging operation for discharging a game ball sent into the accessory, the position of the member that discharges the ball (the ball receiving portion 467 in this embodiment) receives the ball. If the ball is only displaced to the (second position) and the position to discharge the ball (third position), when two or more game balls are sent into the accessory, the ball is discharged to the member that discharges the ball. In the present embodiment, the second game ball T2 may be discharged to the side opposite to the exit (exit opening 471). In this embodiment, after receiving the first game ball T1, the ball receiving portion 467 is connected to the output opening 471. The second game ball T2 can be sent between the ball receiving portion 467 and the emission opening 471 by displacing it to the first position on the opposite side.

  As shown in FIGS. 68 (a) to (c), after the second game ball T2 is sent on the displacement path of the ball receiving portion 467, the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position before the firing operation. By doing so, the second game ball T2 can be rolled to the exit opening 471 side in a state where the second game ball T2 is in contact with the ball receiving portion 467. As a result, the second game ball T2 can be discharged from the exit opening 471.

  In this case, the ball receiving portion 467 is located above the center position of the second game ball T2 in which the lower end surface of the U-shaped portion is sent on the displacement path of the ball receiving portion 467 (above FIG. 68 (a)). Placed in. Further, in a state where the leg portion 467a is in contact with the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b, the leg portion 467a is disposed in a state of being inclined by about 45 degrees with respect to the contact surface with the bottom wall portion 481b. Furthermore, the right side (right side in FIG. 68 (a)) of the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed at the same position in the vertical direction as the right end of the leg portion 467a, so the second game ball The outer surface of T2 can be brought into contact with the leg portion 467a.

  In addition, since the leg portion 467a is inclined by approximately 45 degrees with respect to the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b, the outer surface of the lower hemisphere of the second game ball T2 (the lower hemisphere on the bottom wall portion 481b side) Abutted. Thereby, when rolling the second game ball T2 to the exit opening 471 side, it is possible to generate a force to lift the second game ball T2 upward on the inclined surface of the leg 467a. Therefore, the frictional force between the second game ball T2 and the bottom wall portion 481b when the second game ball T2 rolls on the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball receiving portion 467 from being stopped when the second game ball T2 rolls toward the exit opening 471.

  In other words, the leg portion 467a protrudes from the ball receiving portion 467 in the direction (first direction) from the first position to the third position, and the protruding tip is the track of the ball receiving portion 467. Since it is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the lower half of the game balls (that is, the second and subsequent game balls T2) sent to the area, the ball receiving portion 467 is moved from the first position to the third position direction (first direction). When the ball is displaced, the game ball can be moved while the lower half of the game ball is pushed by the leg portion 467a. As a result, the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be easily discharged from the track area of the ball receiving portion 467.

  Further, a leg portion 467a is provided between the first game ball T1 held by the ball receiving unit 467 and the game ball (the second and subsequent game balls T2) sent to the trajectory region of the ball receiving unit 467. By interposing, the distance between the first game ball T1 and the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be secured by the protruding length of the leg portion 467a. Therefore, it is possible to easily discharge only the second and subsequent game balls T2 from the track area while maintaining the state in which the ball receiving portion 467 holds the first game ball T1.

  Further, the engagement with the recess 481b1 allows the leg portion 467a to have both the role of changing the posture of the ball receiving portion 467 and the role of moving the game ball while pushing the lower half surface thereof. This can reduce product costs.

  Further, since the size of the recess 481b1 from the first position to the third position direction (first direction) is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball, the game ball sent to the track area of the ball receiving unit 467 (that is, When the second and subsequent game balls T2) are moved along with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 in the first direction, the game balls T2) can easily pass through the recess 481b1. As a result, the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be easily discharged from the track area.

  As described above, when the lower displacement unit 400 is disposed in the retracted state, the recovery port 411f is disposed below the emission opening 471 of the lower displacement member 440. Therefore, the game ball T2 that has been discharged in the retracted state is sent to the collection port 411f.

  On the other hand, when the lower displacement unit 400 is disposed in the first overhanging state, the recovery port 411f is in a state positioned below the emission opening 471. The opening of the recovery port 411f is opened on the upper side. Therefore, the game ball T2 that has been discharged is sent to the collection port 411f.

  That is, the recovery port 411f is disposed vertically below the end of the base member 470 on the first direction side (standing wall 471a side) and has an opening in the vertical direction. A game ball that is moved along with the movement in the three-position direction (first direction) and is discharged from the track area of the ball receiving portion 467 (that is, the second and subsequent game balls T2) is received from the opening of the recovery port 411f. Can be recovered.

  Further, the opening of the recovery port 411f is at least perpendicular to the end of the base member 470 on the first direction side (the standing wall 471a side) at each position in the retracted state, the first overhanging state, and the second overhanging state. It is arranged in the lower direction. Thereby, even when the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced to any of the retracted position, the first extended state, and the second extended state, the game ball discharged from the track region of the ball receiving portion 467 (that is, the second ball Subsequent game balls T2) can be received and recovered from the opening of the recovery member.

  67 (a) to 67 (c) and 68 (a) to 68 (c) at the position of the lower displacement member 440 in the retracted state (the state in which the longitudinal direction of the lower displacement member 440 is disposed horizontally with the imaginary line H1). When the discharging operation of the ball receiving portion 467 is performed, the game ball paid out to the outside of the lower displacement member 440 is sent into the collection port 411f. When the lower displacement member 440 performs the discharging operation of the ball receiving portion 467 at the position where the lower displacement member 440 is in the first overhanging state (the longitudinal direction of the lower displacement member 440 is rotated from the virtual line H1 by the angle θ), The game ball paid out to the outside of 440 is sent to the collection port 411f as described above.

  Next, a configuration when the second game ball T2 is discharged from the emission opening 471 will be described with reference to FIG. 69A is a partially enlarged view of the lower displacement member 440 in the range LXIXa of FIG. 68B, and FIG. 69B is a partially enlarged view of the lower displacement member 440 in the range LXIXb of FIG. 68A. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 69, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position immediately before the launching operation, the game ball T2 is brought into contact with the side surface of the ball receiving portion 467 on the standing wall 471a side, and the emission opening The lower displacement member 440 can be pushed out from 471.

  In this case, when the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 is inserted between the bottom wall portion 481b and the standing wall 471a and the ball receiving portion 467 rotates, the game ball T2 and the ball receiving portion 467 come into contact with each other. By doing so, the rotational force of the ball receiving portion 467 can be transmitted to the game ball T2. As a result, the game ball T2 can be easily discharged from the emission opening 471. In addition, the ball receiving portion 467 can be returned to the state before the rotation operation using the repulsive force when the ball receiving portion 467 is brought into contact with the game ball T2. Therefore, when the game ball T2 sent to the trajectory region of the ball receiving unit 467 is discharged, it is possible to prevent the first game ball T1 held by the ball receiving unit 467 from dropping off.

  Further, the lower displacement member 440 is erected at a height lower than the radius of the game ball in the orbital region when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the second position to the third position direction (first direction). 481b1 is provided with a standing wall 471a located on the first direction side, and the second and subsequent game balls sent to the track area of the ball receiving portion 467 are moved along with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 in the first direction. When the ball is moved, the game ball T2 is brought into contact with the standing wall 471a and the ball receiving portion 467 so that the posture change of the ball receiving portion 467 can be regulated. Only the second and subsequent game balls can be easily discharged from the track area while maintaining the state held by the ball receiving portion 467.

  That is, the standing wall 471a is erected at a height from the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b to the standing tip, which is lower than the radius of the game ball, so that the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced in the first direction. Accordingly, when the game ball T2 is moved by being pushed by the leg portion, the lower half surface of the game ball T2 is brought into contact with the standing wall 471a, and the gaming ball can easily get over the standing wall 471a. In this case, the game ball T2 is brought into contact with the ball receiving portion 467 (that is, the game ball T2 is interposed between the ball receiving portion 467 and the standing wall 471a), and a reaction force is applied from the game ball T2 to the ball receiving portion 467. Therefore, it is possible to restrict the change in the attitude of the ball receiver, and to prevent the first game ball held by the ball receiver 467 from dropping off. As a result, it is possible to easily discharge only the second and subsequent game balls T2 from the game area while maintaining the state in which the ball receiving unit 467 holds the first game ball.

  On the other hand, when the second and subsequent game balls T2 are not sent to the trajectory region of the ball receiving portion 467, no game ball is interposed between the standing wall 471a and the ball receiving portion 467. By engaging the portion 467a with the concave portion 481b1, the posture of the ball receiving portion 467 can be changed. As a result, it is possible to easily discharge the first game ball T1 (that is, the game ball held by the ball receiving unit 467) from the ball receiving unit 467 using the change in the posture of the ball receiving unit 467.

  Next, the distribution unit 500 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 70A is a top view of the distribution unit 500, and FIG. 70B is a rear view of the distribution unit 500. 71 is an exploded front perspective view of the distribution unit 500, and FIG. 72 is an exploded rear perspective view of the distribution unit 500.

  As shown in FIGS. 70 to 72, the sorting unit 500 includes a base plate 520 formed in a plate-like body having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and an interval between the base plate 520 attached to the front side of the base plate 520. The base plate 520 is attached to the end surface of the base plate 520, the distribution member 540 that is rotatably attached to the back side of the base plate 520, and the base plate 520. And an extended path member 530 that extends a flow path of a sphere formed between the facing part and the path forming member 510.

  The base plate 520 includes a columnar shaft portion 523 that protrudes toward the back surface, a first opening 521 that is formed in a circular arc shape centering on the axis of the shaft portion 523, and a radius that is greater than that of the first opening 521. A second opening 522 penetrating and formed in a large arc shape, a U-shaped cross section with the upper end opened on the side surface of the upper end, and a rolling part 525 extending in the left-right direction, and protruding in a bowl shape on the back side And a locking portion 524 to be formed.

  The shaft portion 523 is a shaft that is inserted into a shaft hole 545 of the distribution member 540, which will be described later, and is attached to the base member in a state where the distribution member 540 is rotatable, and is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 545. Is done.

  The first opening 521 and the second opening 522 are openings through which a regulation plate 541 and a storage plate 542 of a distribution member 540 described later are inserted, and are openings having a width larger than the thicknesses of the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542. It is formed. Further, since the distribution member 540 is attached to the base plate 520 in a rotatable state, the first opening 521 and the second opening 522 are larger than the circumferential dimension in the front view of the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542. A long arc is formed.

  The locking portion 524 is an engagement portion that locks the biasing spring SP4 with the locking portion 544 formed on the sorting member 540, and one end of the biasing spring SP4 is locked.

  The rolling part 525 is a bottom surface on which a sphere rolls, and has a curved shape formed in a U-shape while being inclined downward toward one end on the left side in the rear view (left side in FIG. 70 (b)). It is formed larger than the outer shape of the sphere. Therefore, it can suppress that the ball | bowl rolling on the rolling part 525 stops at a rolling part, and can roll a sphere to the one end side.

  Further, the rolling part 525 includes a plurality of protrusions 525b that protrude from the front and rear side surfaces toward the inside of the U-shape, and an opening 525a that opens to the back side at the end on one end side.

  The protrusions 525b are formed on the front and rear side surfaces at a predetermined interval, and the protrusions 525b formed on the front side and the protrusions 525b formed on the back side are formed at positions that are staggered in front view. Therefore, since the ball rolling on the rolling part 525 can collide with the protrusion 525b, the rolling speed of the ball rolling on the rolling part 525 can be reduced.

  Here, as described above, the ball is sent to the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement unit 400 in a state in which the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed at the first position (FIGS. 65A and 65B). )reference). Therefore, when the speed at which the game ball that rolls on the rolling portion 525 of the third pitch KR3 is increased, the game ball is sent to the inside of the lower displacement member 440 before the ball receiving portion 467 is moved to the second position. There is a fear.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a plurality of protrusions 525b protruding from the inner surface of the rolling part 525 of the third pitching path KR3 are formed, and the game ball passing through the rolling part 525 of the third pitching path KR3 is formed. Since resistance can be applied, the speed of the game ball passing through the third pitching path KR3 can be reduced. Therefore, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the switching position (first position) to the receiving position (second position), the required time can be lengthened, so that the game ball can be securely placed in the ball receiving portion 467. Can be received. Further, the output of the displacement speed of the drive motor KM2 can be reduced by the amount that the displacement speed required for the ball receiving portion 467 can be slowed, and the product cost can be reduced.

  The opening 525a is formed open to the back side of one end of the rolling part 525, and the outer shape in the rear view is formed larger than the size of the sphere. Therefore, the ball that rolls the rolling portion 525 to one end side is discharged from the opening 525a.

  The path forming member 510 is formed in a rectangular vertically long plate shape whose lateral width in the left-right direction is smaller than that of the base plate 520, and a plurality of walls larger than the outer diameter of the game ball are formed on the back side. Is formed larger than the outer diameter of the sphere, whereby a plurality of sphere flow paths are formed therein.

  The path forming member 510 includes a first opening 511 that opens to the upper end surface, a first pitching path KR1 that is formed between opposing side walls of the first opening 511, and a second pitching path that is coupled to the first pitching path KR1. KR2 and the third pitching path KR3, the second opening 512 and the third opening 513 that open to the side surface of the path forming member 510 at the end of the second pitching path KR2 and the third pitching path KR3, and penetrating in the front-rear direction. A plurality of openings 514, 515, 516, a fourth pitching path KR4 formed by walls on the back side of the openings 514, 515, 516, and an end of the fourth pitching path KR4 on the side surface of the path forming member 510. A fourth opening 517 that is open is mainly provided.

  The first opening 511 is an opening for allowing a ball sent from a ball sending unit 600 (described later) to flow into the distribution unit. The first opening 511 is formed on the side surface of the upper end of the path forming member 510 and has an outer shape that is larger than that of the ball. Largely formed. In addition, the first opening 511 is connected to the pitching unit 600 and is capable of flowing a ball sent from the pitching unit 600.

  The first ball feeding path KR1 is a path that causes the ball that has flowed in through the first opening 511 to flow down between the base plate 520 and the path forming member 510, and is formed to extend downward. Further, the fourth pitching path KR4 is formed to extend approximately one third of the path forming member 510 in the vertical direction, and the downstream end is connected to the second pitching path KR2 and the third pitching path KR3. Is done. That is, the sphere flowing down the first pitching path KR1 is formed to be able to flow down to the second pitching path KR2 or the third pitching path KR3.

  As described above, the second pitching route KR2 is a route formed by being connected to the first pitching route KR1, and the downstream end is connected to the second opening 512. That is, when the sphere flowing down from the first opening 511 and flowing down the first pitching path KR1 flows down to the second pitching path KR2, it is discharged from the second opening 512 to the outside of the sorting unit 500.

  The second opening 512 is connected to a collection path (not shown) for collecting the sphere. Therefore, the sphere discharged from the second opening is recovered by the recovery path. In addition, a sensor device SE2 that detects the passage of the game ball is arranged inside the second opening 512 (downstream end of the second pitching path KR2). Therefore, the number of game balls passing through the third winning opening 82 is detected by the sensor device SE1, and the number of game balls passing through the second pitch path KR2 is detected by the sensor device SE2, so that the third pitch is sent. The number of game balls passing through the route KR3 can be detected.

  That is, it is possible to detect whether or not a predetermined number (1) of game balls is stored upstream of a restriction plate 541 described later, based on a difference between the sensor device SE1 and the sensor device SE1. For example, when the third electric accessory 82a is opened once, the number of balls passing through the third winning opening 82 (sensor device SE1) is eight, and the ball passing through the second pitching path KR2 (sensor device SE2). When the number is 7, it can be detected that one game ball has flowed down (stored) in the third pitching path KR3.

  As described above, the third pitching path KR3 is a path formed by being coupled to the first pitching path KR1, and the downstream end is coupled to the third opening 513. That is, when a sphere that has flowed down from the first opening 511 and then flows down through the first pitching path KR1 flows down to the third pitching path KR3, it is discharged from the third opening 513.

  The third opening 513 is formed above the other end side (the end side opposite to the opening 525a) of the rolling part 525 of the base plate 520. Therefore, the ball discharged from the third opening 513 is sent to the inside of the rolling part 525. That is, the ball sent to the third pitching route KR3 is sent to the rolling part 525 through the third opening 513.

  The openings 514 to 516 are respectively formed on the back side of the third winning opening 82 formed in the game board 13, and balls that have won the third winning opening 82 are sent. That is, when a ball flowing down the game area on the front side of the game board 13 wins the third winning opening 82, the ball is sent to the inside of the distribution unit 500 through the openings 514 to 516.

  The fourth pitching path KR4 is formed to be connected to the openings 514 to 516, is connected to one path on the downstream side, and is connected to the fourth opening formed on the lower end surface of the path forming member 510. The fourth opening is connected to a collection path (not shown) for collecting the sphere. Therefore, the ball that has won the third winning opening 82 of the game board 13 is sent to the fourth pitching path KR4 of the sorting unit 500, and then discharged from the fourth opening 517 and collected.

  The extension path member 530 is formed in a U-shaped cross section that is open on the lower side, and extends in the left-right direction. Further, the extension path member 530 is formed such that the U-shaped inner diameter is larger than the outer diameter of the sphere. Therefore, by being disposed on the upper part of the rolling part 525 of the base plate 520, the ball sent to the upper part of the rolling part 525 can be sent inside the rolling part 525 and the extension path member 530. The ball rolling on the rolling part can be prevented from falling from the rolling part 525.

  Further, the extension path member 530 has protrusions 531 formed at regular intervals at the same position in the left-right direction as the protrusions 525b formed on the rolling portion 525. Thereby, like the protrusion 525b, the rolling speed of the ball rolling on the rolling part 525 can be reduced.

  The distribution member 540 is formed in a rectangular shape in front view in which one side is formed long, and is formed with a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction. The distribution member 540 includes a regulation plate 541 and a storage plate 542 that protrude from the front side with a plate-like body, a shaft hole 545 formed through one end on the upper side, and a locking portion 544 formed in a bowl shape on the back side. And is mainly provided.

  As described above, the shaft hole 545 is a through hole into which the shaft portion 523 of the base plate 520 is inserted, and is formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction. The distribution member 540 is rotatable to the base plate 520 by inserting the shaft portion 523 of the base plate 520 into the shaft hole 545 and fastening a screw having a head larger than the shaft hole from the back side to the shaft portion 523. It is attached in the state.

  The restricting plate 541 is disposed at a connection portion between the first pitching path KR1 and the second pitching path KR2 through the first opening 521, and a ball flowing down the first pitching path KR1 flows into the second pitching path KR2. And is formed so as to protrude to the front side from the front end face of the shaft hole 545, and the protruding distance from the base plate 520 to the front side is set larger than the radius of the sphere.

  Further, the restriction plate 541 is formed to be curved in an arc shape with the axis of the shaft hole 545 as the center. Thereby, when the distribution member 540 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the shaft hole 545, the displacement region of the restriction plate 541 can be minimized.

  The storage plate 542 is a plate member that is disposed on the second pitching path KR2 via the second opening 522, and that stores a sphere flowing down the second pitching path KR2 on the upstream side of the storage plate 542. A protrusion distance from the base plate 520 to the front side is set to be larger than the radius of the sphere.

  The storage plate 542 is formed to be curved in an arc shape with the axis of the shaft hole 545 as the center, and the radius of the arc is larger than the radius of the curved portion of the regulation plate 541. Therefore, the storage plate 542 is formed at a position farther from the shaft hole 545 than the regulation plate 541. As a result, the regulation plate 541 can be protruded from the connecting portion between the first pitching route KR1 and the second pitching route KR2, and the storage plate 542 can be disposed on the second pitching route KR2. Furthermore, the displacement region when the distribution member 540 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the shaft hole 545 can be minimized.

  The projecting portion 543 is a drive transmission member that applies a rotational driving force to the sorting member 540 by colliding with the contact plate 464c of the lower displacement member 440 described above, and projects to the other end side of the sorting member 540. It is formed. That is, a protrusion 543 to which a driving force is transmitted is formed on the side opposite to one end where the shaft hole 545 serving as the rotation shaft of the distribution member 540 is formed. Thereby, the collision force of the contact plate 464c of the lower displacement member 440 can be reduced.

  Accordingly, since the driving force of the driving motor KM3 that displaces the contact plate 464c can be reduced, the energy consumption of the driving motor KM3 can be reduced. In addition, since the energy when the contact plate 464c collides with the protrusion 543 can be reduced during driving, the collision sound can be reduced when the contact plate 464c and the protrusion 543 collide. A detailed mode at the time of collision between the contact plate 464c and the protrusion 543 will be described later.

  Furthermore, a bulging portion 543a that bulges in a circular shape is formed at a position where the protruding end of the protruding portion 543 contacts the contact plate 464c. By bringing the contact plate 464c into contact with the bulging portion 543a, the ground contact area between the contact plate and the sorting member 540 can be reduced. Therefore, when the sorting member 540 is rotationally displaced, the protrusion 543 (the bulging portion 543a), the contact plate 464c, and the frictional resistance can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in energy consumption of the drive motor KM3.

  The locking portion 544 is a portion that locks the biasing spring SP4 with the locking portion 524 of the base plate 520 as described above. Therefore, since the force at which the other end side of the sorting member 540 always rotates toward the locking portion 524 can be applied, the shaking of the sorting member 540 due to vibration of the pachinko machine 10 or the like can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 73, the flow path of the balls of the sorting unit 500 will be described in detail. FIG. 73 is a cross-sectional view of distribution unit 500 taken along line LXXIII-LXXIII in FIG. In FIG. 73, the distribution member 540 is illustrated by a chain line. FIG. 73 illustrates a state where the sorting member 540 is disposed at the storage position.

  Here, the state in which the distribution member 540 is disposed at the storage position is a state in which the distribution member 540 is rotated by the urging force of the urging spring SP4 and the storage plate 542 is disposed on the second pitching path KR2. .

  As shown in FIG. 73, the first pitching route KR1 has its lower end side tilted toward the central portion of the base plate 520 in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 73) and its tilted portion is gentle. It is curved in an S shape. Further, the tip portion curved in an S shape is connected to the third pitching path KR3, and the second pitching path KR2 tilts in the direction opposite to the direction in which the first pitching path KR1 tilts at the end of the first pitching path KR1. It is connected in the state.

  As a result, by causing the sphere flowing down the first pitching path KR1 to collide with the lower surface of the tilted portion, the direction of the sphere can be directed from the direction of gravity to the direction of tilting the first pitching path KR1. Therefore, the ball can flow down toward the entrance of the third pitching path KR3 (the connecting portion between the first pitching path KR1 and the third pitching path KR3). Therefore, in a state where the sorting member 540 is not disposed, a ball flowing down the first pitching path KR1 can be sent to the third pitching path KR3.

  Here, the flow path through which the game ball flows down, the first branch path and the second branch path branched from the flow path, and the game ball flowing down the flow path to one of the first branch path and the second branch path There is a known game machine to distribute.

  However, since the conventional gaming machine has a structure in which the game balls that have flowed down the flow-down passage are alternately distributed to the first branch passage and the second branch passage one by one, the game balls that flow down the flow-down passage are the first branch The passages and the second branch passages are equally distributed (that is, half each). That is, there is a problem that the number of game balls distributed to the first branch passage cannot be changed.

  In contrast, in the present embodiment, a ball receiving portion 467 that is formed so as to be displaceable and receives a game ball from the third ball sending path KR3 is provided, and a contact plate 464c interlocked with the ball receiving portion 467 is in contact with the sorting member 540. Since the sorting member 540 is displaced by being displaced in contact, the number of game balls to be sorted to the third pitching path KR3 or the second pitching path can be changed according to the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467. That is, it is possible to change the number of game balls distributed to the third pitching route KR3.

  In addition, since the distribution member 540 can be displaced by using the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, a driving means and a transmission mechanism for displacing the distribution member 540 are additionally provided. It can be unnecessary. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced correspondingly, and the product cost can be reduced.

  Further, for example, in a structure in which the displacement of the distribution member 540 is controlled using position detection by a sensor device or driving by a driving unit, the reliability of the distribution operation of the distribution member is reduced due to malfunction due to detection failure or control failure. However, according to the present embodiment, the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 can be switched in mechanical synchronization with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, so that the reliability of the distribution operation can be improved.

  In particular, since the ball receiving portion 467 is a member that receives a game ball from the rolling portion 525 of the third pitching path KR3, the distribution destination of the sorting member 540 is synchronized with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467. By switching to, it is possible to cause the displacement member to reliably receive the game balls distributed to the third pitching route KR3.

  Furthermore, in the conventional gaming machine, the game ball flowing down the flow path is only distributed to one of the first branch path and the second branch path, and therefore it has been insufficient to give the player interest.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, in the state where the distribution destination by the regulation plate 541 (distribution means) is the third pitching path KR3 (first branch path), the third game ball is regulated to flow down. In the state where the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 is the second pitching path KR2 (second branch path), a storage plate 542 (flowing state changing means) that allows the gaming ball to flow down in the third pitching path KR3 is provided. , Can give the player interest.

  That is, when the distribution destination by the restriction plate 541 is the third pitching path, the flow of the gaming balls distributed to the third pitching path KR3 is restricted, and the game balls are stored in the third pitching path KR3 and the restriction plate is stored. When the distribution destination by 541 is the second pitching route KR2, the flow of game balls in the third pitching route KR3 is allowed, and the gaming balls stored in the third pitching route KR3 are allowed to flow down (release). it can. Thereby, in addition to the operation of distributing the game balls flowing down the first pitching path KR1 (downflow path) to one of the third pitching path KR3 or the second pitching path KR2, the gaming balls allocated to the third pitching path KR3 An action to flow down (open) can be formed. Further, these storage and release operations can be alternately formed in conjunction with the distribution operation. As a result, interest can be given to the player.

  In addition, since the regulation plate 541 (distribution means) and the storage plate 542 (flowing state changing means) are provided with a distribution member 540 (integral member), the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 are operated. Simplification of the structure and improvement of operation reliability can be achieved, that is, when the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 are formed separately, the two components are operated. The structure to be made becomes complicated and the reliability of the operation is lowered.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 can be formed as one component, the structure can be simplified correspondingly, and the product cost can be reduced and the operation reliability can be improved. be able to.

  Furthermore, the distribution member 540 is formed so as to be displaceable between a storage position (first state position) and a restriction position (second state position), and in a state where the distribution member 540 is displaced to the storage position, the restriction plate 541 is the first one. The three-throwing path KR3 (first branch path) is arranged at a position where the distribution destination is assigned, and the storage plate 542 is arranged at a position for restricting the flow of the game ball on the third-throwing path KR3, and the sorting member 540 is displaced to the restricted position. In this state, the regulating plate 541 is arranged at a position where the second ball sending path KR2 is assigned, and the storage plate 542 is arranged at a position allowing the game ball to flow down on the third ball feeding path, so that the sorting member 540 is arranged. Is moved in two positions (storage position and restriction position), and the game ball flowing down the first pitching path KR1 (downflow path) is swung to one of the third pitching path KR3 or the second pitching path. In addition to the operation of stopping, the operation of stopping (reserving) the flow of the game balls distributed to the third pitching path KR3, and the operation of causing the stopped (stored) game balls to flow down (open). These can be formed, and the storage and release operations can be alternately formed in conjunction with the sorting operation. That is, the structure can be simplified, and the product cost can be reduced and the operation reliability can be improved.

  The distribution member 540 (integral member) is formed to be rotatable, and the storage plate 542 (flowing state changing means) is formed to be able to protrude and retract with respect to the third pitching path KR3 (first branch path). By projecting to KR3, the flow of the game ball is regulated, and the arc is bent in an arc shape centering on the rotation axis of the distributing member 540. Therefore, the third pitching path KR3 is used for the regulation plate 541 to appear and disappear. The area of the hole (recess 519) opened in the inner wall can be reduced.

  Since the storage plate 542 (flowing state changing means) is arranged in a posture in which the side facing the upstream side of the third pitching path KR3 (first branch path) is concave, the storage plate 542 to the third pitching path KR3 protrudes. In the initial state (that is, the state where only the front end side of the flow-down state changing means protrudes into the passage), the shape of the front end side of the storage plate 542 can be arranged in an orientation that easily regulates the flow of the game ball, It is possible to easily regulate the flow of the game balls distributed to the third pitching route KR3.

  In addition, in a state where the storage plate 542 protrudes to the third pitching path to the maximum and restricts the flow of the game ball, the game ball can be stably held by the recess of the storage plate 542, so that the game ball can be prevented from rampage.

  The allocating unit 500 applies an urging force to the allocating member 540 (integral member), and urges the regulating plate 541 in a direction in which the restricting plate 541 protrudes to the third pitching path (first branch path) (biasing means). ), And the distance from the restricting plate 541 to the rotating shaft of the distributing member 540 is made larger than the distance from the restricting plate 541 to the rotating shaft of the distributing member 540, so that the biasing force of the biasing spring SP4 is used. The distribution member 540 can be easily maintained in a posture in which the storage plate 542 protrudes to the third emergency path (that is, the storage position).

  In this case, since the distance from the storage plate 542 to the rotating shaft of the distributing member 540 is made larger than the distance from the regulating plate 541 to the rotating shaft of the distributing member 540, when the game ball flowing down collides, the rotating shaft Even when the same impact force is applied due to the greater distance from the storage plate 542, the urging direction of the urging spring SP4 is the direction in which the urging spring SP4 protrudes into the third pitching path KR3, even when the same impact force is applied. By this, it can suppress that the storage plate 542 is immersed in the recessed part 519 by the part of the energizing force.

  Moreover, since the distribution member 540 (integral member) is rotated in the direction in which the storage plate 542 (flowing state changing means) protrudes to the third pitching path (first branch path) by its own weight, the weight is utilized. The distribution member 540 can be easily maintained in a posture (that is, a storage position) in which the storage plate 542 protrudes to the third pitching path KR3. Therefore, when a game ball collides, it can suppress that the storage plate 542 is immersed in the recessed part 519 by the part of its own weight.

  Even when the urging spring SP4 (the urging means) falls off, the distributing member 540 is maintained in a posture in which the regulating plate 541 protrudes to the third pitching path KR3 by its own weight, and a game is played to the third pitching path. The sphere can be prevented from flowing down.

  Furthermore, an urging spring SP4 is provided to apply an urging force to the allocating member 540 so that the allocating destination by the allocating member 540 is maintained in one of the third pitching path KR3 or the second pitching path KR2, and the ball receiving portion 467 is allocated to the allocating member. By displacing 540 in a direction against the direction of the urging spring SP4, the distribution destination by the allocating member 540 is switched to the other of the third pitching path KR3 or the second pitching path KR2, and by the biasing force of the biasing spring The distribution destination by the distribution member 540 is returned to one of the third pitching path KR3 and the second pitching path KR2.

  Therefore, it is possible to prevent the assignment destination by the assignment member 540 from being inadvertently switched. In this case, after the distribution member 540 is displaced in accordance with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 and the distribution destination is switched, the return to the distribution destination before the switching can be performed by the urging force of the urging spring SP4. Therefore, it is not necessary that the contact plate 464c interlocked with the ball receiving portion 467 is in contact with the sorting member 540. That is, the abutting plate 464 c interlocked with the ball receiving portion 467 can be separated from the sorting member 540. Therefore, the freedom degree of design of the movable range of the ball receiving portion 467 can be increased.

  Next, the displacement of the distribution member 540 will be described with reference to FIG. 74 (a) and 74 (b) are partial enlarged views of the sorting unit 500 in the range LXXIV in FIG. 74A shows a state where the sorting member 540 is located at the storage position, and FIG. 74B shows a state where the sorting member 540 is located at the restricting position. Further, the state in which the distribution member 540 is disposed at the restriction position means that the contact plate 464c of the lower displacement member 440 collides with the protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540, and the distribution member 540 is centered on the axis of the shaft hole 545. This is a state in which the restricting plate 541 is arranged at the connecting portion between the first pitching path KR1 and the third pitching path KR3 by being rotated.

  As shown in FIG. 74 (a), in a state in which the sorting member 540 is disposed at the storage position, the storage plate 542 is disposed on the third pitching path KR3, and the regulation plate 541 is on the back side of the path forming member 510. It is arrange | positioned inside the recessed part 518 formed in the wall.

  In this case, the distance dimension L1 between the end portion of the storage plate 542 that protrudes inward of the third pitching path KR3 and the inner wall of the third pitching path KR3 that faces the leading end is made smaller than the diameter of the sphere. Therefore, the balls sent from the upstream of the third pitching path KR3 (first pitching path KR1) are stopped upstream of the storage plate 542.

  Further, the distance dimension L2 from the inside of the curved portion of the storage plate 542 to the connecting portion between the first pitching path KR1 and the third pitching path KR3 is set larger than the radius of the sphere and is larger than the diameter of the sphere. Set small. Thereby, the number of the spheres stopped on the upstream side of the storage plate 542 can be one. Hereinafter, the state of the sorting unit 500 in which one ball is stopped upstream of the storage plate 542 is referred to as a storage state.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 74 (b), in the state in which the sorting member 540 is disposed at the restriction position, the restriction plate 541 is disposed at the connecting portion between the first pitching path KR1 and the third pitching path KR3. The storage plate 542 is disposed inside a recess 519 formed in the wall portion on the back side of the path forming member 510.

  In this case, the distance L3 between the end of the front end of the restricting plate 541 protruding inside the first pitching path KR1 and the inner wall of the entrance of the third pitching path KR3 is made smaller than the diameter of the sphere. Therefore, the ball flowing down the first pitching route KR1 collides with the regulation plate 541 and is sent to the second pitching route KR2.

  That is, by switching the sorting member 540 between the restriction position and the storage position, a ball that is sent through the first pitching path KR1 is sent to the third pitching path KR3 and is stopped on the third pitching path KR3; It is possible to form a state where a sphere flowing down the first pitching route KR1 cannot flow into the third pitching route KR3 and is sent to the second pitching route KR2.

  Therefore, by displacing one sorting member 540, the sphere's flow path can be reliably switched to either one when the flow path is divided from 1 flow path to 2 flow paths.

  Further, the biasing spring SP4 applies a biasing force to the sorting member 540 and maintains the sorting destination by the sorting member 540 in the second pitching path KR2, so that the ball receiving unit 467 cannot receive the game ball. It is possible to suppress switching of the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 to the third pitching path.

  Further, the restricting plate 541 (distribution means) is formed so as to be capable of appearing and retracting with respect to the first pitching path KR1 (downflow path) or the third pitching path KR3 (first branch path), and the protruding position is defined as Since the inner wall is on the extension line in the flow-down direction at the downstream end of the first pitch path KR1, the regulation plate 541 can be projected at a position close to the game ball flowing down from the lower end side of the first pitch path KR1. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required from the start of projecting the restricting plate 541 to the flow-down passage or the third pitching path KR3 (first branch passage) until the game balls can be distributed. As a result, it is possible to reliably switch the distribution destination by the restriction plate 541.

  Further, the restricting plate 541 (distribution means) protrudes into the third pitching path KR3 (first branch path), thereby allowing the game balls flowing down the first pitching path KR1 (downflow path) to pass through the second pitching path ( Since the projecting direction of the restricting plate 541 is set to the direction toward the upstream end of the second pitching path KR2, the game ball flowing down the first pitching path KR1 is projected. When it comes into contact with the regulation plate in the middle of the game, the game ball can be pushed into the second pitching path KR along with the protruding operation of the regulation plate. As a result, the distribution to the second pitching route KR2 can be performed more reliably.

  In this embodiment, the restriction plate 541 of the distribution member 540 is disposed at a position closer to the shaft hole 545 than the storage plate 542, but the position where the restriction plate 541 is farther from the shaft hole 545 than the restriction plate 541. May be arranged. That is, the shaft hole 545 of the distribution member 540 may be disposed at the position of the point P on the back surface on the downstream side of the third pitching path KR3 shown in FIGS. 74 (a) and 74 (b). . In this case, the arrangement positions of the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 formed on the distribution member 540 are formed at the same positions as in this embodiment.

  In a state where the shaft hole 545 is arranged at the point P, the displacement speed of the regulating plate 541 when the sorting member 540 is rotationally displaced can be made faster than the storage plate 542. Therefore, as described later, when the sorting member 540 is displaced from the storage position to the restricting position, the restricting plate 541 can be quickly projected on the flow path. As a result, it is possible to suppress the gaming balls flowing down the first pitching path KR1 from flowing into the third pitching path KR3 at the timing when the distribution member 540 is switched from the regulation position to the storage position.

  Further, in this case, the shape of the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 in a front view is formed in an arc shape with the point P as the center. Thereby, when the distribution member 540 is displaced from the restriction position to the storage position (or opposite), the displacement region of the restriction plate 541 and the storage plate 542 can be minimized. Further, the recesses 518 and 519 that receive the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 on the outside of the third pitching path KR3 have a concave shape along the displacement trajectory of the regulation plate 541 and the regulation plate 541.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76, a description will be given of a case where two or more balls are sent from the pitching path when the sorting member 540 is arranged at the storage position. 75A and 75B are partially enlarged views of the distribution unit 500. FIG. 76A and 76B are partially enlarged views of the sorting unit 500. FIG.

  78 (a) and 78 (b) correspond to a partially enlarged view of the distribution unit 500 in FIG. 74 (a). Also, FIGS. 75A to 76B sequentially show the transition state of the sphere when the sphere is introduced. Further, FIGS. 75A to 76B show a state in which the distribution member 540 is disposed at the storage position.

  As shown in FIGS. 75 (a) and 75 (b), when the first game ball T1 is sent to the first pitching route KR1 in a state where the sorting member 540 is disposed at the storage position, as described above. The game ball T1 is sent to the third pitching route KR3 and stopped above the storage plate 542.

  In this case, the storage plate 542 is located at a position downstream from the upper end of the third pitching path KR3 by a distance between the radius and the diameter of the sphere, so that a part of the sphere stopped at the upper part of the storage plate 542 Is projected to the first pitching path KR1 side (see FIG. 75).

  Therefore, as described above, the third pitching path KR3 (first branch path) is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the downstream side, and is formed so that the game ball can roll on the inner wall on the gravity direction side, Since the storage plate 542 (flowing state changing means) is formed so as to be able to protrude into and out of the third pitching path KR3 from the inner wall on the lower side in the gravity direction, the game ball is started after the storage plate 542 starts to protrude into the third pitching path KR3. It is possible to shorten the time required until it becomes possible to regulate the flow of water. As a result, the distribution destination of the restriction plate 541 is switched from the second pitching path KR2 (second branch path) to the third pitching path KR3, and when the gaming balls are allocated to the third pitching path KR3, It is possible to easily keep the protrusion of the storage plate 542 in time for the flow regulation.

  In addition, the restricting plate 541 is formed so as to be able to appear and retract with respect to the third pitching path KR3, and in a state where the regulation plate 541 protrudes to the maximum at the third pitching path KR3, a force component in the protruding direction is applied from the game ball to the storage plate 542. Therefore, when restricting the flow of the game balls distributed to the third pitching route KR3, it is possible to suppress the storage plate 542 from entering the recess 519 due to an impact when the game balls collide. Therefore, it is possible to easily regulate the flow of the game ball.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 76 (a) and 76 (b), when the second game ball T2 is sent to the first pitch route KR1 when the distribution unit 500 is in the storage state, the game ball T2 is A ball is sent in the direction from the first pitching route KR1 to the upper end of the third pitching route KR3. Since the game ball T1 is stopped at the upper end of the third pitch path KR3, the game ball T2 collides with the game ball T1 and is sent to the second pitch path KR2.

  In this case, as described above, the game ball T1 is projected to the first pitching path KR1 side, so that the game ball T2 is moved to the second pitching path KR2 without being pitched inside the third pitching path KR3. Since the guidance can be performed, the game ball T2 can be sent to the second pitching route KR2 without staying inside the third pitching route KR3. Therefore, the pitching of the first pitching route KR1 and the second pitching route KR2 can be stabilized.

  That is, the inner wall on the side where the second pitching path KR2 (second branch path) in the first pitching path KR1 (downflow path) is desired passes the game ball flowing down the first pitching path KR1 to the third pitching path KR3 (first phase). Of the specified number (1 ball) of game balls stored in the branch passage), the last game ball is formed so as to be guided to the side surface of the third pitch route KR3, so that the game balls flowing down the first pitch route KR1 Can be made to flow down to the second pitching path KR2 after colliding with the last game ball of the prescribed number of game balls.

  Of the specified number of game balls, the last game ball means a game ball located on the upstream side (the side opposite to the restriction plate 541). In the present embodiment, the specified number is set to one sphere. In this case, the last game ball means the game ball itself stored in the third pitching route KR3.

  Further, as described above, the first pitching path KR1 (downflow path) is tilted at the lower end side of the downflow path toward the central portion of the base plate 520 in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 73). The portion is formed in a curved S-shape. That is, the flow direction at the downstream end of the first pitch path KR1 (flow path) is formed in the flow direction at the upstream end of the third pitch path KR3, so that the game balls flowing down the first pitch path KR1 The direction of the repulsive force applied to the last game ball when it collides with the last game ball of the specified number of game balls stored in the ball delivery path is different from the flow direction at the upstream end of the third ball delivery path KR3. Can be made. As a result, it is possible to suppress the last game ball from jumping out of the upstream end of the third pitching path KR3 and flowing into the second pitching path KR2 by the repulsive force at the time of collision.

  Furthermore, since the upper end portion of the third pitching route KR3 is formed to be inclined in the tilt direction of the lower end portion of the first pitching route KR1, the position at which the gaming ball T2 collides with the gaming ball T1 is set at the upper hemisphere of the gaming ball T1. And the second pitching route KR2 side. Therefore, the rebound direction of the game ball T2 that has collided with the game ball T1 can be the entrance (upper end) side of the second pitching path KR2. Therefore, the game ball T2 colliding with the game ball T1 can be easily sent to the second pitching path KR2. As a result, it is possible to suppress the stagnation of the ball in the first pitching route KR1 and the second pitching route KR2.

  Further, the distribution destination by the restriction plate 541 is set to the third pitching path KR3 (first branch path), and the flow of game balls in the third pitching path KR3 is regulated by the storage plate 542 (flowing state changing means). In a state where a specified number (one ball) of game balls is stored in the three-throw route KR3, the game balls flowing down the first throw-in route KR1 (downflow passage) can flow down into the second-throw route KR2 (second branch passage). Therefore, when more than the specified number of game balls flow down the flow path, it is possible to prevent the game balls exceeding the specified number (the second and subsequent game balls T2) from staying in the first pitch route KR1. it can. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the restricting plate 541 (the operation of setting the distribution destination as the second pitching path KR2) to be inhibited by the game balls that have stagnated in the first pitching path KR1.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 77, a description will be given of a case where a ball is sent to the pitching path when the sorting member 540 is arranged at the restriction position. 77A and 77B are partial enlarged views of the distribution unit 500. FIG.

  77 (a) and 77 (b) correspond to a partially enlarged view of the distribution unit 500 in FIG. 74 (a). FIGS. 77 (a) and (b) show the transition state of the sphere when the sphere is introduced. Further, FIGS. 77A and 77B show a state in which the sorting member 540 is arranged at the restriction position.

  As shown in FIGS. 77 (a) and 77 (b), when a ball is sent to the first pitching path KR1 in a state where the sorting member 540 is disposed at the restricting position, the pitched game ball T1 is the first pitched ball. It collides with the restriction plate 541 at the lower end of the path KR1. Thereby, the game ball T1 is guided to the second pitching route KR2, and flows down the second pitching route KR2.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 78, an operation when the ball is caused to flow down to the downstream side of the third pitching path KR3 will be described. 78A and 78B are partially enlarged views of the distribution unit 500. FIG.

  78 (a) and 78 (b) correspond to a partially enlarged view of the distribution unit 500 in FIG. 74 (a). FIGS. 78A and 78B show the transition state of the sphere when the sphere is introduced. Further, FIG. 78A illustrates a state in which the distribution member 540 is disposed at the storage position, and FIG. 78B illustrates a state in which the distribution member 540 is disposed at the restriction position.

  As shown in FIGS. 78 (a) and 78 (b), when the distribution unit 500 is placed in the storage state (the state shown in FIG. 78 (a)), the distribution member 540 is displaced and placed at the restriction position. The game ball T1 stagnated above the storage plate 542 flows down to the downstream side of the third pitching path KR3.

  That is, the spheres flow down to the third pitching path KR3 are only spheres that are stagnant above the storage plate 542. Further, as described above, since the number of spheres stagnating above the storage plate 542 is 1, the spheres can flow down to the third pitching path KR3 one by one. Therefore, since the number of spheres flowing down to the downstream side of the third pitching path KR3 can be stabilized, it is possible to suppress the unintentional number of spheres from flowing down to the third pitching path KR3.

  Therefore, the distribution member 540 (distribution means) includes a regulating plate 541 (first in / out portion) formed so as to be able to protrude and retract with respect to the third pitching path (first branch passage) with the displacement of the distribution member 540, and The regulation plate 541 includes a storage plate (second in / out part), and the restricting plate 541 protrudes to the third pitching path, thereby allowing the game ball flowing down the first pitching path KR1 (downflow path) to pass through the second pitching path KR2 (second branch). The storage plate 542 is positioned on the downstream side of the third pitching path KR3 with respect to the regulation plate 541 and protrudes into the third pitching path KR3 so as to be allocated to the third pitching path KR3. The regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 are formed so as to be able to regulate the flow of the game balls, and when one of them protrudes into the passage of the third pitching path KR3, the other is outside the third pitching path KR3 (recessed portion). 518,519 Therefore, only a specified number (1 ball) of game balls are distributed to the third pitching path KR3 by displacing the distribution member 540 in accordance with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 (displacement member). It can be received by the receiving portion 467.

  That is, when the regulation plate 541 protrudes, the first state in which the game balls flowing down the first pitching path KR1 are distributed to the second pitching path, and the regulation plate 541 retracts to flow down the first pitching path KR1. The second state in which the game balls to be distributed to the third pitching path and the second intrusion portion project to restrict the flow of the game balls allocated to the third pitching path KR3 (store the game balls). And the fourth state in which the game balls stored in the third pitching path are allowed to flow down and received by the ball receiving unit by retreating the second in / out part. By combining these, only a prescribed number (1 ball) of game balls can be distributed to the third pitching path KR3 and received by the ball receiving unit 467.

  Further, since the distribution member 540 includes the restriction plates 541 and 542, that is, is formed as one component, the structure of the distribution member 540 (in order to operate the restriction plate 541 and the storage plate 542 and exert their functions) Can be simplified. Further, when one of the regulating plate 541 and the storage plate 542 protrudes into the passage of the third pitching path KR3, the other is retracted out of the path of the third pitching path KR3. Depending on the position (the first position and the second position), it is sufficient that the distribution member 540 is formed to be displaceable at two positions. That is, the first to fourth states described above can be formed by displacing the sorting member 540 at two positions. Therefore, the structure of the distributing member 540 and the structure of displacing the distributing member 540 with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 can be simplified, and the reliability of the game ball distributing operation can be improved accordingly.

  Next, the distribution unit 500 and the lower displacement unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 80. FIG. 79 is a front view of the sorting unit 500 and the lower displacement unit 400. FIG. 80 is a top view of the distribution unit 500 and the lower displacement unit 400. In addition, the state where the lower displacement unit 400 is disposed at the retracted position is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, the sorting unit 500 is disposed on the front side (lower side in FIG. 80) of the lower displacement unit 400. In this case, the opening 525a formed in the rolling portion 525 of the distribution unit 500 and the opening 451a formed in the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 are arranged at positions overlapping in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the ball rolled on the rolling part 525 is sent to the inside of the lower displacement member 440 through the opening 525a and the opening 451a.

  In other words, the ball is sent to the lower displacement member 440 from the third winning opening 82 formed in the game board 13 through the game area in front of the game board 13 through the ball delivery unit 600 and the distribution unit 500. Done.

  Therefore, the distribution unit 500 includes a rolling portion 525 that communicates with the track region of the ball receiving portion 467, and the distribution member 540 regulates the passage of game balls in the rolling portion 525. Even when a malfunction occurs and the second and subsequent game balls T2 are sent, the second and subsequent game balls T2 are reliably sent to the trajectory region of the sorting member 540 via the rolling portion 525. Can do. As a result, problems due to the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be made difficult to occur.

  Next, the relationship between the distribution member 540 and the lower displacement member 440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 86. 81, 83, and 85 are front views of the lower displacement unit 400, and FIGS. 82, 84, and 86 are cross-sectional views of the distribution unit 500. FIG. 81, 83, and 85, the decoration member 450 and the front case 481 of the lower displacement member 440 are transparently shown, and only the distribution member 540 of the distribution unit 500 disposed on the front side is illustrated. . 82, 84, and 86, the distributing member 540 is illustrated by a chain line, and the contact plate 464c of the lower displacement member 440 disposed on the back side is illustrated by a chain line.

  81 and 82 show a state in which the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is disposed at the first position and the distribution member 540 is disposed at the restriction position, and the lower displacement member 440 is in the retracted state. The position is illustrated. 83 and 84 show a state in which the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is disposed at the second position and the distribution member 540 is disposed at the storage position, and the lower displacement member 440 is in the retracted state. The state is illustrated. 85 and 86, a state in which the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is disposed at the first position and the distribution member 540 is disposed at the storage position is illustrated, and the lower displacement member 440 is in the first overhanging state. The state located in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, in the state where the lower displacement member 440 is disposed in the retracted state and the state where the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is disposed in the first position, as described above, A rack 466 for driving 467 is disposed on the other end side of the lower displacement member 440 (left side in front view of the lower displacement member 440), and the movable rack 464 is disposed on the rear surface side so as to overlap in the front-rear direction.

  That is, the movable rack 464 is arranged on the other end side of the lower displacement member 440 (left side of the lower displacement member 440 as viewed from the front), similarly to the rack 466. Therefore, the contact plate 464 c formed on the movable rack 464 is positioned on the other end side of the lower displacement member 440. In this case, the side surface on the other end side of the contact plate 464c (the surface on the left side in front view) is in contact with the protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540. As a result, the sorting member 540 is displaced to a position where the restricting plate 541 protrudes into the first ball feeding path KR1 (restricted position) by the rotational driving force acting around the axis of the shaft hole 545.

  Therefore, when the lower displacement member 440 is in the retracted state and the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed at the first position, the ball that is sent to the first pitching path KR1 of the sorting unit 500 is the third pitching path KR3. The ball is sent to the second pitch route KR2. Further, as described above, the game is moved to the downstream side of the third pitching path KR3 (downstream side of the storage plate 542) by displacing the sorting member 540 from the storage state in which the ball is stored above the storage plate 542 to the restriction position. You can send a ball. At this time, a game ball can be sent to the inside of the ball receiving portion 467 by causing the ball receiving portion 467 to perform a ball receiving operation.

  Note that the opening operation of the third electric accessory 82a for making the game ball stored in the sorting unit 500 is performed before the ball receiver 467 is displaced to the first position, and the ball receiver 467 is in the first position. When displaced to the position, the third electric accessory 82a is closed. Thereby, when the sorting member 540 is displaced from the storage position to the restriction position, the flow of the game balls passing through the first pitching path KR1 is not restricted by the restriction plate 541 and the storage plate 542, and an unintended game ball becomes the first one. It is possible to suppress the pitching to the downstream side of the three pitching path KR3.

  Further, since the sorting member 540 is formed so as to be operable in conjunction with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, the sending of the game ball to the track area of the ball receiving portion 467 is regulated according to the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467. Or acceptable. That is, the restriction or allowance of the game ball delivery can be switched mechanically in synchronization with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467. For example, according to the detection result of the sensor that detects the position of the distribution member 540, the distribution member The driving means for driving 540 or the control of each means can be made unnecessary, and accordingly, the product cost can be reduced and the operational reliability can be improved.

  Further, the sorting member 540 sends the game ball T2 to the track area of the ball receiving portion 467 in conjunction with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 from the second position to the first position direction (second direction). Therefore, the game ball can be reliably sent to the trajectory region of the ball receiving portion 467 and to the region on the first direction side of the ball receiving portion 467.

  The ball receiver 467 is formed to be displaceable at a switching position for switching the sorting member 540 and a receiving position (second position) set at a position different from the switching position (first position). In a state where the portion 467 is displaced to the switching position, the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 is switched to the third pitching route KR3, and in a state where the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the receiving position, the ball receiving portion from the third pitching route. 467 can receive a game ball, and the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 is switched to the second pitching route KR2, so that a specified number (one ball in this embodiment) that the ball receiving unit 467 can receive a ball is obtained. It is possible to prevent the game balls that have been exceeded from being distributed to the third pitching route KR3.

  That is, when the switching position and the receiving position are set to the same position, the ball receiving unit 467 receives the game ball while the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 is switched to the third pitching path. There is a possibility that the game balls are distributed to the third pitching path KR3 exceeding the specified number that can be received by the ball receiving unit 467. In the case where a means for restricting the inflow of game balls to the third pitching path KR3 is separately provided, the structure becomes complicated and the reliability is lowered, and the product cost is increased.

  On the other hand, in the embodiment, the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the switching position, and after the specified number (1 ball in the present embodiment) of game balls is distributed to the third pitching path KR3, the distribution member 540 receives the reception position. Since the distribution destination is switched to the second pitching route KR2, the game ball exceeding one ball can be prevented from flowing down to the third pitching route. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball receiving unit 467 from distributing the game balls that exceed the receivable specified number (one ball) to the third pitching route KR3. In addition, since it is not necessary to separately provide the above-described means (means for restricting the inflow of game balls to the third pitching path KR3), it is possible to improve reliability and reduce product cost.

  Further, the pachinko machine 10 starts from a position where each operation unit is turned off (turned off) when the power is turned on (turned on). Furthermore, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, only the control may be reset. In that case, if the distribution member 540 is provided with a driving means, when the power is turned on, the distribution unit 500 in the storage state operates during the initial operation to flow the game ball down to the third pitching path KR3, There is a possibility that the game ball is sent to the retreat side (first position side) of the ball receiving portion 467 arranged at the third position.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the displacement of the sorting member 540 and the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 are synchronized, so even if the power is turned off while the pachinko machine 10 is not located at the predetermined reference position, When the power of the machine 10 is turned on, an unintended game ball can be prevented from being sent to the trajectory region of the ball receiver 467. As a result, the game ball can be prevented from being clogged inside the lower displacement member 440.

  Further, when the power is turned off with the game ball remaining in the track area of the lower displacement member 440, the ball receiver 467 is left in the track area of the ball receiver 467 by performing the discharging operation described above. The game balls thus obtained can be discharged out of the lower displacement member 440 and recovered from the recovery port 411f.

  Next, a description will be given with reference to FIGS. 83 and 84. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 83 and 84, the lower displacement member 440 is disposed in the retracted state and the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is disposed at the second position or the third position (position other than the first position). In this state, as described above, the rack 466 that drives the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed at a substantially central position in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 83) of the lower displacement member 440 and the movable rack 464 is moved downward. From the end on the other end side (left side in the left-right direction in FIG. 83).

  Therefore, the contact plate 464c formed on the movable rack 464 is disposed at a position spaced from the end on the other end side of the lower displacement member 4440 to the one end side. In this case, the surface on the other end side of the contact plate 464c (the surface on the left side when viewed from the front) is in a state of being separated from the protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540. Thereby, the distribution member 540 is rotated around the axis of the shaft hole 545 by the urging force of the urging spring SP4 interposed between the allocating member 540 and the base plate 520, and the storage plate 542 is moved to the third ball. It is displaced to a position (storage position) projected on the path KR3.

  Therefore, when the lower displacement member 440 is in the retracted state and the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed at the second position or the third position (position other than the first position), the first ball feeding path of the distribution unit 500 The ball sent to KR1 is stopped above the storage plate 542. Further, as described above, when the distribution unit 500 is in the storage state, the ball that is sent to the first pitching path KR1 collides with the ball that has stopped above the storage plate 542 and is sent to the second pitching path KR2. .

  Next, description will be made with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 85 and 86, when the lower displacement member 440 is disposed in the first or second extended state, the lower displacement member 440 slides relative to the front base 411 as described above. It is displaced and rotationally displaced. Therefore, the contact plate 464c formed on the movable rack 464 is displaced in accordance with the displacement of the lower displacement member 440, and is in a state of being separated from the protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540. Thereby, the distribution member 540 is rotated around the axis of the shaft hole 545 by the urging force of the urging spring SP4 interposed between the allocating member 540 and the base plate 520, and the storage plate 542 is moved to the third ball. It is displaced to a position (storage position) projected on the path KR3.

  Therefore, when the lower displacement member 440 is in the first overhanging state or the second overhanging state, the ball sent to the first ball sending path KR1 of the sorting unit 500 is stopped above the storage plate 542. Is done. Further, as described above, when the distribution unit 500 is in the storage state, the ball that is sent to the first pitching path KR1 collides with the ball that has stopped above the storage plate 542 and is sent to the second pitching path KR2. .

  That is, when the lower displacement member 440 is in the first overhang state and the second overhang state (a state other than the retracted state), the opening 451a of the decorative member 450 is moved along with the displacement of the lower displacement member 440. Since the position is displaced, the sphere communication state between the opening 451a and the opening 525a of the distribution unit 500 is released. Therefore, when the ball flows down to the third pitching path KR3, the ball may be discharged from the opening 451a into the back case 300. In the present embodiment, the third pitching is performed by setting the sorting member 540 as the storage position. The sphere can be prevented from flowing down to the downstream side of the path KR3. As a result, the sphere of the back case 300 can be prevented from being discharged inside.

  In other words, the lower displacement member 440 of the lower displacement unit 400 is formed to be displaceable in the retracted state, the first extended state, and the second extended state, and when the lower displacement member 440 is positioned in the retracted state, Since the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed on the lower displacement member 440, a state in which the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced while the lower displacement member 440 is disposed in the retracted state, and a state where the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed in the first or second overhanging state. Thus, the ball receiving portion 467 can be displaced. Therefore, the production effect can be enhanced accordingly.

  In this case, in a state where the lower displacement member 440 is disposed in the first or second extended state, the ball receiving portion 467 cannot receive a game ball from the rolling portion 525 of the third pitching route KR3 (third pitching route KR3). In this state, the rolling plate 525 and the opening 451a of the lower displacement member 440 are not in communication), and the contact plate 464c interlocked with the ball receiving portion 467 cannot be contacted with the distribution member 540. Therefore, in a state where the ball receiving unit 467 cannot receive a game ball (a state where the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in the first extended state or the second extended state), the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 is the third pitching path. Switching to KR3 can be suppressed.

  Further, since the distribution member 540 is disposed on the base plate 520 of the distribution unit 500 formed as a separate member from the base member 470 of the lower displacement member 440, the size of the base member 470 of the lower displacement member 440 is increased accordingly. Can be suppressed.

  Here, since the displacement of the lower displacement member 440 from the first extended state to the retracted state is not only rotationally displaced in the left-right direction but also rotationally displaced, the contact plate 464c in the tilted state is subjected to rotational displacement. There is a possibility that the projection 543 of the distribution member 540 contacts the upper surface of the contact plate 464c and the distribution member 540 cannot be rotationally displaced.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced from the state displaced to the first overhanging position shown in FIG. 85 to the retracted state, the ball receiving portion 467 is moved to a location other than the first position. It is set as the state displaced to (2nd position or 3rd position). Thereby, it can suppress that the contact plate 464c of the lower displacement member 440 displaced to the retracted state collides with the protrusion 543. As a result, it can be suppressed that the projection 543 of the distribution member 540 contacts the upper surface of the contact plate 464c and the distribution member 540 cannot be rotationally displaced.

  Further, since the swelled portion 543a is formed in the sorting member 540 as described above, when the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced from the first overhanging state to the retracted state due to poor control or the like, the contact plate 464c Even when the projection 543 of the distribution member 540 comes into contact with the upper surface, the distribution member 540 can be rotationally displaced.

  That is, since the contact area with the contact plate 464c can be reduced by the bulge portion 543a, the bulge portion 543a can be easily slid along the surface when the contact plate 464c comes into contact. Therefore, the distribution member 540 can be easily rotated and displaced. As a result, it can be suppressed that the projection 543 of the distribution member 540 contacts the upper surface of the contact plate 464c and the distribution member 540 cannot be rotationally displaced.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90, the configuration of the drive transmission portion of the rotation unit 700 will be described. 87 is a front view of the rotating unit 700, FIG. 88 is a rear view of the rotating unit 700, FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotating unit 700, and FIG. 90 is an exploded view of the rotating unit 700. It is a rear perspective view.

  As shown in FIGS. 87 to 90, the rotation unit 700 includes a decoration unit 750 composed of a plurality of displacement members, a ball holder 710 disposed on the upper side of the decoration unit 750 in the gravity direction, and the ball holder. 710 and the back base 720 disposed on the back side of the decoration unit 750, the left transmission member 730 disposed on the left side of the decoration unit 750 when viewed from the front, and the right transmission member disposed on the right side of the decoration unit 750 when viewed from the front. 740.

  The ball cradle 710 is a member that drops the game ball emitted from the emission opening 471 on one side of the lower displacement member 440 of the lower displacement unit 400 described above. Thereby, the ball sent to the inside of the lower displacement member 440 can be sent to the rotation unit 700. The detailed configuration of the ball receiving base 710 will be described later.

  The decoration unit 750 is a substantially D-shaped block body in which a curved portion is arranged upward in a side view, and is decorated with a character or a pattern on the front side. In addition, the decoration unit 750 includes a plurality of members, and is configured to be displaceable by transmission of driving that will be described later. The configuration of the decoration unit 750 will be described later.

  The back surface base 720 is a plate member that connects the back surface side of the ball receiving base 710 and the back surface side of the decoration unit 750, and is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. As described above, the decoration unit 750 is composed of a plurality of movable members, and therefore, the fastening portion is limited. However, the decoration unit 750 and the ball rest 710 are located on the back side where the player cannot see the decoration unit 750. , And the decorative unit 750 and the ball pedestal 710 can be assembled as one unit while securing the movable range of the decorative unit 750.

  The left transmission member 730 is attached to the drive motor KM4 disposed on the left side surface (left side in FIG. 87) of the decoration unit 750, the transmission member 730 that transmits the driving force of the drive motor KM4, and the drive motor KM4. The motor base 732, a gear cover 733 that covers the transmission member 730, and a ball path cover 734 that is attached to the gear cover 733 and that forms a predetermined gap between the gear cover 733 and the motor base 732 are formed. The

  The drive motor KM4 is a drive source for moving each member of the decoration unit 750 described later. The drive of the drive motor KM4 is transmitted by a transmission member 730 described later.

  The transmission member 730 includes a transmission gear 731a attached to the shaft of the drive motor KM4, a transmission gear 731b meshed with the transmission gear 731a, a transmission gear 731c meshed with the transmission gear 731b, and a transmission gear 731c. And a transmission gear 731d arranged coaxially by a shaft 735 and a load gear 731e meshed with the transmission gear 731d.

  The transmission gear 731a is attached to the drive motor KM4 as described above, and rotates when the drive motor KM4 is rotationally driven.

  The transmission gear 731b has a one-way clutch OW1 disposed therein, and an inner ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is coupled to a shaft portion JB1 that transmits a driving force of rotation to the right transmission member 740 on the right side.

  The one-way clutch OW1 includes an inner ring that is disposed on the inner side and has a cam surface formed on the outer peripheral surface, an outer ring that is disposed on the outer side of the inner ring, and a plurality of springs and rollers between the inner ring and the outer ring. When the outer ring tries to rotate in one direction with respect to the inner ring, the contact surface pressure between the cam surface and the roller increases, and resistance is transmitted to the inner ring, and the outer ring moves in the other direction with respect to the inner ring. When this is rotated, the contact surface pressure between the cam surface and the roller becomes low, and this is a cam type clutch that slides and cuts power transmission.

  Therefore, the transmission gear 731b can transmit the rotational driving force to the shaft portion JB1 when the driving force in one direction is transmitted from the driving motor KM4, and can transmit the driving force in the other direction from the driving motor KM4. The outer ring slides with respect to the inner ring, and the transmission of the driving force to the shaft portion JB1 is interrupted.

  As with the transmission gear 731b, the transmission gear 731c has a one-way clutch OW1 disposed therein. A shaft 735 is disposed inside the one-way clutch OW1 of the transmission gear 731c.

  Therefore, the transmission gear 731c can transmit the rotational driving force to the shaft 735 when a driving force in one direction is transmitted from the driving motor KM4, and the inner ring when the driving force in the other direction is transmitted from the driving motor KM4. On the other hand, the outer ring slips and the transmission of the driving force to the shaft 735 is interrupted. Moreover, the transmission gear 731c is meshed with the transmission gear 731b, and the rotation directions of the transmission gear 731c are opposite to each other. Therefore, when the transmission gear 731b is rotated in one direction, the transmission gear 731c is rotated in the other direction. On the other hand, when the transmission gear 731b is rotated in the other direction, the transmission gear 731b is rotated in one direction. That is, by switching the rotation direction of the drive motor KM4, the mode is switched to the mode in which the shaft portion JB1 rotates or the mode in which the shaft 735 rotates.

  The transmission gear 731d is attached to the shaft 735. As described above, the shaft 735 is rotated only when the transmission gear 731c is rotated in one direction. Therefore, the transmission gear 731c rotates in one direction only when the transmission gear 731c is rotated in one direction, and is not rotated in the other direction.

  The load gear 731e is coupled to the shaft portion 791a of the resistance member 791 whose shaft hole is attached to the box member 760. The resistance member 791 is formed to include a shaft portion 791 a that can rotate with respect to a base portion fastened to the box member 760. The resistance member 791 is formed such that a predetermined amount of resistance acts when the shaft portion 791a rotates with respect to the base portion. That is, since a predetermined amount of force is required to rotate the shaft portion 791a, the force for rotating the load gear 731e connected to the shaft portion 791a is also required to be a predetermined amount or more.

  Thereby, when the rotating body 800 meshed with the transmission gear 731d is rotated and stopped by the rotation of the transmission gear 731d, it can be suppressed from rotating by the inertial force. That is, the resistance when the shaft portion 791a rotates with respect to the base portion is set to be larger than the inertial force that acts around the axis of the rotating body 800 when the rotation of the rotating body 800 stops.

  The load gear 731e is connected to a transmission gear 731d that is disposed coaxially with the transmission gear 731c. Therefore, the resistance of the load gear 731e applied to the drive motor KM4 can be only one-way rotation that rotates the transmission gear 731d. That is, when the transmission gear 731c is rotated in the other direction, the transmission of the drive between the transmission gear 731c and the transmission gear 731d is interrupted, so that the resistance of the load gear 731e can be suppressed from acting. As a result, when the transmission gear 731b is rotated in one direction, the resistance of the load gear 731e can be suppressed from acting.

  The motor base 732 is formed in a box-like body that opens on the decoration unit 750 side, and the drive motor KM4 is disposed outside the bottom portion of the box (left side in FIG. 87) with the shaft inserted through the inside of the box. As a result, the transmission gear 731 a coupled to the shaft of the drive motor KM 4 can be disposed inside the motor base 732. That is, the depth dimension of the box of the motor base 732 is set larger than the width dimension of the transmission gear 731a. As a result, the motor base 732 can be disposed in the decoration unit 750 with the drive motor KM4 and the transmission gear 731a attached thereto, and the transmission gear 731a can be prevented from colliding with the decoration unit 750.

  The gear cover 733 is formed in a vertically long rectangle when viewed from the back, and is fastened to the decoration unit 750 with the left transmission member 730 disposed therebetween. In addition, a through hole 733a is formed through the decoration unit 750 at a position facing a shaft hole of the rotating body 800 described later. Thereby, the ball | bowl rolling inside the rotary body 800 can be discharged | emitted outside through the through-hole 733a. A description of the sphere sent to the rotating body 800 will be given later.

  The ball path cover 734 is a member disposed on the outer side (left side in FIG. 87) of the gear cover 733, is formed of a plate-like body, and has a wall portion projecting from the edge portion toward the gear cover 733. Thereby, a gap can be formed between the gear cover 733 and the ball path cover 734 facing each other, and the sphere inserted through the through hole 733a of the gear cover 733 is inserted through the gap and discharged to the outside of the rotating unit 700. Can do. The sphere discharged from the gap between the gear cover 733 and the ball path cover is sent to a collection path (not shown) and collected.

  The right transmission member 740 covers the rotating member 741 connected to the other end of the shaft portion JB1, the arm member 742 having one end connected to the rotating member 741, and the rotating member 741 and the arm member 742. The crank cover 743 disposed in the decorative unit 750 is mainly provided.

  The rotating member 741 includes a main body portion 741b formed in a disk-like plate shape, a one-way clutch OW1 fitted into the shaft of the main body portion 741b, and a columnar shape protruding to the opposite side (right side in FIG. 87) of the decoration unit 750. The projection 741a is mainly provided.

  In the one-way clutch OW1 attached to the rotating member 741, the shaft hole of the inner ring is inserted into the other end side of the shaft portion JB. The one-way clutch OW1 is arranged so that the inner ring and the outer ring are not transmitted when rotation opposite to the rotation direction of the shaft portion JB1 is input to the inner ring.

  As a result, when a driving force having a rotational speed faster than the rotational speed transmitted from the shaft portion JB1 to the rotating member 741 is input to the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1, only the outer ring is rotated and the rotating member 741 is driven by the drive motor KM4. It can be rotated by a driving force other than driving. As a result, the rotating member 741 can be rotated at two or more different speeds.

  The arm member 742 has a shape obtained by combining a C shape and an I shape in a side view, and is formed by connecting one end of the C shape to the other end of the I shape. In addition, the arm member 742 includes a shaft hole 742a that is formed so as to penetrate the connecting portion between the C-shaped portion and the I-shaped portion, an elliptical first sliding groove 742b that is formed so as to penetrate one end of the I-shaped portion, It is mainly provided with an elliptical second sliding groove 742c formed through the other end of the character portion.

  The shaft hole 742a is a hole into which a shaft portion 764a formed in a right side plate 764 of the box member 760 described later is inserted, and has an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 764a. Therefore, the arm member 742 is disposed in the decoration unit 750 with the shaft portion 764a inserted into the shaft hole 742a, and thus can be rotated with respect to the decoration unit 750.

  The first sliding groove 742b is a hole into which the protrusion 741a of the rotating member 741 is inserted, and the width dimension in the short direction formed in an ellipse is set larger than the outer diameter of the protrusion 741a. Therefore, the protrusion 741a can be inserted inside the first sliding groove 742b, and the arm member 742 can be rotationally displaced by the rotation of the rotating member 741.

  The rotating member 741 is formed so that the outer diameter is smaller than the longitudinal dimension of the I-shaped portion of the arm member 742, and the shaft is a distance half the longitudinal dimension of the I-shaped portion from the shaft hole 742a of the arm member 742. It is arranged at a position farther away. Thus, by rotating the rotating member 741, the arm member 742 can be reciprocated around the axis of the shaft hole 742a.

  The second sliding groove 742c is a hole into which a projection 773a of the right lid portion 773 described later is inserted, and the width dimension in the short direction formed in an ellipse is set larger than the outer diameter of the projection 773a. Therefore, the protrusion 773a can be inserted inside the second sliding groove 742c. Further, the right lid portion 773 is formed so as to be capable of rotational displacement with respect to the box member 760. Therefore, as described above, the rotation member 741 is rotated, and the arm member 742 reciprocates so that the right lid portion 773 connected to the other end of the arm member 742 is rotated with respect to the box member 760. be able to.

  The crank cover 743 is mainly provided with an oval part 743a formed in an ellipse in the back view and a ball feeding part 743b formed in a row on the back side of the oval part 743a.

  The oval portion 743a is a cover that covers the arm member 742. The outer shape in a side view is formed to be larger than the displacement region of the arm member 742 and the arm member 742, and the arm member 742 extends from the edge toward the decoration unit 750. A wall portion protruding larger than the thickness is formed. Thus, when the crank cover 743 is disposed on the decoration unit 750, the arm member 742 can be disposed between the crank cover 743 and the decoration unit 750 facing each other.

  The ball feeding part 743b is a path member for sending a ball to the collection path when a ball flowing down the flow area in front of the game board 13 is collected from a predetermined collection port, and has a predetermined size inside. It is formed in a rod shape with a space. Further, the ball feeding part 743b is opened at the upper end side and connected to the recovery port of the game board 13, and the lower end side is connected to the opening formed in the decoration unit 750. As a result, the balls collected by the game board 13 can be guided to the collection path (not shown) through the interior of the decoration unit 750 via the ball delivery unit 743b.

  Next, the decoration unit 750 will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 95. FIG. 91 is a front view of the decoration unit 750. 92A is a side view of the decoration unit 750 when viewed in the direction of the arrow XCIIa in FIG. 91, and FIG. 92B is a side view of the decoration unit 750 when viewed in the direction of the arrow XCIIb in FIG. FIG. 93 is an exploded perspective front view of the decoration unit 750, and FIG. 94 is an exploded perspective rear view of the decoration unit 750. 91 (b) and 91 (c), the right side plate 764 and the left side plate 765 of the box member 760 are shown in a transparent state.

  As shown in FIGS. 91 to 94, the decoration unit 750 includes a box member 760 serving as a decoration part outside the decoration unit 750 and a lid disposed on the upper side in the gravity direction of the box member 760 (upper side in FIG. 91 (a)). The member 770 is mainly provided with a rotating member 800 disposed inside the box member 760 and the lid member 770.

  The box member 760 includes a base member 762 disposed below the rotating body 800, a front plate 761 disposed in front of the base member 762, a lower plate 763 disposed on the bottom surface of the base member 762, The base member 762 is mainly provided with a right side plate 764 disposed on the right side in front view and a left side plate 765 disposed on the left side in front view of the base member 762.

  The base member 762 is formed in a rectangular horizontally longer shape than the rotating body 800 in a top view, and is formed with a thickness larger than the outer diameter of the sphere in the direction of gravity. The base member 762 is formed with a curved surface whose upper surface is coaxial with the axis of the rotating body 800. Thereby, when the base member 762 is arrange | positioned in the vicinity of the rotary body 800, the collision of the base member 762 and the rotary body 800 can be suppressed.

  The base member 762 is mainly provided with a concave portion 762a that is recessed downward on the top surface in the left-right direction and a ball feeding portion 762b that is recessed substantially L-shaped on the bottom surface.

  The concave portion 762a is a groove in which the above-described shaft portion JB1 is disposed on the inner side, and is recessed on the shaft of the transmission gear 731b disposed on the side surface of the decoration unit 750. Thereby, the driving force of the drive motor KM4 can be transmitted through the shaft portion JB1.

  The ball feeding part 762b is bent and formed in an L shape on the bottom surface, one end side is connected to the opening 764b of the right side plate 764, and the other end side is the back side of the winning hole 761a of the front plate 761. Connected to Further, the recessed width of the ball feeding portion 762b is formed larger than the diameter of the sphere. Accordingly, the lower surface plate 763 is disposed on the lower side, so that a ball can be sent into the box member 760.

  The front plate 761 is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a predetermined thickness on the back side. Further, the front plate 761 is formed with a winning opening 761a of a size that allows a sphere to be inserted on the front side. As described above, the winning opening 761a is connected to the ball feeding portion 762b of the base member 762 disposed on the back side. Therefore, the ball sent to the inside of the winning opening 761a is sent to the ball sending portion 762b of the base member 762.

  The right side plate 764 is formed in a D shape whose outer shape in a side view is curved upward. Further, the right side plate 764 is curved with a shaft portion 764a projecting to the outside of the decoration unit 750, a bearing portion 764c formed penetrating below the shaft portion 764a, and the same shaft as the rotation shaft of the rotating body 800. A curved opening 764d formed in the opening, an opening 764b opened at a position opposite to the lower end of the ball feeding portion 762b of the crank cover 743, and a semicircular shape penetratingly formed on the axis of the rotating shaft of the rotating body 800. The engagement portion 764e is mainly provided.

  The opening 764b is a hole for enabling the ball sent from the ball feeding portion of the crank cover 743 to be sent to the base member 762, and is formed larger than the outer diameter of the ball. Thereby, the ball sent to the crank cover 743 can be sent to the base member 762.

  The bearing portion 764c is a hole into which the above-described shaft portion JB1 is inserted, and is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion JB1. Thereby, a driving force can be transmitted to the right transmission member 740 described above.

  The curved opening 764d is an opening through which the protrusion 773a protruding from the right lid 773 is inserted. Further, the curved opening 764d is formed in an arc shape coaxial with the rotation axis of the lid member 770 because the lid member 770 is rotationally displaced. Thereby, when the cover member 770 is rotationally displaced, it can suppress that the protrusion 773a and the curved opening 764d collide.

  The engaging portion 764e is a member that engages with an end portion on the right side of the base plate 810 disposed inside the rotating body 800 and holds the base plate 810 in a non-rotatable manner. That is, the distal end portion 811a of the right end portion 811 of the base plate 810 is inserted into the engaging portion 764e. Thereby, the base plate 810 cannot be rotated.

  The left side plate 765 has an outer shape substantially the same as the right side plate 764 in a side view. The left side plate 765 has a through hole 765a formed through the shaft of the rotating body 800, a shaft portion 765b protruding toward the rotating body 800, and a shaft portion 791a of the resistance member 791 inserted therein. The hole 765c is mainly provided.

  The through hole 765a is an opening through which the sphere discharged from the opening on the left side when viewed from the front of the rotating body 800 is inserted into the through hole 733a of the motor base 732 described above. That is, the through-hole 765a is formed on the axis of the rotator 800, and the inner diameter thereof is set to be the same as the inner diameter of the opening on the left when viewed from the front of the rotator 800.

  The shaft portion 765b is inserted into a shaft hole 781 formed in the rotation restricting member 780 described later, and can hold the rotation restricting member 780 in a rotatable state. The displacement of the rotation restricting member 780 will be described later.

  The through hole 765c is a hole through which the shaft portion 791a of the resistance member 791 is inserted as described above, and is formed at a position facing the side surface of the load gear 731e described above.

  The lower surface plate 763 is a plate member that is disposed on the lower surface of the base member 762 so that the ball feeding portion 762b of the base member 762 and the lower surface plate 763 form a ball feeding path through which a sphere can pass. The lower surface plate 763 is formed with an opening 763a penetrating in the vertical direction. The opening 763a is an opening for sending a ball sent inside the ball sending part 762b to a collection path (not shown). Therefore, the balls that are won in the winning opening 761a of the front plate 761 and the game area are sent to the ball feeding portion 743b of the right transmission member 740, and the balls can be discharged from the interior of the decoration unit 750.

  The lid member 770 includes a curved lid portion 771 formed in a curved shape coaxial with the axis of the rotating body 800, a right lid portion 773 fastened to the right side surface of the curved lid portion 771, and a curved lid portion 771. And a left lid portion 772 fastened to the left side surface when viewed from the front.

  As described above, the curved lid portion 771 is formed in a curved shape that is coaxial with the axis of the rotating body 800 and has a larger radius than the rotating body 800 as viewed from the side. The curved lid portion 771 includes a transparent portion 771a formed from a transparent plate at a part on the front side.

  The transparent portion 771a is a plate that allows the player to visually recognize patterns and characters drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 800. That is, the player can visually recognize the display of the rotator 800 through the transparent portion 771a even when the rotator 800 is in a form in which the upper end side is covered with the lid member 770.

  The right lid portion 773 is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the side, and the radius outside the ring is set to be substantially the same as the radius of the curved lid portion 771. Further, the inner diameter of the right lid portion 773 is formed larger than the size of the outer shape of the right end portion 811 of the rotator 800 in a side view. Thereby, the right side cover part 773 is arrange | positioned in the state which penetrated the right end part 811 of the rotary body 800 in the annular | circular shaped inner side part.

  Further, the right lid portion 773 is mainly provided with a protrusion 773a that protrudes to the outside (right side in front view) of the decoration unit 750, and a recess 773b that is recessed radially outward at the outer peripheral edge. . As described above, the protrusion 773a is a protrusion that is inserted into the second sliding groove 742c of the arm member 742.

  The recess 773b can rotate the opening / closing member 870 by inserting a protrusion 871 of the opening / closing member 870 described later. Therefore, the recessed portion 773b is set to have a recessed width larger than the outer shape of the protrusion 871. The concave portion 773b is formed at a position substantially opposite to the edge portion of the right side lid portion 773 where the curved lid portion 771 is disposed.

  The left lid portion 772 is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the side, and the radius outside the ring is set to be approximately the same as the radius of the curved lid portion 771. Further, the inner diameter of the left lid portion 772 is formed larger than the outer diameter of a tooth surface 881a of the left rotating portion 880 described later. Accordingly, the left lid portion 772 is disposed in a state in which the left rotation portion 880 of the rotating body 800 is inserted into the annular inner portion.

  Further, the left lid portion 772 is formed with a plate-like sensor plate 772a that protrudes to the outside of the decoration unit 750 (left side in front view). The sensor plate 772a is disposed between two facing bifurcated sensors (not shown), so that the position of the left lid portion 772 can be detected.

  Here, the lid member 770 for the rotating body 800 will be described. The arrangement of the lid member 770 in a state where the rotating body 800 is assembled is such that the left and right end portions of the rotating body 800 are inserted inside the right lid portion 773 and the left lid portion 772 before assembly (separate members), respectively. To do. Then, the rotating body 800 and the lid member 770 are connected by assembling the right lid portion 773, the left lid portion 772, and the curved lid portion 771. Therefore, the lid member 770 is rotatable with respect to the rotating body around the axis of the rotating body 800.

  The rotation restricting member 780 is formed to be bent in a substantially L shape in a side view. The rotation restricting member 780 mainly includes a shaft hole 781 penetrating the bent portion, a protrusion 782 protruding in the bending direction on one end side, and a contact surface 783 formed flat on the tip on the other end side. Is done.

  As described above, the shaft portion 765b of the left side plate 765 is inserted into the shaft hole 781. Thereby, the rotation restricting member 780 is held rotatably with respect to the left side plate 765. Further, an urging spring SP5 is inserted into the shaft portion. As a result, a rotational force in one direction is applied to the rotation restricting member 780.

  The protrusion 782 can regulate the rotational displacement of the rotating body 800 by engaging with an engaging protrusion 882 of the left rotating portion 880 described later. The abutting surface 783 is a surface with which the end portion on the back surface side of the lid member 770 mentioned above abuts, and the rotation regulating member 780 can be rotated by the lid member 770 being abutted. The mode of regulation between rotation regulating member 780 and rotating body 800 will be described later.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 95 to 96, the transmission path of the driving force when the driving motor KM4 is rotated will be described. 95 (a) and 96 (a) show the rotation unit 700 in the direction of the arrow XCVa in FIG. 89, and FIGS. 95 (b) and 96 (b) show the rotation unit 700 in the arrow XCVb of FIG. is there.

  In FIG. 95, the direction of displacement of each member when the shaft of the drive motor KM4 is rotated in the forward direction (clockwise) is indicated by a two-dot chain line. In FIG. 96, when the shaft of the drive motor KM4 is rotated in the negative direction (counterclockwise), the displacement direction of each member is indicated by a two-dot chain line.

  As shown in FIGS. 95A and 95B, when the drive motor KM4 is driven in the forward direction, the transmission gear 731a is rotated in the forward direction. When the transmission gear 731a is rotated in the positive direction, the transmission gear 731b is rotated in the negative direction and the transmission gear 731c is rotated in the positive direction.

  In this case, in the one-way clutch OW1 disposed in the transmission gear 731b, the rotation of the outer ring is not transmitted to the inner ring, and the shaft portion JB1 is not rotated. Therefore, the driving force is not transmitted to the rotating member 741 connected to the shaft portion JB1, and the arm member 742 is stopped.

  On the other hand, the one-way clutch OW1 disposed in the transmission gear 731 is in a state of transmitting the rotation of the outer ring to the inner ring, and the shaft 735 is rotated. Therefore, the transmission gear 731d connected to the shaft 735 is rotated. Thereby, the load gear 731e meshed with the transmission gear 731d and the tooth surface 881a of the rotating body 800 are rotated. That is, when the drive motor KM4 rotates in the forward direction, the drive force to the lid member 770 is not transmitted and the drive force to the rotating body 800 is transmitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 96A and 96B, when the drive motor KM4 is driven in the negative direction, the transmission gear 731a is rotated in the negative direction. When the transmission gear 731a is rotated in the negative direction, the transmission gear 731b is rotated in the positive direction and the transmission gear 731c is rotated in the negative direction.

  In this case, the one-way clutch OW1 disposed in the transmission gear 731b is in a state of transmitting the rotation of the outer ring to the inner ring, and the shaft portion JB1 is rotated. Accordingly, the driving force is transmitted to the rotating member 741 connected to the shaft portion JB1, and the rotating member 741 is rotated. As a result, the arm member 742 reciprocates around the axis of the shaft hole 742a, and the lid member 770 is displaced.

  On the other hand, in the one-way clutch OW1 provided in the transmission gear 731, the rotation of the outer ring is not transmitted to the inner ring, and the shaft 735 is not rotated. Therefore, the driving force is not transmitted to the transmission gear 731d connected to the shaft 735, and the rotating body 800 and the load gear 731e are not rotated. That is, when the drive motor KM4 rotates negatively, the drive force to the lid member 770 is in a transmission state and the drive force to the rotating body 800 is not transmitted.

  Therefore, a transmission gear 731c (rotation side drive means) for transmitting the driving force from the drive motor KM4 to the rotating body 800 and a transmission gear 731b (displacement side transmission means) for transmitting to the opening / closing member 870 described later via the lid member 770. In addition, by providing the one-way clutch OW1, the rotational force can be transmitted to one of the transmission gear 731c or the transmission gear 731b and the transmission to the other can be blocked according to the rotational direction of the drive motor KM4. . As a result, it is possible to switch the driving object to be driven by the rotational driving force only by switching the rotation direction of the drive motor KM4, that is, according to the rotation direction of the drive motor KM4, The stop and the displacement of the opening / closing member 870 and the stop thereof can be switched, and a plurality of modes can be formed, and the structure can be simplified.

  Here, in the structure in which the driving target (the rotating body 800 or the opening / closing member 870 (lid member 770) is switched according to the rotation direction of the driving means using the one-way clutch OW1, the driving force transmitted from the driving motor KM4 is transmitted. When cut off, the rotation or displacement in the direction driven by the driving force becomes free, so that the driving object of the driving means is switched from the rotating body 800 to the opening / closing member 870 (lid member 770), for example. When the transmission of the driving force is interrupted, the rotating body 800 is in a rotatable state, and there is a possibility that the rotation is continued (spinned) by the inertial force.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the load gear 731e (load gear) meshed with the transmission gear 731d driven by the transmission gear 731c is provided, the transmission of the rotational driving force from the drive motor KM4 is blocked. However, it is possible to suppress the rotation of the rotating body 800 using the load (resistance) when rotating the load gear 731e.

  Next, displacement of the lid member 770 will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98. 97 (a) and 98 (c) are in a closed state, FIGS. 97 (b) and 98 (b) are in an intermediate state, and FIGS. 97 (c) and 98 (a) are in an open state. It is a side view of the decoration unit 750 and the right transmission member 740.

  97 (a) to 97 (c) and FIGS. 98 (a) to 98 (c) show a state in which the crank cover 743 of the right transmission member 740 has been removed. The closed state of the decoration unit 750 is a state in which the lid member 770 is arranged in a state of covering the upper half of the rotating body 800 (upper part in FIG. 97 (a)), and the open state is a state in which the lid member 770 is rotated. This is a state in which it is displaced and arranged on the back side (the right side in FIG. 97 (c)) of the rotating body 800. The intermediate state is a state in which the lid member 770 is disposed at a position between the closed state and the open state.

  Further, in FIGS. 97 (a) to 97 (c), the state of being displaced from the closed state to the open state is illustrated in order, and in FIGS. 98 (a) to 98 (c), the state of being displaced from the open state to the closed state is illustrated. The states to be performed are illustrated in order.

  First, with reference to FIG. 97, the displacement of the lid member 770 when displaced from the closed state to the open state will be described. Transmission of the driving force to the arm member 742 is performed by rotating the driving motor KM4 in the negative direction as described above.

  In the closed state, the protrusion 741a of the rotating member 741 is disposed on the back side (right side in FIG. 97 (a)) of the shaft hole 742a of the arm member 742. Therefore, in the arm member 742, the first sliding groove 742b into which the protrusion 741a is inserted is disposed on the back side of the shaft hole 742a.

  The shaft hole 742a, the first sliding groove 742b, and the second sliding groove 742c of the arm member 742 are formed on substantially the same straight line. Therefore, the second sliding groove 742c formed at the end opposite to the first sliding groove 742b is arranged on the front side (left side in FIG. 97 (a)) of the shaft hole 742a. As a result, the protrusion 773a protruding to the right side surface of the lid member 770 is guided by the second sliding groove 742c, and the curved lid portion 771 of the lid member 770 is placed above the rotating body 800.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 97 (b), when the rotating member 741 is rotated approximately 90 degrees and the protrusion 741a is positioned below the axis of the rotating member 741, the first sliding groove 742b of the arm member 742 is formed. As the projection 741a is displaced, the shaft hole 742a is displaced downward in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 97B).

  Therefore, the second sliding groove 742c formed at the opposite end of the first sliding groove 742b is arranged on the upper side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 97 (b)) of the shaft hole 742a. As a result, the protrusion 773a of the lid member 770 is guided by the second sliding groove 742c, and the curved lid portion 771 of the lid member 770 is disposed at a position where it is rotationally displaced toward the back side of the rotating body 800. .

  In this case, the position of the center of gravity of the lid member 770 is arranged on the back side with respect to the rotation axis of the lid member 770 (the center position of the rotating body 800 formed in a columnar shape). Accordingly, a rotational force is applied in a direction in which the lid member 770 is displaced from the closed state to the open state by the load of the lid member 770. As described above, the rotation member 741 is provided with the one-way clutch OW1, and the outer ring is configured to be rotatable in advance with respect to the inner ring. Therefore, the drive of the drive motor KM4 is stopped by the load of the lid member 770. Then, the lid member 770 can be continuously rotated.

  As shown in FIG. 97 (c), when the lid member 770 is displaced to the back side of the rotating body, the protrusion 741a of the rotating member 741 is stopped at a position rotated approximately 90 degrees from the intermediate position. That is, it is the leftmost end (left side in FIG. 97) of the displacement region of the protrusion 741a. Therefore, the rotation of the arm member 742 is restricted, and the rotation of the lid member 770 is stopped.

  That is, the displacement of the lid member 770 from the closed state to the open state is performed by an operation of driving the drive motor KM4 to displace it to an intermediate state and an operation of dropping the lid member 770 with a load.

  As a result, when the cover member 770 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the section in which the drive motor KM4 is driven can be reduced to half of the entire section, so that the energy consumption of the drive motor KM4 can be reduced.

  Further, the displacement speed from the closed state to the intermediate state can be changed to an aspect according to the rotational speed of the drive motor KM4, and the displacement speed from the intermediate state to the open state can be changed to an aspect according to the load of the lid member 770. The displacement speed from the closed state to the open state can be changed in two stages. Therefore, since the displacement speed of the lid member 770 can be changed without changing the displacement speed of the drive motor KM4, it is not necessary to complicate the control. As a result, control can be simplified and occurrence of control failure can be suppressed.

  A displacement section in which the lid member 770 follows the rotational speed of the drive motor KM4 is referred to as a first section, a displacement section in which the lid member 770 follows the load of the lid member 770 is referred to as a second section, and the first section has a symbol DK1. The second section is described with reference to DK2.

  Next, displacement of the lid member 770 when displaced from the open state to the closed state will be described with reference to FIG.

  As described above, in the opened state, the protrusion 741a of the rotating member 741 is disposed on the front side (left side in FIG. 98 (a)) of the shaft hole 742a of the arm member 742, and the curved lid of the lid member 770 is placed. The portion 771 is placed on the back side of the rotating body 800.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (b), when the rotating member 741 is rotated approximately 90 degrees and the protrusion 741 a is positioned above the axis of the rotating member 741, the first sliding groove 742 b of the arm member 742 is formed. Along with the displacement of the protrusion 741a, the shaft hole 742a is displaced downward in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 98 (b)).

  Accordingly, the second sliding groove 742c formed at the opposite end of the first sliding groove 742b is placed on the upper side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 98 (b)) of the shaft hole 742a. As a result, the protrusion 773a of the lid member 770 is guided by the second sliding groove 742c, and is rotationally displaced approximately 45 degrees upward from the state where the curved lid portion 771 of the lid member 770 is positioned on the back side of the rotating body 800. It is set as the state arrange | positioned in the made position.

  The lid member 770 displaced to the closed position (the position shown in FIG. 97 (a)) is disposed in the game area (the front side of the game board 13), and the open position (the FIG. 97 (c)). The lid member 770 that is displaced to the position of () is disposed outside the game area (on the back side of the game board 13). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball flowing down the game area from colliding with the rotator 800 and rotating the rotator 800. In particular, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, the rotary member 800 is provided with an opening / closing member 870 that is displaced toward the game area side, so that a gaming machine flowing down the game area collides with the opening / closing member 870, The opening / closing member 870 can be prevented from being opened (projected).

  In addition, since the lid member 770 is disposed outside the game area in the opened position, a space for the opening / closing member 870 to project to the game area is generated by the displacement of the lid member 770 to the opened position. Can be secured. Accordingly, the outer surface of the rotator 800 can be brought closer to the game area, and the player can easily see the opening / closing member 870 accordingly.

  Furthermore, since the lid member 770 is formed to be rotatable around an axis substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the rotating body 800 and is formed in a curved plate shape along the outer surface of the rotating body 800, the lid member 770 is in a closed state. A space necessary for displacement between the position (covering position) and the open position (retracted position) can be suppressed, and accordingly, a space for disposing other members can be secured. In addition, since the lid member 770 is formed in a curved shape in this way, it is possible to suppress the game ball flowing down the game area from being stopped on the lid member 770 disposed at the closed position, and smoothly. Can flow down.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (c), when the rotating member 741 is further rotated by approximately 90 degrees to displace the protrusion 71a to the right side of the axis of the rotating member 741, the first sliding groove 742b of the arm member 742 is obtained. Is displaced to the back side (right side of FIG. 98 (c)) with respect to the shaft hole 742a in accordance with the displacement of the protrusion 741a.

  Accordingly, the second sliding groove 742c formed at the end opposite to the first sliding groove 742b is arranged on the front side (left side in FIG. 98 (c)) with respect to the shaft hole 742a. As a result, the protrusion 773a of the lid member 770 is guided by the second sliding groove 742c, and the curved lid portion 771 of the lid member 770 is placed above the rotating body 800.

  In this case, with the displacement of the lid member 770, the center of gravity of the lid member 770 is displaced to the front side with respect to the rotation axis of the lid member 770. Accordingly, during the transition from the intermediate state to the closed state, a rotational force is applied in a direction to displace the lid member 770 from the open state to the closed state due to the load of the lid member 770. Therefore, even when driving of the drive motor KM4 is stopped, the lid member 770 can be continuously rotated by the load of the lid member 770.

  Therefore, since the lid member 770 can be closed by the load of the lid member 770, the lid member 770 can be reliably closed.

  Here, if the rotational displacement of the lid member 770 is displaced only by the drive motor KM4, the lid member 770 may not be stopped at a normal position when the drive stop operation of the drive motor KM4 is deviated. Further, as in the present embodiment, when the rotation direction of the rotation member 741 is one, when the stop operation of the drive motor KM4 is delayed, rotation for one rotation is required to return to the normal position.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the position where the lid member 770 is stopped can be mechanically stopped using the load of the lid member 770, it is possible to prevent the stop position of the lid member 770 from shifting. it can.

  Here, there is known a gaming machine including a driving unit that generates a driving force, a displacement member that is displaced by the driving force of the driving unit, and a transmission unit that transmits the driving force to the displacement member. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the transmission state of the driving force by the transmission means from the driving means to the displacement member is always constant, when the driving means is driven at a constant driving speed, the displacement member is also constant. It is displaced at a speed, and a change cannot be given to the displacement mode of the displacement member. For this reason, there is a problem in that the effect of the effect accompanying the displacement of the displacement member is insufficient.

  Although the displacement speed of the displacement member can be changed by increasing / decreasing the drive speed of the drive means, the displacement speed in the predetermined section of the displacement section of the displacement member is different from the displacement speed in the other sections. In order to achieve speed, it is necessary to arrange a sensor device that detects the position of the displacement member, and to increase or decrease the output of the driving means according to the detection result of the sensor device, which increases the product cost and control cost. Invite. In addition, the structure and control become complicated, leading to a decrease in reliability.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the transmission means (the rotating member 741 and the arm member 742) includes the one-way clutch OW1, and the inner ring (first member) of the one-way clutch OW1 is the outer ring (second member) of the one-way clutch OW1. On the other hand, when displaced in one direction, the rollers engage with the inner ring and the outer ring to transmit driving force, and when the inner ring is displaced in the other direction with respect to the outer ring, the inner ring and The engagement of the roller with the outer ring is released, the transmission of the driving force is interrupted, and in the second section DK2 (predetermined section) of the displacement section of the lid member 770 (displacement member), the outer ring is in contact with the inner ring. Since the displacement is performed in one direction, the displacement speed of the lid member 770 in the second section DK2 is set to be higher than the displacement speed of the lid member 770 in the other sections regardless of the driving state of the rotating member 741. Can Kusuru. Therefore, a change can be given to the lid member 770, and the presentation effect accompanying the displacement of the lid member 770 can be enhanced.

  Further, the outer ring can be advanced in one direction with respect to the inner ring regardless of the driving state of the driving motor KM4. Therefore, for example, the driving motor KM4 is driven at a constant driving speed in all the sections of the displacement section of the lid member 770. It can be driven, and there is no need to increase or decrease the drive speed of the drive motor KM4 in the middle of the displacement section of the lid member 770 (that is, depending on whether the first section DK1 or the second section DK2). As a result, the control can be simplified, the control cost can be reduced, and the operation reliability can be improved. Alternatively, in the second section DK2, the operation of the driving unit can be stopped, and in this case, energy consumption can be suppressed.

  Further, in the driving state in which the inner ring is displaced in the other direction with respect to the outer ring, the engagement of the rollers is released and the transmission of the driving force is interrupted, so that the displacement member is in the stopped state (driven state). The driving force of the driving means (drive motor KM4) in such a driving state can be used as the driving force for driving the rotating body 800. That is, the two members of the lid member 770 and the rotating body 800 can be displaced by switching the drive direction of the drive means (drive motor KM4).

  In addition, the lid member 770 is formed to be rotatable and is disposed at a position where its center of gravity is decentered from the center of rotation. In the second section DK2, the weight of the lid member 770 displaces the outer ring in one direction. Since it is formed so as to be able to act in the direction, the outer ring can be displaced in one direction with respect to the inner ring by utilizing the weight of the lid member 770. That is, the displacement speed of the lid member 770 in the second section DK2 can be made faster than the displacement speed of the lid member 770 in the section of the first section DK1. As a result, a change can be given to the displacement mode of the lid member 770, and the presentation effect accompanying the displacement of the displacement member can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, the transmission of the driving force is projected from the main body portion 741b to which the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is attached and the main body portion 741b, and the projection 741a (pin portion) located displaced from the rotation center of the main body portion 741c. Therefore, the rotation member 741 is rotated by the outer ring, and the protrusion 741a is slid along the first sliding groove 742b, thereby rotating the rotation member 741. The other end side (second sliding groove 742c side) can be reciprocated. In this case, the other end side of the arm member 742 can reciprocate the lid member 770 between the open position and the closed position as the lid member 770 reciprocates. That is, the displacement direction of the lid member 770 can be switched without switching the drive direction of the drive motor KM4.

  Further, in this case, since the section of the second section DK can be formed in both reciprocating operations, when the cover member 770 is reciprocated, the displacement can be performed from the middle of the displacement regardless of the direction of displacement. The displacement speed of the lid member 770 can be increased. As a result, a change can be given to the displacement mode of the lid member 770, and the presentation effect accompanying the displacement of the lid member can be enhanced.

  Next, the displacement of the rotation restricting member 780 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 99 (a) is a side view of the decoration unit 750 in the closed state, and FIG. 99 (b) is a side view of the decoration unit 750 in the opened state. 99A and 99B show a state in which the left side plate 765 of the box member 760 is viewed transparently.

  As shown in FIG. 99 (a), when the lid member 770 is in the closed state, the rotation restricting member 780 is in a state where the protrusion 782 side is pushed downward by the biasing force of the biasing spring SP5 (FIG. 99). In (a), the shaft hole 781 is rotated clockwise about the axis of the shaft hole 781).

  Therefore, the distance dimension L4 from the rotating shaft of the rotating body 800 to the outside of the engaging protrusion 882 is made smaller than the distance dimension L5 from the rotating shaft of the rotating body 800 to the tip of the protrusion 782 of the rotation restricting member 780 (L4). <L5).

  Therefore, the rotating body 800 and the rotation restricting member 780 are not engaged, and the rotating body 800 can be rotated.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 99 (b), when the lid member 770 is opened, the rotation restricting member 780 includes a lid member 770 whose contact surface 783 is displaced toward the back side of the rotating body 800. The contact surface 783 is pressed downward (a state rotated counterclockwise around the axis of the shaft hole 781 in FIG. 99B).

  Therefore, the distance dimension L4 from the rotating shaft of the rotating body 800 to the outside of the engaging protrusion 882 is made larger than the distance dimension L6 from the rotating shaft of the rotating body 800 to the tip of the protrusion 782 of the rotation restricting member 780 (L6). <L4).

  As a result, the protrusion 782 of the rotation restricting member 780 can be inserted inside the engagement protrusion 882 in the rotating body 800 in a state where the engagement protrusion 882 of the left rotation portion 880 is disposed at the lowest position in the gravity direction. That is, since the rotating body 800 and the rotation restricting member 780 are engaged, the rotating body 800 cannot be rotated. In the present embodiment, the position where the rotation of the rotating body 800 is disabled (the position where the protrusion 782 is inserted inside the engaging protrusion 882) is the position where the opening / closing member 870 of the rotating body 800, which will be described later, is opened. Set to

  That is, in the rotation restricting member 780 (rotation restricting means) that restricts the rotation of the rotating body 800, the opening / closing member 870 (displacement member) is displaced to the open position (second position), and the other side of the displacement member is stretched in the game area. Since the rotation of the rotator 800 is restricted when it is extended, the rotator 800 is rotated in a state where the opening / closing member 870 is extended, and the opening / closing member 870 interferes with other members located on the rotation locus. This can be suppressed. Further, it is possible to suppress the rotation of the rotating body 800 due to the load acting when the displacement member receives the game ball flowing down the game area and the weight of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the displacement member.

  Here, the first member and the second member that are formed so as to be displaceable are provided, and the first member is disposed at a covering position that covers at least a part of the second member invisible, and at the covering position. There is also known a gaming machine that is formed so as to be displaceable between a retreat position that reduces a region that covers the second member invisible. According to this gaming machine, the second member is exposed by disposing the first member at the cover position and displacing the first member to the retracted position from the state in which the second member is not visible to the player. It is possible to produce an effect that the player can visually recognize.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the second member is formed to be displaceable, the second member may be displaced when the second member is exposed. For this reason, there is a problem in that the player cannot visually recognize the second member in an appropriate state, and the effect of production is reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the lid member 770 (first member) can regulate the displacement of the rotating body 800 (second member) in a state where the lid member 770 (first member) is displaced to the open position (retracted position). Since it is formed, such a rotating body 800 can be visually recognized by the player in an appropriate state, and an effect of production can be ensured. That is, when performing the effect of displacing the lid member 770 to the open position and exposing the rotating body 800, the displacement of the lid member 770, which must be performed for the effect, is rotated. This is used as means for regulating the displacement of the body 800. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide or control a mechanism for restricting the displacement of the rotating body 800, and the structure can be simplified correspondingly.

  Further, as will be described later, the outer surface of the rotator 800 is formed asymmetrically from the center of rotation (see FIG. 101). Therefore, the rotating body 800 is formed to be rotatable, and the position of the center of gravity is decentered from the center of rotation. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the rotating body 800 can be increased. That is, it is not necessary for the rotary body 800 to have a shape in which the center of gravity is located at the center of rotation, and an asymmetric shape with respect to the rotation axis can be adopted. On the other hand, when the position of the center of gravity of the rotating body 800 is decentered as described above, the rotating body 800 is displaced by the gravity around the center of rotation (there is a possibility of being rotated), and thus is displaced to the closed position. In addition, the configuration in which the lid member 770 is formed so as to be able to restrict the displacement of the rotating body 800 is particularly effective, whereby the player can visually recognize the rotating body 800 in an appropriate state, and can ensure the effect.

  The rotating body 800 may be formed symmetrically about the axis. In this case, the center of gravity can be arranged at a position different from the rotation axis by forming the rotating body 800 from two or more members having different specific gravities. For example, by forming the half surface from a metal material and forming the remaining half surface from a flexible material, the center of gravity can generally be located on the metal material side having a larger specific gravity than the flexible material.

  Next, the configuration of the rotating body 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 100 to 102. 100 (a) is a front view of the rotating body 800, FIG. 100 (b) is a side view of the rotating body 800 when viewed in the direction of arrow Cb in FIG. 100 (a), and FIG. It is a side view of the rotary body 800 in the arrow Cc direction view of Fig.100 (a). 101 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotating body 800, and FIG. 102 is an exploded perspective rear view of the rotating body 800.

  As shown in FIGS. 100 to 102, the rotating body 800 is formed in a cylindrical shape by combining a plurality of members. The rotating body 800 includes a base plate 810 disposed in the shaft portion, a first display unit 830, a second display unit 840, a third display unit 850, and a fourth display unit 830 that are disposed around the base plate 810 and combined in an annular shape. Display unit 860, right rotation unit 89 disposed at one end in the axial direction, left rotation unit 880 disposed at the other end in the axial direction, and an opening / closing member disposed inside first display unit 830 870 mainly.

  The base plate 810 has a substantially L-shaped cross section when viewed in the axial direction and a shape extending in the axial direction. The base plate 810 is formed to include a right end portion 811 and a left end portion 812 that protrude outward from both left and right end portions.

  The right end portion 811 is formed to project in an annular shape from the right side (the right side in FIG. 100A) of the base plate 810 when viewed from the front. The right end portion 811 mainly includes a tip end portion 811a that partially protrudes from the protruding tip end of the right end portion 811 and a communication hole 811b in an annular inner portion.

  The distal end portion 811a further protrudes in the axial direction from the distal end portion of the right end portion 811, and the protruding region in the right side view (viewed in the direction of FIG. 100C) is inside the engaging portion 764e of the right side plate 764. It is set smaller than the area. The tip portion 811a is inserted inside the engaging portion 764e of the right side surface plate 764 as described above. As a result, the base plate 810 and the right side surface plate 764 (lid member 770) are engaged. As a result, the base plate 810 can be brought into a stopped state with respect to rotational displacement of each display surface (first display unit 830, second display unit 840, third display unit 850, and fourth display unit 860) to be described later.

  The communication hole 811b is an opening through which a wiring (not shown) connected to the LED base 820, which will be described later, is inserted, and is formed through the side surface of the base plate 810 on the right side when viewed from the front. Thereby, wiring can be penetrated.

  The left end portion 812 is formed to project in an annular shape from the left side (left side in FIG. 100A) of the base plate 810 when viewed from the front. The left end portion 812 is mainly formed with a tip end portion 812a protruding from the lower semicircle of the left end portion 812 and a communication hole 812b in an annular inner portion.

  The distal end portion 812a further protrudes in the axial direction from the distal end portion of the left end portion 812, and the protruding shape in the left side view (viewed in the direction of FIG. 100B) is an annular lower semicircle.

  The communication hole 812b is a path for discharging the ball sent to the inside of the rotating body 800 by an opening / closing member 870 described later to the outside of the rotating body 800. The communication hole 812b is set to have an inner diameter larger than that of the sphere and substantially the same as the through hole 733a formed in the gear cover 733.

  Further, the communication hole 812b is an opening connected to the through hole 733a of the gear cover 733, and the protruding distance of the left end portion 812 is set to a distance in contact with the through hole 733a. Further, a projection 733b is formed on the upper hemisphere of the end face of the through hole 733a. The protrusion distance of the protrusion 733b is set to be approximately the same as the protrusion distance of the tip portion 812a. As a result, the base plate 810 and the gear cover 733 (left transmission member 730) are engaged. As a result, the base plate 810 can be brought into a stopped state with respect to rotational displacement of each display surface (first display unit 830, second display unit 840, third display unit 850, and fourth display unit 860) to be described later.

  A reverse rotation prevention member 813 is disposed on the bottom surface of the base plate 810 in a rotatable state. The reverse rotation preventing member 813 is formed in a substantially circular shape when viewed from above, and is formed with an inclined protrusion 813a on one end side. Further, the biasing spring SP6 is disposed between the reverse rotation preventing member 813 and the base plate 810, whereby the protrusion 813a is always biased to the left in the front view (left side in FIG. 100 (a)). It is said.

  The right rotation unit 890 is formed in a plate shape with a predetermined thickness and is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the side. The right rotation part 890 is formed such that the inner diameter of the inner side of the ring is larger than the size of the right end part 811 of the base plate 810. As a result, the right end portion 811 of the base plate 810 can be inserted inside the right rotation portion 890. The right rotating portion 890 is mainly formed with a shaft hole 891 penetrating in the left-right direction and a sliding groove 892 that is curved and opened around the shaft hole 891.

  The shaft hole 891 is a hole into which a shaft portion 872 of an opening / closing member 870 described later is inserted, and has an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 872. Thereby, it can suppress that the axial part 872 of the opening-and-closing member 870 displaces with respect to the 1st display part 830. FIG.

  The sliding groove 892 is formed in a curved shape centered on the shaft hole 891, and the radius thereof is set to be the same as the distance between the protrusion 871 and the shaft portion 872 of the opening / closing member 870. Accordingly, the protrusion 871 of the opening / closing member 870 is inserted into the sliding groove 892, whereby the protrusion 871 can be slid inside the sliding groove 892 when the opening / closing member 870 is displaced.

  The left rotating portion 880 is formed in a plate shape with a predetermined thickness and is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the side. The left rotating part 880 is formed so that the inner diameter of the inner side of the annular ring is larger than the size of the left end part 812 of the base plate 810. Thereby, the left end portion 812 of the base plate 810 can be inserted inside the left rotating portion 880. The left rotating portion 880 mainly includes a wall portion 881 protruding in an annular shape from the inner edge portion, an engaging protrusion 882 protruding from the side wall, and a locking portion 883 in which inclined surfaces are continuously arranged on the inner edge portion. Formed in preparation.

  The wall portion 881 is formed to project to the left side of the rotating body 800 when viewed from the front. The wall portion 881 is provided with a gear tooth surface 881a on the outer peripheral surface of the protruding tip and a communication hole 881b that opens to the inside. The tooth surface 881a meshes with the transmission gear 881d as described above. Thereby, the driving force of the drive motor KM4 can be transmitted to the rotating body 800.

  The communication hole 881b is an opening that communicates the internal space and the external space of the rotating body 800, and can discharge a ball sent into the rotating body 800 by opening an opening / closing member 870 described later.

  As described above, the engagement protrusion 882 is a protrusion with which the rotation restricting member 780 is engaged. The engagement protrusion 882 is formed to protrude from the left side surface of the left rotation part 880 when viewed from the front. In addition, two engagement protrusions 882 are formed at positions separated by a predetermined distance, and a protrusion 782 of the rotation restricting member 780 is formed so as to be insertable therebetween.

  The locking portion 883 has a sawtooth cross section. When the left rotation portion 880 is disposed on the base plate 810, the tip of the protrusion 813 a of the reverse rotation prevention member 813 described above is brought into contact with the locking portion 883. As a result, when a rotational force that rotates the left rotating portion 880 in one direction is applied, the left rotating portion 880 can be rotated by sliding the protrusion 813a along the inclined surface of the locking portion 883. When a rotational force that rotates the left rotation portion 880 in the other direction is applied, the surface of the locking portion 883 is caught by the protrusion 813a and rotation is suppressed.

  As a result, it is possible to restrict the rotating body 800 from rotating in the direction opposite to the direction rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor KM4. It is possible to suppress the rotating body from rotating backward due to a collision or the like.

  Each of the first display unit 830 to the fourth display unit 860 is formed in the same curved shape, and can be formed into one annular shape by connecting the end faces thereof. In addition, the inner diameters of the first display unit 830 to the fourth display unit 860 formed into one ring are set to be approximately the same as the outer diameters of the left and right rotating units 880 and 890. Thereby, the 4th display part 860 can be formed in one column shape from the 1st display part 830 by arrange | positioning each display part 830-860 in the rotation parts 880 and 890 on either side.

  Further, the first display unit 830 to the fourth display unit 860 are each drawn with characters and patterns, and rotate as the driving force is transmitted from the left rotation unit 880 as described above. The player can visually recognize the pattern.

  The first display portion 830 is mainly formed by including an opening 831 opened in the curved surface, and a bearing portion 832 that opens to the shaft side and is formed to protrude in a U shape.

  The opening 831 is an opening in which an opening / closing member 870 described later is disposed, and is formed in an opening having an inner diameter substantially the same as the outer shape of the opening / closing member 870. The bearing portion 832 is formed in a size that allows the shaft portion 872 of the opening / closing member 870 to be inserted into the opened U-shaped portion. Therefore, the opening / closing member 870 can be rotationally displaced with respect to the first display portion 830 by inserting the opening / closing member 870 into the opening 831 and inserting the shaft portion 872 of the opening / closing member 870 into the bearing portion 832. The displacement mode of the opening / closing member 870 will be described later.

  The LED board 820 can emit LED light mounted on the LED board 820 when power is supplied. The LED board 820 is attached to the back side of the base plate 810.

  Next, the opening / closing of the opening / closing member 870 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 103 (a) is a side view of the rotating body 800 when the opening / closing member 870 is in a closed state. FIG. 103B is a side view of the rotating body 800 in a state where the opening / closing member 870 is open. In FIG. 103, when the opening / closing member 870 overlaps with other members, the outer diameter thereof is indicated by a chain line.

  The closed state of the opening / closing member 870 is a state in which the outer peripheral surface of the opening / closing member 870 is disposed substantially parallel to the outer peripheral surface of the first display unit 830. On the other hand, the open state of the opening / closing member 870 is a state in which the outer peripheral surface of the opening / closing member 870 is arranged so as to intersect the outer peripheral surface of the first display unit 830.

  As shown in FIG. 103 (a), in the rotating body 800 with the opening / closing member 870 closed, the protrusion 871 of the opening / closing member 870 has one end side of the sliding groove 892 of the right rotating portion 890 (in FIG. 103 (a), the shaft (Below the portion 872).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 103 (b), in the rotating body 800 in the opened state of the opening / closing member 870, the protrusion 871 of the opening / closing member 870 is positioned on the other end side of the sliding groove 892 of the right rotation unit 890. That is, the opening / closing member 870 is displaced by the protrusion 871 sliding inside the sliding groove 892 of the right rotating portion 890.

  Next, displacement of the protrusion 871 will be described with reference to FIG. 104 (a) and 104 (b) are side views of the decoration unit 750. FIG. 104 (a) and 104 (b), the right side plate 764 of the box member 760 is shown in a transparent state.

  FIG. 104 (a) shows a state in which the decoration unit 750 is in a closed state and the opening / closing member 870 is in a closed state. FIG. 104B shows a state in which the decoration unit 750 is in an open state and the opening / closing member 870 is in an open state.

  As shown in FIG. 104A, when the decoration unit 750 is closed, the outer edge portion of the right lid portion 773 is brought into contact with the protrusion 871. When the decoration unit 750 is closed, the outer diameter L7 from the rotation shaft on the lower half surface of the right lid portion 773 is made smaller than the distance L8 from the shaft of the right rotation portion 890 to one end side of the sliding groove 892 (L7). <L8).

  Further, the difference in dimension between L7 and L8 is set to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the protrusion 871. Therefore, in a state where the outer edge portion of the right lid portion 773 is in contact with the protrusion 871, the protrusion 871 is displaced to one end side of the sliding groove 892. As a result, the opening / closing member 870 is closed. That is, when the decoration unit 750 is closed, the opening / closing member 870 can be prevented from being displaced to the open state.

  As shown in FIG. 104 (b), when the decoration unit 750 is opened, the concave portion 773b formed in the outer edge portion is displaced in accordance with the displacement of the right lid portion 773. In this case, the protrusion 871 is inserted inside the recess 773b. Thereby, the protrusion 871 can displace the sliding groove 892 to the other side. As a result, the opening / closing member 870 is opened by the biasing force of the biasing spring SP7 disposed between the shaft portion 872 and the first display portion 830.

  As described above, the opening / closing member 870 can be displaced to the opened state in accordance with the displacement of the lid member 770. Therefore, there is no need to provide a driving source for driving the opening / closing member 870 in the rotating body 800, so that the rotating body 800 can be made small.

  Further, the drive motor KM4 for displacing the opening / closing member 870 can also be used as a drive means for displacing the lid member 770. In this case, when the opening / closing member 870 and the lid member 770 are displaced by the driving force of separate driving means, the opening / closing member 870 and the lid member 770 may interfere with each other if a control failure occurs. And the lid member 770 can be mechanically coupled to synchronize their displacements, so that the opening / closing member 870 and the lid member 770 can be prevented from interfering with each other.

  As shown in FIG. 104 (b), when the opening / closing member 870 is opened, the leading end side of the rotation is disposed above the winning opening 761a of the box member 760. Thereby, a ball sent from a ball sending portion 711c of a ball receiving base 710, which will be described later, can be dropped onto the upper surface of the opening / closing member 870.

  In this case, the opening / closing member 870 is arranged such that the rotation tip side is above the shaft portion 872. Therefore, the sphere falling on the upper surface can be rolled to the inner side of the rotating body 800. The game ball that is rolled into the rotating body 800 is rolled onto the upper surface of the base plate 810 that is disposed inside the rotating body 800. Further, since the base plate 810 is inclined downward toward the left end 812 side, the ball rolled on the upper surface of the base plate 810 rolls toward the left end 812 and rotates from the inside thereof. It can be discharged out of the body 800. That is, the inside of the rotating body 800 can be used as a ball sending path.

  Further, as described above, the rotation body 800 is provided with the rotation regulating member 780 that regulates the rotation of the rotation body 800, so that the lid member 770 is displaced to the open position to expose the rotation body 800. When performing an effect, the effect of the effect can be enhanced by displacing the opening / closing member 870. On the other hand, the rotating body 800 may be rotated (spinned). Therefore, the configuration in which the lid member 770 displaced to the open position is formed so as to be able to regulate the displacement of the rotating body 800 is particularly effective, thereby allowing the player to visually recognize the rotating body 800 in an appropriate state. And can secure a production effect.

  Here, a gaming machine is known that includes a rotating member that is formed so as to be rotatable and whose outer surface around the rotation axis is disposed so as to be visible to a player. According to this gaming machine, the rotating member is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the player can visually recognize the display (symbol) on the outer peripheral surface while rotating the rotating member or stopping the rotating member. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, there is a problem in that the rotation member is insufficiently utilized only as a member for holding a display for the player to visually recognize on the outer surface. . In other words, the rotating member is required to hold a display that can be visually recognized by the player, and is therefore relatively large. Therefore, while the occupied space increases, portions other than the outer surface are not utilized.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the rotating body 800 (rotating member) allows the internal space formed therein to communicate with the outside, and the opening 831 and the communication hole 881b formed so that the game ball can pass therethrough. Since the (communication port) is provided, the game ball flowing down the game area can flow into or out of the internal space through the opening 831 and the communication hole 881b. Therefore, the internal space of the rotator 800, which is a dead space, can function as a storage space for game balls or a pitching passage, and the rotator 800 can be used accordingly.

  In addition, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since only the effect mode in which the player can visually recognize the display on the outer peripheral surface can be formed when the rotating member is stopped, the change in the effect mode is scarce and the effect of the effect is insufficient. There was a problem of being.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the opening / closing member 870 (displacement member) is disposed on the outer surface of the rotating body 800 (rotating member) so as to be displaceable, the outer surface of the rotating body 800 is rotated or stopped. In addition to the production mode in which the player visually recognizes the display, the production mode of displacing the opening / closing member 870 can be formed, and accordingly, the production mode can be changed to increase the production effect.

  When the lid member 770 (displacement member) is displaced to the closed position (first position), a part of the outer surface of the rotating body 800 (rotating member) is formed by the opening / closing member 870. The space required for the rotating body 800 to rotate can be reduced accordingly. On the other hand, when the opening / closing member 870 is displaced to the open position (second position), the opening / closing member 870 protrudes outward in the radial direction of the rotating body 800, so that the player can easily recognize the displacement of the opening / closing member 870. It is possible to enhance the production effect. In addition, the rotating body 800 is rotated in a state where the opening / closing member 870 is disposed at the closed position, and when the rotation is stopped, the opening / closing member 870 is disposed (displaced) at the open position, thereby forming the outer surface of the rotating body 800. The part (opening / closing member 870) that has been visually recognized can be formed so as to protrude outward in the radial direction of the rotating body 800, and the interest can be enhanced.

  In addition, an LED base 820 that emits light to the base plate 810 is disposed in the internal space of the rotating body 800. Therefore, when the opening / closing member 870 is set to the open position, the outer surface of the rotating body 800 is opened, the internal space is communicated with the outside, and the light emitted from the LED base 820 can be emitted to the outside. On the other hand, when the opening / closing member 870 is set to the closed position, the outer surface of the rotating body 800 is closed, and light emitted from the LED base 820 can be blocked from being emitted to the outside. As a result, the production effect can be enhanced.

  Here, in order to make the rotating body 800 rotatable and displace the opening / closing member 870 on the rotating body 800, each of the rotating body 800 and the opening / closing member 870 needs a driving means, and the product cost is reduced. Is bulky. In addition, when a driving unit for displacing the opening / closing member 870 is mounted on the rotating body 800, the weight of the rotating body 800 increases, so that it is difficult to smoothly start or stop the rotation of the rotating body 800.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the opening / closing member 870 is displaced in accordance with the displacement of the lid member 770, and the lid member 770 and the rotating body 800 are displaced by the same drive motor KM4. The KM 4 can also be used to rotate the rotating body 800 and to displace the opening / closing member 870. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced. In addition, since it is not necessary to mount driving means for displacing the opening / closing member on the rotating body 800, the weight of the rotating body 800 can be reduced, and the rotation of the rotating body 800 can be started or stopped smoothly.

  Further, since the opening 831 (first communication port) and the communication hole 881b (second communication port) are formed at different positions, the opening 831 is used as an inflow port for allowing game balls to flow into the internal space from the outside, and the communication hole 881b. Can be used as an outlet from which the game ball flows out from the internal space to the outside. That is, even if the rotating body 800 (rotating member) is not rotated (maintained in the stopped state), the rotating body 800 can be used as a game ball sending path.

  Further, the opening 831 is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 800, and the communication hole 881b is formed on the end surface in the axial direction of the rotating body 800, so that the game ball into the internal space of the rotating body 800 (rotating member) The inflow can be easily seen by the player, and the game ball can be discharged while the rotating body 800 is maintained in the stopped state.

  That is, the outer surface of the rotating body 800 is disposed so as to be visible from the player. Since the opening 831 (inlet) is formed on the outer surface, the player can easily recognize the inflow of the game ball. On the other hand, when the communication hole 881b is formed on the outer surface of the rotator 800, when the rotator 800 is disposed at a rotation position where the communication hole 881b is located above, the game ball cannot flow out from the internal space. Since the communication hole 881b (outlet) is formed on the end surface of the rotating body 800 in the rotation axis direction, it is possible to form a state in which a game ball can flow out of the internal space regardless of the rotational position of the rotating body 800.

  A displaceable opening / closing member 870 (displacement member) is disposed inside the opening 831 (first communication port). When the opening / closing member 870 is displaced to the closed position (first position), the opening 831 is opened. When the opening / closing member 870 is shielded and the opening / closing member 870 is displaced to the open position (second position), the opening 831 is opened, so that the inflow of the game ball through the opening 831 is switched between the shielding state and the allowable state. be able to.

  Furthermore, one side of the opening / closing member 870 (displacement member) is pivotally supported by the rotating body 800 (rotating member) so that the opening / closing member 870 is displaced to the open position (second position). Therefore, the game ball flowing down the game area can be received by the upper surface of the opening / closing member 870. Therefore, when the opening 831 is formed as an inflow port, the game ball flowing down the game area can be easily introduced into the internal space of the rotating body 800 using the opening / closing member 870.

  In addition, the game ball flowing down the game area can be easily stopped on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 870. Therefore, for example, when a game ball inflow port is formed in the rotator 800, the game ball flowing down the game area can be easily introduced into the inflow port using the opening / closing member 870. In this case, when the game ball flowing down the game area is received by the opening / closing member 870, the rotating body 800 may be rotated by the load acting at that time or the weight of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the displacement member. . Therefore, the configuration in which the lid member 770 displaced to the open position is formed so as to displace the rotation restricting member 780 and restrict the displacement of the rotating body 800 is effective. It is possible to easily maintain the state of overhanging at a predetermined position in the region.

  The shaft portion 872 of the opening / closing member 870 is disposed on the rotational direction side of the rotating body 800. In other words, the opening / closing member 870 (displacement member) is positioned on the front side in the rotational direction of the rotating body 800 (rotating member) with respect to the other side. Therefore, even when the opening / closing member 870 interferes with members disposed around the rotating member when the rotating body 800 is rotated, the force generated by the interference closes the opening / closing member 870 (displaces to the closed position). ) Direction. That is, when the rotating body 800 rotates, the opening / closing member 870 can be prevented from being displaced to a position where it protrudes by interfering with other members (second position). Moreover, it can suppress that the opening / closing member 870 engages with another member, and the rotation of the rotary body 800 is inhibited.

  Further, the base plate 810 (fixing member) disposed in the internal space of the rotating body 800 is not rotated with respect to the box member 760 (base member) in which the rotating body 800 is rotatably disposed. By rolling the game ball that has flowed into the internal space of the rotating body 800 from the opening 831 toward the communication hole 881b on the upper surface of the base plate 810, the game ball rampages in the internal space as the rotating body 800 rotates. Or it can suppress that rolling of a game ball is inhibited and it stays in internal space.

  As described above, since the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 870 is restricted by the displacement of the lid member 770, the opening / closing member 870 displaced to the open state (second position) interferes with members around the rotating body 800. Can be suppressed.

  As described above, in the rotating body 800, the communication hole 811b through which the wiring to the LED base 820 attached to the back side of the base plate 810 is inserted is opposite to the end surface of the rotating body 800 in which the communication hole 881b is formed. It is formed on the end face. Therefore, it is possible to easily secure a space that can be used for each of the communication hole 881b and the communication hole 811b.

  That is, when an electrical wiring is made to the LED base disposed inside the rotating body 800, the wiring is entangled by the rotation of the rotating body 800 when the wiring is inserted from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 800. It is preferable that the wiring is inserted from both ends of the rotating body 800. If the opening through which the game ball flows and the opening through which the game ball flows out are formed on both end surfaces in the axial direction of the rotator 800, it is difficult to secure a space through which the wiring is inserted.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the inflow port of the game ball of the rotator 800 can be the outer peripheral surface, one of the axial end surfaces of the rotator 800 is used as the outflow port of the game ball, and the other is inserted into the wiring. Since it can be used as a mouth, it is possible to easily secure a space for wiring.

  As a result, the game ball can be discharged smoothly through the communication hole 881b, and the wiring work to the opening of the electrical connection line (wiring to the LED board 820) can be easily performed. Further, since the communication hole 881b and the communication hole 811b can be separated as much as possible, it is possible to easily suppress the interference between the game ball that rolls the internal space of the rotating body 800 to the communication hole 881b and the electrical connection line.

  Next, the lower displacement unit 400 and the rotation unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 105 and 106. 105 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400 and the rotation unit 700, and FIG. 106 is a top view of the lower displacement unit 400 as viewed in the direction of arrow CVI in FIG. 105 and 106 show the lower displacement unit 400 in the retracted state.

  As shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the lower displacement unit 400 and the rotation unit 700 are arranged at positions adjacent to each other in the left-right direction. Further, in the lower displacement unit 400 and the rotation unit 700 in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 106), the emission opening 471 of the lower displacement member 440 is disposed at a substantially central position in the front-rear direction of the ball holder 710.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 107, a mode of sending a ball from the lower displacement unit 400 to the rotation unit 700 will be described. FIG. 107 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400 and the rotation unit 700. 107 shows a state where the lower displacement unit 400 is arranged in the first overhanging state.

  As shown in FIG. 107, the lower displacement unit 400 is in the first overhanging state, and the ball receiving portion 467 disposed inside the lower displacement member 440 receives the ball inside (the ball receiving operation was performed). When the launch operation is performed in the state), as described above, the sphere disposed inside the ball receiving portion 467 is discharged to the outside of the lower displacement member 440 from the emission opening 471 of the lower displacement member 440.

  The sphere discharged from the emission opening 471 of the lower displacement member 440 falls freely and falls to the sphere support 710 of the rotating unit 700 disposed on the right side in front view. As a result, a ball can be sent from the lower displacement unit 400 to the rotating body 800.

  Next, the configuration of the ball pedestal 710 will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 and 109. 108 (a) is a top view of the ball cradle 710, FIG. 108 (b) is a front view of the ball cradle 710, and FIG. 108 (c) is CVIIIc-CVIIIc of FIG. 108 (a). It is sectional drawing of the ball | bowl stand 710 in a line. FIG. 109 is an exploded perspective view of the ball holder 710.

  As shown in FIGS. 108 and 109, the ball receiving base 710 is connected to the tray receiving portion 711 formed in a box shape, the solenoid 712 disposed inside the tray receiving portion 711, and the solenoid 712. A displacement member 713 and a cover member 714 covering the solenoid 712 are mainly provided.

  The tray receiving portion 711 includes a bottom plate 711a that forms a bottom surface, a standing portion 711b that stands on the edge of the bottom plate 711a, a ball feeding portion 711c that protrudes from a part of the outer edge of the bottom plate 711a, and a ball feeding portion 711c. And a shaft hole 711d formed so as to penetrate the standing portion 711b standing on the edge portion.

  The bottom plate 711a is formed in a shape that bends downward toward the ball sending portion 711c described later. Thereby, the ball sent to the upper part of the baseplate 711a can be rolled to the ball sending part 711c side by the bending (inclination).

  In addition, the bottom plate 711a is formed of a flexible material, and the bottom surface of the bottom plate 711a (the bottom surface in FIG. 108 (c)) is subjected to embossing to form fine irregularities on the surface. Thereby, when the bottom plate 711a is molded, the ratio of thermal contraction can be made different between the top surface and the bottom surface, and the bottom plate 711a can be easily bent. In other words, the bottom surface to which the embossing process is applied is less likely to exert a force in a direction in which the bottom plate side is bent convexly when the bottom surface is thermally contracted by the unevenness. On the other hand, since the upper surface side is formed as a flat surface, a force pulling in the horizontal direction acts when the heat shrinks, and the end portion easily changes upward (the upper surface side easily forms a concave curve). Therefore, it is easy to bend in the direction in which the sphere easily rolls when thermally contracted. As a result, it is possible to suppress a defective product when the bottom plate 711a is molded.

  The standing portion 711b is a wall portion standing on the upper side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 108 (c)) from the outer edge portion of the ball sending portion 711c. The standing distance of the standing portion 711b is set larger than the outer diameter of the sphere. Thereby, it can suppress that the ball | bowl sent to the upper part of the baseplate 711a falls below from the edge. In the present embodiment, the standing dimension of the standing part 711b is set to approximately 1.5 times the diameter of the sphere.

  The standing portion 711b is formed by connecting a central standing portion 711b1 that divides the region of the bottom plate 711a into two, and the standing portion 711b. The central standing portion 711b1 divides the upper region of the bottom plate 711a into a region where a ball is sent and the other is a region where a solenoid 712, which will be described later, is disposed.

  The ball sending portion 711c is formed on the front side of the bottom plate 711a. Further, the position in the left-right direction (FIG. 108 (a) left-right direction) is arranged on the right side (right side in FIG. 108) of the substantially center position of the bottom plate 711a. Further, the ball feeding portion 711c is protruded from the bottom plate and thus curved downward. Thereby, the ball sent from the bottom plate 711a can be dropped downward via the ball sending portion 711c. Note that a winning hole 761a of the lid member 770 is disposed below the ball sending part 711c (see FIG. 106), and a ball falling from the ball sending part 711c can be sent into the winning hole 761a.

  A shaft portion 713a of a displacement member 713, which will be described later, is inserted into the shaft hole 711d. Thereby, the displacement member 713 can be rotationally displaced about the axis of the shaft hole 711d.

  The solenoid 712 can displace the shaft inserted into the solenoid 712 by applying power to the piston. A transmission member 712 a is attached to the shaft of the solenoid 712. The transmission member 712a is a member that transmits the driving force of the solenoid 712 to a displacement member 713 described later, and a communication hole 712a1 is formed through the tip.

  The displacement member 713 is formed in a C-shaped cross section, and is mainly provided with a projection 713b projecting outside the C-shape at one end and a shaft portion 713a projecting inside the C-shape at both ends.

  The protrusion 713b is a protrusion inserted into the communication hole 712a1 of the solenoid 712, and is formed in a columnar shape having an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the communication hole 712a1. Thereby, the displacement of the solenoid 712 is transmitted to the displacement member 713 via the transmission member 712a.

  The shaft portion 713a is a shaft that is inserted into the shaft hole 711d. By inserting the shaft portion 713a into the shaft hole 711d, the displacement member 713 can rotate around the shaft of the shaft portion 713a. That is, the displacement member 713 is driven by the displacement of the solenoid 712.

  The cover member 714 is formed in an outer shape larger than the outer shape of the solenoid 712, is disposed above the solenoid 712 disposed on the upper portion of the bottom plate 711a, and is fastened and fixed to the tray receiver 711. Thereby, the solenoid 712 can be fixed.

  Next, the sphere that falls on the sphere receiving base 710 will be described with reference to FIG. 110 (a) and 110 (b) are cross-sectional views of the ball pedestal 710. FIG. 110 (a) and 110 (b) correspond to the cross section of the ball holder 710 in FIG. 108 (c).

  As shown in FIG. 110, the ball sent from the lower displacement member 440 of the lower displacement unit 400 falls freely in the direction of gravity, and the rotating unit 700 side (right side of FIG. 110 (a)) by the firing operation of the ball receiver 467. ). That is, it is dropped in the lower right direction when viewed from the front with respect to the bottom plate 711a of the ball receiving base 710.

  In this case, as described above, the bottom plate 711a is formed to be bent downward toward the ball feeding portion 711c, and the ball feeding portion 711c is formed on the right side with respect to the bottom plate 711a, so that the upper surface of the bottom plate 711a on which the ball falls. Can be an inclined surface that is inclined downward toward the right side. Accordingly, the displacement direction of the sphere and the inclination direction of the bottom plate 711a on which the sphere falls can be made closer to parallel.

  Thereby, as shown in FIG.110 (b), it can suppress that the ball | bowl which fell to the baseplate 711a bounces upwards (FIG.110 (b) upward). Therefore, it is possible to suppress a ball sent from the lower displacement member 440 of the lower displacement unit 400 to the ball receiver 710 of the rotation unit 700 from dropping from the ball receiver 710.

  Furthermore, the sphere that has fallen on the bottom plate 711a can be rolled to the ball sending portion 711c side with the momentum of the drop. Therefore, the rolling time of the sphere up to the ball sending part 711c can be shortened. As a result, a ball sent from the lower displacement member 440 to the ball receiving base 710 can be smoothly sent.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 111, light emission of the ball receiving base 710 will be described. 111A and 111B are schematic cross-sectional views of the rotating unit 700 taken along the line CXI-CXI in FIG. 111A shows a state in which the decoration unit 750 is disposed in a closed state, and FIG. 111B illustrates a state in which the decoration unit 750 is disposed in an open state.

  As shown in FIG. 111 (a), light emission to the ball receiving base 710 in a state where the decoration unit 750 is disposed in a closed state is performed by an LED base 721 disposed on the back side of the back surface base 720. .

  More specifically, the light emitted from the LED 721a of the LED base 721 is reflected on the back side of the lid member 770, and is incident on the bottom plate 711a of the ball receiving base 710. Further, as described above, since the bottom surface of the bottom plate 711a is subjected to the texture processing, the incident light can be irregularly reflected by the texture irregularities. Thereby, the entire bottom surface of the ball pedestal 710 can be made to emit light.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 111 (b), in the state where the decoration unit 750 is arranged in the open state, the transparent portion 771a is formed on the lid member 770 as described above. The light is transmitted without being reflected by the lid member 770. Since the rotator 800 is formed inside the lid member 770, the rotator 800 can be reflected by the outer peripheral surface of the rotator 800 and incident on the ball receiving base 710.

  Further, in this case, light is emitted from the LED 821 of the LED base 820 arranged on the back side of the base plate 810 by rotating the third display unit 850 of the rotating body 800 to the ball receiving base 710 side (upper side in FIG. 111 (b)). The reflected light can be reflected from the inner wall of the rotator 800 and emitted from the third display unit 850.

  As described above, the inner wall of the third display unit 850 is textured, and a plurality of irregularities are formed on the surface. Therefore, the third display unit 850 can easily emit light to the outside of the rotator 800 than the other display units. Therefore, it is preferable to arrange the third display unit 850 on the ball receiving base 710 side.

  Next, a detailed configuration of the upper displacement unit 900 will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 to 118. First, a structure for displacing the upper displacement member 940 will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 to 114.

  FIG. 112 is a front view of the upper displacement unit 900. FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective front view of the upper displacement unit 900. FIG. 114 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper displacement unit 900. 112 to 114 show a state in which the upper displacement member 940 is disposed at the retracted position (position disposed at the uppermost position with respect to the base member 910).

  As shown in FIGS. 112 to 114, the upper displacement unit 900 is disposed on the base member 910 disposed on the bottom wall portion 301 (see FIG. 6) of the back case 300 and the base member 910. A transmission member 920, a rotation member 930 that is rotatably connected to the base member 910 and displaced in accordance with the displacement of the transmission member 920, and one end that is slidably connected to the base member 410 and a rotation member 930. And an upper displacement member 940 that is displaced by being transmitted with a driving force from the rotation member 930.

  The base member 910 is formed by combining two horizontally long plate members in the front view in the front-rear direction, and includes a front base 911 disposed on the front side and a back base 912 disposed on the back side. A transmission member 920 and a rotation member 930 are disposed between the front base 911 and the back base 912.

  The front base 911 includes three sliding grooves 911c, 911d, and 911e penetrating in the front-rear direction (the depth direction in FIG. 112), a shaft support pin 911b protruding to the back side at the circumferential center position, and one end side of the front base. A shaft portion 911f that projects to the front (left side in front view) and an opening 911a that penetrates in the front-rear direction on one end side are mainly provided.

  The opening 911a is an opening through which the shaft of the drive motor KM5 disposed on the front base 911 is inserted to the back side. Thereby, the shaft of the drive motor KM5 disposed on the front side of the front base 911 can be inserted into the back side of the front base 911.

  The shaft support pins 911g and 911b are inserted through shaft holes of a transmission gear 922 and a transmission gear 923, which will be described later, and can hold the transmission gear 922 and the transmission gear 923 rotatably. That is, the shaft support pins 911g and 911b are formed in a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameters of the shaft holes of the transmission gear 922 and the transmission gear 923.

  The sliding groove 911c is formed penetrating in an arc shape centering on the axis of the shaft support pin 911b. The sliding groove 911c is an opening through which a shaft support pin 923a of a transmission gear 923 described later is inserted, and the radius of the arc is substantially the same as the distance from the shaft hole of the transmission gear 923 described later to the shaft support pin 923a. Is set. Thereby, when the transmission gear 923 is rotated in a state where the shaft support pin 923a is inserted into the sliding groove 911c, it is possible to suppress the collision between the shaft support pin and the inner wall of the sliding groove 911c.

  The sliding grooves 911d and 911e are grooves into which shaft supporting pins 951 and 952 of the upper displacement member 940 described later are inserted, and the width dimension in the short direction is set larger than the outer diameter of the shaft supporting pins 951 and 952. Is done.

  The sliding groove 911e is formed linearly in the longitudinal direction of the front base 911 (front view left-right direction). On the other hand, the sliding groove 911d is formed in an arc shape centered on the lower side of the front base 911. That is, the sliding groove 911e and the sliding groove 911d are formed non-parallel. Therefore, at different positions in the left-right direction, the distance dimensions between the two facing facing grooves 911e, 911d in the vertical direction are different. As a result, when the shaft support pins 951 and 952 are slid inside the sliding grooves 911e and 911d, the upper displacement member 940 is slid while rotating due to the difference in the distance between the upper and lower facings. The

  The shaft portion 911f is formed to protrude in a columnar shape on the front side. The shaft portion 911f can be inserted into a through-hole 931 formed at one end of a rotating member 930 described later, and can hold the rotating member 930 in a rotatable state. That is, the shaft portion 911 f is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole 931 of the rotating member 930.

  The back base 912 is a plate member that is attached to the back side of the front base 911 at a predetermined interval. The back base 912 is formed from a metal material. Thereby, the whole rigidity of the base member 910 can be improved. As a result, it is possible to prevent the base member 910 from being twisted when the relatively heavy upper displacement member 940 is disposed on the base member 910 formed in a horizontally long rectangle.

  The transmission member 920 is disposed between the front base 911 and the rear base 912 facing each other. The transmission member 920 mainly includes a transmission gear 921 coupled to the shaft of the drive motor KM5, a transmission gear 922 meshed with the transmission gear 921, and a transmission gear 923 meshed with the transmission gear 922. Formed.

  As described above, the transmission gear 921 is coupled to the drive motor KM5 by inserting the shaft of the drive motor KM5 disposed on the front side of the front base 911 into the shaft hole. Thereby, the transmission gear 921 can be rotationally displaced by the driving force of the driving motor KM5.

  The transmission gear 922 is meshed with the transmission gear 921 and the transmission gear 923 as described above. Thereby, the driving force for rotation of the transmission gear 921 can be transmitted to the transmission gear 923.

  The transmission gear 923 is formed with a shaft support pin 923a protruding to the front side at the outer peripheral edge portion thereof. Therefore, when the transmission gear 923 is rotated, the shaft support pin 923a is rotationally displaced around the axis of the transmission gear 923.

  The rotating member 930 is mainly formed of a through-hole 931 that is formed in a long rod shape on one side and is formed in the end portion on one end side in the front-rear direction, and an opening 932 that extends in the longitudinal direction at a substantially central position in the longitudinal direction. Formed in preparation.

  As described above, the through-hole 931 is an opening into which the shaft portion 911f of the front base 911 is inserted. By inserting the shaft portion 911f, the rotating member 930 can be rotated with respect to the front base 911. Can be held. Further, an urging spring SP8 is disposed at the tip of the shaft portion 911f. Thereby, the rotating member 930 is urged in a direction in which the other end side is lifted upward with respect to the front base 911.

  The opening 932 is a groove into which the shaft support pin 923a of the transmission gear 923 is inserted, and is formed so that the shaft support pin 923a can slide therein. As described above, when the transmission gear 923 is rotationally displaced to displace the support pin 923a, the support pin 923a is displaced inside the opening 932. Therefore, since the rotating member 930 is disposed in a state where one end thereof is rotatably supported, the rotating member 930 is rotated around the one end by the displacement of the shaft supporting pin 923a.

  In addition, an annular member 933 formed in a plate shape with a predetermined thickness on the back side is disposed on the other end side of the rotating member 930 while being formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front.

  On the front side of the annular member 933, two sliding grooves 933a that are recessed at symmetrical positions along the outer peripheral edge thereof are formed. The annular member 933 is a portion connected to an upper displacement member 940 described later, and the shaft portion 953 of the upper displacement member 940 is inserted inside. Further, the annular member 933 and the upper displacement member 940 are rotatably connected, and the upper displacement member 940 can be displaced as the rotation member 930 is rotationally displaced.

  A protrusion 961 of the upper displacement member 940 is inserted inside the sliding groove 933a. When the upper displacement member 940 is rotationally displaced with respect to the rotating member, the protrusion 961 slides inside the sliding groove 933a. it can.

  Further, the arc axis of the sliding groove 933 a is arranged at a position different from the rotation axis of the upper displacement member 940 with respect to the rotation member 930. Thereby, when the upper displacement member 940 is rotationally displaced with respect to the rotation member 930, the first opening portion 960 can be displaced. A detailed description of the first opening portion 960 will be described later.

  In addition, a shaft portion cover 913 and a deformation restriction cover 914 formed from a plate-like body are disposed in front of one end side (rotation shaft side) of the rotation member 930. The shaft cover 913 is disposed in front of the rotating shaft portion of the rotating member 930, and the rotating member 930 is prevented from rattling in the front-rear direction. The deformation restricting cover 914 is disposed at a position separated from the rotation shaft by a predetermined distance, and the rotation member 930 can be prevented from being deformed in the front-rear direction by the weight of the upper displacement member 940 disposed on the other end side.

  The upper displacement member 940 includes a base body 950 connected to the front base 911 and the rotation member 930, two first opening portions 960 that are rotatably disposed on the back side of the base body 950, and the base body 950. It mainly includes two second opening portions 970 that are rotatably disposed on the front side, and a variable portion 980 that is disposed on one end side.

  The base body 950 mainly includes two shaft support pins 951 and 952 that are formed to protrude from the back surface on one end side, and a shaft portion 953 that is formed to protrude from the back surface on the other end side.

  The shaft support pins 951 and 952 are protrusions inserted into the sliding grooves 911e and 911d of the front base 911 as described above. Therefore, when the upper displacement member 940 is driven by the rotating member 930, the shaft support pins 951 and 952 slide along the sliding grooves 911e and 911d, so that the upper displacement member 940 is slid in the left-right direction. And the other end side can be rotationally displaced downward.

  As described above, the shaft portion 953 is a protrusion that is inserted into the annular member 933 and connected to the rotating member 930, and is formed in a columnar shape having an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the annular member 933. Thereby, the upper displacement member 940 can be rotatably connected to the rotating member 930. Therefore, when the rotating member 930 is rotationally displaced about one end by the driving force of the driving motor KM5, the driving force is transmitted to the upper displacement member 940 by the displacement of the annular member 933. As a result, the upper displacement member 940 can be displaced along the sliding grooves 911e and 911d.

  The first opening portion 960 is a plate member having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction, and two sheets are disposed on the back side of the base body 950. The first opening 960 is rotatably supported on the other end side of the base body 950. Further, the first opening portion 960 includes a protrusion 961 that protrudes toward the back side and is disposed inside the sliding groove 933 a of the annular member 933. Accordingly, when the upper displacement member 940 is rotationally displaced with respect to the rotation member 930 due to the displacement of the rotation member 930, the protrusion 961 can be slid inside the sliding groove 933a.

  In this case, as described above, the curved axis of the sliding groove 933a is arranged at a position different from the rotational axis of the upper displacement member 940 with respect to the rotating member 930, so that the projection 961 slides inside the sliding groove 933a. Along with this, the first opening 960 pivotally supported by the base body 950 can be rotationally displaced.

  The second opening portion 970 is a plate member having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction, and two pieces are disposed on the front side of the base body 950. The second opening portion 970 is rotatably supported on the other end side of the base body 950. Also. The second opening 970 is formed with an engagement protrusion (not shown) that engages when the first opening 960 is displaced by a predetermined amount. Thus, as described above, when the first opening portion 960 is rotationally displaced about the shaft support portion when the upper displacement member 940 is subjected to a predetermined rotational displacement, the first opening portion 960 engages with the second opening portion 970. Thus, the second opening portion 970 can be rotationally displaced.

  Next, the displacement of the upper displacement member 940 will be described with reference to FIGS. 115 to 117. FIG. 115 is a front view of the upper displacement unit 900 in a state where the upper displacement member 940 is disposed at the retracted position. FIG. 116 is a front view of the upper displacement unit 900 in a state where the upper displacement member 940 is disposed at the intermediate position. FIG. 117 is a front view of the upper displacement unit 900 in a state where the upper displacement member 940 is disposed at the extended position.

  The retracted position of the upper displacement member 940 is the position in which the shaft support pins 951 and 952 are disposed on the other end side of the sliding grooves 911d and 911e of the front base 911 (right side in front view of the front base 911). It is. The overhang positions are positions where the shaft support pins 951 and 952 are arranged on one end side of the sliding grooves 911d and 911e of the front base 911 (left side in front view of the front base 911). Further, the intermediate position is a position where the upper displacement member 940 is displaced to an intermediate position between the retracted position and the extended position.

  115 to 117, when the upper displacement member 940 is displaced with respect to the front base 911, the upper displacement member 940 changes its longitudinal direction from a substantially horizontal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 115) to a substantially vertical direction ( 117 is rotated and displaced in the vertical direction).

  Further, along with the rotational displacement, the position of one end side of the upper displacement member 940 is displaced from the position of the right side end portion of the front base 911 to the substantially center position of the front view. That is, the upper displacement member 940 is rotationally displaced while being slid when the rotating member 930 is rotated by the driving force of the driving motor KM5 as described above.

  In addition, the first opening 960 disposed in the upper displacement member 940 is rotationally displaced with respect to the base body 950 during the displacement from the intermediate position shown in FIG. 116 to the overhanging position shown in FIG. 117. Similarly, the second opening portion 970 that is displaced by engaging with the rotational displacement of the first opening portion 960 is also rotationally displaced with respect to the base body 950. Therefore, in the extended position, the longitudinal direction of the upper displacement member 940 is oriented in the vertical direction, and the first opening portion 960 and the second opening portion 970 are displaced.

  In the present embodiment, the upper displacement member 940 is formed in a shape simulating a human arm (including a hand). Accordingly, the first opening portion 960 and the second opening portion 970 are displaced from the first position to the third position, so that the player can visually recognize such a displacement that the human arm becomes thick. .

  Next, the variable unit 980 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 118 (a) is a front view of the variable portion 980, and FIG. 118 (b) is a rear view of the variable portion 980.

  As shown in FIGS. 118A and 118B, the variable portion 980 has a shape imitating a human hand. The variable portion 980 has a main body 981 that forms a rear portion of the hand, and a main body 981. It is mainly formed with finger portions 982 to 986 that are connected to form a finger portion of the hand.

  A drive motor (not shown) is arranged inside the main body 981, and a variable plate (not shown) arranged therein can be displaced in the front-rear direction (FIG. 118 (a) vertical direction). Is done.

  The finger part 982 is a part corresponding to the thumb, and the base side is connected to the variable plate of the main body part 981. Thereby, the finger | toe part 982 can be displaced because a variable plate is piston-moved.

  The finger portions 983 to 986 are formed mainly including a first link RB1 disposed on the base side and a second link RB2 disposed on the distal end side.

  The first link RB <b> 1 is connected to the second link RB <b> 2 in a rotatable state at the distal end side, and is connected to the variable plate of the main body portion 981 at the base side. Therefore, when the variable plate of the main body 981 is caused to perform a piston motion, the second link RB2 can be displaced via the first link RB1 and the first link RB1. Thereby, the finger parts 983-986 can be displaced. In the present embodiment, the player can visually recognize the operation of opening and closing the fingers of the hand by displacing the finger portions 982 to 986.

  The front base 411 includes two sliding grooves 411a and 411b penetrating in the front-rear direction (the depth direction in FIG. 43), two cylindrical shaft support pins 411c and 411d protruding to the back side, and a shaft support pin 411d. And a curved wall portion 411e projecting in an arc shape with the axis as the axis.

  The sliding grooves 411a and 411b are holes through which the two protrusions 472 and 473 protruding from the back side of the lower displacement member 440 are inserted. The sliding grooves 411a and 411b are formed to extend in the left-right direction. Therefore, the lower displacement member 440 can be slid in the left-right direction by displacing the protrusions 472, 473 inserted through the sliding grooves 411a, 411b along the sliding grooves 411a, 411b.

  The sliding grooves 411a and 411b are each curved in an arc shape, and upward (from the top in FIG. 43) from the left end (left side in FIG. 43) to the right end (right side in FIG. 43) of the front base 411. ) Is opened. Furthermore, the sliding grooves 411a and 411b are arranged at positions where the axes of the respective arcs are different, and the gap between the opposing portions in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 43) is narrowed from the left end to the right end.

  Since the distance between the protrusions 472 and 473 of the base member 470 of the lower displacement member 440 does not change, when the lower displacement member 440 is slid along the sliding groove, the lower displacement member 440 is rotated. Can be displaced. That is, by changing the distance between the two sliding grooves 411a and 411b, the lower displacement member 440 can be rotated as it slides without applying a rotational driving force to the lower displacement member 440.

  The shaft support pin 411c is a protrusion that is inserted into a shaft portion 422a of a cam member 422 of the transmission member 420 described later, and is formed in a columnar shape having an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft portion 422a. The pivot pin 411c is formed of a metal rod-like body and is fitted on the front base 411. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the shaft support pin 411c from being broken (damaged) when a force acts on the cam member 422 from the outer peripheral surface thereof in the axial direction.

  Next, the lower displacement member 2440 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 to 121. In the first embodiment, the case where the movable rack 464 and the rack 466 are displaced in the same direction by the driving force of the drive motor KM2 has been described. However, the lower displacement member 2440 in the second embodiment includes the movable rack 2464 and the rack 466. It is displaced in the opposite direction by the driving force of the driving motor KM2. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as the said 1st Embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, the overall configuration of the lower displacement member 2440 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 and 120. FIG. 119 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member 2440 in the second embodiment. 120 is a front view of the lower displacement member 2440. FIG. 120 shows a state in which the decorative member 450 and the front case 481 of the lower displacement member 2440 are viewed transparently.

  As shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, the lower displacement member 2440 in the second embodiment includes a base member 2470 connected to the front base 411, a case member 480 that covers the front and rear of the base member 2470, and a case member 480. A transmission mechanism 2460 that is displaceably disposed between the base member 2470 and a decorative member 450 formed so as to cover the front and rear of the case member 480 is mainly provided.

  The base member 2470 is a plate member that is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and includes protrusions 472 and 473 that protrude from the rear surface on one end side, a standing wall 471a that stands from the edge on the other end side to the front side, A protruding wall 477 protruding in a U-shape opposite in the vertical direction from the upper end of the central portion in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 120), shaft portions 474, 475 protruding from the front side, and the shaft portion 474 Shaft portions 2470a and 2470b projecting upward from 475 are mainly provided.

  The shaft portion 2470a is a shaft member on which a transmission gear 2468a described later is rotatably supported, and is formed smaller than the shaft hole of the transmission gear 2468a.

  The shaft portion 2470b is a shaft member on which a transmission gear 2468b, which will be described later, is rotatably supported, and is formed smaller than the shaft hole of the transmission gear 2468b. As will be described later, the transmission gear 2468a and the shaft portion 2470a are arranged in a state where gear tooth surfaces engraved on the outer peripheral surface thereof are engaged. That is, the distance between the shaft portion 2470a and the shaft portion 2470b in the front view is set to a distance corresponding to the radius of the transmission gear 2468a and the transmission gear 2468b.

  The transmission mechanism 2460 is disposed in front of the base member 470, and includes transmission gears 461, 462, and 463, a drive motor KM 2 having a shaft portion coupled to the transmission gear 461, and a tooth surface that meshes with the transmission gear 463. A movable rack 2464 slidably disposed in front of the base member 470, a transmission gear 2468a meshing with the movable rack 2464, a transmission gear 2468b meshing with the transmission gear 2468a, and A rack 46 that meshes with the transmission gear 2468b and a ball receiving portion 467 that is rotatably disposed at one end of the rack 466 are mainly formed.

  The movable rack 2464 is formed in a rectangular plate-like body that is rectangular when viewed from the front, and includes a rack gear 464a engraved on the lower end surface, a rack gear 2464g engraved on the upper end surface, and a collision portion 464f projecting at the lower end portion. It is mainly provided with.

  The rack gear 2464g is meshed with a transmission gear 2468a described later. Thus, when the drive is transmitted from the drive motor KM4 and the rack 466 is displaced, the transmission gear 2468a can be rotated in accordance with the displacement.

  The transmission gears 2468a and 2468b are pivotally supported on the shaft portions 2470a and 2470b of the base member 2470, respectively, in a state of being engaged with each other as described above. Thus, when the transmission gear 2468a is rotated, the transmission gear 2468b is rotated. Further, the transmission gear 2468b is meshed with the rack gear 466a of the rack 466, and when the transmission gear 2468b is rotated, the driving force is transmitted to the rack 466 and the rack 466 is displaced.

  That is, the rack 466 can be driven by the driving force of the driving motor KM4. Note that the transmission gears 2468a and 2468b are partially disposed in positions shifted in the front-rear direction, so that the transmission gear 2468a is prevented from colliding with the rack 466 and the transmission gear 2468b is prevented from colliding with the movable rack 2464.

  Next, the displacement of the lower displacement member 2440 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 121 is a front view of the lower displacement member 2440. In FIG. 121, the decorative member 450 and the front case 481 of the lower displacement member 2440 are shown in a transparent state, as in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 121, when electric power is applied to the drive motor KM2 and the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the firing position by the transmission mechanism 2460 described above, the movable rack 464 and the rack 466 are displaced in different directions. The

  More specifically, when the drive motor KM4 is rotated, the movable rack 464 is displaced to the other end side (the left side in FIG. 121) of the lower displacement member 440. Along with this displacement, the transmission gears 2468a and 2468b are rotated, and the rack 466 is displaced to one end side (right side in FIG. 3). Thereby, the ball receiver 467 can be displaced to the third position.

  Therefore, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the first position, a displacement component that is opposite to the displacement direction of the ball receiving portion 467 can be formed. The change in the position of the center of gravity of the displacement member 2440 can be reduced by the displacement of the movable rack 464. As a result, rattling of the lower displacement member 2440 due to the change in the center of gravity position can be suppressed.

  Next, the lower displacement member 3440 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 122 to 127. In the first embodiment, the case where the ball receiving portion 467 is slid by the rack and pinion mechanism has been described. However, in the lower displacement member 3440 in the third embodiment, the ball receiving portion 467 is slid by the link mechanism. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, the overall configuration of the lower displacement member 3440 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 122 to 125. FIG. 122A is a front view of the lower displacement member 3440 in the third embodiment, and FIG. 122B is a rear view of the lower displacement member 3440. 123 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member 3440, and FIG. 124 is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement member 3440. 125 (a) and 91 (b) are front views of the lower displacement member 3440. FIG.

  125A shows a state in which the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 3440 is seen transparently, and in FIG. 125B, the decorative member 450 and the front case 3481 of the lower displacement member 3440 are seen transparently. The state is shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 122 to 125, the lower displacement member 3440 in the third embodiment includes a base member 3470 connected to the front base 411, a case member 480 covering the front and rear of the base member 3470, the case member 480 and the base. A transmission mechanism 3460 disposed displaceably between the member 3470 and a decorative member 450 formed so as to cover the front and rear of the case member 480 are mainly provided.

  The base member 3470 is a plate member that is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and includes protrusions 472 and 473 that protrude from the back surface on one end side, a standing wall 471a that stands from the edge on the other end side to the front side, A sliding wall 3470c formed continuously from the base end side of the standing wall 471a and standing at the lower edge of the base member 3470, and an upper end of the central portion in the left-right direction (FIG. 122 (a) left-right direction) A projecting wall 477 that protrudes in a U-shape that is opposite in the vertical direction from the front side to the front side, and an opening 479 that is recessed while extending from one end side to the other end side in the central portion of the base member 470 in the vertical direction. It is formed.

  The sliding wall 3470c is a wall portion that comes into contact with the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 and regulates the position (mode) of the ball receiving portion 467. That is, it is formed to project to a position below the ball receiving portion 467. Thereby, the ball receiving portion 467 can be held with the opening of the U-shaped portion facing upward.

  In addition, the sliding wall 3470c is formed with a recess 3470c1 that is recessed below the end on the standing wall 471a side. The concave portion 3470c1 is a groove that receives the tip of the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 therein. Thereby, when the ball receiving portion 467 is slid to the standing portion side by the transmission mechanism 3460 described later, the ball receiving portion 467 can be received in the recess and the ball receiving portion 467 can be rotated. As a result, it is possible to cause the ball receiving portion 467 to perform a firing operation (an operation to discharge the sphere held inside the U shape to the outside of the lower displacement member 3440).

  The transmission mechanism 3460 includes a drive motor KM2 attached to a front case 3480, which will be described later, a first link member 3468 that is connected to a shaft of the drive motor KM2, and is rotatably disposed. A second link member 3469 connected in a rotatable state and a ball receiving portion 467 connected to one end side of the second link member 3469 are mainly provided.

  The first link member 3468 is formed of a rectangular horizontally long plate-like body, and has a shaft hole 3468b penetratingly formed at one end side, a connection hole 3468a connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM2, and a bulge to the other end side. It is mainly provided with a load portion 3468c to be formed.

  The shaft hole 3468b is a through hole into which a rotation shaft 3469a of a second link member 3469 described later is inserted, and is formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the rotation shaft 3469a.

  The connection hole 3468a is a hole that is fastened to the shaft of the drive motor KM2 as described above, and has an inner diameter that is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the shaft of the drive motor KM2. The shaft of the drive motor KM2 is fitted into the coupling hole 3468a and fastened, so that the first link member 3468 can be rotated by the drive force of the drive motor KM2.

  The load portion 3468c is formed to bulge to the other end side with respect to the connection hole 3468a. The load portion 346c is a member for applying a load for positioning the center of gravity of the first link member 3468 on the other end side from the connection hole 3468a, and is formed to bulge outward from the one end side.

  The second link member 3469 is formed in a rectangular horizontally long state and is disposed on the back side of the first link member 3468. The second link member 3469 is mainly formed with a rotating shaft 3469a that protrudes in a columnar shape from the other end side toward the front, and a through hole 3469b that is formed through the one end side in the front-rear direction.

  As described above, the rotation shaft 3469a is inserted into the shaft hole 3468b of the first link member 3468. Thereby, the 1st link member 3468 and the 2nd link member 3469 can be connected in the state which can be rotated.

  The through hole 3469 b is an opening for connecting the ball receiving portion 467 to the second link member 3469. Further, the through hole 3469b is formed smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 467b of the ball receiving portion 467. Therefore, the shaft hole 467b and the through hole 3469b of the ball receiving portion 467 are coaxially arranged, and a screw having a head larger than the width in the short direction of the opening 469 is opened from the back side of the base member 3470 and the shaft hole 467b. And the ball receiving portion 467 is connected to the second link member in a rotatable state.

  The case member 480 is a member that covers the front and back of the base member 470, and mainly includes a front case 3481 disposed on the front side of the base member 470 and a back case 482 disposed on the back side.

  The front case 3481 is formed in a rectangular horizontally long plate shape when viewed from the front, has an opening 3481d that passes through a position facing the drive motor KM2, a bottom wall portion 481b that protrudes from the lower end surface on the back side, and a lower edge portion. And a shaft hole 481c penetrating in the front-rear direction.

  The opening 3481d is a hole through which the shaft of the drive motor KM2 disposed on the front side of the front case 3481 is inserted on the back side, and has an outer diameter larger than the shaft of the drive motor KM2. Thereby, the driving force of the drive motor KM2 disposed on the front side of the front case 3481 can be transmitted to the first link member 3468 disposed on the back side.

  Next, the displacement of the lower displacement member 3440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 and 127. 126 (a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 at the first position, and FIG. 126 (b) is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 at the second position. FIG. 127A is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 at the third position, and FIG. 127B is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 at the second position.

  126A to 127B, the transition state of the lower displacement member 440 is illustrated in order. 126 (a) and 126 (b) or 127 (a) and 127 (b) illustrate a state in which the decorative member 450 and the front case 481 of the lower displacement member 3440 are viewed transparently.

  As shown in FIGS. 126 and 127, the lower displacement member 440 in the first position has the first link member 3468 and the second link member 3469 in the longitudinal direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 126 (a)) the longitudinal direction of the base member 3470. The first link member 3468 and the second link member 3469 are arranged so as to overlap in the front-rear direction while being substantially parallel to the direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 126 (a)).

  That is, the connecting portion between the first link member 3468 and the second link member 3469 is arranged on one end side (left side in FIG. 126 (a)) of the base member 3470. Thereby, the 2nd link member 3469 is arrange | positioned at the one end side. As a result, the ball receiver 467 is disposed at the first position.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 126 (b), when the drive motor KM2 is rotated from the state of the first position and the first link member 3468 is rotationally displaced, one end side of the first link member 3468 is the base member 3470. Is displaced with respect to. Thereby, the 2nd link member 3469 connected to the one end side of the 1st link member 3468 is displaced. In this case, one end side of the second link member 3469 is coupled to the ball receiving portion 467 and is slidable along the opening 479 of the base member 3470, so that one end side of the second link member 3469 is the base member 3470. It is pushed out to the other end side. As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 connected to the other end of the second link member 3469 can be displaced to the second position.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 127 (a), when the drive motor KM2 is further rotationally displaced from the second position, and the first link member 3468 is rotated approximately 180 degrees from the first position. The connecting portion between the first link member 3468 and the second link member 3469 is placed on the other end side of the base member 3470 with respect to the rotation axis. Accordingly, one end side of the second link member 3469 is further pushed out to the other end side of the base member 3470, and the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed at the third position.

  In this case, the tip of the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed inside the concave portion 3470c1, so that the ball receiving portion 467 is rotated by the urging spring SP2 and launched.

  Further, the load portion 3468 c of the first link member 3468 is displaced to one end side of the base member 3470. Thereby, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced with respect to the base member, it is possible to suppress the center of gravity of the lower displacement member 3440 from being changed. As a result, rattling of the lower displacement member 3440 can be suppressed.

  That is, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the first position, a displacement component that is opposite to the displacement direction of the ball receiving portion 467 can be formed. The change in the position of the center of gravity of the displacement member 3440 can be reduced by the displacement of the load portion 3468c. As a result, rattling of the lower displacement member 440 due to the change in the center of gravity position can be suppressed.

  In the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 127 (b), the ball receiving portion 467 can be retracted to the second position and the first position by continuing the rotation of the first link member 3468. Therefore, it is not necessary to switch the control of the drive motor KM2, and the displacement to the second position or the first position can be performed quickly.

  Accordingly, when the game ball is discharged from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467, the position of the center of gravity of the lower displacement member 440 changes, so that the lower displacement member 3440 is easily rattled. Thus, rattling of the lower displacement member 3440 can be suppressed by quickly bringing the center of gravity position closer to the rotation axis of the lower displacement member 440.

  Further, by immediately displacing the ball receiving portion 467, the wobbling of the lower displacement member 3440 due to the reaction of the discharging operation when the game ball is discharged from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467 can be suppressed.

  That is, when the game ball is discharged from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467, the load of the lower displacement member 440 is reduced by the amount of the discharged game ball, and the lower displacement member 3440 is likely to be displaced upward due to the reaction. By immediately displacing the ball receiving portion 467, a force that causes the base member 470 to be displaced downward by a reaction caused by the rotational displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 is applied, thereby canceling the reaction when the ball is discharged from the lower displacement member 3440. be able to.

  Next, the lower displacement unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 128 to 130. In the first embodiment, the case where the lower displacement member 440 arranged in the retracted state is formed so as to be able to perform the firing operation has been described. However, the lower displacement unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment includes the lower displacement member arranged in the retracted state. The firing operation of 440 is restricted. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, the overall configuration of the lower displacement unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 128 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment. In FIG. 128, the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are shown in a transparent state, and the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is shown by a chain line. FIG. 128 shows a state in which the lower displacement member 440 is in the retracted state and the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed at the first position.

  As shown in FIG. 128, the lower displacement unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment is an opening that is opened in the base member 470 of the lower displacement member 440 between the standing wall 471a and the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481. 4471b is formed.

  In the opening 4471b, a distal end portion 4411g1 of an engagement wall 4411g described later is inserted. That is, the opening 4471b is larger than the tip portion 4411g1.

  The front base 411 is formed with an engagement wall 4411g formed in a substantially L shape that is continuous with the bottom surface of the recovery port 411f.

  The engagement wall 4411g can restrict the rotation of the ball receiving portion 467 at the third position (perform a firing operation) by inserting the tip end portion 4411g1 bent substantially in an L shape into the opening 4471b. . That is, the tip position of the tip portion 4411g1 is set to be substantially the same as the height of the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b of the lower displacement member 440 positioned in the retracted state.

  Next, a state in which each member of the lower displacement unit 4400 is displaced will be described with reference to FIGS. 129 and 130. 129 and 130 are front views of the lower displacement unit 4400. FIG. 129 and 130 show the state in which the decorative member 450 and the front case 481 of the lower displacement member 440 are transparent as in FIG. 128, and the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is a chain line. Illustrated.

  FIG. 129 shows a state where the lower displacement member 440 is in the retracted state and the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed at the third position. FIG. 130 illustrates a state in which the lower displacement member 440 is in the first overhanging state and the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed at the first position.

  As shown in FIG. 129, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position, the tip of the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 comes into contact with the upper surface of the tip end portion 4411g1 of the engaging wall 4411g, thereby opening the recess 481b1 or the opening. Intrusion to 4471b is restricted. As a result, the rotation of the ball receiver 467 is restricted.

  Therefore, when the ball receiving unit 467 is caused to perform a payout operation in order to discharge the ball sent onto the trajectory region of the ball receiving unit 467 to the outside of the lower displacement member 440, the ball receiving unit 467 at the third position. Can be prevented from being discharged and the game ball held inside the ball receiving portion 467 being discharged.

  That is, as the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position, the posture of the ball receiving portion 467 is changed when the game balls exceeding the specified number (one ball) are discharged from the track area of the ball receiving portion 467. Can be regulated. Therefore, it is possible to easily discharge only the game balls exceeding the specified number from the track area.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 130, when the lower displacement member 440 is displaced to the position of the first overhanging state (the position that is not the retracted position), the lower displacement member 440 is displaced relative to the base member 470. Therefore, the opening 4471b of the lower displacement member 440 and the engagement wall 4411g are separated from each other. Therefore, in the first overhanging state, the ball receiving portion 467 can be displaced to the third position to perform the firing operation.

  That is, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position, when the game balls exceeding the specified number (one ball) are discharged from the track area of the ball receiving portion 467, the posture of the ball receiving portion 467 is changed. It is easy to maintain the state in which the ball receiving portion 467 holds the specified number of game balls by suppressing the change, while engaging when the lower displacement member 440 is displaced to the first and second extended positions. Since the wall 4411g is separated from the inner space of the opening 4471b, the leg 467a is engaged with the opening 4471b in accordance with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 to the third position, thereby changing the posture of the ball receiving portion 467. Thus, it is possible to easily discharge a prescribed number of game balls from the ball receiving portion 467.

  Next, a distribution unit 5500 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 to 135. In the first embodiment, the case where the distribution member 540 rotates to form the storage state and the restriction state has been described, but the distribution member 540 in the fifth embodiment slides to form the storage state and the restriction state. To do. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, the overall configuration of the distribution unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 to 134. FIG. 131 (a) is a top view of the distribution unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 131 (b) is a rear view of the distribution unit 5500. 132 is an exploded perspective front view of the distribution unit 5500, and FIG. 133 is an exploded perspective rear view of the distribution unit 5500. FIG. 134 is a cross-sectional view of distribution unit 5500 taken along the line CXXXIV-CXXXIV in FIG. 131 (a). In FIG. 134, the outer shape of the sorting member 540 is illustrated by a chain line.

  As shown in FIGS. 131 to 133, the distribution unit 5500 according to the fifth embodiment includes a base plate 5520 formed in a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and a base plate 5520 that is attached to the front side of the base plate 5520 and is opposed to the base plate 5520. A path forming member 510 that forms a plurality of flow paths through which balls can flow, a distribution member 5540 that is slidably attached to the back side of the base plate 5520, and a base plate that is attached to the end surface of the base plate 5520 The extended path member 530 that extends the flow path of the sphere formed between the 5520 and the path forming member 510 is mainly provided.

  The base plate 5520 includes two columnar shaft portions 5526 projecting to the back side, a first opening 5521 and a second opening 5522 penetratingly formed in a rectangular shape, and a U-shaped cross section where the upper end side opens to the side surface of the upper end. It is formed mainly including a rolling part 525 that is formed in a shape and extends in the left-right direction, and a locking part 524 that protrudes like a bowl on the back side.

  The shaft portion 5526 is formed so as to protrude two on the back side, and is inserted into two sliding grooves 5546 described later.

  The first opening 5521 and the second opening 5522 are openings through which a regulation plate 541 and a storage plate 5542 of a sorting member 5540 described later are inserted, and are openings having a width larger than the thicknesses of the regulation plate 5541 and the storage plate 5542. It is formed. Further, since the distribution member 5540 is slidably attached to the base plate 5520, the first opening 5521 and the second opening 5522 are larger in the sliding direction of the distribution member 5540 than the regulation plate 5541 and the storage plate 5542. An opening is formed.

  The distribution member 5540 is formed in a rectangular shape in front view, one of which is long, and has a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction. The distribution member 5540 includes a regulation plate 5541 and a storage plate 5542 that protrude in a plate shape on the front side, and a sliding groove 5546 formed in a long hole substantially in the same direction as the extending direction of the regulation plate 5541 and the storage plate 5542. And a locking portion 544 formed like a bowl on the back side.

  The restricting plate 5541 is disposed at a connecting portion between the first pitching path KR1 and the second pitching path KR2 through the first opening 5521, and the game balls flowing down the first pitching path KR1 are in the second pitching path KR2. This is a plate member that restricts inflow into the first opening 5521, and the distance protruding from the first opening 5521 is set to be larger than the radius of the game ball.

  Further, the restriction plate 5541 is formed in a straight line when viewed from the front, and the extending direction thereof is set to be substantially the same as the sliding direction of the distribution member 540. Thereby, when the distribution member 5540 is slid and displaced, the displacement region of the restriction plate 5541 can be minimized. As a result, the opening area of the first opening 5521 can be minimized, and the rigidity of the base plate 5520 can be ensured.

  The storage plate 5542 is a plate member that is disposed on the second pitching path KR2 through the second opening 5522, and that flows the game ball flowing down the second pitching path KR2 to the upstream side of the storage plate 5542, and the second The distance protruding from the opening 5522 is set to a distance larger than the radius of the game ball.

  Further, the storage plate 5542 is formed in a straight line when viewed from the front, and the extending direction thereof is set to be substantially the same as the sliding direction of the distribution member 540. Thereby, when the distribution member 5540 is slid and displaced, the displacement region of the storage plate 5542 can be minimized. As a result, the opening area of the second opening 5522 can be minimized, and the rigidity of the base plate 5520 can be ensured.

  The sliding groove 5546 is a long hole that is formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction. The sliding groove 5546 has the shaft portion 5526 of the base plate 5520 inserted therein. Therefore, the shaft portion 5526 is inserted into the sliding groove 5546 and a screw or the like is fastened to the tip of the shaft portion 5526 from the back side, so that the sorting member 5540 is held in a slidable displacement state with respect to the base plate 5520. be able to.

  The sliding groove 5546 is formed in two places, and the respective longitudinal directions are formed in parallel. Thereby, the distribution member 5540 can be slid and displaced while suppressing the rotational displacement of the distribution member 5540.

  Next, the displacement of the sorting member 5540 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 135 (a) and FIG. 135 (b) are partially enlarged views of the distribution unit 5500 in the range CXXXV in FIG. In FIG. 135 (a), a state where the distribution member 5540 is disposed at the storage position is illustrated, and in FIG. 135 (b), a state where the distribution member 5540 is disposed at the restriction position is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 135 (a), in a state where the distribution member 5540 is disposed at the restriction position, the storage plate 5542 is disposed in the third pitching path KR3 shape, and the restriction plate 5541 is disposed on the back side of the route forming member 510. It arrange | positions inside the recessed part 518 formed in a wall.

  In this case, the distance L9 between the tip of the storage plate 5542 that protrudes to the inside of the third pitching path KR3 and the inner wall of the third pitching path that faces the tip is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the balls sent from the upstream of the third pitching route KR3 (first pitching route KR1) are stopped upstream of the storage plate 5542.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 135 (b), in the state in which the sorting member 5540 is disposed at the restriction position, the restriction plate 5541 is disposed at the connection portion between the first pitching path KR1 and the third pitching path KR3. The restricting plate 5541 is disposed at the connecting portion between the first pitching path KR1 and the third pitching path KR3, and the storage plate 5542 is disposed inside the recess 519 formed on the wall on the back side of the path forming member 510. The

  In this case, the distance dimension L10 from the end of the restricting plate 5541 protruding to the inside of the first pitching path KR1 to the inner wall of the entrance of the third pitching path KR3 is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the ball flowing down the first pitching route KR1 collides with the regulation plate 5541 and is sent to the second pitching route KR2.

  That is, by switching the sorting member 5540 between the restriction position and the storage position, a ball that is sent on the first pitching path KR1 is sent to the third pitching path KR3 and stopped on the third pitching path KR3; It is possible to form a state where a sphere flowing down the first pitching route KR1 cannot flow into the third pitching route KR3 and is sent to the second pitching route KR2.

  Therefore, by sliding and displacing one sorting member 5540, the flow path of the sphere can be reliably switched to either one when the flow path is divided into two flow paths.

  Further, the restriction plate 5541 (distribution means) is formed so as to be capable of appearing and retracting with respect to the first pitching path KR1 (downflow path) or the third pitching path KR3 (first branch path), and the position of the appearing and sinking is It is an inner wall on the extension line in the downstream direction at the downstream end of the one-sending path KR1. Therefore, the restriction plate 5541 can be protruded at a position close to the game ball flowing down from the lower end side of the first pitching route KR1. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required from the start of projecting the restriction plate 5541 to the flow-down passage or the third pitching path KR3 (first branch passage) until the game balls can be distributed. As a result, it is possible to reliably switch the distribution destination by the restriction plate 5541.

  Further, the restricting plate 5541 (distribution means) is projected to the third pitching path KR3 (first branch path), thereby allowing the game balls flowing down the first pitching path KR1 (downflow path) to pass through the second pitching path ( Since the projecting direction of the restriction plate 5541 is set to the direction toward the upstream end of the second pitching path KR2, the game ball flowing down the first pitching path KR1 is projected. When it comes into contact with the regulation plate in the middle of the game, the game ball can be pushed into the second pitching path KR along with the protruding operation of the regulation plate. As a result, the distribution to the second pitching route KR2 can be performed more reliably.

  Next, a rotation unit 6700 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 136 to 140. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the load gear 731e is connected to drive the rotating body 800 and the operation of the rotating body 800 is restricted by inertial force. The gear 731e is removed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, the overall configuration of the rotation unit 6700 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 136 to 138. 136 is a front view of a rotating unit 6700 according to the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 137 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotating unit 6700. FIG. FIG. 138 is an exploded perspective rear view of the distribution unit 6500.

  As shown in FIGS. 136 to 138, the rotation unit 6700 includes a decoration unit 6750 including a rotating body 800 that rotates and displaces, a ball holder 710 that is disposed above the decoration unit 6750 in the gravity direction, and the ball holder. 710 and the rear base 720 disposed on the rear side of the decoration unit 6750, the left transmission member 730 disposed on the left side in front of the decoration unit 6750, and the crank cover 743 disposed on the right side in front of the decoration unit 6750. And are mainly provided.

  The decoration unit 6750 is mainly formed by including a box member 760 formed in a box shape whose upper side in the gravity direction is opened, and a rotating body 800 rotatably disposed inside the box member. That is, in the first embodiment, the decoration unit 750 is formed with the rotating body 800 disposed inside the box member 760 and the lid member 770, but in the sixth embodiment, the decoration unit 750 is formed with the lid member 770 removed. The

  The left transmission member 730 is attached to the drive motor KM4 disposed on the left side surface (left side in FIG. 136) of the decoration unit 750, the transmission member 6731 that transmits the drive force of the drive motor KM4, and the drive motor KM4. A motor base 732, a gear cover 733 that covers the transmission member 6731, and a ball path cover 734 that is attached to the gear cover 733 and formed with a predetermined gap between the gear cover 733 and the opposite side of the gear cover 733 are mainly used. Formed in preparation.

  The transmission member 6731 includes a transmission gear 731a attached to the shaft of the drive motor KM4, a transmission gear 6731b meshed with the transmission gear 731a, a transmission gear 731c meshed with the transmission gear 6731b, and the transmission gear 731c. And a transmission gear 731d disposed adjacent to each other and coaxially by a shaft 735.

  The transmission gear 6731b is a gear that transmits driving force to the transmission gear 731c. In the first embodiment, the one-way clutch OW1 is attached inside the transmission gear 731b. However, the one-way clutch OW1 is removed from the transmission gear 6731b in the sixth embodiment. Further, since the transmission gear 731c and the transmission gear 731d are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Therefore, when driving force in one direction is transmitted from the driving motor KM4, rotational driving force can be transmitted to the shaft 735, and when driving force in the other direction is transmitted from the driving motor KM4, the inner ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is transmitted. As a result, the outer ring slides (idles), and the transmission of the driving force to the shaft 735 is interrupted.

  Next, the rotation of the rotating body 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 and 140. FIGS. 139 (a) to 139 (c) are side views of the decoration unit 6750 in the direction of arrow CXXXIX in FIG. 138. FIGS. 140 (a) to 140 (c) are views in the direction of arrow CXXXIX in FIG. It is a side view of the decoration unit 6750 in FIG.

  139 and 140 show a state where the left side plate 765 of the box member 760 is viewed transparently. Further, in FIGS. 139 (a) to 139 (c), modes in which the center of gravity G of the rotator 800 is displaced in the second section DK2 are illustrated in order, and in FIGS. 140 (a) to 140 (c), the rotator is illustrated. A mode in which the center of gravity G of 800 displaces the first section DK1 is sequentially illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 139, the rotating body 800 is rotationally displaced clockwise (clockwise) when viewed from the left (viewed in FIG. 139) when a driving force in one direction is transmitted from the drive motor KM4.

  The rotating body 800 is formed asymmetrically around the rotation axis as described above, and the center of gravity G is arranged at a position different from the rotation axis. Therefore, the rotating body 800 is rotated from a state where the center of gravity G shown in FIG. 140 (a) is arranged above the rotating shaft, and the center of gravity G shown in FIG. 140 (b) is displaced to a position substantially horizontal to the rotating shaft. When starting, a force that rotates in the rotational direction is applied by the load.

  Therefore, the engagement of the roller interposed between the outer ring and the inner ring of the one-way clutch OW1 arranged in the transmission gear 731c is released, and the outer ring (rotating body 800 side) precedes the inner ring (drive motor side). And is in a state of being driven. That is, in the second section, the rotation speed of the rotating body 800 can be rotated faster than the rotation speed of the drive motor KM4.

  The rotating body 800 that rotates in the second section DK2 with the load is rotated by the load to a position where the center of gravity G shown in FIG. 139 (c) is located below the rotation axis.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 140, when the center of gravity G of the rotating body 800 is displaced in the first section DK1, the load of the rotating body 800 acts in the direction opposite to the rotating direction. Therefore, the rotator 800 is rotated according to the rotation speed of the drive motor KM4.

  Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, the displacement speed of the rotating body 800 in the second section DK2 can be made faster than the displacement speed of the rotating body 800 in the first section DK1. As a result, a change can be given to the displacement mode of the rotator 800 and the effect of following the displacement of the rotator 800 can be enhanced.

  Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 141 to 144. In the first embodiment described above, the case has been described in which the lid member 770 causes the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 to precede the inner ring by its own weight (that is, the displacement speed of the lid member 770 is increased). The displacement member 7710 in the embodiment uses the weight of the game ball to cause the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 to precede the inner ring (ie, increase the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710). In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  141 and 142 are schematic side views of the displacement unit 7700 in the seventh embodiment. 141 schematically illustrates a state in which the displacement member 7710 is disposed at the raised position, and FIG. 142 schematically illustrates a state in which the displacement member 7710 is disposed at the lowered position.

  As shown in FIGS. 141 and 142, the displacement unit 7700 transmits a displacement member 7710 formed so as to be slidable and a rotational driving force of a driving means (not shown, for example, an electric motor) to the displacement member 7710. And a load gear 7730 that is rotated in accordance with the sliding displacement of the displacement member 7710.

  The displacement member 7710 is a member that is supported so as to be linearly displaced along a virtual line L1 by a support mechanism (not shown). A driven pin 7711 that protrudes from a side surface of the displacement member 7710 and a lower surface of the displacement member 7710. A rack gear 7712 engraved along the imaginary line L1 and a ball receiving member 7713 rotatably supported at the tip of the displacement member 7710 are mainly provided.

  The imaginary line L1 is set as a straight line that inclines downward from the ascending position shown in FIG. 141 toward the descending position shown in FIG. That is, in the raised position, the displacement member 7710 is positioned above the gravity direction than the lowered position.

  The driven pin 7711 is a member that is slidably inserted into the driving groove 7723b in the arm member 7723 of the transmission member 7720, and is formed as a cylindrical body having an outer shape slightly smaller than the groove width of the driving groove 7723b. A load gear 7730 is engaged with the rack gear 7712, and the load gear 7730 is rotated in accordance with the slide displacement of the displacement member 7710.

  The ball receiving member 7713 is a member for holding the game ball on the upper surface of the displacement member 7710, and is rotated about the rotation shaft 7713a, so that the standing state shown in FIG. 141 and the tilted state shown in FIG. 142 are obtained. It can be formed. In the standing state, one end side protrudes from the upper surface of the displacement member 7710, so that the game ball can be held (see FIG. 143). On the other hand, in the tilted state, one end side is positioned below the upper surface of the displacement member 7710, so that the game ball can be discharged from the upper surface of the displacement member 7710 (see FIG. 144).

  The ball receiving member 7713 is maintained in an upright state by an urging force acting from an urging spring (not shown) (for example, a torsion spring). An engagement pin 7740 is fixed on the track of the displacement member 7710 (ball receiving member 7713). When the displacement member 7710 is slid to the lowered position, the engagement pin is connected to the other end of the ball receiving member 7713. When 7740 is engaged, the ball receiving member 7713 is rotated to be in a tilted state. On the other hand, when the displacement member 7710 is slid to the raised position, the ball receiving member 7713 is rotated by the elastic recovery force of the urging spring and returned to the tilted state.

  The transmission member 7720 is provided with a disk-like rotation member 7721 that is rotationally driven by the above-described drive means (not shown), and protrudes from the end surface in the axial direction of the rotation member 7721 and is eccentric from the rotation center of the rotation member 7721. It mainly includes a columnar drive pin 7722 and an arm member 7723 in which a driven groove 7723a into which the drive pin 7722 is slidably inserted on one end side is formed.

  A one-way clutch OW1 is interposed between the rotating member 7721 and the driving means. More specifically, in the one-way clutch OW1, when the inner ring is connected to the driving means, the outer ring is connected to the rotation member 7721, and the inner ring is rotationally driven in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIG. 141) by the driving means, When the rotational force is transmitted to the outer ring (that is, the rotating member 7721 is rotated in the direction of arrow A), the inner ring is rotationally driven in the direction opposite to the direction of arrow A (counterclockwise in FIG. 141) by the driving means. The power transmission to the outer ring (rotating member 7721) is cut off.

  In the arm member 7723, a driving groove 7723b into which the driven pin 7711 of the displacement member 7710 is slidably inserted is formed on the other end side opposite to the one end side where the driven groove 7723a is opened. In addition, between the driven groove 7723a and the driving groove 7723b (intermediate portion) is rotatably supported by the rotation shaft 7723c.

  Note that the drive pin 7722 is formed as a cylindrical body having an outer shape slightly smaller than the groove width of the driven groove 7723a. The driven grooves 7723a and the driving grooves 7723b are formed as linear grooves along the longitudinal direction of the arm member 7723.

  According to the displacement unit 7700 formed as described above, when the rotation member 7721 is rotated in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIG. 141) from the state where the displacement member 7710 is disposed at the raised position illustrated in FIG. The drive pin 7722 acts on the inner wall surface of the driven groove 7723a, and the arm member 7723 is rotated clockwise in FIG. 141 about the rotation shaft 7723c. As the arm member 7723 rotates clockwise, the inner wall surface of the drive groove 7723b acts in a direction to push down the driven pin 7711, so that the displacement member 7710 is slid along the imaginary line L1. Is disposed at the lowered position shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, when the rotation member 7721 is further rotated in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIG. 141) from the state where the displacement member 7710 is disposed at the lowered position shown in FIG. 142, the drive pin 7722 is moved into the driven groove 7723a. Acting on the wall surface, the arm member 7723 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 141 about the rotation shaft 7723c. As the arm member 7723 rotates counterclockwise, the inner wall surface of the drive groove 7723b acts in a direction to push up the driven pin 7711, so that the displacement member 7710 is slid along the imaginary line L1. 141 is located at the raised position.

  Here, like the load gear 731e in the first embodiment, the load gear 7730 is formed so as to generate a predetermined amount of resistance when rotating. As a result, the weight (self-weight) of the displacement member 7710 acts on the arm member 7723, and the rotating member 7721 is rotated in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIG. 141), so that the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is relative to the inner ring. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the preceding in one direction (the direction of arrow A). That is, in a state where the game ball is not held, it is possible to suppress an increase in the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 when moving from the raised position to the lowered position.

  That is, while the rotation member 7721 is rotated in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIGS. 141 and 142) by the rotation drive force of the drive means, the displacement is performed at a slide speed corresponding to the rotation drive speed of the rotation drive means. The member 7710 is reciprocated (slided) between the raised position and the lowered position.

  FIGS. 143 and 144 are schematic side views of the displacement unit 7700 when a game ball is held on the displacement member 7710. 143 schematically illustrates a state in which the displacement member 7710 is disposed at the raised position, and FIG. 144 illustrates a state in which the displacement member 7710 is disposed at the lowered position.

  As shown in FIGS. 143 and 144, the displacement member 7710 is formed on its upper surface so as to be able to hold a game ball. In other words, in this embodiment, the displacement unit 7700 is disposed in the game area where the game ball flows down, and the game ball that flows down is formed so that the displacement member 7710 can receive on the upper surface thereof. FIG. 143 illustrates a state in which four game balls indicated by a symbol T are held on the upper surface of the displacement member 7710.

  In this case, in a state where the displacement member 7710 holds the game ball, the weight of the displacement member 7710 as a whole is increased (heavy) by the weight of the game ball to exceed the resistance associated with the rotation of the load gear 7730. Can be made. That is, the weight of the entire displacement member 7710 (the weight including the game ball) is applied to the arm member 7723, and the rotating member 7721 is rotated in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIG. 143), whereby the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1. Can precede the inner ring in one direction (arrow A direction). As a result, the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 when moving from the raised position to the lowered position can be made faster than the displacement speed when the game ball is not held (see FIG. 141).

  Further, the weight of the entire displacement member 7710 can be varied according to the number of game balls held. Thereby, not only whether or not the game ball is held on the displacement member 7710, but also the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 can be varied (changed) depending on the number of game balls held. As a result, the variation of the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 can be increased, and the effect effect of the effect accompanying the displacement of the displacement member 7710 can be enhanced accordingly.

  As described above, the ball receiving member 7713 is disposed at the distal end (the end portion on the downward inclined side) of the displacement member 7710. Therefore, when the displacement member 7710 (the upper surface or the ball receiving member 7713) receives the game ball flowing down the game area, the force applied to the displacement member 7710 from the game ball slides toward the lowered position. It can act as a displacement force. That is, this force can be applied to the direction in which the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 precedes the inner ring in one direction (arrow A direction) via the arm member 7723 and the rotating member 7721.

  As a result, when the game ball flowing down is received by the displacement member 7710 (the upper surface or the ball receiving member 7713), the kinetic energy of the game ball is used to slide in the direction toward the lowered position of the displacement member 7710. The displacement speed of the displacement can be further increased.

  In this case, the flowing game balls have different flow directions and flow speeds. Therefore, the force (the magnitude of the kinetic energy) applied to the displacement member 7710 can be varied in accordance with the difference in the flow-down state (flow direction and flow speed) of the game ball to be received. As a result, the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 is changed (changed) not only depending on whether or not the game ball is held on the displacement member 7710 and the number of game balls held, but also on the flow-down state of the game ball. Can). As a result, the variation of the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 can be increased, and the effect effect of the effect accompanying the displacement of the displacement member 7710 can be enhanced accordingly.

  In the seventh embodiment, since the rotation direction of the rotation member 7721 is one direction, there is no need to switch the drive direction of the drive means. In other words, the displacement member 7710 can be reciprocally displaced by continuously rotating the rotating means in one direction. Therefore, the time for switching the driving direction of the driving means can be eliminated. As a result, the displacement member 7710 can be immediately displaced by the amount that does not require switching of the driving means.

  In this case, by immediately displacing the displacement member 7710, the ball receiving member 7713 is rotationally displaced, and due to a reaction when the game ball received by the displacement member 7710 (the upper surface or the ball receiving member 7713) is dropped. Shaking of the displacement member 7710 can be suppressed.

  That is, when a game ball is dropped from the displacement member 7710 (ball receiving member 7713), the load of the displacement member 7710 is reduced by the amount of the dropped game ball, and the displacement member 7710 is likely to be displaced upward by reaction. However, by displacing the displacement member 7710 immediately, the reaction caused by the displacement of the ball receiving member 7713 causes a force to displace the displacement member 7710 downward, thereby canceling the reaction when the sphere is dropped from the displacement member 7710. be able to.

  The game ball flowing down the game area is not limited to the game ball moving along the gravity direction on the front surface (front surface) of the game board 13, but also includes a game ball moving in a direction different from the gravity direction. As a game ball that moves in a direction different from the direction of gravity, for example, a game ball that moves in a direction different from the direction of gravity by colliding with a nail, a tulip, an accessory, etc. Thus, a game ball that moves in a direction different from the direction of gravity is exemplified.

  Here, in the present embodiment, by providing the load gear 7730, when the displacement member 7710 does not hold the game ball (see FIG. 141), the displacement member 7710 is slid and displaced toward the lowered position. The outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is configured not to precede the inner ring in one direction (the direction of arrow A) (that is, the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 does not increase).

  On the other hand, when the load gear 7730 is omitted or the resistance of the load gear 7730 is set to a small value and the displacement member 7710 is slid to the lowered position, the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is It may be configured to advance in one direction (the direction of arrow A) (that is, the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 increases). That is, only the weight (self-weight) of the displacement member 7710 acts on the arm member 7723, and the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 becomes the inner ring even when the rotating member 7721 is rotated in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIG. 141). Alternatively, it may be preceded.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 145 to 148, an upper plate 8017 in the eighth embodiment will be described. In the upper plate 8017 in the eighth embodiment, a rotation operation unit 8650 is disposed at a substantially central position in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, the overall configuration of the rotation operation unit 8650 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 145 to 147. FIG. 145 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 146 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotation operation unit 8650. FIG. 147 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 taken along the line CXLVII-CXLVII in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 145 to 147, the rotation operation unit 8650 is disposed in the internal space of the upper plate 8017 of the pachinko machine 10, and the outer peripheral surface of the rotation operation unit 8654 described later protrudes outward from the upper plate 8017. It is arranged in the state.

  The rotation operation unit 8650 includes a drive motor KM6, a transmission gear 8651 coupled to the shaft portion of the drive motor KM6, a transmission gear 8852 meshed with the outer peripheral surface of the transmission gear 8651, and a shaft of the transmission gear 8852. A shaft portion 8653 fitted in the hole, a one-way clutch OW1 in which an inner ring is fitted on the shaft portion 8653, and a rotation operation portion 8654 in which an outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is fitted are mainly formed. .

  Transmission gear 8651 is coupled to the shaft of drive motor KM6. Therefore, the transmission gear 8651 can be rotated by applying a rotational driving force to the drive motor KM6. As described above, the transmission gear 8651 is disposed in a state where the transmission gear 8852 is engaged. Therefore, when a rotational driving force is applied to the drive motor KM6, the transmission gear 8651 can be rotated via the transmission gear 8651.

  The shaft portion 8653 is a rod member formed in a columnar shape, and the axial length thereof is longer than the width dimension of the rotation operation portion 8654 in the left-right direction. As described above, one of the shaft portions 8653 is fitted in the shaft hole of the transmission gear 8852, and the other is inserted into the inner ring of the one-way clutch OW1. As a result, the driving force when the transmission gear 8852 is rotated can be transmitted to the one-way clutch OW1.

  As described above, the one-way clutch OW1 is formed by the inner ring, the outer ring, and the roller engaged between them. When the inner ring is rotated in one direction, the rotation of the inner ring can be transmitted to the outer ring and the inner ring is moved in the other direction. When rotated, the rotation of the inner ring can be made non-transmitted to the outer ring.

  The rotation operation unit 8654 is formed in an annular shape, and is disposed in a state in which a part of the outer peripheral surface protrudes from the upper plate 8017. Further, the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is fitted in the inner circle of the rotation operation unit 8654. That is, the inward tilt of the rotation operation unit 8654 is formed to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the one-way clutch OW1. Therefore, rotation is transmitted to the rotation operation unit 8654 by rotating the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1.

  As a result, when the drive motor KM6 is driven and rotated in one direction, the rotation is transmitted to the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 via the transmission gears 8651 and 8852 and the inner ring of the one-way clutch OW1, and the rotation operation unit 8654. Is rotated. On the other hand, when the drive motor KM6 is driven and rotated in the other direction, the inner ring and the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 are not transmitted and the transmission of the rotational drive to the rotation operation unit 8654 is blocked.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 148, a case where the player operates the rotation operation unit 8654 will be described. FIG. 148 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10. Note that the cross section of FIG. 148 corresponds to FIG.

  As described above, the rotation operation unit 8654 rotates the rotation operation unit 8654 by rotating the drive motor KM6, rotating the rotation operation unit 8654, and non-rotating the rotation of the drive motor KM6. A mode in which the displacement is stopped can be formed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 148, when the drive motor KM6 is rotated in one direction and the rotation operation unit 8654 is rotated in the A direction, the player operates the outer peripheral surface of the rotation operation unit 8654 to rotate the rotation operation unit. When a rotational force is generated in the same direction as the rotation A direction in 8654, the outer peripheral surface of the one-way clutch OW1 and the rotation operation unit 8654 are rotated in advance. That is, the rotation operation unit 8654 can be operated at a rotation speed faster than the rotation speed of the drive motor KM6 by the player's operation.

  Further, when the rotation operation unit 8654 is not rotated (the drive motor KM6 is not rotated), the player applies a driving force to the rotation operation unit 8654 in the rotation A direction so that the rotation operation unit 8654 is rotationally displaced. be able to.

  Therefore, in the eighth embodiment, the rotation operation unit 8654 not only forms a non-rotation or rotation state by driving the drive motor KM6, but also the rotation operation unit 8654 rotates from the stopped state by the player's operation. Further, it is possible to form a mode in which the rotation operation unit 8654 is rotated at a higher speed from the rotation state by the player's operation.

  As a result, since a plurality of modes for allowing the player to visually recognize the displacement mode of the rotation operation unit 8654 can be formed, the player can be provided with interest. In addition, by forming a plurality of rotation modes of the rotation operation unit 8654, a plurality of performance modes of the pachinko machine 10 can be formed.

  Note that a sensor device or the like that measures the number of rotations is disposed on the side surface of the rotation operation unit 8654, and an effect that is changed based on the number of rotations and the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 8654 can be performed.

  Next, the first link member 9431 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The plate-like protrusion 9431b of the first link member 9431 in the ninth embodiment includes an inclined surface 9431b1 formed by inclining the contact surface with the cam member 422. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 149 (a) is a perspective front view of the first link member 9431 in the ninth embodiment, and FIG. 149 (b) is a schematic sectional view of the lower displacement unit 400. Note that FIG. 149 (b) corresponds to the schematic cross-sectional view of FIG. 56 (a).

  The lower displacement unit 400 in the ninth embodiment includes a base member 410 disposed on the bottom wall portion 301 (see FIG. 6) of the back case 300, as in the lower displacement unit 400 in the first embodiment. A transmission member 420 disposed on the base member 410 and a lower displacement member 440 (see FIG. 45) that is displaced by transmission of a driving force from the transmission member 420 are provided. Further, the lower displacement unit 400 in the ninth embodiment includes a link member 9430 that is connected to the base member 410 and the lower displacement member 440 and is displaced in accordance with the driving of the transmission member 420, and the displacement of the link member 9430 causes the displacement. The lower displacement member 440 is displaced.

  As shown in FIG. 149, the first link member 9431 in the ninth embodiment is formed in a plate shape having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction while being bent in a generally U-shape when viewed from the front. The first link member 9431 protrudes through the through hole 431a penetrating in the front-rear direction on one end side (the arrow D direction side in FIG. 149 (a)) and the back side on the other end side (the arrow U direction side in FIG. 149 (a)). Columnar connecting projection 431c (see FIG. 46), a plate-like projection 9431b projecting to a position facing the curved wall portion 411e of the base member 410, and a columnar sliding projection 431d projecting to the front side of the bent portion. And prepare.

  The plate-shaped protrusion 9431b extends in a curved shape around the axis of the through hole 431a and protrudes toward the front side (front base 411 side (arrow F direction side)). Further, the projecting dimension of the plate-like protrusion 9431b is set to be larger than the thickness (the dimension in the direction of the arrow FB) of the cam member 422. Furthermore, the base member 410 (curved wall portion 411e) facing the protruding tip surface of the plate-like protrusion 9431b is disposed with a slight gap (distance X14 (see FIG. 149 (b))).

  The cam member 422 is disposed in a state in which a region between the front surface of the first link member 9431 excluding the plate-shaped protrusion 9431b and the protruding surface (back surface) of the curved wall portion 411e can be displaced. In addition, the size of the gap in two places including the gap between the cam member 422 and the first link member 9431 and the gap between the cam member 422 and the base member 410 is larger than the distance X14 described above. It is set large.

  As a result, the base member 410 (curved wall portion 411e) faces the protruding tip surface of the plate-like protrusion 9431b when the first link member 9431 is bent in the direction in which the distance X14 is reduced (arrow F direction). It can be made to contact. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the displacement of the cam member 422 from being sandwiched between the front surface of the first link member 9431 excluding the plate-like protrusion 9431b and the protruding surface (back surface) of the curved wall portion 411e, thereby restricting the displacement.

  Further, the plate-like protrusion 9431b includes an inclined surface 9431b1 that protrudes toward the front side toward the cam member 422 on the side surface in the circumferential direction on the cam member 422 side (the arrow L direction side in FIG. 149 (b)). As shown in FIG. 149 (b), the inclined surface 9431b1 is formed to be inclined by approximately 45 degrees toward the protruding side (arrow F direction side).

  As a result, when the lower displacement unit 400 is in the second displacement state and the end of the cam member 422 comes into contact with the plate-like protrusion 9431b, the cam member 422 is moved to the back surface of the first link member 9431 (on the arrow F direction side). Can be pressed (displaced) against the surface), and the projecting tip end surface (surface on the arrow F direction side) of the plate-like protrusion 9431b of the first link member 9431 can be pressed against the curved wall portion 411e. As a result, the cam member 422 and the first link member 9431 can be prevented from swinging in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), and the lower displacement member 440 can be easily maintained at the position of the second displacement state.

  In this case, it is preferable that a flat surface parallel to the inclined surface 9431b1 is formed at the end of the cam member 422 at a contact portion with the inclined surface 9431b1. Thereby, when the cam member 422 and the inclined surface 9431b1 abut, the cam member 422 can be easily displaced to the back side (arrow B direction side).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 150, a general winning a prize opening unit 10150 in the tenth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the general winning opening unit 150 has been described with respect to the case where the adhesive tape 154a is attached to the end of the decorative member 154. However, in the tenth embodiment, the adhesive tape 10154a is the end of the decorative member 10154. It is affixed to the inside separating a predetermined width from the part. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 150 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 in the tenth embodiment. 150 corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. Also, the general winning award slot unit 10150 in the tenth embodiment is disposed in the game area of the game board 13 (in front of the base plate 60), and flows down the gaming area, in the same way as the general winning award slot unit 150 in the first embodiment. The path of the game ball to be played can be changed. Further, the general winning a prize opening unit 10150 is an end on the lower side in the gravity direction (arrow D direction side) in the front view (viewed in the arrow B direction) with respect to the game area formed by being surrounded by the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77. It is arranged at a position along the part.

  Further, the general winning a prize opening unit 10150 includes a main body 151 formed in a crescent shape in a front view, and a first standing part 152 erected on the front side (arrow F direction side) from the end of the main body 151. (See FIG. 12) and a second standing portion 153 (FIG. 12 (FIG. 12)) extending from the end of the first standing portion 152 on the upper side in the gravity direction (arrow U direction side) toward the center of the game area. a) and a plurality (three in this embodiment) of general winning holes 63 (see FIG. 12A) formed on the front side of the main body 151.

  As shown in FIG. 150, the general winning a prize opening unit 10150 in the tenth embodiment includes a decoration member 10154 disposed on the back surface of the main body 10151. The decorative member 10154 is affixed to the inner side of the decorative member 10154 with an adhesive tape 10154a bonded to the main body portion 151 at a predetermined width. Accordingly, a predetermined gap (space) is formed at the end of the decorative member 10154 between the main body 151 and the decorative member 10154 by the thickness of the adhesive tape 10154a. As a result, when the player visually recognizes the general prize opening unit 10150 from a predetermined angle or more (for example, a viewpoint having the same height as the upper end of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) in the gravity direction) It is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the boundary of the decoration member 10154 with the decoration.

  More specifically, by forming an air layer between the main body 151 and the end of the decorative member 10154, the inside of the main body 151 is reflected to the player side from the end (inclined surface 151a) of the main body 151. Can be prevented from being affected by the decoration at the end of the decorative member 10154 (the wavelength of the light L is hardly changed). In addition, light that passes through the inside of the adhesive tape 10154a and is influenced by the decoration of the decoration member 10154 is repeatedly reflected inside the main body 151 to be emitted to the outside of the main body 151. The influence of the decoration of the decorative member 10154 when reflected toward the viewpoint can be reduced.

  Therefore, the change in the wavelength of the light L emitted to the player can be reduced, and when the player visually recognizes the general prize opening unit 10150 from a predetermined angle or more, the decoration of the decoration member 60c and the decoration member 10154 It is possible to make it difficult to recognize the boundary. As a result, when the player visually recognizes the decoration of the decoration member 60c and the decoration member 10154 from a normal angle (for example, a viewpoint having the same height as the intermediate position in the gravity direction of the game board 13), the decoration of the base plate The member 60c and the decoration of the decoration member 10154 can be easily seen by the player as one decoration, and at a predetermined angle (for example, a viewpoint having the same height as the upper end of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) in the gravity direction). When viewing from the side, it is difficult to see the decoration at the boundary, and it is difficult for the player to understand that the decoration is divided.

  Next, the lower displacement member 11440 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 151 to 153. In the first embodiment, the case where the decorative member 450 is irradiated with light by the control board 491 disposed on the back side of the lower displacement member 440 has been described. However, the lower displacement member 11440 of the eleventh embodiment is a control board. The player can recognize the position of the internal game ball by the light emitted from 491. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, the overall configuration of the lower displacement member 11440 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 151 and 152. FIG. 151 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member 11440 in the eleventh embodiment. 152A and 152B are front views of the lower displacement member 11440. FIG. In FIG. 152A, the outer shape of the light emitter 11491a disposed on the control board 491 is illustrated by a chain line, and in FIG. 152B, the decoration member 11450 is removed.

  As shown in FIGS. 152A and 152B, the lower displacement member 11440 in the eleventh embodiment includes a base member 470 connected to the front base 411 (see FIG. 45), and front and rear of the base member 470. A case member 480 that covers the case member, a transmission mechanism 11460 that is displaceably disposed between the case member 480 and the base member 470, and a decorative member that is formed so as to cover the front and rear (in the direction of the arrow FB) of the case member 480. 11450 and mainly.

  The decorative member 11450 is formed in an outer shape imitating a pattern or character, and a picture of the pattern or character is drawn on the surface. The decorative member 11450 includes a front side decorative portion 11451 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the front case 481, and a back side decorative portion disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the back case 482. 452 is mainly provided. In the present embodiment, a shark pattern (character) is drawn on the decorative member 11450.

  The front side decorative portion 11451 is formed in an outer shape larger than the outer shape of the front case 481 in a front view, and is attached to the front case 481. Thereby, the members (case member 480, base member 470, etc.) disposed on the back side of the front decoration portion 11451 can be made invisible to the player. Moreover, the front side decoration part 11451 is provided with the transmission part 11451b formed from a light transmissive material inside the front view.

  The transmissive portion 11451b is formed in the entire area facing a plurality of light emitters 11491a disposed on the control board 491 described later, and can guide light emitted from the plurality of light emitters 11491a to the player side. It is said. Further, the transmission part 11451b is formed such that the front side (arrow F direction side) is curved toward the back side (arrow B direction side) toward the outer end in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction). This facilitates diffusion when light incident from the back side of the transmission part 11451b passes through the inside of the transmission part 11451b and is emitted from the front side.

  The transmission mechanism 11460 is a member disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base member 470, the transmission gears 461, 462, and 463, the drive motor KM2 whose shaft portion is coupled to the transmission gear 461, A movable rack 464 having a tooth surface that meshes with the transmission gear 463 and arranged to be slidably displaceable on the front side of the base member 470, a transmission gear 465 rotatably arranged on the movable rack 464, and a base A rack gear 476 formed on the member 470 and having a tooth surface meshed with the transmission gear 465 and a tooth surface meshed with the transmission gear 465 and disposed on the front side of the movable rack 464 so as to be slidable. 11466 and a ball receiving portion 467 rotatably disposed on one end side of the rack 11466.

  The rack 11466 is formed of a rectangular horizontally long rod-like body when viewed from the front. The rack gear 466a is engraved on the upper end surface, and the other end side in the longitudinal direction (arrow L direction side) to the back side (arrow B direction side). A shaft portion 466b projecting in a cylindrical shape, two sliding plates 466c projecting to the front side (arrow F direction side), and recessed on the back surface from one end in the longitudinal direction (arrow R direction side) to the other end A recessed portion 466d (see FIG. 59), and a shielding plate 11466e protruding upward (in the direction of arrow U) from the front side of the rack gear 466a.

  The shielding plate 11466e is formed of a non-light-transmitting material and can block light emitted from the light emitter 11491a. In addition, the shielding plate 11466e has a protruding height (the height in the arrow U direction) higher than the light emitter 11491a disposed on the back side (a position on the arrow U direction side). Accordingly, the light irradiated from the light emitter 11491a can be blocked by displacing the shielding plate 11466e in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) in accordance with the displacement of the rack 11466.

  The control board 491 is disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the base member 470, and includes a plurality of light emitters 11491a that can irradiate light on the front side. The plurality of light emitters 11491a are juxtaposed in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) of the lower displacement member 11440, and are disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) via the base member 470. It is arranged above 467 (in the direction of arrow U). Thereby, it can suppress that the light radiate | emitted from the light emission part 11491a by the ball receiving part 467 is interrupted | blocked.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 153, a state where the game ball is sent to the inside of the ball receiving unit 467 will be described. FIG. 153 (a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 11440, and FIG. 153 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member 11440 taken along the line CLIIIb-CLIIIb of FIG. 153 (a). ) Is a schematic cross-sectional view of lower displacement member 11440 taken along line CLIIIc-CLIIIc in FIG. 153 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 153, when a game ball is received by the ball receiver 467, the received game ball is arranged at a position overlapping the front side (arrow F direction side) of the light emitter 11491a. Thereby, with the game ball received by the ball receiving part 467, the light irradiated to the player side from the light emitter 11491a can be blocked. As a result, the position of the game ball sent to the inside of the lower displacement member 11440 can be recognized by the player by the shadow formed by the light being blocked.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the control board 491 is provided on the back side of the decorative member 11450 and can emit light toward the displacement region of the ball receiver 467. The control board 491 is provided on the ball receiver 467. The light received from the control board 491 is blocked by the ball receiving portion 467 or the game ball received by the ball receiving portion 467, and the amount of light emitted from the decorative member 11450 is partially set. Therefore, the amount of light emitted from the decorative member 11450 located on the front side of the game ball received by the ball receiving portion 467 or the ball receiving portion 467 and the light emitted from the decorative member 11450 at other positions. By making the light quantity different from (a dark shadow is formed), the ball receiving part 467 or the game ball received by the ball receiving part 467 is positioned on the back side of the part with the different light quantity. It can be recognized to.

  More specifically, when the control board 491 is disposed on the back side of the ball receiver 467, the light emitted from the control board 491 is blocked by the ball receiver 467 or the game ball received by the ball receiver 467. Thus, the light amount of light emitted from the decorative member 11450 on the front side of the game ball received by the ball receiving unit 467 or the ball receiving unit 467 can be made darker than the other parts of the decorative member 11450. As a result, the player can recognize that the ball receiving portion 467 or the game ball received by the ball receiving portion 467 is located on the back side of the (dark) portion where the amount of light emitted from the decorative member 11450 is small.

  In addition, the ball receiving portion 467 is formed in a shape for receiving the lower hemisphere of the game ball, and the light emitter 11491a is disposed at a position higher than the center of the game ball received by the ball receiver 467. It is possible to make it difficult for the irradiated light to be applied to the ball receiver 467. Therefore, the outer shape of the ball receiving portion 467 that receives the game ball and the rack 11466 that slides and displaces the ball receiving portion 467 is shaded by the light emitted from the light emitter 11491a, and a shadow is formed on the transmitting portion 11451b. Can be suppressed. As a result, a shadow can be formed on the transmission part 11451b only with the game ball received by the ball receiver 467, so that the ball receiver 467 is displaced while the game ball is not received by the ball receiver 467. In this case, it is possible to suppress the player's line of sight from paying attention to the ball receiver 467.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 154 and 155, the ball receiver 12467 in the twelfth embodiment will be described. In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the light emitted from the light emitter 11491a is blocked by the game ball received by the ball receiver 467 has been described, but in the twelfth embodiment, the first ball disposed in the ball receiver 12467 is used. The light emitted from the light emitter 11491a is shielded by the three pieces 12467e. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 154, the configuration of the ball receiver 12467 in the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 154 (a) is an exploded perspective front view of the ball receiver 12467 in the twelfth embodiment, and FIG. 154 (b) is a front view of the ball receiver 12467. In FIG. 154 (a), a part of the ball receiving portion 12467 is illustrated by a chain line.

  Note that the lower displacement member 12440 in the twelfth embodiment is similar to the lower displacement member 11440 in the eleventh embodiment, and is a base member 470 connected to the front base 411 (see FIG. 45) and the front and rear of the base member 470. And a decorative member 11450 formed in a manner covering the front and rear (in the direction of arrow FB) of the case member 480. In addition, the lower displacement member 12440 in the twelfth embodiment includes a transmission mechanism 12460 that is displaceably disposed between the case member 480 and the base member 470 and has a ball receiving portion 12467c that can be deformed by receiving a game ball. .

  As shown in FIG. 154, the ball receiving portion 12467 in the twelfth embodiment includes a first piece 12467c formed by being bent in a substantially L shape when viewed from the front, and a second piece 12467d connected to the first piece 12467c. And a third piece 12467e connected to the second piece 12467d and disposed on the back side of the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d.

  The first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d are portions for holding a game ball sent to the inside of the lower displacement member 12440 from the opening 451a (see FIG. 57), and between the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d. When the game ball is sent to the second piece, the second piece 12467d is displaced in a direction away from the first piece 12467c, and a part of the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d are arranged in a U shape in a front view. The game ball can be held in the inner portion of the U-shape.

  The first piece 12467c includes a receiving piece 12467c4 that forms one extending side formed in an L shape in a front view, a leg portion 467a that forms the other extending side, a receiving piece 12467c4, and a leg portion 467a. An annular bent portion 12467c5 in which a shaft hole 467b penetrating in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) is formed in the connecting portion (bending portion), and a connecting portion 12467c1 protruding to the opposite side with the bent portion 12467c5 interposed therebetween. And comprising.

  The receiving piece 12467c4 is a part that forms a side surface on the other side (arrow R direction side) formed in a U shape in front view by the one piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d, and is formed in a crescent shape on the front side. It is formed in a curved shape that is concave in the direction away from the second piece 12467d.

  The connecting portion 12467c1 protrudes from two locations at a predetermined interval in the axial direction (arrow FB direction) of the bent portion 12467c5. The connecting portion 12467c1 is a portion that connects a second piece 12467d and a third piece 12467e, which will be described later, and has a connecting hole 12467c2 that extends along the axial direction of the shaft hole 467b and opens in a circular cross section. Prepare.

  The connection hole 12467c2 is an opening into which a shaft portion 12467e3 protruding from a third piece 12467e described later is inserted. In the connecting hole 12467c2, a shaft portion 12467e3 inserted through an insertion hole 12467d3 formed in a second piece 12467d described later is inserted from the back side (arrow B direction side). Further, the shaft portion 12467e3 is fastened by a screw inserted from the side opposite to the insertion side of the coupling hole 12467c2 (front side (arrow F direction side)). Accordingly, the second piece 12467d and the third piece 12467e can be fastened to the first piece 12467c.

  The first piece 12467c includes a recess 12467c3 that is recessed downward in the direction of gravity (arrow D direction side) on the projecting proximal end side of the connecting portion 12467c1. The concave bottom surface of the concave portion 12467c3 is formed at the lowest position (lowermost) among the bottom surfaces where the game balls are held by the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d. Thereby, the game balls held by the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d are rolled inside the recess 12467c3.

  The second piece 12467d is a part forming a side surface on the other side (arrow L direction side) formed in a U shape in front view by the receiving piece 12467c4 and the second piece 12467d of the first piece 12467c. And a curved shape that is concave in a direction away from the receiving piece 12467c4. Also, an insertion hole 12467d3 that opens circularly in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) at the connecting portion of the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d, and from the back side (arrow B direction side) to the front side (arrow F direction) And a recessed portion 12467d2 which is recessed in a circular cross section toward the side).

  In the second piece 12467d, the shaft portion 12467e3 of the third piece 12467e is inserted into the insertion hole 12467d3, and the connecting shaft 12467e4 of the third piece 12467e is inserted into the recessed portion 12467d2. Accordingly, when the second piece 12567d is displaced, the third piece 12467e is similarly displaced. Therefore, when the second piece 12567d is rotationally displaced with respect to the first piece 12467c, the third piece 12567e is similarly rotationally displaced with respect to the first piece 12467c.

  Further, the second piece 12467d is disposed between the connecting portions 12467c1 protruding at two locations of the first piece 12467c, and is connected to the first piece 12467c. Accordingly, when the second piece 12467d is twisted in the axial direction of the insertion hole 12467d3, it is possible to suppress the shaft part 12467e3 from being bent by bringing the second piece 12467d into contact with the opposite side surface of the coupling part 12467c1.

  The recessed portion 12467d2 is a hole into which a connecting shaft 12467e4 of a third piece 12467e to be described later is inserted, and is recessed in substantially the same shape as the connecting shaft 12467e4.

  The third piece 12467e includes a shielding plate 12467e1 formed in a substantially semicircular plate shape when viewed from the front, a shaft portion 12467e3 and a connecting shaft 12467e4 projecting from the shielding plate 12467e1 toward the front side (arrow F direction side). And comprising.

  The shielding plate 12467e1 is formed of a non-light-transmitting material, and can shield light emitted from the light emitter 11491a when disposed on the front side of the light emitter 11491a. The shielding of the light from the light emitter 11491a by the shielding plate 12467e1 will be described later.

  As described above, the shaft portion 12467e3 is a cylindrical body that is inserted into the connection hole 12467c2 of the first piece 12467c and the insertion hole 12467d3 of the second piece 12467d. In addition, a hole in which a screw inserted into the connection hole 12467c2 from the opposite side to the insertion side of the shaft portion 12467e3 can be screwed is formed on the projecting front end surface of the shaft portion 12467e3. Accordingly, the first piece 12467c, the second piece 12467d, and the third piece 12467e are connected by fastening a screw to the insertion tip surface of the shaft part 12467e3 in a state where the shaft part 12467e3 is inserted into the connection hole 12467c2 and the insertion hole 12467d3. And the third piece 12467e can be rotated with respect to the first piece 12467c.

  As described above, the connecting shaft 12467e4 is inserted into the recessed portion 12467d2 of the second piece 12467d. Accordingly, when the second piece 12467d is rotationally displaced about the shaft portion 12467e3 with respect to the first piece 12467c, the connecting shaft 12467e4 can be displaced along with the displacement of the second piece 12467d. Therefore, the third piece 12467e can be displaced in accordance with the displacement of the second piece 12467d.

  Next, the displacement of the ball receiver 12467 in the twelfth embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 155 (a) and 155 (b) are front views of the lower displacement member 12440, and FIG. 155 (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member 12440 along the line CLVc-CLVc in FIG. 155 (b). is there. In FIGS. 155 (a) and 155 (b), a part of the lower displacement member 12440 and the light emitter 11491a are shown by chain lines. FIG. 155 (a) shows the state before the game ball is received (held) by the ball receiving unit 12467, and FIG. 155 (b) shows the game ball received by the ball receiving unit 12467. The state of being held is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 155, in the state before the game ball is received between the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d, the second piece 12467d is the first piece 12467d by the load of the third piece 12467e. The third piece 12467e is positioned closer to the side of the piece 12467c, and is positioned below the light emitter 11491a disposed on the back side of the ball receiving portion 12467. Therefore, before the game ball is received by the ball receiver 12467, the light emitted from the light emitter 11491a can be emitted to the player side.

  On the other hand, when a game ball is received between the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d facing each other, the received game ball is formed into a receiving surface (a U-shape in front view) of the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d. The inner side surface) rolls and is guided to the recess 12467c3 positioned at the lowermost end of the receiving surface. Accordingly, the second piece 12467d can be rotated on the outer surface of the game ball in a direction away from the first piece 12467c with the shaft portion 12467e3 as the center. As a result, the third piece 12467e moving with the displacement of the second piece 12467d can be arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the light emitter 11491a arranged on the back side of the ball receiving portion 12467.

  Therefore, the light emitted from the light emitter 11491a can be shielded by the shielding plate 12467e1 of the third piece 12467e. As a result, the light emitted from the light emitter 11491a can be easily shielded only when the game ball is received by the ball receiver 12467. Therefore, the position of the game ball received by the lower displacement member 12440 can be determined by the position of the light emitter 11491a. The player can be recognized at the position of the shadow that blocks the light.

  The second piece 12467d has the connecting shaft 12467e4 inserted into the recessed portion 12467d2, and the load of the third piece 12467e is always applied. The center of gravity G (see FIG. 154 (b)) of the third piece 12467e is set on the opposite side of the connecting portion between the second piece 12567d and the third piece 12567e with the shaft portion 12467e3 interposed therebetween. Thereby, in the state where forces other than gravity are not acting on the second piece 12467d and the third piece 12467de, the second piece 12467d can be rotated to the first piece 12467c4 side by the load of the third piece 12467e. .

  Accordingly, when the game ball is discharged (taken out) from the ball receiving portion 12467, the second piece 12467d can be displaced to the ball receiving piece 12467c4 side of the first piece 12467c by the load of the third piece 12467e.

  Further, the ball receiving portion 12467 is rotated around the shaft hole 12467b by an operation of slidingly moving the inside of the lower displacement member 12440 in the same manner as the ball receiving portion 467 in the first embodiment, and is emitted from the lower displacement member 12440. The game ball received from the opening 471 (see FIG. 66) is discharged to the outside.

  Here, as a structure for discharging the game ball received by the ball receiver 12467, in a structure in which the ball receiver 12467 is rotated around the shaft hole 467b as the ball receiver 12467 slides, the ball receiver 12467 is used. , The rotational speed of the ball receiving portion 12467 around the shaft hole 467b is changed. Therefore, since the rotational speed depends only on the sliding speed of the ball receiver 12467, there is a problem that the discharge speed of the game ball from the ball receiver 12467 is not stable.

  On the other hand, in the twelfth embodiment, the direction in which the second piece 12467d rotates due to the load of the third piece 12467e and the direction in which the ball receiving portion 12467 rotates around the shaft hole 467b when the game ball is emitted. Since the directions are set in substantially the same direction, it is possible to apply a driving force when the second piece 12467d is displaced to the game ball emitted from the emission opening 471. Therefore, even if the force applied to the game ball from the ball receiving portion 12467 is reduced when the ball receiving portion 12467 is displaced and the game ball is discharged from the emission opening 471, the speed of the emitted game ball can be maintained. it can. As a result, the discharge speed of the game ball emitted from the ball receiving portion 12467 can be stabilized.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 156 to FIG. 158, the special winning device 13550 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case has been described in which the pitch of the game balls flowing into the first unit 551 of the special winning device 550 is switched by the first and second drive units 583 and 584 of the third path member 580. In the thirteenth embodiment, the flow path of the game balls flowing down inside the special prize-winning device 13550 is adjusted by changing the facing distance of the ball-feeding path of the special prize-winning device 13550. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 156 and FIG. 157, the overall configuration of the special winning device 13550 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 156 (a) is a front view of the special prize apparatus 13550 in the thirteenth embodiment, FIG. 156 (b) is a perspective front view of the special prize apparatus 13550, and FIG. 156 (c) is a diagram of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the special prize-winning apparatus 13550 in the CLVIc-CLVIc line of a). FIG. 157 is an exploded perspective front view of the special prize device 13550.

  As shown in FIGS. 156 and 157, the special prize-winning device 13550 according to the thirteenth embodiment includes a first path member 13560 disposed on the front side and a first path member 13560 disposed on the back side of the first path member 13560. A two-path member 13570.

  The first path member 13560 is a front plate 13564 formed in a plate shape along the front of the game area of the game board 13 and projects from the left and right ends of the front plate 13564 to the back side (base plate 60 side). The first wall portion 13565 is mainly provided.

  The front plate 13564 is a plate member that serves as a wall portion on the front side of the flow path of a game ball formed between facing a second route member 13570, which will be described later, and is formed of a light transmitting member. Thereby, the player can visually recognize the game ball flowing down inside the special prize-winning apparatus 13550 through the front plate 13564. Further, the front plate 13564 is a first path portion 13564b and a second projection section 13564c projecting toward the second path member 13570 side, and is positioned below the first projection section 13564b and the second projection section 13564c, and the second path member. 3rd convex part 13564d protrudingly provided by the 13570 side.

  The 1st convex part 13564b and the 2nd convex part 13564c are protrusions for guiding the game ball flowing down inside the special prize-winning device 13550, and are positive from the left-right direction outer side (the arrow LR direction outer side) of the front plate 13564. The face plate 13564 is formed to be inclined downward toward the center in the left-right direction.

  The third protrusion 13564d is located in the center of the front plate 13564 in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) and extends in the direction of gravity (arrow UD direction). In the thirteenth embodiment, in the game area of the game board 13, the pitches of the game balls flowing down from the special prize-winning device 13550 are different in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) of the special prize-winning device 13550 and to the left and right of the approximate center position. The game balls flowing down from the left side of the special winning device 13550 when viewed from the front are sent to the first winning opening 64 (see FIG. 2), and a specific game value is given to the player by the sent game balls (predetermined). Number of game balls are paid out). On the other hand, the game ball flowing down from the right side of the special winning device 13550 when viewed from the front is sent to the out port 71 of the game board 13 and collected by the pachinko machine 10.

  In the thirteenth embodiment, the first winning port 64 is arranged on the left side (arrow L direction side) of the special winning device 13550 (on the arrow D direction side), whereby the special winning device 13550 is viewed from the left in front view. The game ball that flows down can flow into the first winning port 64.

  The first wall portion 13565 is a portion that connects the base plate 60 of the game board 13 and the special prize-winning device 13550, and connecting plates 13565a that protrude outwardly from the left and right at the projecting tip portions are respectively formed on the left and right first wall portions 13565. Provide two places.

  The connection plate 13565a is formed with a through hole 13565a1 through which a screw for fastening the special prize-winning device 13550 to the base plate 60 of the game board 13 is inserted. The special prize-winning device 13550 can be fastened to the base plate 60 with screws inserted through the through holes 13565a1.

  The second path member 13570 includes a plate-like base plate 13571 facing the front plate 13564 of the first path member 13560 and the left and right ends (in the direction of the arrow LR) of the base plate 13571 from the first path member 13560. And a fourth wall portion 13573 protruding from the front plate 13564 side.

  The base plate 13571 is a member that forms a pitching path for a game ball in a gap between the first path member 13560 and the front plate 13564 facing the front plate 13564, and the outer shape in front view is smaller than the outer shape of the front plate 13564. Thereby, since the front side of the base plate 13571 can be covered with the front plate 13564, the base plate 13571 can be made difficult to visually recognize from the player side.

  In addition, the base plate 13571 is located below the fourth convex portion 13571b and the fifth convex portion 13571c projecting toward the first path member 13560, and below the fourth convex portion 13571b and the fifth convex portion 13571c. 6th convex part 13571d protrudingly provided in this.

  The 4th convex part 13571b and the 5th convex part 13571c are protrusions for guiding the game ball flowing down inside the special prize-winning device 13550, and from the left and right direction outer side (arrow (LR direction outer side)) of the base plate 13571. The base plate 13571 is formed to be inclined downward toward the center side.

  The sixth convex portion 13571d is formed at a position facing the above-described third convex portion 13564d, and is formed to have a length having a predetermined gap from the tip of the third convex portion 13564d. Note that the gap between the third convex portion 13564d and the sixth convex portion 13571d facing each other is set to a size smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

  In the fourth wall portion 13573, two fastening holes 13573a are formed in each of the left and right fourth wall portions 13573 for fastening the screw inserted through the first path member 13560. Thereby, the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 are fastened and fixed.

  A shim member SI that adjusts the gap between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 is disposed around the fastening hole 13573a of the fourth wall portion 13573.

  The shim member SI is formed of a thin plate-like transparent material, and is hardly visible from the player side. In the present embodiment, the shim member SI is disposed at an end portion on the left side when viewed from the front, and the interval between the front plate 13564 and the base plate 13571 on the left side when viewed from the front is increased.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 158, the game ball flowing down inside the special prize-winning apparatus 13550 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 158 (a) is a top view of the special winning device 13550, and FIG. 158 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the special winning device 13550 along the line CLVIIIb-CLVIIIb in FIG. 158 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 158, the special prize-winning device 13550 is provided with a shim member SI at an end portion on the left side when viewed from the front, and a distance L14 between the front plate 13564 and the base plate 13571 on the left side when viewed from the front. (see a)) is set larger than the distance L15 (see FIG. 158 (a)) between the front plate 13564 and the base plate 13571 on the right side when viewed from the front (L14> L15).

  The interval L14 is the interval between the left end (arrow L direction side) at the position where the front plate 13564 and the base plate 13571 are opposed to each other. The interval L15 is the interval between the right side (arrow R direction side) end portions at the position where the front plate 13564 and the base plate 13571 are opposed to each other. Further, the interval L15 is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the game ball flowing down from above the special prize device 13550 can flow into the special prize device 13550 from any position in the left-right direction ( L14> L15> the diameter of the game ball).

  Further, the special winning device 13550 is divided into a left and right downstream side by the third convex portion 13564d and the sixth convex portion 13571d. Accordingly, the game balls flowing down the main path SK1 upstream of the special prize device 13550 (see FIG. 158 (b)) are formed on the main path SK2 formed on the left side in the front view of the special prize device 13550 and on the right side in the front view. It flows into one of the formed sub-paths HK1. As described above, the game area on the downstream side of the special prize-winning device 13550 is formed with a different pitching path at a substantially central position in the left-right direction of the special prize-winning device 13550. Accordingly, a game ball sent from the main route SK2 to the game area is sent to a specific winning opening, and a game ball sent from the sub route HK1 to the game area is sent to the out port 71 of the game board 13.

  Furthermore, the protruding dimensions of the first convex portion 13564b and the second convex portion 13564c of the front plate 13564 and the fourth convex portion 13571b and the fifth convex portion 13571c of the base plate 13571 are set to be substantially the same. In other words, the first protrusion 13565b and the second protrusion 13564c that protrude from the front plate 13564 toward the back side have the same protrusion dimension. Further, the fourth projecting portion 13571b and the fifth projecting portion 13571c projecting from the base plate 13571 toward the front side are set to have the same projecting dimension. Furthermore, the protrusion dimensions of the first protrusion 13565b and the fourth protrusion 13571b are set to be the same.

  In addition, the first convex portion 13564b and the second convex portion 13564c and the fourth convex portion 13571b and the fifth convex portion 13571c are arranged at positions where the vertical heights are different. That is, the first convex portion 13565b and the second convex portion 13564c projecting from the front plate 13564 toward the back side are projected from the same height. Further, the fourth convex portion 13571b and the fifth convex portion 13571c projecting from the base plate 13571 toward the front side are projected from the same height. Further, the first convex portion 13565b and the fourth convex portion 13571b are disposed at different heights, and the fourth convex portion 13571b is disposed below the first convex portion 13565b. Further, the lower side of the first convex portion 13565b projecting from two locations in the gravity direction is disposed at an intermediate position of the fourth convex portion 13571b projecting from two locations in the gravity direction.

  Thereby, the game ball flowing down inside the special prize-winning device 13550 can be caused to flow down while colliding with the first convex portion 13564b and the fourth convex portion 13571b or the second convex portion 13564c and the fifth convex portion 13571c in order. As a result, the game ball can flow down along the extending direction of the first convex portion 13564b and the second convex portion 13564c, the fourth convex portion 13571b, and the fifth convex portion 13571c.

  The distance dimension L16 (see FIG. 158 (a)) between the front plate 13564 and the fourth convex portion 13571b or the base plate 13571 and the first convex portion 13564b on the left side of the special winning device 13550 when viewed from the front is determined by the shim member SI. A distance dimension L17 between the front plate 13564 and the fifth convex portion 13571c or the base plate 13571 and the second convex portion 13564c facing each other on the right side when viewed from the front of the special winning device 13550 is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. It is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

  The interval L16 is opposed to the front plate 13564 or the base plate 13571 at the end of the fourth convex portion 13571b and the first convex portion 13564b on the fifth convex portion 13571c and second convex portion 13564c side (arrow R direction side). It is the distance dimension between. The interval L17 is opposite to the front plate 13564 or the base plate 13571 at the end of the fifth convex portion 13571c and the second convex portion 13564c on the fourth convex portion 13571b and first convex portion 13564b side (arrow L direction side). It is the distance dimension between.

  Further, in the thirteenth embodiment, the first winning port 64 is disposed below the left side (arrow L direction side) of the special winning device 13550 (on the arrow D direction side). The game ball that flows down can flow into the first winning port 64.

  Therefore, the game balls that flow into the main path SK1 of the special prize device 13550 from the right side (the arrow R direction side) of the special prize device 13550 are easily brought into contact with the second convex portion 13564c and the fifth convex portion 13571c, The second convex portion 13564c and the fifth convex portion 13571c are made to flow along the extending direction of the fifth convex portion 13571c and are easily guided to the sub route HK1 side. On the other hand, the game ball that flows into the main path SK1 of the special prize apparatus 13550 from the left side of the special prize apparatus 13550 when viewed from the front (arrow L direction side) is less likely to collide with the first convex part 13564b and the fourth convex part 13571b. The ball is easily sent to the sub route HK1 as it is. As a result, it is possible to change the flow direction of the game ball that has flowed into the special winning device 13550.

  In the present embodiment, the first convex portion 13564b, the second convex portion 13564c, the fourth convex portion 13571b, and the fifth convex portion 13571c are replaced with the sixth convex portion 13571d and the third convex portion 13564d (the main route HK1 and the sub route). It is formed above (in the direction of arrow U) above the inflow of game balls with SK6. Therefore, most of the game balls flowing down the main route SK1 can flow down to the sub route HK1, and a relatively smaller number of game balls than the sub route HK1 can flow down to the main route SK6.

  In the thirteenth embodiment, the distance between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 is adjusted by the shim member SI and non-parallel between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570. The position of the game ball flowing down (the direction in which the game ball flows down) can be adjusted.

  Accordingly, the direction in which the game balls are likely to flow down by changing the angle of the nail struck against the front surface of the base plate 60 with respect to the front surface of the base plate 60 to adjust the direction in which the game balls are likely to flow down is more likely to flow down. Can be made difficult for the player to recognize. As a result, it is possible to suppress the player from recognizing that the game is disadvantageous before playing the game with the gaming machine, and the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

  In addition, the flow of the game ball flowing down inside the special prize-winning device 13550 can be changed only by changing the two opposite directions (front-rear direction (arrow FB direction)) of the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570. Since the direction can be changed, the adjustment can be simplified compared to a nail that can be adjusted in all directions with respect to the front surface of the game board 13 (base plate 60). As a result, it is possible to easily make the game ball flow down in the direction intended by the adjuster.

  Note that the direction intended by the adjuster is, for example, a distance between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 on the sub path HK1 side (arrow L direction side) on the main path SK6 side (arrow R direction side). A game ball that flows larger inside the special prize-winning device 13550 than the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 flows down to the sub-path HK1, or the main path SK6 side (arrow R direction side) ) Of the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 is made larger than the distance between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 on the sub-path HK1 side (arrow L direction side). The game ball flowing down inside the device 13550 flows down to the main path SK6.

  Furthermore, with respect to the first path member 13560 disposed on the front side, the second path member 13570 disposed on the back side is moved in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) by sandwiching the shim member SI. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the distance between the facing of the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570. That is, since the second path member 13570 disposed on the far side from the player is moved in the front-rear direction, the first path member 13560 is compared with the case where the first path member 13560 closer to the player is displaced. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the distance between the facing portions of the second path member 13570. As a result, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 159, an engagement member 14310 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the operation element 315 of the engaging member 310 is formed to protrude toward the bottom wall portion 301 side (the back side (arrow B direction side)) of the back case 300 has been described. The operation element 14315 according to the fourteenth embodiment is formed such that the protruding distal end surface is inclined toward the proximal end side. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 159 (a) is a rear view of the back case 300 in the fourteenth embodiment, and FIG. 159 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the back case 300 along the CLIXb-CLIXb line in FIG. 159 (a).

  Note that the back case 14300 in the fourteenth embodiment, like the back case 300 in the first embodiment, is a bottom wall portion 301 that is substantially rectangular in a front view, and the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 face the front. The outer wall 302 is erected, and is formed in a box shape in which one side (front side) is opened by each of the walls 301 and 302. The bottom wall 301 is formed with an opening 301a having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back of the bottom wall 301 is visually recognized through the opening 301a. It is possible.

  Further, the back case 14300 in the fourteenth embodiment includes an engagement member 14310 disposed on the front side (open side (arrow F direction side) formed in a box shape) of the bottom wall portion 301, and the back case 14300. A fixing member 320 that is disposed on the rear side (arrow B direction side) and fixes the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) is mainly provided.

  As shown in FIG. 159, the engaging member 14310 according to the fourteenth embodiment has a crank-shaped outer shape when viewed from the front, and a first piece 14311 and a second piece 312 that extend in directions parallel to each other. And a third piece 313 that connects ends of the first piece 14311 and the second piece 312 in a direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the first piece 14311 and the second piece 312.

  As for the 1st piece 14311, the edge part of the one side (arrow R direction side) on the opposite side to the other side to which the 3rd piece 313 is connected is the to-be-engaged part 332 of the fixing member 320 (refer Fig.41 (a)). Engaging portions 316 projecting outwardly in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction), which is a direction substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the first piece 14311, and two places thereof A recess 317 recessed in the extending direction (arrow LR direction) of the first piece 14311 from a substantially middle position of the engagement portion 316, and the bottom wall 301 side (back side (arrow B direction) of the rear case 300 And an operator 14315 protruding toward the side)).

  The operation element 14315 is formed at the end of the other side (arrow L direction side) of the first piece 14311, and its protruding dimension is set to a value larger than the plate thickness of the bottom wall 301 of the back case 300, and at least It is projected to the back side of the back case 14300 (bottom wall portion 301) by a size that can be grasped by the operator with a finger. As a result, the operation element 14315 can be protruded from the second opening 301d of the bottom wall 301, and the protrusion (the tip of the operation element 14315) can be grasped and operated.

  Further, the protruding front end surface of the operation element 14315 is formed as an inclined surface 14315a that approaches the base end side of the operation element 14315 as it goes toward the engaging portion 316 side (the other side of the first piece 14311 (arrow L direction side)). As a result, when the operator operates the operator 14315 in the direction in which the engagement between the engagement member 14310 and the fixing member 320 is released (arrow L direction side), the engagement between the engagement member 14310 and the fixing member 320 is achieved. The force acting in the direction of releasing can be reduced.

  That is, the force by which the operator operates the operator 14315 can be dispersed by the inclined surface 14315a. Accordingly, it is possible to make it difficult to release the engagement between the engagement member 14310 and the fixing member 320 by operating the operation element 14315 from the back side of the back case 300. As a result, an operator who tries to replace the board box 100 disposed on the fixing member 320 illegally operates the operation element 14315 from the back side of the back case 300 to remove the fixing member 320 from the back case 300. Can be suppressed.

  Further, the end portion of the inclined surface 14315a on the engaging portion 316 side is disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) from the back surface of the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 300. Thus, the operator's hand operating the operating element 14315 can be brought into contact with the inclined surface 14315a for the purpose of releasing the engagement between the engaging member 14310 and the fixing member 320. As a result, an operator who makes it difficult to operate the operation element 14315 and tries to replace the substrate box 100 disposed on the fixing member 320 illegally operates the operation element 14315 from the back side of the rear case 300, Removal of the fixing member 320 from the back case 300 can be suppressed.

  Next, an engagement member 15310 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 160 (a). In the first embodiment, the operation element 315 of the engagement member 310 has been described as being formed to protrude toward the bottom wall portion 301 side (back side (arrow B direction side)) of the back case 300. The operating element 15315 in the fifteenth embodiment is pivotally supported by the first piece 15311 of the engaging member 15310. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 160 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the back case 300 in the fifteenth embodiment. Note that the cross section of FIG. 160 (a) corresponds to the cross section of FIG. 159 (b).

  The back case 15300 in the fifteenth embodiment is similar to the back case 300 in the first embodiment. The bottom wall 301 has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall 301 are directed to the front. The outer wall 302 is erected, and is formed in a box shape in which one side (front side) is opened by each of the walls 301 and 302. The bottom wall 301 is formed with an opening 301a (see FIG. 5) having a rectangular front view at the center thereof, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 5) disposed on the back of the bottom wall 301 through the opening 301a. 2) is visible.

  The back case 15300 according to the fifteenth embodiment includes an engagement member 15310 disposed on the front side of the bottom wall portion 301 (open side formed in a box shape (arrow F direction side)), and the back case 15300. The fixing member 320 (refer FIG. 41) which is arrange | positioned at the back side (arrow B direction side) and fixes the board | substrate box 100 (main control apparatus 110) is mainly provided.

  As shown in FIG. 160 (a), the engaging member 15310 in the fifteenth embodiment has an outer shape in a front view formed in a crank shape, and a first piece 15311 and a first piece extending in directions parallel to each other. A second piece 312 (see FIG. 41) and a third piece 313 that connects the ends of the first piece 14311 and the second piece 312 in a direction perpendicular to the extending direction of the first piece 15311 and the second piece 312 ( 41).

  The first piece 15311 has an end portion on one side (arrow R direction side) opposite to the other side (arrow L direction side) to which the third piece 313 is coupled, and the engaged portion 332 (see FIG. 41 (a)) and an engaging portion that protrudes outward in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) that is a direction substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the first piece 15311. 316 (see FIG. 41), and a recess 317 (see FIG. 41) recessed in the extending direction (arrow LR direction) of the first piece 15311 from a substantially intermediate position between the two engaging portions 316, An operation element 15315 inserted through the second opening 301d of the back case 300 and a bearing part 15319 on which the operation element 15315 is pivotally supported are mainly provided.

  The bearing portion 15319 protrudes from the first piece 15311 on the other side (arrow L direction side) to which the third piece 313 of the first piece 15311 is connected. Further, the bearing portion 15319 is formed with a concave portion into which a cylindrical shaft member 15315c inserted through a manipulator 15315 described later in the direction of gravity (arrow UD direction) is inserted.

  The operation element 15315 is formed in a rod shape, and includes a through hole 15315b penetrating in the direction of gravity at the end on the first piece 15311 side, and a shaft member 15315c inserted into the through hole 15315b.

  Therefore, the operating element 15315 is held in a state in which it can be rotationally displaced with respect to the first piece 15311 when the shaft member 15315c inserted into the through hole 15315b is inserted into the recess of the bearing portion 15319. Further, the rotating shaft (shaft member 15315c) of the operation element 15315 is disposed on the front side of the first piece 15311. Thereby, the rightward (clockwise) rotation of the operation element 15315 in the state shown in FIG. 160 (a) as viewed from above can be regulated by being brought into contact with the other end of the first piece 15311. Leftward (counterclockwise) rotation can be allowed.

  Therefore, when the operator operates the operating element 15315 in the direction in which the engagement between the engaging member 15310 and the fixing member 320 is released (arrow L direction side), the operating element 15315 in the state shown in FIG. When rotating clockwise, the force acting in the direction of releasing the engagement between the engagement member 15310 and the fixing member 320 (arrow L direction) can be reduced. Accordingly, it is possible to make it difficult to release the engagement between the engagement member 15310 and the fixing member 320 by operating the operation element 15315 from the back side of the back case 300. As a result, a player who intends to illegally replace the board box 100 disposed on the fixing member 320 operates the operation element 15315 from the back side of the back case 300 to remove the fixing member 320 from the back case 300. Can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 160 (b), an engagement member 15310 in the sixteenth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the slide operation of the engaging member 310 is performed by the operating element 315 has been described. However, in the sixteenth embodiment, the end portion of the first piece 16311 of the engaging member 16310 is operated. Done in In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 160B is a schematic cross-sectional view of the back case 300 in the sixteenth embodiment. Note that the cross section of FIG. 160 (b) corresponds to the cross section of FIG. 160 (a). Further, the back case 16300 in the sixteenth embodiment is similar to the back case 300 in the first embodiment, and is directed from the bottom wall portion 301 having a substantially rectangular shape in front view and the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front. The outer wall 302 is erected, and is formed in a box shape in which one side (front side) is opened by each of the walls 301 and 302. The bottom wall 301 is formed with an opening 301a (see FIG. 5) having a rectangular front view at the center thereof, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 5) disposed on the back of the bottom wall 301 through the opening 301a. 2) is visible.

  Furthermore, the back case 16300 in the sixteenth embodiment includes an engagement member 16310 disposed on the front side of the bottom wall portion 301 (open side formed in a box shape (arrow F direction side)), and the back case 16300. The fixing member 320 (refer FIG. 41) which is arrange | positioned at the back side (arrow B direction side) and fixes the board | substrate box 100 (main control apparatus 110) is mainly provided.

  As shown in FIG. 160 (b), the engaging member 16310 in the sixteenth embodiment has a crank-like outer shape in front view, and a first piece 16311 and a first piece extending in directions parallel to each other. A second piece 312 (see FIG. 41) and a third piece 313 that connects the ends of the first piece 16311 and the second piece 312 in a direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the first piece 16311 and the second piece 312. 41). Further, the engaging member 16310 in the sixteenth embodiment can be slidably displaced by a finger inserted from the back side into the second opening 301d formed in the back case 300.

  The first piece 16311 has an end portion on one side (arrow R direction side) opposite to the other side (arrow L direction side) to which the third piece 313 is coupled, and the engaged portion 332 (see FIG. 41 (see FIG. 41) and engaging portions 316 projecting outward in both the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) which is a direction substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the first piece 311 (see FIG. 41). 41) and a recess 317 (see FIG. 41) that is recessed in the extending direction (arrow LR direction) of the first piece 16311 from a substantially intermediate position between the two engaging portions 316. Prepare.

  As shown in FIG. 160 (b), when the engaging portion 316 of the engaging member 16310 and the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 are engaged, the other side of the first piece 16311 (arrow L direction side). Is disposed on the outer side in the horizontal direction with respect to the opening of the second opening 301d. Therefore, when the operator operates the engagement member 16310 in the direction (relative to the arrow L direction) in which the engagement between the engagement member 16310 and the fixing member 320 is released, the operator inserts from the second opening 301d of the rear case 300. It is possible to make it difficult to displace the engagement member 16310 in the direction in which the engagement between the engagement member 16310 and the fixing member 320 is released. As a result, an operator who intends to replace the board box 100 disposed on the fixing member 320 operates the engaging member 16310 from the back side of the back case 300 to remove the fixing member 320 from the back case 300. This can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 161, a back case 17300 in the seventeenth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the operation element 315 of the engaging member 310 protrudes from the second opening 301d of the back case 300 has been described. However, in the seventeenth embodiment, the second opening 301d of the back case 17300 is projected. The operation element 315 protruding from the cover is covered with a part of the rear case at a predetermined position. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  161A is a rear view of the back case 17300 in the seventeenth embodiment, and FIG. 161B is a cross-sectional view of the back case 17300 taken along the line CLXIb-CLXIb in FIG. 161A.

  As shown in FIG. 161, the back case 17300 in the seventeenth embodiment includes a bottom wall portion 17301 that is substantially rectangular in front view, and an outer wall portion 302 that is erected from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 17301 toward the front. Are formed in a box shape in which one side (front side) is opened by each of the wall portions 17301 and 302. The bottom wall portion 17301 is formed with an opening 301a having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 17301 is visually recognized through the opening 301a. It is possible.

  Further, the back case 17300 includes a protruding portion 301b that protrudes from two locations on the front side of the bottom wall portion 17301, a first opening portion 301c that opens at a position facing the fixing member 320, and an engaging member 310. A second opening 301d that opens at an opposing position, and a covering portion 17301e that covers the back surface of the second opening 301d on the first opening 301c side (arrow R direction side).

  The covering portion 17301e is erected from the end of the second opening 301d on the first opening 301c side (arrow R direction side) toward the back side (arrow B direction side). Further, the covering portion 17301e includes a bent portion 17301e1 in which the standing tip portion is bent toward the inside of the opening of the second opening portion 301d in the rear view. Accordingly, the covering portion 17301e is formed in a box shape that opens on the first opening 301c side (arrow R direction side) and the opposite side (arrow L direction side).

  Further, the standing distance (the distance between the back surface of the bottom wall portion 17301c and the front surface of the bent portion 17301e1) of the covering portion 17301e is set to be larger than the protruding dimension of the operation element 315 protruding from the bottom wall portion 17301c. . Furthermore, in the covering portion 17301e, the dimension in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) of the bent portion 17301e1 in the rear view is set larger than the dimension in the left-right direction of the operation element 315 in the rear view.

  As a result, in the state where the engaging portion 316 of the engaging member 310 and the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 are engaged, as shown in FIG. 161 (b), the operating element 315 is located inside the covering member 17301e. Placed in. Therefore, when the operator operates the engaging member 310 in the direction (relative to the arrow L direction) to release the engagement between the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320, the operator 315 is grasped from the back side of the back case 17300. Can be difficult. Thereby, it can suppress that the engagement member 310 is displaced to the direction (arrow L direction side) which cancels | releases engagement with the engagement member 310 and the fixing member 320. FIG. As a result, an operator (player) who intends to illegally replace the board box 100 disposed on the fixing member 320 operates the engaging member 310 from the back side of the back case 17300 to move the fixing member 320 to the back surface. Removal from the case 17300 can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 162 to 164, a back case 18300 in the eighteenth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the engaging member 310 is slid in the linear direction (arrow LR direction) has been described. However, the engaging member 18310 in the eighteenth embodiment is relative to the rear case 18300. It is rotationally displaced. In addition, about the part same as said each embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, the configuration of the back case 18300 and the operation of the engaging member 18310 in the eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 162 and 163. 162 (a) and 163 (a) are front views of the back case 18300 in the eighteenth embodiment, and FIGS. 162 (b) and 163 (b) are back views of the back case 18300. FIG. 162 (a) and 162 (b) show a state where the engaging member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 are engaged, and FIGS. 163 (a) and 163 (b) show the engaging member 18310. A state in which the engagement between the fixing member 18320 and the fixing member 18320 is released is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, the back case 18300 in the eighteenth embodiment is erected from the bottom wall portion 18301 having a substantially rectangular shape in front view and the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 18301 toward the front. The outer wall portion 18302 is formed in a box shape in which one side (front side) is opened by each of the wall portions 18301 and 18302. The back case 18300 is provided on the front side of the bottom wall portion 18301 (the open side formed in a box shape (side in the direction of arrow F)) 18310 and on the back side of the back case 18300. And a fixing member 18320 for fixing the substrate box 100 (main control device 110).

  The bottom wall portion 18301 is formed with an opening 301a having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 18301 is visible through the opening 301a. It is said. The bottom wall portion 18301 has a first opening portion 18301c that opens to a position facing the fixing member 18320, and a projecting portion that is located below (in the direction of arrow D) the first opening portion 18301c and projects to the front side. 18301b.

  The first opening 18301c is an opening for inserting an engaged portion 18332 of a fixing member 18320, which will be described later, and is formed in a larger shape than the engaged portion 18332 in a front view. Thus, after the accessory device (rotary unit 700) is arranged inside the back case 18300, the engaging portion of the fixing member 18320 can be arranged on the front side of the back case 18300 from the back side of the back case 18300. it can.

  The projecting portion 18301b is a member that pivotally supports an engaging member 18310, which will be described later, and projects in a cylindrical shape from the front surface of the bottom wall portion 18301b. In addition, a hole for screwing a screw is recessed in the protruding front end surface of the protruding portion 18301b. Accordingly, the engagement member 18310 can be prevented from coming out of the projecting portion 18301b by screwing the screw into the projecting portion 18301b in a state where the engaging member 18310 is disposed on the rear case 18300.

  The outer wall portion 18302 includes an opening 18302a that opens in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) on the side surface on the right side (arrow R direction side) in a front view. The opening 18302a is formed on a rotation locus of an engagement member 18310 described later. Thus, after the engaging member 18310 is disposed inside the back case 18300, the engaging member 18310 can be protruded to the outside of the back case 18300 by rotating the engaging member 18310.

  The fixing member 18320 includes an interposed member 18330 that engages with an engaging member 18310 described later, and a shaft support member 340 that is fastened to the interposed member 18330.

  The interposing member 18330 is formed in a box shape whose front side is open, a locking portion 18331 protruding from the side surface on the other side (arrow L direction side), and a rear case from the side surface on one side (arrow R direction side). An engaged portion 18332 that protrudes toward the 300 side and is formed in a frame shape; an insertion hole 333 (see FIG. 39B) that opens in a circular shape on a box-shaped bottom surface (side surface on the arrow B direction side); And a protrusion 334 protruding from the main body.

  The locking portion 18331 has an opening for engaging the other side (arrow L direction side) of the fixing member 320 with the bottom wall portion 18301, and the opening has an L-shaped cross section from the periphery of the first opening 18301c described above. The projecting wall 18301c1 projecting from is inserted into the bottom wall portion 18301.

  Thus, when the interposed member 18330 (fixing member 18320) is disposed on the rear case 18300, the protruding wall 18301c1 is inserted into the locking portion 18331 of the interposed member 18330 so that the other side (arrow L). Direction side) can be locked to the back case 18300.

  The engaged portion 18332 is a portion that engages with the engaging member 18310, and the projecting dimension to the back case 18300 side (arrow F direction side) exceeds the engaging member 18310 disposed in the back case 18300. The distance dimension from the inner surface on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the enclosed space to the front surface of the bottom wall portion 18301 is larger than the distance from the front surface of the engagement member 18310 to the front surface of the bottom wall portion 18301. Is set. As a result, the space surrounded by the engaged portion 18332 and the engaging member 18310 are arranged at positions where they overlap in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction).

  The engaging member 18310 is formed in a substantially L shape when viewed from the front, and is bent from a second piece 18312 pivotally supported by the protruding portion 18301b of the back case 18300 and one end of the second piece 18312. The first piece 18311 is formed.

  The second piece 18312 includes a shaft support hole 18312a that is opened in a circular shape in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) at the end opposite to the side where the first piece 18311 is formed. The shaft support hole 18312a is a hole into which the protruding portion 18301b of the back case 18300 described above is inserted, and thus the engagement member 18310 can be disposed in a state of being supported on the inside of the back case 18300.

  The first piece 18311 extends in an arc shape around the axis of the above-described shaft support hole 18312a. As a result, the displacement region of the first piece 18311 can be minimized when the engaging member 18310 is rotated about the axis of the shaft support hole 18312a. In addition, the first piece 18311 has an engagement portion 18316 protruding at both ends in the radial direction from the shaft support hole 18312a and an engagement portion 316 at the two locations at the end opposite to the connection side with the second piece 18312. A recessed portion 18317 that is recessed in the extending direction of the first piece 18311 from the substantially intermediate position.

  The two engaging portions 18316 have a substantially triangular outer shape in front view. In addition, one engagement portion 18316 of the two engagement portions 18316 has a first piece 18311 as it goes from the end opposite to the connection portion with the second piece 18312 toward the connection portion side with the second piece 18312. The outer shape protrudes radially outward. The other engagement portion 18316 of the two engagement portions 18316 has a diameter of the first piece 18311 from the end opposite to the connection portion with the second piece 18312 toward the connection portion side with the second piece 18312. It is formed in an outer shape protruding inward in the direction.

  The recess 18317 is formed by cutting out in the thickness direction of the first piece 18311 and from the end of the first piece 18311 opposite to the connection side with the second piece 18312 in the extending direction of the first piece 18311. It is recessed along the connection side with the 2nd piece 18312 along. Therefore, the end of the first piece 18311 is divided into two. Thus, the end of the first piece 18311 opposite to the connection side with the second piece 18312 is more easily elastically deformed than the connection side with the second piece 18312, and the engagement member 18310 is connected to the fixing member 18320. It can be easily engaged.

  Next, the engagement between the engaging member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 will be described. As shown in FIG. 163, the interposition member 18330 and the shaft support member 340 are fastened together by a screw inserted from the interposition member 18330 side before engaging with the engagement member 18310.

  Further, as described above, the engaging member 18310 is disposed in a state of being pivotally supported by the projecting portion 18301b of the back case 18300, and the connecting portion between the first piece 18311 and the second piece 18312 is provided on the back case 18300. It is disposed in a state of protruding from the opening 18302a.

  Note that the engaging member 18310 pivotally supported by the back case 18300 has a center of gravity located on the opening 18302a side of the projecting portion 18301b of the back case 18300, and in the state where no external force is applied, Thus, a force is applied to the engaging member 18310 so that the connecting portion between the first piece 18311 and the second piece 18312 is rotated in a direction protruding from the opening 18302a of the back case 18300. As a result, when the engagement between the engagement member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 is incomplete, the engagement member 18310 is protruded to the outside of the rear case 18300, and the engagement between the engagement member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 is increased. You can prevent forgetting.

  The interposed member 18330 and the shaft support member 340 (fixed member 18320) in the fastened state are inserted into the locking portion 18331 of the interposed member 18330 with the protruding wall 18301c1 protruding from the periphery of the first opening 18301c. The left side (arrow L direction side) of the fixing member 18320 in front view is locked to the rear case 18300. In this case, the engaged portion 18332 of the fixing member 18320 is inserted inside the first opening 18301c, and the space surrounded by the engaged portion 18332 is opposed to the tip of the first piece 18311 of the engaging member 18310. It is arranged at the position to do.

  Next, an operator who engages the engaging member 18310 with the fixing member 18320 uses the engaging member 18310 (the connecting portion between the first piece 18311 and the second piece 18312) protruding from the opening 18302a of the back case 18300 on the back surface. The engaging member 18310 is rotated around the projecting portion 18301b by being pushed into the inside of the case 18300 (arrow R1 direction side) (see FIG. 163).

  Thereby, as shown in FIG. 162, the tip of the engaging member 18310 can be inserted into the internal space of the engaged portion 18332. In this case, the distance between the outer end portions of the two engaging portions 18316 is set to be larger than the opening size in the vertical direction of the internal space of the engaged portion 18332, but by the recess 18317 of the engaging member 18310. Since the first piece 18311 is easily elastically deformed, the end portion of the first piece 18311 is elastically deformed to the inside of the concave portion 18317 so that the distance between the outer end portions of the two engaging portions 18316 is increased. The end of the first piece 18311 can be inserted inside the engaged portion 18332 by making it smaller than the opening size in the vertical direction of the internal space of the engaging portion 18332.

  Further, the connecting portion between the first piece 18311 and the second piece 18312 of the engaging member 18310 is inserted inside the opening 18302a of the rear case 18300, so that the engaging member 18310 is engaged in the engaged state. It can be suppressed that the combined member 18310 is operated from the outside of the back case 18300. As a result, it is possible to suppress the board member 100 (main control device 110) connected to the fixing member 18320 from being illegally operated and replacing the board with the unauthorized board.

  Next, release of engagement between the engaging member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 in the eighteenth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 163 (a), the first opening portion 18301c is opened in a substantially L shape when viewed from the front, and the recessed portion 18317 of the engaging member 18310 in the engaged state with the engaged portion 18332 of the fixing member 18320. However, it can be operated from the back side (arrow B direction side) of the back case 1300 through the first opening 18301c.

  Therefore, the outer portion of the concave portion 18317 of the engaging member 18310 is elastically deformed toward the concave side of the concave portion 18317 with a dedicated tool or the like, so that the engaging portion 18316 of the engaging member 18310 and the engaged portion 18332 are engaged. The match is released. By disengaging the engaging member 18310 from the internal space engaged by the engaged portion 18332 in the released state (arrow L direction) and then returning the deformation of the engaging member 310. The engagement between the engagement member 18310 and the engaged portion 18332 can be released.

  In addition, it is preferable that the clearance gap between the outer side part of the recessed part 18317 of the engaging member 18310 and the 1st opening part 18301c is formed as small as possible. According to this, the finger of the person who removes the fixing member 18320 from the back case 300 can be made non-insertable, and a dedicated tool can be inserted. As a result, only the operator who has a dedicated tool can exchange the substrate box 100 (main control device 110), and can be prevented from being replaced with an unauthorized substrate box 100.

  Next, a case where the engagement member 18310 is forgotten to be engaged with the fixing member 18320 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 164 (a) is a schematic top view of the game board 13, and FIG. 164 (b) is a schematic top view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 164 (a) and 164 (b) show a state where the engaging member 18310 is forgotten to be engaged with the engaged portion 18332. FIG. FIGS. 164 (a) and 164 (b) show a state where a piece on the upper side of the outer frame 11 formed in a frame shape in front view is removed.

  As described above, when the engagement between the engagement member 18310 and the engaged portion 18332 is incomplete, the engagement member 18310 can be protruded outside the rear case 18300 by gravity. In this case, the distance dimension LR1 from the end of the engagement member 18310 in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) of the game board 13 to the right end (arrow R direction side) of the rear case 18300 (FIG. 164 (a)). Is set larger than the inner left-right dimension LR2 (see FIG. 164 (b)) in the left-right direction of the outer frame 11 on which the game board 13 is disposed. Thus, when the game board 13 is to be inserted inside the outer frame 11 when the engagement member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 are not engaged, the back side of the engagement member 18310 is brought into contact with the front of the outer frame 11. Can be touched. As a result, when the engaging member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 are disengaged, the game board 13 is prevented from being disposed on the outer frame 11, and the engaging member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 are engaged. You can suppress forgetting.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 165 and 166, an engagement member 19310 in the nineteenth embodiment will be described. In the eighteenth embodiment, the engaging member 18310 is disposed on the inner side of the outer frame 11 to prevent the engaging member 18310 from being illegally operated. However, in the nineteenth embodiment, the releasing direction of the engaging member 19310 To prevent the engaging member 18310 from being manipulated illegally. In addition, about the part same as said each embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 165 is an exploded perspective front view of the engaging member 19310 in the nineteenth embodiment. FIG. 166 (a) is a front view of the back case 18300, and FIG. 166 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the one-way 19350 along the line CLXVIb-CLXVIb in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 165, the engagement member 19310 in the nineteenth embodiment is formed in a substantially L shape in front view, and has a second piece 19312 having a rotation axis with respect to the rear case 19300, and the second piece. And a first piece 18311 formed by bending from one end portion of 19312.

  The second piece 19312 includes a fitting hole 19312b that opens in a circular shape in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) at the end opposite to the side where the first piece 18311 is formed. The fitting hole 19312b is a hole into which a one-way 19350, which will be described later, is fitted, and has an inner diameter substantially the same as the outer ring 19351 of the one-way 19350.

  The one-way 19350 includes an inner ring 19352 having a cam surface formed on the outer peripheral surface, an outer ring 19351 formed in an annular shape surrounding the outer side of the inner ring 19352, and a plurality of parts disposed between the outer ring 19351 and the inner ring 19352. A spring 19353 and a roller 19354 (see FIG. 166 (b)). When the inner ring 19352 is rotated in one direction with respect to the outer ring 19351, the contact surface pressure between the cam surface and the roller 19354 is increased, resulting in resistance. Thus, when the inner ring rotates in the other direction with respect to the outer ring 19351, the contact surface pressure between the cam surface and the roller 10354 decreases and slips to cut the power transmission. A detailed description of the one-way 19350 will be given later.

  An operator 19360 is inserted into the inner ring 19352 of the one-way 19350 at the center. The operation element 19360 includes an operation part 19361 disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the back case 19300, and an insertion part 19362 protruding from the front side (arrow F direction side) of the operation part 19361. Prepare mainly.

  The operation portion 19361 is a portion where the operator operates the operation element 19360 from the back side of the back case 19300, is formed in a circular shape, and has an outer shape larger than an opening through which an insertion portion 19362 described later is inserted. . Thereby, when the operation element 19360 is disposed from the back side of the back case 19300, the operation unit 19361 can be prevented from coming out to the front side (arrow F direction side) of the back case 19300.

  The insertion portion 19362 is formed in a cylindrical shape coaxial with the axis of the operation portion 19361, and protrudes from the front side (arrow F direction side). The insertion portion 19362 includes a protruding wall 19362a that protrudes in the radial direction on the outer peripheral surface thereof.

  The projecting wall 19362a is an engaging portion that prevents the inner ring 19352 of the one-way 19350 from slipping with respect to the insertion portion 19362, and is inserted into a recess 19352a formed in the inner ring 19352. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the rotational force acting on the operation element 19360 from being transmitted to the inner ring 19352.

  Furthermore, a concave portion that is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front is formed on the projecting distal end surface of the insertion portion 19362, and a screw is screwed into the concave portion from the front side to the back side, so that the one-way 19350 is formed. The operation element 19360 can be connected to.

  Next, an arrangement state of the back case 19300 and the engaging member 19310 will be described with reference to FIG. The back case 19300 includes a bottom wall portion 19301 having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and an outer wall portion 302 erected from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 19301 toward the front, and each of the wall portions 19301 and 302 is provided. Is formed in a box shape with one side (front side) opened. Further, the back case 19300 is provided on the back side of the back case 19300 and the engaging member 19310 provided on the front side of the bottom wall portion 19301 (the open side formed in a box shape (arrow F direction side)). And a fixing member 18320 for fixing the substrate box 100 (main control device 110).

  The bottom wall portion 19301 has an opening 301a having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 19301 is visible through the opening 301a. It is said. The bottom wall portion 19301 has a first opening 18301c that opens to a position facing the fixing member 18320, and is positioned below (in the direction of arrow D) the first opening 18301c and opens in the front-rear direction to the inside. And an opening (not shown) into which the insertion portion 19362 of the operation element 19360 described above is inserted.

  The engaging member 19310 described above is arranged from the back side of the back case 19300 to the operating element 19360 after the engaging member 19310 in the state of the one-way 19350 is disposed on the front side of the bottom wall portion 10301 inside the fitting hole 19312b. The insertion portion 19362 is inserted into the inner ring 19352 of the one-way 19350 through the opening of the back case 19300 to be disposed on the bottom wall portion 19301.

  Next, the operation of the one-way 19350 will be described. As described above, the one-way 19350 is switched between a case where transmission of power to the outer ring 19351 is permitted and a case where the transmission is interrupted in a rotational direction between one direction of the inner ring 19352 and the other direction.

  First, the case where the power of the inner ring 19352 is transmitted to the outer ring will be described. As shown in FIG. 166 (b), when the inner ring 19352 is rotated in one direction (the direction of the arrow LK (see FIG. 166 (b))), it is between the cam surface of the inner ring 19352 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer ring 19351. The roller 19354 is sandwiched, the contact of the roller 19354 becomes a resistance, and the power of the inner ring 19352 is transmitted to the outer ring 19351. In this case, the rotation direction in one direction is set to a direction in which the engaging member 19310 is engaged with the fixing member 18320.

  Next, the case where the power of the inner ring 19352 is interrupted will be described. When the inner ring 19352 is rotated in the other direction (the direction of the arrow RK (see FIG. 166 (b))), the roller 19354 is displaced inward in the radial direction of the inner ring 19352 by the resistance that contacts the inner peripheral surface of the outer ring 19351. Thereby, the contact surface pressure between the inner peripheral surface of the outer ring 19351 and the roller 19354 is lowered, and the roller 19354 slides with respect to the outer ring 19351 to interrupt power transmission. In this case, the rotation direction in the other direction is set to a direction in which the engagement member 19310 is disengaged from the fixing member 18320.

  Thus, in a state where the engaging member 19310 is disposed on the back case 19300, the operating element 19360 can be rotated to engage the engaging member 19310 with the fixing member 18320. Further, the operation element 19360 is rotated from the state where the engagement member 19310 and the fixing member 18320 are engaged with each other, so that the engagement between the engagement member 19310 and the fixing member 18320 is released. As a result, it is possible to suppress the board box 100 (main control device 110) coupled to the fixing member 18320 from being replaced with an unauthorized board by the unauthorized operation of the engaging member 19310 (the operation element 19360).

  Next, the engagement member 20310 according to the twentieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 167 to 169. In the first embodiment, the case where the movement of the engaging member 310 is regulated by the screw inserted through the back surface base 720 of the rotating unit 700 has been described. However, in the twentieth embodiment, the engaging member 20310 is the fixing member 320. When engaged, the movement of the engaging member 20310 is restricted by being engaged with an engaging portion 20724a formed on the back surface base 20720 of the rotating unit 20700. In addition, about the part same as said each embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 167 and 168, the engagement member 20310 and the rotation unit 20700 in the twentieth embodiment will be described. FIG. 167 is an exploded perspective view of the back case 20300 and the rotation unit 20700 in the twentieth embodiment. 168 (a) is a front view of the engaging member 20310, and FIG. 168 (b) is a rear view of the rotating unit 20700 and the engaging member 20310. FIG.

  The back case 20300 in the twentieth embodiment is similar to the back case 300 in the first embodiment. The bottom wall portion 301 has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the four edges of the bottom wall portion 301 face the front. The outer wall 302 is erected, and is formed in a box shape in which one side (front side) is opened by each of the walls 301 and 302. The bottom wall 301 is formed with an opening 301a (see FIG. 5) having a rectangular front view at the center thereof, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 5) disposed on the back of the bottom wall 301 through the opening 301a. 2) is visible.

  The back case 20300 according to the twentieth embodiment includes an engagement member 20310 disposed on the front side of the bottom wall portion 301 (open side formed in a box shape (arrow F direction side)), and the back case 20300. A fixing member 320 that is disposed on the rear side (arrow B direction side) and fixes the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) is mainly provided. Further, the back case 20300 in the twentieth embodiment is provided with a rotating unit 20700 in front of the bottom wall portion 301.

  As shown in FIGS. 167 and 168, the engaging member 20310 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 20300 in the twentieth embodiment has a crank shape when viewed from the front. The first piece 311 and the second piece 20312 that are formed in a direction parallel to each other, and the end portions of the first piece 311 and the second piece 20312 are connected to each other. The third piece 313 is connected in a direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the 20312.

  The first piece 311 and the second piece 20312 are respectively formed with long and long sliding grooves 314 in the extending direction thereof, whereby the engaging member 20310 has the first piece 311 and the second piece 20312. Can be slid in the extending direction (arrow LR direction).

  The second piece 20312 includes a recess 20312c that is recessed on a side surface parallel to the sliding direction of the engagement member 20310. The recess 20312c is a recess into which the front end of the engaging portion 20724a of the back base 20720 of the rotating unit 20700, which will be described later, is inserted, and is formed in substantially the same shape as the outer shape of the engaging portion 20724a.

  More specifically, the recess 20312c has a dimension SH1 (see FIG. 168 (a)) to the end of the second piece 20312 on the side opposite to the connection side with the third piece 313 (arrow L direction side). The dimension SH2 (see FIG. 168 (b)) in which the protruding portion 301b can slide inside the sliding groove 314 of 20310 is set to be substantially the same. The recess 20312c is recessed in a triangle having a right angle when viewed from the front, and the right-angled portion is set on the connection side (arrow R direction side) of the second piece 20312 with the third piece 313.

  The rotary unit 20700 includes a bottom base portion 301 of the rear case 20300 on the right side of the lower portion of the opening 301a (a rear base 20720 having a rectangular shape in front view disposed on the arrow R direction side, and the front of the rear base 20720. Rotating body 800 (see FIG. 93) disposed on the side (arrow F direction side), and rotating the rotating body 800 via a light-transmitting center frame 86 disposed on the game board 13 Can be made visible to the player.

  The back base 20720 is a plate member that connects the back surface of the ball receiving base 710 and the back side (arrow B direction side) of the decoration unit 750, and is disposed on the back side of the ball receiving base 710 and the decoration unit 750. The back base 20720 includes a standing wall 20724 that stands from the back.

  The standing wall 20724 is extended in a shape surrounding the outer edge of the engaging member 20310 disposed in the back case 20300. Further, the standing wall 20724 is formed at a position facing the recess 20312c of the engagement member 20310, and includes an engagement portion 20724a into which the tip is inserted inside the recess 20312c.

  The engaging portion 20724a is projected from the standing wall 20724 in the direction (arrow R direction) in which the engaging member 20310 is engaged with the fixing member 320, and is erected in a direction orthogonal to the sliding direction of the engaging member 20310. The wall 20724 is formed with a predetermined gap. Thereby, the rigidity of the engaging portion 20724a can be reduced, and the engaging portion 20724a can be easily elastically deformed. Further, an area where the engaging portion 20724a can be elastically deformed can be ensured by the gap between the standing wall 20724 and the engaging portion 20724a.

  The engaging portion 20724a has a bent portion 20724a1 bent toward the engaging member 20310 at the projecting tip portion, and the bent portion 20724a1 is formed in a triangular shape that is substantially the same shape as the above-described recessed portion 20312c. Is done. Accordingly, the bent portion 20724a1 of the engaging member 20310 is disposed inside the concave portion 20312c of the engaging member 20310 before the engaging member 20310 is engaged with the fixing member 320. Therefore, the engagement member 20310 can be made difficult to slide in the displacement direction (arrow LR direction) (see FIG. 168 (b)).

  Therefore, it can be suppressed that the engaging member 20310 vibrates with respect to the back case 20300 by a force such as vibration or shaking, and moves in the engaging direction with the fixing member 320 (arrow R direction). Therefore, before the fixing member 320 is disposed on the back case 20300, when the position of the engaging member 20310 is displaced and the fixing member 320 is disposed on the back case 20300, the engaged portion of the fixing member 320 is The contact of 332 with the engaging member 20310 can be suppressed. In other words, when the fixing member 320 is disposed on the back case 20300, the engaging member 20310 is positioned within the displacement region when the engaged portion 332 (see FIG. 167) of the fixing member 320 is disposed. Can be suppressed. As a result, since it is not necessary to operate the engaging member 20310 in the direction to release the engagement with the fixing member 320, it is possible to improve workability when engaging the engaging member 20310 with the fixing member 320. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 169, the engagement member 20310 and the rotation unit 20700 in a state where the engagement member 20310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged will be described. FIG. 169 (a) is a rear view of the rotating unit 20700 and the engaging member 20310, and FIG. 169 (b) is a rear view of the rear case 20300. 169 (a) and 169 (b) show a state where the engaging member 20310 and the fixing member 20320 are engaged. In FIG. 169 (b), a part of the engaging member 20310 and the outer shape of the standing wall 20724 are shown by chain lines.

  As shown in FIG. 169, the operating member 315 is operated from the back side (arrow B direction side) of the back case 20300, and the engaging member 20310 is left in the front view (arrow L) with respect to the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 20300. When it is displaced to the right in the front view (arrow R direction side) with respect to the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 20300 from the state of being disposed on the direction side), it is disposed inside the recess 20312c of the engagement member 20310. The bent portion 20724a1 is pushed out into the recess 20312c by the inclined surface of the recess 20312c.

  Here, as described above, the recess 20312c has a distance dimension SH1 to the end of the second piece 20312 opposite to the connection side with the third piece 313 (arrow L direction side) (see FIG. 168 (a)). However, since the dimension SH2 (see FIG. 168 (b)) by which the protruding portion 301b can slide inside the sliding groove 314 of the engaging member 20310 is set to be substantially the same, the engaging member 20310 is fixed to the fixing member 320. When the engagement member 20310 is displaced to the position where it is engaged, the end of the second piece 20312 of the engagement member 20310 opposite to the connection side with the third piece 313 (the arrow L direction side) is the bent part 20724a1 and the engagement member. It is arranged at a position adjacent to the displacement direction of 20310 (arrow LR direction). Thereby, it can suppress that the engaging member 20310 is displaced in the direction (arrow L direction) which cancels | releases engagement with the fixing member 320 illegally.

  As in the first embodiment, the engaging member 20310 is engaged with the fixed member 320 of the engaging member 20310 by the engaging portion 316 being hooked (engaged) with the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320. Displacement in the direction of releasing the engagement is restricted. However, since the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 is inserted through the first opening 301c of the back case 300, the engagement between the engaged portion 332 and the engaging portion 316 is performed via the first opening 301c. There was a risk of unauthorized removal.

  On the other hand, in the twentieth embodiment, the displacement of the engagement member 20310 in the direction of releasing the engagement with the fixing member 320 is opposite to the engagement portion 316 of the engagement member 20310 that engages with the fixing member 320. Since the end on the side can be regulated by contacting the bent portion 20724a1, an improper object is inserted from the first opening 301c, and the engagement between the end portion of the engaging member 20310 and the bent portion 20724a1 is released. Can be suppressed. As a result, the engagement between the engagement member 20310 and the fixing member 320 is illegally released, and the board box 100 (main control device 110) connected to the fixing member 320 can be prevented from being replaced with an illegal board. .

  Note that the fixing member 320 and the engaging member 20310 are formed by removing the rotating unit 20700 disposed on the inner side (bottom wall portion 301) of the back case 20300 from the back case 20300, and the end portion and the bent portion of the engaging member 20310. After releasing the engagement with 20724a1, the end of the first piece 311 of the engagement member 20310 is elastically deformed, and the end of the engagement member 20310 is pulled out from the internal space of the engaged portion 332, thereby The engagement can be released.

  Therefore, when removing the fixing member 320 from the back case 20300, it is necessary to remove the rotating unit 20700 from the front side of the back case 20300, so that the engagement between the engaging member 20310 and the fixing member 320 is illegally released. Thus, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) connected to the fixing member 320 can be prevented from being replaced with an unauthorized substrate.

  Further, since the engaging member 20310 is formed by bending the shape in front view in a crank shape as described above, illegal objects such as wires and wires inserted from the first piece 311 side are linearly second. It is possible to restrict the feeding to the end of the piece 20312. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an unauthorized object inserted from the first piece 311 side from being accurately sent to the engaging portion between the second piece 20312 and the bent portion 20724a1. As a result, the engagement between the engagement member 20310 and the fixing member 320 is illegally released, and the board box 100 (main control device 110) connected to the fixing member 320 can be prevented from being replaced with an illegal board. .

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 170 to 173, a rotation unit 21700 in the twenty-first embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the movement of the engaging member 310 is regulated by the screw inserted into the back surface base 720 of the rotating unit 700 has been described. However, in the 21st embodiment, the back surface base 21720 of the rotating unit 21700 is not moved. By inserting the first piece 311 into the formed insertion portion 21724b, the movement of the engaging member 310 is restricted. In addition, about the part same as said each embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 170 and 171, the entire configuration of the engaging member 310 and the rotation unit 21700 in the twenty-first embodiment will be described. FIG. 170 is an exploded perspective view of the back case 300 and the rotation unit 21700 in the twenty-first embodiment. FIG. 171 (a) is a rear view of the rotation unit 21700 and the engaging member 310, and FIG. 171 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the rotation unit 21700 taken along the line CLXXIb-CLXXIb in FIG. 171 (a).

  The back case 21300 in the twenty-first embodiment is similar to the back case 300 in the first embodiment. The bottom wall 301 has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall 301 face toward the front. The outer wall 302 is erected, and is formed in a box shape in which one side (front side) is opened by each of the walls 301 and 302. The bottom wall 301 is formed with an opening 301a having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back of the bottom wall 301 is visually recognized through the opening 301a. It is possible.

  Further, the rear case 21300 in the twenty-first embodiment includes an engaging member 310 disposed on the front side (open side (arrow F direction side) formed in a box shape) of the bottom wall portion 301, and the rear case 21300. A fixing member 320 that is disposed on the rear side (arrow B direction side) and fixes the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) is mainly provided. Furthermore, a rotating unit 21700 is disposed in front of the bottom wall 301 in the rear case 21300 in the twenty-first embodiment.

  As shown in FIGS. 170 and 171, the rotation unit 21700 in the twenty-first embodiment is the right side (arrow R direction side) of the lower side (arrow D direction side) portion of the opening 301 a in the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 300. And a rotating body 800 (see FIG. 93) disposed on the front side of the rear base 21720, and is disposed on the game board 13. The player can visually recognize the effect of rotationally displacing the rotator 800 through the permeable center frame 86.

  The back base 21720 is a plate member that connects the back surface of the ball receiving base 710 and the back side of the decoration unit 750, and is disposed on the back side of the ball receiving base 710 and the decoration unit 750. In addition, the back surface base 21720 includes a standing wall 21724 that is erected on the back surface.

  The standing wall 21724 is extended in a shape surrounding the outer edge of the engaging member 310 in a state of being disposed in the back case 300. Further, the standing wall 21724 is in a state where the engaging member 310 is located at the left side (arrow L direction side) end portion with respect to the rear case 300 (a state where the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are disengaged). ) Includes an insertion portion 21724b that protrudes toward the recess 317 of the engagement member 310 (in the direction of the arrow L).

  The insertion portion 21724b extends from the standing wall 21724 in a direction parallel to the displacement direction (arrow LR direction) of the engagement member 310 and is engaged with the fixing member 320 and the engagement member 310. The dimension is set so as to overlap in the direction of gravity (arrow UB direction). Further, a bent portion 21724b1 bent to the back side (engagement member 310 side) is formed at the distal end portion of the insertion portion 21724b, and the bent distal end portion of the bent portion 21742b1 is the front-rear direction (arrow F−) of the pachinko machine 10. In the (B direction), the length overlaps with the engagement member 310.

  Furthermore, the width dimension in the up-down direction (arrow UD direction) of the insertion portion 21742b is set to be smaller than the width dimension in the up-down direction of the recess 317 of the engagement member 310. Therefore, the insertion portion 21724b is in a state where the bent portion 21724b1 is inserted inside the recess 317 in a state where the engagement member 310 is engaged with the fixing member 320. Thereby, it can suppress that the 1st piece 311 of the engagement member 310 is elastically deformed inside the recessed installation of the recessed part 317 from the state in which the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 were engaged. As a result, the engagement between the engagement member 20310 and the fixing member 320 is illegally released, and the board box 100 (main control device 110) connected to the fixing member 320 can be prevented from being replaced with an illegal board. .

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 171 to 173, the operation of the insertion portion 21724b when the engagement member 310 is engaged with the fixing member 320 will be described. FIGS. 172 (a) and 173 (a) are rear views of the rotation unit 21700 and the engaging member 310. FIG. FIGS. 172 (b) and 173 (b) are schematic cross-sectional views of the back case 300 and the rotation unit 21700. 172 (a) and 172 (b) show a state in which the engagement between the engagement member 310 and the fixing member 320 is released, and FIGS. 173 (a) and 173 (b) show the engagement. A state in which the combined member 310 is being engaged with the fixing member 320 is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 172 and 173, the engagement member 310 is engaged with the fixed member 320 at the end of the first piece 311 of the engagement member 310 from the state where the engagement with the fixed member 320 is released. When inserted into the internal space of the portion 332, the end of the first piece 311 is elastically deformed toward the inside of the recess 317. Thereby, the width dimension in the up-down direction (arrow UD direction) of the recessed part 317 is made smaller than the width dimension of the insertion part 21724b in the up-down direction.

  Further, when the engaging portion 316 is located in the internal space of the engaged portion 332 (in the case shown in FIG. 173 (a)), the end of the first piece 311 is the protruding tip of the insertion portion 21724b. It is arranged at a position exceeding. In other words, the length dimension in the left-right direction of the engaging portion 316 is set to be larger than the facing dimension from the projecting distal end portion of the insertion portion 21724b to the end portion of the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320.

  Therefore, when the engaging portion 316 is pushed out from the internal space of the engaged portion 332, the end portion on the first piece 311 side of the engaging member 310 can be brought into contact with the bent portion 21724b1 of the insertion portion 21724b. . In this case, the distal end of the insertion portion 21724b is pushed out to the front side (arrow F direction side) along the inclined surface of the bent portion 21724b1. Thereby, the engaging member 310 can be displaced to a position where it engages with the fixing member 320.

  As shown in FIG. 171, when the engaging portion 316 is pulled out from the internal space of the engaged portion 332, as described above, from the width dimension of the concave portion 317 in the vertical direction of the first piece 311. In addition, since the width dimension in the vertical direction of the insertion portion 21724b is increased, the bent portion 21724b1 is inserted inside the recess 317.

  Therefore, as described above, it is possible to suppress the first piece 311 of the engaging member 310 from being elastically deformed inside the recessed portion 317. As a result, the engagement between the engagement member 20310 and the fixing member 320 is illegally released, and the board box 100 (main control device 110) connected to the fixing member 320 can be prevented from being replaced with an illegal board. .

  The engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are formed by removing the rotating unit 21700 disposed on the inner side (bottom wall portion 301) of the rear case 300 from the rear case 21300, so that the end of the engaging member 310 and the rear case After releasing the engagement with 20300, the end portion of the first piece 311 of the engagement member 310 is elastically deformed, and the end portion of the engagement member 310 is pulled out from the internal space of the engaged portion 332, so that both The engagement can be released.

  Therefore, when removing the fixing member 320 from the rear case 21300, it is necessary to remove the rotating unit 21700 from the front side of the rear case 21300. Therefore, the engagement between the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 is performed on the rear case 21300. It is possible to prevent the board box 100 (main control device 110) coupled to the fixing member 320 from being illegally released from the back side and being replaced with an unauthorized board.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 174 to 176, the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 in the twenty-second embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the engaging portion 316 of the engaging member 310 is engaged with the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 has been described. However, in the 22nd embodiment, the engaging member 22310 is recessed. The bent portion 22332a1 formed on the fixing member 22320 is engaged with the recessed portion 22311a. In addition, about the part same as said each embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  With reference to FIGS. 174 to 176 (a), configurations of the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 in the twenty-second embodiment will be described. FIG. 174 is a perspective front view of the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320. 175 (a) and 175 (b) are front views of the back case 22300. FIG. FIG. 176 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the back case 22300 along the CLXXVIa-CLXXVIa line in FIG. 175 (b). 175 (a) shows a state before the engagement member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 are engaged, and FIG. 175 (b) shows a state where the engagement member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 are engaged. Is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 174 to 176 (a), the rear case 22300 according to the twenty-second embodiment is directed to the front from the bottom wall 301 having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall 301. The outer wall portion 302 is provided upright, and each of the wall portions 301 and 302 is formed in a box shape in which one surface side is opened. Further, the back case 22300 is arranged on the front side of the bottom wall portion 301 (the open side formed in a box shape (the arrow F direction side)) and on the back side of the bottom wall portion 301. And a fixing member 22320 for fixing the substrate box 100 (main control device 110).

  The engaging member 22310 has a crank shape as viewed from the front, and has a first piece 22311 and a second piece 312 extending in a direction parallel to each other, and the first piece 22311 and the second piece 312. Of the first piece 22311 and the second piece 312 are connected to each other in a direction perpendicular to the extending direction of the first piece 22311 and the second piece 312.

  In addition, the first piece 22311 and the second piece 312 are respectively formed with long and long sliding grooves 314 in the extending direction, whereby the engaging member 22310 is connected to the first piece 22311 and the second piece 312. The piece 312 can slide in the extending direction (arrow LR direction).

  The first piece 22311 includes a recess 22311a that is recessed toward the back side (arrow B direction side) on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the end opposite to the side to which the third piece 313 is connected. .

  The concave portion 22311a is a portion in which a bent portion 22232a1 formed in a fixing member 22320, which will be described later, is inserted to engage the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320. As described later, the first portion of the engaging member 22310 is provided. When the end portion on one side (arrow R direction side) of the piece 22311 is accommodated in the internal space of the engaged portion 22332 of the fixing member 22320, it is formed at a position facing the 22332 a of the fixing member 22320.

  In addition, the internal shape of the concave portion 22311a is formed in a substantially right triangle shape in cross section, the right angle portion is set on the end side (arrow R direction side) of the first piece 22311, and the concave bottom surface is the first. It is formed as an inclined surface that becomes deeper on the back side (arrow B direction) toward the end portion side of the one piece 22311.

  The fixing member 22320 includes an interposed member 22330 that engages with the engaging member 22310 described above, and a shaft support member 340 that is fastened to the back side of the interposed member 22330.

  The interposition member 22330 is formed in a box shape whose front side (arrow F direction side) is open, a locking portion 331 protruding on one side (arrow R direction side), and the other side (arrow L direction side). The engaged portion 22332 that protrudes from the side surface of the rear case 22300 to the bottom wall 301 side (back side (arrow B direction side)) and is formed in a frame shape, and the box-shaped bottom surface (side surface on the arrow B direction side) Are mainly provided with an insertion hole 333 (see FIG. 39B) that opens in a circular shape and a protrusion 334 that protrudes from the back surface.

  The engaged portion 22332 is a portion into which an end portion on one side (arrow R direction side) of the first piece 22311 of the engaging member 22310 is inserted into the enclosed internal space, and the inner edge shape thereof is the first shape. It is set slightly larger than the outer shape of the piece 22311. Further, the engaged portion 22332 is formed in the insertion direction (arrow R direction side) of the engaging member 22310 from the one side on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the frame shape. A protruding portion 22332a is provided.

  The protrusion 22332a is provided with a bent portion 22332a1 bent at the front end (arrow F direction side) at the end of the tip, and the bent portion 23332a1 is inserted into the concave portion 22311a of the engaging member 22310 described above. The joining member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 can be engaged with each other. That is, the bent portion 22332a1 is formed at a position facing the concave portion 22311a in a state where the engaging member 22310 is inserted into the engaged portion 22332.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 176 (a), the engaging portion of the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 is formed on the front side with the engaging member 22310 sandwiched with respect to the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 22300. Is done. Accordingly, since the engaging portion between the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 can be separated from the first opening 301c formed in the bottom wall portion 301, an unauthorized member such as a wire or a wire can be separated from the first opening 301c. Can be prevented from being improperly released from engagement between the engagement member 22310 and the fixing member 22320.

  Further, since the first piece 22311 of the engaging member 22310 can be disposed between the bottom wall portion 301 and the engaging portions of the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320, the first portion formed on the bottom wall portion 301. It is possible to suppress a wire, a wire, or the like that is illegally inserted from the opening such as the one opening 301c from reaching the engaging portions of the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 linearly. As a result, it is possible to suppress an unauthorized member (such as a wire or a wire) from being inserted through the opening of the bottom wall portion 301 and the engagement between the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 being illegally released.

  In the present embodiment, the protrusions 22332a are provided so as to protrude in the insertion direction of the engagement member 22310 into the internal space of the engaged part 22332. Accordingly, the engaging portion between the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 is set on the front side of the fixing member 22320. Accordingly, when an unauthorized member such as a wire or a wire is inserted from the first opening 301c of the bottom wall portion 301, the insertion direction of the unauthorized member that reaches the engaging portion between the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 is changed. It can be inclined obliquely with respect to the front surface of the bottom wall portion 301. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult to transmit the force in the direction of releasing the engagement of the engagement portion between the engagement member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 from the tip of the unauthorized member. As a result, it is possible to suppress the unauthorized member from being inserted from the first opening 301c of the bottom wall portion 301 and the engagement between the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 being illegally released.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 176 (b), an engagement member 23310 and a fixing member 23320 in the 23rd embodiment will be described. In the twenty-second embodiment, a case has been described in which the protrusion 22232a that engages the engagement member 22310 in the insertion direction of the engagement member 22310 into the engaged portion 22332 is provided, but in the twenty-third embodiment, A protruding portion 23332a is provided in a projecting direction in the direction opposite to the insertion direction of the engaged portion 23332 of the engaging member 23310. In addition, about the part same as said each embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 176 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the back case 23300 in the 23rd embodiment. Note that the cross-sectional view in FIG. 176 (b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view in FIG. 176 (a). Further, as described above, since the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 in the twenty-second embodiment are different in the engaging position in the twenty-third embodiment, the engaging member 23310 and the fixing member 23320 are engaged. Since the other parts are the same as those in the twenty-second embodiment, description thereof will be omitted.

  The back case 22300 in the twenty-third embodiment includes a bottom wall portion 23301 that is substantially rectangular in front view, and an outer wall portion 302 that is erected from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 23301 toward the front. Each wall part 23301, 302 is formed in a box shape with one side (front side) opened. The bottom wall 301 is formed with an opening 301a (see FIG. 5) having a rectangular front view at the center thereof, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 5) disposed on the back of the bottom wall 301 through the opening 301a. 2) is visible.

  In addition, the back case 23300 in the twenty-third embodiment includes an engagement member 23310 disposed on the front side of the bottom wall portion 23301 (the open side formed in a box shape (arrow F direction side)), and the back case 23300. The fixing member 23320 which is arrange | positioned at the back side (arrow B direction side) and fixes the board | substrate box 100 (main control apparatus 110) is mainly provided.

  As shown in FIG. 176 (b), in the twenty-third embodiment, as described above, the protruding direction of the protruding portion 23332a protruding from the engaged portion 23332 is the protruding portion 22332a (FIG. 176 (a) of the twenty-second embodiment. ))) And a bent portion 23332a1 which is bent toward the back side (arrow B direction side) is formed at the protruding tip of the protruding portion 23332a.

  The engaging member 23310 has a rectangular opening 23310b larger than the outer shape of the bent portion 23332a1 at a position facing the bent portion 23332a1. Accordingly, when the engaging member 23310 is inserted into the internal space of the engaged portion 23332 of the fixing member 23320, the bent portion 23332a1 is inserted inside the opening 23310b, and the engaging member 23310 and the fixing member 23320 are connected. Engaged.

  Further, in the bottom wall portion 23301 of the back case 23300 in the twenty-third embodiment, a third opening portion 23301e is formed at a position facing the fixing member 23320. The operator can release the engagement portion between the engagement member 23310 and the fixing member 23320 from the back side of the bottom wall portion 23301 by the third opening portion 23301e. As a result, the work of removing the fixing member 23320 from the back case 23300 can be simplified.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 177 and 178, a back case 24300 in the twenty-fourth embodiment will be described. In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the engagement between the fixing member 18320 and the engaging member 18310 is released when the fixing member 18320 is removed from the bottom wall portion 18301 has been described. In the twenty-fourth embodiment, the fixing member 24320 is released. Is removed from the bottom wall portion 24301, the insertion portion of the engaging member 24310 into the fixing member 24320 is cut. In addition, about the part same as said each embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 177 (a) is a front view of the back case 24300 in the twenty-fourth embodiment, and FIG. 177 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the back case 24300 along the line CLXXVIIb-CLXXVIIb in FIG. 177 (a). 178 is a cross-sectional view of the back case 24300 taken along the line CLXXVIII-CLXXVIII of FIG. 177 (b).

  As shown in FIGS. 177 and 178, the rear case 24300 in the twenty-fourth embodiment is erected from the bottom wall portion 24301 having a substantially rectangular shape in front view and the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 24301 toward the front. The outer wall portion 302 is formed in a box shape in which one wall side (front side) is opened by the wall portions 24301 and 302. The back case 24300 is arranged on the front side of the bottom wall portion 24301 (the opening side formed in a box shape (the arrow F direction side)) and the rear surface side of the bottom wall portion 24301. And a fixing member 24320 for fixing the substrate box 100 (main control device 110).

  The bottom wall 24301 is formed with an opening 301a having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front at the center, and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back surface of the bottom wall 24301 is visible through the opening 301a. It is possible. Further, the bottom wall portion 24301 has a first opening portion 24301c that opens to a position facing the fixing member 24320, and a left side (arrow L direction side) of the first opening portion 24301c, and a front-rear direction (arrow F− And an opening (not shown) into which an insertion portion 24362 of an operation element 24360 described later is inserted.

  The engagement member 24310 mainly includes a second piece 24312 formed in a T-shape when viewed from the front, and a first piece 24311 bent from the end of the second piece 24312 and extending in an arc shape. . The second piece 24312 includes a through hole 24312d penetrating in the front-rear direction at a connecting portion of two extending portions orthogonal to each other, and a distance distance from the through hole 24312d to the outside of the extending portion of the second piece 24312 is Each is set approximately the same.

  The through hole 24312d is a portion into which an insertion portion 24362 of an operation element 24360 described later is inserted, and is formed in a circular shape substantially the same as the outer shape of the insertion portion 24362. Thus, when the operating element 24360 is rotated, the engaging member 24310 is rotationally displaced about the through hole 24312d.

  The first piece 24311 is formed in an arc shape centering on the through-hole 24312d, and protrudes from each end of the second piece 24312 in one direction of rotation (left rotation in front view). In addition, each first piece 24311 has an engaging tip 24316 projecting on both sides in the radial direction centering on the axis of the through hole 24312d at the projecting tip, and a connecting side between the projecting tip surface and the second piece 24312. And a recess 24317 that is recessed toward the front.

  The engaging portion 24316 is a portion to be engaged with a fixing member 24320 to be described later, and the protruding tip portion (the portion where the engaging portion 24316 is formed) of the first piece 24311 is elastically deformed by the concave portion 24317 to fix the fixing member 24320. Can be engaged with an engaged portion 24332 formed on the surface. In addition, the detailed description about the shape of the engaging part 24316 and the recessed part 24317 is mentioned later.

  The operation element 24360 is an operation member that transmits an operation from the back side (arrow B direction side) of the bottom wall portion 24301 to an engagement member 24310 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the bottom wall portion 24301. And an operation portion 24361 formed in a columnar shape, and an insertion portion 24362 protruding coaxially with the operation portion 24361. The operation portion 24361 is formed in the bottom wall portion 24301, and an outer diameter is set to a size larger than an opening through which the insertion portion 24362 is inserted. Thereby, it can suppress that the whole operation element 24360 is displaced to the front side of the bottom wall part 24301. FIG.

  The insertion portion 24362 is a portion that is inserted into the through-hole 24312d of the engagement member 24310 as described above, and thereby, the rotational force input from the operation portion 24361 can be transmitted to the engagement member 24310.

  The fixing member 24320 includes an interposed member 24330 that engages with the engaging member 24310 described above, and a shaft support member 340 disposed on the back side of the interposed member 24330.

  The interposed member 24330 is formed in a box shape whose front side (arrow F direction side) is open. In addition, the interposition member 24330 includes a housing portion 24335 that protrudes from the front and is formed in a box shape whose lower side (arrow D direction side) is open. The accommodating portion 24335 is a portion into which the engaging portion of the engaging member 24310 (the tip portion of the first piece 24311) is inserted, and the lower open portion is the displacement of the first piece 24311 of the engaging member 24310 described above. Arranged on the trajectory. Thereby, the engaging member 24310 can be rotated to accommodate the end of the first piece 24311 of the engaging member 24310 in the internal space of the accommodating portion 24335.

  In addition, the accommodating portion 24335 is formed so that its internal space is larger than the engaging portion of one engaging member 24310. Thereby, when the engaging member 24310 is cut as will be described later, the cut portion of the engaging member 24310 can be housed in the internal space of the housing portion 24335. In the present embodiment, the size of the internal space of the accommodating portion 24335 is set to be approximately three times the engaging portion of the engaging member 24310 (the tip portion of the first piece 24311). At least three engagement members 24310 can be accommodated in the space.

  As shown in FIG. 178, the accommodating portion 24335 is opened at the lower side, and a stepped portion 24335a protrudes in a stepped manner from the opening portion, and the engaging member 24310 accommodated inside the accommodating portion 24335 at the stepped portion 24335a. The engaging portion 24316 is engaged. As a result, when the engaging member 24310 is rotated, the distal end portion of the first piece 24311 can be inserted into the accommodating portion 24335 and can be engaged with the engaging member 24310 and the fixing member 24320.

  In this case, the recess depth SH3 (see FIG. 178) of the recess 24317 is the distance from the end of the first piece 24311 in the state of being accommodated and engaged in the accommodating portion 24335 to the lower end of the accommodating portion 24335. It is set smaller than the dimension SH4. Accordingly, the recess 24317 formed in the engaged first piece 24311 is in a state of being accommodated inside the accommodating portion 24335. Thereby, it can suppress that the edge part of the 1st piece 24311 is elastically deformed and engagement with the engaging member 24310 and the fixing member 24320 is cancelled | released.

  Therefore, in the twenty-fourth embodiment, the fixing member 24320 can be removed from the bottom wall portion 24301 by cutting the first piece 24311 protruding from the housing portion 24335 of the first piece 24311 inserted inside the housing portion 24335. it can.

  In this case, the distance dimension SH5 (see FIG. 178) from the upper inner edge of the accommodating part 24335 to the tip of the first piece 24311 is set to be larger than the distance dimension SH4 described above. Thereby, the cut part of the first piece 24311 can be moved above the accommodating part 24335, and another first piece 24311 is inserted from the open side (arrow F direction side) of the accommodating part 24335 to thereby form the step part 24335a. Can be engaged.

  Therefore, the number of times the fixing member 24320 is removed from the bottom wall portion 24301 is determined by the number of remaining first pieces 24311 of the engaging member 24310 or the number of cut first pieces 24311 accommodated in the accommodating portion 24335. be able to. As a result, when the fixing member 24320 is illegally removed from the bottom wall portion 24301 and the board box 100 (main control device 110) connected to the fixing member 24320 is replaced with an illegal board, the engaging member 24310 is obtained. Depending on the number of remaining first pieces 24311 or the number of cut first pieces 24311 accommodated in the accommodating portion 24335, it is possible to make an operator recognize that the fixing member 24320 has been removed illegally.

  Further, as described above, the engaging member 24310 uses the region on the side where the second piece 24312 is formed in a T shape in front view and the first piece 24311 is not formed (the upper side of the T shape), The first piece 24311 can be inserted into the fixing member 24320 by rotating the engaging member 24310. Further, when the first piece 24311 is cut, the engaging member 24310 can be rotated using the cut region of the first piece 24311, and the next (other) first piece 24311 is fixed to the fixing member 24320. Can be inserted. Thereby, the order accommodated in the accommodating part 24335 of the 1st piece 24311 can be determined. Therefore, the operator can visually recognize where the first piece 24311 that has not been cut is located, and can determine whether the fixing member 24320 has been illegally released. Therefore, the number of the first pieces 24311 can be determined. It is possible to suppress the operator from overlooking the trace of fraud, compared with the case where the worker counts

  Next, with reference to FIG. 179, a game board 25013 in the twenty-fifth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the decorative member 154 of the general prize opening unit 150 is bonded to the main body 151 has been described. However, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, the decorative member 154 is bonded to the front side of the base plate 60. Is done. In addition, about the part same as said each embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIGS. 179 (a) and 179 (b) are cross-sectional views of a game board 25013 in the twenty-fifth embodiment. Note that FIGS. 179 (a) and 179 (b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG. FIG. 179 (b) shows a state in which the general prize opening unit 25150 is disassembled from the base plate 60.

  Note that the gaming board 25013 in the twenty-fifth embodiment is similar to the gaming board 13 in the first embodiment. The gaming board 25013 includes a base plate 60 formed from a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the base plate 60. The center frame 86 is provided in the opening formed in the. The game board 25013 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 76 and 77, a general winning opening 63, a first The winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80 and the like (see FIG. 2) are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). It is attached to the back side. Further, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, a general winning opening unit 25150 is disposed in the opening portion of the second opening 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base 60.

  As shown in FIG. 179, the general prize opening unit 25150 disposed on the front side of the base plate 60 of the game board 25013 in the twenty-fifth embodiment includes a main body 151 disposed along the front surface of the base plate 60. The first standing portion 152 standing from the end of the main body 151 and the second standing portion standing from the front of the main body 141 and having one end connected to the first standing portion 152 153, a decorative member 25154 disposed on the back side of the main body 151, and a plurality (three in the present embodiment) of general winning holes 63 formed in the main body 151 are mainly provided.

  The decorative member 25154 is formed in a plate shape from a light transmissive material, and is decorated with a pattern or characters (patterns) connected to the decorative member 60c disposed on the front side of the base plate 60. Further, the decorative member 25154 is formed such that the outer edge shape thereof is slightly smaller than the inner edge shape of the recess 151b formed in the main body 151.

  In addition, the decorative member 25154 includes an adhesive tape 25154a that is bonded to the front surface of the base plate 60 (decorative member 60c) at the end of the back surface of the decorative member 25154. As a result, the decorative member 25154 can be adhered to the base plate 60 and disposed. Therefore, the operator can attach the decorative member 25154 to the front surface of the base plate 60 while visually recognizing the decoration of the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 when placing the decorative member 25154 on the base plate 60. Therefore, it is possible to easily align the decoration positions of the decoration member 25154 and the decoration member 60c of the base plate 60. As a result, the decoration position of the decoration member 25154 and the decoration member 60c of the base plate 60 is suppressed from shifting, and the decoration member 25154 and the decoration member 60c of the base plate 60 are given to the player as one decoration. Easy to see.

  Further, since the decorative member 25154 is directly attached to the front surface of the base plate 60 (decorative member 60c), the front-rear direction of the decorative member 25154 and the decorative member 60c is more than that in the case where the front side of the main body 151 is decorated. The arrangement in the direction of arrow FB can be made closer. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the positional deviation of the decorations of the decoration members 25154 and 60c when the player visually recognizes the decoration member 25154 from an oblique direction. As a result, the player can easily make the player visually recognize the decorative member 25154 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 as one decoration.

  In the twenty-fifth embodiment, the concave dimension X1 of the concave portion 151b of the main body 151 is set smaller than the width dimension X2 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) in which the decorative member 25154 and the adhesive tape 25154a are combined. Is done. Thereby, when the main body 151 is disposed from the front side (arrow F direction side) of the decorative member 25154, the decorative member 25154 is prevented from coming into contact with the concave bottom surface 151b2 of the concave portion 151b. it can.

  Therefore, the back surface portion 151d that forms the back surface of the main body portion 151 excluding the concave portion 151b can be brought into contact with the front surface of the base plate 60, and a gap is formed between the back surface portion 151d and the base plate 60. Can be suppressed. As a result, it can be suppressed that dust or the like enters between the back surface portion 151d and the base plate 60, and the decoration of the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 becomes difficult to be visually recognized.

  Next, a game board 26013 according to the twenty-sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the linear inclined surface 151a is formed at the end of the main body 151 of the general prize opening unit 150 has been described. However, in the twenty-sixth embodiment, the end of the main body 26151 is formed. The inclined surface 26151a is formed in a circular arc shape that bulges outward. In addition, about the part same as said each embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  180 (a) and 180 (b) are cross-sectional views of a game board 26013 in the twenty-sixth embodiment. 180 (a) and 180 (b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG. Further, in FIG. 180 (a), when the player visually recognizes the game board 26013 from a position higher than normal (for example, a viewpoint having the same height as the upper end of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) in the gravity direction). The line of sight is shown by a two-dot chain line, and in FIG. 180 (b), when the player views the game board 26013 from a normal position (for example, a viewpoint having the same height as the middle position of the game board 26013 in the gravity direction). Is indicated by a two-dot chain line.

  Note that the gaming board 26013 in the twenty-sixth embodiment is similar to the gaming board 13 in the first embodiment. The gaming board 26013 includes a base plate 60 formed from a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the base plate 60. The center frame 86 (refer FIG. 2) arrange | positioned by the opening part formed in is provided. In addition, the game board 26013 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 76 and 77, a general winning opening 63, a first The winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80 and the like (see FIG. 2) are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). It is attached to the back side. Furthermore, in the twenty-sixth embodiment, a general winning opening unit 26150 is disposed in the opening portion of the second opening 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base 60.

  As shown in FIG. 180, the general prize opening unit 26150 disposed on the front side of the base plate 60 of the game board 26013 in the twenty-sixth embodiment includes a plate-like main body 26151 along the front of the base plate 60, And a decorative member 154 disposed on the back side of the main body portion 26151.

  The main body portion 26151 is formed of a transparent resin material, and the decoration of the pattern, characters, etc. (pictures) of the decorative member 154 disposed on the back side can be visually recognized from the player side. The main body portion 26151 has an inclined surface 26151a that has an end portion in front view inclined toward the back surface and bulges in a cross-sectional arc shape, and a recessed portion that is recessed from the back surface of the main body portion 26151 toward the front surface side. 151b.

  In the inclined surface 26151a, an inclination angle θ1 with respect to the front surface of the base plate 60 of the imaginary line IL1 that connects the connection point between the front surface side of the main body portion 26151 and the end portion on the back surface side is set to be smaller than 45 degrees. Is done. As a result, the incident angle when the light traveling in the horizontal direction through the main body portion 26151 enters the outside of the main body portion 26151 from the inclined surface 26151a is larger than when the inclination angle θ1 is set larger than 45 degrees. . Therefore, when light is emitted to the outside of the main body portion 26151, the traveling direction of the light can be easily bent upward. Therefore, when the player visually recognizes the general prize opening unit 26150 from a position higher than the normal position with respect to the game board 26013, it is possible to easily recognize the connecting portions of the decorative members 154 and 60c from the front side. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the difference in the position in the front-rear direction of the connecting portions of the decorative members 154, 60c, so that the decorative member 154 of the general prize opening unit 26150, the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60, Can be easily recognized as one decoration. In the present embodiment, the angle θ1 is set to 40 degrees.

  In addition, as described above, the inclined surface 26151a is formed in a circular arc shape that bulges outward, so that the main body portion 26151 is moved in the horizontal direction toward the center side of the main body portion 26151 (the lower side in FIG. 180 (a)). The incident angle at the time when the light traveling on the light enters the outside of the main body portion 26151 from the inclined surface 26151a is increased. Therefore, the angle of incidence when light traveling in the horizontal direction through the main body portion 26151 enters the outside of the main body portion 26151 from the inclined surface 26151a is increased toward the center side of the main body portion 26151 (the lower side in FIG. 180A). The

  Therefore, the player is below the horizontal line HR1 (see FIG. 180 (a)) passing through an intermediate position between the connection point between the front surface side plane of the main body portion 26151 and the rear end portion via the inclined surface 26151a. When viewing the decoration on the side, the angle of the line of sight of the player passing through the main body 26151 can be easily brought closer to the direction (horizontal direction) orthogonal to the front of the base plate 60.

  Further, the decorative member 154 disposed inside the recess 151b has a horizontal line HR1 passing through an intermediate position between the connection point between the front surface of the main body 26151 and the rear surface. (See FIG. 180 (a)) and set on the back side of the inclined surface 26151a. As described above, when the player visually recognizes the decoration below the horizontal line HR1 (see FIG. 180 (a)) through the inclined surface 26151a, the angle of the player's line of sight passing through the main body 26151 is as follows. Can be easily brought close to a direction (horizontal direction) perpendicular to the front surface of the base plate 60.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 180 (a), even when the player views the game board 26013 from a position higher than usual, the general winning opening unit 26150 and the base plate 60 are visually recognized through the inclined surface 26151a. The decoration of the decoration member 60c and the decoration of the decoration member 154 of the general winning a prize opening unit 26150 can be combined with each other so that the player can easily see the decoration. As a result, the decoration member 154 of the general winning a prize opening unit 26150 and the decoration member 60c of the base plate 60 can be easily recognized as one decoration.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 180 (b), when the player views the game board 26013 from the normal height, the general winning opening unit 26150 and the base plate 60, the bulging shape of the inclined surface 26151a causes the main body. Since the incident angle when light traveling in the horizontal direction through the portion 26151 enters the outside of the main body portion 26151 from the inclined surface 26151a approximates a right angle, the light emitted to the outside of the main body portion 26151 can be hardly refracted. Therefore, the direction of the player's line of sight is prevented from being bent when it passes through the inclined surface 26151a, so that the positional deviation in the front-rear direction between the decorative member 154 of the general prize opening unit 26150 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 is suppressed. Can be made difficult for the player to recognize. As a result, the decoration member 154 of the general winning a prize opening unit 26150 and the decoration member 60c of the base plate 60 can be easily recognized as one decoration.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 181, a game board 27013 in the 27th embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the linear inclined surface 151a is formed at the end of the main body 151 of the general prize opening unit 150 has been described, but in the 27th embodiment, the end of the main body 26151 is formed. The inclined surface 27151a is formed in a circular arc shape that is recessed inside the main body 27151. In addition, about the part same as said each embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 181 (a) and FIG. 181 (b) are cross-sectional views of a game board 27013 in the twenty-seventh embodiment. 181 (a) and 181 (b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG. Further, in FIG. 181 (a), when the player views the game board 27013 from a position higher than usual (for example, a viewpoint having the same height as the upper end of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) in the gravity direction). The line of sight is indicated by a two-dot chain line, and in FIG. 181 (b), the player views the game board 27013 from a normal position (for example, a viewpoint having the same height as the substantially intermediate position in the gravity direction of the game board 27013). Is indicated by a two-dot chain line.

  Note that the gaming board 27013 in the twenty-seventh embodiment is similar to the gaming board 13 in the first embodiment. The gaming board 27013 includes a base plate 60 formed of a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the base plate 60. The center frame 86 (refer FIG. 2) arrange | positioned by the opening part formed in is provided. In addition, the game board 27013 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 76 and 77, a general winning opening 63, a first The winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80 and the like (see FIG. 2) are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). It is attached to the back side. Furthermore, in the twenty-seventh embodiment, a general winning opening unit 27150 is disposed in the opening of the second opening 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base 60.

  As shown in FIG. 181, the general winning opening unit 27150 disposed on the front side of the base plate 60 of the gaming board 27013 in the twenty-seventh embodiment includes a plate-like main body 27151 along the front of the base plate 60, And a decorative member 154 disposed on the back side of the main body 27151.

  The main body 27151 is formed of a transparent resin material, and the decoration of the pattern, characters, etc. (pattern) of the decorative member 154 disposed on the back side can be visually recognized from the player side. Further, the main body 27151 has an end face in front view inclined toward the back side, an inclined surface 27151a having an arcuate cross section that is recessed toward the inside of the main body 27151, and the back side of the main body 27151 from the front side. And a concave portion 151b that is recessed toward the main body.

  The inclined surface 27151a has an inclination angle θ2 with respect to the front surface of the base plate 60 of the imaginary line IL2 that connects the connection point between the front surface of the main body 27151 and the end portion on the back surface is set to be larger than 45 degrees. Is done. Thereby, the protrusion distance to the outer side of the inclined surface 2751a can be made small, and it can suppress that the external shape of the main-body part 27151 becomes large.

  In addition, as described above, the inclined surface 27151a is formed in a circular arc shape that is recessed inside the main body 27151, so that the player visually recognizes the decorative members 60c and 154 via the inclined surface 27151a. In this case, the region in which the decoration of each of the decorative members 60c and 154 can be visually recognized can be expanded through the inclined surface 27151a due to the concave shape. That is, the light incident on the inclined surface 27151a from each of the decorative members 60c and 154 is refracted and condensed toward the player's viewpoint by the cross-sectional arc shape recessed toward the inside of the main body 27151. Can do. As a result, it is possible to reduce the patterns and characters (pictures) that are visually recognized through the inclined surface 27151a, thereby making it difficult for the player to understand the connection between the decorative members 60c and 154. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the positional deviation of the decorative members 60c and 154, and to prevent the player's interest from being impaired.

  Furthermore, the decorative member 154 disposed inside the recess 151b has a horizontal line HR2 in which the end position passes through an intermediate position between the connection point between the front surface of the main body 27151 and the rear surface end. And set on the back side of the inclined surface 27151a.

  Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 181 (a), when the player visually recognizes the general prize opening unit 27150 and the base plate 60 from a position higher than usual, the decoration member 60c and the decoration member 154 The incident angle when light traveling in the horizontal direction through the main body portion 26151 on the front side of the connecting portion enters the outside of the main body portion 26151 from the inclined surface 26151a is increased. Accordingly, the light traveling in the horizontal direction through the main body 27151 on the front side of the connecting portion with the decorative member 154 is easily refracted toward the player's viewpoint, so that the player can move from the normal position with respect to the game board 27013. When the general prize opening unit 27150 is visually recognized from a higher position, the connecting portions of the decorative members 154 and 60c can be easily seen from the front side. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the difference in the position in the front-rear direction of the connecting portions of the decorative members 154, 60c, so that the decorative member 154 of the general prize opening unit 27150, the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60, Can be easily recognized as one decoration.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 181 (b), when the player visually recognizes the game board 27013 from the normal height, the general winning opening unit 27150 and the base plate 60, the concave shape of the inclined surface 27151a makes the decoration. The incident angle when light traveling in the horizontal direction through the main body portion 27151 on the front side of the connecting portion with the member 154 enters the outside of the main body portion 27151 from the inclined surface 27151a approximates a right angle, so that it is emitted to the outside of the main body portion 27151. Refracted light can be made difficult to refract. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's line of sight from being bent when passing through the inclined surface 27151a, and the front-rear direction displacement between the decorative member 154 of the general winning opening unit 27150 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 is suppressed. Can be made difficult for the player to recognize. As a result, the decoration member 154 of the general winning a prize opening unit 27150 and the decoration member 60c of the base plate 60 can be combined and easily recognized as one decoration.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 182 (a), a game board 28013 in the 28th embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the inner surface of the end of the recess 151b provided in the main body 151 of the general prize opening unit 150 is parallel to the plate thickness direction of the main body 151 has been described. The inner surface of the end portion of the recess 28151b in the embodiment is inclined inward toward the recessed bottom surface 151b2. In addition, about the part same as said each embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 182 (a) is a cross-sectional view of a game board 28013 in the twenty-eighth embodiment. Note that FIG. 182 (a) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. In FIG. 182 (a), the line of sight when the player views the game board 28013 from a normal position (for example, a viewpoint having the same height as the substantially intermediate position in the gravity direction of the game board 28013) is a two-dot chain line. Illustrated.

  Note that the gaming board 28013 in the twenty-eighth embodiment is similar to the gaming board 13 in the first embodiment, the gaming board 28013 is a base plate 60 formed of a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and the base plate 60 The center frame 86 (refer FIG. 2) arrange | positioned by the opening part formed in is provided. The game board 28013 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 76 and 77, a general winning opening 63, a first The winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80 and the like (see FIG. 2) are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). It is attached to the back side. Further, in the twenty-eighth embodiment, a general winning opening unit 28150 is disposed in the opening portion of the second opening 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base 60.

  As shown in FIG. 182 (a), the general winning opening unit 28150 disposed on the front side of the base plate 60 of the game board 28013 in the twenty-eighth embodiment is a plate-like main body portion 28151 along the front of the base plate 60. And a decorative member 154 disposed on the back side of the main body 28151.

  The main body 28151 is made of a transparent resin material, and the decoration of the pattern, characters, etc. (pictures) of the decorative member 154 disposed on the back side can be viewed from the player side. The main body portion 28151 mainly includes an inclined surface 151a whose end portion is inclined toward the back surface side, and a concave portion 28151b that is recessed from the back surface of the main body portion 28151 toward the front surface side.

  As described above, the inner side surface 28151b3 of the concave portion 28151b is located outward from the concave bottom surface 151b2 side toward the concave opening side (from the arrow F direction side to the arrow B direction side) on the end side of the main body portion 28151. Inclined toward the surface. In this case, the inclination angle θ3 (see FIG. 182 (a)) of the inner side surface 28151b3 with respect to the front surface of the base plate 60 in the cross section of the recess 28151b is the inclination angle θ4 of the inclined surface 151a of the main body 151 with respect to the base plate 60 (FIG. 182). (See (a)).

  Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 182 (a), when the player visually recognizes the decorative member 60c via the inclined surface 28151a of the main body 28151, the player bends by passing through the main body 28151 and is visually recognized by the player. It is possible to bring the decoration position of the virtual image closer to the decoration position of the real image when the decoration member 60c is viewed without using the main body 28151. In other words, the position of the decorative member 60c that is refracted by the inclined surface 28151a of the main body 28151 and the inner side surface 28151b3 of the recess can be positioned on the extension line of the player's line of sight. As a result, when the player visually recognizes the decoration member 60c through the main body 28151, it is possible to suppress the positional deviation of the decoration caused by the refraction of light and to prevent the player's interest from being impaired.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 182 (b), a game board 29013 in the 29th embodiment will be described. In the twenty-eighth embodiment, the case where the inclination angle θ3 of the inner side surface 29151b3 with respect to the front surface of the base plate 60 in the cross section of the recess 29151b is set smaller than the inclination angle θ4 of the inclined surface 151a with respect to the base plate 60 has been described. In the twenty-ninth embodiment, the inclination angle θ5 of the inner side surface 29151b3 with respect to the front surface of the base plate 60 in the cross section of the recess 29151b is set larger than the inclination angle θ6 of the inclined surface 151a with respect to the base plate 60. In addition, about the part same as said each embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 182 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 29013 in the 29th embodiment. Note that FIG. 182 (b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. In FIG. 182 (b), the line of sight when the player views the game board 29013 from a normal position (for example, a viewpoint having the same height as the substantially intermediate position in the gravity direction of the game board 29013) is a two-dot chain line. Illustrated.

  Note that the gaming board 29013 in the 29th embodiment is similar to the gaming board 13 in the first embodiment. The gaming board 29013 includes a base plate 60 formed from a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the base plate 60. The center frame 86 (refer FIG. 2) arrange | positioned by the opening part formed in is provided. The game board 29013 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 76 and 77, a general winning port 63, a first The winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80 and the like (see FIG. 2) are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). It is attached to the back side. Furthermore, in the twenty-ninth embodiment, a general winning opening unit 29150 is disposed in the opening of the second opening 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base 60.

  As shown in FIG. 182 (b), the general winning opening unit 29150 disposed on the front side of the base plate 60 of the game board 29013 in the 29th embodiment is a plate-shaped main body 29151 along the front of the base plate 60. And a decorative member 154 disposed on the back side of the main body 29151.

  The main body 29151 is made of a transparent resin material, and the decoration of the pattern, characters, etc. (pictures) of the decorative member 154 disposed on the back side can be visually recognized from the player side. The main body 29151 mainly includes an inclined surface 151a whose end is inclined toward the back surface side, and a concave portion 29151b that is recessed from the back surface of the main body portion 29151 toward the front surface side.

  As described above, the inner side surface 29151b3 of the recessed portion 29151b is located outward from the recessed bottom surface 151b2 side toward the recessed opening side (from the arrow F direction side to the arrow B direction side) and toward the end portion side of the main body 29151. Inclined toward the surface. In this case, the inclination angle θ5 (see FIG. 182 (b)) of the inner side surface 29151b3 with respect to the front surface of the base plate 60 in the cross section of the recess 29151b is the inclination angle θ6 of the inclined surface 151a of the main body 151 with respect to the base plate 60 (FIG. 182). (See (b)).

  Thereby, as shown in FIG. 182 (b), when the player visually recognizes the decorative member 60c through the inclined surface 151a of the main body 29151, the player from the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 through the inclined surface 151a. The light applied to the viewpoint can be light applied in a direction substantially orthogonal to the inclination of the inner surface 29151b3 of the recess 29151b. Therefore, when light enters the inner surface 29151b3 of the recess 29151b from the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154, the light can be prevented from being refracted. As a result, when light is incident on the inner side surface 29151b3 of the recess 29151b, the light is refracted, so that it is possible to prevent the connecting portion of the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 from being visually recognized from the upper side in the gravitational direction. And the decoration member 154 can be easily made visible to the player as one decoration.

  In addition, since a predetermined gap is provided between the inner surface 29151b3 of the recess 29151b and the end of the decorative member 154, a dimensional error that occurs when the decorative member 154 is formed by the gap can be absorbed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 183 (a), a general winning opening unit 30150 in the thirtieth embodiment will be described. In the twenty-eighth embodiment, the case where the inner side surface 28151b3 of the concave portion 28151b is formed to be inclined has been described. However, in the thirty-third embodiment, the inner side surface 30151b3 of the concave portion 30151b bulges inside the concave portion 28151b and It is curved and formed in an arc shape. In addition, about the part same as said each embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Note that the gaming board 30013 in the thirtieth embodiment is similar to the gaming board 13 in the first embodiment. The gaming board 30013 includes a base plate 60 formed of a substantially rectangular plate member in front view, and the base plate 60. The center frame 86 (refer FIG. 2) arrange | positioned by the opening part formed in is provided. The game board 30013 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 76 and 77, a general winning port 63, a first The winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80 and the like (see FIG. 2) are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). It is attached to the back side. Furthermore, in the thirtieth embodiment, the general winning a prize opening unit 30150 is disposed in the opening of the second opening 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base 60.

  FIG. 183 (a) is a cross-sectional view of a general prize opening unit 30150 in the thirtieth embodiment. Note that FIG. 183 (a) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. In FIG. 183 (a), the line of sight when the player views the game board 30013 from a normal position (for example, a viewpoint having the same height as the substantially intermediate position in the gravity direction of the game board 30013) is a two-dot chain line. Is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 183 (a), the general winning a prize opening unit 30150 disposed on the front side of the base plate 60 of the gaming board 30013 in the thirty-first embodiment is a plate-shaped main body 30151 along the front of the base plate 60. And a decorative member 154 disposed on the back side of the main body 30151.

  The main body 30151 is formed of a transparent resin material, and the decoration of the pattern, characters, etc. (pictures) of the decorative member 154 disposed on the back side can be viewed from the player side. The main body 30151 mainly includes an inclined surface 151 a whose end is inclined toward the back surface side, and a concave portion 30151 b that is recessed from the back surface of the main body portion 30151 toward the front surface.

  The inner side surface 30151b3 of the recess 30151b is formed so as to be inclined toward the end side of the main body 30151 from the concave bottom surface 151b2 side toward the concave opening side (from the arrow F direction side to the arrow B direction side). At the same time, the cross section bulges in an arc shape toward the inside of the recess 30151b. Thereby, it is possible to easily direct the line of sight of the player who visually recognizes the decorative member 60c through the recess 30151b in a direction (horizontal direction) orthogonal to the decorative surface of the decorative member 60c. As a result, when the decoration of the game board 30013 is visually recognized through the recess 30151b, the end of the decoration member 154 is suppressed from being visually recognized, and the decoration member 60c and the decoration member 154 are given to the player as one decoration. Easy to see.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 183 (b), the general winning a prize opening unit 31150 in the thirty-first embodiment will be described. In the said 1st Embodiment, although the inclined surface 151a demonstrated the case where a cross section was formed as a linear surface, the inclined surface 31151a in 31st Embodiment is provided with several recessed part 31151a1. In addition, about the part same as said each embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 183 (b) is a cross-sectional view of a general prize opening unit 31150 in the thirty-first embodiment. Note that FIG. 183 (b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. Further, the gaming board 31013 in the thirty-first embodiment is similar to the gaming board 13 in the first embodiment. The gaming board 31013 includes a base plate 60 formed from a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the base plate 60. The center frame 86 (refer FIG. 2) arrange | positioned by the opening part formed in is provided. In addition, the game board 31013 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 76 and 77, a general winning opening 63, a first The winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80 and the like (see FIG. 2) are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). It is attached to the back side. Further, in the thirty-first embodiment, a general winning opening unit 31150 is disposed in the opening portion of the second opening 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base 60.

  As shown in FIG. 183 (b), the general winning opening unit 31150 disposed on the front side of the base plate 60 of the game board 31013 in the thirty-first embodiment is a plate-shaped main body 31151 along the front of the base plate 60. And a decorative member 154 disposed on the back side of the main body 31151.

  The main body 31151 is formed of a transparent resin material, and the decoration of the pattern, characters, etc. (pictures) of the decorative member 154 disposed on the back side can be viewed from the player side. The main body 31151 mainly includes an inclined surface 31151a whose end is inclined toward the back surface side, and a recess 151b that is recessed from the back surface of the main body portion 31151 toward the front surface side.

  The inclined surface 31151a includes a plurality of recessed portions 31151a1 that are recessed in a direction perpendicular to the inclined direction. The plurality of recessed portions 31151a1 are arranged in parallel in the direction of inclination of the inclined surface 31151a and extend along the end of the main body portion 31151 in a front view. Thereby, the light incident on the inside of the main body 31151 and emitted from the end portion (inclined surface 31151a) of the main body 31151 can be irregularly reflected. Accordingly, the player can visually recognize the decoration visually recognized through the inclined surface 31151a.

  Here, since the end of the decorative member 154 disposed in the main body 31151 is disposed on the back side of the inclined surface 31151a as in the first embodiment, the decoration of the decorative member 154 and the decoration of the decorative member 60c are provided. It is possible to make the player visually recognize the connected portion of the player in a blurred state. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the connection of the decoration members, and it is easy for the player to recognize the decoration of the decoration member 60c and the decoration of the decoration member 154 as one decoration.

<Adjustment means for adjusting the flow direction by adjusting the distance between the opposing faces>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 184 to 186, a special prize-winning device 32550 in the thirty-second embodiment will be described. In the thirteenth embodiment, the facing distance between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 is adjusted by sandwiching the shim member SI between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570. As described above, in the thirty-second embodiment, a case will be described in which the facing distance between the first path member 32560 and the second path member 32570 is adjusted by the screw fastening position. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 184 and 185, the configuration of the special prize-winning device 32550 in the thirty-second embodiment will be described. FIG. 184 is an exploded perspective front view of the special prize apparatus 32550 in the thirty-second embodiment. FIG. 185 (a) is a front view of the special winning device 32550, FIG. 185 (b) is a top view of the special winning device 32550, and FIG. 185 (c) is a CLXXXVc-CLXXXVc of FIG. 185 (a). It is sectional drawing of the special prize-winning apparatus 32550 in a line.

  As shown in FIGS. 184 and 185, the special prize-winning device 32550 in the thirty-second embodiment has a first path member 32560 disposed on the front side and a first path member 32560 disposed on the back side of the first path member 32560. A two-path member 32570.

  The first path member 32560 is formed of a non-light transmissive material. Further, the first path member 32560 is formed in a plate shape and is disposed on the front side of the game area, and projects from the left and right ends of the front plate 32564 to the back side (base plate 60 side). A first wall portion 32565.

  The front plate 32564 is a plate member serving as a wall portion on the front side of the flow path of a game ball formed between facing a second path member 32570 described later, and is formed from a non-light-transmitting material. This makes it impossible for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down inside the special prize-winning device 33550. As a result, the player can be prevented from grasping the flow direction of the game ball inside the special winning device 33550, and the player can be prevented from stopping the game.

  The first wall portion 32565 is a portion connected (fastened) to the second path member 32570, and is opposed to the through hole 32565c penetrating in a circular shape in the left-right direction (plate thickness direction) and the two first wall portions 32565. A plurality of side projections 32565d that are juxtaposed on the surface and projecting in a triangular cross-section, and are erected from the upper and lower ends of the first wall 32565 on the opposite surface side of the second wall 32526. It mainly includes a standing portion 32565e.

  The through-hole 32565c is a through-hole through which a screw for fastening the first path member 32560 to the second path member 32570 is inserted, and is formed at one location on each first wall portion 32565.

  The one-side protrusion 32565d is a portion that is inserted into the other-side recess 32573c of the second path member 32570, which will be described later, and positions the first path member 32560 with respect to the second path member 32570. -B direction) and extend in the vertical direction (arrow UD).

  The standing portion 32565e is a portion that covers the one-side protrusion 32565d and makes the one-side protrusion 32565d invisible to the player, and is set larger than the protrusion distance of the one-side protrusion 32565d. Thus, the player can recognize that the position of the first path member 32560 with respect to the second path member 32570 is suppressed by preventing the position where the one-side protrusion 32565d is inserted into the other-side recess 32573c. Can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the player from judging that the player is disadvantaged and not playing the pachinko machine 10.

  The second path member 32570 includes a plate-like base plate 32571 that faces the front plate 32564 of the first path member 32560 and the left and right ends (in the direction of the arrow LR) of the base plate 32571. And a fourth wall portion 32573 protruding from the front plate 32564 side.

  The base plate 32571 is a member that forms a pitching path for game balls in a gap between the first path member 32560 and the front plate 32564 facing the front plate 32564. The base plate 32571 is in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) of the base plate 32571 in front view. The size is smaller than the front plate 32564. Thereby, it can suppress that the base board 32571 is visually recognized from the player side. As a result, it can be prevented that the player visually recognizes the facing distance between the base plate 32571 and the front plate 32564 and determines that the game is advantageous or disadvantageous.

  The base plate 32571 is positioned below the fourth convex portion 32571b and the fifth convex portion 32571c projecting toward the first path member 32560, and below the fourth convex portion 32571b and the fifth convex portion 32571c, and the front plate 32564. 6th convex part 32571d protrudingly provided in the side.

  The 4th convex part 32571b and the 5th convex part 32571c are protrusions for guiding the game ball flowing down inside the special prize-winning device 32550, and the base plate 32571 from the outer side in the left-right direction (the outer side in the direction of the arrow LR). It is formed to be inclined downward toward the center of the plate 32571. As a result, a game ball that flows down between the opposing side of the base plate 32571 and the front plate 32564 and collides with the fourth convex portion 32571b or the fifth convex portion 32571c is transferred to the fourth convex portion 32571b or the fifth convex portion 32571c. It can be made easy to flow down in the inclination direction.

  The sixth convex portion 32571d is formed below the fourth convex portion 32571b and the fifth convex portion 32571c described above, and is formed at a substantially central position in the left-right direction of the base plate 32571. Further, the sixth convex portion 32571d extends in the direction of gravity. As a result, the game balls guided by the fourth convex portion 32571b or the fifth convex portion 32571c flow down between the opposing sides of the base plate 32571 and the front plate 32564, and are distributed to either the left or right of the sixth convex portion 32571d. .

  The two opposite fourth wall portions 32573 are composed of a plurality of other concave portions 32573c that are recessed toward the inner side in the opposing direction on the side surface on the outer side in the opposing direction, and two adjustment holes 32573b that penetrate in the opposing direction. And a housing portion 32573d that is formed on the inner side in the opposing direction of the fourth wall portion 32573 and surrounds the adjustment hole 32573b.

  A plurality of other-side recesses 32573c are arranged side by side in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) of the fourth wall portion 32573 and extend in the direction of gravity. The other-side recess 32573c is formed to have a substantially triangular cross section, and the cross-sectional shape thereof is set to be substantially the same as the one-side protrusion 32565d. Accordingly, the first path member 32560 can be positioned by inserting the one-side protrusion 32565d into the other-side recess 32573c.

  The adjustment hole 32573b is a part that allows the tip of the screw inserted through the through hole 32565c of the first path member 32560 described above to be inserted into the housing portion 32573d side. In addition, the adjustment hole 32573b is formed as a long hole that is long in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), and thus the movement of the first path member 32560 with respect to the second path member 32570 is allowed.

  The housing portion 32573d is formed in a U-shaped cross section when viewed from the front, and both ends thereof are coupled to the fourth wall portion 32573. The accommodating portion 32573d extends from the front surface of the base plate 32571 to the front end portion of the fourth wall portion 32573. Thereby, the screwing plate 32590 to which the screw inserted through the through hole 32565c and the adjustment hole 32573b is screwed can be accommodated in the space surrounded by the accommodating portion 32573d.

  The screw plate 32590 is set to a dimension that can be inserted into the space formed by the accommodating portion 32573d, and the width dimension in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) is the dimension in the front-rear direction of the space formed by the accommodating portion 32573d ( It is set smaller than the projecting dimension on the front side of the fourth wall 32573. Accordingly, the screwing plate 32590 can be inserted inside the housing portion 32573d and can be moved in the front-rear direction.

  The screwing plate 32590 includes a screwing hole 32591 for screwing a screw inserted through the through hole 32565c and the adjustment hole 32573b, and two second ends from both ends in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) of the screwing hole 32591. And a guide protrusion 32592 protruding toward the facing surface of the four wall part 32573.

  The screw holes 32591 are formed in two places, and are formed side by side in the vertical direction. The two screw holes 32591 are formed at positions where the distance dimension of one screw hole 32591 from the upper end is the same as the distance dimension of the other screw hole 32591 from the lower end. Accordingly, when the screw groove of one of the screw holes 32591 is crushed, the screw can be fastened using the other screw hole 32591 by turning the screw plate 32590 upside down.

  The guide protrusion 32592 is provided with a predetermined amount of protrusions on both outer sides in the left-right direction from both front and rear end portions, and includes an inclined surface inclined toward the screwing hole 32591. Accordingly, the tip of the screw inserted through the through hole 32565c and the adjustment hole 32573b can be guided to the screwing hole 32591. In particular, in the present embodiment, when the screwing hole 32591 is broken, the new screwing hole 32591 can be used by reversing the upper and lower sides. In this case, the position of the screw hole 32591 with respect to the tip of the screw is likely to be out of alignment, so that the configuration in which the screw tip is guided to the screw hole 32591 as in this embodiment is particularly effective.

  The adjustment method of the 1st path | route member 32560 with respect to the 2nd path | route member 32570 of the special prize apparatus 32550 comprised as mentioned above is first inserted in the through-hole 32565c of the 1st path | route member 32560, and screwed in the screwing board 32590. Loosen the screw to be joined. Thereby, the movement of the first path member 32560 with respect to the second path member 32570 is allowed.

  Next, the one-side protrusion 32565d of the first path member 32560 inserted into the other-side recess 32573c of the second path member 32570 by elastically deforming the first wall part 32565 outward in the left-right direction with respect to the front plate 32564. Is pulled out from the other-side recess 32573c, and the position in the front-rear direction is adjusted to return the elastic deformation of the first wall portion 32655 and the one-side protrusion 32565d is inserted into the other-side recess 32573c again. Accordingly, the first path member 32560 can be temporarily fixed (positioned) with respect to the second path member 32570.

  Finally, the adjustment of the first path member 32560 with respect to the second path member 32570 is completed by retightening the screw inserted into the through hole 32565c of the first path member 32560 and screwed into the screwing plate 32590. .

  According to this, as described above, since the one-side protrusion 32565d and the other-side recess 32573c are formed in corresponding shapes, the one-side protrusion 32565d is connected to the other side by fastening the screw after temporarily fixing. It can be pushed into the recess 32573c. Therefore, it can be adjusted so that it always becomes the same position in each position which can insert the one side protrusion part 32565d in the other side recessed part 32573c. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of variations in the flow of game balls by the operator who performs the adjustment, and the adjustment can be simplified.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 186, position adjustment of the second path member 32570 of the first path member 32560 will be described. FIG. 186 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the special prize-winning device 32550, and FIG. 186 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the special prize-winning device 32550 along the CLXXXVIb-CLXXXVIb line in FIG. 186 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 186, when the first path member 32560 on the left side (arrow L direction side) is pulled out to the front side (arrow F direction side) with respect to the second path member 32570, as shown in FIG. 185. In addition, the distance between the front plate 32564 and the base plate 32571 on the left side is wider than that on the right side. In this case, the game ball flowing down between the front plate 32564 and the base plate 32571 facing each other is less likely to collide with the left fourth convex portion 32571b, and accordingly, the game ball can easily flow down between the left facing. . Thereby, it is possible to easily discharge the game ball flowing down between the front plate 32564 and the base plate 32571 from the lower left side.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 187, a special prize device 33550 in the thirty-third embodiment will be described. In the thirty-second embodiment, the case where the position of the second path member 32570 with respect to the second path member 32570 is adjusted with the first wall portion 32565 of the first path member 32560 elastically deformed has been described. In the form, the first wall portion 33565 is variably connected to the front plate 32564. In addition, about the part same as said each embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 187 (a) is an exploded perspective front view of the first path member 33560 in the thirty-third embodiment, and FIG. 187 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the special prize-winning device 33550. Note that FIG. 187 (b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 186 (c).

  As shown in FIG. 187, the special prize-winning device 33550 in the thirty-third embodiment includes a first path member 33560 disposed on the front side and a second path member disposed on the back side of the first path member 33560. 32570.

  The first path member 33560 includes a front plate 33564 that is formed in a plate shape and disposed on the front side of the game area, and a first wall portion 33565 that is pivotally supported on the left and right ends of the front plate 33564. .

  The front plate 32564 is a plate member serving as a wall portion on the front side of the flow path of a game ball formed between facing a second path member 32570 described later, and is formed from a non-light-transmitting material. This makes it impossible for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down inside the special prize-winning device 33550. As a result, the player can be prevented from grasping the flow direction of the game ball inside the special prize-winning device 33550, and the player can be prevented from quitting the game.

  The holding portion 33564e is a member that holds a rod RD that pivotally supports a first wall portion 33565, which will be described later, and is set to a size that allows the rod RD to be inserted into an annular inner portion. In addition, the holding portion 33564e is formed at two locations that are separated by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction, and the axis of the annular portion of the holding portion 33564e is coaxial in the vertical direction. Of the two holding portions 33564e, the holding portion 33564e formed on the lower side is formed at the lower end portion of the front plate 33564, and the lower end side is closed. Thereby, when the rod RD is inserted into the inside of the holding part 33564e from the upper side of the holding part 33564e, it is possible to suppress the rod RD from dropping (extracting) from the lower end of the holding part 33564e.

  The first wall portion 33565 is a portion connected (fastened) to the second path member 32570, and includes a through-hole 32565c penetrating in a circular shape in the left-right direction (plate thickness direction), and two first wall portions 32565. A plurality of side projections 32565d that are arranged in parallel on the opposing surface and project in a triangular shape, and two second wall portions 32666 from the upper and lower ends (in the direction of the arrow UD) of the first wall portion 32565. It mainly includes a standing portion 32565e that is erected on the opposite surface side, and a pivotal support portion 33565f that protrudes in a circular ring shape on the front plate 33564 side.

  The pivoted support portion 33565f is a portion into which the rod RD to be inserted into the holding portion 33564e of the front plate 33564 described above is inserted, and the inner portion formed in an annular shape is set to a size that allows the rod RD to be inserted. . Further, the pivoted support portion 33565f is formed at two places that are separated from each other by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction, and the axis of the annular portion of the pivoted support portion 33565f is coaxial in the vertical direction. Further, the holding portion 33564e formed above the holding portion 33564e described above is disposed between the two pivoted support portions 33565f.

  As a result, the front plate 33564 and the first wall portion 33565 are connected by arranging the holding portion 33564e and the pivoted support portion 33565f on the same axis and inwardly connecting the holding portion 33564e and the pivoted support portion 33565f from above. By inserting the rod RD, the first wall 33565 is disposed on the front plate 33564 in a rotatable state.

  Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 187 (b), when the front plate 33564 of the first path member 33560 is disposed non-parallel to the base plate 32571 of the second path member 32570, the front plate 33564 In contrast, the angle of the first wall portion 33565 can be changed.

  That is, in the thirty-second embodiment, when the front plate 32564 of the first path member 32560 is disposed non-parallel to the base plate 32571 of the second path member 32570, the first wall portion with respect to the front plate 32564. It is necessary to hold 33565 in an elastically deformed state. Further, when adjusting the position of the first path member 32560 with respect to the second path member 32570, the first wall portion 32565 is elastically deformed outward in the left-right direction with respect to the front plate 32564, so that the second path member 32570 The one-side protrusion 32565d of the first path member 32560 inserted into the other-side recess 32573c needs to be pulled out from the other-side recess 32573c. Therefore, the connection part of the front board 32564 and the 1st wall part 32565 may be damaged.

  On the other hand, in the thirty-third embodiment, since the first wall portion 33565 can be rotated with respect to the front plate 33564, it is not necessary to elastically deform the first path member 33560, and the front plate 33564 and the first wall are eliminated. It can suppress that a connection part with the part 33565 is damaged.

  The adjustment method of the 1st path | route member 33560 with respect to the 2nd path | route member 32570 of the special winning apparatus 33550 comprised as mentioned above is first inserted in the through-hole 32565c of the 1st path | route member 33560, and screwed in the screwing board 32590. Loosen the screw to be joined. As a result, the movement of the first path member 33560 with respect to the second path member 32570 is allowed.

  Next, the one-side protrusion 32565d of the first path member 33560 inserted in the other-side recess 32573c of the second path member 32570 is rotated by rotating the first wall part 33565 outward in the left-right direction with respect to the front plate 33564. After pulling out from the other-side recess 32573c, the position in the front-rear direction is adjusted, and the rotation of the first wall portion 33565 is returned at the adjusted position to insert the one-side protrusion 32565d into the other-side recess 32573c again. Thereby, the first path member 32560 can be temporarily fixed to the second path member 32570.

  Finally, the adjustment of the first path member 33560 with respect to the second path member 32570 is completed by retightening the screw inserted into the through hole 32565c of the first path member 33560 and screwed into the screwing plate 32590. .

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 188 to 190, the special prize-winning device 34550 in the 34th embodiment will be described. In the thirteenth embodiment, the case where the direction in which the game balls flow down is adjusted by adjusting the facing distance between the front and rear plates of the special prize-winning device 13550 has been described. The direction in which the game ball flows down can be adjusted by changing the position of the projecting projection. In addition, about the part same as said each embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, the overall configuration of the special prize-winning device 34550 will be described with reference to FIGS. 188 and 189. FIG. 188 (a) is a front view of the game board 34013 in the thirty-fourth embodiment, and FIG. 188 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 34013 taken along the line CLXXXVIIIb-CLXXXVIIIb of FIG. 188 (a). FIG. 189 is an exploded perspective front view of the game board 34013.

  As shown in FIGS. 188 and 189, the special prize-winning device 34550 in the thirty-fourth embodiment is arranged above the first prize-winning port 64 provided in the game board 34013. Further, in the special winning device 34550, the center line in the left-right direction of the first path member 34560 arranged on the front side is arranged in the same straight line as the center line in the left-right direction of the first winning port 64 in front view. .

  Furthermore, the special prize-winning device 34550 and the first prize-winning port 64 are arranged at positions where the diameters of the game balls are separated in the direction of gravity (arrow UD direction). Thereby, the player can visually recognize the game ball discharged from the special winning device 34550.

  The special winning device 34550 includes a first path member 34560 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) and a second path member disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the first path member 34560. 34570 and a fixture 34553 screwed to the back side of the second path member 34570.

  The first path member 34560 is a plate member serving as a wall portion on the front side of the flow path of a game ball formed between facing a second path member 34570 described later, and is formed of a non-light-transmitting material. This makes it impossible for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down inside the special prize-winning device 34550. As a result, the player can be prevented from grasping the flow direction of the game ball inside the special prize-winning device 34550, and the player can be prevented from stopping the game.

  Further, the first path member 34560 is formed in a plate shape, and is disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the game area, and from the left and right ends of the front plate 34564 to the back side (arrows). 1st wall part 34565 standingly arranged by the (B direction side).

  The front plate 34564 is a plate member serving as a wall portion on the front side of the flow path of a game ball formed between facing a second path member 32570 described later, and is based on a base plate 34571 of the second path member 34570 described later. Also, the outer shape in front view is large. Thereby, it is possible to make the second path member 34570 disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the first path member 34560 difficult to see on the front plate 34564. Therefore, it can suppress that the 2nd path | route member 34570 is visually recognized from the player side. Therefore, when the position of the 2nd path member 34570 is changed, it can control that the change is recognized by a player.

  The first wall portion 34565 is a portion fastened to the base plate 34060 of the game board 13 and has a substantially L-shaped cross section. The dimension of the first wall portion 34565 on the back side is a dimension X3 (see FIG. 188 (b)) between the front plate 34564 and a fourth convex portion 34571b of the base plate 34571 described later, which is the diameter of the game ball. Is set to a slightly larger value.

  The first wall portion 34565 has a bent portion 34565g bent from the standing tip portion in a direction parallel to the front surface of the base plate 34060, and a through-hole 34565g1 penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the bent portion 34565g. The The through-hole 34565g1 is a hole through which a screw is inserted, and the first path member 34560 can be fastened to the base plate 34060 by screwing the screw inserted through the through-hole 34565g1 into the base plate 34060.

  The second path member 34570 includes a plate-like base plate 34571 facing the front plate 34564 of the first path member 34560, and a support portion 34579 protruding in a columnar shape from the back side of the base plate 34571.

  The base plate 34571 is a member that forms a pitching path for game balls through a gap between the first path member 34560 and the front plate 34564 facing the front plate 34564, and is formed at a position that is separated from the front plate 34564 by a predetermined amount. The base plate 34571 includes a fourth convex portion 34571b that protrudes toward the front plate 34564 side. Thereby, it is possible to change the direction in which the game ball flowing down between the opposing side of the base plate 34571 and the front plate 34564 collides with the fourth convex portion 34571b and flows down.

  The support portion 34579 is a portion that pivotally supports the second path member 34570, and is formed at a position where the columnar shaft is coaxial with the axis of the base plate 34571 (the center of the base plate 34571). Further, a circular through hole 34060d is opened at a position corresponding to the support portion 34579, and the support portion 34579 is inserted inside the through hole 34060d in the base plate 34060 of the game board 34014. Thus, the second path member 34570 is pivotally supported on the base plate 34060.

  The support portion 34579 has a fastening hole 34579a recessed at the projecting tip. The fastening hole 34579a is recessed on the same axis as the axis of the support portion 34579, and the inner peripheral surface is processed with a female screw. Thereby, the screw part 34553b of the fixture 34553 inserted through the through hole 34060d from the back side of the base plate 34060 can be screwed into the fastening hole 34579a.

  The fixture 34553 is a fastening member for fastening the above-described second path member 34570 to the base plate 34060 of the game board 34013, and protrudes to the front side of the operation part 34553a formed in a column shape. A screw part 34553b provided.

  The operation portion 34553a is a portion that is held by an operator who arranges the second path member 34570 on the base plate 34060, and is formed to have an outer shape larger than the through hole 34060d formed in the base plate 34060. Further, the operation portion 34553a is set to have an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the through hole 34060d of the base plate 34060.

  Accordingly, when the second path member 34570 is disposed on the base plate 34060 by screwing the screw portion 34553b of the fixture 34553 into the fastening hole 34579a, the fixture 34553 is connected to the base plate 34060 via the through hole 34060d. It is possible to suppress the escape to the front side.

  The screw portion 34553b is formed in a cylindrical shape coaxial with the axis of the operation portion 34553a, and a male screw is processed on the outer peripheral surface thereof. As described above, the screw portion 34553b is a portion that is screwed into the fastening hole 34579a of the second path member 34570, is set to have an outer diameter smaller than the through hole 34060d of the base plate 34060, and is inserted through the through hole 34060d. The second passage member 34570 is screwed into the fastening hole 34579a.

  According to the special winning device 34550 configured as described above, when changing the discharge position of the game ball discharged from the special winning device 34550, the operator is formed on the base plate 34060 of the game board 13. A hand (arm) is inserted from the front side (arrow F direction side) of the game board 13 to the back side (arrow B direction side) of the base board 34060 through the one opening 60a (center frame 86), and the fixture 34553 The operation unit 34553a is accessed.

  Next, the operation portion 34553a is rotated to loosen the screw portion 34553b screwed into the fastening hole 34579a of the second path member 34570. As a result, the second path member 34570 can be rotated and displaced about the support part 34579, the second path member 34570 is rotated, and the position of the fourth convex part 34571b of the second path member 34570 is changed. When the position of the fourth convex portion 34571b is changed, the position at which the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 34550 collides with the fourth convex portion 34571b is changed, so that the gaming ball discharged from the special winning device 34550 is changed. The discharge position can be changed.

  In this case, as described above, the base plate 34571 of the second path member 34570 is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front, and the support portion 34579 is formed coaxially with the axis thereof, so that the second path member 34570 is rotated. In this case, it is possible to suppress a change in the arrangement of the second path member 34570 with respect to the base plate 34060 in the front view. Therefore, it can suppress that a player recognizes that the 2nd path member 34570 was rotated. As a result, it is possible to suppress the player from judging that it is disadvantageous and not playing the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 190, a change in the discharge position of the game ball when the position of the fourth convex portion 34571b (second path member 34570) is changed will be described. 190 (a) to 190 (d) are cross-sectional views of the pachinko machine 34010 taken along line CXC-CXC in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 190, the fourth protrusion 34571b has a substantially V-shaped protruding shape when viewed from the front. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 190 (a), when the bent side of the V-shape is arranged on the lower side, the game balls flowing from above the special prize-winning device 34550 are sent to the central portion along the V-shaped slope. It can be done easily. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to flow into the winning opening 64 disposed below the special winning device 34550.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 190 (b), when the bent side of the V-shape is arranged on the upper side, the game balls flowing in from above the special prize-winning device 34550 are placed on the left and right ends along the V-shaped slope. Easy to throw. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to flow into the winning port 64 disposed below the special winning device 34550.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 190 (c) and 190 (b), when the bent side of the V-shape is arranged at either of the left and right ends, a game ball flowing from above the special prize-winning device 34550 is displayed. It is possible to make it easy to send a ball along the upper slope of the V shape, and to send a game ball sent to the lower side of the V shape without colliding with the upper side of the V shape along the lower slope of the V shape. Can do. Therefore, the direction in which the game ball is sent can be changed by the difference in the area where the game ball collides between the upper side of the V shape and the lower side of the V shape.

  Although not described in detail, the bent portion of the fourth convex portion 34571b can be disposed at a position other than the positions shown in FIGS. 190 (a) to 190 (d). For example, when the second path member 34570 is rotated 10 degrees in the right direction when viewed from the position shown in FIG. 190 (a), the game ball flowing from above the special prize-winning device 34550 is moved along the V-shaped inclination. The game ball can be easily discharged from a position slightly shifted to the left side (arrow L direction side) from the upper side of the winning opening 64 disposed below the special winning device 34550.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 191 to FIG. 193, a special winning device 35550 in the 35th embodiment will be described. In the thirty-fourth embodiment, the case where the second path member 34570 is rotated to change the position of the fourth convex part 34571b has been described. However, in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the second path member 35570 is slid to the fourth convex part. The position of the part 35571b is changed. In addition, about the part same as said each embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 191 and FIG. 192, a special prize device 35550 in the 35th embodiment will be described. FIG. 191 (a) is a front view of a game board 35013 in the 35th embodiment, and FIG. 191 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 35013 along the CXCIb-CXCIb line in FIG. 191 (a). FIG. 192 is an exploded perspective view of the special prize device 35550.

  As shown in FIGS. 191 and 192, the special prize-winning device 35550 in the thirty-fifth embodiment is arranged on the upper side (arrow U direction side) of the first prize opening 64 arranged in the game board 35013. In the special winning device 35550, the center line in the left-right direction of the first path member 35560 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) is the same straight line as the center line in the left-right direction of the first winning port 64 in front view. Arranged in a shape.

  Furthermore, the special prize-winning device 35550 and the first prize-winning port 64 are arranged at positions separated by the diameter of the game ball in the direction of gravity (arrow UD direction). Thereby, the player can visually recognize the game ball discharged from the special winning device 35550.

  The special winning device 34550 includes a first path member 35560 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) and a second path member disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the first path member 35560. 35570 and a fixture 34553 screwed to the back side of the second path member 35570.

  The first path member 35560 is a plate member serving as a wall portion on the front side of the flow path of a game ball formed between facing a second path member 35570, which will be described later, and is formed of a non-light transmissive material. This makes it impossible for the player to visually recognize the flow direction of the game ball inside the special prize device 35550. As a result, it is possible to suppress the player from grasping the flow direction of the game ball inside the special winning device 35550, and to suppress the player from quitting the game.

  In addition, the first path member 35560 is formed in a plate shape, and is disposed on the front side of the gaming area, and stands from the left and right ends of the front plate 34564 to the back side (arrow B direction side). And a first wall portion 35565 provided.

  The front plate 35564 is a plate member that serves as a wall portion on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the flow path of a game ball formed between facing a second path member 35570, which will be described later, and a second path member, which will be described later The outer shape in front view is larger than the base plate 35571 of 35570. Thereby, it is possible to make the second path member 35570 disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the first path member 35560 difficult to see with the front plate 35564. Therefore, it can suppress that the 2nd path | route member 35570 is visually recognized from the player side. Therefore, when the position of the 2nd path member 35570 is changed, it can control that the change is recognized by a player.

  The first wall portion 35565 is a portion fastened to the base plate 60 of the game board 35013. The first wall portion 34565 formed in a substantially L-shaped cross section has a standing dimension on the back side of the front plate 35564. A dimension X4 (see FIG. 191 (b)) between a base plate 35571 and a fourth convex portion 35571b, which will be described later, is set to a value slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball.

  The first wall portion 35565 has a bent portion 35565g that is bent in the direction parallel to the front surface of the base plate 60 from the standing tip portion, and penetrates the bent portion 35565g in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). The through-hole 35565g1 and the recessed portion 35565g2 that is recessed from the back surface of the bent portion 35565g toward the front side (arrow F direction side) are formed.

  The through hole 35565g1 is a hole through which a screw is inserted, and the first path member 35560 can be fastened to the base plate 60 by screwing the screw inserted through the through hole 35565g1 into the base plate 60.

  The recessed portion 35565g2 is a portion that accommodates both left and right (arrow LR direction side) ends of a base plate 35571 of the second path member 35570, which will be described later, and is recessed from the base end of the bent portion 35565g. The concave portion 35565g is recessed at the center in the vertical direction. Thus, when the left and right ends of the base plate 35571 are accommodated inside the recessed portion 35565g2, the left and right ends of the base plate 35571 can be hidden by the bent portion 35365g. Therefore, it can suppress that the position of the base board 35571 is recognized by the player. As a result, it is possible to suppress the player from judging that it is disadvantageous and not playing the game.

  In addition, the recessed dimension of the recessed portion 35565g2 is set to a depth dimension larger than the thickness of the base plate 35571, and the separation distance X5 between the left and right ends of the bent portion 35565g (see FIG. 191 (b)). The width dimension X6 in the left-right direction of the base plate 35571 (see FIG. 191 (b)) is set larger. Thereby, the base plate 35571 (second path member 35570) can be displaced in the left-right direction. A method of displacing the base plate 35571 (second path member 35570) will be described later.

  The second path member 35570 protrudes in a rectangular shape in a rear view from the plate-like base plate 35571 facing the front plate 35564 of the first path member 35560 and the back side (arrow B direction side) of the base plate 35571. A support portion 35579.

  The base plate 35571 is a member that forms a pitching path for game balls through a gap between the first path member 35560 and the front plate 35564 facing the front plate 35564, and is formed at a position that is separated from the front plate 35564 by a predetermined amount. In addition, the base plate 35571 includes a fourth convex portion 35571b that protrudes toward the front plate 35564 side (arrow F direction side). Thereby, the direction in which the game ball flowing down between the base plate 35571 and the front plate 35564 collides with the fourth convex portion 35571b can be changed.

  The support portion 35579 is a portion that pivotally supports the second path member 35570, and a cylindrical shaft is formed at a position that is coaxial with the axis of the base plate 34571 (the center of the base plate 34571). Further, the base plate 60 of the game board 34013 has a long hole-shaped sliding hole 35060e that is elongated in the left-right direction at a position corresponding to the supporting portion 35579, and the supporting portion 35579 is inserted inside the sliding hole 35060e. The As a result, the second path member 35570 is supported by the base plate 60.

  The sliding hole 35060e has a width dimension in the short direction (arrow UD direction) that is substantially the same as the vertical dimension (arrow UD direction) of the support part 35579, and the left and right sides of the support part 35579. The width dimension in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) is set larger than the direction (arrow LR direction) dimension. Thereby, the support part 35579 inserted inside the sliding hole 35060e can be slidable in the longitudinal direction of the sliding hole 35060e.

  In addition, the support portion 35579 is provided with a fastening hole 35579a at the protruding tip. The fastening hole 35579a can be internally threaded on the inner peripheral surface, and the screw portion 34553b of the fixture 34553 can be screwed into the fastening hole 35579a. The projecting dimension of the support portion 34579 is set to be smaller than the thickness dimension of the base plate 60, and the second path member 35570 is formed as a base by screwing the screw portion 34553b of the fixture 34553 into the fastening hole 35579a. It can be fixed to the plate 60.

  According to the special winning device 35550 configured as described above, when changing the discharge position of the game ball discharged from the special winning device 35550, the operator can change the first position formed on the base plate 60 of the game board 35013. A hand (arm) is inserted through the opening 60a (center frame 86) from the front side (arrow F direction side) of the game board 35013 to the back side (arrow B direction side) of the base plate 60, and the fixture 34553 The operation unit 34553a is accessed.

  Next, the operation portion 34553a is rotated to loosen the screw portion 34553b that is screwed into the fastening hole 35579a of the second path member 35570. Accordingly, the second path member 35570 is slidable in the left-right direction, the second path member 35570 is slid, and the position of the fourth convex portion 35571b of the second path member 35570 is changed. When the position of the fourth convex portion 35571b is changed, the position at which the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 35550 collides with the fourth convex portion 35571b is changed, so that the gaming ball discharged from the special winning device 35550 is changed. The discharge position can be changed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 193, a change in the game ball discharge position when the position of the fourth convex portion 35571b (second path member 35570) is changed will be described. FIGS. 193 (a) to 193 (c) are cross-sectional views of the game board 35013 taken along the line CXCIII-CXCIII in FIG. 191 (b). In FIGS. 193 (a) to 193 (c), the position of the second path member 35570 in FIG. 193 (b) is used as a reference position, and in FIG. 193 (a), the second path member 35570 is fronted from the reference position. FIG. 193 (c) shows a state where the second path member 35570 is displaced from the reference position to the right side (in the direction of arrow R).

  As shown in FIG. 193, the fourth convex portion 35571b has a substantially V-shaped projection in front view, and the game ball flowing from above the special prize-winning device 35550 is centered along the V-shaped inclination. It is guided to the part (V-shaped bent part).

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 193 (b), when the V-shaped bent portion of the fourth convex portion 35571 b is disposed above the first winning port 64, it is discharged from below the special winning device 35550. This makes it easier to allow the game ball to flow into the first winning port 64.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 193 (a) and 193 (c), when the second path member 35570 is moved from the reference position (position shown in FIG. 193 (b)), the V of the fourth convex portion 35571b. Since the bent portion of the character is arranged at a position shifted to the left or right from the upper part of the first winning opening 64, the lower part of the special winning device 35550 is lower than the case where the second path member 35570 is arranged at the reference position. The game balls discharged from the are made difficult to flow into the first winning port 64.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 194, a special winning device 36550 in the thirty-sixth embodiment is described. In the first embodiment, the first unit 551 disposed on the front side of the base plate 60 is fastened to the second unit 552 disposed on the back side of the base plate 60, and the back side of the base plate 60. In the thirty-sixth embodiment, the first unit 36551 is moved to the back surface of the base plate 60 by the elastic recovery force of the fastening portion 36551b formed in the first unit 36551. It is urged toward the side. In addition, about the part same as said each embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 194 (a) is an exploded perspective front view schematically showing the game board 36013 in the thirty-sixth embodiment, and FIG. 194 (b) is a schematic sectional view of the game board 36013. Note that FIG. 194 corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 194, the special prize-winning device 36550 in the thirty-sixth embodiment is slidably displaced from the inside of the first opening 60a in which the center frame 86 is disposed, and is disposed in the base plate 60. 36551.

  The first unit 36551 has a space in which a game ball can be sent inside, and the space is disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base plate 60. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the front surface of the base plate 60 can be caused to flow into the first unit 36551. The first unit 36551 includes a fastening portion 36551b that protrudes from the side surface (back surface) adjacent to the front surface of the base plate 60 toward the back surface side (arrow B direction side).

  The fastening portion 36551b is a portion through which a screw for fastening the first unit 36551 to the base plate 60 is inserted. The fastening portion 36551b projects toward the back side (arrow B direction side) and is parallel to the back side of the base plate 60. The projecting tip is bent in the direction.

  Further, the fastening portion 36551b has a bulging portion 36551b2 bulging on the front side (arrow F direction side) on the side surface on the bending side, and a plate thickness direction (arrow FB) on the bending distal end side with respect to the bulging portion 36551b2. A through hole 36551b1 penetrating in the direction).

  The fastening portion 36551b is a distance X7 from the base end (the back surface of the first unit 36551) to the front surface of the bent portion when the first unit 36551 is not attached to the base plate 60 (see FIG. 194 (b)). Is set larger than the thickness dimension of the base plate 60. Further, the fastening portion 36551b has a distance dimension X8 from the base end (the back surface of the first unit 36551) to the bulging tip position of the bulging portion 36551b2 when the first unit 36551 is not attached to the base plate 60 (FIG. 194). (See (b)) is set to be the same as or slightly smaller than the thickness dimension of the base plate 60.

  When the screw is fastened to the through hole 36551b1, the bulging portion 36551b2 is a force that presses (biases) the first unit 36551 against the back side (arrow F direction side) of the first unit 36551. And is formed between the base end of the bent portion of the fastening portion 36551b and the through hole 36551b1.

  As a result, when the screw inserted through the fastening portion 36551b is fastened to the back surface of the base plate 60, the bulging portion 36551b2 contacts the back surface of the base plate 60, so that the gap between the bent portion and the base plate 60 is separated. The force that pushes the bent distal end side into the base plate 60 side with a screw can be converted into a force that pulls out the proximal end side of the bent portion to the back side (arrow B direction side). Thereby, it can suppress that a clearance gap is formed between the back surface of the 1st unit 36551, and the front surface of the base board 60. FIG.

  As a result, it is not necessary to fasten the screw through which the first unit 36551 is inserted from the front side to the base plate 60, and the first unit 36551 can be easily formed larger for the fastening allowance. In the thirty-sixth embodiment, the first unit 36551 is attached to the base plate 60 using the first opening 60a to which the center frame 86 is fastened. It can be easily attached to the first opening 60a.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 195, a special prize device 37550 in the 37th embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the first unit 551 disposed on the front side of the base plate 60 is fastened to the second unit 552 disposed on the back side of the base plate 60, and the back side of the base plate 60. However, in the thirty-seventh embodiment, the first unit 37551 is fastened by a screw inserted from the back side of the base plate 60, and the back side of the base plate 60 is retained. It is held in a state of being biased toward the side. In addition, about the part same as said each embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 195 (a) is an exploded perspective front view schematically showing the game board 37013 in the 37th embodiment, and FIG. 195 (b) is a schematic sectional view of the game board 37013. Note that FIG. 195 corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 195, the special prize-winning device 37550 in the thirty-seventh embodiment is formed from a first unit 37551 that is disposed in front of the base plate 60.

  The first unit 37551 has a space in which a game ball can be sent inside, and the space is disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base plate 60. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the front of the base plate 60 can be caused to flow into the first unit 37551. Further, the first unit 37551 includes a plurality of annular convex portions 37551b that project in an annular shape on the back side (arrow B direction side).

  The annular convex portion 37551b is a portion into which a screw inserted from the back side of the base plate 60 is screwed, and a female screw is processed on the inner peripheral surface. In the present embodiment, four annular protrusions 37551b are formed on the back surface of the first unit 37551.

  In addition, the base plate 60 at a position facing the annular convex portion 37551b is formed with a concave portion 37060d that is recessed in a circular shape. The concave portion 37060d is a portion into which the annular convex portion 37551b is inserted, and has an inner diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the annular convex portion 37551b. Further, the depth of the recessed portion 37060d is set to be larger than the projecting dimension of the annular convex portion 37551b.

  In addition, a through hole 37060d1 is formed on the bottom surface of the recess 37060d. The through hole 37060d1 is formed so as to penetrate in a circular shape coaxial with the recess 37060. The through hole 37060d1 is a hole through which the tip of a screw screwed into the annular convex portion 37551b is inserted, and is formed in an opening having an inner diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the concave portion 37060d. Thereby, a screw can be fastened to the 1st unit 37551 arrange | positioned from the back side (arrow B direction side) of the base board 60 to the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base board 60. FIG.

  In this case, as described above, the concave depth of the concave portion 37060d is set to be larger than the projecting dimension of the annular convex portion 37551b. Therefore, by screwing the screw into the annular convex portion 37551b, The first unit 37551 can be disposed on the base plate 60 in a state where the convex portion 37551b (first unit 37551) is biased to the back side (arrow B direction side). Thereby, it can suppress that a clearance gap is formed between the back surface of the 1st unit 37551, and the front surface of the base board 60. FIG.

  As a result, it is not necessary to fasten the screw through which the first unit 37551 is inserted from the front side to the base plate 60, and the first unit 37551 can be easily formed larger by the fastening allowance. Further, in the thirty-seventh embodiment, the fastening portion of the first unit 37551 can be accommodated inside the recess 37060d of the base plate 60, so that a space for playing game balls formed in the first unit 37551 accordingly. Can be bigger.

<Change the amount of light emitted to the front side with a game ball>
Next, the lower displacement member 38440 in the thirty-eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 196 and 197. In the eleventh embodiment, a case is described in which a shadow is formed at the position of the game ball accommodated in the lower displacement member 11440 by the light emitted from the control board 491 and the position of the game ball is recognized at the position of the shadow. However, the lower displacement member 11440 in the thirty-eighth embodiment reflects the light emitted from the control board 491 on the outer surface of the game ball, and recognizes the position of the game ball at the position where the amount of light is increased. In addition, about the part same as said each embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 196 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member 38440 in the thirty-eighth embodiment. FIG. 197 (a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 38440, and FIG. 197 (b) is a sectional view of the lower displacement member 38440 along the CXCVIIb-CXCVIIb line in FIG. 197 (a). These are sectional drawings of the lower displacement member 38440 in the CXCVIIc-CXCVIIc line | wire of FIG. 197 (a). In FIG. 197 (a), the front side decorative member 38451 and the front case 38481 are removed, and the LED 38483b disposed in the front case 38481 is shown by a two-dot chain line. Moreover, in FIG. 197 (b) and FIG. 197 (c), the state where the front side decoration part 451 is attached is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 196 and 197, the lower displacement member 38440 in the thirty-eighth embodiment includes a base member 470 connected to the front base 411 (see FIG. 46), and the front-rear direction of the base member 470 (arrow FB). Direction) a case member 38480 that covers both sides, a transmission mechanism 460 that is displaceably disposed between the case member 38480 and the base member 470, and a decorative member 11450 that is formed so as to cover the front and rear of the case member 38480. It is mainly provided with.

  The case member 38480 is a member that covers both sides of the base member 470 in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction), and a front case 38481 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base member 470, and the back surface. And a rear case 482 disposed on the side (arrow B direction side).

  The front case 38481 is formed in a rectangular horizontally long plate shape when viewed from the front. Further, the front case 38481 is formed to project from an opening 481a extending in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) at a substantially intermediate position in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) and a lower end surface on the back side (arrow B direction side). A bottom wall portion 481b, a shaft hole 481c penetrating in the front-rear direction at the lower end portion, and an LED substrate 38483 disposed on the back side.

  The LED substrate 38483 is a member that emits light inside the lower displacement member 38440 (front case 38481), and has a main body portion 38483a formed in a plate shape, and a plurality of members that are disposed on the main body portion 38483a and that emit light. LED 38483b.

  The main body portion 38483a is a base on which wiring for conducting electricity to the plurality of LEDs 38483b is laid, and extends in the displacement direction (arrow LR direction) of the ball receiving portion 467. The plurality of LEDs 38483b are arranged at predetermined intervals in the extending direction of the main body portion 38483a (arrow LR direction).

  Each LED 38483b is set in a direction toward the center of the game ball when the game ball passes through the back side (arrow B direction side) of each LED 38483b. Thereby, when the game ball is located on the back side of each LED 38483b, the light of the LED can be reflected on the outer surface of the game ball and irradiated to the front side decoration portion 11451. Therefore, as described above, the front-side decoration unit 11451 includes the transmission unit 11451b that can transmit light. Therefore, the light reflected on the outer surface of the game ball and applied to the front-side decoration unit 11451 is transmitted to the transmission unit 11451b. Can be emitted to the player side (arrow F direction side). Therefore, the light reflected from the player side through the transmission part 11451b can be lightened more in the part reflected by the game ball than in other parts. As a result, by increasing (changing) the amount of light, the player can recognize the position of the game ball sent to the inside of the lower displacement member 38440.

  In the present embodiment, the interval at which the plurality of LEDs 38483b are arranged is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, even when the game ball received by the ball receiving unit 467 is displaced, at least a part of the game ball can be irradiated with light emitted from the LED 38483b. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 38483b can be constantly irradiated to the game ball received by the ball receiver 467.

  According to the thirty-eighth embodiment, the base member 470, the transmission mechanism 460, and the rear case 482 disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the LED 38483b are preferably members having a high light absorption rate. For example, the outer surface of each member constitutes a black color scheme. According to this, it can suppress that the light radiate | emitted from LED38483b reflects the inside of the case member 38480 (lower displacement member 38440), and is radiate | emitted from the permeation | transmission part 11451b of the front side decoration part 11451. As a result, the difference in the amount of light emitted between the front surface where the game ball is placed and the other front surface can be increased, and the player recognizes the position of the game ball received inside the lower displacement member 39440. It can be made easy.

  Next, the lower displacement member 39440 in the 39th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 198 and 199. In the thirty-eighth embodiment, the case where the player recognizes the position where the game ball is disposed by reflecting light with the game ball has been described. However, in the thirty-ninth embodiment, the game ball is disposed in the ball receiver 39467. The light is reflected by the reflecting member to recognize the position of the game ball. In addition, about the part same as said each embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 198 is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement member 39440 in the thirty-ninth embodiment. 199 (a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 39440, and FIGS. 199 (b) and 199 (c) are cross-sectional views of the lower displacement member 39440. FIG. 199 (b) and 199 (c) correspond to the cross section of FIG. 198 (c).

  As shown in FIGS. 198 and 199, the lower displacement member 39440 in the thirty-ninth embodiment includes a base member 470 connected to the front base 411 (see FIG. 46), and a case member 38480 covering the front and rear of the base member 470. A transmission mechanism 39460 disposed between the case member 38480 and the base member 470 so as to be displaceable, and a decorative member 11450 disposed in a manner covering the front and rear of the case member 38480.

  The transmission mechanism 39460 is a member disposed on the front side of the base member 470, and includes transmission gears 461, 462, 463, a drive motor KM 2 whose shaft portion is coupled to the transmission gear 461, and the engagement of the transmission gear 463. A movable rack 464 that is slidably disposed on the front side of the base member 470, and is rotatably disposed on the movable rack 464 and meshed with the rack gear 476. A transmission gear 465, a rack 39466 having a tooth surface meshed with the transmission gear 465 and disposed on the front side of the movable rack 464 so as to be slidable and displaceable on one end side of the rack 39466 The ball receiving portion 39467 is mainly provided.

  The rack 39466 is formed of a rectangular horizontally long rod-like body when viewed from the front, and includes a rack gear 466a engraved on the upper end surface, a shaft portion 39466b that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the end on the other end side, and a front side. The two sliding plates 466c and the recessed portion 466d that is recessed from one end to the other end on the back side are mainly provided.

  The shaft portion 39466b is a protrusion that is inserted into a shaft hole 467b of a ball receiving portion 39467, which will be described later, and is formed in a columnar shape having an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 467b. Thereby, the ball receiving portion 467 can be held rotatably.

  The ball receiving portion 39467 is connected to the first piece 39467c formed by bending substantially L-shaped in front view, the second piece 39467d connected to the first piece 39467c, and the second piece 39467d and the second piece 39467d. A third piece 39467e disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d.

  The first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d are portions for holding a game ball sent from the opening 451a (see FIG. 57) to the inside of the lower displacement member 39440. The first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d are opposed to each other. When the game ball is sent to the second piece, the second piece 39467d is displaced away from the first piece 39467c, and a part of the first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d are arranged in a U shape in front view. The game ball can be held in the inner portion of the U-shape.

  The first piece 39467c includes a receiving piece 39467c4 that forms one extending side formed in an L shape in a front view, a leg portion 467a that forms the other extending side, a receiving piece 39467c4, and a leg portion 467a. An annular bent portion 39467c5 in which a shaft hole 467b penetrating in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) is formed in the connecting portion (bending portion), and a connecting portion 39467c1 protruding to the opposite side with the bent portion 39467c5 interposed therebetween And comprising.

  The receiving piece 39467c4 is a part forming a side surface on the other side (arrow R direction side) formed in a U-shape in front view by the one piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d, and is formed in a crescent shape on the front side. It is formed in a curved shape that is concave in the direction away from the second piece 39467d.

  The connecting portion 39467c1 protrudes from two locations at a predetermined interval in the axial direction (arrow F-B direction) of the bent portion 39467c5. The connecting portion 39467c1 is a portion that connects a second piece 39467d and a third piece 39467e, which will be described later, and has a connecting hole 39467c2 that extends along the axial direction of the shaft hole 467b and opens in a circular cross section. Prepare.

  The connection hole 39467c2 is an opening into which a shaft portion 39467e3 protruding from a third piece 39467e described later is inserted. In the connection hole 39467c2, a shaft portion 39467e3 inserted through an insertion hole 39467d3 formed in a second piece 39467d described later is inserted from the front side (arrow F direction side). Further, the shaft portion 39467e3 is fastened by a screw inserted from the opposite side (arrow B direction side) to the insertion side of the coupling hole 39467c2. Accordingly, the second piece 39467d and the third piece 39467e can be fastened to the first piece 39467c.

  The first piece 39467c includes a recess 39467c3 that is recessed downward in the direction of gravity (arrow D direction side) on the projecting proximal end side of the connecting portion 39467c1. The recessed bottom surface of the recess 39467c3 is formed at the lowest position (lowermost part) of the side surfaces where the game balls are held by the first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d. As a result, the game balls held by the first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d are rolled inside the recess 39467c3. As a result, the second piece 39467d can be easily displaced with respect to the first piece 39467c by the load of the game ball.

  The second piece 39467d is a portion that forms a side surface on the other side (arrow L direction side) formed in a U shape in front view by the receiving portion 39467c4 and the second piece 39467d of the first piece 39467c, and is a crescent moon in the front view. And a curved shape that is concave in a direction away from the first piece 39467c. Further, the second piece 39467d has an insertion hole 39467d3 that opens in a circular shape in the front-rear direction at the connecting portion of the first piece 39467c, and a circle from the front side (arrow F direction side) to the back side (arrow B direction side). It is mainly provided with a recessed portion 39467d2 that is recessed in the shape.

  In the second piece 39467d, the shaft portion 39467e3 of the third piece 39467e is inserted into the insertion hole 39467d3, and the connecting shaft 39467e4 of the third piece 39467e is inserted into the recessed portion 39467d2. Accordingly, when the second piece 39567d is displaced, the third piece 39467e is similarly displaced. Therefore, when the second piece 39567d is rotationally displaced with respect to the first piece 39467c, the third piece 39567e is similarly rotationally displaced with respect to the first piece 39467c.

  Further, the second piece 39467d is disposed between the connecting portions 39467c1 projecting at two locations of the first piece 39467c, and is connected to the first piece 39467c. Accordingly, when the second piece 39467d is twisted in the axial direction of the insertion hole 39467d3, the second piece 39467d is brought into contact with the side surface on the opposite side of the connecting portion 39467c1, and the shaft portion 39467e3 can be prevented from being broken.

  The recessed portion 39467d2 is a hole into which a connecting shaft 39467e4 of a third piece 39467e described later is inserted, and is recessed in substantially the same shape as the connecting shaft 39467e4.

  The third piece 39467e includes a reflection plate 39467e1 formed in a substantially semicircular plate shape when viewed from the front, a shaft portion 39467e3 protruding from the reflection plate 39467e1 toward the back side (arrow B direction side), and a connecting shaft 39467e4. And comprising.

  The reflection plate 39467e1 is formed of a resin material and is plated on the outer surface. Thereby, when the light radiate | emitted from LED38483b is irradiated to the reflecting plate 39467e1, light can be reflected in the outer surface. Further, the reflecting plate 39467e1 is formed to be curved in an arc shape toward the front side (arrow F direction side) as a whole. Thereby, when the light irradiated from the front side is reflected, the light can be condensed on a predetermined part. In addition, shielding of the light of the light emitter 11491a by the reflection plate 39467e1 will be described later.

  As described above, the shaft portion 39467e3 is a columnar body that is inserted into the connection hole 39467c2 of the first piece 39467c and the insertion hole 39467d3 of the second piece 39467d. In addition, a hole that can be screwed with a screw inserted into the connection hole 39467c2 from the opposite side to the insertion side of the shaft portion 39467e3 is formed on the projecting distal end surface of the shaft portion 39467e3. Therefore, the first piece 39467c, the second piece 39467d, and the third piece 39467e are connected by fastening a screw to the insertion tip surface of the shaft part 39467e3 in a state where the shaft part 39467e3 is inserted into the connecting hole 39467c2 and the insertion hole 39467d3. The third piece 39467e can be rotated with respect to the first piece 39467c.

  As described above, the connecting shaft 39467e4 is inserted into the recessed portion 39467d2 of the second piece 39467d. Accordingly, when the second piece 39467d is rotationally displaced about the shaft portion 39467e3 with respect to the first piece 39467c, the connecting shaft 39467e4 can be displaced along with the displacement of the second piece 39467d. Therefore, the third piece 39467e can be displaced in accordance with the displacement of the second piece 39467d.

  Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 199, when the ball receiving portion 39467 receives a game ball between the first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d, the received game ball is changed into the first piece 39467c and the second piece. It rolls on the receiving surface of 39467d (the inner side surface formed in a U-shape when viewed from the front) and is guided to the recess 39467c3 located at the lowermost end of the receiving surface. Accordingly, the second piece 39467d can be rotated on the outer surface of the game ball around the shaft portion 39467e3 in a direction away from the first piece 39467c. As a result, the third piece 39467e moving with the displacement of the second piece 39467d can be displaced upward and disposed on the light irradiation of the LED 38483b.

  Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 38483b can be reflected by the reflecting plate 39467e1 of the third piece 39467e to the front side (arrow F direction side) of the lower displacement member 39440 and emitted from the transmission part 11451b. Thereby, the amount of light emitted from the transmission part 11451b is partially increased, and the player can recognize the position of the game ball sent to the inside of the lower displacement member 39440.

  In the second piece 39467d, the connecting shaft 39467e4 is inserted into the recessed portion 39467d2, and the load of the third piece 39467e is always applied. The center of gravity G of the third piece 39467e is set on the opposite side of the connecting portion between the second piece 39567d and the third piece 39567e with the shaft portion 394673e interposed therebetween. Thereby, in the state where forces other than gravity are not acting on the second piece 39467d and the third piece 39467de, the second piece 39467e can be rotated to the first piece 39467c4 side by the load of the third piece 39467e. .

  Therefore, when the game ball is discharged (taken out) from the ball receiving portion 39467, the second piece 39467d can be displaced to the ball receiving piece 39467c4 side of the first piece 39467c by the load of the third piece 39467e. Therefore, only when the game ball is received by the ball receiving portion 39467, the amount of light reflected by the reflecting plate 39467e1 and emitted from the transmitting portion 11451b can be partially increased. As a result, it is possible to prevent light from being reflected by the reflecting plate 39467e1 by the positioning operation of the ball receiving portion 39467 or the like.

  Further, the ball receiving portion 39467 is rotated around the shaft hole 39467b by the operation of sliding the inside of the lower displacement member 39440 in the same manner as the ball receiving portion 467 in the first embodiment, and is emitted from the lower displacement member 39440. The game ball received from the opening 471 (see FIG. 66) is discharged to the outside.

  Here, as a structure for discharging the game ball received by the ball receiving portion 39467, in the structure in which the ball receiving portion 39467 is rotated around the shaft hole 467b as the ball receiving portion 39467 slides, the ball receiving portion 39467 is rotated. , The rotational speed of the ball receiving portion 39467 around the shaft hole 467b is changed. Therefore, since the rotation speed depends only on the sliding speed of the ball receiving portion 39467, there is a problem that the discharging speed of the game ball from the ball receiving portion 39467 is not stable.

  On the other hand, in the thirty-ninth embodiment, the direction in which the second piece 39467d rotates due to the load of the third piece 39467e and the direction in which the ball receiving portion 39467 rotates around the shaft hole 467b when the game ball is emitted. Since they are set in substantially the same direction, it is possible to apply a driving force when the second piece 39467d is displaced to the game ball emitted from the emission opening 471. Therefore, even if the force applied to the game ball from the ball receiving portion 39467 is reduced when the ball receiving portion 39467 is displaced to discharge the game ball from the emission opening 471, the speed of the emitted game ball can be maintained. it can. As a result, the discharge speed of the game ball emitted from the ball receiving portion 39467 can be stabilized.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 200, a first unit 40551 in the forty embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which a malfunction is reported when a game ball is clogged in the curved portion 581a of the main path SK1, but in the 40th embodiment, a game ball having a size other than a prescribed size is detected in the main path. Injustice can be reported when passing through SK1. In addition, about the part same as said each embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 200A is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 40551 in the 40th embodiment, and FIG. 200B is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 40551 in the CCb-CCb line of FIG. 200A. is there. Note that the cross-sectional view of FIG. 200A corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 200, the first unit 40551 in the 40th embodiment includes a first path member 560 disposed on the front side (the arrow F direction side), and the back side (arrow B) of the first path member 560. The second path member 570 disposed on the direction side) and the third path member 40580 disposed on the back surface of the second path member 570 are mainly provided.

  The third path member 40580 includes a first covering member 40581 disposed on the back surface on the upper side (arrow U direction side) of the second path member 570, and the lower side (arrow D direction side) of the second path member 570. And a first drive unit 583 (see FIG. 19) disposed between the first covering member 40581 and the second covering member 582. And a second drive unit 584 (see FIG. 19) disposed on the back surface of the second covering member 582.

  The first covering member 40581 is a member that forms a pitching path for a game ball that curves in a substantially U shape on the back side (arrow B direction side), and the back side of the first opening 571a and the fourth opening 571d. And a plate-like mounting portion 40581b that is continuous to the lower side of the curved portion 40581a.

  The curved portion 40581a is formed to be curved in a U-shaped cross section in which the first opening portion 571a and the fourth opening portion 571d (second path member 570) side are opened, and the first rolling portion 576 is disposed inside thereof. Is done. Further, the bending portion 40581a is formed so that the width dimension in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) is small toward the back side (arrow B direction side), and the width dimension in the left-right direction at the curved portion having a U-shaped cross section. X10 (see FIG. 200 (a)) is formed to be 1.1 times or less the diameter of the game ball. As a result, when a game ball having a diameter 1.1 times or more than the prescribed game ball is sent, the game ball can be stopped inside the curved portion 40581a (main path SK1).

  Further, the bending portion 40581a is disposed inside the recess 86b2 (see FIG. 17) of the center frame 86, similarly to the bending portion 581a in the first embodiment. Therefore, the game ball stopped inside the bending portion 40581a can be detected by the detection device 86b3 (see FIG. 17), and the pachinko machine 10 can be notified of an error (injustice).

  Further, the curved portion 40581a includes an opening 40581a1 that opens to a curved portion having a U-shaped cross section, and a storage portion 40581a2 that protrudes in a box shape that opens upward from an end portion on the back side of the opening 40481a1.

  The opening 40581a1 is an opening for discharging a sphere having a diameter smaller than the diameter of the prescribed game sphere from the main path SK1, and an opening dimension X15 in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) (see FIG. 200 (a)) The size is larger than 0.9 times the diameter of the game ball. The opening 40581a1 is formed on the back side of the curved portion 40581 that is the rolling direction of the game ball rolling on the first rolling portion 576, and sends the game ball that passes through the main path SK1 to the opening 40581a1. be able to. Thereby, when a game ball having a diameter 0.9% or more smaller than the prescribed game ball is sent, the game ball can be discharged from the opening 40581a1 to the outside of the main route SK1.

  The storage portion 40581a2 is a box that stores the game balls discharged from the opening 40581a1, and the inner space is formed in a size larger than the diameter of the game balls. Thereby, the game ball discharged from the opening 40581a1 can be stored in the storage unit 40581a2, and the stored game ball can be detected by the detection device 86b3 to notify the pachinko machine 10 of an error (injustice). .

  In the 40th embodiment, the case has been described in which the width dimension X10 and the opening dimension X11 are formed with a different size of 0.1 times that of a game ball having a prescribed diameter (11 millimeters). It is not restricted to this, You may change the magnification of the magnitude | size with respect to a game ball.

  Next, the first unit 41551 in the forty-first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 201 and 202. In the first embodiment, the first recess 571h, the second recess 571i, and the third recess 571j formed in the main path SK2, the curved path WK1, and the main path SK3 are vertically moved (arrows) around the curved portion of the curved path WK1. In the 41st embodiment, the first concave portion 41571h, the second concave portion 41571i, and the third concave portion 41571j are each formed in an irregular shape. The same parts as those in the embodiment are given the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  201A is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 41551 in the forty-first embodiment, and FIG. 201B is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 41551 in the CCIb-CCIb line of FIG. 201A. is there. 202 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 41551 along the line CCIIa-CCIIa in FIG. 201 (a), and FIG. 202 (b) is the first unit along the line CCIIb-CCIIb in FIG. 201 (a). It is a schematic cross section of 41551.

  As shown in FIGS. 201 and 202, the first unit 41551 in the forty-first embodiment includes a first path member 41560 disposed on the front side and a first path member 41560 disposed on the back side of the first path member 41560. A two-path member 41570 and a third path member 580 (see FIG. 19) disposed on the back surface of the second path member 41570 are mainly provided.

  The first path member 41560 has a front plate 41564 formed in a plate shape along the front of the game area of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2), and a substantially U-shaped cross section that opens upward (arrow U direction side). A first receiving portion 561, a second receiving portion 562, and a third receiving portion 563 that are formed on the upper side (arrow U direction side) of the front plate 41564 and project from the rear side (arrow B direction side). 21 (see FIG. 21), the first receiving portion 561, the second receiving portion 562, and the third receiving portion 563 are projected to be connected to the lower side (arrow D direction side) and a part of the front plate 41564. A first wall portion 41565 extending along the first portion, and a pair of second wall portions 566 formed below the first wall portion 565 and projecting from two locations spaced apart from each other by a predetermined distance. 3 wall part 567 (refer FIG. 21) is mainly provided.

  The front plate 41564 is a plate member that serves as a wall portion on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the flow path of a game ball formed between the second path member 41570 and the third path member 580 described later. It is formed from a transmissive member. Thereby, the player can visually recognize the game ball flowing down inside the first unit 551 through (through) the front plate 41564.

  Further, the front plate 564 is provided with a first convex portion 41564b, a second convex portion 41564c, and a third convex portion 41564d at positions facing a first concave portion 41571h, a second concave portion 41571i, and a third concave portion 41571j, which will be described later. Is done.

  The second path member 41570 protrudes from the front surface (arrow F direction side) of the base plate 41571 facing the front plate 41564 of the first path member 41560 toward the first path member 41560 side. A fourth wall portion 573 (see FIG. 21), a fifth wall portion 574 (see FIG. 21) protruding from the fourth wall portion 573 at a predetermined distance away from the fourth wall portion 573, and the fifth wall And a sixth wall portion 575 (see FIG. 21) that protrudes from the portion 574 downward at a predetermined distance.

  The base plate 41571 has a first concave portion 41571h, a second concave portion 41571i and a second concave portion 41571i, which are recessed in a pitching path (main path SK2, curved path WK1, and main path SK3) of a game ball formed between the front plate 41564 and the front plate 41564. 3 recesses 41571j are provided.

  The first recess 41571h, the second recess 41571i, and the third recess 41571j are formed in a curved shape toward the back side. Further, the dimension between the first concave portion 41571h and the first convex portion 41564b, the dimension between the second concave portion 41571i and the second convex portion 41564c, and the dimension between the third concave portion 41571j and the third convex portion 41564d are as follows. Each is set to the same facing dimension L19 (see FIG. 201 (b)).

  The facing distance L19 is set to a value larger than the diameter of the game ball, and is smaller than the facing distance L20 between the back surface of the front plate 41564 and the front surface of the base plate 571 (see FIG. 201 (b)). Set to Thereby, the first concave portion 41571h, the second concave portion 41571i and the third concave portion 41571j, and the game ball sent between the first convex portion 41564b, the second convex portion 41564c and the third convex portion 41564d are opposed to the first concave portion. 41571h, the second concave portion 41571i and the third concave portion 41571j, and the first convex portion 41564b, the second convex portion 41564c and the third convex portion 41564d may be brought into contact with each other to reduce the rolling (flowing) speed of the game ball. it can.

  Further, the projecting dimensions of the first convex portion 41564b, the second convex portion 41564c, and the third convex portion 41564d toward the base plate 41571 are set to be the same. Further, the protruding front end surfaces of the first convex portion 41564b, the second convex portion 41564c, and the third convex portion 41564d are opposed to the front surface of the base plate 41571 excluding the first concave portion 41571h, the second concave portion 41571i, and the third concave portion 41571j. The distance dimension L21 (see FIG. 201 (b)) is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the game balls sent between the first concave portion 41571h, the second concave portion 41571i and the third concave portion 41571j, and the first convex portion 41564b, the second convex portion 41564c and the third convex portion 41564d are opposed to the first convex portion. It can be made to collide with the part 41564b, the 2nd convex part 41564c, and the 3rd convex part 41564d. As a result, the rolling (downflow) speed of the game ball can be reduced.

  The first recess 41571h is formed in the base plate 41571 of the main path SK2, and is long and recessed along the direction in which the game balls of the main path SK2 are sent. Thereby, when the game ball sent inside the first recess 41571h is sent inside the first recess 41571h, it is possible to suppress an increase in frictional resistance with the first recess 41571h. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game ball flowing down the main path SK2 from being stopped due to contact with the first recess 41571h.

  The first convex portion 41564b projecting from the surface facing the first concave portion 41571h extends in a direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the first concave portion 41571h. Thereby, when the game ball sent along the main route SK2 is brought into contact with the first convex portion 41564b, the game ball can be easily sent inside the first concave portion 41571h.

  The second recess 41571i is formed in the base plate 41571 of the curved path WK1, and is long and recessed along the gravity direction (arrow UD direction). Further, the second recess 41571i is formed in an ellipse whose shape in front view is long in the up-down direction, and an intermediate position in the left-right direction of the ellipse is set to an intermediate position in the left-right direction of the curved path WK1 extending in the up-down direction. In addition, the curved center on the upper side (main path SK2 side) of the ellipse of the second recess 41571i is disposed on the pitching trajectory of the center of the game ball sent on the main path SK2. Therefore, since the second recess 41571i is recessed above the pitch of the game ball sent from the main route SK2, even when the game ball is sent through the main route SK2 at a relatively high speed, The center of the game ball can pass through the front side of the second recess 41571i. As a result, it is possible to easily reduce the speed of the game ball by sending the game ball passing through the main route SK2 to the inside of the second recess 41571i, and to prevent the game ball from rampaging along the curved route WK1.

  The second convex portion 41564c protruding from the surface facing the second concave portion 41571i is formed to be bent in a substantially L shape when viewed from the front. The second convex portion 41564c has a bent portion set on the front side of the center of curvature above the ellipse of the second concave portion 41571i in front view. In addition, the bent portion on one side of the second convex portion 41564c extends in a direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is sent on the curved path WK1, and the bent portion on the other side is sent in the game ball on the main path SK2. It extends in a direction orthogonal to the direction. Thereby, the game ball sent from the main route SK2 to the curved route WK1 is brought into contact with the second convex portion 41564c on the other side and sent to the inside of the second concave portion 41571i, and also to the second convex portion 41564c on the one side. It is possible to easily decrease the pitching speed of the game balls that are brought into contact with each other and are sent through the curved path WK11. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game ball sent to the curved path WK1 from rampaging and to smoothly send the game ball.

  The third recess 41571j is formed in the base plate 41571 of the main path SK3, and is recessed in an elliptical shape that is long in the direction in which the game balls of the main path SK3 are sent. Thereby, when the game ball sent to the inside of the third recess 41571j is sent to the inside of the third recess 41571j, it is possible to suppress an increase in frictional resistance with the third recess 41571j. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball flowing down the main path SK3 from stopping due to contact with the third recess 41571j.

  Further, in the third recess 41571j, the center of curvature of the upstream end of the game ball sending path is set to the lower side of the horizontal center of the second recess 41571i. Thereby, the game ball that has flowed down inside the second recess 41571i of the curved path WK1 can be easily received by the second recess 41571i, and the game ball can be easily sent from the curved path WK1 to the main path SK3.

  The third convex portion 41564d protruding from the surface facing the third concave portion 4156771j is formed to be bent in a substantially L shape when viewed from the front. The third convex portion 41564d has a bent portion set on the front side of the center of curvature at the upstream end portion of the third concave portion 41571j in front view. A bent portion on one side of the third convex portion 41564d extends in a direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is sent on the main path SK3, and a bent portion on the other side is orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is sent on the curved path WK1. It extends in the direction. As a result, the game ball sent from the curved path WK1 to the main path SK3 is brought into contact with the third convex part 41564d on the other side and sent to the inside of the third concave part 41571j, and also to the third convex part 41564d on the one side. It is possible to reduce the pitching speed of the game balls that are brought into contact with each other and are sent along the main path SK3. As a result, the game ball sent from the curved route WK1 to the main route SK1 can be prevented from being ramped, and the game ball can be sent smoothly.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 203 to 206, a game board 42013 in the forty-second embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the other end side of the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) disposed in the back case 300 is fixed to the back case 300 with a screw inserted from the back side of the substrate box 100. As described above, in the forty-second embodiment, a case where the second engagement member 42370 disposed in the back case 42300 is engaged with the board box 42100 will be described.

  First, the overall configuration of the back case 42300 in the forty-second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 203 and 204. FIG. 203 is an exploded perspective front view of the back case 42300 in the forty-second embodiment. 204 (a) is a front view of the back case 42300, and FIG. 204 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the back case 42300 along the CCIVb-CCIVb line in FIG. 204 (a). In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 203 and 204, a back case 42300 according to the forty-second embodiment is erected from the bottom wall portion 42301 having a substantially rectangular shape in front view and the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 42301 toward the front. The outer wall part 42302 is provided, and each of the wall parts 42301 and 42302 is formed in a box shape in which one surface side (front side) is opened.

  The back case 42300 is disposed on the front side of the bottom wall portion 42301 (the open side formed in a box shape (the arrow F direction side)) and the back surface side of the back case 42300. A fixing member 320 that fixes one end side of the substrate box 42100, and a second engagement member 42370 that is disposed on the front side of the bottom wall portion 42301 and fixes the other end side of the substrate box 42100.

  The bottom wall portion 42301 is formed with an opening 301a having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 42301 is visually recognized through the opening 301a. It is possible. Further, the bottom wall portion 42301 is provided with a columnar projection on the front side, and a projection portion 301b inserted into the sliding groove 314 of the engagement member 310 and a first opening opened at a position facing the fixing member 320. An opening 301c, a second opening 301d that opens at a position facing the engagement member 310, and a second engagement described later that protrudes in a columnar shape on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the bottom wall portion 42301. A second protruding portion 42301f inserted into the sliding groove 42372 of the member 42370, and a second protruding portion formed in the plate thickness direction (arrow F-B direction) above the second protruding portion 42301f (arrow U direction). 3 openings 42301g.

  The 2nd protrusion part 42301f is a processus | protrusion which prescribes | regulates the displacement direction of the 2nd engaging member 42370, and is formed along with two places of the gravity direction. Further, the outer diameter of the second projecting portion 42301f is set to be slightly smaller than the groove width in the short direction of the sliding groove 42372 of the second engaging member 42370 described later. Further, the two second projecting portions 42301f are set such that the distance between the centers thereof is smaller than the groove width in the longitudinal direction of the sliding groove 42372. Accordingly, the two second projecting portions 42301f can be inserted and disposed inside the sliding groove 42372.

  The third opening 42301g is an opening into which a protruding portion 42118 of a substrate box 42100, which will be described later, is inserted, and has a size larger than the outer shape of the protruding portion 42118 in a front view. The third opening 42301g releases the engagement of the engagement member 310 with the fixed member 320 when the engagement member 310 and the fixed member 320 are engaged (the state shown in FIG. 204 (a)). It is formed at a position adjacent to the direction (arrow L direction). This makes it impossible to release the engagement of the engaging member 310 with the fixing member 320 in a state where the protruding portion 42118 is inserted into the third opening 42301g. A detailed description of the positional relationship between the protruding portion 42118 and the engaging member 310 will be described later.

  The outer wall portion 42302 includes a second opening portion 42302b that opens in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) on the side surface on the lower side (arrow D direction side) in a front view. The second opening 42302b is an opening through which an end portion on the lower side (arrow D direction side) of a second engagement member 42370 described later is inserted, and is formed in the displacement region of the second engagement member 42370. Thereby, the 2nd engagement member 42370 can be displaced.

  The board box 42100 is formed with a horizontally long rectangular outer shape in front view, and the main controller 110 is disposed inside. The board box 42100 has a bearing 117 (see FIG. 206 (a)) that projects from the end on one end side (arrow R direction side) and a projecting section that projects from one surface on the front side of the board box 42100. 42118.

  As described above, the protruding portion 42118 is a portion that is inserted into the third opening 42301g of the back case 42300, and the back case 42300 is in a state where the front surface of the substrate box 42100 and the back surface of the back case 42300 are parallel to each other. The length is set such that an opening 42118a, which will be described later, is disposed on the front side of the bottom wall portion 42301. The projecting portion 42118 includes an opening 42118a that opens in the direction of gravity, and is disposed in a state where a second engagement member 42370 (described later) is inserted inside the opening 42118a. Accordingly, the substrate box 42100 can be prevented from rotating around the fixing member 320, and the substrate box 42100 can be disposed on the back surface side (arrow B direction side) of the back case 42300 in an undisplaceable state.

  Further, the third opening portion 42301g into which the projecting portion 42118 is inserted is engaged when the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged as described above (the state shown in FIG. 204 (a)). Since the member 310 is formed at a position adjacent to the direction in which the engagement with the fixing member 320 is released (arrow L direction), the projecting portion 42118 is disposed at a position adjacent to the engagement member 310. Further, the insertion dimension Y6 (see FIG. 204B) of the protruding portion 42118 into the third opening 42301g is a separation distance Y7 between the front surface of the engaging member 310 and the front surface of the bottom wall portion 42301 (FIG. 204B). It is set larger than (see). As a result, as shown in FIG. 204 (b), the engaging member 310 and the projecting portion 42118 are arranged at a position where they overlap in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) position.

  Therefore, in a state where the second engaging member 42370 is inserted into the opening 42118a of the protruding portion 42118, the direction in which the engaging member 310 releases the engagement with the fixing member 320 (the protruding portion 42118 is disposed). Displacement in the direction) is regulated. As a result, the engagement of the engagement member 310 with the fixing member 320 can be suppressed in a state where the second engagement member 42370 is inserted into the opening 42118a, and the board box 42100 (main control device) 110) can be prevented from being exchanged for an illegal base.

  The opening 42118a of the projecting portion 42118 is opened in the gravitational direction, and the second engagement member 42370 inserted into the opening 42118a is displaced and inserted in the gravitational direction. Therefore, since the displacement direction (gravity direction) of the second engagement member 42370, the displacement direction (horizontal direction) of the engagement member 310, and the orthogonal direction are set, the engagement member 310 is impossible due to the player's fraud. It is possible to easily receive the force when operated by the second engagement member 42370 inserted into the opening 42118a. As a result, it is possible to prevent the engagement with the fixing member 320 from being released when the engaging member 310 is forcibly operated by a player's fraud.

  The second engagement member 42370 has a plate member 42371 formed in a plate-like shape having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and faces downward (arrow D direction) from an upper end (arrow U direction side) of the plate member 42371. A recessed portion 42374 that is recessed, a second engaging portion 42373 that protrudes outward in the horizontal direction (arrow L-R direction) at the upper end (arrow U direction side) end of the plate member 42371, and a recess. A slide groove 42372 opened mainly in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) is provided below the installation portion 42374.

  As described above, the sliding groove 42372 is an opening for disposing the second engaging member 42370 so as to be displaceable, and is opened long in the direction of gravity (arrow UD direction). Further, the sliding groove 42372 is set such that the width dimension in the short direction (arrow LR direction) is substantially the same as the diameter of the second projecting portion 42301f disposed inside the sliding groove 42372. Therefore, as described above, when the second projecting portion 42301f is inserted into the sliding groove 42372, the sliding direction of the second engaging member 42370 is defined as the longitudinal direction of the opening of the sliding groove 42372.

  The recessed portion 42374 is an opening for easily elastically deforming the upper end portion of the plate member 42371, is recessed downward, and is notched in the front-rear direction. Thereby, the rigidity of the upper end portion of the plate member 42371 can be lowered, and the elastic deformation can be easily performed.

  The second engaging portion 42373 is a portion that engages with the end portion of the opening 42118a of the protruding portion 42118 described above, and protrudes from both side surfaces in a direction perpendicular to the notch direction of the recessed portion 42374. The separation distance X12 (see FIG. 204 (a)) between the projecting ends of both sides is set to be larger than the opening dimension X13 in the left-right direction of the opening 42118a (see FIG. 204 (b)). Accordingly, when the second engaging member 42370 is inserted into the opening 42118a, the second engaging portion 42373 engages with the end of the opening 42118a, so that the second engaging portion 42373 is opened. Can be prevented from exiting.

  The second engaging portion 42373 is formed in a shape projecting outward in the horizontal direction from the upper side to the lower side of the plate member 42371. Accordingly, when the second engagement member 42370 is inserted into the opening 42118a, the second engagement portion 42373 is brought into contact with the inside of the opening 42118a, so that the upper side of the plate member 42371 is easily elastically deformed. be able to.

  Further, the second engaging member 42370 has a lower end at the second opening of the outer wall portion 42302 in a state where the second engaging member 42370 is inserted into the opening portion 42118a (a state where the engaging portion 42373 is engaged with the protruding portion 42118). Arranged inside the portion 42302b. Thereby, it can suppress that the 2nd engaging part 42370 is operated from the outer side of the back case 42300. FIG. As a result, the engagement between the second engagement portion 42373 and the projecting portion 42118 is illegally released, and the board box 42100 (main control device 110) can be suppressed from being replaced with an illegal base.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 204 and 205, a method of arranging the substrate box 42100 on the back case 42300 will be described. 205 (a) is a front view of the back case 42300, and FIG. 205 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the back case 42300 along the CCVb-CCVb line in FIG. 205 (a). 204A and 204B show the state after the substrate box 42100 is disposed on the back case 42300, and in FIGS. 205A and 205B, the back case 42300 is shown. A state before the substrate box 42100 is arranged is shown in FIG.

  In the substrate box 42100 according to the forty-second embodiment, the fixing member 320 is first engaged with the engaging member 310 and one side is disposed on the back side of the back case 42300, as in the first embodiment. .

  205 (a) and 205 (b), when the engaging member 310 is in a state before being engaged with the fixing member 320 (before displacement), the tip of the second piece 312 of the engaging member 310 is The third opening 42301g is disposed on the front side. Thereby, before the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged, it can suppress that the protrusion part 42118 of the board | substrate box 42100 is penetrated inside the 3rd opening part 42301g. As a result, it is possible to suppress the board box 42100 from being disposed on the back case 42300 only by the engagement of the protruding portion 42118 and the second engaging portion 42370.

  Next, the board box 42100 is rotated around the connecting portion between the fixing member 320 on one side and the other side of the board box 42100, and the protruding portion 42118 is inserted inside the third opening 42301g of the back case 42300. Accordingly, the projecting portion 42118 is disposed at a position where it can engage with the second engagement member 42370.

  The second engaging member 42370 is disposed outside the rear case 42300 with the lower side inserted through the second opening 42302b in a state before being inserted into the third opening 42301g (FIG. 205 (a)). reference). Thereby, the operator who arranges the board box 42100 in the back case 42300 operates the second engagement member 42370 from the outside of the back case 42300, and the second engagement member 42370 is located inside the third opening 42301g. Can be inserted.

  Further, since the displacement direction of the second engagement member 42370 is set to the gravity direction, the second engagement member 42370 is disposed at the lower end portion by the action of gravity in a state before being inserted inside the third opening portion 42301g. . Thereby, when the projecting portion 42118 is inserted inside the third opening portion 42301g of the rear case 42300, it can be prevented from colliding with the second engagement member 42370. As a result, the work efficiency of the worker can be improved.

  In addition, when the second engagement member 42370 is forgotten to be engaged with the projecting portion 42118, the second engagement member 42370 can be disposed outside the rear case 42300, which is not normal for the operator. Can be easily recognized. As a result, forgetting to engage the second engaging member 42370 and the protruding portion 42118 can be prevented.

  Next, the back case 42300 and the base plate 42060 will be described with reference to FIG. 206 (a) is a rear view of the game board 13, and FIG. 206 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 taken along the line CCVIb-CCVIb of FIG. 206 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 206, a standing member 42060f is disposed on the back surface of the base plate 42060 in the forty-second embodiment. The standing member 42060 f is erected toward the back side (arrow B direction side) of the base plate 42060, and the standing tip position is set to the same plane as the bottom wall portion 42301 of the back case 42300. . Further, the standing member 42060f is disposed on the lower side of the second engagement member 42370 and is disposed on the outer side of the back case 42300. Thus, when the rear case 42300 is disposed on the game board 42013 in a state where the second engagement member 42370 and the projecting portion 42118 are forgotten to be engaged, the standing portion 42060f of the second engagement member 42370 is disposed. It can collide with the lower side. As a result, the back case 42300 is disposed on the base plate 42060 in a state where the second engagement member 42370 and the protruding portion 42118 are forgotten to be engaged, or in a state where the substrate box 42100 is forgotten to be disposed on the back case 42300. It can suppress being installed.

  In the present embodiment, a light emitting substrate that irradiates the inside of the back case 42300 is disposed on the standing portion 42060f. As a result, the standing portion 42060f can be combined with a portion that irradiates light, and a portion that prevents the back case 42300 and the base plate 42060 from being engaged in an abnormal state. As a result, an increase in the outer shape of the base plate 42060 can be suppressed.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In the first embodiment, in order to retract the ball receiving portion 467 from the third position to the second position or the first position, it is configured to follow the drive of the drive motor KM2, but from the third position to the second position or the second position. The drive for retracting to one position may be driven by a biasing spring. For example, an urging spring is provided between the rack 466 or the movable rack 464 and the base member 470, and an elastic force is applied in accordance with the displacement of the rack 466 or the movable rack 464.

  In this case, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position and performs the payout operation, the driving of the drive motor KM3 is turned off so that the ball receiving portion 467 is moved to the second position or the second position by the biasing force of the biasing spring. It can be displaced to one position side.

  Therefore, the ball receiver 467 can be displaced using the time until the driving force of the drive motor KM2 is switched at the third position, so that the game ball is discharged when the game ball is discharged from the inside of the ball receiver 467. The wobbling of the lower displacement member 440 due to the reaction of the operation can be suppressed.

  That is, when the game ball is discharged from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467, the load of the lower displacement member 440 is reduced by the amount of the discharged game ball, and the lower displacement member 440 is likely to be displaced upward due to the reaction. By immediately displacing the ball receiving portion 467, a force for displacing the base member 470 downward is exerted by a reaction caused by the rotational displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, thereby canceling the reaction when the ball is discharged from the lower displacement member 440. be able to.

  In the first embodiment, the case where two engagement protrusions 882 that regulate the rotation of the rotating body 800 are formed on the side surface of the rotating body 800 at a predetermined interval has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Absent. For example, a plurality of continuous members may be provided on the side wall of the rotator 800 at a predetermined interval. In this case, the rotation of the rotating body 800 can be restricted at any position, and the rotation of the rotating body 800 with an external force when the lid member 770 is in the open state can be restricted.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the opening 831 is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 800 and the game ball is sent from the opening 831 has been described. However, the opening 831 is opposite to the communication hole 881b of the rotating body 800. It may be formed on the side surface. That is, an opening may be formed on both side surfaces of the rotating body 800 in the axial direction, and one may be used as a sphere inlet and the other as a sphere outlet. In this case, since the pitching path of the ball can be formed inside the rotating body 800, the accessory (the rotating body 800) can be used as the pitching path, especially when there is no arrangement space on the back side of the game board 13. The pitching path can be secured without increasing the size of the game board 13.

  In the said 1st Embodiment, although the rotary body 800 demonstrated the case where an external shape was formed in a column shape, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, the shape may be a polygonal shape, an elliptical shape, or a combination thereof. In this case, since the shape of the rotating body 800 can be complicated, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize that the effect has been switched due to the rotational displacement of the rotating body 800.

  In the eighth embodiment, the case where the outer peripheral surface of the rotation operation unit 8654 is formed to be operable by the player has been described. However, a push button may be provided on the outer peripheral surface of the rotation operation unit 8654. In this case, the player can perform not only an operation of applying a rotational force to the rotation operation unit 8654 but also an operation of pressing a push button or a combination of the rotation operation and the push operation of the rotation operation unit 8654. . As a result, a plurality of operation forms of the rotation operation unit 8654 can be formed, so that the player can be provided with interest.

  In the eighth embodiment, the case where the transmission gear 8651 and the transmission gear 8852 are engaged with each other has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a torque limiter or the like that interrupts transmission of the driving force when an overload is applied may be interposed between the transmission gear 8651 and the transmission gear 8852.

  In this case, when the player stops the rotation of the rotation operation unit 8654 in the rotation state, transmission of the rotation driving force from the drive motor KM6 can be blocked, and the rotation of the rotation operation unit 8654 can be suppressed from continuing. . As a result, it is possible to prevent the rotation operation unit 8650 from being broken when a rotation opposite to the rotation in the A direction is input to the rotation operation unit 8654 from the player.

  Further, when the player operates the rotation operation unit 8654, when the player's fingers or clothes are sandwiched between the rotation plate 817 on the rotation direction side of the rotation operation unit 8654, the rotation is stopped, Further pinching of the player's fingers and clothes can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being injured by being sandwiched between the rotation operation unit 8654 and the upper plate 8017.

  In the eighth embodiment, the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 8654 is the A direction, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 8654 may be the left-right direction with respect to the pachinko machine 10. In this case, it is possible to cause the player to perform an operation associated with the effect of the gaming machine and improve the effect of the effect. For example, it is possible to produce an effect of hitting (flapping) a character or the like displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by hitting the rotation operation unit 8654 so as to rotate rightward with the left hand.

  In the first embodiment, the substrate box 100 is disposed on the fixing member 320, and the fixing member 320 is engaged with the engaging member 310, thereby preventing the substrate box 100 from being replaced with an unauthorized substrate. Although the case has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and other members (for example, the third pattern) may be used as long as they have the effect of being able to suppress unauthorized removal by being disposed on the fixing member 320. It may be a display device 81 or a detection device capable of detecting unauthorized input such as unauthorized radio waves or vibrations.

  In the first embodiment, the first concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i, and the third concave portion 571j formed in the first unit 551, the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion 564d are: Although the case where they are formed at positions facing each other has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion 564d are replaced with the first concave portion 571h and the first concave portion 571h. The first concave portion 571h is arranged after the game balls that are disposed upstream of the second concave portion 571i and the third concave portion 571j are brought into contact with the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion 564d. The second recess 571i and the third recess 571j may be received.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the thickness of the decorative member 154 is made smaller than the depth of the recessed portion 151b of the main body 151 is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the decorative member 154 may be formed of a material that can be elastically deformed, and may be formed thicker than the recessed depth of the recessed portion 151 b of the main body portion 151. In this case, when the general winning a prize opening unit 150 is disposed on the base plate 60, the main body portion 151 can be disposed in contact with the base plate 60 by being compressed and elastically deformed.

  In the first embodiment, when the cam member 422 is disposed at the position of the second displacement state, the forces PW1 and PW2 that are applied from the first link member 431 to the cam member 422 act in a direction that cancels each other. Although the case has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the direction of the force input to the cam member 422 from the point where the end of the cam member 422 and the plate-like protrusion 431b abut may be set to the direction from the abutment point toward the axis of the shaft portion 422a. . According to this, it is possible to suppress the force in the direction rotating around the shaft portion 422a from acting on the cam member 422.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the other end side of the substrate box 100 is disposed on the back side of the back case 300 with a screw has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the other end side of the substrate box 100 may be fixed by a sealing tool that cannot be removed when engaged with the rear case 300. More specifically, a cylindrical sealing tool that is inserted through openings formed at a plurality of locations on the other end side of the back case 300 is inserted into insertion portions that are recessed at a plurality of locations on the back side of the back case 300. By engaging the insertion portion with the sealing tool, the substrate box 100 is disposed on the back side of the back case 300 in a state where it cannot rotate (operate).

  When removing the substrate box 100, the other end side of the substrate box 100 can be removed from the back case 300 by cutting the engaging portion between the insertion portion and the sealing tool. Further, when the other end side of the substrate box 100 is disposed again in the rear case 300, a new sealing tool is inserted through an unused opening of the substrate box 100, and an unused insertion portion of the rear case 300 is inserted. The other end side of the substrate box 100 can be disposed on the back case 300 by engaging with the back case 300.

  In the first embodiment, the outer shape of the decorative member 154 in front view is formed larger than the opening shape of the second opening 60b, and the end of the decorative member 154 overlaps with the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 in the front-rear direction. Although the case where it arrange | positions in the state was demonstrated, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, the outer shape of the decorative member 154 in front view may be set to be substantially the same as the opening shape of the second opening 60b.

  In this case, the decorative member 154 of the general winning a prize opening unit 150 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 are formed of the same material, so that the decorative member 154 and the decorative member 60c are formed of a single sheet, By cutting the decorative member 154 from the sheet, the decorative member 154 and the decorative member 60c can be formed. Therefore, since it is not necessary to form the decoration member 154 in a separate process, the yield when forming the decoration member 154 can be improved.

  When the outer shape of the decorative member 154 in front view is formed to be substantially the same as the opening shape of the second opening 60b, the decorative member 154 is disposed inside the second opening 60b, It is preferable to arrange the front face with the decorative member 60c on the same plane. In this case, since the decorative surfaces of the decorative member 154 and the decorative member 60c coincide with the front-rear direction in the front view, the player can recognize the decoration of the decorative member 154 and the decorative member 60c as one decoration.

  In the first embodiment, the first convex portion 571h is provided on the inner surface on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the game ball sending path of the first unit 551 toward the back side (arrow B side direction). The second convex portion 571i and the third convex portion 571k are formed, and the first concave portion 571h and the second concave portion 571i are formed in the inner surface of the back side of the game ball sending path of the first unit 511 so as to be recessed toward the back side. Although the case where the third recess 571j is provided has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto.

  For example, the first concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i, the third concave portion 571j, the first convex portion 571h, the second convex portion 571i, and the third convex portion 571k are formed on the inner surface on the opposite side in the front-rear direction in the front view. Also good.

  Moreover, the recessed part recessed toward the front image may be formed in the inner surface of the front side of the position facing the 2nd recessed part 571i. In this case, the pitching space can be increased by the amount of the concave portion provided in the pitching space of the curved path WK1. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from flowing down too slowly on the curved path WK1. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game ball from staying on the curved path WK1.

  In the ninth embodiment, the case where the inclined surface 9431b1 protrudes to the front side toward the cam member 422 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the inclined surface 9431b1 may be formed as an inclination in which the amount of protrusion toward the front side becomes smaller toward the cam member 422.

  In this case, the cam member 422 can be pressed against the curved wall portion 411e of the front base 411 when the lower displacement unit 400 is in the second displacement state and the end of the cam member 422 contacts the plate-like protrusion 9531a. . As a result, the cam member 422 can be prevented from swinging back and forth, and the lower displacement member 440 can be easily maintained at the position of the second displacement state.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the light emitter 11491a is formed at a position higher than the center of the game ball received in the ball receiving portion 467 (in the direction of the arrow U) is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the light emitter 11491a may be disposed at substantially the same height as the center of the game ball received by the ball receiver 467. In this case, it is preferable that the height position of the transmission part 11451b is formed from the center of the game ball received by the ball receiving part 467 to the upper side from the center.

  According to this, when a part of the light emitted from the light emitter 11491a is blocked by the game ball, the shadow of the game ball formed on the transmission part 11451b is formed in a semicircular shape by the upper hemisphere of the game ball. it can. Thus, the roundness of the game ball can be formed in the shadow formed on the transmission portion 11451b, so that the player can easily recognize the position of the game ball received in the ball receiving portion 467.

  In the twelfth and thirty-ninth embodiments, the case where the third pieces 12467e and 39467e are displaced by the load of the game ball has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a sensor for detecting that a game ball has passed through a ball sending path for sending a game ball is attached to the ball receivers 12467 and 39467, and the third piece 12467e, 39467e may be displaced alone. According to this, since it is not necessary to displace the second pieces 12467d and 39467d by the load of the game ball, it is possible to improve the reliability of the displacement of the ball receiving portions 12467 and 39467. In this case, a driving device for displacing the third pieces 12467e and 39467e independently is disposed in the ball receiving portions 12467 and 39467.

  In the twelfth and thirty-ninth embodiments, the case where the rotation axis when the third pieces 12467e and 39467e are rotationally displaced is formed in the first pieces 12467c and 39467c, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the shaft portions 12467e3 and 39467e3 of the third pieces 12467e and 39467e may be inserted into openings formed in the rack 466, and the third pieces 12467e and 39467e may be rotationally displaced with respect to the rack 466. In this case, the distance between the rotating shaft and the connecting portion between the second pieces 12467d and 39467d can be easily increased, so that the displacement amount of the third pieces 12467e and 39467e relative to the displacement amount of the second pieces 12467d and 39467d can be easily increased. . As a result, the shielding plate 12467e1 of the third piece 12467e can be easily arranged on the front side of the light emitter 11491a. In this case, the opening formed in the rack 466 is formed in a long hole in which the shaft portions 12467e3 and 39467e3 can slide.

  In the thirteenth embodiment, the case where the second path member 13570 is moved in the front-rear direction with respect to the first path member 13560 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. The two-path member 13570 may be moved in the front-rear direction. In this case, the relative positional relationship between the second path member 13570 and the front surface of the base plate 60 (game board 13) prevents the player from grasping the distance between the first member and the second member facing each other. it can. As a result, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

  In the first, tenth, and twenty-fifth embodiments, the case where the decorative members 154, 10154, and 25154 are attached by the adhesive tapes 154a, 10154a, and 25154a has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. An adhesive made of a liquid material may be used.

  In the thirteenth, thirty-second, thirty-third, thirty-fourth, and thirty-fifth embodiments, the first path members 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, and 35560 disposed on the front side are formed from a non-light-transmissive material. Although the case where it is difficult for the player to recognize the opposing path between the first path members 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, and 35560 and the second path members 13570, 32570, and 34570 is described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto.

  For example, the first path members 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, and 35560 are formed with openings that are opened in the form of slits having a width smaller than the diameter of the game ball, so that the first path members 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, and 35560 are formed. And the second ball members 13570, 32570, and 34570 may be made to be visually recognized by the player through the opening. In this case, the plurality of openings formed in the slit shape are set such that the distance to the adjacent opening is smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

  Thereby, the player can recognize the game ball flowing down between the first path member 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, 35560 and the second path member 13570, 32570, 34570 through the opening.

  In addition, the first path members 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, and 35560 are formed with openings that are opened in a circular shape smaller than the diameter of the game ball, so that the first path members 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, 35560 and the second path are formed. The player may visually recognize the game ball flowing down between the facing members 13570, 32570, and 34570 through the opening. In this case, the adjacent width dimension of the plurality of openings is formed smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, since the opening of the opening can be made smaller than when the opening is formed in a slit shape, the first path member 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, 35560 and the second path member are provided via the opening. It can suppress that the space | interval between opposing facing 13570, 32570, 34570 is recognized by the player.

  In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the portion (the engaged portion 18332) to which the displacement member 18310 is engaged is formed in the fixed member 18320 is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the engaged portion 18332 with which the displacement member 18310 is engaged may be formed in the substrate box 100 that is caulked and fixed to the fixing member 18320.

  In this case, in a state where the substrate box 100 is not disposed on the back case 18300, the displacement member 18310 cannot be disposed inside the back case 18300, and the displacement member 18310 protrudes outside the back case 18300 due to its own weight. State.

  As a result, when the board box 100 is forgotten to be attached to the rear case 18300, the displacement member 18310 is hooked on the outer frame 11 when the game board 18013 is disposed on the outer frame 11 (see FIG. 164 (b)). As a result, the operator can be made aware of forgetting to attach the board box 100.

  In the twenty-first embodiment, the insertion portion 21724b of the rotation unit 21700 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the bottom wall portion 302 of the back case 300 is inserted into the concave portion 317 of the displacement member 310 and displaced. Although the case where the engagement between the member 310 and the fixing member 320 is prevented from being illegally released has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, an insertion portion 21724b to be inserted inside the recess 317 of the displacement member 310 may be formed in the substrate box 100 disposed in the fixing member 320.

  In this case, the insertion portion 21724b is disposed on the front side of the bottom wall portion 302 through an opening formed in the fixing member 320. Further, the insertion portion 21724b is formed at a portion where a shaft for caulking and fixing to the fixing member 320 is inserted. As a result, when the bearing portion 117 of the board box 100 is cut and illegally removed from the rear case 21300, the insertion portion 21724b can be left inside the recess 317 of the displacement member 310. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to remove the fixing member 320 from the back case 21300.

  Therefore, when the fixing member 320 is replaced, it is necessary to correct the caulking portion between the substrate box 100 and the fixing member 320 (cut the caulking portion). Accordingly, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally remove the fixing member 320 from the back member 21300, and thus it is possible to suppress the fixing member 320 from being removed and replaced with an illegal substrate box.

  In the forty-second embodiment, the case where the light emitting substrate for irradiating light is arranged on the standing part 42060f has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the driving member arranged on the base plate 42060 It may be formed as a control board for controlling the game or a passage for sending game balls.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition that a special ball is awarded to the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

<Concept of the Invention Taking the Lower Displacement Unit 400 as an Example>
A displacement member formed so as to be displaceable in a first direction from a reference position and configured to be able to move a game ball in accordance with the displacement in the first direction, and a game from outside the track region of the displacement member to the track region of the displacement member In a gaming machine comprising a restricting means for restricting a ball from being sent, the displacement member is formed to be displaceable from the reference position in a second direction opposite to the first direction. A gaming machine A1.

  Here, a displacement member formed so as to be displaceable in the first direction from the reference position and formed so as to be able to move the game ball in accordance with the displacement in the first direction, and a track region of the displacement member from outside the track region of the displacement member 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine including a regulation unit that regulates that a game ball is sent to is known (for example, JP 2010-166997 A). According to this gaming machine, it is possible to suppress a specified number or more of the game balls from being sent to the trajectory region of the displacement member by the restriction of the restriction means. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, for example, if malfunction occurs in the restricting means due to sticking or wear, there is a risk that more than a specified number of gaming balls will be sent toward the trajectory region of the displacement member. In this case, there is a problem that a problem may occur due to game balls exceeding the specified number. That is, for example, game balls in excess of the specified number may enter the drive mechanism of the displacement member and be bitten by the movable part, causing damage. Alternatively, there is a risk that game balls exceeding the specified number may flow out of the game area (for example, the back side of the game board).

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the displacement member is formed so as to be displaceable from the reference position in the second direction opposite to the first direction, so that the trajectory region of the displacement member can be expanded accordingly. Therefore, for example, even when a malfunction occurs in the restricting means and more than a specified number of game balls are sent, the amount of game balls that exceed the specified number is increased to the track area because the track area of the displacement member is expanded. Can accept. As a result, the game balls that exceed the specified number can be moved along with the displacement of the displacement member in the first direction. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the game balls exceeding the specified number from entering the drive mechanism portion of the displacement member and out of the game area, and as a result, the game balls exceeding the specified number can be prevented from being defective. It can be made difficult to occur.

  The gaming machine A1 includes a passage member that is formed as a passage through which a game ball can pass and whose downstream is communicated with the track region of the displacement member, and the restricting means restricts the passage of the game ball in the passage member. Characteristic gaming machine A2.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the gaming machine A2 includes a passage member that is formed as a passage through which a game ball can pass and that communicates with the track region of the displacement member on the downstream side. Since the passage of the ball is regulated, for example, even when a malfunction occurs in the regulating means and a specified number or more of the game balls are sent, the extra number of game balls are passed through the passage member through the passage member. The ball can be reliably sent to the orbital area. As a result, problems caused by game balls exceeding the specified number can be made difficult to occur.

  In the gaming machine A2, the displacement member is formed so as to receive and hold a specified number of game balls sent from the passage member at the reference position, and at least the diameter of the game ball from the reference position in the second direction. The gaming machine A3 is formed so as to be displaceable by a distance exceeding.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2, the displacement member is formed so as to be able to receive and hold a prescribed number of gaming balls sent from the passage member at the reference position, and from the reference position to the second position. Since it is formed to be displaceable by a distance exceeding at least the diameter of the game ball in the direction, after receiving the prescribed number of game balls at the reference position, the prescribed number is obtained by displacing the displacement member from the reference position in the second direction. The extra game balls can be sent to the trajectory region of the displacement member (the region on the first direction side of the displacement member). Therefore, it is possible to move the game balls in excess of the specified number as the displacement member is displaced in the first direction.

  In this case, the displacement member holds the specified number of game balls, and the game balls exceeding the specified number can be sent to the trajectory area. Therefore, the specified number of game balls and the game balls exceeding the specified number are separated. can do. Therefore, for example, by displacing the displacement member in the first direction, the operation of discharging only the game balls exceeding the specified number from the track area while maintaining the state where the specified number of game balls are held by the displacement member. It becomes possible.

  In gaming machine A3, gaming machine A4 is characterized in that the displacement member is formed to be capable of changing its posture when displaced in the first direction and reaches a predetermined position.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A3, the displacement member is formed so that its posture can be changed when it is displaced in the first direction and reaches a predetermined position. While it is easy to maintain the state where the ball is held by the displacement member and the fall of the game ball from the displacement member can be suppressed, when the ball reaches a predetermined position, the change of the posture of the displacement member is used to play the game ball. Can be easily discharged from the displacement member.

  In the gaming machine A4, the gaming machine A4 includes a recess formed in a track region when the displacement member is displaced from the reference position in the first direction, and the displacement member is disposed in the recess when the displacement member is displaced in the first direction. A gaming machine A5 comprising a projecting portion to be engaged, and the projecting portion is formed so as to be changeable by being engaged with the concave portion.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A4, the gaming machine A5 includes a recess that is recessed in the track region when the displacement member is displaced in the first direction from the reference position, and the displacement member is displaced in the first direction. Since the protrusion is engaged with the recess and the protrusion is engaged with the recess so that the posture can be changed, the structure for changing the posture of the displacement member can be simplified.

  In the gaming machine A5, the protruding portion protrudes from the displacement member toward the first direction, and the protruding tip is in contact with the lower half surface of the gaming ball sent to the track region of the displacement member. A gaming machine A6 that is touched.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A5, the projecting part projects from the displacement member in the first direction, and the projecting tip is sent to the track region of the displacement member. Since it is formed so as to be able to contact the lower half surface (that is, the game balls exceeding the specified number), when the displacement member is displaced in the first direction, the game ball is placed on the lower half surface with the protrusion. It can be moved while pushing. As a result, it is possible to easily discharge game balls in excess of the specified number from the track area.

  Further, the protrusion is interposed between the specified number of game balls held by the displacement member and the game balls sent to the track area of the displacement member (game balls exceeding the specified number). It is possible to secure an interval between a specified number of game balls and a game ball exceeding the specified number by the protruding length of the portion. Therefore, it is possible to easily discharge only the game balls exceeding the specified number from the track area while maintaining the state where the specified number of game balls are held by the displacement member.

  Furthermore, the role of changing the attitude of the displacement member by engaging with the recess and the role of moving the game ball while pushing the lower half of the ball are used as the protrusion, so the number of parts is reduced accordingly, and the product Cost can be reduced.

  In gaming machine A5 or A6, gaming machine A7 is characterized in that the size of the recess in the first direction is smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A5 or A6, the size of the recess in the first direction is made smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball, so that the gaming ball sent to the trajectory region of the displacement member That is, it is possible to easily pass through the recess when the displacement ball is moved along with the displacement of the displacement member in the first direction. As a result, it is possible to easily discharge game balls in excess of the specified number from the track area.

  In any one of the gaming machines A5 to A7, the displacement member is erected at a height lower than the radius of the game ball in a track region when the displacement member is displaced from the reference position in the first direction, and more than the recess. When the game ball sent to the trajectory region of the displacement member is moved along with the displacement of the displacement member in the first direction, the game ball is moved to the wall. The game machine A8 is characterized in that a change in the posture of the displacement member is regulated by being in contact with the portion and the displacement member.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in any of the gaming machines A5 to A7, the concave member is erected at a height lower than the radius of the gaming ball in the track region when the displacement member is displaced in the first direction from the reference position. When the game ball sent to the trajectory region of the displacement member is moved along with the displacement of the displacement member in the first direction, the game ball is separated from the wall portion. Since the change in posture of the displacement member is formed so as to be able to be regulated by being in contact with the displacement member, only the number of game balls exceeding the prescribed number are maintained while maintaining the state where the displacement member holds the prescribed number of game balls. Easy to discharge from the orbital area.

  That is, since the wall portion is erected at a height lower than the radius of the game ball, when the game ball is moved by being pushed by the protrusion as the displacement member is displaced in the first direction, the game ball is moved. By making the lower half surface abut against the wall portion, the game ball can easily get over the wall portion. In this case, the game ball is brought into contact with the displacement member (that is, the game ball is interposed between the displacement member and the wall portion), and a reaction force can be applied from the game ball to the displacement member. The posture change can be restricted, and it is possible to prevent the prescribed number of game balls held by the displacement member from dropping off. As a result, while maintaining the state in which the displacement member holds the specified number of game balls, only the game balls exceeding the specified number can be easily discharged from the track area.

  On the other hand, when game balls (that is, game balls exceeding a specified number) are not sent to the trajectory region of the displacement member, no game ball is interposed between the wall portion and the displacement member, so that the protrusion is in the recess. By engaging, the posture of the displacement member can be changed. As a result, it is possible to easily discharge a specified number of game balls (that is, game balls held by the displacement member) from the displacement member by utilizing the change in the posture of the displacement member.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the restricting means is formed to be operable in conjunction with the displacement of the displacement member.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the restricting means is formed to be operable in conjunction with the displacement of the displacement member. It is possible to restrict or allow the game ball to be sent to the track region of the member. That is, the restriction or allowance of the game ball can be switched in synchronism with the displacement of the displacement member, so that, for example, according to the sensor device for detecting the position of the restricting means and the detection result of the sensor device. The driving means for driving the regulating means or the control of each means can be made unnecessary, and accordingly, the product cost can be reduced and the reliability of the operation can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A9, the restricting means allows the game ball to be sent to the track region of the displacement member in conjunction with the displacement member being displaced in the second direction from the reference position. Characteristic gaming machine A10.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A9, the restricting means is a game ball that moves the displacement member to the track region in conjunction with the displacement of the displacement member from the reference position in the second direction. Therefore, the game ball can be reliably sent to the trajectory region of the displacement member and to the region on the first direction side of the displacement member.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A10, a base member in which the displacement member is displaceably disposed, and a vertically lower portion and an upper portion in the vertical direction of an end portion on the first direction side of the base member. And a recovery member having an opening in the game machine A11.

  According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A10, the displacement member is disposed so as to be displaceable, and disposed below the end of the base member on the first direction side in the vertical direction. And a recovery member having an opening in the vertical direction upward, so that a game ball that is moved in accordance with the movement of the displacement member in the first direction and is discharged from the track region of the displacement member (that is, an amount exceeding a specified number) Game balls) can be received from the opening of the collecting member and collected.

  In the gaming machine A11, the base member is formed to be displaceable between a retracted position and a displaced position, and the opening of the recovery member is at least the first member in the base member displaced to the retracted position or the displaced position. A gaming machine A12 that is formed in a size that is located below the direction side end in the vertical direction.

  According to the gaming machine A12, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A11, the base member is formed to be displaceable between the retracted position and the displaced position, and the opening of the recovery member is displaced at least to the retracted position or the displaced position. Since the base member has a size that is positioned vertically below the end portion on the first direction side of the base member, the base member is discharged from the track region of the displacement member regardless of whether the base member is displaced to the retracted position or the displaced position. The game balls to be played (that is, game balls in excess of the specified number) can be received from the opening of the collection member and collected.

  In any one of the gaming machines A5 to A8, the gaming machine A13 is provided with an insertion member that restricts the protrusion from engaging with the recess by being inserted into the recessed space of the recess. .

  According to the gaming machine A13, in any of the gaming machines A5 to A8, the displacement member is provided with an insertion member that restricts the protrusion from engaging with the recess by being inserted into the recessed space of the recess. With the displacement in the first direction, it is possible to prevent the posture of the displacement member from being changed when the game balls exceeding the specified number are discharged from the track region of the displacement member. Therefore, it is possible to easily discharge only the game balls exceeding the specified number from the track area while maintaining the state where the specified number of game balls are held by the displacement member.

  The gaming machine A13 includes a base member that is formed to be displaceable between a retracted position and a displaced position, and the displaceable member is disposed so as to be displaceable, and the insertion member displaces the base member to the retracted position. Then, the gaming machine A14 is inserted into the recessed space of the recess, and is separated from the recessed space of the recess when the base member is displaced to the displacement position.

  According to the gaming machine A14, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A13, when the base member is displaced to the retracted position, the insertion member is inserted into the recessed space of the recess, so that the displacement member is displaced in the first direction. As a result, when the amount of game balls exceeding the specified number is discharged from the track area of the displacement member, the displacement member is prevented from changing its posture, and the specified number of game balls are held by the displacement member. On the other hand, when the base member is displaced to the displacement position, the insertion member is separated from the recessed space of the recess, so that the protrusion is engaged with the recess as the displacement member is displaced in the first direction. By being combined, it is possible to change the posture of the displacement member and to easily discharge a specified number of game balls from the displacement member.

<Concept of Invention with Distribution Unit 500 as an Example>
A downflow path through which the game ball flows down, a first branch path and a second branch path branched from the downflow path, and a game ball flowing down the downflow path to one of the first branch path or the second branch path A gaming machine comprising a sorting means for sorting, comprising a displacement member formed to be displaceable and receiving a game ball from the first branch passage, wherein the displacement member is displaced in contact with the sorting means. In the gaming machine B1, the distribution means is displaced and the distribution destination is switched.

  Here, the downflow passage through which the game ball flows down, the first branch passage and the second branch passage branched from the downflow passage, and the game ball flowing down the downflow passage to one of the first branch passage and the second branch passage 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine including a sorting unit that distributes is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-223176). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the game balls that have flowed down the downflow passage are alternately distributed to the first branch passage and the second branch passage one by one, the game balls that flow down the downflow passage, The first branch passage and the second branch passage are equally distributed (that is, half each). That is, there is a problem that the number of game balls distributed to the first branch passage cannot be changed.

  On the other hand, the gaming machine B1 includes a displacement member that is formed to be displaceable and that receives a game ball from the first branch passage, and the displacement member abuts on the distribution means to be displaced. Since the means is displaced and the distribution destination is switched, the number of game balls distributed to the first branch path or the second branch path can be changed according to the displacement of the displacement member. That is, the number of game balls distributed to the first branch passage can be changed.

  According to the gaming machine B1, since the allocating means can be displaced using the displacement of the displacement member, it is not necessary to separately provide a driving means and a transmission mechanism for displacing the allocating means. it can. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced correspondingly, and the product cost can be reduced.

  Further, for example, in a structure in which the displacement of the sorting means is controlled using position detection by the sensor device or driving by the driving means, the reliability of the sorting operation of the sorting means is reduced due to malfunction due to detection failure or control failure. However, according to the gaming machine B1, the sorting destination by the sorting means can be switched in mechanical synchronization with the displacement of the displacement member, so that the reliability of the sorting operation can be improved.

  In particular, since the displacement member is a member that receives a game ball from the first branch passage, the distribution destination of the distribution means can be switched to the first branch passage in synchronization with the displacement of the displacement member, so that the first branch The game balls distributed to the passage can be reliably received by the displacement member.

  In the gaming machine B1, the displacing member includes an urging unit that applies an urging force to the allocating unit and maintains a distribution destination by the allocating unit in one of the first branch passage and the second branch passage. By displacing the allocating means in a direction against the direction of the urging force, the distribution destination by the allocating means is switched to the other of the first branch path or the second branch path, and the urging force The gaming machine B2 is characterized in that the distribution destination by the distribution means is returned to one of the first branch path and the second branch path by the biasing force of the means.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1, an urging force is applied to the sorting means so that the sorting destination by the sorting means is maintained in one of the first branch path and the second branch path. Since the urging means is provided, it is possible to prevent the distribution destination by the allocating means from being inadvertently switched. In this case, since the distribution means is displaced in accordance with the displacement of the displacement member and the distribution destination is switched, the return to the distribution destination before switching can be performed by the urging force of the urging means. It is not necessary that the member is in contact with the distributing means. That is, the displacement member can be separated from the distribution means. Therefore, the freedom degree of design of the movable range of a displacement member can be raised.

  In the gaming machine B2, the urging means applies an urging force to the allocating means to maintain the distribution destination by the allocating means in the second branch passage.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B2, the biasing means applies a biasing force to the sorting means and maintains the sorting destination by the sorting means in the second branch passage, so that the displacement member However, it is possible to prevent the sorting destination by the sorting means from being switched to the first branch path in a state where the game ball cannot be received.

  In the gaming machine B3, the gaming machine B3 includes a base member that is formed so as to be displaceable between a first position and a second position and on which the displacement member is disposed, and the base member is disposed at the first position. The displacement member is capable of receiving a game ball from the first branch passage and is capable of contacting the distribution means, and the displacement member is in the state where the base member is disposed at the second position. A gaming machine B4, wherein the member is made incapable of receiving a game ball from the first branch passage and incapable of contacting the distributing means.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B3, the gaming machine B4 includes a base member formed so as to be displaceable between the first position and the second position, and the displacement member is disposed on the base member. The aspect which displaces a displacement member in the state which has arrange | positioned the base member in the 1st position, and the aspect which displaces a displacement member in the state which has arrange | positioned the base member in the 2nd position can be formed. Therefore, the production effect can be enhanced accordingly.

  In this case, when the base member is located at the second position, the displacement member is unable to receive the game ball from the first branch passage, and in such a state, the displacement member is unable to contact the distribution means. Therefore, in a state where the displacement member cannot receive the game ball (a state where the base member is disposed at the second position), it is possible to suppress switching of the distribution destination by the distribution unit to the first branch passage.

  The gaming machine B4 includes a second base member formed as a separate member from the base member, and the distribution means is disposed on the second base member.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B4, the gaming machine B5 includes the second base member formed as a separate member from the base member, and the second base member is provided with the distributing means. Therefore, the increase in size of the base member can be suppressed.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the displacement member is formed to be displaceable at least between a switching position and a receiving position set at a position different from the switching position, and the displacement member is displaced to the switching position. In this state, the distribution destination by the distribution means is switched to the first branch passage, and when the displacement member is displaced to the receiving position, the displacement member can receive the game ball from the first branch passage. A gaming machine B6 characterized in that the distribution destination by the distribution means is switched to the second branch passage.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the displacement member is formed to be at least displaceable between a switching position and a receiving position set at a position different from the switching position, In the state where the displacement member is displaced to the switching position, the distribution destination by the distribution means is switched to the first branch passage, and in the state where the displacement member is displaced to the reception position, the displacement member receives the game ball from the first branch passage. In addition to being able to receive, the distribution destination by the distribution means is switched to the second branch passage, so that it is possible to prevent the game balls exceeding the prescribed number that can be received by the displacement member from being distributed to the first branch passage.

  That is, when the switching position and the receiving position are set to the same position, the displacement member receives the game ball while the distribution destination by the distribution means is switched to the first branch passage, so the displacement member There is a possibility that the game balls are distributed to the first branch passage beyond the prescribed number that can be received. When a means for restricting the inflow of game balls to the first branch passage is separately provided, the structure becomes complicated and the reliability is lowered, and the product cost is increased.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B6, the displacement member is displaced to the switching position, and after the prescribed number (or less than the prescribed number) of game balls are distributed to the first branch passage, the displacement member is displaced to the receiving position. Then, since the distribution destination is switched to the second branch passage, it is possible to prevent the game balls exceeding the specified number from flowing down to the first branch passage. Therefore, it can suppress that the game ball exceeding the regulation number which a displacement member can receive is distributed to a 1st branch passage. Moreover, since it is not necessary to provide the above-described means separately, it is possible to improve reliability and reduce product cost.

  In the gaming machine B6, the first branch passage is formed as one or a plurality of protrusions or recesses protruding or recessed on an inner wall surface thereof, and provides resistance to a game ball passing through the first branch passage. A gaming machine B7 comprising means.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B6, the first branch passage is formed as one or a plurality of protrusions or recesses protruding or recessed on the inner wall surface, and passes through the first branch passage. Since the resistance means for applying resistance to the game ball to be played is provided, the speed of the game ball passing through the first branch passage can be reduced. Therefore, the time required when the displacement member is displaced from the switching position to the reception position can be lengthened accordingly, so that the game ball can be reliably received by the displacement member. Further, the output of the driving means can be reduced by the amount that the displacement speed required for the displacement member can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine B6 or B7, the distribution means includes a first in / out part and a second in / out part formed so as to be capable of intruding into the first branch passage according to the displacement of the distribution means. The 1 in / out part is formed to project to the first branch path so that the game balls flowing down the down path can be distributed to the second branch path, and the second in / out part is formed from the first in / out part. Is also located downstream of the first branch passage and protrudes to the first branch passage so that the flow of the game balls distributed to the first branch passage can be regulated, and the first intrusion portion The gaming machine B8 is characterized in that when the first projecting part and the second projecting part project into the passage of the first branch passage, the other is retracted out of the passage of the first branch passage.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B6 or B7, the distribution means includes a first in / out portion formed so as to be in / out with respect to the first branch passage according to the displacement of the distribution means, and A first in / out part is provided so that the first in / out part protrudes to the first branch passage so that a game ball flowing down the down passage can be distributed to the second branch passage. It is located on the downstream side of the first branch path with respect to the in / out part and protrudes into the first branch path so that the flow of the game balls distributed to the first branch path can be regulated, and the first in / out part In the state where one protrudes into the passage of the first branch passage, the other is retracted out of the passage of the first branch passage, so that the distribution means is displaced in accordance with the displacement of the displacement member. Then, only the specified number of game balls are distributed to the first branch passage and used as the displacement member. It can be only taken.

  That is, the first state where the first in / out portion protrudes to distribute the game balls flowing down the down passage to the second branch passage, and the first in / out portion retreats so that the game balls flowing down the down passage A second state for distributing to the first branch passage, a third state for restricting the flow of game balls distributed to the first branch passage (reserving game balls) by projecting the second in / out part, 2 By retracting the in / out part, it is possible to form a fourth state in which the game ball stored in the first branch passage is caused to flow down and be received by the displacement member. Only a number of game balls can be distributed to the first branch passage and received by the displacement member.

  In addition, according to the gaming machine B8, since the sorting means includes the first in / out part and the second in / out part, that is, is formed as one part, the structure of the distributing means (the first in / out part and the second in / out part) Can be simplified and the structure for exerting those functions can be simplified. Furthermore, since one of the first protruding part and the second protruding part is retracted out of the passage of the first branch passage when one protrudes into the passage of the first branch passage, the two positions of the displacement member (switching position) It is sufficient that the distribution means is formed to be displaceable in two positions according to the receiving position. That is, the first to fourth states described above can be formed by displacing the distributing means at two positions. Therefore, the structure of the allocating means and the structure for displacing the allocating means in accordance with the displacement of the displacing member can be simplified, and the reliability of the game ball allocating operation can be improved accordingly.

<Concept of Invention with Distribution Unit 500 as an Example>
A downflow path through which the game ball flows down, a first branch path and a second branch path branched from the downflow path, and a game ball flowing down the downflow path to one of the first branch path or the second branch path A gaming machine comprising a sorting means for sorting, characterized in that it comprises a flow-down state changing means that is positioned downstream of the sorting means and that regulates or allows the flow of game balls in the first branch passage. Game machine C1.

  Here, the downflow passage from which the game ball flows down, the first branch passage and the second branch passage branched from the downflow passage, and the game ball flowing down the downflow passage to one of the first branch passage and the second branch passage 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine including a sorting unit that distributes is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-223176). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the game balls flowing down the flow-down passage are only distributed to one of the first branch passage and the second branch passage, so that it is insufficient to give the player interest. There was a problem.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the game machine C1 is provided with a flow state changing means that is located downstream of the distribution means and restricts or allows the flow of game balls in the first branch passage. Can be given.

  That is, the operation of the flow-down state changing means regulates the flow of the game balls distributed to the first branch passage, stores the game balls in the first branch passage, and allows the game balls to flow down in the first branch passage. The game balls stored in the first branch passage can be made to flow down (open). Thereby, in addition to the operation of distributing the game balls flowing down the flow-down passage to one of the first branch passage and the second branch passage, the operation of stopping (reserving) the flow of the game balls distributed to the first branch passage is temporarily stopped. Then, the stopped (stored) game ball can be caused to flow down (release). As a result, interest can be given to the player.

  In the gaming machine C1, the first branch passage is provided in a state in which the distribution means and the flow-down state changing means are integrally formed, and the distribution destination by the distribution means is the first branch passage. In the state where the flow of the game ball in the flow is regulated by the flow state change means and the distribution destination by the distribution means is the second branch passage, the flow of the game ball in the first branch passage is caused by the flow state change means. A gaming machine C2 that is allowed.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, since the allocating means and the flow-down state changing means are integrally formed, the allocating means and the flow-down state changing means are operated. It is possible to simplify the structure and improve the operation reliability. That is, when the distribution means and the flow-down state changing means are formed separately, there are two parts, so that the structure for operating these two parts is complicated and the reliability of the operation is reduced. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C2, since the distributing means and the flow-down state changing means can be formed as one part, the structure can be simplified correspondingly, and the product cost can be reduced and the operation reliability can be improved. Can be planned.

  Further, in this case, if the distribution destination by the distribution means is the first branch path by the operation of the integral member, the flow of the game balls distributed to the first branch path is regulated by the flow state changing means and the first When the game balls are stored in the branch passage and the distribution destination by the distribution means is the second branch passage, the flow of game balls in the first branch passage is allowed by the flow-down state changing means and stored in the first branch passage. The game ball that has been made can be allowed to flow down (release). That is, in addition to the operation of distributing the game balls flowing down the flow-down passage to one of the first branch passage or the second branch passage, the operation of stopping (reserving) the flow of the game balls distributed to the first branch passage, In addition to forming an action to flow down (open) the stopped (stored) game ball, these storage and release actions can be alternately formed in conjunction with the sorting operation.

  In the gaming machine C2, the integral member is formed to be displaceable between a first state position and a second state position, and in the state where the integral member is displaced to the first state position, the distribution means is the first state position. It is arranged at a position where the one branch passage is assigned as a distribution destination, and the flow state changing means is arranged at a position for restricting the flow of the game ball in the first branch passage, and the integrated member is displaced to the second state position. In the state, the distribution means is arranged at a position where the second branch passage is assigned as a distribution destination, and the flow-down state changing means is arranged at a position allowing the flow of game balls in the first branch passage. A gaming machine C3.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2, the integral member is formed to be displaceable between the first state position and the second state position, and in the state where the integral member is displaced to the first state position. The distribution means is disposed at a position where the first branch passage is assigned to the distribution destination, and the flow state changing means is disposed at a position for restricting the flow of the game ball in the first branch passage, and the integral member is displaced to the second state position. In this state, the distributing means is disposed at a position where the second branch passage is assigned to the distribution destination, and the flow-down state changing means is disposed at a position allowing the game ball to flow down in the first branch passage. Is displaced in two positions (first state position and second state position), in addition to the operation of distributing the game ball flowing down the flow-down path to one of the first branch path or the second branch path, Sorted games The action of stopping (storing) the flow of the game and the action of releasing (opening) the stopped (stored) game ball can be formed, and the action of storing and releasing is linked to the sorting action. Thus, they can be formed alternately. That is, the structure can be simplified, and the product cost can be reduced and the operation reliability can be improved.

  In the gaming machine C3, the one-piece member is formed to be rotatable, and at least the flow-down state changing means is formed to be able to move in and out with respect to the first branch passage, and the game ball is projected by projecting to the first branch passage. The game machine C4 is formed in a shape curved in an arc shape with the rotation axis of the integral member as a center.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C3, the integral member is formed to be rotatable, and at least the flow-down state changing means is formed to be capable of appearing and retracting with respect to the first branch path. The flow of the game ball is regulated by projecting to the inner wall of the first branch passage so as to be curved and curved in the shape of the arc around the rotation axis of the integral member. It is possible to reduce the area of the hole that is opened.

  In the gaming machine C4, the flow state changing means is arranged in a posture in which the side facing the upstream of the first branch passage is concave.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C4, the flow-down state changing means is arranged in a posture in which the side facing the upstream of the first branch passage is concave, so that the flow-down state change to the first branch passage In the initial state in which the means starts to protrude (that is, the state where only the front end side of the flow state changing means protrudes into the passage), the shape of the front end side of the flow state changing means is easy to regulate the flow of the game ball It can arrange | position in direction and can make it easy to regulate the flow-down of the game ball distributed to the 1st branch passage.

  Further, in a state where the flow state changing means protrudes to the first branch passage to the maximum and restricts the flow of the game ball, the game ball can be stably held by the recess of the flow state changing means, so that the game ball can be prevented from rampage. .

  In the gaming machine C4 or C5, the gaming machine C4 or C5 includes a biasing unit that applies a biasing force to the integrated member and biases the flow-down state changing unit in a direction protruding into the first branch passage. A gaming machine C6, wherein the distance to the rotating shaft of the integral member is made larger than the distance from the distributing means to the rotating shaft of the integral member.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C4 or C5, the gaming machine C6 is provided with a biasing means that biases the integral member in a direction in which the flow-down state changing means projects into the first branch passage. Therefore, the urging force can be used to easily maintain the integrated member in a posture (that is, the first state position) in which the flow state changing means protrudes to the first branch passage.

  In this case, in the gaming machine C6, the distance from the flow state changing means to the rotating shaft of the integrated member is made larger than the distance from the distributing means to the rotating shaft of the integrated member, so that the game balls flowing down collide with each other. Even when the same impact force is applied due to the large distance from the rotating shaft, the flow-down state changing means is likely to be immersed, but the biasing direction of the biasing means is such that the flow-down state changing means protrudes into the first branch passage. By being made into the direction to do, it can suppress that the flowing-down state change means is immersed by the amount of the urging force.

  In the gaming machine C6, the integrated member is rotated by its own weight in a direction in which the flow-down state changing means protrudes into the first branch passage.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C6, the integrated member is rotated in the direction in which the flow-down state changing means protrudes into the first branch passage due to its own weight. The member can be easily maintained in a posture (that is, the first state position) in which the flow state changing means protrudes to the first branch passage. Therefore, when the game ball collides, it is possible to further suppress the immersion state changing means from being immersed by its own weight.

  In addition, even when the urging means falls off, it is possible for the game ball to flow down to the first branch passage by maintaining the integrated part in a posture in which the flow state changing means protrudes to the first branch passage by its own weight. Can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines C2 to C7, the distribution destination by the distribution unit is the first branch passage, and the flow of game balls in the first branch passage is restricted by the flow state changing unit, The gaming machine C8 is characterized in that in a state where a prescribed number of game balls are stored in the branch passage, the game balls flowing down the flow-down passage are formed to flow down to the second branch passage.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines C2 to C7, the distribution destination by the distribution means is the first branch passage, and the flow of the game ball in the first branch passage is the flow-down state changing means In a state where a prescribed number of game balls are stored in the first branch passage, the game balls flowing down the flow passage are formed to be able to flow down to the second branch passage, so that more than the prescribed number of game balls flow down When flowing down the passage, it is possible to suppress the amount of game balls that exceed the specified number from staying in the downflow passage. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the distribution means (operation using the distribution destination as the second branch passage) from being hindered by the game balls stagnating in the flow-down passage.

  In the gaming machine C8, an inner wall facing the second branch passage in the flow-down passage has a game ball flowing down the flow-down passage as a tail end of the prescribed number of game balls stored in the first branch passage. The game machine C9 is formed so as to be capable of being guided to the side surface of the game ball of the second branch passage side.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C8, the inner wall facing the second branch passage in the downflow passage has a predetermined number of game balls flowing down the downflow passage stored in the first branch passage. Since it is formed so that it can be guided to the side surface on the second branch passage side of the last game ball of the game balls, the game ball flowing down the downflow passage collides with the last game ball of the prescribed number of game balls. After that, it can be made easy to flow down to the second branch passage.

  Note that the last game ball among the prescribed number of game balls means a game ball located on the upstream side (opposite to the flow-down state changing means). When the specified number is 1, the last game ball means the game ball itself stored in the first branch passage.

  In the gaming machine C8 or C9, the gaming machine C10 is characterized in that a downstream direction of the downstream end of the downstream passage is formed in a direction different from a downstream direction of the upstream end of the first branch passage.

  According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C8 or C9, the flow-down direction at the downstream end of the flow-down passage is formed in a direction different from the flow-down direction at the upstream end of the first branch passage. When the game ball that flows down collides with the last game ball of the specified number of game balls stored in the first branch passage, the direction of the repulsive force applied to the last game ball is set in the first branch passage. It can be different from the flow direction at the upstream end. As a result, it is possible to prevent the last game ball from jumping out of the upstream end of the first branch passage and flowing into the second branch passage due to the repulsive force at the time of collision.

  In any one of the gaming machines C2 to C10, the allocating means is formed so as to be capable of appearing and retracting with respect to the flow-down passage or the first branch passage, and a position of the protrusion and discharge is a flow-down direction at a downstream end of the flow-down passage A gaming machine C11 characterized in that it is an inner wall on an extension line of

  According to the gaming machine C11, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines C2 to C10, the sorting means is formed so as to be able to appear and retract with respect to the flow-down passage or the first branch passage, Since it is the inner wall on the extension line in the flow-down direction at the downstream end of the passage, the sorting means can be projected at a position close to the game ball flowing down from the downstream end of the flow-down passage. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required for the game ball to be distributed after the distribution means starts to protrude into the flow-down passage or the first branch passage. As a result, the distribution destination can be switched more reliably by the distribution means.

  In the gaming machine C11, the allocating means distributes the game ball flowing down the flow-down path to the second branch path by projecting into the flow-down path or the first branch path, The gaming machine C12 is characterized in that the projecting direction of the means is set so that the upstream end of the second branch passage is directed.

  According to the gaming machine C12, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C11, the sorting means projects the game ball flowing down the flow-down path to the second branch path by protruding into the flow-down path or the first branch path. Since the projecting direction of the distributing means is set to a direction directed to the upstream end of the second branch passage, when the game ball flowing down the downflow passage comes into contact with the distributing means in the middle of the projecting operation The game ball can be pushed into the second branch passage in accordance with the protruding operation of the sorting means. As a result, the distribution to the second branch passage can be performed more reliably.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C12, the first branch passage is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the downstream side, and a game ball is formed on the inner wall on the lower side in the gravitational direction so as to be capable of rolling. The game machine C13 is characterized in that the changing means is formed so as to be able to appear and retract from the inner wall on the lower side in the gravity direction into the first branch passage.

  According to the gaming machine C13, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines C1 to C12, the first branch passage is formed to be inclined downward toward the downstream side, and the gaming ball is placed on the inner wall on the lower side in the gravity direction. The flow state changing means is formed so as to be able to roll, and is formed so as to be able to protrude into and into the first branch passage from the inner wall on the lower side in the direction of gravity. It is possible to shorten the time required until the flow of the sphere can be regulated. As a result, the distribution destination of the distribution means is switched from the second branch passage to the first branch passage, and when the game ball is distributed to the first branch passage, the flow-down state change means It is easy to keep the protrusion in time.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C13, the flow-down state changing means is formed so as to be able to appear and retract with respect to the first branch passage, and at least protrudes to the first branch passage in the protruding direction. A gaming machine C14, wherein a force component is applied from the game ball to the flow-down state changing means.

  According to the gaming machine C14, in any of the gaming machines C1 to C13, the flow-down state changing means is formed so as to be capable of appearing and retracting with respect to the first branch passage, and at least protrudes to the first branch passage. Since the force component in the direction of the action is applied from the game ball to the flow state changing means, when the flow of the game ball distributed to the first branch passage is restricted, the game ball flows down due to the impact when the game ball collides. It is possible to suppress the state changing means from being immersed. Therefore, it is possible to easily regulate the flow of the game ball.

<Concept of the Invention Taking the Lower Displacement Unit 400 as an Example>
In a gaming machine comprising a base member, a base member disposed on one side of the base member so as to be displaceable, and a displacement member disposed on the base member so as to be displaceable, a base associated with the displacement of the displacement member. A gaming machine D1 comprising a suppressing means for suppressing the reaction of the members.

  Here, a gaming machine is known that includes a base member, a base member that is displaceably disposed on one side of the base member, and a displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the base member (for example, JP, 2015-029849). According to this gaming machine, in addition to the effect of displacing the base member between the extended position where the base member extends to the gaming area and is visible from the player, and the retracted position retracted from the gaming area, An effect of displacing the displacement member can be performed in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the overhang position.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since one side of the base member is displaceably disposed on the base member, when the displacement member is displaced, the base member rattling with respect to the base member with the one side serving as a fulcrum. There was a problem that was likely to occur.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, since the suppression means for suppressing the reaction of the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member is provided, the occurrence of rattling of the base member with respect to the base member when the displacement member is displaced is suppressed. can do.

  The reaction force accompanying the displacement of the displacement member is generated, for example, by a change in the center of gravity accompanying the displacement of the displacement member, or by an action of an inertial force accompanying an increase or decrease (change in acceleration) of the displacement member. Examples thereof include those generated by the reaction force when the displacement member is displaced and emitted from the game ball.

  In the gaming machine D1, the suppression means includes a disposition member that is displaceably disposed on the base member, and the displaceable member is formed so as to be able to hold and emit a game ball, and the disposition member includes: A gaming machine D2 formed so as to be displaceable when a game ball is emitted from the displacement member.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1, the suppression means includes a disposing member that is displaceably disposed on the base member, and the displaceable member is formed so as to be able to hold and emit the game ball. In addition, since the disposing member is formed to be displaceable when the game ball is emitted from the displaceable member, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of rattling of the base member with respect to the base member. That is, when a game ball is fired from the displacement member, the center of gravity of the base member is changed by the weight of the game ball, for example, in a direction that cancels out the change in the center of gravity due to the launch of the game ball. When the structure which displaces an installation member is employ | adopted, generation | occurrence | production of the shakiness of the base member accompanying the change of a gravity center position can be suppressed. Further, when a game ball is fired from the displacement member, the base member receives a reaction as the game ball is fired. For example, the arrangement member is displaced in a direction that cancels the reaction caused by the game ball being fired. When it employs, the occurrence of rattling of the base member due to the reaction can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the gaming machine D3 is provided with a reverse member that is displaced with at least a displacement component that is opposite to the displacement direction of the displacement member when the displacement member is displaced.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, when the displacement member is displaced, the reverse member that is displaced with at least a displacement component that is opposite to the displacement direction of the displacement member. Since it is provided, it can be made small by the displacement of a reverse member that the gravity center position of a base member changes with the displacement of a displacement member. As a result, rattling of the base member due to the change in the center of gravity position can be suppressed.

  In addition, when the displacement member is started to be displaced, if the displacement of the opposite member is started, at least a part of both inertia forces can be canceled out. As a result, it is possible to easily suppress rattling of the base member when the displacement member is displaced from the stopped state.

  The gaming machine D2 or D3 includes a transmission mechanism that transmits the displacement of the displacement member to the arrangement member or (and) the reverse member to displace the arrangement member or (and) the reverse member. A gaming machine D4 to play.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D2 or D3, a transmission mechanism for transmitting the displacement of the displacement member to the arrangement member or (and) the reverse member to displace the arrangement member or (and) the reverse member. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide driving means for displacing the arrangement member or / and the reverse member. In other words, the drive means for displacing the displacement member can also be used as the drive means for displacing the arrangement member or / and the reverse member. Therefore, the base member can be reduced in weight and the rattling can be easily suppressed.

  Further, since it is possible to mechanically synchronize with the displacement of the displacement member and / or to displace the reverse member, for example, the position of the displacement member is detected by a sensor device and disposed according to the detection result. Control of driving the member or (and) the reverse member with the driving means can be made unnecessary, and the product cost can be reduced correspondingly, and the reliability of the displacement operation of the displacement member or (and) the reverse member with respect to the displacement member can be reduced. Can be secured.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the displacement member starts displacement from a second position, and the displacement start from a first position closer to one side of the base member than the second position. The game machine D5 starts to be displaced from the first position in a state where at least the base member is disposed at a predetermined position with respect to the base member.

  Here, when the displacement member is displaced from the stopped state, the change in the acceleration is maximized, and hence the base member is likely to be rattled due to the influence of the inertial force.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the displacement member has a mode of starting displacement from the second position and one side of the base member from the second position. And a state in which the base member is arranged at a predetermined position with respect to the base member (for example, the base member protrudes into the game area from the player). Since the displacement is started from the first position at the overhang position where the visual recognition is possible, rattling of the base member can be suppressed. That is, since the first position is closer to one side of the base member than the second position, the weight of the displacement member can be determined based on the first position as the start position of the displacement member. The member can be kept close to the fulcrum when the member shakes against the base member, and accordingly, the influence of the inertial force when the displacement member is displaced from the stopped state can be made difficult to act on the base member. As a result, it is possible to easily suppress rattling of the base member.

  The gaming machine D5 includes a pinion gear disposed on the base member and a rack member having a rack gear meshed with the pinion gear, and the displacement member is disposed on the rack member. Machine D6.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D5, the gaming machine D6 includes a pinion gear disposed on the base member and a rack member formed with a rack gear meshed with the pinion gear, and the rack member includes a displacement member. Therefore, when starting displacement of the displacement member from the first position, not only the weight of the rack member but also the weight of the rack member is one side of the base member (the base member is relative to the base member). It can be close to the fulcrum when rattling. As a result, it is possible to easily suppress rattling of the base member when the displacement member is displaced from the stopped state.

  In the gaming machine D6, the displacement direction when the displacement member starts to be displaced from the first position is a direction away from one side of the base member.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D6, the displacement direction when the displacement member starts to be displaced from the first position is the direction away from one side of the base member, so the displacement member is in the first position. In the state where the rack member is disposed, the rack member can be brought closer to one side of the base member. That is, in order to displace the displacement member (rack member) in a direction away from one side of the base member, the rack member is based on a portion on the rack gear side where the pinion gear is engaged after the displacement member starts to be displaced. It will be directed to one side of the member. Therefore, the weight of the rack member can be made closer to one side of the base member (the fulcrum when the base member rattles against the base member), and as a result, the displacement member can be displaced from the stopped state. The backlash of the base member can be easily suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D7, comprising: a support structure that supports the base member to displace one side of the base member; and a drive mechanism that drives the base member supported by the support structure, The displacement member is formed so as to be able to hold and emit the game ball, and the drive mechanism restricts the base member from being displaced in a reaction direction when the game ball is emitted from the displacement member. A gaming machine D8, comprising:

  According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D7, a support structure that supports the base member so that one side of the base member can be displaced, and a base member that is supported by the support structure are driven. The displacement member is formed so as to be able to hold and emit the game ball, and the drive mechanism is configured to displace the base member in a reaction direction when the game ball is emitted from the displacement member. Since the restricting means for restricting is provided, it is possible to suppress the base member from being displaced with respect to the base member due to the reaction. As a result, occurrence of rattling of the base member can be suppressed.

<Concept of Invention with Rotating Unit 700 as an Example>
In a gaming machine provided with a rotating member that is formed so as to be rotatable and whose outer peripheral surface is disposed so as to be visible to a player, the gaming machine includes a displacement member disposed so as to be displaceable on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member. A featured gaming machine E1.

  Here, there is known a gaming machine including a rotating member that is formed to be rotatable and whose outer peripheral surface is disposed so as to be visible to a player (for example, JP 2009-119140 A). In this gaming machine, the rotating member is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the player can visually recognize the display (symbol) on the outer peripheral surface while rotating the rotating member or stopping the rotating member. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, as the spinning member is rotated or stopped, it is only possible to form an effect mode that allows the player to visually recognize the display of the outer peripheral surface. There was a problem that was insufficient.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, since the displacement member is disposed so as to be displaceable on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, the display of the outer peripheral surface is displayed to the player as the rotating member is rotated or stopped. In addition to the effect mode to be visually recognized, the effect mode of displacing the displacement member can be formed, so that the effect can be enhanced by changing the effect mode accordingly.

  The rotating member does not need to have a circular cross-sectional shape cut along a plane perpendicular to the rotation axis, and may be a polygonal shape, an elliptical shape, or a combination thereof. Therefore, the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member may not be a peripheral surface, but may be a flat surface, a curved surface, or a combination thereof.

  In the gaming machine E1, the displacement member is formed to be displaceable at least between the first position and the second position, and at the first position, a part of the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member is formed by the displacement member. The gaming machine E2 is characterized in that at the second position, at least a part of the displacement member protrudes radially outward of the drum member.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E1, when the displacement member is displaced to the first position, a part of the outer peripheral surface of the rotation member is formed by the displacement member. The outer shape can be reduced, and the space required for the rotation of the rotating drum member can be reduced accordingly. On the other hand, when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, at least a part of the displacement member protrudes radially outward of the rotating member, so that it is easy for the player to visually recognize the displacement of the displacement member. Can be increased. In addition, for example, the rotating member is rotated in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the first position, and the displacement member is disposed (displaced) at the second position when the rotation of the rotating member is stopped. The part (displacement member) visually recognized with the outer peripheral surface of a rotating member can form the aspect protruded to radial direction outward of a rotating member, and can enhance interest.

  The gaming machine E2 includes light emitting means for emitting light, and the rotating member is formed to have an internal space, the light emitting means is disposed in the internal space, and the displacement member is the second member. When displaced to a position, an outer peripheral surface of the rotating drum member is opened, and the internal space communicates with the outside.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine E2, the light emitting means for emitting light is provided, and the rotating member is formed having an internal space, and the light emitting means is disposed in the internal space. When the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member is opened and the internal space communicates with the outside, so that the light emitted by the light emitting means can be emitted to the outside, and the displacement member Is displaced to the first position, whereby the emission to the outside can be blocked. As a result, the production effect can be enhanced.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the gaming machine E4 includes a driving unit that generates a driving force and a transmission unit that transmits the driving force of the driving unit to the rotating member and the displacement member. .

  Here, in order to form the rotator member in a rotatable manner and displace the displacing member in the rotator member, a driving means is required for each of the rotator member and the displacing member. Bulky. Further, when the driving means for displacing the displacement member is mounted on the rotating member, the weight of the rotating member increases, and it becomes difficult to smoothly start or stop the rotation of the rotating member.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the driving means for generating the driving force and the driving force of the driving means to the rotating member and the displacement member Since the transmission means for transmitting is provided, the rotation of the rotating member and the displacement of the displacement member can be performed by also using one drive means. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced. Moreover, since it is not necessary to mount the driving means for displacing the displacement member on the rotating member, the weight of the rotating member can be reduced, and the rotation of the rotating member can be started or stopped smoothly.

  In the gaming machine E4, the driving means is formed so as to be able to generate a rotational driving force, the transmitting means transmits a rotational driving force of the driving means to the rotating member, A displacement-side transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force to the displacement member; and the rotational driving force is transmitted to one of the rotational-side transmission means or the displacement-side transmission means in accordance with the rotational direction of the rotational driving force of the driving means. A gaming machine E5, comprising a one-way clutch mechanism that blocks transmission to the other.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E4, the driving means is formed so as to be able to generate a rotational driving force, and the transmission means transmits the rotational driving force of the driving means to the rotating member. Means, a displacement-side transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the displacement member, and a rotational driving force according to the rotational direction of the rotational driving force of the driving means is transmitted to one of the rotation-side transmission means or the displacement-side transmission means. In addition, since the one-way clutch mechanism that cuts off the transmission to the other is provided, it is possible to switch the drive target (rotating member or displacement member) driven by the rotational driving force only by switching the rotation direction of the driving means. That is, according to the rotation direction of the driving means, the rotation of the rotating member and the stop of the rotation, and the displacement of the displacement member and the stop of the displacement can be switched. It can be simplified.

  In the gaming machine E5, the rotation-side transmission means includes a gear train that forms part or all of a transmission path for transmitting the rotational driving force of the drive means to the rotor member, and one of the gear trains. A gaming machine E6 comprising a load gear to be engaged.

  Here, in the structure in which the driving object (rotating member or displacement member) is switched according to the rotation direction of the driving means using the one-way clutch mechanism, when transmission of the driving force from the driving means is interrupted, It becomes a state where the rotation or displacement in the direction driven by the driving force is free. Therefore, for example, when the driving object of the driving means is switched from the rotating member to the displacing member and the transmission of the driving force is interrupted, the rotating member becomes rotatable, and the rotation continues due to inertial force (rotation). There is a risk of being.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E5, the rotation-side transmission means is a gear train that forms part or all of the transmission path for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the rotating member. And a load gear meshed with one gear of the gear train, even when transmission of the rotational driving force from the driving means is interrupted, a load (resistance) when rotating the load gear ) Can be used to suppress the rotation of the rotating drum member.

  In the gaming machine E5 or E6, the gaming machine E7 is provided with a reverse rotation restricting means for restricting the rotating member from rotating in the direction opposite to the direction rotated by the rotational driving force of the driving means. .

  According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E5 or E6, the reverse rotation regulating means for regulating the rotation of the rotating member in the direction opposite to the direction rotated by the rotational driving force of the driving means. Since it is provided, for example, it is possible to prevent the rotating member from being reversely rotated due to a deviation in the center of gravity of the rotating member or a collision of game balls.

  In the gaming machine E2 or E3, the rotating member is formed having an internal space, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, an outer peripheral surface of the rotating member is opened, and the internal space Is connected to the gaming area.

  According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E2 or E3, the rotating member is formed with an internal space, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member Is opened and the internal space communicates with the game area, so that the game ball flowing down the game area flows into the internal space of the rotating member, or the game ball in the internal space of the rotating member flows out to the gaming area Can be made. Further, when the displacement member is displaced to the first position, the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member is closed, so that the inflow and outflow of the game ball between the internal space and the game area can be blocked. As a result, the production effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine E8, one side of the displacement member is rotatably supported by the rotating drum member, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the other side opposite to the one side is the game. A gaming machine E9 that is projected to the area.

  According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E8, the displacement member is pivotally supported on one side by the rotating member, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the opposite side to the one side Since the other side is projected to the game area, the game ball flowing down the game area can be received on the upper surface of the displacement member. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball flowing down the game area to flow into the internal space of the rotating member using the displacement member.

  In the gaming machine E9, the upper surface of the displacement member is inclined downward from the other side toward the one side when the displacement member is displaced to the second position.

  According to the gaming machine E10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E9, the displacement member is inclined downward from the other side to the one side in the state where the displacement member is displaced to the second position. After the game ball that has flowed down is received by the upper surface of the displacement member, the received game ball can be guided (rolled) along the downward slope of the upper surface of the displacement member to the inner space of the rotating member. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball flowing down the game area to flow into the internal space of the rotating member using the displacement member.

  In the gaming machine E9 or E10, the gaming machine E11 is provided with a displacement setting means for restricting or allowing the displacement of the displacement member in accordance with the rotational position of the rotating member.

  According to the gaming machine E11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E9 or E10, the gaming machine E11 includes the displacement setting means for restricting or permitting the displacement of the displacement member according to the rotational position of the rotating drum member. Interference with other members around the rotating drum member can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines E9 to E11, a rotation restricting means for restricting the rotation of the rotating drum member is provided, and the rotation restricting member is configured such that the displacement member is displaced to the second position, and the other side of the displacement member is the A gaming machine E12 that restricts the rotation of the rotating drum member when projecting into a gaming area.

  According to the gaming machine E12, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E9 to E11, the gaming machine E12 includes rotation regulating means for regulating the rotation of the rotating member, and the rotation regulating member has the displacement member displaced to the second position. When the other side of the displacement member is extended to the game area, the rotation of the rotation member is restricted, so that the rotation member is rotated while the displacement member is extended and is positioned on the rotation trajectory. It can suppress that a displacement member interferes with another member. Further, it is possible to suppress the rotation of the rotating member due to the load acting when the displacement member receives the game ball flowing down the game area and the weight of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the displacement member.

<Concept of Invention with Rotating Unit 700 as an Example>
In a gaming machine including a rotating member that is formed to be rotatable and whose outer peripheral surface is disposed so as to be visible to a player, the rotating member includes an internal space formed therein and an internal space formed outside the internal space. And a communication port formed so that a game ball can pass therethrough and a gaming machine F1.

  Here, there is known a gaming machine including a rotating member that is formed to be rotatable and whose outer peripheral surface is disposed so as to be visible to a player (for example, JP 2009-119140 A). According to this gaming machine, the rotator member is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the player can visually recognize the display (symbol) on the outer peripheral surface while rotating the rotator member or stopping the rotator member. be able to. However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem in that it is only used as a member for holding a display for the player to visually recognize on the outer peripheral surface, and the use of the rotating member is insufficient. It was. In other words, the rotator member is required to hold a display that can be visually recognized by the player, and is thus formed in a relatively large size. Therefore, while the occupied space by the rotating member is increased, portions other than the outer peripheral surface are not utilized.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, the rotating member includes an internal space formed therein, and a communication port that allows the game ball to pass through while communicating with the internal space. The game ball flowing down the game area can flow into or out of the internal space through the communication port. Therefore, the internal space of the spinning member that is a dead space can function as a storage space for a game ball or a pitching passage, and the spinning member can be used accordingly.

  In addition, a communicating port may be formed only in one place of a rotating member, and may be formed in two or more places. When the communication port is formed only at one place, the communication port is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating drum member. As a result, the position of the communication port can be raised or lowered in accordance with the rotational position of the rotating drum member, so that the game ball flows into or out of the internal space via the communication port (the communication port faces upward). The game ball can flow into the internal space at the same time, and the game ball in the internal space can flow out when the communication port faces downward).

  Further, the rotating drum member does not have to have a circular cross-sectional shape cut by a plane perpendicular to the rotation axis, and may be a polygonal shape, an elliptical shape, or a combination thereof. Therefore, the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member may not be a peripheral surface, but may be a flat surface, a curved surface, or a combination thereof.

  In the gaming machine F1, the communication port includes a first communication port and a second communication port formed at a position different from the first communication port.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1, the communication port includes the first communication port and the second communication port formed at a position different from the first communication port. One of the communication port or the second communication port is used as an inflow port for allowing game balls to flow into the internal space from the outside, and the other of the first communication port or the second communication port is used as an outflow port for allowing game balls to flow out from the internal space to the outside. It can be. That is, even if the rotating member is not rotated (while maintaining the stopped state), the rotating member can be used as a game ball sending passage. In addition, in the state which is rotating the rotating member, you may utilize this rotating member as a pitching path.

  In the gaming machine F2, the first communication port is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, and is formed as an inflow port through which a game ball flowing down a game area flows into the internal space, and the second communication port is The gaming machine F3 is formed on an end surface of the rotating drum member in the rotation axis direction, and is formed as an outlet for allowing a game ball to flow out from the internal space to the game area.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine F2, the first communication port is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, and is formed as an inlet for allowing the game ball flowing down the gaming area to flow into the internal space. The second communication port is formed at the end surface of the rotating member in the rotation axis direction, and is formed as an outlet for allowing the game ball to flow out from the internal space to the game area. In addition to making it easier for the player to visually recognize the inflow, the game ball can be discharged while maintaining the rotating member in a stopped state.

  That is, the outer periphery of the rotator member is disposed so as to be visible to the player, and since the first communication port (inlet) is formed on the outer peripheral surface, the player can visually recognize the inflow of the game ball. It can be made easy. On the other hand, when the second communicating port is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, the gaming ball cannot flow out from the internal space when the rotating member is displaced to the rotational position where the communicating port is located above. Since the second communication port (outlet) is formed on the end surface of the rotating member in the rotation axis direction, it is possible to form a state in which the game ball can flow out of the internal space regardless of the rotational position of the rotating member.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, a displacement member is disposed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member so as to be displaceable. When the displacement member is displaced to the first position, the communication port is displaced. The gaming machine F4, wherein the communication port is opened when the member is shielded and the displacement member is displaced to the second position.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the gaming machine F4 includes a displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, and the displacement member is displaced to the first position. Then, the communication port is shielded by the displacement member, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the communication port is opened, so that the inflow / outflow of the game ball through the communication port is blocked and allowed. Can be switched.

  In the gaming machine F4, the communication port is formed in the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, the displacement member is pivotally supported on one side so as to be rotatable on the rotating member, and the displacement member is in the second position. When displaced, the game machine F5 is characterized in that the other side opposite to the one side is projected to the gaming area.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E4, the displacement member is pivotally supported on one side by the rotating member, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the opposite side from the one side. Since the other side is projected to the game area, the game ball flowing down the game area can be received on the upper surface of the displacement member. Therefore, for example, when the communication port is formed as an inflow port, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball flowing down the game area to flow into the internal space of the rotating member using the displacement member.

  In the gaming machine F5, a gaming machine F6, wherein one side of the displacement member is positioned on the front side in the rotation direction of the rotating drum member with respect to the other side.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F5, the displacement member is positioned on the front side in the rotational direction of the rotating member relative to the other side, so that the rotating member is rotated. Even if the displacement member interferes with members disposed around the rotating drum member, the force generated by the interference can be applied in the direction of closing the displacement member (displacement to the first position). That is, it is possible to suppress the displacement member from projecting out by being interfered with another member (displaced to the second position) when the rotating drum member rotates. Moreover, it can suppress that a displacement member engages with another member and rotation of a rotating member is inhibited.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F6, the rotating member is rotatably disposed on the base member, and is supported by the base member and disposed in the inner space of the rotating member. A gaming machine F7 comprising a fixing member that is non-rotating.

  According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines F1 to F6, a base member in which the rotating member is rotatably disposed, and an internal space of the rotating member supported by the base member And a fixed member that is not rotated with respect to the rotating drum member, so that the game ball that has flowed into the internal space is held by the fixed member or rolled on the fixed member toward the outlet. With the rotation of the rotating member, it is possible to prevent the game ball from violating in the internal space or preventing the game ball from rolling and staying in the internal space.

  In any one of the gaming machines F4 to F6, the gaming machine F8 is provided with a displacement setting means for restricting or allowing the displacement of the displacement member in accordance with the rotational position of the rotating member.

  According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines F4 to F6, the displacement setting means for restricting or allowing the displacement of the displacement member according to the rotational position of the rotating drum member is provided. It can suppress that the displaced displacement member interferes with the other members around the rotating drum member.

  The gaming machine F5 or F6 includes rotation restricting means for restricting rotation of the rotating member, and the rotation restricting member is configured such that the displacement member is displaced to the second position, and the other side of the displacement member is moved to the game area. A gaming machine F9 that regulates rotation of the rotating drum member when overhanging.

  According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F5 or F6, the gaming machine F9 includes rotation regulating means for regulating the rotation of the rotating member. The rotation regulating member has a displacement member displaced to the second position, and the displacement member Since the rotation of the rotating member is restricted when the other side is extended to the game area, the rotating member is rotated in a state where the displacement member is extended, and the other member located on the rotation trajectory. It is possible to suppress the interference of the displacement member. Further, it is possible to suppress the rotation of the rotating member due to the load acting when the displacement member receives the game ball flowing down the game area and the weight of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the displacement member.

  In the gaming machine F3, light emitting means that is formed so as to be capable of emitting light and disposed in the inner space of the rotating member, and the second communication port is formed at an end surface in the rotation axis direction of the rotating member. The gaming machine F10 is provided with an opening formed in an end face opposite to the end face, and an electrical connection line of the light emitting means is wired through the opening.

  According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F3, an opening is formed on the end surface of the rotating member in the rotation axis direction opposite to the end surface on which the second communication port is formed. Since the electrical connection line of the light emitting means is wired through the opening, it is possible to easily secure a usable space for each of the second communication port and the opening. As a result, the game ball can flow out smoothly through the second communication port, and the wiring work to the opening of the electrical connection line can be easily performed. In addition, since the second communication port and the opening can be separated as much as possible, it is easy to suppress interference between the game ball that rolls the internal space to the second communication port and the electrical connection line.

<Concept of Invention with Rotating Unit 700 as an Example>
A first member and a second member formed to be displaceable, wherein the first member covers at least a part of the second member in an invisible manner, and a state in which the first member is disposed at the covering position. In the gaming machine formed to be displaceable with respect to the retreat position that reduces the region that covers the second member invisible, the first member is in the state of being displaced to the retreat position. The gaming machine G1 is characterized in that the displacement of the game machine G1 can be regulated.

  Here, the first member and the second member that are formed so as to be displaceable are provided, and the first member is disposed at a covering position that covers at least a part of the second member invisible, and at the covering position. In addition, there is known a gaming machine that is formed so as to be displaceable between a retreat position that reduces a region that covers the second member in an invisible manner (for example, Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2015-029849). According to this gaming machine, the second member is exposed by disposing the first member at the cover position and displacing the first member to the retracted position from the state in which the second member is not visible to the player. It is possible to produce an effect that the player can visually recognize.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the second member is formed to be displaceable, when the first member is displaced to the retracted position and the second member is exposed, the second member is displaced. There is a risk. For this reason, there is a problem in that the player cannot visually recognize the second member in an appropriate state, and the effect of production is reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, the first member is formed so as to be able to regulate the displacement of the second member in a state where the first member is displaced to the retracted position, so that the player can keep the second member in an appropriate state. Can be visually recognized, and a production effect can be secured. That is, when performing the effect of displacing the first member to the retracted position and exposing the second member, the displacement of the first member to the retracted position, which must be performed for the effect, This is used as a means for regulating displacement. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide or control a mechanism for restricting the displacement of the second member, and the structure can be simplified correspondingly.

  In the gaming machine G1, the second member is formed so as to be rotatable, and the center of gravity is eccentric from the center of rotation.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, the second member is formed to be rotatable and its center of gravity is offset from the center of rotation, so the degree of freedom in designing the second member. Can be increased. That is, the second member does not need to have a shape whose center of gravity is located at the center of rotation, and for example, an asymmetric shape with respect to the rotation axis can be adopted, so that the effect of the second member can be enhanced. . On the other hand, if the position of the center of gravity of the second member is decentered in this way, the second member may be rotated (rotated) around the rotation center by its own weight. Therefore, the configuration in which the first member displaced to the retracted position is formed so as to be able to regulate the displacement of the second member is particularly effective, thereby allowing the player to visually recognize the second member in an appropriate state. It is possible to secure a production effect.

  The gaming machine G1 or G2 includes a displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the second member, and the displacement member is formed to be displaceable in a state where at least the first member is displaced to the retracted position. A gaming machine G3 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1 or G2, the second member includes a displacement member that is displaceably disposed, and at least the first member is displaced to the retracted position. Since the first member is displaced to the retracted position and the second member is exposed, the displacement effect is further increased by displacing the displacement member. Can do. On the other hand, if the displacement member is displaced when the second member is exposed, the position of the center of gravity moves along with the displacement, and the second member may be rotated (spinned). Therefore, the configuration in which the first member displaced to the retracted position is formed so as to be able to regulate the displacement of the second member is particularly effective, thereby allowing the player to visually recognize the second member in an appropriate state. It is possible to secure a production effect.

  In the gaming machine G3, the outer peripheral surface of the second member is disposed so as to be visible to a player, and the one side of the displacement member is rotatably supported on the outer peripheral surface of the second member. The gaming machine G4 is characterized in that the other side opposite to the gaming machine is formed so as to be able to project into the gaming area.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G3, the second member is arranged so that its outer peripheral surface is visible to the player, and the displacement member is rotatable on one side to the outer peripheral surface of the second member Since the other side opposite to the one side is formed so as to project to the game area, the game ball flowing down the game area can be received on the upper surface of the displacement member. Thus, for example, when a game ball inflow port is formed in the second member, the game ball flowing down the game area can be easily introduced into the inflow port using the displacement member. . In this case, if the game ball flowing down the game area is received by the displacement member, the second member may be rotated by the load acting at that time or the weight of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the displacement member. Therefore, the configuration in which the first member displaced to the retracted position is formed so as to be able to regulate the displacement of the second member is particularly effective, and thus the displacement member is projected to a predetermined position in the game area. Can be easily maintained.

  In the gaming machine G4, the first member is disposed in the gaming area while facing the outer peripheral surface of the second member in the covering position, and is outside the gaming area in the retracted position. A gaming machine G5 that is arranged.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G4, the first member is arranged in the gaming area while facing the outer peripheral surface of the second member in the covering position, so that the game flowing down the gaming area It can suppress that a ball collides with the 2nd member and this 2nd member rotates. In particular, when the rotation position of the second member is a rotation position in which the displacement member is directed toward the game area, a game ball flowing down the game area collides with the displacement member, and the displacement member is released (tensioning). Can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the first member is disposed outside the game area in the retracted position, a space for the displacement member to protrude into the game area can be secured by the displacement of the first member to the retracted position. . Accordingly, the outer peripheral surface of the second member can be brought closer to the game area side (player side), and the player can easily make the displacement member visible.

  In the gaming machine G5, the first member is formed to be rotatable around a rotation axis substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the second member, and is formed in a plate shape that curves along the outer peripheral surface of the second member. A gaming machine G6 that is characterized by being played.

  According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G5, the first member is formed to be rotatable around a rotation axis substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the second member, and the outer peripheral surface of the second member. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a space necessary for displacement between the covering position and the retracted position. Therefore, a space for disposing other members can be ensured accordingly. In addition, since the first member is formed to be curved in this way, the game ball flowing down the game area is restrained from being stopped on the first member arranged at the covering position, and smoothly. Can flow down.

  In any of the gaming machines G3 to G6, the gaming machine G7 includes a driving unit that generates a driving force and a transmission unit that transmits the driving force of the driving unit to the second member and the displacement member. .

  Here, in order to form the second member to be rotatable and displace the displacement member to the second member, a driving means is required for each of the second member and the displacement member. Bulky. Moreover, when the driving means for displacing the displacement member is mounted on the second member, the weight of the second member increases, and it becomes difficult to smoothly start or stop the rotation of the second member.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G3 to G6, the driving means for generating the driving force and the driving force of the driving means to the second member and the displacement member Since the transmission means for transmitting is provided, the second member can be rotated and the displacement member can be displaced by also using one drive means. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced. Moreover, since it is not necessary to mount the drive means for displacing the displacement member on the second member, the weight of the second member can be reduced, and the rotation of the second member can be started or stopped smoothly.

  In the gaming machine G7, the gaming machine G8 is provided with connecting means for connecting the first member and the displacement member and interlocking the displacement of the first member with the displacement of the displacement member.

  According to the gaming machine G8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G7, the first member and the displacement member are connected, and the connecting member that links the displacement of the first member to the displacement of the displacement member is provided. The driving means for causing the first displacement member to function as the driving means for displacing the first displacement member. In this case, when the displacement member and the first member are displaced by the driving force of the separate drive means, if the control failure occurs, the displacement member and the first member may interfere with each other. Since one member can be mechanically connected and their displacements can be synchronized, it is possible to reliably suppress interference between the displacement member and the first member.

<Concept of Invention with Rotating Unit 700 as an Example>
In a gaming machine comprising: a driving means for generating a driving force; a displacement member that is displaced by the driving force of the driving means; and a transmission means that transmits the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member. A first member, a second member positioned closer to the displacement member in the driving force transmission path than the first member, and an engagement member disposed between the first member and the second member When the first member is displaced in one direction with respect to the second member, the engagement member engages with the first member and the second member, and the driving force is transmitted. In addition, in a predetermined section of the displacement section of the displacement member, the second member is displaced in advance in the one direction with respect to the first member.

  Here, there is known a gaming machine including a driving unit that generates a driving force, a displacement member that is displaced by the driving force of the driving unit, and a transmission unit that transmits the driving force of the driving unit to the displacement member. (For example, JP-A-2015-029849). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the transmission state of the driving force by the transmission means from the driving means to the displacement member is always constant, when the driving means is driven at a constant driving speed, the displacement member is also constant. It is displaced at a displacement speed, and a change cannot be given to the displacement mode of the displacement member. For this reason, there is a problem in that the effect of the effect accompanying the displacement of the displacement member is insufficient.

  Although the displacement speed of the displacement member can be changed by increasing / decreasing the drive speed of the drive means, the displacement speed in the predetermined section of the displacement section of the displacement member is different from the displacement speed in the other sections. In order to achieve speed, it is necessary to arrange a sensor device that detects the position of the displacement member, and to increase or decrease the output of the driving means in accordance with the detection result of the sensor device, resulting in an increase in product cost and control cost. . In addition, the structure and control become complicated, leading to a decrease in reliability.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, the transmission means includes the first member, the second member positioned on the displacement member side in the transmission path of the driving force relative to the first member, the first member, and the second member. An engaging member disposed between the members, and when the first member is displaced in one direction with respect to the second member, the engaging member engages with the first member and the second member. Thus, the driving force is transmitted and the transmission of the driving force is interrupted, and in a predetermined section of the displacement section of the displacement member, the second member is displaced in advance in one direction with respect to the first member. Therefore, the displacement speed of the displacement member in the predetermined section can be made faster than the displacement speed of the displacement member in the other sections regardless of the drive state of the drive means. Therefore, a change can be given to the displacement mode of a displacement member, and the presentation effect of the production accompanying the displacement of the displacement member can be heightened.

  Moreover, according to the gaming machine H1, the second member can be advanced in one direction with respect to the first member regardless of the driving state of the driving means. For example, in all the sections in the displacement section of the displacement member, The drive means can be driven at a constant drive speed, and there is no need to increase or decrease the drive speed of the drive means during the displacement section of the displacement member (that is, depending on whether it is a predetermined section or another section). As a result, the control can be simplified, the control cost can be reduced, and the operation reliability can be improved. Alternatively, driving of the driving means can be stopped in a predetermined section, and in this case, energy consumption can be suppressed.

  Further, according to the gaming machine H1, in the driving state in which the first member is displaced in the other direction with respect to the two members, the engagement of the engaging member is released and the transmission of the driving force is cut off. The displacement member can be in a stopped state (non-driving state), and the driving force of the driving means in such a driving state can be used as a driving force for driving other members. That is, by switching the drive direction of the drive means, the two members, the displacement member and the other member, can be displaced respectively.

  The transmission means is formed such that when the first member is displaced in the other direction with respect to the two members, the engagement of the engagement member is released and the transmission of the driving force is interrupted. It may be.

  In the gaming machine H1, the displacement member is formed to be rotatable, and its gravity center position is decentered from the rotation center. In the predetermined section, the weight of the displacement member moves the second member in the one direction. A gaming machine H2 which is formed so as to be operable in a direction of displacement.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1, the displacement member is formed to be rotatable and its center of gravity is decentered from the rotation center. Since the two members are formed so as to be able to act in a direction in which the two members are displaced in one direction, the second member can be displaced in one direction with respect to the first member by utilizing the weight of the displacement member. . That is, the displacement speed of the displacement member in the predetermined section can be made faster than the displacement speed of the displacement member in the other section. As a result, it is possible to give a change to the displacement mode of the displacement member, and to enhance the effect of staging that accompanies the displacement of the displacement member.

  For example, when the displacement member is formed so as to be able to repeat the rotation of 360 degrees about its rotation axis, the displacement speed (rotation speed) of the displacement member in a predetermined section is A mode in which the rotational speed is made faster than the displacement speed (rotational speed), that is, a rotational mode in which the rotational speed is increased or decreased during one rotation can be repeatedly performed.

  In the gaming machine H2, the transmission means includes a main body portion that is rotationally driven by the second member, a crank member that protrudes from the main body portion and has a pin portion that is eccentric from the rotation center of the main body portion; A sliding groove through which a pin portion of the crank member is slidably inserted is formed on one end side, and an intermediate portion is rotatably supported on the other end side of the arm member. A gaming machine H3 that is connected to a member.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H2, the transmission means is provided to project from the main body that is rotationally driven by the second member and the main body, and is eccentric from the center of rotation of the main body. Since it includes a crank member having a pin portion and an arm member in which a sliding groove through which the pin portion of the crank member is slidably inserted is formed on one end side and an intermediate portion is rotatably supported. The other end side of the arm member can be reciprocated by rotating the crank member with the second member and sliding the pin member along the sliding groove. In this case, since the other end side of the arm member is connected to the displacement member, the displacement member can be reciprocated between the first position and the second position in accordance with the reciprocation of the other end side of the arm member. . That is, the displacement direction of the displacement member can be switched without switching the drive direction of the drive means.

  In the gaming machine H3, the displacement member is reciprocated between the first position and the second position in accordance with the reciprocation of the other end side of the arm member, and is displaced from the first position to the second position. And in the middle of the displacement from the second position to the first position, the direction in which the weight of the displacement member acts on the second member is different from the second member. The gaming machine H4 is converted from a direction of displacement in a direction to a direction of displacement of the second member in the one direction.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H3, the displacement member is reciprocated between the first position and the second position in accordance with the reciprocating operation on the other end side of the arm member, and the first position During the displacement from the second position to the second position and during the displacement from the second position to the first position, the direction in which the weight of the displacement member acts on the second member Since the second member is changed from the direction of displacement in the other direction to the direction of displacement of the second member in one direction, when the displacement member is reciprocated, the displacement member can be moved in any direction from the middle of the displacement. The displacement speed of the displacement member can be increased. As a result, it is possible to give a change to the displacement mode of the displacement member, and to enhance the effect of staging that accompanies the displacement of the displacement member.

  For example, the displacement member is reciprocated between an extended position (first position) where the displacement member is visibly extended from the player and a retracted position (second position) where the extended position is retracted. When operating, when the displacement member is extended from the retracted position to the extended position, the displacement member is displaced at a constant displacement speed halfway while increasing the displacement member's displacement speed to increase the displacement member vigorously. In addition to being able to project to the overhanging position, when retracting the displacement member from the overhanging position to the overhanging position, the displacement member is displaced at a constant displacement speed up to the middle, while the displacement member speed increases from the middle. Thus, the displacement member can be immediately retracted to the retracted position.

  In the gaming machine H1, the displacement member is formed so as to be slidable, and in the predetermined section, the displacement member is inclined downward in the direction of the slide displacement, so that the weight of the displacement member deviates from the second member. The gaming machine H5 is formed so as to be capable of acting in a direction to be displaced in the one direction.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1, the displacement member is formed to be slidable, and in a predetermined section, the displacement member is inclined downward in the direction of the slide displacement. Is formed so as to be able to act in a direction in which the second member is displaced in one direction, so that the second member is displaced in one direction with respect to the first member by utilizing the weight of the displacement member. be able to. That is, the displacement speed of the displacement member in the predetermined section can be made faster than the displacement speed of the displacement member in the other section. As a result, it is possible to give a change to the displacement mode of the displacement member, and to enhance the effect of staging that accompanies the displacement of the displacement member.

  In any of the gaming machines H2 to H5, the displacement member is formed so as to be able to hold a gaming ball at least in the predetermined section.

  According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effect exerted by any of the gaming machines H2 to H5, the displacement member is formed so as to be able to hold the game ball at least in a predetermined section, so that the displacement member holds the game ball. In the state, the weight of the entire displacement member is increased by the weight of the game ball, and the displacement speed of the displacement member in the predetermined section can be further increased. Further, the weight of the entire displacement member is varied depending on whether the game ball is held on the displacement member and the case where the game ball is not held, or depending on the number of game balls held. be able to. Thereby, in each case, the displacement speed of a displacement member can be changed. As a result, it is possible to give a change to the displacement mode of the displacement member, and to enhance the effect of staging that accompanies the displacement of the displacement member.

  In any one of the gaming machines H2 to H6, the displacement member includes a receiving portion that receives a game ball flowing down the game area, and at least in the predetermined section, when the receiving portion receives the game ball, the gaming ball The gaming machine H7 is configured so that a force applied to the displacement member can be applied in a direction in which the second member is displaced in the one direction.

  According to the gaming machine H7, in any of the gaming machines H2 to H6, the displacement member includes a receiving portion that receives the game ball flowing down the gaming area, and at least in a predetermined section, when the receiving portion receives the game ball Since the force applied to the displacement member from the game ball is formed so as to be able to act in a direction to displace the second member in one direction, the kinetic energy of the game ball when the receiving portion receives the game ball Can be used to increase the displacement speed of the displacement member in the predetermined section. Also, the force applied to the displacement member varies depending on whether the receiving portion receives the game ball, whether it receives the game ball, or depending on the flow velocity (the magnitude of the kinetic energy) of the game ball at the time of receiving. be able to. Thereby, in each case, the displacement speed of a displacement member can be changed. As a result, it is possible to give a change to the displacement mode of the displacement member, and to enhance the effect of staging that accompanies the displacement of the displacement member.

  Note that the game ball flowing down the game area is not limited to a game ball that moves along the direction of gravity on the front surface of the game board, but also includes a game ball that moves in a direction different from the direction of gravity. As a game ball that moves in a direction different from the direction of gravity, for example, a game ball that moves in a direction different from the direction of gravity by colliding with a nail, a tulip, an accessory, etc. Thus, a game ball that moves in a direction different from the direction of gravity is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine H6 or H7, the transmission means includes a gear train that forms part or all of the transmission path of the driving force, and a load gear that meshes with one gear of the gear train. A gaming machine H8 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine H8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H6 or H7, the transmission means meshes with a gear train that forms part or all of the driving force transmission path and one gear of the gear train. In the predetermined section, when the game ball is held by the displacement member or received by the receiving portion, the weight or kinetic energy of the game ball is used. The second member is displaced in advance in one direction with respect to the first member (that is, the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section is made faster than the displacement speed of the displacement member in another section), If the game ball is not held by the displacement member, or if the game ball is not received by the receiving portion, the second member is applied to the first member by utilizing a load (resistance) when the load gear is rotated. Displaced in advance in one direction ( Chi, displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined interval is faster) it can be suppressed.

  That is, when the game ball is not held by the displacement member or the receiving part does not receive the game ball, the displacement speed of the displacement member in the predetermined section becomes faster than the displacement speed of the displacement member in the other sections. Only when the game ball is held by the displacement member or when the receiving part receives the game ball, the displacement speed of the displacement member in the predetermined section is made higher than the displacement speed of the displacement member in the other sections. A mode of increasing the speed can be easily formed.

<About the concept of the invention taking the back case 300 as an example>
In a gaming machine comprising a gaming board, a back member disposed on the back side of the gaming board, and a fixing member disposed on the back member, the gaming board is disposed between the facing from the gaming board to the back member. A displacement member operable on the back side of the game board from the opposite side from the game board to the back member, wherein the fixing member has a protrusion that engages with the displacement member. The gaming machine I1 is characterized in that the protruding portion and the displacement member are engaged, and the fixing member is disposed on the back member.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine including a game board, a back member disposed on the back side of the game board, and a fixing member disposed on the back side of the back member is known (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004). -33603). According to this gaming machine, the fixing member is fastened to the back member by the screw inserted from the front side of the back member. Thereby, it is suppressed that a fixing member is removed from the back side of a game board.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine, the step of disposing the fixing member on the back member includes the step of disposing the fixing member on the back member and the step of fastening the fixing member to the back member from the back side of the back member. And the work from the opposite direction is the work from the front side of the back member. For this reason, there is a problem that the number of work steps for disposing the fixing member on the back member increases.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I1, the displacement member is disposed between the game board and the back member and is operable on the back side of the game board from the outside between the game board and the back member. (Displacement member 310), the fixing member includes a protrusion (engaged portion 322) that engages with the displacement member, and the protrusion and the displacement member are engaged so that the fixing member is arranged on the back member. Thus, the fixing member can be disposed on the back case by one-way work from the back side. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the step of turning to the front side or reversing the back member after working from the back side. As a result, the number of work steps for disposing the fixing member on the back member can be reduced.

  The gaming machine I1 includes a first member disposed between the game board and the back member, and the displacement member is disposed on the back side of the first member. I2.

  Here, in a recent gaming machine, the first member (such as an accessory device) arranged between the game board and the back member tends to be enlarged. Therefore, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the enlarged first member is disposed in front of the fixing member or in a position close to the fixing member, the fixing member is fastened from the front side of the back member. In the meantime, the first member gets in the way. Therefore, it has been difficult to dispose the fixing member on the back member by fastening the fixing member with a screw inserted from the front side of the back member.

  On the other hand, the gaming machine I1 includes the first member disposed between the game board and the back member, and the displacement member is disposed on the back side of the first member. The displacement member and the fixed member can be engaged by operating the displacement member from the outside between the facing from the game board to the back member in a state where the first member is disposed between the facing from the back member to the back member. . Therefore, the fixing member can be disposed on the back member without the displacement member being obstructed by the first member disposed between the game board and the back member.

  Further, since the displacement member is disposed between the back member and the first member, the engaging portion between the displacement member and the fixing member can be disposed between the back member and the first member. Therefore, access to the engaging portion between the displacement member and the fixing member can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the engagement between the displacement member and the fixing member from being illegally released and the fixing member from being illegal (for example, replaced with an illegal fixing member).

  In the gaming machine I1 or I2, the displacement member is slidably displaced on a plane parallel to a facing surface between the back member and the game board.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I1 or I2, the displacement member is slid and displaced on a plane parallel to the opposing surface of the back member and the game board. Therefore, when the displacement member is displaced, The amount of displacement in the facing direction between the back member and the game board can be set to zero. Thereby, the space which arrange | positions a 1st member between opposing of a displacement member and a game board can be ensured. As a result, the outer shape of the first member in the opposing direction of the back member and the game board can be increased, and the degree of freedom in designing the first member can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the back member includes a bottom wall portion facing the game board, and a side wall portion standing on the game board side from an edge portion of the bottom wall portion. An opening is formed in one of the bottom wall and the side wall, and the displacement member is inserted into the opening and has an operating element protruding outside from the inside of the back member. A gaming machine I4 characterized by comprising.

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the back member is erected on the gaming board side from the bottom wall part facing the gaming board and the edge of the bottom wall part. A side wall, and an opening formed in either the bottom wall or the side wall. The displacement member is inserted through the opening from the inside of the back member to the outside. Since the projecting operation element is provided, the displacement member can be displaced by operating the operation element from the outside of the rear member (the outer side between the game board and the rear member). Therefore, even if the first member is disposed inside the back member (between the game board and the back member), the displacement member can be displaced without being obstructed by the first member. .

  In the gaming machine I4, in the state in which the engagement between the displacement member and the fixing member is released, the gaming machine I4 includes an urging unit that urges the displacement member in a direction to release the engagement with the fixing member. A gaming machine I5.

  According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I4, in a state where the engagement between the displacement member and the fixing member is released, the biasing force is applied to bias the displacement member in the direction of releasing the engagement with the fixing member. Since the biasing means is provided, when the displacement member and the fixing member are forgotten to be engaged, or when the engagement between the displacement member and the fixing member is incomplete, the displacement member is engaged with the fixing member. It can be displaced in the releasing direction. Therefore, the operator can determine whether or not the engagement between the displacement member and the fixed member is correct at the position where the operation element protruding outside the back member is disposed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the forgetting engagement between the displacement member and the fixing member.

  The urging means may include a spring or rubber disposed between the displacement member and the back member to urge the displacement member in a direction to release the engagement with the fixed member, or the weight of the displacement member. For example, the displacement member is acted on in the direction of releasing the engagement with the fixing member.

  The gaming machine I4 or I5 includes an outer frame formed in a frame shape that can accommodate the game board and the back member, and an inner shape of the outer frame is an outer shape in front view of the game board and the back member. A gaming machine that is formed substantially the same, and in a state where the displacement member and the fixing member are disengaged, the operation element is arranged on the outer side between the game board and the back member. I6.

  According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I4 or I5, the gaming machine I6 includes an outer frame formed in a frame shape that can accommodate the gaming board and the rear member, and the inner shape of the outer frame is the gaming board and the rear member When the displacement member and the fixed member are disengaged from each other, the operating element is disposed on the outer side between the game board and the back member. When the game board and the back member are accommodated in the outer frame when the fixing member and the fixing member are disengaged, the operating element can be brought into contact with the outer frame. Thereby, it can suppress that a game board and a back member are accommodated in an outer frame. Therefore, when it is forgotten to arrange the fixing member on the back member or when the engagement between the displacement member and the fixing member is forgotten, the forgetting (abnormality) can be noticed to the operator. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game board from being housed in the outer frame in a state where the fixing member is forgotten to be disposed on the back member or the engagement between the displacement member and the fixing member is forgotten.

  In any one of the gaming machines I4 to I6, the gaming machine I7 is provided with suppression means for suppressing the operation element from being operated in a direction of releasing the engagement between the displacement member and the fixing member. .

  According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effect exerted by any of the gaming machines I4 to I6, there is provided suppression means for suppressing the operation of the operating element in the direction of releasing the engagement between the displacement member and the fixing member. Therefore, it can suppress that the operation element is operated and the displacement member is displaced in the direction of releasing the engagement with the fixed member. As a result, it is possible to suppress the engagement between the displacement member and the fixed member using the operation element.

  In addition, as a suppression means which suppresses that an operation element is operated in the direction which cancels | releases engagement with a displacement member and a fixing member, the form supported by the operation element so that it can idle | spin in the direction which cancels | releases engagement A configuration in which the projecting tip of the operating element protrudes in a direction in which the engagement between the displacement member and the fixing member is released, and a configuration in which the operating element is disposed between the displacement member and the fixing member Etc. are exemplified.

  In any one of the gaming machines I1 to I7, the displacement member includes an elastic piece that can be elastically deformed and a first protrusion that protrudes from the elastic piece, and the fixing member is a displacement of the displacement member. A housing portion that is open in the region and is recessed in the displacement direction of the displacement member, and the housing portion includes a second projection that projects from the displacement region of the first projection, and the second The protrusion is configured to displace the elastic piece by abutting the first protrusion when the displacement member is displaced in one direction, and the displacement member is displaced in the other direction. A gaming machine I8, wherein the displaceable member and the fixed member can be engaged with each other by abutting against one member.

  According to the gaming machine I8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines I1 to I7, the displacement member includes an elastic piece that can be elastically deformed and a first protrusion that protrudes from the elastic piece, and the fixing member is A receiving portion that opens to the displacement region of the displacement member and is recessed in the displacement direction of the displacement member, the receiving portion includes a second protrusion that protrudes from the displacement region of the first protrusion, The two projecting portions are displaced in one direction so that the elastic piece can be displaced by contacting the first projecting portion, and the first projecting member is displaced by the displacement member being displaced in the other direction. Since the displacement member and the fixing member can be engaged with each other by contact, the displacement of the displacement member in one direction can be allowed and the displacement of the displacement member in the other direction can be restricted by the second protrusion. Thereby, the displacement of the displacement member in both the engagement direction with the fixing member and the drop-off direction can be restricted.

  In the gaming machine I8, the accommodating portion is set to a size that can accommodate the elastic piece, and when the first protrusion and the second protrusion are engaged, the elastic piece A gaming machine I9 characterized in that it is accommodated.

  According to the gaming machine I9, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine I8, the housing portion is set to a size that can accommodate the elastic piece, and when the first protrusion and the second protrusion are engaged, Since the elastic piece is accommodated in the accommodating portion, it is possible to make it difficult to operate the elastic piece from the outside of the accommodating portion in a state where the displacement member and the fixing member are engaged. Therefore, it can suppress that an elastic piece is operated from the outer side of an accommodating part, and is elastically deformed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the engagement between the displacement member and the fixing member from being illegally released. In this case, it is possible to remove the fixing member from the back member by cutting the displacement member (the base end portion of the receiving portion) located outside the receiving portion.

  In the gaming machine I9, the displacement member includes a plurality of elastic pieces that can be accommodated in the accommodating portion, and the accommodating portion is set to a size that can accommodate a plurality of elastic pieces. Machine I10.

  According to the gaming machine I10, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I9, the displacement member includes a plurality of elastic pieces that can be accommodated in the accommodating portion, and the accommodating portion is set to a space that can accommodate a plurality of elastic pieces. Therefore, when the displacement member (the base end portion of the elastic piece) located outside the housing portion is cut and the fixing member is removed from the rear member, the cut displacement member (elastic piece) is placed inside the housing portion. The displacement member (elastic piece) that is not cut in this state can be accommodated inside the accommodation portion. Therefore, since the displacement member (elastic piece) cut inside the accommodation portion can be accommodated and left, the number of displacement members accommodated in the accommodation portion is compared with the number of cut elastic pieces of the displacement member. Thus, when the fixing member is illegally removed and changed to an illegal fixing member, the number of the fixing members can be different so that the operator can detect that the gaming machine has been cheated.

  In any one of the gaming machines I1 to I10, the first member regulates displacement of the displacement member in a direction to release the engagement with the fixed member when the displacement member is engaged with the fixed member. The gaming machine I11 is provided with a regulating means.

  According to the gaming machine I11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines I1 to I10, when the displacement member is engaged with the fixed member, the restriction that restricts the displacement of the displacement member in the direction in which the engagement with the fixed member is released. Since the means is provided, it is possible to restrict the displacement member from being displaced when a force acts in a direction in which the engagement between the displacement member and the fixed member is released by fraud. Therefore, when force is exerted in the direction in which the displacement member disengages the fixed member due to fraud, it is possible to prevent the force from concentrating on the engaging portion between the displacement member and the fixed member. It is possible to suppress the displacement member or the fixing member from being damaged by the force input by.

  In addition, since the first member includes the restricting means, when the fixing member is removed from the back member, the restriction of the displacement member by the restricting means can be released by removing the first member from the back member. In this case, by removing the first member, it is possible to access the engaging portion between the displacement member and the fixing member, so that it is possible to improve work efficiency when removing the fixing member from the back member.

  Examples of the restricting means for restricting the displacement of the displacement member include a form in which a protrusion is disposed inside the engagement recess to restrict the elastic deformation of the displacement member, and a form in which the protrusion is engaged with the displacement member.

<Concept of Invention with General Winning Port Unit 150 as an Example>
A base member having a game area on the front side, first decoration means for forming decoration on the front surface of the base member, and second decoration means for forming decoration continuous with the decoration of the first decoration means in front view; A gaming machine J1, wherein the first decoration means and the second decoration means are arranged at positions adjacent to each other in the front-rear direction in a front view.

  Conventionally, a base member having a game area on the front side, a first decoration means disposed on the front surface of the base member and having a decoration formed on the front surface, and a first member disposed on the front surface of the first decoration means. 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine is known that includes one member and second decoration means that is disposed in front of the first member and has a decoration that is continuous with the decoration of the first decoration means in a front view (for example, JP 2007-000195 A). According to this gaming machine, the design of the base member can be secured by allowing the player to visually recognize the decoration of the first decoration means and the second decoration means as one decoration.

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the second decoration means is arranged on the front surface of the first member, the second decoration means is separated from the first decoration means by the thickness of the first member. It is arranged at a distant position. Therefore, the decoration of the first decoration means and the decoration of the second decoration means are visually recognized as being shifted by the thickness of the first member depending on the position (the direction of the line of sight) where the player visually recognizes the base member. There was a problem that the designability of the member deteriorated.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J1, since the first decoration means and the second decoration means are arranged at positions adjacent to each other in the front-rear direction in the front view, the first decoration means and the second decoration means The front and rear separation distance can be reduced. Thus, when the first decoration means and the second decoration means are viewed from an angle inclined with respect to the front view of the first decoration means or the second decoration means, the decoration of the first decoration means and the decoration of the second decoration means It can suppress that it is visually recognized. Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily recognize the decoration of the first decoration means and the decoration of the second decoration means as one decoration and improve the design of the base member.

  Moreover, the 1st decoration means should just be a thing in which a decoration is formed, for example, sticks the sealing member which printed the decoration on the plate-shaped member on the front of a base member, or a decoration on the front of a base member Is to be printed.

  When the second decoration means is attached (adhered) to the front of the first decoration means, the operator can attach (adhere) the second decoration means while visually checking the decoration of the first decoration means. it can. Therefore, the operator can easily attach the second decoration means to the first decoration means at a position where the decoration of the first decoration means and the decoration of the second decoration means are continuous. Accordingly, it is possible to improve the workability of the operator who attaches the second decoration means to the first decoration means.

  The gaming machine J1 includes a front member that is formed of a light-transmitting material, has an outer shape that is larger than the outer shape of the second decorative means in front view, and is disposed in front of the second decorative means. The member includes a concave portion that is recessed in a shape that is larger than the outer shape of the second decorative means on the surface facing the second decorative means, and the concave dimension of the concave portion is greater than the thickness dimension of the second decorative means. Is also set to a large value.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine J1, the gaming machine J2 is formed from a light-transmitting material, and has a larger outer shape than that of the second decorative means when viewed from the front, and is disposed in front of the second decorative means. The front member is provided with a concave portion recessed in a shape larger than the outer shape of the second decorative means on the surface facing the second decorative means, and the concave dimension of the concave portion is the second decorative means. Therefore, the front member can be disposed on the base member in a state where the second decoration means is accommodated in the recess. Thereby, it can suppress that a 2nd decoration means falls out between between a base member and a front member.

  Moreover, since the recessed dimension of a recessed part is set to the larger value than the thickness dimension of a 2nd decoration means, it can suppress that a clearance gap is formed between a front member and a 1st decoration means. Thereby, it can suppress that dust and dirt are pinched | interposed between a front member and a 1st decoration means, and the decoration of a 1st decoration means becomes difficult to visually recognize.

  In the gaming machine J2, the concave portion has an inner surface formed along the outer shape of the second decorative means, and the second decorative means is disposed by being adhered to the concave bottom surface of the concave portion. A gaming machine J3.

  According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J2, the recess has an inner surface formed along the outer shape of the second decoration means, and the second decoration means is adhered to the recessed bottom surface of the recess. Therefore, by arranging the second decoration means along the recess of the front member, the second decoration means can be positioned and arranged with respect to the front member. Thereby, when the front member is arranged in front of the first decoration means, it is possible to suppress the second decoration means from being sandwiched between the edge of the front member and the first decoration means. As a result, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the first decoration means and the front member, and the decoration of the first decoration means is visually recognized with dust and dirt sandwiched between the front member and the first decoration means. It can suppress becoming difficult.

  In the gaming machine J3, the front member includes a protrusion that protrudes toward the base member from a surface facing the base member, and the base member includes an opening that opens at a position corresponding to the protrusion. Is inserted into the opening so that the front member is positioned with respect to the base member.

  According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine J3, the front member includes a protrusion that protrudes from the surface facing the base member toward the base member, and the base member has an opening that opens at a position corresponding to the protrusion. Since the front member is positioned with respect to the base member by inserting the protrusion into the opening, the position of the front member relative to the first decoration means can be suppressed from shifting. The second decoration means is positioned with respect to the front member by the concave portion of the front member. Therefore, by positioning the front member with respect to the first decoration means, it is possible to suppress displacement of the arrangement of the first decoration means and the second decoration means. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the decoration of the first decoration means and the decoration of the second decoration means as one decoration.

  In the gaming machine J4, the protrusion is formed on a concave bottom surface of the recess, the second decoration means is formed with a through hole penetrating in a position corresponding to the protrusion, and the protrusion is inserted into the through hole. A gaming machine J5 that is characterized by being played.

  According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine J4, the protrusion is formed on the concave bottom surface of the recess, and the second decoration means is formed with a through-hole penetrating at a position corresponding to the protrusion. Since the protrusion is inserted into the hole, the arrangement of the second decoration means with respect to the front member can be simplified. That is, if the second decoration means is simply disposed inside the recess of the front member, the edge of the second decoration means needs to be disposed along the recess, whereas the protrusion on the second decoration means. By forming the through hole to be inserted, the arrangement of the second decoration means relative to the front member can be determined only by inserting the protrusion into the through hole. As a result, the arrangement of the second decoration means with respect to the front member can be simplified.

  In addition, since the projection for positioning the front member is inserted into the through hole of the second decoration means with respect to the first decoration means, the second decoration means and the first decoration means are positioned at the same portion (projection). Therefore, the positioning accuracy between the decorative member and the first decorative means can be improved. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the decoration of the first decoration means and the decoration of the second decoration means as one decoration.

  In any one of the gaming machines J2 to J5, the front member includes an inclined portion that is inclined toward the first decoration means toward the outer edge in a front view, and an edge of the second decoration means is provided on the back side of the inclination portion. A gaming machine J6 characterized in that a portion is arranged.

  Here, in order to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the decoration of the first decoration means and the decoration of the second decoration means as one decoration, it is necessary to suppress the positional deviation between the decorations of both. However, when the first decoration means and the second decoration means are overlapped in the front-rear direction, the positions of the decorations of both are shifted in the front-rear direction by the thickness of the second decoration means. There is a problem that when the first decoration means and the second decoration means are visually recognized from an angle inclined with respect to the front view of the two decoration means, there is a risk that the front-rear positional deviation may be recognized.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines J2 to J5, the front member includes an inclined portion that is inclined toward the first decoration means side toward the outer edge in the front view. Since the edge part of the second decoration means is disposed on the back side of the part, the positional deviation of the decoration due to the difference in the arrangement in the front-rear direction between the second decoration means and the first decoration means is caused by the inclined part of the front member. Refraction of light can make it difficult for a player to recognize.

  More specifically, the light that is reflected by the decoration of the first decoration means or the second decoration means, passes through the inside of the front member, and is emitted from the inclined portion is inclined in the light passage direction with respect to the front surface of the base member. When the angle is made smaller than the inclination angle in the direction perpendicular to the inclined surface of the inclined portion with respect to the front surface of the base member, the inclination angle in the light emitting direction from the inclined portion relative to the front surface of the base member is the base. It is made smaller than the inclination angle of the light passing direction with respect to the front surface of the member. Accordingly, the connecting portion of the first decoration means and the second decoration means from the direction of the crossing angle smaller than the inclination angle in the direction orthogonal to the inclined surface of the inclined portion with respect to the front surface of the base member. The light passing direction viewed by the player who visually recognizes can be made closer to the overlapping direction of the first decoration means and the second decoration means. As a result, when the player visually recognizes the first decoration means and the second decoration means, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the front-rear positional deviation.

  In the gaming machine J6, the second decoration means includes an adhesion surface bonded to the front member, and a non-adhesion surface not adhered to the front member, and the inclined portion and the second decoration means are at least A gaming machine J7, which is provided with the non-adhesive surface at opposing positions.

  Here, when the player visually recognizes the connecting portion of the decoration of the first decoration means and the second decoration means from the direction orthogonal to the inclination of the inclined portion, the front and rear of the first decoration means and the second decoration means There is a possibility that the player will recognize the misalignment of the direction decoration.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine J6, the second decoration means includes an adhesive surface that is bonded to the front member, and a non-adhesive surface that is not bonded to the front member, Since the non-adhesive surface is provided at a position where the inclined portion and the second decorative means are opposed to each other, a gap is formed between the second decorative means and the front member (inclined portion) on the non-adhesive surface. The light passing through the non-adhesive surface can be totally reflected. Thereby, when the player visually recognizes the second decoration means through the inclined portion from the direction orthogonal to the inclination of the inclined portion, it is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing the decoration at the end of the second decoration means. . As a result, when the player visually recognizes the first decoration means and the second decoration means from the direction orthogonal to the inclination of the inclination portion, it is difficult to visually recognize the decoration of the second decoration means. It is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the positional deviation of the decoration in the front-rear direction of the first decoration means and the second decoration means.

  In the gaming machine J6 or J7, the inclined portion is formed in an arc shape in which an outer edge of a cross section in a direction orthogonal to an extending direction of the outer edge of the front member in a front view is curved convexly toward the outer edge of the front member. The game machine is characterized in that the end of the second decoration means is disposed on the center side of the front member in a front view with respect to a substantially intermediate position of straight lines connecting the ends of the inclined portions. J8.

  According to the gaming machine J8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J6 or J7, the inclined portion has an outer edge of a cross section in a direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the outer edge of the front member in front view, protruding toward the outer edge of the front member. Since the end portion of the second decoration means is disposed on the center side of the front member in front view, rather than the substantially intermediate position of the straight line connecting the end portions of the inclined portions. When the first decoration means and the second decoration means are visually recognized from an angle inclined with respect to the front view of the first decoration means or the second decoration means, the center of the front member is refracted by the bending of the inclined portion. The direction of the light passing through the side can be brought close to the direction in which the first decoration means and the second decoration means overlap. Moreover, since the edge part of the said 2nd decoration means is arrange | positioned rather than the substantially middle position of the straight line which connects the edge parts of an inclination part, the 1st decoration means and the 2nd decoration means, Can be prevented from being recognized by the player. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the decoration of the first decoration means and the decoration of the second decoration means as one decoration.

  In any one of the gaming machines J2 to J8, the inner side surface of the recess is formed with a second inclined portion that is inclined outward in a front view toward the first decoration means side, and the second inclined portion is formed on the base. The gaming machine J9, wherein an inclination angle with respect to the front surface of the member is set smaller than an inclination angle of the inclined portion with respect to the front surface of the base member.

  According to the gaming machine J9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines J2 to J8, the inner side surface of the recess is formed with a second inclined portion that is inclined outward in the front view toward the first decoration means side, and the second Since the inclination angle of the inclined portion with respect to the front surface of the base member is set to be smaller than the inclination angle of the inclined portion with respect to the front surface of the base member, the decoration of the first decorative means visually recognized through the inclined portion and the second inclined portion ( The position of the (virtual image) can be brought close to the position of the decoration (real image) of the first decoration means visually recognized without going through the inclined portion and the second inclined portion. As a result, when the first decoration means is visually recognized through the front member, it is possible to prevent the decoration of the first decoration means from being easily recognized by the refraction of light through the front member.

<About the concept of the invention taking the special winning device 550 as an example>
A gaming machine comprising: a game board having a game area on the front side; and a path unit that is disposed on the game board and has a path that guides a game ball that flows down the game area. A first path for sending a game ball to one side in the horizontal direction with respect to the game board in front view, and a game ball sent from the first path in a horizontal direction opposite to the guide direction of the first path A second path for sending a ball to the other side, and a third path for connecting one side of the first path and the second path, and the third path is a front side or a back side with respect to the game board A gaming machine K1 characterized in that a guide means for sending a game ball to at least one of the game boards is provided on at least one inner wall on the front side or the back side with respect to the game board.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine is known that includes a gaming board having a gaming area on the front side, and a path unit that is disposed on the gaming board and has a path that guides the sending of gaming balls flowing down the gaming area. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2015-131046). According to this gaming machine, the game ball that has flowed into the guide route formed in the route unit is guided (rolled) along the route of the guide route, so that the game ball rolls (down). Can be given.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, in order to secure a pitching distance of a game ball of a predetermined distance inside the path unit, a first path that sends the game ball to one side with respect to the game board, and its first When a second path for sending a game ball sent from one path to the other side with respect to the game board and a third path for connecting one side of the first path and the second path are formed, the first path Since the speed of the game ball that rolls is maximized at the communication portion with the third path (the downstream end of the first path), the game ball is placed on the inner wall of the third path where the direction of the ball is changed. Collisions make it easier to bounce. Therefore, there is a possibility that the game ball that has collided with the inner wall of the third path returns to the first path or swings (shakes) inside the third path in the pitching direction (horizontal direction in front view) of the first path. Accordingly, since the game ball sent from the first route to the third route swings along the third route, the player's line of sight cannot follow the game ball sent to the third route in a certain direction. There is a problem that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the game ball sent to the route.

  In this case, by making the route of the third route longer, the game ball passing from the first route can be smoothly switched to the rolling direction of the second route and the game ball passing through the third route. Can be prevented, but since the third path is formed long, the size of the entire path unit is increased correspondingly, and a space for arranging the path unit on the game board cannot be secured.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine K1, the path unit has a first path for sending a game ball to one side in the horizontal direction with respect to the game board in a front view, and a game ball sent from the first path. A second path that sends balls to the other side of the horizontal direction opposite to the guide direction of the first path, and a third path that connects one side of the first path and the second path, and the third path is: Since the guide means for sending the game ball to at least one of the front side and the back side with respect to the game board is provided on at least one inner wall on the front side or the back side with respect to the game board, the game ball passing through the third path is provided. It can be moved to the front side or back side (front and rear direction of the game board in front view). By the movement of the front or back side game ball, the game ball that rolls and accelerates on the first path can be delayed on the third path, and the game ball that has collided with the inner wall of the third path correspondingly It is possible to suppress returning to one path, or swinging (blurring) in the pitching direction (horizontal direction in front view) of the first path in the third path. Thereby, the player's line of sight can follow the game ball sent from the third route in a certain direction. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball sent to the third route.

  Moreover, since it can suppress that a game ball shakes (shakes) in a horizontal direction (front view left-right direction) with respect to the game board in front view, the part for the 3rd path | route which connects the 1st path | route and the 2nd path | route. It is not necessary to lengthen the path to suppress the swinging of the game ball, and the path of the third path can be shortened. As a result, the path unit can be accommodated within a predetermined area with respect to the game board, and a space for arranging the path unit with respect to the game board can be secured.

  In addition, as a guide means for guiding the game ball, the game ball is guided to the second path by switching the rolling direction of the game ball due to unevenness or disposing a displacement member at the path switching portion and displacing the displacement member. The method of doing is illustrated.

  In the gaming machine K1, the guide means is composed of a recess that is recessed on the inner wall on either the front side or the back side and a projection that is projected on the other inner wall on the front side or the back side. The gaming machine K2 is characterized in that the concave portion and the convex portion are formed at positions facing each other.

  According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine K1, the guide means includes a recess formed in the inner wall on either the front side or the back side, and the inner wall on the other side of the front side or the back side. Since the concave portion and the convex portion are formed at positions facing each other, the game ball is partially displaced in the middle of the path of the third path, so that the game ball The pitching speed can be slowed down. Therefore, the route of the third route can be shortened. As a result, the path unit can be easily accommodated in a predetermined area with respect to the game board, and a space for arranging the path unit with respect to the game board can be secured.

  In the gaming machine K2, a horizontal separation dimension from the protruding tip of the convex portion to one inner wall of the third path is set to be smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball.

  According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine K2, the horizontal separation dimension from the projecting tip of the convex portion to one inner wall of the third path is set smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball. It is possible to make it easier for the game ball flowing down the third path to be sent to the guide means to come into contact with the convex portion of the guide means. Thereby, it is possible to easily reduce the rolling speed of the game ball that flows down the first path and is sent to the third path by contacting the convex part. Therefore, it can suppress that the game ball which collided with the inner wall of the 3rd path | route returns to the 1st path | route, or swings in the direction different from the ball | bowl sending direction of a 3rd path | route on a 3rd path | route. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball passing through the third route.

  In the gaming machine K2 or K3, the convex portion is formed on an inner wall on the front side with respect to the gaming board, and the concave portion is formed on an inner wall on the rear side with respect to the gaming board. Machine K4.

  According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K2 or K3, the convex portion is formed on the inner wall on the front side with respect to the gaming board, and the concave portion is formed on the inner wall on the rear side with respect to the gaming board. Therefore, the plate | board thickness of the front side of a path | route unit can be made thin. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the player to visually recognize the inside of the route unit through the front of the route unit, and to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball sent inside the route unit. In addition, since the concave portion is formed on the inner wall on the front side of the path unit, it is possible to suppress the guide means from projecting to the front of the path unit, and accordingly, the path unit is disposed on the player side, It is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball passing through the route unit.

  More specifically, when the concave portion is formed on the inner surface on the front side, it is necessary to make the plate thickness on the front side of the path unit larger than the depth of the concave portion. Therefore, as the board thickness on the front side of the path unit increases, the game ball sent on the back side becomes less visible to the player. In addition, when the concave portion is formed on the inner surface on the front side, it is conceivable to curve the plate on the front side of the path unit along the shape of the concave portion. An interval from the glass plate forming the front surface of the area is necessary, and the entire game board needs to be arranged on the back side. Accordingly, the game ball sent through the route unit is less likely to be visually recognized by the player as the player moves away from the back side.

  Furthermore, when the concave portion is formed on the inner surface on the front side, it is conceivable to open the portion where the concave portion is formed. In this case, the rigidity of the path unit is reduced by the amount of the opening, and the path The unit is easily damaged. In addition, if an opening is formed in the front of the path unit, there is a risk that the opening will pass and the dishonesty will be made.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine K4, since the concave portion is formed on the back side of the path unit and the convex portion is formed on the front side of the path unit, the thickness of the entire front side of the path unit is suppressed from increasing. It is easy to visually recognize the game ball passing through the inside of the path unit, and the path unit is arranged on the front side of the gaming machine by suppressing partial projection to the front side of the path unit. The game ball passing through can be easily seen.

  In the gaming machine K3 or K4, the convex portion and the concave portion are formed such that a cross section in a gravitational direction is formed in an arc shape in a front view, and an axis of the arc is set coaxially.

  According to the gaming machine K5, in the gaming machine K3 or K4, the convex portion and the concave portion are formed in a circular arc shape in cross section in the direction of gravity, and the axis of the circular arc is set on the same axis. The separation distance can be made constant. As a result, it is possible to suppress the separation distance between the convex portion and the concave portion from being partially smaller than the diameter of the game ball, and to prevent the game ball passing through the path unit from being sandwiched between the convex portion and the inner wall. it can.

  In the gaming machine K5, the upper end of the recess is formed at a position along an extension line of a rolling locus at the center of the gaming ball rolling on the first path in a front view.

  According to the gaming machine K6, the upper end of the recess is formed at a position along the extended line of the rolling trajectory at the center of the game ball rolling on the first path in front view, so that the game rolls on the first path. Even when the rolling speed of the ball is high, the center of the game ball sent from the first route to the third route can be prevented from being sent above the upper end of the recess. As a result, the game ball sent from the first route to the third route can be sent inside the recess.

  In any one of the gaming machines K2 to K6, the concave portion is formed at a position that is separated from both side surfaces in the horizontal direction of the third path in a front view than a radial dimension of the gaming ball. .

  According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines K2 to K6, the recess is formed at a position spaced apart from the radial dimension of the gaming ball from both horizontal sides in the front view of the third path. Therefore, it can suppress that the game ball which flows down along the inner wall of a recessed part collides with the both sides | surfaces of the horizontal direction in the front view of a path | route unit, and shakes inside a recessed part. As a result, a game ball sent along the inside of the recess can be smoothly sent to the second path.

  In any one of the gaming machines K3 to K7, the concave portion is recessed in a circular arc shape with a cross section in the ball feeding direction of the first path in a front view centering on a central part in the horizontal direction of the third path, The game K8 is characterized in that the convex portion is provided with a rectangular cross section in the ball feeding direction of the first path in a front view.

  According to the gaming machine K8, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines K3 to K7, the recess has a section in the ball-feeding direction of the first path in a front view that is recessed in a circular arc shape, and the projection Since the cross section of the first path in the direction of ball feeding is projected in a rectangular shape, the distance between the opposing portions of the concave portion and the convex portion of the guiding means is narrowed toward both ends of the first path in the ball feeding direction. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball sent to the inside of the recess to swing in the direction of the first route. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball sent to the third route.

  In the gaming machine K8, the convex portion extends downwardly and inclines toward one side in a direction opposite to the direction in which the game balls of the second path are sent in a front view.

  According to the gaming machine K9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine K8, the convex portion extends downwardly and inclines toward one side of the second path in the direction opposite to the direction in which the game balls are sent. The game ball that comes into contact with the convex portion when flowing down the three paths can be guided in the inclination direction of the convex portion. Thereby, the game ball which contact | abutted to the convex part can be guided along the inner wall of the recessed part of the side spaced apart from a 2nd path | route. As a result, the game ball that flows from the third path to the second path can be rolled in the direction of the game ball of the second path, and the game ball can smoothly flow from the third path to the second path. it can.

  In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K9, the first route includes second guide means at a connection portion with the third route, and a game ball sent from the first route is sent from the second guide means. A gaming machine K10 that is capable of being guided by the guiding means.

  According to the gaming machine K10, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines K1 to K9, the first path includes the second guide means at the connection portion with the third path, and the first guide means Since the game balls sent from the route can be guided to the guide means, the game balls sent from the first route to the third route can be easily sent to the guide means of the third route. Thereby, the game ball can be smoothly sent from the first route to the third route. Therefore, the flow of the game ball from the third route to the second route can be made smoother as the game ball sent from the first route can be easily sent to the guide means. As a result, it is possible to stabilize the pitching of game balls in the entire path unit.

  In the gaming machine K10, the second guide means is provided with a second convex portion projecting on one of the front side and the rear side of the first route, and a second convex portion provided at a position facing the second convex portion. The gaming machine is characterized in that the width of the second recess is set larger in a direction perpendicular to the flow-down direction of the game ball toward the upstream side of the first path in a front view. K11.

  According to the gaming machine K11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K10, the second guiding means includes a second convex portion protruding from one of the front side and the rear side of the first path, and the second convex portion. It is comprised from the 2nd recessed part recessedly provided in the position which opposes, and the 2nd recessed part sets the width dimension of the direction orthogonal to the flow-down direction of a game ball toward the upstream of a 1st path | route in front view. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the second concave portion to accept the game ball sent through the first route. Thereby, the game ball can be smoothly sent from the first route to the third route. Therefore, the flow of the game ball from the third route to the second route can be made smoother as the game ball sent from the first route can be easily sent to the guide means. As a result, it is possible to stabilize the pitching of game balls in the entire path unit.

  In the gaming machine K10 or K11, the second recess has the downstream end of the first path positioned downstream of the rolling surface of the gaming ball of the first path. .

  According to the gaming machine K12, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K10 or K11, the second recess has the downstream end portion of the first path positioned downstream of the rolling surface of the gaming ball of the first path. Therefore, the game ball flowing into the third path from the first path along the inner wall of the second recess can be flowed into the third path on the far side from the first path. As a result, the game balls flowing into the third route from the first route can be easily sent to the inside of the recess, and the inflow of game balls from the third route to the second route can be facilitated.

<About the concept of the invention taking the special winning device 550 as an example>
In the gaming machine, comprising: a game board having a game area on the front side; and a flow direction changing means for changing the flow direction of a game ball disposed in front of the game board and flowing down the game area, the flow direction changing means Is a first member disposed in front of the game board, a second member disposed at a predetermined interval on the front side of the first member, and at least one of the first member or the second member. An adjusting means for displacing one of the game balls, and the adjusting means changes a distance between the facing portions of the first member and the second member to flow down between the facing portions of the first member and the second member. The gaming machine L1 can adjust the flow direction of the game machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine including a gaming board having a gaming area on the front side and a nail that is driven against the front of the gaming board (for example, JP-A-11-197311). According to this gaming machine, it is possible to adjust the flow direction of the game ball flowing down the game area by adjusting the angle of the nail hitting the game board (bending the nail). However, in the case of changing the flow direction of the game ball by changing the angle of the nail, the angle of the nail is visually recognized by the player, which is disadvantageous for the player (the game ball is difficult to flow down to an advantageous flow path). When it is recognized that the angle is the angle of the nail, there is a problem in that the player does not play with the gaming machine judged to be disadvantageous, and the operating rate of the gaming machine decreases.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L1, the flow direction changing means is a first member disposed on the front side of the game board and a first member disposed on the front side of the first member with a predetermined interval. Two members and adjusting means for displacing at least one of the first member and the second member, and the adjusting means changes the distance between the facing of the first member and the second member to change the first member and the second member. Since the flow direction of the game ball flowing down between the two members facing each other can be adjusted, the flow direction of the game ball can be changed (adjusted) by a distance in the front-rear direction with respect to the front view of the game board. Therefore, compared to the front view of the game board, it is less likely that the player visually recognizes the flow direction changing means and determines that it is disadvantageous or advantageous than a nail that changes the flow direction of the game ball at a horizontal separation distance. it can. As a result, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

  In the gaming machine L1, the second member is fixed to the gaming board, and the position of the first member is displaced by the adjusting means.

  According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L1, the second member is fixed to the gaming board, and the position of the first member is displaced by the adjusting means. By hiding at least a part of the first member disposed on the back side by the two members, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the position of the first member. Therefore, when the position of the first member is displaced, it can be made difficult for the player to recognize the displacement of the position. Therefore, it can suppress that the space | interval between facing of a 1st member and a 2nd member is grasped | ascertained by the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from judging that the player is disadvantageous from the interval between the facing portions of the first member and the second member and not playing the game on the gaming machine, so the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

  In the gaming machine L2, the gaming board includes a first opening that opens to a position corresponding to the first member, and a fastening member that is inserted through the first opening from the back side of the gaming board is the first member. The gaming machine L3 is characterized in that the first member is disposed on the gaming board by fastening to the gaming board.

  According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine L2, the gaming board includes a first opening that opens at a position corresponding to the first member, and the first opening is inserted from the back side of the gaming board. By fastening the fastening member to the first member, the first member is disposed on the game board, so there is no need to form a fastening part for fastening the first member on the front side of the game board, and accordingly, the front The external shape of the first member in view can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to easily secure a space for disposing other members in front of the game board.

  In addition, since the fastening member is fastened from the back side of the game board, it is possible to make it difficult to access the fastening member from the front side of the game board in a state where the flow direction changing means and the game board are assembled. As a result, it can be suppressed that the fastening member is illegally operated and the position of the first member is illegally changed.

  In the gaming machine L3, the first member includes a protruding portion that protrudes toward the gaming board and is inserted into the first opening, and the fastening member is fastened to a tip of the protruding portion. A gaming machine L4, wherein a first member is disposed on the gaming board.

  According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L3, the first member has a protruding portion that protrudes toward the gaming board and is inserted into the first opening, and a fastening member is fastened to the tip of the protruding portion. Thus, since the first member is disposed on the game board, the fastening portion of the fastening member can be accommodated inside the first opening. Therefore, since it can suppress that the fastening part with a fastening member protrudes in the front side of the 1st member, the space between the opposing of a 1st member and a 2nd member can be ensured.

  In the gaming machine L4, the first member can be slidably displaced on a plane parallel to the front surface of the game board by the adjusting means, and the first opening has the same size as the displacement area of the protrusion. The gaming machine L5 is characterized by being opened at the same time.

  According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L4, the first opening is opened to the same size as the displacement area of the protruding portion, so that when the position of the first member is displaced, the protruding portion The portion can be displaced along the first opening. Therefore, when the position of the first member is displaced, the first member can be prevented from being displaced in a direction other than the displacement direction (the direction displaced by the adjusting means). As a result, it is possible to simplify the work when the operator adjusts the position of the first member.

  The gaming machine L6 according to any one of the gaming machines L3 to L5, wherein the gaming board includes a second opening that opens at a position different from the first opening.

  According to the gaming machine L6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines L3 to L5, the gaming board includes the second opening that opens at a position different from the first opening, so that the game is played through the second opening. The fastening member fastened to the back side of the board can be operated. As a result, the work process when the operator operates the adjusting means can be simplified.

  That is, on the back side of the game board, an accessory device and a case member that accommodates the accessory device are arranged. Therefore, when operating the fastening member from the back side of the game board, When the case member that accommodates the accessory device needs to be removed from the game board, the fastening member can be operated from the front side of the game board by the second opening, so that the operator can move the back side of the game board. Since it is not necessary to remove the accessory device to be disposed and the case member that accommodates the accessory device, the operator's work process can be simplified.

  In the gaming machine L1, the gaming machine L7 is characterized in that the position of the second member with respect to the first member is changed in the front-rear direction in a front view by the adjusting means.

  According to the gaming machine L7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L1, the position of the second member is changed in the front-rear direction in the front view with respect to the first member. It is possible to suppress the position of the second member from being changed in front view as compared to the case where the position is changed in the left-right or up-down direction in front view. Therefore, it can suppress that a player judges that it is advantageous or disadvantageous by the change of the position of the 2nd member in front view. As a result, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines L2 to L7, the second member is formed of a non-light-transmitting material, and an outer shape in front view is formed larger than the first member, and the first member is A gaming machine L8 that is covered with a second member.

  According to the gaming machine L8, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines L2 to L7, the second member is formed from a non-light-transmitting material, and the outer shape in front view is formed to be larger than the first member. Since the first member is covered with the second member in the front view, the first member can be hidden by the second member in the front view, and the first member can be made difficult to recognize from the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the interval between the facing portions of the first member and the second member, and the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines L1 to L8, the second member is made of a non-light transmissive material, and at least one of the first member or the second member protrudes to the other of the first member or the second member. A gaming machine L9 including a projecting portion.

  According to the gaming machine L9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines L1 to L8, the second member is formed of a non-light-transmitting material, and at least one of the first member or the second member is the first member. Alternatively, since the projecting portion projecting to the other of the second members is provided, the game ball sent between the first member and the second member facing each other can be brought into contact with the projecting portion to change the direction of pitching. it can. Therefore, it can suppress that a player judges that it is advantageous or disadvantageous by recognizing the space | interval between facing of a 1st member and a 2nd member. As a result, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines L1 to L9, the adjustment means can adjust the other position of the first member or the second member stepwise with respect to one of the first member or the second member. A gaming machine L10 comprising means.

  According to the gaming machine L10, in addition to the effect exerted by any of the gaming machines L1 to L9, the adjusting means sets the other position of the first member or the second member relative to one of the first member or the second member. Since the step adjustment means that can be adjusted stepwise is provided, an operator who changes the position of the first member or the second member can adjust the change of the position stepwise. As a result, it is possible to suppress an error from occurring in the adjustment position of the first member or the second member. Therefore, the position adjustment of the first member or the second member can be simplified.

  In addition, as a means for adjusting the positions of the first member and the second member in stages, the first member or the second member may be used with respect to a plurality of grooves recessed in one of the first member or the second member. By changing the insertion position of the projecting convex portion, the first member or the second member is changed in position, or a plurality of grooves recessed in one of the first member or the game board The form which changes the position of a 1st member by changing the insertion position of the convex part protrudingly provided by the other of a member or a game board is illustrated.

<About the concept of the invention taking the special winning device 550 as an example>
In the gaming machine, comprising: a game area where game balls flow down; and a plurality of guide paths for guiding the sending of game balls flowing down the game area, and a path unit disposed in the game area. The unit is formed of a material that can transmit light and is disposed on the front side of the gaming area, and the second guide path is disposed on the back side of the first guide path. And the first guide route includes a first winning port that allows a game ball to enter, and the second guide route includes a second winning port that allows a game ball to enter. The gaming machine M1 is characterized in that a gaming value entering the first winning opening is given a higher gaming value than a gaming ball entering the second winning opening.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is a gaming machine in which a route unit having a plurality of guide routes for flowing down a game ball is arranged in a game area, and the player can visually recognize the game ball flowing down the unit to improve the interest of the player. (For example, JP-A-2015-131046).

  However, in the conventional gaming machine, in order to improve the interest of the player by allowing the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the guide route, the handling of each guide route tends to be complicated. This makes it difficult for the player to determine which of the guide routes the game ball is flowing down. Therefore, when the game value of the game ball flowing down the guide route is different, the player determines whether it passes through an advantageous (high game value is given) or disadvantageous (low game value is given) route. There is a problem that it becomes difficult to judge, and the interest of the player cannot be sufficiently improved by the game balls flowing down the route unit.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M1, the path unit is formed of a material that can transmit light and is disposed on the front side of the game area, and the back surface of the first guide path. A second guide route disposed on the side, the first guide route includes a first winning opening capable of entering a game ball, and the second guide route receives a game ball. Since a game ball that has a possible second prize opening and enters the first prize opening is given a higher game value than a game ball that enters the second prize opening, the first guide route It is possible to make it easier for the player to watch the game ball flowing down. In addition, when a game ball flows down to the first and second guide routes at the same timing, the second guide route including the second winning opening having a low game value is located on the back side of the first guide route. Since it is formed, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the first guide route having the first prize opening having a high game value. As a result, it is possible to make a player visually recognize a game ball to which a high game value is given, so that it is easy to improve the interest of the player.

  Note that the predetermined game value means, for example, a game ball that is paid out to the player as a privilege when the game ball is inserted into the first or second winning opening.

  In the gaming machine M1, the first guide route includes a first route for sending a game ball to one side in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front, and a game ball sent from the first route as a game ball on the first route. A second path for sending a game ball to the other side in the horizontal direction opposite to the guide direction of the first path, and a connection path for connecting one side of the first path and the second path in the direction of gravity. The path is formed in a semicircular arc shape toward the back side of the gaming area, and the gaming machine M2.

  According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M1, the first guide route is sent from the first route for sending the game ball to one side in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front, and from the first route. A second path for sending the game ball to the other side in the horizontal direction opposite to the guide direction of the game ball on the first path, and one side of the first path and the second path in the direction of gravity. A connecting path for connecting, and the connecting path is formed in a semicircular arc shape toward the back side of the gaming area, so that the first path and the second path are directly connected with the shortest distance. It is possible to increase the bent portion of the pitching path compared to the case where Thereby, the flow-down speed of the game ball can be gradually reduced at the bent portion, and it is possible to suppress the game ball from colliding with the inner wall of the connection path and swinging (shaking) in the connection path. As a result, the game balls can be smoothly flowed from the first route to the second route, so that the player can easily see the game balls sent from the first route to the second route.

  In addition, in order to prevent the game ball from colliding with the inner wall of the connection path and swinging (blurring), the inner space of the connection path is increased in the direction of the first path and the game ball is repeated on the inner wall of the connection path. Although it is conceivable to suppress the collision, in this case, the connection path protrudes in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front, as the internal space of the connection path is increased in the pitching direction of the first path. Accordingly, since the path unit in the front view is enlarged in the horizontal direction, it is difficult to fit the path unit in a predetermined range in the front view.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine M2, the connection path is curved in a semicircular arc shape toward the back side, so that the outer shape of the path unit in the front view can be kept within a predetermined range. Therefore, when the player visually recognizes the game ball flowing down the first guide route, the range visually recognized by the player can be kept within a predetermined range (the outer shape of the route unit). As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the path unit.

  In the gaming machine M2, the path unit is disposed on the other side of the gaming area in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front, and the connection path is formed on one side of the path unit in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front. Characteristic gaming machine M3.

  According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M2, the path unit is disposed on the other side in the horizontal direction of the gaming area in the front view, and the connection path is one of the horizontal directions of the path unit in the front view. Since it is formed on the side, the connection path can be formed at a position close to the player located in front of the game board. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball passing through the connection path. As a result, even if the game ball is sent to the back side through the connection path, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball passing through the connection path.

  In the gaming machine M2 or M3, the first prize opening is disposed between the first path and the second path in a front view.

  According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M2 or M3, the first winning opening is disposed between the first path and the second path in a front view. The first winning opening can be formed in the first guide path using the dead space formed with the two paths. Thereby, it can suppress that the external shape of the path | route unit in front view becomes large. As a result, the range in which the player can visually recognize the route unit can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the path unit.

  In any one of the gaming machine M2 to the gaming machine M4, the connection path includes a third winning opening through which a game ball can be inserted at two positions of the connection part between the first path and the second path, And a displaceable member displaceable at a position for closing or opening the prize winning opening, and the game ball entering the third winning prize opening is identical to the game ball entering the first winning prize opening. A gaming machine M5 that is given a gaming value.

  According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines M2 to M4, the connection path includes a third winning opening that allows a game ball to enter the two places of the connection part between the first path and the second path. A displacement member displaceable to a position for closing or opening the third prize opening, and a game ball entering the first prize opening, and a game ball entering the first prize opening; Since the same game value is given, it is possible to make it easier for a game ball sent from the first route to the connection route to enter one of the two third winning holes, and flow down the connection route. A game ball that makes it easier to give the player interest.

  That is, between the upstream third prize opening formed in the connection part of the connection path and the first path, and the downstream third prize opening formed in the connection part of the connection path and the second path. Since the connecting path can be arranged in the position, the third prize port is closed by the displacement member when the displacement member is repeatedly operated at a predetermined timing to the position for closing or releasing the third prize port. In this case, the game ball sent from the first path to the connection path is caused to flow down the connection path that curves to the back side, thereby securing a time until the third prize opening is released, and the third on the downstream side. It can be made to flow into the prize opening. As a result, the game balls sent to the connection path can be easily flown into the third winning opening, so that the game balls flowing down the connection path can easily give the player interest.

  In addition, since the two third prize winning openings are formed at the upstream and downstream ends of the connection path (the connection part between the first path and the second path), respectively, Sphere time can be lengthened. Therefore, it is possible to lengthen the time for providing the player with interest, and to easily enhance the player's interest.

  In any of the gaming machines M2 to M5, the gaming machine M6 is characterized in that a detection means for detecting the passage of the gaming ball is disposed outside the connection path.

  According to the gaming machine M6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines M2 to M5, the detecting means for detecting the passing of the gaming ball is disposed on the connection path, so that the game ball is blocked by the connection path. In this case, the detection of the detection means is continued, so that the gaming machine can detect an error. In addition, since the detection means is disposed outside the connection path, it is possible to suppress the game ball from being caught by the detection means as compared to the case where the detection means is disposed in the connection path. It is possible to prevent the sphere from clogging in the connection path.

  Furthermore, since the detection means is disposed outside the connection path where the rolling of the game ball is slowed down, it is possible to easily detect the number of game balls passing through the connection path. Therefore, when the number of balls detected by the detection means is larger than the number of balls to be won at the first winning port or the third winning port, it is possible to make the gaming machine recognize that fraud has been performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the fraud from continuing by notifying that the fraud has been performed by a warning sound or abnormal lighting.

  In the gaming machine M6, the connection path has an inner wall facing dimension in front view that is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball, and is opposed to the inner wall of the first path in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the game ball is sent. A gaming machine M7, which is set to be smaller than the interval dimension.

  According to the gaming machine M7, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine M6, the connection path is set such that the dimension between the opposing inner walls in the front view is set larger than the diameter of the gaming ball and is orthogonal to the direction in which the gaming ball is sent. Since the dimension is set to be smaller than the opposing dimension of the inner wall of the first path in the direction, when a game ball having a diameter larger than a predetermined dimension (a diameter larger than a specified value) is sent, the game ball remains in the connection path. Can be clogged. As a result, it is possible to suppress a game ball having a diameter larger than the standard from flowing down the path unit.

  In addition, since the detecting means for detecting the passage of the game ball is disposed in the connection path, when a game ball having a diameter larger than the standard remains in the connection path (clogged), the detection means causes the gaming machine to Can detect errors.

  In the gaming machine M6 or M7, the connection path is formed with an opening that opens at a predetermined value smaller than the diameter of the game ball on a radially outer side wall of the path that curves in a semicircular arc shape toward the back side. A gaming machine M7.

  According to the gaming machine M8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M6 or M7, the connection path is provided on the side wall on the radially outer side of the path curved in a semicircular arc shape toward the back side, and is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Since an opening that opens at the value of is formed, when a game ball having a diameter less than a predetermined dimension (a diameter smaller than the standard) is sent, the game ball is moved from the opening of the opening to the outside of the connection path. Can be discharged. As a result, it is possible to suppress a game ball having a diameter smaller than the standard from flowing down the path unit.

  Since the opening is formed on the radially outer side wall of the connection path, which is the rolling surface of the game ball flowing down the connection path, when the game ball flowing down the connection path has a smaller diameter than the standard, It is easy to discharge game balls.

  In the gaming machine M8, the game machine M8 is provided with a storage portion that protrudes from the outside in the radial direction of the connection path and is formed in a box shape that communicates with the opening, and the storage portion is set to a size that can store a game ball. The gaming machine M9 is formed in a detection range of the detection means.

  According to the gaming machine M9, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine M8, the gaming machine M9 includes a housing part that is formed in a box shape that projects from the radially outer side of the connection path and communicates with the opening. Since the ball is formed in a size that can be accommodated and is formed in the detection range of the detection means, a game with a diameter (a diameter smaller than the standard) of a predetermined size or less discharged from the opening of the opening to the outside of the connection path The sphere can be stored inside the housing. In addition, since the storage unit is formed within the detection range of the detection unit, the game ball stored inside the storage unit can be detected by the detection unit. As a result, when the game ball is stored inside the housing portion, the game machine can detect an error by the detection means.

  In any one of the gaming machines M1 to M9, a position where the inflow port of the game ball on the first guide route and the inflow port of the game ball on the second guide route are adjacent to each other in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front. A gaming machine M10 that is formed as follows.

  According to the gaming machine M10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines M1 to M9, the inlet of the gaming ball on the first guidance path and the inlet of the gaming ball on the second guidance path are: Since it is formed at a position adjacent in the horizontal direction in the front view, the player until just before the game ball flowing down the game area of the game board flows into the first guide route or the second guide route. Can be difficult to grasp. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to keep an eye on the game ball that flows down the game area and is sent to the path unit. As a result, it is easy to give interest to the player.

<Concept of the Invention Taking the Lower Displacement Unit 400 as an Example>
A base member having a game area on the front side; and a first member having a pitching path which is disposed on the front side of the base member and is formed as a space capable of sending game balls flowing down the game area. In the gaming machine, the first member is disposed on the base member in a state of being biased to the back side with respect to the base member by a fixing means fastened from the back side of the base member. A gaming machine N1 to play.

  Conventionally, a base member having a game area on the front side, a first member having a pitching path which is disposed on the front side of the base member and which is formed as a space capable of sending game balls flowing down the game area, (For example, JP, 2015-131046, A). According to this gaming machine, the first member includes an extending portion that extends on a plane parallel to the front surface of the base member on the side surface (base member and contact portion) on the base member side, and the extending portion By screwing a screw inserted through an opening formed in the base member into the base member, the screw is disposed in close contact with the front surface of the base member.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine, in order to arrange the first member in close contact with the front surface of the base member, it is essential to fasten the screw inserted from the front side of the first member to the base member. It is necessary to form an opening for inserting the first member in the first member. Here, in order to form the opening at a position that does not interfere with the pitching of the game ball, it is necessary to form the opening outside the pitching space of the game ball, and the extending portion where the opening is formed is outside the pitching space. Need to form. For this reason, an area that can be used as a pitching path is reduced with respect to the outer shape of the first member because the extending portion is formed on the outer edge of the first member, and the pitching path of the first member cannot be sufficiently increased. There was a problem.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine N1, the first member is disposed on the base member in a state of being biased to the back side with respect to the base member by the fixing means fastened from the back side of the base member. The first member and the base member can be arranged in close contact with each other by the biasing force acting on the first member toward the back surface. Further, since the first member is disposed on the base member by the fixing means inserted from the back side of the base member, a fastening allowance (an opening through which the fixing means is inserted) is formed on the front side of the first member. There is no need to form the extended portion to be formed. Therefore, the entire region can be used as a pitching path with respect to the outer shape of the first member in front view. As a result, the pitching path of the first member can be increased.

  In addition, since the fastening portion between the base member and the first member is not exposed to the front side, it is possible to prevent the fastening portion between the base member and the first member from being illegally removed, and the fastening portion is visually recognized by the player. It is possible to suppress the player's interest from being reduced.

  The gaming machine N1 includes a second member disposed on the back side of the first member via the base member, and the second member is inserted from the back side of the second member to the first member side. The gaming machine is fixed to the first member by the fixing means fixed to the first member, and is disposed on the base member with a predetermined gap from the first member. N2.

  According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine N1, the second member is provided on the back side of the first member via the base member, and the second member is on the back side of the second member. The first member is fixed to the first member by a fixing means that is inserted from the first member to the first member and fixed to the first member, and is disposed on the base member with a predetermined gap from the first member. When the second member and the second member are fastened, a force biased toward the back side can be applied to the first member by the predetermined gap. Moreover, since the force biased to the front side can be applied to the second member, the base member can be sandwiched between the first member and the second member. Accordingly, the first member and the second member are not easily displaced from the base member due to the clamping force between the first member and the second member, so that it is necessary to fasten the first member or the second member to the base member. The second member can be easily tightened accordingly.

  The predetermined gap between the first member and the second member is set to a value larger than 0 and smaller than the width dimension of the base member in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front. Thereby, when the 1st member and the 2nd member are fastened, the force which mutually attracts can be made to act on both the 1st member and the 2nd member by the gap.

  In the gaming machine N1 or N2, the base member includes a first opening formed at a position facing the first member, and the first member protrudes inside the first opening. The gaming machine N3 is characterized in that the first member is disposed on the base member by fastening the fixing means to the tip of the protruding portion.

  According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N1 or N2, the base member includes a first opening formed at a position facing the first member, and the first member includes the first opening. Since the first member is disposed on the base member by fastening the fixing means to the tip of the protruding portion, the fastening portion of the fixing means is disposed inside the first opening. Can be placed. Thereby, it can suppress that the fastening part of a fixing means is arrange | positioned in the front side of a base member, and can suppress that the fastening part of a fixing means is formed in the pitching space of a 1st member. As a result, it is possible to ensure the size of the ball feeding space of the first member.

  Moreover, since the fastening allowance (insertion depth) of a fixing means can be ensured by a protrusion part, it can suppress that the fastening of a fixing means remove | deviates from a 1st member. As a result, it is possible to easily increase the urging force to the back surface acting on the first member.

  In the gaming machine N1, a second member disposed on the back side of the first member via the base member, and a third member disposed between the first member and the second member facing each other. The base member includes a first opening formed at a position facing the first member, and the third member has a front-rear dimension in front view as viewed from the front of the base member. It is set smaller than the dimension in the front-rear direction, is disposed inside the first opening, the first member is disposed in close contact with the front side of the third member, and the second member is A gaming machine N4 that is fastened to the back side of the third member with a predetermined gap from the third member by the fixing means inserted from the back side of the base member.

  According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N1, the second member disposed on the back side of the first member via the base member is disposed between the first member and the second member facing each other. A base member is provided with a first opening formed at a position facing the first member, and the third member has a dimension in the front-rear direction in a front view of the base member. The dimension is set smaller than the dimension in the front-rear direction in the front view, disposed inside the first opening, the first member is disposed in close contact with the front side of the third member, and the second member is the base. Since the fixing means inserted from the back side of the member is fastened to the back side of the third member with a predetermined gap from the third member, the first member is attached to the back side via the third member. Power can be applied. Therefore, the urging force to the back side that acts when the second member and the third member are fastened by the fixing means can also be applied to the third member. As a result, it is possible to reduce the urging force acting on the contact portion of the first member with the base member, and it is possible to prevent the first member from being damaged.

  Moreover, the rigidity of the whole 1st member can be improved because a 3rd member closely_contact | adheres to the back side of a 1st member. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the whole ball of the first member from being elastically deformed by the urging force acting on the back surface acting on the first member, and the game ball feeding path formed on the first member from being deformed. As a result, the game ball of the first member can be stabilized.

  In the gaming machine N4, the third member is a part of a frame-like member disposed on the front side of the base member along the second opening formed in the base member. A gaming machine N5.

  According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N4, the third member is a part of the frame-like member disposed on the front side of the base member along the second opening that is opened in the base member. Therefore, the urging force acting on the third member can be used as the force for urging the frame-shaped member toward the back side. Accordingly, the frame-shaped member can be easily disposed in a state of being in close contact with the base member.

  Further, since the urging force to the back surface acting when the second member and the third member are fastened by the fixing means can be applied to the contact surface between the frame-like member and the base member, the first member The force acting on the contact portion with the base member can be reduced, and the first member can be prevented from being damaged.

  In the gaming machine N4 or N5, the first member is disposed on the back side of the first member, and is a drive for driving the displacement member. And the third member includes a third opening that is opened to a size that allows the driving means to be inserted, and the driving member is inserted into the third opening. A gaming machine that is disposed on the back side of one member.

  According to the gaming machine N6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N4 or N5, the first member is disposed on the back side of the first member, the displacement member capable of displacing the ball space of the gaming ball of the first member. Drive means for driving the displacement member, and the third member has a third opening that is opened to a size that allows the drive means to be inserted, and the drive means is inserted inside the third opening. In this state, the driving member can be covered with the third member. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unauthorized objects such as wires and piano wires inserted from the outside of the gaming machine from being accessed by the driving means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the driving means from being cheated.

  In the gaming machine N6, the second member protrudes toward the first member and communicates with the ball feeding space of the first member, and the game ball sent to the ball feeding space of the first member is used as the second member. A gaming machine N7, comprising a communicating portion capable of delivering a ball, wherein the communicating portion is disposed outside the third opening.

  According to the gaming machine N7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine N6, the second member protrudes toward the first member, communicates with the ball feeding space of the first member, and is sent to the ball feeding space of the first member. A communication portion capable of sending a ball to the second member is provided, and the communication portion is disposed outside the third opening, so that the third member can be disposed between the communication portion and the driving means. it can. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the magnetic force generated by the drive of the drive means to act on the communicating portion. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball sent to the communication part from being slowed down or stopped at the communication part due to the influence of the magnetic force of the driving means. It is possible to stabilize the game balls sent to the members.

  In the gaming machine N1, the base member includes a first opening formed at a position facing the first member, and the first member protrudes from at least two locations on the back side of the first member. A protrusion that protrudes from the back surface of the first member and passes through the first opening; and bends at an end of the first piece to be outside the first opening. A second piece extending toward the front, and a raised portion that rises on the front side of the second piece that overlaps the base member in front view, the first piece in front view of the base member The protruding dimension is set to a value larger than the width dimension in the front-rear direction, and the protruding portion has the same dimension as the width dimension in the front-rear direction in the front view of the base member, Is set small, and the bent tip of the second piece is By being fastened by serial fixing means to the base member, the gaming machine N8, wherein the first member is disposed in a state of being urged to the rear side with respect to the base member.

  According to the gaming machine N8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N1, the base member includes a first opening formed at a position facing the first member, and the first member is a back surface of the first member. A projecting portion projecting from at least two locations on the side, the projecting portion projecting from the back surface of the first member and passing through the first opening, and bent at the end of the first piece A second piece that extends toward the outside of the opening; and a raised portion that rises on the front side of the second piece that overlaps the base member in front view, the first piece in front view of the base member. The projecting dimension is set to a value larger than the width dimension in the front-rear direction, and the protruding part is set so that the dimension between the first member and the back surface is the same as or smaller than the width dimension in the front-rear direction of the base member in front view The bent tip of the second piece is fastened to the base member by the fixing means. As a result, the first member is disposed in a state of being urged to the back side with respect to the base member, so that it is not necessary to provide a portion for fastening fixing means (for example, a screw) on the back side of the first member. A space for sending game balls formed in the first member can be secured. As a result, the pitching space can be increased, so that the pitching direction of the game ball sent to the first member can be changed, and the pitching can be facilitated.

  Further, since the screwing portion of the fixing means can be used as the base member, it is possible to suppress elastic deformation of the ball feeding space of the first member by applying a biasing force to the screwing portion of the fixing means. As a result, it can be suppressed that the first member is elastically deformed, and the speed of the game ball sent from the ball feeding path of the first member is reduced.

  In the gaming machine N8, the base member includes a second opening formed in the front-rear direction in a front view, and a frame-shaped member disposed on the front side of the base member along the second opening. A gaming machine N9, wherein the first opening and the second opening communicate with each other.

  According to the gaming machine N9, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine N8, the base member has a second opening formed in the front-rear direction in a front view, and the front side of the base member along the second opening. Since the first opening and the second opening communicate with each other, the projecting portion is arranged inside the first opening using the opening of the second opening. Can be set. Therefore, since the arrangement | work operation | work to the base member of a 1st unit can be simplified, manufacturing cost can be reduced.

<Concept of the Invention Taking the Lower Displacement Unit 400 as an Example>
In a gaming machine, comprising: a base member; a displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the base member; and a driven member that is connected to the displacement member and is driven by the displacement of the displacement member. The displacement member is displaced between a first position and a second position, and an intermediate position between the first position and the second position. And a second displacement region for displacing the second position from the third position, and the driven member has the displacement member from the first position to the second position. By being displaced to the second position, the second driven position is driven from the first driven position, and the third driven position, which is an intermediate position between the first driven position and the second driven position, is displaced from the first driven position. A first driven area to be moved forward from the third driven position A second driven region for displacing the second driven position, wherein at least a part of the second displacement region and the first driven region are set to the same region, and the displacement member has the second displacement region. The gaming machine O1 is characterized in that, when being displaced, swinging in a direction other than the displacement direction of the displacement member is restricted by the restriction means.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a base member, a displacement member disposed on the base member so as to be displaceable, and a driven member connected to the displacement member and driven by the displacement of the displacement member, the driven by the displacement of the displacement member are provided. A gaming machine that displaces a member is known (for example, JP-A-2015-029849). However, in the conventional gaming machine, in order to restrict the displacement of the displacement member and the driven member and the swing of the driven member other than the driven direction, if the restricting means for restricting the swing of both the displacement member and the driven member is formed, There is a problem in that it has to be formed in two places, and accordingly, the shape becomes complicated and the manufacturing cost increases.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine O1, the displacement member includes a restricting means for restricting the swing of the driven member in a direction other than the driven direction, and the displacement member is displaced between the first position and the second position. A first displacement area for displacing a third position between the first position and the second position from the first position; and a second displacement area for displacing the second position from the third position. The displacement member is displaced from the first position to the second position, so that the second driven position is driven from the first driven position, and the intermediate position between the first driven position and the second driven position is changed from the first driven position. A first driven region that displaces the third driven position; and a second driven region that displaces the second driven position from the third driven position, and at least a portion of the second displaced region and the first driven region is When the displacement member is displaced in the second displacement region, the restriction means sets the same region. The direction of oscillation of the other direction of displacement of the position member is restricted, it is possible to restrict the swing of the driven member and the displacement member using the same part of the regulating means. Therefore, since the restricting means only needs to be formed in one place, the shape can be simplified correspondingly, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  Further, since the swinging of the driven member and the displacement member can be regulated using the same part of the regulating means, it is not necessary to form a driven member, a displacement member, and a regulating part respectively for one regulating means. Accordingly, the restricting means can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine O1, the restricting means is configured as a wall portion protruding from the base member toward the driven member, and the driven member is located at a position overlapping the at least part of the base member in a front view. A sliding displacement is possible on a plane parallel to the member, and a region overlapping the base member in a front view is gradually reduced with the follower from the first follower position to the second follower position. Game machine O2.

  According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine O1, the restricting means is configured as a wall portion protruding from the base member to the driven member side, and the driven member is at least one of the base members in a front view. Since it can be slidably displaced on a plane parallel to the base member at a position overlapping with the portion, the area overlapping the base member in front view is gradually reduced as the first driven position is moved to the second driven position. In the second driven position, an area in which the driven member protrudes outside the base member in front view is made larger than that in the first driven position. Therefore, it is difficult to restrict the swing of the driven member by the restricting means disposed on the base member as much as the driven member protrudes outside the base member. Accordingly, the driven member is more likely to swing toward the base member as it is driven from the first driven position to the second driven position. By restricting the swing of the displacement member connected to the driven member, The number of restriction points can be increased, and the driven member can be made difficult to swing. As a result, it is possible to suppress swinging when the driven member is disposed in the second driven region.

  In the gaming machine O2, the driven member is formed in a rectangular shape having a long side when viewed from the front, and has a rotation shaft that is rotatable on one side in the longitudinal direction, and is rotatably disposed on the base member. In the first driven position, the longitudinal direction of the driven member is substantially parallel to the horizontal direction. When the driven member is driven from the first driven position to the second driven position, the driven member rotates about the rotation shaft. The gaming machine O3 is characterized in that the other side of the driven member is arranged on the upper side in the gravitational direction than the rotating shaft.

  According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine O2, the driven member is formed in a rectangular shape with a long side when viewed from the front, and has a rotation shaft that can rotate on one side in the longitudinal direction. The driven member is disposed so as to be rotatable. In the first driven position, the longitudinal direction of the driven member is substantially parallel to the horizontal direction. When the driven member is driven from the first driven position to the second driven position, the driven member is centered on the rotation axis. Since the other side of the driven member rotates and is arranged on the upper side in the gravitational direction with respect to the rotation axis, the driven member rotates and rises in the longitudinal direction when driven from the first driven position to the second driven position. Therefore, as the driven member stands, the load of the driven member is likely to act toward the rotating shaft, and the driven member is likely to swing in the swinging direction of the driven member due to the load acting in the swinging direction of the driven member.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by restricting the swing of the displacement member connected to the driven member, the number of places restricted by the restricting means can be increased, and the driven member can be made difficult to swing. As a result, it is possible to suppress swinging when the driven member is disposed in the second driven region.

  Further, when the driven member is driven in the first driven region where the force to lift the other end of the driven member is required, the first position to the third position (first displacement region) where the restriction of the displacement member is released. Since it is necessary to displace the displacement member, the restriction member is released from the restriction by the restriction means in the first displacement region, so that the movement of the displacement member can be prevented from being delayed by the restriction means. Therefore, when the displacement force of the driven member is required, the displacement force of the driven member can be ensured.

  In the gaming machine O2 or O3, the driven member includes a protruding portion that protrudes at a position facing the wall portion, and a distal end of the protruding portion is brought into contact with the wall portion to displace the driven member. The displacement member is set to be displaceable in a space between the driven member and the wall portion facing each other in the second displacement region, and the displacement member is disposed in a facing direction between the driven member and the wall portion. A gaming machine O3 in which at least a part of the gaming machine overlaps with the driven member.

  According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine O2, the driven member includes a protruding portion that protrudes at a position facing the wall portion, and the tip of the protruding portion is in contact with the wall portion. The displacement of the driven member is restricted, and the displacement member is set so as to be able to displace a space between the facing of the driven member and the wall in the terminal displacement region, and at least the displacement member in the facing direction of the driven member and the wall. Since a portion overlaps the driven member, the displacement member can be prevented from tilting to the opposite side to the wall portion. As a result, the displacement of the displacement member in both axial directions can be restricted by the driven member and the wall, and the swinging can be suppressed when the displacement member is displaced.

  In the gaming machine O4, the side surface of the displacement member is brought into contact with the protruding portion of the driven member at the second driven position.

  According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine O4, the side surface of the displacement member is brought into contact with the protruding portion of the driven member at the second driven position, so that the displacement member is moved from the first driven position to the second driven position. When displaced to the position, the outer edge can be brought into contact with the protruding portion of the displacement member and stopped. Therefore, it is possible to combine the role of the protruding portion in contact with the wall portion to restrict the displacement of the driven member and the role of assisting the stopping operation of the displacement member. Therefore, a space in which the displacement member and the driven member can be displaced can be secured.

  In the gaming machine O5, when the driven member is pivotally supported at one end by the base member and the displacement member is disposed at the second driven position, the displacement direction of the connecting portion of the driven member with the displacement member Is set in a direction toward the axis of the displacement member.

  According to the gaming machine O6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine O5, when the driven member is pivotally supported at one end by the base member and the displacement member is disposed at the second driven position, the driven member is connected to the displacement member. Since the displacement direction of the portion is set in a direction toward the axis of the displacement member, it is possible to suppress the displacement member from being displaced by the load of the driven member when the load of the driven member acts on the displacement member. That is, when the displacement member is disposed at the second driven position, the relationship between the driven member and the displacement member can be a dead center relationship, and therefore, the displacement member can be suppressed from being displaced. As a result, it is possible to suppress the displacement member from being displaced by an external force other than the driving means at the second driven position.

  In the gaming machine O5, when the driven member has one end pivotally supported by the base portion and the displacement member is disposed at the second driven position, the displacement direction of the connecting portion of the driven member with the displacement member is The gaming machine O7 is characterized in that a direction in which a reaction force acting due to contact between the protruding portion and the displacement member is combined is set to a direction toward the axial center of the displacement member.

  According to the gaming machine O7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine O5, the driven member is pivotally supported at one end by the base member and the displaced member is disposed at the second driven position. Since the direction in which the displacement direction of the connecting portion and the direction in which the reaction force due to the contact between the projecting portion and the displacement member acts is set to the direction toward the axis of the displacement member, the load of the driven member is When acting on the displacement member, it can be suppressed that the displacement member is displaced by the load of the driven member. That is, when the displacement member is arranged at the second driven position, the direction of the force acting on the displacement member from the driven member is directed to the axis of the displacement member, so that the displacement member rotates about the shaft support portion. The generation of the force can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the displacement member from being displaced by an external force other than the driving means at the second driven position.

  In the gaming machines O1 to O7, the projecting portion is provided with a predetermined gap from the wall portion, and is brought into contact with the wall portion when the displacement member contacts. Machine O8.

  Here, if the projecting portion of the driven member and the wall portion are always in contact with each other, resistance is generated when the displacement member is displaced by the driving means, and it may be difficult to stably displace the displacement member.

  According to the gaming machine O8, the projecting portion is disposed with a predetermined gap from the wall portion, and is brought into contact with the wall portion when the displacement member abuts, so that the displacement member is in the second driven position. When displaced, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from swaying and to suppress the protrusion and the bulging portion from becoming resistance during the displacement.

<About the concept of the invention taking the lower displacement member 440 as an example>
A decorative member formed of a light transmissive material capable of transmitting light on the back side in a front view, and disposed on the back side of the decorative member in a state displaceable on a plane parallel to the front; A gaming machine comprising: a receiving unit capable of receiving and holding a game ball; and a light emitting unit disposed on a back side of the decorative member and capable of emitting light toward a displacement region of the receiving unit, The means is arranged on the back side of the receiving part or between the decorative member and the receiving part, and the light emitted from the light emitting means is received by the receiving part or a game ball received by the receiving part. A gaming machine P1 that is blocked or reflected to partially vary the amount of light emitted from the decorative member.

  Conventionally, a decorative member made of a light-transmitting material capable of transmitting light on the back side in a front view and a rear surface of the decorative member arranged in a displaceable manner on a plane parallel to the front. There is known a gaming machine provided with a receiving portion that can receive and hold a game ball (for example, JP 2010-166997 A). According to this gaming machine, it is possible to produce an effect of moving the game ball with the movement of the receiving unit by moving the receiving unit after receiving and holding the game ball in the receiving unit.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the receiving part is disposed on the back side of the decorative member, it is difficult for the player to recognize the receiving part and the position of the game ball received in the receiving part. Therefore, after the game ball is received (held) by the receiving unit, when the receiving unit moves, the player determines in which direction the game ball received (held) by the receiving unit and the receiving unit has moved. However, it is difficult for the player to grasp the position of the game ball received by the receiving unit.

  On the other hand, the gaming machine P1 includes a light emitting means that is disposed on the back side of the decorative member and can emit light toward the displacement region of the receiving portion, and the light emitting means is on the back side of the receiving portion or the decorative portion. The light emitted from the light emitting means is blocked or reflected by the game ball received between the member and the receiving portion and received by the receiving portion or the receiving portion, and the amount of light emitted from the decorative member is partially Therefore, the amount of light emitted from the decorative member positioned on the front side of the game ball received by the receiving unit or the receiving unit, and the amount of light emitted from the decorative member at other positions, By making it different, it is possible to make the player recognize that the receiving part or the game ball received by the receiving part is located on the back side of the part where the light quantity is different.

  More specifically, when the light emitting means is disposed on the back side of the receiving part, the light emitted from the light emitting means is blocked by the receiving part or the game ball received in the receiving part, thereby receiving the receiving part or the receiving part. It is possible to make the amount of light emitted from the decorative member on the front side of the game ball received in the darker than the other part of the decorative member. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize that the receiving part or the game ball received in the receiving part is located on the back side of the (dark) part where the amount of light emitted from the decorative member is small.

  On the other hand, when the light emitting means is disposed between the decorative member and the receiving part, the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the receiving part or the game ball received by the receiving part, so that the receiving part or The amount of light emitted from the decorative member on the front side of the game ball received in the receiving part can be made brighter than the other parts of the decorative member. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize that the receiving part or the game ball received in the receiving part is located on the back side of the (bright) part with a large amount of light emitted from the decorative member.

  In the gaming machine P1, the receiving part is formed below the center of the game ball held in the receiving part in the gravity direction, and the light emitting means is substantially the same as the center of the game ball held in the receiving part. The gaming machine P2 is characterized in that a light emitting portion is arranged at a height, and the light transmitting portion of the decorative member is formed at a position higher than the light emitting portion of the light emitting means.

  Here, in the structure in which the light emitted from the light emitting means is transmitted through the decoration member, and the light is reflected or blocked by the game ball received by the receiving part or the receiving part, the light emitted from the light emitting means is the game ball. In addition to irradiating not only the receiving part, light is easily reflected or blocked by the receiving part. Therefore, the brightness of the light formed by the difference in the amount of light emitted from the decorative member is affected by the receiving portion, so that the shape of the light and dark becomes different from the outer shape of the game ball, and the light amount of light is given to the player. It may be difficult to recognize that the game ball is arranged on the back side of the different parts.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine P1, the receiving part is formed below the center of the game ball held in the receiving part in the gravitational direction, and the light emitting means is provided in the receiving part. Since the light emitting part is arranged at substantially the same height as the center of the held game ball, and the light transmitting part of the decorative member is formed at a position higher than the light emitting part of the light emitting means, the light emitting means It is possible to suppress the brightness and darkness of the light formed by being emitted and blocked or reflected by the receiving part from being transmitted through the light transmitting portion of the decorative member and formed on the front side of the decorative member. Thereby, the bright and dark shape of the light formed through the light transmitting portion of the decorative member can be brought close to the outer shape (circular shape) of the game ball. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the game ball is placed in a portion where the amount of light is different.

  In the gaming machine P1 or P2, the receiving part is formed of a light transmissive material, the gaming machine P3.

  According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P1 or P2, the receiving part is formed of a light transmissive material, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected or blocked by the receiving part. Can be suppressed. Thereby, when the game ball is not received by the receiving part, it can suppress that the part from which the light quantity of light differs in the light transmissive part of a decoration member is formed. Therefore, when the game ball is not received by the receiving unit, the positioning operation and the return operation of the receiving unit can be performed without being noticed by the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from gazing at the decorative member during the positioning operation and the return operation of the receiving unit, and to focus the player only on the displacement operation of the receiving unit when it is desired to watch.

  In the gaming machine P2 or P3, the game machine P2 or P3 includes a connecting member that is formed of a non-light-transmitting material and is connected to one side in the displacement direction of the receiving portion, and the light emitting means is disposed on the back side of the displacement region of the receiving portion. The connecting member is set to have a larger dimension in the displacement direction of the receiving portion than the displacement distance of the receiving portion, and is disposed on the back side of the light transmitting portion of the decorative member. Along with this, the gaming machine P4 is projected or retracted between the light emitting means and the decorative member.

  According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P2 or P3, the gaming machine P4 includes a connecting member that is formed of a non-light-transmitting material and is connected to one side in the displacement direction of the receiving portion. The connecting member is disposed on the back side of the light transmitting portion of the decorative member, and is disposed on the back side of the light transmitting portion of the decorative member. With this displacement, the light emitting means and the decorative member are projected or retracted between the light emitting means and the decorative member, so that the light emission area from the decorative member can be changed with the displacement of the receiving portion. That is, the light irradiated from the light emitting means to the decorative member can be blocked by the connecting member, and the area blocking the light can be changed with the displacement of the receiving portion. As a result, the receiving portion and the connecting member are projected and displaced between the light emitting means and the decorative member so that the emission area of light emitted from the decorative member can be reduced. As a result, since the light emission surface of the decoration member is made small, it is possible to make the player easily recognize the receiving portion or the portion with a small amount of light emitted from the decoration member by the game ball received in the reception portion.

  In the gaming machine P4, the connecting member is a part of driving means for driving the receiving portion.

  According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine P4, the connecting member is a part of the driving means for driving the receiving portion, and therefore the role of transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the receiving portion, and the light emitting means The role of blocking the light emitted from can be shared by the connecting member. As a result, it is possible to secure a space for arranging the driving means for driving the receiving portion.

  In the gaming machines P1 to P5, the light emitting means is disposed on the back side of the displacement area of the receiving portion, and the receiving portion includes a displacement member that is displaceable from a game ball received in the receiving portion, and the displacement The member is formed of a non-light-transmitting material, and is displaceable at a position where it projects or retracts between the light emitting means and the decorative member, and when the game ball is received in the receiving portion, A gaming machine P6 that protrudes between the light emitting means and the decorative member.

  According to the gaming machine P6, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines P1 to P5, the light emitting means is disposed on the back side of the displacement area of the receiving part, and the receiving part is a gaming ball that is received by the receiving part. The displacement member is provided with a displaceable member, and the displaceable member is formed of a non-light-transmitting material and is displaceable at a position where the light emitting means and the decorative member protrude or retreat between the facing members. Is received, and the light emitting means and the decorative member protrude between the facing members, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means is blocked by the displacement member and the game ball only when the game ball is held in the receiving portion. Thus, the player can recognize the position of the game ball by the shadow (dark portion) formed on the decorative member. Therefore, when the game ball is not received by the receiving unit, the positioning operation and the return operation of the receiving unit can be performed without being noticed by the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from gazing at the decorative member at the wrong timing, and the player can play the game in a concentrated manner.

  In the gaming machines P1 to P5, the light emitting means is disposed on a front side of a displacement area of the receiving portion, and the receiving portion includes a displacement member that can be displaced by a game ball received in the receiving portion, and the displacement The member is formed of a non-light-transmitting material, and is displaceable at a position where it projects or retracts between the light emitting means and the decorative member, and when the game ball is received in the receiving portion, A gaming machine P7 that protrudes between the light emitting means and the game ball.

  According to the gaming machine P7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines P1 to P5, the light emitting means is disposed on the front side of the displacement area of the receiving portion, and the receiving portion is a gaming ball that is received by the receiving portion. The displacement member is provided with a displaceable member, and the displaceable member is formed of a non-light-transmitting material and is displaceable at a position where the light emitting means and the decorative member protrude or retreat between the facing members. Is received, the light projecting between the light emitting means and the game ball is projected, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the displacement member and the game ball only when the game ball is held in the receiving portion. Thus, it is possible to make the player recognize the position of the game ball in a bright part (a part with a larger amount of light than others) formed on the decorative member. Therefore, when the game ball is not received by the receiving unit, the positioning operation and the return operation of the receiving unit can be performed without being noticed by the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from gazing at the decorative member at the wrong timing, and the player can play the game in a concentrated manner.

  In this case, it is preferable that the displacement member is generally formed of a metal material whose light reflectance is higher than that of the resin material, or the outer surface is coated with metal. Thereby, it is possible to easily reflect the light applied to the displacement member, clarify the difference in the amount of light emitted from the decorative member, and make it easier for the player to recognize the position of the game ball.

  In the gaming machine P7, the displacement member is formed in a concave curved shape that is recessed on the back side.

  According to the gaming machine P8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P7, the displacement member is formed in a concave curved shape that is recessed on the back side, so that the light irradiated from the light emitting means to the displacement member is reflected to the decoration member side. In this case, the reflected light can hardly diffuse (light can be easily collected). Therefore, by collecting the light reflected from the displacement member and emitted from the decorative member, the difference in the amount of light can be clarified and the player can easily recognize the position of the game ball.

  In the gaming machines P1 to P8, the decoration member is formed to protrude in a convex shape in the irradiation direction of the light emitting means.

  According to the gaming machine P9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines P1 to P8, the decorative member is formed to protrude in a convex shape in the irradiation direction of the light emitting means, so that the light of the light emitting means transmitted from the decorative member is transmitted. Easy to diffuse. As a result, it is possible to enlarge a portion where the amount of light formed by the game ball received by the receiving unit is different and allow the player to recognize it, so that the player can recognize the position of the game ball received by the receiving unit. Easy to do.

  In the gaming machines 01 to P9, the light emitting means can emit at least two or more colors.

  According to the gaming machine P10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines P1 to P9, the light emitting means can emit at least two or more colors. Can be changed.

  For example, when the first region of the first light emission color and the second region of the second light emission color are divided, and the receiving portion is arranged in the first region, the expectation of jackpot Make it high. As a result, the position of the game ball held in the receiving unit can be easily watched by the player.

  In this case, since the range of the first region and the range of the second region can be changed only by changing the emission color, a plurality of effects forms are formed by changing the emission range. Can make it easier for players to entertain.

  Gaming machines A1 to A14, B1 to B8, C1 to C14, D1 to D8, E1 to E12, F1 to F10, G1 to G8, H1 to H8, I1 to I10, J1 to J9, K1 to K12, L1 to L10, A gaming machine Q1, wherein in any one of M1 to M10, N1 to N9, O1 to O8, and P1 to P10, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  Gaming machines A1 to A14, B1 to B8, C1 to C14, D1 to D8, E1 to E12, F1 to F10, G1 to G8, H1 to H8, I1 to I10, J1 to J9, K1 to K12, L1 to L10, A gaming machine Q2, wherein in any one of M1 to M10, N1 to N9, O1 to O8, and P1 to P10, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  Gaming machines A1 to A14, B1 to B8, C1 to C14, D1 to D8, E1 to E12, F1 to F10, G1 to G8, H1 to H8, I1 to I10, J1 to J9, K1 to K12, L1 to L10, A gaming machine Q3, wherein in any one of M1 to M10, N1 to N9, O1 to O8, and P1 to P10, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machine 11 Outer frame 13,25013,26013,27013,28013,29013,30013,31013 Game board 60,34060,42060 Base board (game board)
60a 1st opening part (2nd opening part)
60b Second opening 60c Decorative member (first decorative means)
34060d Concavity (first opening)
35060e Sliding hole (first opening)
63 General prize opening (inlet)
86 Center frame (frame-shaped member)
86b Projection (third member)
86b1 Opening 86b3 Detection device (detection means)
86b5 Standing part (folded piece)
100, 42100 Substrate box 150 General prize opening unit (plate member)
151 Main body (front member)
154, 10154, 25154 Decoration member (second decoration means)
151a, 26151a, 27151a, 28151a, 31151a Inclined surface (inclined part)
151b, 28151b, 29151b, 30151b Recess (recess)
151b2 Concave bottom surface 155 Protrusion 300, 15300, 15300, 16300, 17300 Rear case (back member)
301c First opening 301d Second opening 310, 14310, 15310, 16310, 18310, 19310, 20310, 22310, 23310, 24310 Engaging member (displacement member)
311, 14311, 15311, 16311, 18311, 22311, 24311 Elastic piece (first piece)
315, 14315, 15315 Operators 315a, 14315a Inclined surface (suppressing means)
24316 Engagement part (first protrusion)
320, 18320, 20320, 22320, 23320, 24320 Fixing member 322, 18322, 22332, 23332, 24332 Engagement part (engagement part)
24335 Housing portion 24335a Step portion (second protrusion)
19360, 24360 Manipulator 410 Base member 411e Curved wall (regulating means, wall)
411f Collection port (collection member)
422 Cam member (part of support structure, displacement member)
430 Link member (part of support structure, driven member)
4441g Engagement wall (insertion member)
11450 Decoration member 11451a Transmission part 460 Transmission mechanism 2464 Movable rack (reverse member)
465 Transmission gear (pinion gear)
466 rack (rack member)
11466e Shield plate (connection member)
467, 12467 Ball receiving part (displacement member, receiving part)
12467c 1st piece (main part)
12467d 2nd piece (displacement part)
12467e 3rd piece (shielding part)
11491 Control board (board member)
11491a Light emitter (light emitting part)
3468 First link member (reverse member)
470 Base member (base member)
471a Standing wall (wall)
481b1 Concave portion 491 Control board (light emitting means)
492 Displacement member (regulation means)
520 Base plate (second base member)
525 Rolling part (passage member)
525b Protrusion (resistance means)
540 Sorting member (regulating means, sorting means, integral member)
540a Leg (projection)
541 Restriction plate (first in / out part, sorting means)
542 Reservation plate (second haunting part, flow state changing means)
550, 13550, 32550, 34550, 35550, 36550, 37550 Special winning device (path unit)
551 first unit (first guide path, first member)
552 second unit (second guide path, second member)
561: First receiving part (first prize opening)
562 2nd receiving part (second prize opening)
563 Third Acceptance Department (Third Prize Winner)
564, 13564, 32564, 34564, 35564, 41564 Front plate (first member)
564a Guide part (projection wall)
564c, 41564c Second convex part (part of guiding means, convex part)
564b, 41564b 1st convex part (a part of 2nd guide means, 2nd convex part)
13564 Front plate (first member)
13564b 1st convex part (protrusion)
13564c 2nd convex part (protrusion)
571, 13571, 32571, 34571, 35571, 41571 Base plate (second member)
571i, 41571i Second recess (part of guide means, recess)
571h, 41571h 1st recessed part (a part of 2nd guide means, 2nd recessed part)
13571 v base plate (second member)
13571b 4th convex part (protrusion)
13571c 5th convex part (protrusion)
574a First receiving recess (third winning opening)
574b Second receiving recess (third winning opening)
34579, 35579 Supporting part (protruding part)
40581a1 opening 40581a2 housing portion 583a first solenoid (driving means)
583b First variable plate (variable plate, plate member)
584a Second solenoid (driving means)
584b Second variable plate (variable plate, plate member)
615 First communication path (branch path)
616 Second communication path (branch path)
622 Central opening (opening, insertion part)
634 2nd center opening (opening, insertion part)
7710 Displacement member 7713 Ball receiving member (receiving portion)
7720 Transmission member (transmission means)
7721 Rotating member (main body)
7722 Drive pin (pin part)
7723 Arm member 7723a Driven groove (sliding groove)
730 Left transmission member (rotation side transmission means, second member)
731 Transmission mechanism (one-way clutch mechanism)
731a Transmission gear (part of gear train)
731b Transmission gear (part of gear train)
731c Transmission gear (part of gear train)
731d Transmission gear (part of gear train)
731e, 7730 Load gear (load gear)
740 Right transmission member (displacement side transmission means, first member)
741 Rotating member (Crank member)
741a Protrusion (pin part)
742 Arm member 742b First sliding groove (sliding groove)
760 Box member (lid member)
770 Lid member (displacement member, first member)
780 Rotation restricting member (displacement restricting means)
800 Rotating body (rotating member, second member)
810 Base plate (fixing member)
811b Communication hole (opening)
812b Communication hole (second communication port)
820 LED base (light emitting means)
831 opening (first communication port)
870 Opening and closing member (displacement member)
871 Protrusion (part of displacement setting means, part of connecting means)
892 Sliding groove (part of displacement setting means, part of connecting means)
KR1 first pitching path (flowing path)
KR2 second pitching path (second branch passage)
KR3 third pitching path (first branch passage)
SP4 Biasing spring (Biasing means)
KM4 drive motor (drive means)
OW1 One-way clutch (engagement means)
SK1 main route (first route, part of the guide route)
SK2 main route (first route, second route, part of guide route, upstream route)
SK3 main route (second route, part of guide route, downstream route)
SK4 main route (part of guide route, detour)
SK5 main route (part of the guide route)
SK6 main route (part of the guide route)
SK7 main route (part of the guide route)
HK1 sub route (part of guide route)
HK2 sub route (part of guide route)
HK3 secondary route (part of guide route)
WK1 curved route (third route, part of guidance route, changed route)
SI shim member (adjustment means)

Claims (3)

In a gaming machine comprising a decorative member that is decorated on the front surface, and a receiving portion that is disposed in a displaceable state on the back side of the decorative member and that can receive and hold a game ball,
A light emitting substrate that is disposed on the back side of the displacement region of the receiving portion and has a plurality of light emitting portions that can irradiate light toward the decorative member side;
The decorative member includes a transmission part at least part of which is formed of a light-transmitting material,
A gaming machine characterized in that light emitted from the light emitting part is emitted to a game ball received by the receiving part, and is transmitted through the transmitting part and emitted to the front side of the decorative member.   The said receiving part is formed in the shape which receives the lower hemisphere of a game ball, The said light emission part is arrange | positioned in the position higher than the center of the game ball hold | maintained at the said receiving part. Game machines.   The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the receiving portion is made of a light transmissive material.

Images